Skip to main content

Full text of "Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia"

See other formats 


PROCEEDINGS 


ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES 


PHILADELPHIA. 


18  8  5. 


COMMITTEE    OF    PUBLICATION: 

Joseph  Leidy,  M.  D.,  Geo.  H.  Horn,  M.  D., 

Edw.  J.  Nolan,  M.  D.,  Thomas  Meehan, 

John  H.  Redfield. 

Editor  :  EDWARD  J.  NOLAN,  M.  D. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

ACADEMY    OF    NATURAL,    SCIENCES, 

LOGAN   SQUARE, 

18  86. 


Academy  op  Nattjkal  Sciences  of  Philadelphia, 

February  4, 1886. 


I  hereby  certify  tliat  printed  copies  of  the  Proceedings  for  1885  have  been 
presented  at  the  meetings  of  the  Academy,  as  follows  : — 


Pages 


9  to    24 
25  to    40 

41  to  88 
89  to  96 
97  to  112 
113  to  144 

i  is  to  m 

177  to  22  I 
225  to  240 
241  to  272 
273  to  304 
305  to  ■■■■■<-2 
353  to  384 
385  to  416 


March 

10, 

1885 

April 

7, 

1885. 

April 

21, 

1885. 

April 

28, 

1885. 

May 

12, 

1885. 

June 

9, 

1885. 

June 

23, 

L885. 

September  1,  1885. 
September  29, 1885. 
o.tober  6,  188 
October  13,  1885. 
November  L7, 18 
December  15,  1885. 
Januarj     19,  1886. 

EDWARD  J.  NOLAN. 

Recording  &  en  tary. 


philadelphia 
.   Kiloare,   Printer. 


LIST  OF  CONTRIBUTORS. 

With  reference  to  the  several  articles  contributed  by  each. 


For  Verbal  Communications  see  General  Index. 


PAGE. 

Bicknell,  Ernest  P.  and  Fletcher  B.  Dresslar.     A  Review  of  the  Species 

of  the  Genus  Semotilus 14 

Blatchley,  Willis  S.     On  the  American  Species  of  the  Genus  Umbra. . .     12 

A  Review  of  the  Species  of  the  Genus  Pimephales 63 

On  the  Genus  Aphredoderus 136 

Eastlake,  F.  Warrington.      Entomologia  Hongkongensis — Report  on 

the  Lepidoptera  of  Hongkong 81 

Eigenman,  Carl  H.  and  Morton  W.  Fordice.     A  Review  of  the  Ameri- 
can Eleotridinae. 66 

A  Catalogue  of  the  Fishes  of  Bean  Blossom  Creek,  Monroe  Co., 
Indiana 410 

Everman,   Barton  W.  and    Morton  W.   Fordice.     List  of  Fishes  col- 
lected in  Harvey  and  Cowley  Counties,  Kansas 412 

Gentry,  Alan  F.     Description  of  a  New  Species  of  the  Genus  Cyano- 

corax 90 

A  Review  of  the  Genus  Phrynosoma 138 

Hall,  Edward  A.  and  J.  Z.  A.  McCaughan.     A  Review  of  the  Ameri- 
can Genera  and  Species  of  Mullidse 149 

Hartman,  Wm.  D.,  M.  D.     Descriptions  of  new  Species  of  Partula, 

and  a  Synonymic  Catalogue  of  the  Genus ...   203 

Lewis,  H.  Carvill.     Marginal  Karnes 157 

Meehan,  Thomas.     Biographical  Notice  of  Henry  N.  Johnson 381 

Meek,   Seth  E.,   and  Edward  A.  Hall.     A  Review  of  the  American 

Genera  and  Species  of  Batrachiche 52 

Meek.  Seth  E..  and  Robert  Ntwland.     A  Review  of  the  Species  of  the 

Genus  Esox 367 

A  Review  of  the  American  Species  of  the  <  renus  Scorpiena 394 

Morris,  Charles.     On  the  Air-bladder  of  Fishes 124 

Attack  and  Defense  as  Agents  in  Animal  Evolution 

Rand,  Theo.  I).     Notes  on  the  Lafayette  Serpentine  Belt 407 


& 


8  LIST    OF    0ONTEIBUTOR8. 

PAGE. 

Scott.  W.  l'>.     Cervalcefi  Americanus,  ;i  fossil  Moose,  or  Elk,  from  the 

Quaternary  <>i'  Now  Jersey 181 

mer,  F.  Lamson.     A  Revision  of  the  North  American  Melicse ... .     40 

Scudder,  Samuel  II.     New  Genera  and  Species  of  Fossil  Cockroaches 

from  the  older  American  Rocks 34 

Notes  on  Mesozoic  Cockroaches 105 

Btejneger,  Leonhard.     Uemarks  on  Lanius  robustus  Baird,  based  on 

an  examination  of  the  Type  Specimen 91 

Strecker,    Eermann.     Description  of  a  new  Colias  from  the  Rocky 
Mountains,   and    of  an    Example    of   I'olymelianism    in   Samia 

Cecropia 24 

Description  of  new  Species  of  Lepidoptera 174 

-ninth.  Charles,  and  Prank  Springer.  Revision  of  the  Palaeo- 
crinoidea.  Pari  III.  Discussion  of  the  Classification  and  Rela- 
tions of  the  Rrachiate  C'rinoids,  and  conclusion  of  the  Generic 
Descriptions 225 


PROCEEDINGS 


ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES 


PHILADELPHIA. 


1885. 


January  6,  1885. 

Dr.  Chas.  Schaeffer  in  the  chair. 

Twentj'-six  persons  present. 

The  following  papers  were  presented  for  publication : — 

"  On  the  American  Species  of  the  Genus  Umbra,"  by  Willis  S. 

Blatchley. 

"A  Review  of  the  Species  of  the  Genus  Semotilus,"  by  Ernest 

P.  Bicknell  and  Fletcher  B.  Dresslar. 


January  13. 

The  President,  Dr.  Leidy,  in  the  chair. 

Twenty -four  persons  present. 

On  some  Parasitic  Worms  of  Birds. — Prof.  Leidy  stated  that 
Dr.  B.  H.  Warren,  of  Westchester,  much  interested  in  ornitho- 
logical pursuits,  had  submitted  to  his  examination  a  number  of 
parasitic  worms  obtained  in  the  preparation  of  specimens. 
Recently  he  had  sent  to  him  the  carcass  of  a  Snow  Bird,  Junco 
hyemalis,  in  which  he  reported  a  multitude  of  worms  filling  the 


10  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

thoracico-abdominal  cavity,  and '  extending  into  the  neck  and 
beneath  the  skin  of  the  breast  and  abdomen.  From  the  carcass, 
Beventy-two  worms  were  obtained,  of  which  two-thirds  were 
females  ranging  from  90  to  120  mm.  in  length;  the  rest  males, 
ranging  from  4n  to  55  nun.  From  the  abdomen  of  another  bird, 
Dr.  Warren  obtained  five  worms,  three  females  from  55  to  90 
mm.,  and  i  wo  males, 40  and  55  mm.  In  twenty-two  birds  examined 
b\  Dr.  Warren,  the  parasites  were  found  only  in  the  two  indicated. 
Flic  worms  appear  to  be  the  Filaria  obtusa  Rudolphi,  wdiich 
infests  the  Hirundo  rvstica,  and  other  species  of  European  Swal- 
lows. The  worms  of  the  Snow  Bird  reach  double  the  length  of 
those  of  the  Swallows,  but  in  other  characters  agree  with  the 
descriptions  of  F.  obtusa,  as  given  by  Diesing  and  Dujardin,  and 
also  with  the  figures  given  by  the  latter  (Hist.  Helminthes,  pi. 
iii).  except  that  it  is  uncertain  as  to  the  existence  in  our  speci- 
mens of  the  buccal  armature  represented  b}r  Dujardin.  The 
worms  are  translucent  white,  with  a  chocolate-brown  intestine 
and  white  uteri  and  testes.  The  caudal  extremity  is  obtuse, 
without  appendages,  and  in  the  male  possesses  two  spicules,  of 
which  the  longer  curved  one  is  F125  mm.  long,  and  the  shorter 
twisted  one  0*5  mm.  long.  The  ova,  containing  developed 
embryos,  are  0*045  mm.  long  and  0032  mm.  broad. 

Six  other  specimens,  apparently  also  pertaining  to  Filaria 
obtusa,  Dr.  Warren  obtained  from  the  abdominal  cavity  partly 
imbedded  in  the  wall,  of  a  Meadow  Lark,  Sturnella  magna.  Two 
are  females,  130  and  140  mm.  long  by  0'625  mm.  thick  ;  and  four 
are  males,  from  50  to  60  mm.  long  by  0\5  mm.  thick. 

Six  specimens  of  another  Filaria  were  obtained  from  the 
abdomen  of  a  female  Kingfisher,  Geryle  alcyoa.  The  species 
appears  to  be  the  Filaria  physalura  of  Bremser,  described  from 
specimens  obtained  from  several  species  of  Brazilian  Kingfishers. 
Five  of  the  worms  are  females,  ranging  from  one  foot  to  one  foot 
and  a  half  in  length,  and  from  one  to  one  and  a  half  millimetres 
in  thickness.  The  head  is  obtuse,  and  the  body  gradualby  tapers 
to  the  tail.  The  mouth  is  bounded  by  atpair  of  small  conical 
papillae.  The  five  females  measure,  respectively,  12,  13,  14,  17, 
and  18  inches.  A  single  male  is  35  mm.  long  by  0*625  mm.  thick. 
The  tail  is  incurved,  ends  in  a  minute  blunt  cone,  and  is  bialate, 
with  the  alee  short  and  quinquecostate.  The  length  of  the  alated 
portion  is  0-35  mm.  The  spicule,  partially  exserted,  is  recurved. 
The  specimens,  when  alive,  were  pink  in  color,  and  exhibited  a 
slender  chocolate-brown  intestine,  with  large  tortuous  white  uteri. 

From  the  thoracic  cavity  of  a  Gray  Snipe,  Gallinaqo  Wilsoni, 
Dr.  Warren  obtained  five  Flukes,  18  mm.  long,  by  4  mm.  broad. 
These  appear  to  be  Mono&tomum.  mutabile. 

Prom  a  Whippoorwill,  Antrostomus  vociferus,  Dr.  Warren 
obtained  four  worms,  two  females  of  18  mm.,  and  two  males  of 
12  mm.,  which  appear  to  be  Ascaris  subulata. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  11 

From  the  Pileated  Woodpecker,  Hylotomus  pileatus,  Dr.  War- 
ren obtained  ten  worms,  which  appear  to  pertain  to  the  Spiroptera 
quadriloba  Rudolphi,  the  female  of  which  was  originally  described 
from  specimens  found  in  the  Green  Woodpecker,  Picus  viridis. 
The  specimens  are  reported  as  having  been  found  in  the  abdomi- 
nal cavity.  Six  are  females  from  9  to  12  mm.  long  by  0*5  mm. 
thick,  and  four  males  7  and  8  mm.  long  by  0"375  mm.  thick. 
Body  white,  nearly  equally  attenuated  towards  both  ends;  trans- 
versely wrinkled,  and  anteriorly  minutety,  regularly  and  sharply 
annulated  ;  mouth  quadrilobate.  Tail  of  female  conical  subacute  ; 
tail  of  male  bialate,  sexcostate,  end  acute ;  spicules  two,  the 
longest  1*5  mm.  long,  the  shortest  0-5  mm.  long. 

The  following  were  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


12  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 


ON  THE  AMERICAN  8PECIE8  OF  THE  GENUS  UMBRA. 
BY  WILLIS  8.  BLATCHLEY. 

I  have  compared  numerous  specimens  of  mud-minnows  (Umbra 
Miiller),  from  different  parts  of  the  United  States,  with  a  view  of 
ascertaining  whether  more  than  one  species  exists  in  our  waters. 
I  find,  as  already  noted  by  Jordan  and  Bean,  two  types ;  the  one 
(limi)  inhabiting  the  waters  of  the  great  lake  region  and  north- 
westwardly;  the  other  (pygrtidea),  inhabiting  the  coastwise 
streams  from  Connecticut  to  North  Carolina. 

On  careful  comparison,  the  only  constant  difference  between 
these  forms,  which  I  am  able  to  appreciate,  is  the  coloration. 

The  true  Umbra  limi  is  dull  olive-green  in  color,  with  about 
fourteen  narrow,  pale,  transverse  stripes,  often  obscure  in  the 
young  ;  dark  bar  at  base  of  caudal  much  less  distinct,  and  lower 
jaw  always  paler  than  in  pygmaea. 

The  eastern  form,  which  I  regard  as  a  geographical  subspecies 
(  Umbra  limi  pygmaea),  is  much  darker  in  color,  with  about  twelve 
pale,  narrow  longitudinal  instead  of  transverse  stripes,  the  one 
beginning  at  upper  angle  of  opercle  being  double  the  width  of  the 
others  ;  dark  bar  at  base  of  caudal  very  distinct,  extending  over 
l£  scales  ;  lower  jaw  dark,  almost  black  in  adults. 

The  following  is  the  synonymy  of  each  of  the  two  forms  : — 

Umbra  limi. 

Hydrargyra  limi  Kirtland,  Bost.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  iii,  1840,  277 
(Northern  Ohio). 

Melanura  limi  Agassiz,  Amer.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  1855,  217  ;  Packard  & 
Putnam,  Amer.  Nat.,  Jan.,  1872  (Mammoth  Cave);  Jordan,  Man. 
Vert.,  1st  ed.,  1876,  253,  2d  ed.,  1878,  and  3d  ed.,  1880,  265  ;  Jordan, 
Rept.  Geol.  Surv.  Ind.,  1875,  33 ;  Jordan  &  Copeland,  Check  List 
Fresh  Wat.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1877,  143;  Jordan,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
ix,  1877,  49  (Ohio Valley);  Jordan,  Annals  N.  Y.  Acad.  Sci.,  i,  1877, 
\...  4,  103  (Suamico  R.,  Fox  R.,  Rock  R.,  Wisconsin  R.,  White  R.); 
Nelson,  Bull.  111.  Lab.  Nat.  Hist.,  i,  43 ;  Jordan,  Bull.  111.  Lab.  Nat. 
Hist.,  ii,  1878,  52  (Johnson  and  Union  Counties,  Illinois;  Crystal 
Lake,  McHenry  Co.,  111.);  Jordan  &  Brayton,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
xii.  L878,  84  (Ohio  and  111.  R.  Basins)  ;  Forbes,  Bull.  111.  Lab.  Nat. 
Hist.,  ii.  1878,  7H  (Food  of  Melanura  limi). 

Umbra  limi  Giinther,  Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  vi,  1866,  232;  Jordan, 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Philad.,  1877,  44  (Lakes,  Laporte  Co.,  Ind.; 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  13 

St.  Joseph's  R.,  Maumee  R.,  Tippecanoe  R  ,  White  R.);  Jordan, 
Rept.  Geol.  Surv.  Ohio,  iv,  1882,  912 ;  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Synopsis 
Fish.  N.  A.,  1883,  350. 

Hydrargyra  fusca  Thompson,  Nat.  Hist.  Vt.,  1842,  137  (Lake  Cham- 
plain). 

Hydrargyra  atricauda  De  Kay,   New  York  Fauna,  Fishes,  1842,  220 
(Lake  Champlain). 

Umbra  limi  pygmaea- 

Leuciscus  pygmceas  De  Kay,  N.  Y.  Fauna,  Fishes,  1842,  214  (Tappan, 

Rockland  Co.,  N.  Y.). 
Melanura  pygmcea  Baird,  Ninth  Smithson.  Rept.,  1855,  28  (New  Jersey 

Coast);   Jordan,   Man.  Vert.,  2d  ed.,   1878,   and  3d  ed.,  265,  1880  ; 

Jordan,   Annals  N.  Y.  Acad.  Sci.,  i,  1877,   No.  4,  104 ;   Jordan  & 

Brayton,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  xii,  1878,  84  (James  R.,  Neuse  R.). 
Umbra  pygmcea  Bean,  MSS.;   Jordan,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  x,  1874, 

53  (Delaware  R.);   Jordan,  Rept.  Geol.  Surv.  Ohio,  iv,  1882,  913; 

Bean,   Cat.  Fish.  International  Fish  Exhibition,  London.  1883,  84 

(Kingston,  N.  C). 
Fundulus  fuscus  Ayres,  Bost.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  iv,  1843,  296  (Brook 

Haven,  Long  Island). 
Melanura  annulata  Agassiz,   Amer.  Journ.  Sci.   Arts,  1855,  217  (not 

Exoglossum  annulatum  Rafinesque). 


1-1  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

A  REVIEW  OF   THE   SPECIES   OF    THE    GENUS  SEM0TILTJ8. 
BY  ERNEST  P.  BICK.NELL  AND  FLETCHER  B.  DRESSLAR. 

In  this  paper  we  give  the  synonymy  of  the  species  of  the  genus 
Semotilus,  with  an  analytical  key  by  which  they  may  be  distin- 
guished. 

The  specimens  which  we  have  studied  belong  to  the  Museum 
of  the  Indiana  Universit}',  most  of  them  having  been  collected 
by  Professor  David  S.  Jordan. 

SEMOTILUS. 

Semotilus  Rafinesque,  Ichtta.  Ohiensis,  1820,  49  (dorealia.) 
Leucosomus  Heckel,  "  Russegger's  Reise,  1841,  1042  "  (argenleus.) 
Cheilonemus  Baird,  Storer's  History  Fishes  Mass.,  1856,285  (pulchellus.) 

Analysis  of  Species  of  Semotilus. 

a.  Origin  of  dorsal  fin  about  midway  between  middle  of  orbit  and 
base  of  caudal ;  body  rather  robust,  especially  anteriorly. 
Vertebne  '  22  +  20  ;  the  interneural  spine  of  first  dorsal  ray 
inserted  between  fifteenth  and  sixteenth  neural  spines.     A 
distinct  black  spot  on  anterior  part  of  base  of  dorsal ;  color- 
ation dusky,  little  silvery,  rosy  below  in  spring. 
h.  Scales  comparatively  small,  crowded  anteriorly,  their  number 
about  10-54-1  ;  head  large  and  broad,  its  length  3^  in 
head  ;  maxillary  barbel  very  small,  indistinct  in  young 
specimens;  eye  small,  6  to  7  times  in  head  (in  adult); 
dusky  bluish  above,  paler  below ;  belly  white  ;  size  medium, 
reaches  a  length  of  about  a  foot.  atromaculatus.     1. 

66.  Scales  rather  large,  not  crowded  anteriorly,  their  number 
about  9-48-5  ;  head  3|  in  length  ;  maxillary  barbel  well 
developed  ;  eye  rather  large,  its  diameter  about  four  in 
head  in  young  ;  dark  bluish  above  and  on  upper  part  of 
Bides,  becoming  rather  abruptly  light  below  lateral  line; 
Bize  small,  attains  a  length  of  3  inches  or  more. 

tho?-eauianus.     2. 


1   In  Semotilus  atromaculatus.     This  character  has  not  been  verified  in  S. 
auianvi. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  15 

aa.  Origin  of  dorsal  fin  about  midway  between  nostril  and  base 
of  caudal ;  scales  not  crowded  anteriorhy,  their  number 
about  8-45-5  ;  body  rather  more  slender  ;  vertebrae  22+20  ; 
interneural  spine  of  first  dorsal  ray  inserted  between 
thirteenth  and  fourteenth  neural  spines  ;  head  moderate, 
about  4  in  length ;  maxillary  barbel  very  small ;  eye  high 
up,  about  4^  in  head  ;  color  bright  metallic  bluish  on  upper 
part  of  body,  becoming  white  below  ;  no  black  spot  on  base 
of  dorsal ;  size  comparatively  large,  reaching  a  length  of 
18  inches.  bullaris.     3. 

1.  Semotilus  atromaculatus.     Creek  Chub,  Horned  Dace. 

Cyprinus  atromaculatus   Mitchill,    American   Monthly   Magazine,    ii, 

1817,  324  (Wallkill  R.). 
Leuciscus  atromaculatus  De  Kay,  N.  Y.  Fauna,    Fishes,  1842.  210, 

plate  xxxii,  fig.  102;  Storer,   "Synopsis  Fishes  N.  A.,  1846,  409" 

(copied). 
Semotilus  atromaculatus  Girard,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1856, 

204. 
Leucosomus  atromaculatus  Cope,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1861, 

523. 
Semotilus  dorsalis  Rafinesque,  Ichth.  Ohiensis,  1820,  49  (Kentucky)  ; 

Kirtland,  "  Zoology  Ohio,  1838,  169;"  Kirtland,  Boston  Journal  Nat. 

Hist.,  1841,  vol.  iii,  181,  345. 
Leuciscus  dorsalis  Storer,  '-Synopsis  Fishes  N.  A.,  1846,  411." 
Semotihis  cephalus  Rafinesque,  Ichth.  Ohiensis,  182  >,  49  (Kentucky); 

Kirtland,  Zoology  Ohio,  1838,  169  ;    Kirtland,  Boston  Journal  Nat. 

Hist.,  1840,  vol.  iii,  345. 
Leuciscus  cephalus  De  Kay,   N.  Y.   Fauna,  Fish.,  1842,    214;    Storer, 

"Synopsis  Fishes  N.  A.,  1846,  409." 
Leuciscus  storeri  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poissons,  vol.  xvii, 

1844,  319  (N.  Y.). 
Leuciscus  iris  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poissons,  1844,  vol. 

xvii,  255,  plate  496  (N.  Y.  and  Carolina). 
Leuciscus pulchtlloides  Ayres,  "Proc.  Boston  Society  Natural  History, 

1849,  vol.  iii,  157." 
Leucosomus  pallidusGira.nl  Proc.  Acad.   Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1856,  190 

(Antelope  Creek,  Arkansas);  Girard,  Pacific  R.  R.  Rept.,  1858,  251, 

PI.  61,  fig.  6;    Girard,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1858,  251-2 

(Antelope  Creek,  Arkansas). 
Semotilus  pallidus  Cope,  Cyprinidae  Penn.,  1866,  364  (Platte  R.),  (no 

description);  Jordan,  Manual  Vertebrates,  lsted,  1876,  279. 
Leucosomus  incrassatus  Girard,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1856, 

251-2  (Near  Choctaw  Agency);    Girard,  Pacific  R.  R.  Rept.,  1858, 

252,  PI.  61,  fig.  1  (Near  Choctaw  Agency). 


16  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

Semotilus speciosus  Giiard,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.,  1856,  204  (Sweet 
Water  R.,  Nebraska);  Girard,  Pacific  R.  R.  Rept.,  1858,  283,  PI.  61, 
fig.  11  (Tributary  of  Platte  River). 

Semotilus  macrocephalus  Giiard,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.,  1856,  204 
(Fort  Pierre). 

Leucosomus  macroeephalus  Girard,  Pacific  R.  R.  Rept.,  1858,  252,  PI. 
61,  fig.  1  (Fort  Pierre). 

Semotilus  hammondi  Abbott,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.,  1860,  474 
(Kansas). 

Semotilus  corporalis  Putnam,  Bulletin  Museum  Comparative  Zoology, 
1863,  8  (synonymy  only,  not  Cyprinus  corporalis  Mitchill);  Cope, 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.,  1865,  85  (Platte  River);  Cope,  Cyprinidae 
Penn.,  1866,  363,  PI.  10,  fig.  2 ;  Storer,  History  Fishes  Mass.,  1867, 
256  (near  Williams  College,  no  description) ;  Cope,  Hayden's  Geo- 
logical Survey,  Wyoming,  for  1870, 1872,  442,  472  (Platte  R.);  Abbott, 
"American  Naturalist,  April,  1870,  12"  (Delaware  R.);  Jordan, 
Indiana  Geological  Survey,  1874,  223 ;  Jordan,  Manual  Vertebrates, 
1st  ed.,  1876,  277  ;  Jordan,  Bulletin  Buffalo  Society  Nat.  Hist.,  1876, 
94;  Jordan,  Annals  Lyceum  Nat.  Hist.  N.  Y.,  1877,  327,  362,  368,  369, 
376  (Ocmulgee  R.,  Etowah  R.,  White  R.,  Ind.);  Jordan,  Annals  N. 
Y.  Acad.  Sciences,  vol.  i,  No.  4,  107,  1877  (Housatonic  R.,  Hudson 
R.,  Cayuga  Lake,  Genesee  R.,  Delaware  R.,  L.  Erie,  L.  Michigan, 
Fox  R.,  Rock  R.,  Peckatonica  R.,  Wisconsin  R.,  Suamico  R.,  White 
R.,  Rlinois  R.,  Ohio  R.,  Kentucky  R.,  Rock  Castle  R.,  Cumberland 
R.,  Salt  R.,  Powell's  R.,  French  Broad  R.,  Etowah  R.,  Ocmulgee 
R.);  Jordan  &  Brayton,  Bulletin  U.  S.  National  Museum,  1878,  xii, 
26,  38,  54,  68,  80,  86  (Saluda  R.,  Ocmulgee  R.,  Clinch  R.,  French 
Broad  R.,  Rock  Castle  R.,  Alabama  Basin,  James  R.,  Neuse  R., 
Santee  R.,  Gt.  Pedee  R.,  Tennessee  R.,  Ohio  R.,  Illinois  R.,  and 
other  streams);  Hay,  Proc.  U.  S.  National  Museum,  1880,  512  (Ca- 
tawba Creek,  Miss.);  Jordan,  Manual  Vertebrates,  1880,  ed.  iii,  304; 
Hay,  Bulletin  U.  S.  Fish  Commission,  1882  (Big  Black  R.,  Miss.); 
Jordan,  Rept.  Fishes  Ohio,  1882,  863  ;  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Synopsis 
Fishes  N.  A.,  1882,  221 ;  Bean,  Catalogue  Fishes  exhibited  Inter- 
national Exhibition,  London,  1883. 

Leucosomus  corporalis  Giinther,  Catalogue  Fishes  British  Museum, 
1868,  269  (Susquehanna  R.,  Tioga  Co.,  N.  Y.;  Lake  Erie). 

Habitat. — Dakota  to  Western  Massachusetts,  South  to  Georgia 
and  Indian  Territory,  especially  abundant  in  the  Mississippi 
Valley.  It  is  found  especially  in  small  brooks  in  the  grass  and 
weeds. 

The  specimens  before  us  are  from  near  Bloomington,  Indiana  ; 
Clifty  Creek,  Ind.;  French  Broad  River,  Tenn.;  Rock  Castle 
River,  Ky.;  Rolling  Fork,  Ky.;  Wolf  Creek,  Ky.  We  adopt  for 
this  species  the  specific  name  atromaculatus,  instead  of  corporalis, 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  11 

by  which  it  has  been  usually  known,  because,  in  our  judgment, 
the  original  Cyprinus  corporalis  of  Mitchill  is  Semotilus  bul- 
laris,  as  was  formerly  stated  by  Dr.  Abbott,  while  the  present 
species  is  evidently  Mitchill's  Cyprinus  atromaculatus. 

The  following  is  Mitchill's  account  of  Cyprinus  corporalis  : — 
"  Cyprinus  corporalis.  This  fish  is  called  by  the  Dutch,  Corpo- 
ralen,  or  corporal,  and  inhabits  the  Hudson  in  the  neighborhood 
of  Albany,  the  Wallkill  through  its  whole  extent,  and  the  western 
streams  and  lakes  from  Wood  Creek  to  the  Oneida  Lake,  and  so 
on. 

"  The  length  of  a  middle-sized  individual  is  about  thirteen 
inches,  and  the  girth  five ;  though  he  frequently  grows  larger. 

"  The  head  is  smooth,  roundish,  thick,  and  without  scales.  The 
body  is  thickly  covered  with  scales ;  on  the  back,  more  especially 
between  the  head  and  the  dorsal  fin,  the  hue  is  dusky ;  on  the 
belly  it  is  uniformly  white,  and  on  the  sides  the  forepart  of  each 
scale  is  covered  with  a  blackish  film  or  pigment. 

"  Mouth  toothless,  and  of  a  moderate  gape ;  tongue  distinct, 
but  not  free  ;  gill-covers  smooth. 

"  The  tail  is  forked  ;  the  lateral  line  bends  downward,  and  ends 
in  the  middle  of  the  tail. 

"  The  dorsal  fin  is  near  the  middle  of  the  back,  and  consists  of 
seven  rays  ;  the  caudal  fin  is  composed  of  nineteen  rays  or  there- 
about. 

"  The  anal  has  seven,  the  ventral  seven,  the  pectorals  have 
thirteen,  the  branchiostegous  membrane  has  three  rays,  the  dorsal 
and  caudal  fins  are  tipped  with  a  blackish  tinge. 

"  Takes  the  hook,  if  baited  with  dough,  when  let  down  through 
holes  in  the  ice,  at  midwinter,  in  the  Hudson  at  Albany ;  flesh 
eatable,  but  rather  soft  and  coarse." 

2.  Semotilus  thoreauianus. 

Semotilus  thoreauianus  Jordan,  Bulletin  U.  S.  National,  Museum,  x, 
63,  1877  (Flint  River)  ;  Jordan,  Bulletin  U.  S.  National  Museum, 
1878,  xii,  43  (Flint  River) ;  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Synopsis  Fishes  N.  A., 
1882,  221  (Flint  River). 

The  specimens  of  this  species  in  the  Indiana  University 
Museum  were  taken  by  Professors  Gilbert  and  Swain,  near 
Tuscaloosa,  Alabama. 

The  original  types  were  from  the  Flint  River  ;  no  others  have 
been  reported. 


18  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

This  species  is  very  close  to  S.  atromaculatus,  differing  chiefly 
in  the  size  of  the  scales. 

3.  Semotilus  bullaris.     Fall-fisb,  Roach,  Dace. 

Cyprians  lullaris  Rafinesque,  American  Monthly  Magazine,  1817,  120 

(Hudson  R). 
Semotilus  bullaris  Jordan,  Annals  N.  Y.  Acad.  Sciences,  vol.  i,  No.  iv, 

1877,  108  (Connecticut  R.,  Delaware  R.,  Susquehanna  R.);  Jordan, 

Manual  Vertebrates,  1878,  304  ;    Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Synopsis  Fishes, 

N.  A.,  1882,  222. 
Cyprinus  corporalis  Mitchill,  American  Monthly  Magazine,  i:,  1817, 

289  (Hudson  R.). 
Leuciscus  corporalis  De  Kay,  N.  Y.  Fauna,  Fishes,  1842,  213  (copied). 
Semotilus  corporalis  Abbott,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat  Sci.  Phil.,  1861,   152, 

154  (Trenton). 
Leuciscus  argenteus  Storer,  Rept.  Fishes  Mas6.,  1839,  90  (Worcester 

County). 
Leucosomus  argenteus  Heckel,  "Russegger's  Reise,  1841." 
Semotilus  argenteus  Putnam,  Bulletin  Museum  Comparative  Zoology, 

1863,  8  (synonymy  only);  Jordan,  Manual  Vertebrates,  1876,  278. 
Leuciscus  pulchellus  Storer,  Rept.  Fishes  Mass.,  1889,  91  (Walpole, 

Mass.);  De  Kay,  N.  Y.  Fauna,  Fishes,  1842,  208;  Cuvier  &  Valen- 
ciennes, Hist.  Nat.  Poissons,  xvii,  320,  1844. 
Leucosomus  pulchellus  Girard,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.,  1856,  189. 
Cheilonemus  pulchellus  Storer,  History  Fishes  Mass.,  1867,  286. 
Leucosomus  pulchellus  Giinther,   Catalogue  Fishes   British   Museum, 

1868,  vii,  268  (Montreal;  Rangely  Lake,  Me.:  Delaware  River). 
Leucosomus  chrysoleucus  Heckel,  "Russegger's Reise,  1841  "  (not  Cypr. 

chrysoleucus  Mitchill). 
Leucosomus  nitidus  De  Kay,   N.  Y.   Fauna,  Fishes,    1842,   209  (Lake 

Champlain). 
Hybognathus  nitidus  Girard,   Proc.   Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.,  1856,  210 

(Lake  Champlain). 
Leuciscus  chrysopterus  De  Kay,  N.  Y.  Fauna,  Fishes,  1842,  211  (New 

York  Bay). 
Leucosomus  rhotheus  Cope,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci,  Phil.,  1861,  523  (Sus- 
quehanna River). 
Semotilus  rhotheus  Cope,  Synopsis  Cyprinidse  Penn.,  I860,  362  ;  Jordan, 

Manual  Vertebrates,  1876,  278. 
Leucosomus  cataractus  (Baird  MSS.),   Cope,  Proc,  Acad.  Nat.   Sci. 

Phil.,  1861,  523  (Susquehanna  River). 
Squalius  hyalope  Cope,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil,,  1864,  280  (Cone- 

stoga  River). 

Habitat. — Southern  Canada  and  Eastern  United  States,  as  far 
south  as  Chesapeake  Bay, 

The  specimens  examined  by  us  are  from  Massachusetts. 


1885.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  19 


January  20. 
Mr.  George  W.  Tryon,  Jr.,  in  the  chair. 
Thirty-two  persons  present. 

The  death  of  Prof.  Wm.  Wagner,  a  member,  was  announced. 

A  paper  entitled  "  Description  of  a  new  Colias  from  the  Rocky 
Mountains,  and  of  an  example  of  Pohmelianism  in  Samia 
Cecropia,"  by  Hermann  Strecker,  was  presented  for  publication. 

A  New  Locality  for  Beegerite. — Prof.  George  A.  Koenig  placed 
on  record  the  determination  of  Beegerite,  from  the  "  Old  Lout," 
San  Juan  County,  Colorado.  This  species  was  described  in  1 881  by 
the  speaker  as  6PbS,Bi2S3,  from  Park  Count}'  Colorado.  It  crys- 
tallizes in  isometric  cubo-octohedrons,  with  orthorhombic  habitus. 
Only  one  specimen  was  then  known  to  be  in  existence.  Since,  Dr. 
F.  Genth  has  examined  a  specimen,  massive,  from  Summit  County, 
Colorado,  which  is  Beegerite,  in  which  15  per  cent,  of  lead  is 
replaced  by  as  much  silver.  Some  months  ago  the  speaker 
received  among  other  bismuth  minerals  from  the  Old  Lout  Mine, 
Colorado,  a  small  specimen  of  a  fine  granular,  lead-gra}1"  mineral, 
mixed  with  chalcopyrite,  pyrite,  barite,and  quartz.  After  a  pre- 
liminary examination,  revealing  the  peculiar  composition  of  the 
substance,  about  1*2  gram,  were  selected  with  great  care,  but  it 
was  not  possible  to  exclude  all  pj^rite  and  chalcopyrite. 

Of  this  the  analysis  gave  : 


Bi 

=     19-35 

Pb 

=     45-87 

Ag 

=       9-98 

Cu 

=       112 

Fe 

=       2-89 

S 

=     lfi-39 

Insoluble 

=       0-12 

95-72 

If  copper,  iron,  and  the  corresponding  amount  of  sulphur  are 
eliminated  as  chalcopyrite  and  pyrite,  the  ratio  between. (PbiAg2) 
and  Bi  is  as  5'74  :  2,  which,  in  connection  with  the  loss  of  4  per 
cent,  in  the  analysis,  is  near  enough  to  the  ratio  :  6  :  2  to  admit 
of  no  doubt  that  this  mineral  is  Beegerite,  now  known  from  three 
localities  in  Colorado. 


January  27. 
Dr.  W.  S.  W.  Ruschenberger  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-eight  persons  present. 


20  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

The  deaths  of  Thomas  Clyde,  a  member,  and  of  Friedrich  Ritter 
v.  Stein,  a  correspondent,  were  announced. 

The  following  minute  was  adopted  : 

The  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia  learns  with 
profound  regret  of  the  death  of  Prof.  Wm.  Wagner,  one  of  its 
earliest  members,  whose  generous  encouragement  of  scientific 
pursuits  has  done  much  to  foster  a  study  of  the  natural  sciences 
in  this  country. 

Observations  on  Tenacity  of  Life,  and  Regeneration  of  Excised 
Parts  in  Lumbricus  terrestris. — Miss  Adele  M.  Fielde  remarked 
that  the  observations  recorded  before  the  meeting  held  Jan.  6, 
were  made  in  the  laboratory  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences 
of  Philadelphia.  The  temperature  had  been  nearly  constant  at 
about  60°,  and  varied  only  from  55°  to  65°.  The  observations 
began  Nov.  29, 1884.  No  worm  lived  more  than  a  few  hours  when 
exposed  to  the  air.  Worms  kept  in  water,  without  food,  the 
water  changed  daily,  lived  from  eleven  to  fourteen  days.  It 
made  no  apparent  difference  in  the  duration  of  life,  whether  the 
worms  were  kept  in  darkness  or  in  light. 

Eight  portions  of  worms,  consisting  of  from  twentj'  to  thirt3r 
segments,  taken  from  the  posterior  end,  had  lived  in  earth  during 
the  forty  days  of  observation,  and  though  plump,  healthful,  and 
with  blood  of  its  usual  redness,  showed  no  signs  of  growth  at 
either  end.  Between  the  segments,  however,  new  half-segments 
had  been  inserted,  after  a  method  which  ladies  in  sewing  call  a 
gusset.  Some  of  these  worms  had  five  such  insertions,  wrhile  no 
similar  half-segments  were  observed  in  many  worms  that  were 
examined,  in  order  to  ascertain  whether  such  half-segments 
existed  in  whole  and  healthy  worms.  These  new  half-segments 
appeared  at  irregular  distances  apart,  between  the  old  seg- 
ments, on  the  sides  of  the  portions  of  worms,  and  appeared  to  be 
a  manner  of  growth  not  heretofore  observed  in  earthworms 
regenerating  exsected  parts. 

Nine  worms  from  which  the  five  anterior  segments  were  excised 
Nov.  29,  had  been  kept  in  moist  earth,  with  which  comminuted 
leaves  of  oak  and  maple  were  mingled.  The  brain  of  the  earth- 
worm lies  in  the  third  segment,  and  the  first  suboesophageal 
ganglion  in  the  fourth  segment,  so  that  the  brain  and  oesophageal 
collar  were  removed  by  the  excision.  All  these  worms  were 
living,  and  a  part  of  them  had  wholly  regenerated  the  excised 
segments. 

Ten  worms,  which  at  the  same  date  lost  five  anterior  and  from 
twenty  to  thirty  posterior  segments,  were  all  alive  and  were 
regenerating  the  excised  portions. 

Eight  worms,  which  at  the  same  date  lost  their  posterior  seg- 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  21 

ments  to  within  ten  behind  the  clitellum,  were  all  living  and  had 
regenerated  some  portion  of  the  excised  part. 

The  manner  of  regeneration  of  the  excised  anterior  five  seg- 
ments had  been  : — 

1.  A  union  of  the  outer  coat  of  the  body  with  the  lining  of  the 
alimentary  canal,  roughly  healing  the  wound. 

2.  A  prolongation  of  these  coats,  forming  a  translucent  white 
tube  which  could  be  protruded  from  and  retracted  into  the  pro- 
jecting border  of  the  wound.  This  tube  was  at  first  but  a  third 
or  a  half  the  diameter  of  the  body. 

3.  The  formation  of  the  lip  or  proboscis  on  the  superior  side 
of  the  end  of  the  tube. 

4.  Segmentation  proceeding  from  the  anterior  end  of  the 
regenerated  part  backward,  until  the  normal  number  of  segments 
were  reproduced. 

5.  The  deposit  of  coloring  matter  in  the  epidermis  of  the  new 
segments,  and  their  enlargement  to  the  diameter  of  the  old  seg- 
ments. 

Reference  was  made  to  the  observations  published  by  Dr. 
Biilow  in  the  "Archiv  fur  Naturgeschichte,"  1882. 

Miss  Fielde  now  further  reports  having  found  a  completely 
regenerated  brain,  oesophageal  collar,  and  suboesophageal  ganglion, 
all  of  normal  size  and  in  normal  site,  in  earthworms,  which  had 
fifty-eight  da}rs  previous  been  decapitated  at  the  fifth  segment. 
The  worms  had  been  kept  in  earth,  at  a  temperature  of  about  60°. 

The  precautions  taken  to  ensure  accuracy  in  these  observations 
had  been,  first,  a  thorough  examination  of  all  the  earth  into 
wbich  the  decapitated  worms  were  put,  making  it  certain  that  the 
earth  contained  no  other  worms  than  the  decapitated  ones; 
secondly,  care  that  nothing  containing  earthworms  was  at  any 
time  added  to  the  earth  in  which  the  decapitated  worms  were 
kept;  thirdl}',  repeated  examinations,  at  intervals  of  less  than  a 
week,  of  all  the  earth  holding  the  decapitated  worms,  and  the 
careful  removal  of  minute  worms  bred  therein  ;  fourthly,  frequent 
counting  of  the  decapitated  worms,  with  examination  under  a 
lens,  the  evident  wound  constantly  showing  that  the  worms  under 
observation  were  the  individuals  decapitated.  The  paler  color  of 
the  new  portions  also  distinguished  these  worms  from  others. 

Forty  days  after  decapitation,  the  excised  segments  had  been 
regenerated,  so' as  to  present  an  external  appearance  of  complete- 
ness, but  no  brain  was  visible  in  dissection.  Forty-five  days  after 
decapitation  the  blood-vessels  were  seen  ramifying  on  the  com- 
pletely regenerated  pharynx  in  a  normal  manner,  but  no  brain 
was  found.  In  one  of  the  worms  dissected  on  the  fifty  -eighth 
day  after  decapitation,  the  suboesophageal  ganglion  and  the 
oesophageal  collar  were  found  to  be  complete  and  of  the  normal 
size,  but  the  brain  lobes  were  of  but  half  the  normal  size,  and 
were  separated  by  an  interspace  of  the  width  of  one  of  the  lobes. 
The  blood-vessels  united  normally  on  the  median  line   between 


22  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

the  lobes.  Another  worm  decapitated  at  the  same  date,  though 
of  apparently  weaker  vitality,  had  regenerated  all  the  excised 
portions,  and  showed  a  completely  formed  brain,  with  lobes  of 
the  normal  size  in  contact. 

Messrs.  Burnett  Landreth  and  J.  Addison  Campbell,  and  Mrs. 
Cornelius  Stevenson,  were  elected  members. 


February  3. 
Mr.  George  W.  Tryon,  Jr.,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-seven  persons  present. 


February  10. 

Rev.  H.  C.  McCook,  D.D.,  Vice-President,  in  the  chair. 

Twenty-two  persons  present. 

The  Internal  Cambium  Ring  in  Gehemium  sempervirens. — 
Dr.  J.  T.  Rothrock,  at  the  meeting  of  the  Botanical  Section  held 
February  9,  called  attention  to  the  internal  cambium  ring  in  the 
stem  of  Gehemium  sempervirens.  It  might  well  be  designated 
as  the  inner  cambium.  His  attention  was  attracted  by  the  fact 
that  in  a  stem  of  three-eighths  of  an  inch  diameter,  the  pith  was 
actually  less  in  diameter  than  in  a  twig  of  a  quarter  the  size  of  the 
stem.  Microscopic  examination  showed  that  in  the  larger  stem 
there  were  ordinarily  four  or  more  points,  at  which  a  well-defined 
swelling  curved  inward  from  the  circumference  of  what  should 
have  been  the  pith-cavit}'.  These  swellings  resolved  themselves 
when  closely  examined  into  : — 

1.  Toward  the  centre  an  imperfectly  defined  membrane,  resemb- 
ling cuticle,  which  was  not  always  present. 

2.  One  or  more  rows  of  large  cells  like  the  parenchyma  we  find 
under  the  epidermal  layer. 

3.  Several  poorly  defined  layers  of  smaller  cells,  such  as  often 
mark  the  limits  of  growth  in  bark. 

4.  The  frequent  presence  of  bast  fibres  or  of  sclerenchyma 
cells. 

5.  An  evident  layer  of  thin-walled,  square  cells,  closely  resemb- 
ling, though  somewhat  smaller  than  those  of  the  external  cambium. 
They  showed  signs  of  division,  which  indicated  that  they  were 
still  a  living  tissue. 

These  facts  explained  at  once  why  the  pith  was  constantly 
being  encroached  upon  until  it  at  length  almost  disappeared. 
The  medullary  rays  dipped  down  through,  and  widened  out,  in 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  23 

this  inner  cambium,  inwardly,  just  as  they  did  outwardly,  in  the 
usual  form  of  cambium  layer.  He  also  remarked  that  bast  fibres 
had  long  been  known  to  exist  in  the  pith  of  Tecoma  radicans, 
and  in  this  case  something  like  an  inner  cambium  would  be  found, 
though  it  is  more  obscure.  Sambucus  Canadensis  also  exhibited  in 
the  very  large  stems  a  smaller  pith  than  in  those  of  moderate  size. 
In  this  there  was  nothing  comparable  to  the  inner  cambium.  He 
also  remarked  that  for  the  past  two  winters  his  attention  had 
been  called  to  the  presence  of  considerable  quantities  of  chloro- 
phyll in  the  pith  of  Lycium  vulgare.  This  was  not  confined  to 
the  smallest  stems,  but  was  found  also  in  those  of  over  a  quarter 
of  an  inch-  in  diameter,  and  where  of  course  a  considerable  belt 
of  hard  wood  was  found  between  the  pith  and  the  outer 
zone,  where  chlorophyll  is  expected.  It  was  also  observed  in 
Lycium  that  the  chloroph3'll  was  not  in  the  form  of  bodies  but 
diffused  in  character,  as  it  is  said  to  be  in  some  infusorians.  In 
Lycium  the  cells  of  the  pith  showed,  in  winter,  abundance  of 
protoplasm  which  had  the  nucleus  on  one  side  and  very  striking 
bands  extending  thence  across  the  cell  to  the  further  side. 

The  following  was  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


24  PROCEEDINGS  OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 


DESCRIPTION  OF  A  NEW  COLIAS    FROM  THE   ROCKY  MOUNTAINS,  AND 
OF  AN  EXAMPLE  OF  POLYMELIANISM  IN  SAMIA  CECROPIA. 

BY  HERMANN   STRECKER. 

Colias  elis. 

9  expands  1|  inches  ;  with  the  exception  of  the  primaries  being 
slightly  more  pointed  apically ,  of  the  same  shape  as  Hecla,  of  which 
species  it  may  probably  be  a  form,  as  it  resembles  it  closely  in 
many  particulars. 

Head,  collar  and  antennae  dark  pink  or  rosy;  body  black  with 
greenish  hairs. 

Upper  surface.  Primaries  bright  orange,  with  blackish  exterior 
margin  of  moderate  width  until  towards  the  costa  where  it  widens 
considerably  ;  this  margin  encloses  a  row  of  seven  ovate  lemon- 
yellow  spots  or  dashes  which  are  rounded  interiorly  and  some- 
what pointed  exteriorly  ;  the  two  nearest  the  costa  are  much  the 
smallest,  the  others  are  nearly  uniform  in  size,  though  var}ing  a 
trifle  from  each  other  in  shape.  A  black  discal  spot,  small  and 
somewhat  linear  in  one  example,  and  nearly  round  and  of  fair 
size  in  another.  Costa  and  fringe  deep  pink.  Secondaries  are 
orange,  somewhat  obscured  with  black  atoms,  a  submarginal  row 
of  yellow  spots,  not  quite  as  conspicuous  as  those  of  primaries, 
exterior  to  these  at  the  apex  and  the  apical  half  of  costal  and 
exterior  edge,  the  wing  is  blackish  ;  a  good-sized  deep  orange  or 
red  lead-colored  discal  spot,  round  in  one  example  and  in  another 
somewhat  oblong,  or  rather  the  shape  produced  by  a  smaller  round 
spot  being  joined  and  partly  merged  into  a  larger  one ;  fringe 
same  color  as  on  primaries. 

Under  surface.  Primaries  orange  on  disk,  with  greenish 
exterior  border  of  same  width  as  the  blackish  border  of  upper 
surface  ;  also  greenish  along  the  costa  ;  edge  of  costa  and  fringe 
deep  pink.  A  black  discal  spot  with  pale  centre.  Secondaries 
green,  the  inner  two-thirds  darker,  leaving  an  exterior  border 
of  the  same  color  but  a  shade  paler.  Costa  and  fringe  as  in 
primaries ;  discal  spot  silvery  white,  ringed  with  deep  pink. 

Albinous  9  form.  Upper  surface  white  of  greenish  yellow  tinge, 
the  disk  of  primaries,  especiall}'  towards  the  inner  margin  faintly 
suffused  with  a  very  pale  ochraceous  tint.  On  one  example  the 
blackish  border  and  the  discal  spots  are  about  the  same  as  in  the 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  25 

orange  form,  on  another  the  spots  enclosed  by  the  border  of 
primaries  are  reduced  to  mere  streaks  and  on  the  secondaries  there 
are  no  traces  of  the  border  at  all.  In  all  examples  of  both  forms 
there  is  a  powdering  of  dark  scales  on  the  base  of  wings  and  along 
the  inner  margin  of  secondaries  interior  to  the  abdominal  fold. 
Under  surface  as  in  the  orange  form,  except  that  the  orange  of 
superiors  is  replaced  by  yellowish  white,  and  the  green  of  all 
wings  is  somewhat  paler. 

Taken  by  Capt.  Gamble  Geddes  at  an  elevation  of  10,000  feet, 
on  the  summit  of  "  Kicking  Horse  Pass,"  in  the  Rock}-  Moun- 
tains, between  Alberta  Territory  and  British  Columbia,  at  the 
boundary  between  the  United  States  and  the  British  possessions, 
about  300  miles  north  of  Montana. 

It  is  an  act  of  temerity  to  describe  a  Colias  as  new  under  any 
circumstances  in  these  da}rs,  and  doubly  so  to  describe  it  from 
examples  of  the  female  sex  alone,  yet  I  have  no  apprehension 
that  the  above  insect  will  not  stand  as  a  valid  species. 

Capt  Geddes  took  about  fifteen  examples,  all  females,  nine  of 
the  orange  form,  and  about  six  of  the  white;  but  nothing  that 
could  possibly  be  considered  as  the  male.  The  other  examples  of 
Colias  captured  in  the  same  locality  were  lemon-colored  males 
and  females  probably  of  one  species,  and  allied  to  Pelidne,  but 
bearing  no  kinship  to  the  above.  The  most  remarkable  and  dis- 
tinctive feature  of  this  G.  elis  is  the  white  female  ;  as  the  species, 
I  am  positive,  will  be  found,  whenever  the  male  is  discovered,  to 
belong  to  a  group  in  which  albinous  females  are  unknown,  its 
congeners  being  Hecla,  Hela  Standingeri  and  Eogene,  species  in 
which  no  instance  of  the  pale  female  has  yet  been  known  to 
occur ;  all  of  which  are  found  only  at  great  altitudes  or  at  the 
North  Polar  Regions  and  are  in  the  male  distinguished  from  the 
other  red  or  orange  species  by  the  absence  of  the  mealy  kidney-  or 
oval-shaped  spot  on  the  upper  surface  of  the  costa  of  secondaries 
near  the  body. 

It  is  curious,  in  regard  to  these  albinous  females  of  the  Coliades, 
that  in  one  group  thej-  should  occur  in  one  species  only,  whilst 
in  another  there  should  be  but  one  species,  C.  Meadii,  found  also 
at  great  elevation,  in  which  they  do  not  occur ;  and  in  yet  another 
species,  G.  Vaidierii,  of  the  same  group  with  the  last  mentioned 
Meadii,  found  in  Chili,  the  female  is  always  white,  such  a  thing 
as  a  red  one  being  Entirely  unknown. 
3 


26  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

An  Example  of  SamiaCecropia  having  a  Fifth  Aborted  Wing. — 
T  have  lately  received  from  Mr.  Ph.  Laurent,  of  Philadelphia, 
an  example  of  Samia  Cecropia,  bred  by  him  from  a  cocoon,  having 
an  aborted,  or  rather  the  portion  of  a  third  primary.  It  is  a  male 
of  the  ordinary  size,  expanding  about  5|  inches,  and  is  one  of 
those  smoky  varieties  in  which  the  red  portion  of  the  transverse 
bands  on  wings  is  very  much  narrowed.  The  right  primary  and 
both  secondaries  are  normal  in  shape  and  marking.  The  left 
primary  is  in  length  from  base  to  apex  exactly  the  same  as  is  the 
right ;  but  in  width  from  inner  angle  across  to  the  costa,  it  is  -j3ff 
inch  less ;  the  markings  are  the  same,  allowing  for  a  little  con- 
densing owing  to  the  difference  in  the  width.  The  venation  is 
normal  in  all  wings ;  the  left  primary  is  also  somewhat  narrower 
at  the  base  where  it  joins  the  body ;  the  inner  margin  is  in  exact 
line  with  that  of  its  fellow,  thus  causing  the  wing  at  costa,  where 
it  joins  the  thorax,  to  be  further  in  from  the  collar  and  head  than 
its  opposite. 

The  third  primary,  or  rather  portion  of  a  primary,  emerges 
from  the  side  of  the  collar,  and  consists  mainty  of  the  costal  and 
subcostal  nervures,  a  small  part  of  the  median  nervure,  and  a 
strip  of  wing  about  a  quarter  of  an  inch  wide ;  but  the  latter  was 
much  curled  and  twisted  in  drying,  and  does  not  show  this  width 
fully.  Its  length  is  about  two-thirds  that  of  the  normal  wing 
with  which  it  runs  parallel,  but  it  is  in  no  way  visibly  connected 
therewith. 

This  form  of  monstrosity  is  apparently  of  exceedingly  great 
rarity.  I  have  heard  of  only  three  other  instances — those 
recorded  by  Prof.  Westwood  in  the  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  Lond., 
1879,  pp.  220,  221,  in  which  three  diurnals  are  described,  each 
possessing  a  third  aborted  right-hand  secondary;  In  one  of 
them,  an  example  of  Gonepteryx  Bhamni,  the  normal  right  wing 
is  much  less  than  the  left,  the  same  with  the  second  example,  a 
Vanessa  Urticse,  leading  to  the  conclusion  in  those  cases  as  with 
the  Cecropia,  that  the  abnormal  wing  was  produced  at  the  expense 
of  the  normal. 

In  the  two  cases  just  cited,  the  extra  wing  is  joined  at  the  base 
of  the  costa  to  the  proper  wing;  in  the  third  case  mentioned  by 
Prof.  Westwood,  it  is  apparent^  a  streak  or  strip,  as  it  were, 
on  the  inferior  surface  of  right  secondary,  distinguished  from  the 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  27 

rest  of  the  wing,  or  the  part  thereof,  hy  the  difference  in  color 
and  marking  alone. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  in  the  case  of  the  three  diurnals,  that 
the  extra  wing  is  always  a  right  secondary,  whilst  in  the  Cecropia 
it  is  a  left  primary. 


28  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 


February  IT. 
Mr.  Thomas  Meehan,  Vice-President,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-five  persons  present. 


February  24. 
Mr.  Jacob  Binder  in  the  chair. 
Twenty -one  persons  present. 

A  New  Fresh-water  Sponge  from  Nova  Scotia. — Mr.  E.  Potts 
described  a  form  recently  identified  by  him  as  follows : — 

Hetekomkykma  Pictouensis,  n.  sp. 

Sponge  light  green,  even  when  dry,  massive,  encrusting ;  texture 
very  compact ;  spicules  non-fasciculated,  persistent ;  surface 
mostly  smooth. 

Gemmules  very  scarce,  spherical,  crust  thick. 

Skeleton  spicules  cylindrical,  short,  robust,  rounded  or  abruptly 
terminated  ;  entirely  spined,  spines  conical  at  the  centre  of  the 
spicule,  elsewhere  generally  curving  forward,  or  towards  each 
extremity.  Rounded  terminations  of  spicules  covered  with  short 
spines,  though  frequentlj'  a  single  large  spine  or  acute  termination 
is  seen  at  one  or  both  extremities. 

Dermal  spicules  absent  or  undiscovered. 

Birotulatesof  the  longer  class  surrounding  the  gemmules,  rather 
numerous,  one-half  longer  than  the  others  ;  shafts  conspicuously 
fusiform  or  largest  at  the  centre,  where  are  frequently  found  one 
or  more  long  spines.  Their  rotules  consist  of  three  to  six  irregu- 
larly placed  rays,  recurved  at  the  extremities. 

Birotulates  of  the  shorter  class  abundant  and  compactly  placed 
around  the  gemmule;  shafts  mostly  smooth,  though  sometimes 
bearing  a  single  spine  ;  irregularly  cylindrical,  but  rapidly  widen- 
ing to  support  the  rotules,  which  are  large,  umbonate,  nearly  flat, 
and  fiiu'ly  lacinulate  at  their  margins ;  occasionally  bearing 
spines. 

Measurements. — Skeleton  spicules  0-0075  inch  long,  by  0-00075 
inch  thick;  length  of  long  birotulates  0"0021  inch;  of  short  biro- 
tulates  00012  inch  ;  diameter  of  disc  of  latter  0*0009  inch. 

Habitat. — On  submerged  wood,  etc. 

Locality — Collected  only  by  or  for  Mr.  A.  H.  McKay,  B.  A., 
B.  S.,  of  i'lctou,  Nova  Scotia,  from  several  lakes  upon  the  water- 
shed of  that  region. 


1885.] 


NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA. 


29 


This  beautiful  and  interesting  sponge  was  first  discovered  by  Mr. 

McKay,  during  the  summer 
of  1884.  At  that  time  its 
novelty,  as  indicated  by  its 
unusually  robust,  entirely 
spined  skeleton  spicules  was 
easily  recognized,  but  the 
absence  of  gemmules  at  that 
season  precluded  the  deter- 
mination of  its  generic  rela- 
tions, and  it  has  continued 
unnamed.  During  the  last 
week  of  December,  however, 
a  further  search  was  re- 
warded by  the  finding  of 
other  "specimens  upon 
sticks  pulled  up  through  a 
break  made  in  the  ice,"  and 
amongst  these  a  few,  and 
but  a  few  gemmulae  have 
now  been  discovered. 
These  suffice  to  place  it  clearly  within  the  genus  Heteromerjenia, 
near  H.  Ryderii,  while  the  peculiarities  of  its  birotulates  distin- 
guish it  from  that  or  any  other  species, 

Mr.  Potts  called  attention  to  its  green  and  apparently  living 
and  growing  condition,  during  midwinter,  in  that  northern  lati- 
tude, as  indicating  that  like  Spongilla  aspinosa,  of  the  New 
Jersey  swamps,  this  species  also  is  an  "evergreen,"  continuing  its 
life  in  the  normal  state  throughout  the  year,  and  for  this  reason 
not  needing  to  form  "  protected  gemmules  "  in  such  abundance 
as  do  other  species. 

At  the  suggestion  of  Mr.  McKay,  to  whose  enthusiastic  search 
we  owe  its  discovery,  the  local  specific  Pictouensis  has  gladly 
been  given  to  this  species. 

The  following  were  elected  members  : — 

Charles  Harrod  Vinton,  M.  D.,  Henry  Leffmann,  M.D.,  S.  Frank 
Aaron  and  Edw.  Lona;streth. 


A.  A.  A.  Skeleton  spicules ;  B.  Long  birotulate 
C.  C.  Short  do.    Magnified  250  diameters. 


March  3. 

The  President,  Dr.  Leidy,  in  the  chair. 

Twenty-seven  members  present. 

The  following  papers  were  presented  for  publication  : — 
"A  Review  of  the  American  Genera  and  Species  of  Batrachidoe," 
by  Seth  E.  Meek  and  Edw.  A.  Hall. 


30  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

"A  Review  of  the  Species  of  the  Genus  Pimephales,"  by  Willis 
S.  Blatchley. 

The  deaths  of  Mrs.  S.  R.  Barton,  a  member,  and  of  John  Gwynn 
Jeffries,  a  correspondent,  were  announced. 

Spicate  Inflorescence  in  Cypripedium  insigne. — Mr.  Thomas 
Meehan  referred  to  a  specimen  on  the  table  of  Cypripedium 
insigne,  an  orchid  from  the  cooler  parts  of  the  East  Indies,  which 
had  a  spike  with  two  flowers  and  other  undeveloped  buds,  the 
normal  character  being  a  one-flowered  scape.  These  departures 
from  the  normal  form  afforded  valuable  lessons,  though  frequentby 
passed  over  as  mere  freaks  of  nature.  A  spicate  inflorescence  was 
a  common  characteristic  in  allied  species.  From  the  illustration 
before  us,  we  might  infer  that  the  one-flowered  kinds  were  species 
in  which  the  power  to  develop  a  proper  spike  had  been  arrested. 
We  might  expect  to  see  attempts  at  this  form  of  inflorescence  in 
Cypripedium  acaule  of  our  own  country. 

A  very  important  lesson  from  these  occasional  departures  had 
but  recently  the  attention  given  to  it  that  it  properly  deserved, 
and  that  was  that  whenever  any  particular  plant  departed  from 
its  normal  form,  other  characters  came  into  existence,  which,  in 
a  separate  plant  would,  and  often  did,  obtain  for  the  new  depar- 
ture the  rank  of  a  species.  In  this  instance,  the  second  flower  on 
the  spike  was  different  from  the  lower  and  normal  one  in  the 
upper  segment  of  the  perianth  (sepals)  having  a  regular  outline. 
In  the  normal  form  it  was  so  crumpled  as  to  present  a  trilobed 
appearance.  In  the  normal  form  the  labellum  was  so  elongated 
as  to  be  three  times  the  length  of  the  column.  In  the  upper 
flower  the  labellum  was  but  double  the  length,  giving  it  a  some- 
what globular  appearance.  There  were  other  variations  that 
formed  a  combination  of  characters  quite  sufficient  to  mark  a 
species  if  they  were  constantly  produced  in  a  separate  state.  Why 
could  not  this  rare  occurrence  become  a  continuous  one,  and  thus 
a  new  species  be  formed — created,  we  may  say — out  of  an  older 
one  ?  There  can  be  no  reason.  We  may  call  this  a  freak  of 
nature,  but  it  could  not  have  occurred  without  that  combination 
of  circumstances  which  we  call  law.  We  have  no  warranty  for 
saying  that  a  law  which  has  operated  to  produce  a  departure  in  a 
solitary  instance  like  this,  might  not  have  a  more  permanent 
power  at  some  other  time.  Nor  is  there  any  warranty  for  believing 
that  a  law  that  has  operated  as  we  see  here  on  one  plant,  might 
not  operate  on  a  hundred,  or  on  all  the  plants  of  a  district,  or 
.vcu  on  plants  in  separate  districts  widely  separated  from  each 
other. 

In  a  paper  by  himself  published  in  the  Proceedings  of  the  Troy 
Meeting  of  the  American  Association  for  the  Advancement  of 
Science,  "  On  the  introduction  of  species  bj-  sudden  leaps, "  as  well 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  31 

as  elsewhere,  he  had  given  illustrations  of  the  sudden  appearance 
of  identical  forms  in  widely  separated  localities.  If  we  may  gene- 
ralize from  these  facts,  as  we  seemed  almost  warranted  in  doing, 
we  need  not  be  always  looking  for  the  links  supposed  to  be  missing, 
which  the  belief  in  the  hypothesis  of  development  by  slow  modi- 
fications compelled  us  to  search  for,  nor  need  we  be  reduced  to 
the  only  alternative  of  believing  that  all  new  species  sprang 
from  one  parent,  which  formed  a  centre  of  distribution  in  each 
particular  case.  A  whole  species  might  be  called  into  existence 
in  the  shape  of  hundreds  of  individuals  or  in  numerous  centres, 
if  only  a  law  that  we  know  from  these  instances  can  operate 
suddenby  and  exceptionally  should  continue  regularly  to  act. 
Such  a  belief  would  tend  materially  to  remove  difficulties  in  the 
way  of  theories  of  evolution,  that  now  prevented  a  full  accept- 
ance thereof.1 

If  we  can  conceive  that  a  suddenly  introduced  and  yet  perma- 
nently acting  force  was  introduced  to  operate  on  some  lower 
beings,  the  difficulty  might  be  removed.  It  seemed  to  him  that  in 
some  palaeontological  fields  there  are  evidences  of  rapid  evolution 
at  certain  periods,  and  of  greater  permanency  at  others,  and  this 
could  only  be  by  the  introduction  of  a  force  equal  to  the  eruer- 
genc3r,  as  in  this  sudden  case  brought  to  the  notice  of  the 
Academy  above. 

It  would  be  an  interesting  study  to  endeavor  to  trace  the  laws 
that  operated  in  these  changes.  In  this  study  we  must  leave 
behind  us  impressions  which  we  have  imbibed  from  the  idea  of 
mere  freaks,  hybrids,  a  return  to  primitive  forms,  and  other  mere 
guesSes  with  which  scientific  literature  abounds.  On  the  table  before 
us,  he  observed,  are  the  recent  Proceedings  of  the  Ro\-al  Society 
of  Tasmania,  in  which  is  an  account  of  a  remarkable  change  in 
a  potato,  a  variety  bi-ought  from  Scotland  a  few  years  previously, 
known  as  Patterson's  Victoria,  a  variety  with  white  flowers  and 
round  white  tubers,  which,  after  a  culture  of  a  few  years  in  the 
new  climate,  produced  purple  flowers,  flat  ovate  tubers,  and  these 
tubers  with  pink  eyes.  The  members  of  that  society  looked  at  it 
as  a  return  to  the  original  form  of  some  hybrid  variety.  We 
here,  with  other  facts  before  us,  would  rather  regard  it  as  the 
effect  of  environment  operating  on  some  innate,  and  so  far  un- 
known, cause  of  change  which  might  lie  dormant  through  long 
ages  till  the  peculiar  conditions  of  the  environment  called  them 
into  active  life.  There  seemed  in  fact  seeds  for  form,  as  well 
as  seeds  for  individuals,  awaiting  the  required  conditions  for 
germination  and  rapid  growth.  In  the  one  case  we  were  able 
to  perceive  and  appreciate  them,  except  in  some  of  the  lowest 

1  Principal  Dawson  bas  suggested  that  one  difficulty  in  the  way  of  accept- 
ing the  prevalent  theories  of  the  evolution  of  man,  comes  from  the  fact 
that  anthropology  arToids  no  "missing  link"  in  the  human  skull.  The 
oldest  hitherto  found  shows  as  full  a  development  as  in  modern  man. 


32  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

organisms.  The  principle  that  contained  the  germ  of  form  was, 
however,  yet  as  wholly  unknown  as  that  of  the  supposed  disease- 
germs  of  the  atmosphere. 


March  10. 
The  President,  Dr.  Leidy,  in  the  chair. 

Twenty-four  persons  present. 

The  following  papers  were  presented  for  publication  : — 

"  New  Genera  and  Species  of  Fossil  Cockroaches  from  the 
Older  American  Rocks,"  by  Samuel  H.  Scudder. 

"  A  Revision  of  the  North  American  Melicre,"  by  F.  Lamson 
Scribner. 

"  A  Review  of  the  American  Eleotridinae,"  by  Carl  H.  Eigen- 
mann  and  Morton  "W.  Fordice. 

The  deaths  of  Samuel  Powell  and  Geo.  Whitney,  members,  and 
of  Benjamin  Silliman,  Jr.,  a  correspondent,  were  announced. 

Rhinoceros  and  Hippotherium  from  Florida. — Prof.  Leidy 
directed  attention  to  some  fossil  remains,  recently  received  from 
Dr.  J.  C.  Neal,  of  Archer,  Florida,  and  obtained  by  him  from  the 
same  deposit  noticed  in  the  Proceedings  of  1884,  p.  118.  Dr. 
Neal  writes  that  he  had  again  examined  the  locality  in  company 
with  Prof.  L.  C.  Johnson,  who  reports  that  the  deposit  overlies 
the  Yicksburg  limestone  of  Eocene  age.  Dr.  Neal  adds  that  the 
deposit  appears  to  be  the  portion  of  the  border  of  a  lagoon  of 
post-Tertiary  age,  and  that  it  is  now  about  100  feet  by  50  feet  in 
extent.  He  also  remarks  that  he  has  anxiously  looked  for  relics 
of  man,  but  thus  far  in  vain.  The  fossils  are  mingled  together  in 
the  greatest  confusion,  are  badly  fractured,  but  not  water-worn. 

The  remains  submitted,  besides  several  less  characteristic  frag- 
ments of  a  crocodile,  a  carnivorous  animal  about  the  size  of  a  fox, 
and  of  a  lama,  consist  of  two  Avell-preserved  teeth  of  a  Rhino- 
ceros and  a  Hippotherium. 

The  tooth  of  the  rhinoceros  fortunately  happens  to  be  one  of 
the  most  characteristic  of  the  series,  and  presents  differences 
sufficient^  from  those  of  the  many  extinct  forms  of  this  country 
to  render  it  probable  that  it  indicates  another  species.  The 
specimen  is  the  crown,  but  slightly  worn,  of  a  last  upper  molar 
of  the  left  side.  It  is  especially  remarkable  for  the  extent  of 
production  of  the  intermediate  folds  of  the  chief  lobes  of  the 
crown,  in  comparison  with  their  condition  in  known  forms  of  the 
genus.  The  fold  of  the  anterior  lobe  is  directed  backward  about 
half  the  interval  of  the  lobes,  and  extends  from  the  base  to  the 
triturating  border  of  the  crown.  Its  upper  portion  is  half  cylin- 
drical ;  its  lower  portion  compressed  from  without  inward,  and 
half  elliptical  in  the  length.     It  has  the  shape  of  a  knife  with  a 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  33 

cylindrical  handle  and  a  wider  half  elliptical  blade.  The  posterior 
fold,  as  long  and  wider  than  the  former,  curves  forward  and  out- 
ward in  advance  of  the  free  border  of  the  anterior  fold,  coming 
into  contact  with  the  outer  face  of  this  below,  but  separated  from 
it  by  an  open  crevice  above.  The  meeting  folds  divide  the  interval 
of  the  lobes  of  the  crown  into  an  outer  trilateral  pit  over  two 
inches  in  depth,  and  an  inner  nearly  rectangular  recess  about  an 
inch  and  a  half  in  depth.  A  well-produced  basal  ridge  occupies 
the  forepart  of  the  crown;  a  feeble  one,  produced  behind  in  a 
tubercle,  the  outer  part  of  the  crown  ;  and  a  broad  tubercle  occu- 
pies the  base  of  the  interval  of  the  lobes  internally.  The  measure- 
ments of  the  specimen  are  as  follows  : — 

Greatest  transverse  diameter  at  the  anterior  third,  56  mm. 

Greatest  fore  and  aft  diameter  externally,  .  63     " 

Greatest  fore  and  aft  diameter  internally,  .  55     " 

Greatest  depth  at  the  antero-external  border,      .  63     " 

The  species  may  be  distinguished  by  the  name  of  Rhinoceros 
proterus.  The  subgenus,  whether  Acerather-ium,  Aphelops,-  or 
other,  is  of  course  only  to  be  determined  b}*  the  supply  of  other 
portions  of  the  animal.  The  inferior  molars  and  bones  of  a 
rhinoceros,  indicated  in  the  former  communication  on  fossils 
from  the  same  deposit,  most  probably  also  pertain  to  this  species. 
The  extinct  genus  Hippotherium,  a  three-toed  ancestor  of  our 
horses,  was  originally  described  from  remains  found  in  the 
Miocene  and  later  Tertiary  deposits  of  Europe.  Remains  of  the 
same  genus  were  first  discovered  in  this  country  in  the  Ashley 
River  phosphate  beds  of  South  Carolina,  noticed  in  our  Proceed- 
ings of  1853,  p.  241,  under  the  'name  of  Hipparion  venustum,  and 
described  in  Holmes'  post-Pliocene  fossils,  1860, 105,  pi.  xvi,  figs. 
32,.  33,  as  Hippotherium  venustum.  Since  then  a  number  of 
other  species  have  been  described  by  the  speaker  and  Prof.  Cope 
from  remains  found  in  various  localities  of  this  country.  The 
tooth  now  under  inspection  is  an  upper  molar, 
perhaps  the  fourth  large  one  of  the  series.  It 
indicates  a  small  species,  little  more  than  half 
the  size  of  the  domestic  horse,  or  of  the 
Hippotherium  gracile  of  Europe,  and  exhibits 
sufficient  difference  to  assume  that  it  indicates 


\A^-J- 


.,.  another  species  from  those  already  described. 
■*  s  The  folding  of  the  contiguous  borders  of  the 
Hippotherium  ingenuum.  interior  enamel  islets  of  the  worn  triturating 
surface  is  less  complex  than  in  H.  venustum.  and  the  internal  islet 
is  elliptical  instead  of  circular.  The  species  may  be  named 
Hippotherium  ingenuum.  The  measurements  of  the  tooth  are 
as  follows  : — 

Length  at  antero-internal  corner  of  crown,  42  mm. 

Breadth  fore  and  aft  of  triturating  surface,  19     " 

Breadth  transversely  of  triturating  surface,         17     " 


34  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 


NEW    GENERA    AND    SPECIES    OF    FOSSIL    COCKROACHES,    FROM 
THE  OLDER  AMERICAN  ROCKS. 

BY    SAMUEL    H.    SCUDDER. 

Since  the  publication  of  my  essay  on  Palaeozoic  cockroaches,1 
a  considerable  number  of  new  types  of  Palseoblattarise  have  come 
to  hand,  largely  through  the  endeavors  of  Mr.  R.  D.  Lacoe,  to 
whose  favor  I  owe  the  opportunity  of  stud}-ing  them,  and  partly 
from  my  exploration  of  an  interesting  localit}'  in  South  Park, 
Colorado.  Some  of  the  former  have  since  been  published  in  a 
revision  of  the  species  of  Mylacris,2  and  the  more  interesting  of 
such  as  remain  are  described  in  this  paper. 

The  two  new  genera'  of  Mylacridae  are  closely  allied  to,  but 
differ  considerabl}7  from,  the  known  genera.  Of  the  Blattinariae, 
the  species  of  Oryctoblattina  is  the  first  secured  from  America, 
and  the  Triassic  genera  and  species  are  interesting,  not  only  from 
the  deposit  in  which  they  occur,  but  also  from  their  relation  to 
Carboniferous  and  Liassic  types.3  They  will  all  be  figured  on 
another  occasion. 

PROMYLACRIS  (rp6,  /mXawpif),  nov.  gen. 

The  mediastinal  vein,  though  large  and  abundantly  supplied 
with  veins,  terminates  not  far  beyond  the  middle  of  the  wing ; 
most  of  the  branches  fork  more  than  once  ;  the  scapular  vein 
runs  in  a  nearly  straight  course,  and  terminates  a  short  distance 
beyond  the  mediastinal,  playing  a  very  insignificant  part ;  the 
externomedian  vein  is  far  more  important,  crowding  back  the 
scapular  vein  on  the  one  side  and  the  externomedian  on  the 
other;  the  anal  furrow  is  very  deeply  impressed  and  the  anal 
area  strongly  convex,  its  veins  regular,  frequent  and  strongly 
curved. 
Promylacris  ovale,  nov.  sp. 

Represented  by  a  single  specimen  and  its  reverse  in  a  nodule 
preserving  well  the  anterior  half  of  the  body.  The  pronotum  is 
regularly  arched,  about  one-fourth  as  high  as  broad,  and  twice  as 

1  Mem.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  iii,  23,  et  seq. 

2  Ibid.,  iii,  £99,  et  seq. 

8  Amer.  Jour.  Sc.  (8),  xxviii,  199,  et  seq. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  35 

broad  as  long.  The  front  wings  have  a  strongly  developed 
humeral  lobe  and  a  costal  margin  of  considerable  convexity. 
The  mediastinal  branches  are  clustered  into  three  groups  ;  the 
scapular  vein  is  composed  of  only  two  branches,  each  of  which 
forks  with  slight  divarication  ;  the  externomedian  vein  has  three 
principal  branches,  all  of  which  originate  far  toward  the  base  of 
the  wing  ;  the  internomedian  area  is  unusually  small,  apparently 
not  reaching  so  far  out  as  the  scapular  area.  The  fragment  is  20 
mm.  long  and  the  wing  12  mm.  broad,  but  it  was  probably  about 
29  mm.  long. 

Carboniferous  deposits  of  Mazon  Creek,  111.  Received  from 
Mr.  Wm.  Gurley. 

PAKOMYLACEIS  (-apos,  //uWpfj),  nov.  gen. 
The  mediastinal  vein  consists  of  at  least  seven  or  eight  prin- 
cipal bi*anches,  several  of  them  forking  close  to  the  base,  the 
outermost  extending  far  toward  the  tip  of  the  wing,  making  this 
area  unusually  important ;  the  scapular  is  also  important,  the 
main  vein  running  through  the  middle  of  the  wing  in  a  straight 
course  to  the  tip  ;  the  externomedian  branches  do  not  separate 
widely,  and  occupy  on  the  margin  of  the  wing  only  the  lower 
half  of  the  broad  apex ;  the  anal  furrow  is  deeply  impressed,  and 
strikes  the  middle  of  the  inner  margin. 

Paromylacris  rotundum,  nov.  sp. 

The  single  specimen  shows  the  larger  portion  of  the  upper 
surface,  and  all  the  more  important  parts,  visible  from  above. 
The  whole  body  is  strongly  arched,  and  the  central  portion  of 
the  pronotal  shield,  which  is  twice  as  broad  as  long,  is  elevated 
about  4\r)  mm.  above  the  margins.  The  front  wings  are  obovate, 
scarcety  narrower  at  tip  than  at  base,  barely  twice  as  long  as 
broad  ;  the  humeral  angle  very  prominent.  The  scapular  vein 
has  four  or  five  straight  superior  branches  ;  the  externomedian 
vein  runs  parallel  to  the  scapular,  and  has  two  dichotomizing 
branches.  The  length  of  the  wing  is  29-5  mm.,  and  its  width 
15  mm. 

Carboniferous  deposits  of  Mazon  Creek,  111.  Mr.  R.  D.  Lacoe, 
No.  2026. 

SPILOBLATTINA  (<xz:\os,  Blattina)  nov.  sp. 

This  genus  is  allied  to  Etoblattina,  but  differs  from  it  and  from 
all  other  genera  of  Blattinariae  in  the  divergence  of  the  scap- 


36  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  L1885- 

ular  and  externomedian  veins  be3rond  the  middle  of  the  wing, 
and  then  their  rapid  convergence  beyond  a  more  or  less  conspic- 
uous elongated  spot  (whence  the  generic  name)  which  fills  the 
space  so  produced  ;  a  similar  arrangement  is  seen  even  more 
conspicuously  between  the  the  externomedian  and  internomedian 
veins,  where  the  spot  is  much  larger  and  round.  All  the  species 
are  Triassic. 
Spiloblattina  Gardineri,  nov.  pp. 

A  number  of  specimens  of  this  were  found,  some  of  them  nearly 
perfect.  The  wing  is  long  and  slender,  more  than  three  times 
longer  than  broad,  the  tip  roundly  produced.  The  mediastinal 
vein  terminates  some  way  beyond  the  middle,  approaching  the 
margin  very  gradually;  the  scapular  runs  parallel  to  the  costal 
margin,  slightly  more  removed  from  it  in  the  apical  than  in  the 
distal  half,  and  terminates  a  little  before  the  tip  of  the  wing ;  it 
has  many  branches,  usually  compound ;  the  externomedian  vein 
begins  to  branch  usually  in  the  middle  of  the  wing,  about  oppo- 
site the  stigma  in  the  interspace  between  it  and  the  scapular  vein, 
and  its  branches  fill  the  apex  of  the  wing.  To  form  the  enlarged 
cell  for  the  median  stigma,  the  curve  of  the  main  externomedian 
vein  is  graceful  and  very  gradual.  The  anal  terminates  far  before 
the  middle  of  the  wing.  Length  of  wing  about  17*5  mm.,  width  5*5 
mm.  Named  after  my  son  who  obtained  the  first  and  best  speci- 
men seen  in  our  exploration  of  the  beds. 

Triassic  beds  near  Fairplay,  Colorado. 
Spiloblattina  triassica,  nov.  pp. 

In  this  species  the  wing  appears  to  be  more  slender  than  in  the 
others,  although  the  exact  proportions  cannot  be  given  from  the 
imperfection  of  the  specimens;  all  the  branches  have  a  more 
longitudinal  and  less  arcuate  course,  the  externomedian  and 
scapular  veins  scarcely  part  from  each  other  to  give  place  to  the 
stigma,  and  the  divergence  of  the  former  and  the  internomedian 
veins  is  also  less  conspicuous.  The  wing  was  probably  about  18 
mm.  long,  and  5  mm.  broad. 

Triassic  beds  near  Fairplay,  Colorado. 

Spiloblattina  guttata,  nov.  sp. 

This  species  differs  from  the  others  in  the  stoutness  of  the 
wing,  which  is  proportionally  much  shorter  than  any  of  the 
others;  in  keeping  with  this  peculiarity  is  the  greater  width  of 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  37 

both  the  mediastinal  and  scapular  areas,  and  the  more  rapid 
descent  to  the  margin  of  the  termination  of  at  least  the  former. 
In  other  respects  the  species  completely  resembles  S.  Gardineri. 
Two  fragments  only  were  obtained,  which  indicate  a  wing  about 
15  mm.  long,  and  7  mm.  broad. 

Triassic  beds  near  Fairplay,  Colorado. 

Spiloblattina  marginata,  nov.  sp. 

This  species,  of  which  only  a  single  specimen  was  found,  is 
remarkable  for  the  paucity  of  its  neuration,  and  for  the  fact  that 
all  the  veins  and  branches  are  margined  with  a  slender  dark 
edging.  The  scapular  vein  recedes  more  than  usually  from  the 
costal  margin  opposite  the  very  slight  median  stigma,  and  the 
externomedian  vein  is  consequently  more  than  usually  curved  to 
make  place  for  it.  The  probable  length  of  the  wing  was  18  mm. 
The  inner  margin  being  lost,  the  width  can  hardly  be  more  than 
conjectured,  but  it  was  perhaps  7  mm. 

Triassic  beds  near  Fairplay,  Colorado. 

Oryctoblattina  occidua,  nor.  sp. 

The  veins  appear  to  originate  from  the  middle  of  the  upper 
half  of  the  base  of  the  wing,  and  have  scarcely  the  least  basal 
arcuation.  The  mediastinal  vein  runs  at  but  slight  distance  from, 
and  nearly  parallel  to,  the  costal  border,  in  the  outer  half  con- 
stantly but  gradually  approaching  it,  emitting  numerous  oblique, 
generally  simple  branches ;  the  vein  terminates  in  the  middle  of 
the  outer  half  of  the  wing,  and  shows  no  such  peculiarities  at  its 
tip  as  characterize  0.  reticulata  of  Europe.  The  scapular  vein 
is  also  not  so  peculiar  as  there ;  it  runs  in  near  proximity  and 
parallel  to  the  mediastinal  vein,  but  there  is  the  same  slight  bend 
in  its  course  at  the  base  of  the  principal  branch ;  the  mass  of  the 
branches,  which  are  fewer  than  in  0.  reticulata,  do  not  arise  as 
there  from  a  vein  emitted  abruptly  from  near  the  base  of  the 
second  branch,  to  which  they  are  inferior,  but  from  the  principal 
branch  itself,  to  which  they  are  superior.  The  internomedian 
vein  terminates  at  about  the  end  of  the  middle  third  of  the  wing, 
and  has  only  a  few  branches.  The  externomedian  branches  all' 
terminate  on  the  inner  margin.  The  length  of  the  wing  is  19 
mm.,  its  breadth  7  mm. 

Carboniferous  beds  of  Mazon  Creek,  Illinois;  R.  D.  Lacoe,  No. 
2039. 


38  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Petrablattina  eequa,  nov.  *)>. 

Mediastinal. vein  terminating  scarcely  beyond  the  middle  of 
the  costal  margin,  with  numerous,  closely  crowded,  simple 
branches;  scapular  vein  terminating  above  the  tip  of  the  wing, 
ami  beyond  the  basal  curve  nearly  straight,  with  four  or  five 
singly  forking  branches  ;  branches  of  externomedian  vein  straight, 
superior,  mostly  simple,  parallel  to  the  main  scapular  vein  ;  the 
internomedian  area  extending  to  some  distance  beyond  the 
middle  of  the  wing.  It  is  a  tolerably  large  species,  the  wing 
measuring  24  mm.  in  length  and  10  mm.  in  breadth. 

Triassic  beds  near  Fairplay,  Colorado. 

Petrablattina  Meieri,  now  sj>. 

Mediastinal  vein  terminating  a  long  way  beyond  the  middle  of 
the  costal  border,  with  comparatively  distant,  usually  simple 
branches.  Scapular  vein  terminating  just  below  the  tip  of  the 
wing  and  beyond  the  basal  curve,  gently  arcuate  throughout, 
with  branches  similar  to  those  of  P.  aequa,  but  occup3*ing  a 
larger  area.  In  consequence,  the  externomedian  area  is  of  less 
importance  than  in  P.  sequa,  and  it  has  but  few  branches,  which 
appear  to  be  generally  simple,  and  slightly  declivent,  though 
superior.  Unfortunately  this  portion  of  the  wing  in  the  single 
specimen  known  is  very  obscure.  The  internomedian  vein  is 
not  preserved  in  its  outer  portion,  but  it  evidently  reached  the 
border  nearer  the  base  than  the  mediastinal  vein,  and  the  anal 
furrow  is  strongly  curved.  The  wing  is  broken  at  the  base,  but 
its  probable  length  was  19  mm.,  and  its  breadth  7  mm.  It  is 
named  after  Mr.  Robert  A.  Meier,  of  Garo,  Col.,  in  whose  shaft 
all  these  specimens  were  obtained,  and  who  afforded  our  party 
all  possible  assistance  in  working  them. 

Triassic  beds  near  Fairplay,  Colorado. 

POROBLATTINA  {ndpos,  Blattina),  nov.  gen. 
Allied  to  Petrablattina,  and  especially  the  species  of  that  genus 
found  in  the  same  Triassic  rocks,  differing  from  them  principally 
in  the  insignificant  part  played  by  the  mediastinal  area  and  the 
corresponding  importance  of  the  scapular  area.  The  mediastinal 
vein  extends  no  further  out  than  the  anal,  terminating  far  before 
the  middle  of  the  wing,  and  has  consequently  but  a  few  offshoots; 
while  the  mediastinal,  sweeping  downward,  away  from  the  costal 
margin  at  the  termination  of  the  mediastinal,  occupies  nearly  half 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  39 

of  the  wing  before  curving  upward  again  to  terminate  above  the 
apex.  The  externomedian  vein  is  arcuate  and  terminates  on  the 
lower  margin  not  far  from  the  tip,  and  has  only  three  or  four 
superior  longitudinal  branches.  The  anal  furrow  is  strongly 
arcuate.  The  anal  veins  are  nearly  parallel  to  the  inner  margin, 
but  impinge  upon  it  near  the  anal  furrow. 

Poroblattina  arcuata,  nov.  sp. 

The  costal  border  is  considerably  convex.  The  scapular  vein 
is  unusually  arcuate  and  has  a  large  number  of  mostly  simple 
oblique  branches.  The  externomedian  and  internomedian  veins, 
on  the  contrary,  have  few  and  distant  branches,  and  the  former 
is  also  strongly  arcuate.  The  whole  surface  of  the  wing  is  broken 
by  closely  crowded  cross-veins,  which  are  more  transverse  to  the 
whole  wing  than  to  the  interspaces.  A  single,  rather  imperfect 
specimen  is  known,  indicating  a  species  with  a  wing  about  10  mm. 
long;  the  width  is  4  mm.,  and  apparently  the  wing  was  well 
rounded  and  much  shorter  in  proportion  to  its  breadth  than  in 
the  next  species. 

Triassic  beds  near  Fairplay,  Colorado. 

Poroblattina  lakesii,  nov.  sp. 

The  costal  border  is  nearly  straight  and  the  wing  elongate. 
The  scapular  vein  is  much  less  arcuate  than  in  the  preceding 
species  and  has  a  comparatively  small  number  of  distant,  singly 
or  doubly  forked,  oblique  branches.  The  much  less  oblique 
branches  of  the  internomedian  vein  are  more  frequent  but  appear 
less  crowded  from  their  simplicit}',  while  those  of  the  externo- 
median are  more  distant  than  the  latter,  and  equally  simple. 
There  is  no  sign  of  any  cross-venation.  This  species,  like  the 
preceding,  is  small,  the  wing  measuring  about  12  mm.  long,  and 
4*5  mm.  broad.  Named  after  Prof.  Arthur  Lakes  of  the  School 
of  Mines  at  Golden,  Colorado,  the  first  discoverer  of  these 
fossils. 

Triassic  beds  near  Fairplay,  Colorado. 


40  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 


A  REVISION  OF  THE  NORTH  AMERICAN  MELICJE. 
BY  F.  LAMSON  SCRTBNER. 

The  determination  of  our  North  American  species  of  the  genus 
Mel ica,  and  the  notes  relative  to  their  distribution,  etc.,  contained 
in  the  present  paper,  are  based  upon  the  collections  in  the  herba- 
rium at  Cambridge,  the  Torrey  herbarium,  and  the  herbarium  of 
the  Department  of  Agriculture  at  Washington,  all  of  which  have 
been  kindly  loaned  me  for  this  purpose,  by  those  having  them  in 
charge.  I  have  also  consulted  the  herbarium  of  the  Academy  of 
Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia,  as  well  as  several  valuable 
private  collections. 

The  following  is  a  synopsis  or  analytical  key  of  the  species,  as 
they  appear  to  me,  by  which  it  is  hoped  they  may  be  readily 
identified  without  the  aid  of  more  extended  descriptions. 

I  1.  GLYCERINE. 

Spikelets  1-5  flowered,  flowering  glumes  herbaeeo-coriaceous,  with  a  narrow 
scarious  margin  above,  strongly  7-nerced. 

Culms  not  bulbiferous,  panicle  man}' -flowered,  spikelets  H-2^  lin. 

long,  with  1,  or  sometimes  2  perfect  flowers. 

Empty  glumes  shorter   than  the   spikelet,  rudimentary  floret 

large,  and  nearly  sessile.  M.  imperfecta.  1. 

Empty  glumes  as  long  as  the  floret,  the  second  one  exceeding 

it,  rudimentary  floret  small,  long  stipitate. 

M.  Torreyana.  2. 
Culms  bulbiferous,  panicle  simple,  few-flowered  with  short  diver- 
gent branches,  spikelets  4-7  lin.  long,  with  3-5  perfect  florets, 
flowering  glumes  2-3  lin.  long,  joints  of  the  thickened  rhachilla 
about  1  lin.  long.  M.fugax.  3. 

I  2.  EUMELICA. 

Spikelets  4-8  lin.  long,  with  2-S  perfect  florets,  flowering  glume  apparently 
many-nerved  below  {at  least  when  dry),  with  a  broadscarious  margin  above. 

Culms  not  bulbiferous. 

Empty  glumes  ver}'  unequal  and  decidedly  shorter  than  the 
3-5  flowered  spikelets. 
Panicle  diffusely  branched,  many-flowered,  the  flexuose  ped- 
icels smooth  or  slightly  pubescent.  .1/.  diffusa.  4. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  41 

Panicle   narrow,  the  slender   branches  erect,  or  the  lower 

slightly  divergent,  pedicels  flexuose  or  recurved,  densely 

pubescent.  M.  Porteri.  5. 

Empty  glumes  unequal,  the  second  nearly  or  quite  as  long  (6-8 

lin.)  as  the  4-6-flowered  spikelets. 

Panicle  with  6-15  large,  pendulous  spikelets  forming  a  simple 

secund  raceme.  M.  stricta.  6. 

Panicle   strict,   densely    many-flowered   above,    interrupted 

below,  branches  and  short,  straight  pedicels  erect. 

M.  frutescens.1  7. 

Empty   glumes  subequal,   nearly   as   long    (4-5    lin.)  as   the 

2-flowered  spikelets. 

Panicle  few-flowered,  sparingly  branched  below,  often  reduced 

to  a  simple  raceme.  M.  mutica.  8. 

Culms  bulbous  at  base  (excepting  in  occasional  samples  of  No.  10). 

The  second  glume  decidedly  shorter  than  the  third. 

Panicle  nodding,  loosely  few-flowered,  the  slender  branches 
erect  spreading,  flowering  glume  very  broadly  acuminate, 
obtuse  or  notched  at  the  tip,  terminal  floret  acute. 

M.  spectabile.  9. 
The  second  glume  as  long  as  the  third. 

Panicle  erect,  densely  many-flowered,  branched  below,  spicate 
above,  spikelets  about  4  lin.  long,  with  about  3  perfect 
florets  the  rudimentary  one  obtuse.    M.  Calif ornica.  10. 

Panicle  erect,  branches  appressed,  few-flowered,  spikelets  5-6 

lin.  long,  with  5-8  perfect  flowers,  terminal  floret  acute. 

M.  bulbosa.  11. 
I  3.  BROMELICA. 

Spikelets  of  3S  perfect  florets,  the  lower  exceeding  the  empty  glumes  ;  lotcer 
palet  prominently  7-nerved,  apiculate  or  distinctly  awned  by  the  excurrent 
midnerve  at  the  notched  or  bifid  or  narrowly  truncate  or  rarely  long 
attenuated  tip  (Thurber). 

Culms  bulbiferous,   panicle  with  spreading,  very   unequal   few- 
flowered  rays,  the  upper  rays  and  spikelets  mostly  solitary. 
Flowering  glumes  smooth  or  minutely  scabrous,  notched  at  the 
acute  tip,  the  midnerve  ending  as  a  short  point  or  awn 
between  the  teeth.  31.  bromoides.  12. 

1  Melica  frutescens  approaches,  by  intermediate  forms,  very  closely  to  M. 

California,  but  the  membraneous  character  of  its  glumes,  the  unusual 

length  of  the  outer  ones,   and  the  comparatively  short  palea  (this  being 

scarcely  half  as  long  as  its  glume)  suggest  a  nearer  relationship  with  M.stricta. 

4 


42  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Flowering  glumes  ciliate  on  the  margin  and  hirsute,  especially 
below,  with  scattered  hairs,  long  attenuated  into  a  narrow 
subulate  point,  but  not  awned.  M.  subulata.  13. 

Culms  not  bulbous  at  the  base,  panicle  contracted. 

Flowering  glume  about  4  lin.  long,  ciliate  on  the  margin  below 
with  long  shining  hairs,  apex  truncate  or  obtusely  lobed, 
awn  when  present  not  exceeding  3  lin.  in  length. 

M.  Harfordii.  14. 
Flowering  glume  5-6  lin.  long,  strongly  scabrous,  with  a  few 
stiff  marginal  hairs  near  the  base,  awn  4-7  lin.  long. 

M.  aristata.  15. 

1.  Melica  imperfecta,  Trin.  in  Mem.  Acad.  St.  Petersb.,  1840,  59,  and  Icon.  Gram., 
t.  356;  Bolander,  Proc.  Calif.  Acad.,  1870,  iv,  101 ;  Thurber  in  S.  Wats.  Bot. 
Calif.,  ii,  303.  M.  colpodioidcs,  Nee6.  in  Tayl.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist,  1,  282;  M. 
panicoides  and  M.  poxoidcs,  Nutt.  in  PI.  Gambl.,  188. 

Hab. — California  :  Hills,  San  Bernardino  Valley,  Parish  Bros.,  No.  885, 
April,  1881  ;  San.  Bernardino  Co.,  Parry  and  Lemmon,  No.  40;?,  18T6  ;  G.  R. 
Vasey,  No.  664,  1880 ;  Southern  California,  Parry  and  Lemmon,  No.  404  ; 
Santa  Maria,  Sta.  Barbara  Co.,  Lorenzo  Jared,  1881 ;  Santa  Barbara,  Mrs. 
E.  Cooper,  1879  ;  "Abundant  in  dry  rock  places,"  Mrs.  R.  F.  Bingham,  1882; 
Fall  Brook,  M.  E.  Jones,  No.  3092,  March,  1882  (spikelets  2£  lin.  long); 
Guadaloupe  Island,  off  Lower  Calif.,  E.  Palmer,  No.  98,  1875;  LosAngelos, 
Bolander,  Kellogg  &  Co.  (a  form  with  unusually  broad  and  obtuse  outer 
glumes).  Two-flowered  forms,  the  M.  poceoides  of  Nuttall,  come  from  San 
Francisco,  Bolander,  No.  6076,  in  part ;  Hills,  San  Diego,  C.  G.  Pringle, 
1882  ;  Miss  Scott,  1880  ;  Dr.  Cleveland,  1882. 

Var.  refracta,  Thurber  in  S.  Wats.  Bot.  Calif.,  ii,  303. 
Hab. — Near  San  Bernardino,  Calif.    J.  G.  Lemmon,  No.  1471,  1879. 

Var.  flexuosa,  Bolander,  Proc.  Calif.  Acad.,  iv,  101;  Thurber,  1.  c,  303. 

On  the  road  from  Mariposa  to  Clarks,  Bolander ;  Santa  Inez  Mission, 
Brewer,  No.  569  (teste  Thurber). 

I  do  not  recognize  this  variety  among  the  specimens  I  have  in 
hand. 

Var.  minor. 

Characterized  by  its  comparatively  low  and  densely  tufted 
habit,  short  and  chiefly  radical  leaves,  compressed  or  angular 
culms,  slender  few-flowered  panicle,  the  short  branches  divergent 
or  even  reflexed  ;  the  spikelets  are  generally  smaller  than  in  the 
species  and  the  outer  glumes  usually  shorter  and  more  obtuse. 

Hab. — San  Bernardino  Mts.,  Parish  Bro.,  No.  856,  May,  1882. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  43 

2.  Melica  Torreyana.     M.  imperfecta,  var.  sesquifora,  Torrey  in  Herb. 

The  specimens  thus  ticketed  by  Dr.  Torrey  were  collected  in 
California,  by  Dr.  Bigelow,  in  1853-4. 

This  proposed  new  species  is  distinguished  from  M.  imperfecta, 
with  which  it  is  very  closely  allied,  by  its  more  membraneous, 
longer  and  more  acute  glumes — the  second  one  equaling  or 
exceeding  the  floret — by  the  hairs  on  the  back  of  the  flowering 
glume  above  the  middle  and  by  the  long-pedicelled  rudimentary 
floret,  characters  which  seem  to  me  to  be  of  specific  value. 

Bigelow's  specimens  are  immature,  but  the  typical  form  is  well 
represented  by  the  specimens  distributed  by  Bolander,  Kellogg 
&  Co.  (1872).  In  these  specimens  the  culms  are  3  ft.  high  or 
more,  leaves  numerous,  flat,  2-3  lin.  wide,  6-8  in.  long;  ligule  3-4 
lin.  long,  lacerated ;  panicle  6-10  in.  long,  diffuse,  the  slender 
flexuose  branches  2-4  in.  long  and  few-flowered  at  the  ends,  naked 
below.  The  characters  of  the  spikelets  are  well  shown  in  fig. 
3,  PL  I. 

Forms  with  two-flowered  spikelets  occur,  but  the  second  floret 
and  rudiment  are  long-pedicelled,  while  in  similar  two-flowered 
forms  of  M.  imperfecta,  these  are  both  nearly  sessile. 

No.  13  Bolander.  and  No.  60*76  Bolander  in  part  belong  to 
this  species.  No.  586,  collected  by  Dr.  Torrey  at  New  Almaden, 
California,  in  1865,  is  a  narrow-panicled  form  of  M.  Torreyana, 
closely  resembling  31.  imperfecta,  but  at  once  recognized  by  the 
characters  above  noted. 

3.  Melica  fugax,1  Bolander,  Proc.  Calif.  Acad.,  iv,  104:  Thurber  in  S.  Wats.  Bot. 
Calif.,  ii,  304.     M.  Oeyeri,  Thurber,  Bot.  Wilkes'  Exped.,  492,  not  Munro. 

Hab. — California  :  J.  G.  Leinmon,  1875  ;  Sierra  Valley,  J.  G.  L.,  1873 
and  1874  ;  Dormer  Lake,  Bolander,  Kellogg  &  Co.,  1872  ;  Plumas  Co.,  Mrs. 
Austin,  1877.  Oregon  :  Dry  mountain  sides,  Union  Co.,  W.  C.  Cusiek,  No. 
1032,  June,  1882.  Washington  Territory  :  Open  pine  woods,  Falcon  Valley, 
W.  N.  Suksdorf,  Nos.  61  and  16,  1883. 

In  the  spikelets  of  Melica  fugax,  the  rhachilla  is  smooth, 
thickened  and  of  a  peculiar  spongy  texture,  quite  unlike  that  of 
any  other  North  American  species. 

1  The  Melica,  from  Mt.  Shasta,  referred  to  in  my  List  of  Pringle's 
Grasses  (see  Torr.  Bull.,  x,  p.  31,  No.  72),  is  not  M.  fugax,  nor  am  I  able 
to  identify  it  with  any  of  the  known  species,  unless  it  be  an  unusual  form 
of  At.  bulbosa,  Geyer.  The  specimens  in  hand  are  too  meagre  for  more 
definite  conclusions. 


44  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

4.  Melica  diffusa,  Pursh  Flor.,  i,  77 ;  Kunth  En.  PL  i,  377 ;  Stendel  Gram.,  291 :  M. 
altistima,  Walt,  Flor.  Carol.,  78.  M.  glabra,  Michx.,  i,  62  (in  part).  M.  mutica, 
var.  diffusa,  Gray  in  Man.,  626.     M.  scahra,  Nutt.,  Fl.  Ark.,  148. 

Var.  nitens. — .1/.  nitcns,  Nutt.  in  Herb.  Phila.  Acad.  M.  mutica,  Torr.  in  Marcy's 
Rept. 

Differs  from  the  species  in  its  more  leafy  culms,  narrower 
leaves,  more  densely  flowered  panicle,  and  in  its  much  broader 
and  more  unequal  outer  glumes,  the  second  one  being  nearly  as 
long  as  the  spikelet. 

Distribution. — Pennsylvania,  Illinois,  southward  and  westward  to 
Texas.  The  variety  =  No.  3464  a,  Curtiss'  Distribution  N.  Am.  Plants, 
coll.  in  Texas  by  J.  Reverchon  ;  also  389,  Lindheimer,  and  2062,  C.  Wright. 
Nos.  729,  Lindheimer  (1847),  and  769,  C.  Wright  (1849),  belong  to  the 
species. 

b.  Melica  Porteri,  Scribner    in    Rusby's  Arizona  plants,    No.  881^,    188:?,   and   in 
Pringle's    distribution  of  1884.     M.  mutica,  var.  parviflora,   T.  C.  Porter  in 
Porter  <fc  Coulter's  Fl.  of  Colorado,  149  ;  M.  stricta,  Brandegee,  Fl.  Southwestern 
Colorado,  p.  244. 
Hab. — Colorado:  Glen  Eyrie,  near  Colorado  City,  T.  C.  Porter,  July, 
1872,  and  August,  1873.     "This  Melica,  which  I  have  from  several  stations 
in  Colorado,  I  am  now  inclined  to  think  a  good  species,  as  you  do."     T.  C. 
P.  inlitt.,  December,  1882;  Chiann  Canon,  M.  E.  Jones,  No.  1550,  June, 
1879 ;  Canon  of  the  Rio  La  Plata,  and  Parrott  City  (alt.,  8500  ft.),  T.  S. 
Brandegee ;  Hall  and  Harbour,  No.  228.     Arizona :  Rusby,  1883  ;  Santa 
Rita  Mts.,  Pringle,  1884 ;  Sierra  Blanca,  J.  T.  Rothrock,  No.  805,  1874;  J. 
G.  Lemmon,  1884  (specimens  differing  from  the  type  in  their  smaller  spike- 
lets,  scarcely  exceeding  4  lin.  in  length,  while  in  the  ordinary  forms  they 
are  two  lines  longer).     New  Mexico :  C.  Wright,    No.  2063,    1851,   and 
Fendler,  No.  924,  1847  ;  G.  R.  Vasey,  No.  142,  July,  1881.     Texas :  Chixos 
Mts.,  V.  Havard,  No.  19,  1883  (a  small  flowered  form  like  that  collected  by 
Lemmon  in  Arizona). 

6.  Melica  stricta,  Bolander,  Proc.  Cal.  Acad.,  iii,  1863,  p.  4,  and  iv,  p.  104;  Watson, 
Bot.  King's  Exped.,  384;  Thurb.  in  S.  Wats.  Bot.  Cal.,  ii,  303. 
Hab. — California:  Virginia  City,  Bolander,  No.  47;  Toscmite  Valley. 
Bolander,  No.  6089,  1866;  Sierra  Co.,  J.  G.  Lemmon,  No.  223,  1874; 
Bolander,  Kellogg  &  Co.,  1872  (alt.  7000  ft.);  Sierra  Nevada,  "crevices 
of  high  rocks,  9000  ft.,"  E.  L.  Greene,  No.  417,  Oct.,  1884 ;  same  district, 
alt.  9500  ft.,  C.  G.  Pringle,  Sept.,  1882 ;  Plumas  Co.,  R.  M.  Austin,  1878 ; 
Soda  Springs,  alt.  9000  ft.,  M.  E.  Jones,  July,  1881  ;  "Dry  ridges,  among 
rocks,"  Bear  Valley,  San  Bernardino  Mts.,  Parish  Bros.,  No.  1553,  Aug., 
1882.  Nevada:  East  Humboldt  Mts.,  alt.  8000  ft.,  Aug.,  and  Pah  Ute 
Mts.,  alt.  5500  ft.,  June,  S.  Watson,  No.  1305,  1868. 

Note. — The  inflorescence  of  this  alpine  species  is  similar  to 
that  of  M.  Porteri,  but  the  panicle  is  much  shorter,  with  only 
about  a  dozen  spikelets,  rarely  more  than  20,  and  the  spikelets 
themselves  are  very  much  larger. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  45 

7.  Melica  frutescens. 

Culms  2|-3i  feet  high,  simple  or  branched  near  the  base, 
leafy  ;  leaves  narrow,  involute  near  the  tip,  scabrous,  as  are  also 
the  sheaths.  Panicle  6-12  inches  long,  strict,  densely  flowered 
and  spicate  above,  interrupted  below,  the  appressed  branches 
1-3  inches  long,  densely  flowered,  or  the  longer  ones  naked 
below.  Spikelets  about  6  lin.  long,  with  usually  5  perfect  florets  ; 
first  glume  about  5  lin.  long ;  the  second  a  line  longer,  nearly 
equaling  the  spikelet ;  thh'd  glume  about  4  lin.  long,  obtuse,  the 
papery-membraneous  tip  occupying  fully  a  third  of  its  length. 
Palea  usually  about  one-half  the  length  of  its  glume. 

Hab. — California:  Southern  California,  Parry  and  Lemmon,  No.  401, 
1876 ;  Mountains  San  Diego  Co.,  C.  G.  Pringle,  April  20,  1882 ;  Lower 
California,  near  the  United  States  border,  C.  R.  Orcutt,  No.  513,  May, 
1883  ;  Near  the  Tia  Juana,  M.  E.  Jones,  No.  3748,  April  6,  1882. 

8.  Melica  mutica.Walt.,  Flor.  Carol.,  78  (1788).     M.  glabra,  Pursh. ;  Mx.  (in  part.), 

.1/.  niutit  a,  var.  glabra,  Gray  in  Man.,  626.  M.  gpeciosa,  Muhl.,  Ind.  Fl.  Lane. 
(1791),  161,  and  Gram.,  i,  87.  M.  racemosa,  Muhl.  Gram.,  88.  M.  Muehlen- 
bergiana,  Schult,  Mant.,  2,  294  (after  Kunth). 

Distribution. — Pennsylvania,  southward  and  westward  to  Texas,  (781, 
E.  Hall). 

Distinguished  from  M.  diffusa,  with  which  it  has  been  united 
by  some  authors,  by  its  more  slender  habit,  less  branched  and 
fewer  flowered  panicle,  which  is  often  reduced  to  a  simple 
raceme.  The  spikelets  also  rarely  have  more  than  two  perfect 
florets,  the  outer  glumes  are  more  nearly  equal  in  length,  and 
often  quite  as  long  as  the  spikelet,  while  the  flowering  glumes 
are  broader  and  more  obtuse. 

9.  Melica  spectabile.    M.  bulbosa,  S.Wats.,  Bot.  King.  Exp.,  383  ;  Porter  &  Coulter, 

Fl.  Colorado,  149. 

Hab. — Montana:  Crow  Creek  Mts.,  etc.,  alt.  6000  ft.,  Scribner,  No. 
385,  1883  ;  Bozeman  Pass,  Wm.  M.  Canby,  No.  368,  1883.  Colorado :  Twin 
Lakes,  Upper  Arkansas,  and  Plains  near  Ogden,  T.  C.  Porter,  1872. 
Yellowstone  Park,  C.  C.  Parry,  No.  295,  1873.  Utah :  Cottonwood  Canon, 
alt.  10,000  ft.,  S.  Watson,  No.  1303,  July,  1869.  Idaho  :  Beaver  Canon,  S. 
Watson,  No.  455,  July,  1880. 

This  grass  has  been  referred  to  Geyer's  M.  bulbosa  by  authors, 
but  aside  from  its  affecting  higher  elevations,  it  is  readily  distin- 
guished from  that  species  by  its  usually  taller  and  more  slender 
culms,  by  its  more  open  and  nodding  panicle,  by  the  more 


46  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

slender  and  flex  nose  pedicels,  by  its  shorter  empty  glumes,  and 
by  its  broader  flowering  glumes,  which  taper  abruptly  to  a 
rounded  and  usually  two-lobed  summit. 

10.  Melica  Califomica,   M.  pomoidee,  Torrey,  in  Pac.  R.  Rep.,  iv,  157,  non  Nutt. 
M.  bulbosa,  Thurber,  in  S.  Wats.  Bot.  Calif.,  ii,  p.  304,  non  Geyer. 

Hab. —  California :  Bolander,  Nos.  32  and  G120  ;  Kellogg  &  Harford,  No. 
1133,  1808-9  ;  San  Bernardino,  Parish  Bro.,  No.  865,  1881.— Mud  Springs, 
Upper  Yellowstone,  T.  C.  Porter,  1871. 

The  bulbous  character  of  the  base  of  the  culm,  although 
usually  manifest,  is  sometimes  wholly  wanting,  as  in  Prof.  Porter's 
specimens  from  the  Upper  Yellowstone. 

Prof.  Thurber's  description  in  the  Botany  of  California  applies 
only  to  the  Californian  plant  (M.  Californica);  from  the  distri- 
bution given,  however,  and  the  authors  cited,  it  is  evident  that 
he  supposed  this  to  be  identical  with  Geyer's  plant,  which  is 
typically  represented  by  Cusick's  specimens,  and  also  my  M. 
spectabile.  I  have  endeavored  to  point  out  the  characters  that 
distinguish  these  three  species,  which,  to  me,  appear  sufficiently 
well  marked  to  leave  little  doubt  of  their  specific  rank. 

11.  Melica  bulbosa,  Geyer,  in  Hook.  Jour.  Bot.,  viii,  1856,  19  (without  description); 
Gray,  Proc.  Am.  Acad.,  viii,  409. 

Culms  bulbous  at  the  base,  growing  singly  or  densely  tufted, 
usually  about  2  ft.  high,  simple  ;  sheaths  and  upper  surface  of 
the  leaves  scabrous  or  (in  Howell's  specimens)  retrosely  pubes- 
cent ;  panicle  slender  erect,  the  short  1-3  flowered  branches 
appressed ;  spikelets  5-7.  lin.  long  with  6-8  perfect  florets ; 
empty  glumes  obtuse,  the  first  about  3  lin.  long,  the  second  a  line 
longer  and  nearly  equaling  the  third  or  first  flowering  glume, 
which  is  oblong  lanceolate,  obtuse  or  notched  at  the  tip  and  gen- 
erally larger  and  firmer  in  texture  than  in  M.  Californica. 

Hab. — Oregon :  "Rocky  ravine,  Upper  Platte,  and  only  seen  in  one  grassy 
spot,"  Geyer,  No.  11  ;  Union  Co.,  W.  C.  Cusick,  No.  900,  1880  and  900  a,, 
1882  ;  Bolander,  Kellogj?  &  Co.,  1872  ;  Henderson,  1882  ;  E.  Hall,  No.  635, 
1871  ;  Howell,  1881.  Washington  Territory:  T.  S.  Brandegee,  No.  1182, 
1883.  Nevada  :  Wheeler,  1872 ;  West  Humboldt  Mts.,  alt.  8500  ft., 
S.  Watson,  No.  1304,  1867.  Idaho :  Bois  City,  Dr.  J.  E.  Wilcox,  1883. 
Utah:  Wasatch  Mts.,  alt.  9000  ft.,  M.  E.  Jones,  1879;  Ogden,  J.  M. 
Coulter,  1872.  Montana:  Belt  Mts.,  alt.  6000  ft.,  Scribncr,  No.  386,  1883 
(spikelets  crowded  above,  7-8  lin.  long  and  5-7  flowered). 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF  PHILADELPHIA.  47 

12.  Melica  bromoides,  Gray,  Proc.  Am.  Acad.,  viii,  409;  Thurber  in  S.  Wat.  Bot. 

Cal.,  ii,  304.     M.  Geyeri,  Munro,  ex  Bolander,  Proc.  Cal.  Acad.,  iv,  130.     M. 
poseoidcs  and  M.  p.  var.  bromoides,  Nos.  6120,  40  and  6119  of  Bolander's  dis- 
tributed sets.     Qlyceria  bullosa,  Buckley,  Proc.  Phila.  Acad.,  1862,  95! 
Hab. — California:  Redwoods,  Coast  Range,  Mt.  Dana,  Bolander,  No. 

6119 ;  San  Francisco,  No.  6120 ;  Woods,  Ukiah,  Mendocino  Co.,  Bolander, 

No.  40.     Oregon  :  Near  Waldo,  Thos.  Howell. 

Note. — Mr.  Howell  sends  from  Oregon  (No.  335,  1884)  a  form 
that  diners  from  the  type  in  its  more  open  and  fewer-flowered 
panicle  ;  the  flowering  glumes  are  also  considerably  longer,  and 
entire,  or  but  slightly  notched  at  the  tip,  without  any  awn. 
This  form  has  a  decided  festucoid  "  look,"  and  may  be  designated 
as  var.  Howellii. 

13.  Melica  subulata.     Bromus  subulatus,  Griseb.  in  Ledeb.  Fl.  Boss.,  iv,  358;  Gray, 

Proc.  Am.  Acad.,  viii,  410.  M.  acuminata,  Bol.,  Proc.  Cal.  Acad.,  iv,  104; 
Thurber  in  S.  Wats.  Bot.  Cal.,  ii,  305.  M.  poxoides,  var.  acuminata,  of 
Bolander's  distribution,  No.  4698. 

Hab. — California:  Mendocino  Co.,  Bolander,  1866.  Oregon:  E.  Hall, 
No.  645,  1871;  "Low  mountains,"  Union  Co.,  W.  C.  Cusick,  No.  876, 
1880;  "Along  mountain  streams,"  Howell,  1880,  distributed  sub  nom. 
"M.  Geyeri"  ;  Kellogg  and  Harford,  No.  1112,  1868-9;  Suavie's  Island, 
Howell,  1883.  Washington  Terr.  :  Woods,  Columbia  River,  W.  N.  Suks- 
dorf,  1882  ;  G.  R.  Vasey,  No.  129,  1883. 

Festuca  subulata,  Brong.,is  cited  as  a  S3'non3Tm  for  this  species 
by  Dr.  Gray  and  Prof.  Thurber.  The  description,  in  Led.  Fl.  Ross., 
of  F.  subulata,  Brong.,  and  the  synonyms  there  quoted  point  to  a 
very  different  grass.  I  would  rather  concur  with  the  opinion 
expressed  by  Prof.  E.  Hackel,  that  F.  pauciflora,  Thurber,  in  S. 
Wats.  Bot.  Cal.,  ii,  318  (No.  6073,  Bolander),  is  the  F.  subulata, 
of  Brongard,  and  not  Thunberg's  F.  pauciflora. 

14.  Meliea  Harfordii,  Boland.  in  Proc.  Calif.  Acad.,  iv,  102;  Thurber  in  S.Wats, 

Bot.  Calif.,  ii,  305. 

Hab. — California  :  Canons,  Santa  Cruz  Coast,  Bolander,  and  Redwood 
on  the  Upper  Mattole  River,  No.  6424  :  Sierra,  alt.  4000  ft.,  Bolander,  Kel- 
logg &  Co.,  1872  ;  G.  R.  Vasey,  1875  (these  specimens  show  well  the  tufted 
habit  of  the  species)  ;  J.  G.  Lemmon.  Oregon :  Waldo,  Howell,  June, 
1884  ;  L.  F.  Henderson,  1883.  Washington  Territory  :  Willamette  Slough, 
Howell,  May,  1882  ;  Dry  rocky  hillsides,  Columbia  River,  Klickitat  Co.,  W. 
N.  Suksdorf,  1882. 

"  This  grass  I  collected  in  June,  1864,  in  a  gulch  near  the 
summit  of  Santa  Cruz  Mts.  It  grows  in  large  tufts  3-6  ft.  high, 
the  spikelets  breaking  asunder,  even  in  what  appear  to  be  }-oung 
specimens,   at   the   slightest  touch.     Panicle   contracted,  erect, 


48  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

slightly  drooping  at  the  apex,  caused  by  the  club-shaped  heavy 
top,  often  9  in.  long,  with  a  few  or  even  a  single  branch  far  below 
the  main  panicle.  This  spring  I  noticed  the  same  grass  near 
Ukiah." — Bolander  in  Herb.  A.  Gray. 

In  Bolander's  specimens  the  spikelets  are  about  5  lin  long,  and 
less  than  a  line  in  width ;  the  second  empty  glume  is  scarcely  3 
lin.  long,  and  the  slender  awn  of  the  flowering  glume  is  about  a 
line  in  length.  In  the  Oregon  specimens  the  spikelets  are  8  lin. 
long  and  nearly  2  lin.  in  width,  with  the  second  glume  nearly  5 
lin.  long. 

15.  Melica  aristata,  Thurb.  in  Bolander's  Revision  of  the  Melicfc,  Proc.  Calif.  Acad., 
iv,  103,  and  in  S.  Wats.  Bot.  Calif.,  ii,  p.  305. 

Hab. — California:  Yosemite  Valley,  Bolander,  No.  4861,  1866  (sheaths 
and  leaves  densely  pilose);  Bolander,  Kellogg  &  Co.,  1872  (culms  stout,  3 
ft.  high,  panicle  a  foot  long,  purplish)  ;  Emigrant  Gap,  M.  E.  Jones,  1882  ; 
Mt.  Shaster,  alt.  6000  ft.;  C.  G.  Pringle,  August,  1881  (culms  slender,  smooth, 
sheaths  and  leaves  scabious,  panicle  simple,  few-flowered,  dark  purple). 
Washington  Territory:  W.  N.  Suksdorf,  1883  (panicle  few-flowered, 
green. ) 

EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE  I. 

Spikelet  of  Melica  imperfecta. 

Same  with  the  outer  glumes  removed,  showing  the  nearly  sessile 

rudimentary  floret,  r. 
Spikelet  of  M.  Torreyana. 
Same  with  outer  glumes  removed. 
Spikelet  of  M.  fugax. 
Spikelet  of  M.  California. 
Spikelet  of  M.  bulbosa,  from  the  typical  plant. 
Anterior  view  of  floret  of  same,  showing  palea. 
Terminal  empty  glume  and  rudiment  of  same. 
Spikelet  of  M.  bulbosa,  the  florets  raised  above  the  empty  glumes  ; 

unusually  large,  from  the  Idaho  specimens. 
Spikelet  of  Melica  spectabile. 
Terminal  empty  glume  and  rudiment  of  same. 
Anterior  view  of  flowering  glume  of  same,  flattened  to  show 

veins,  etc. 
Seed  of  M.  bulbosa  from  Howell's  specimens. 
Spikelet  of  Melica  frutescens. 
Floret  of  same. 
Spikelet  of  Melica  Porteri. 

Dorsal  view  of  flowering  glume,  flattened  out  above. 
Spikelet  of  Melica  subulata. 
A  floret  from  the  spikelet  of  Melica  bromoides. 

All  enlarged  on  the  same  scale,  excepting  fig.  14. 


Fig. 

1. 

<< 

2. 

<< 

3. 

<< 

4. 

(< 

5. 

<< 

6. 

<( 

7. 

(< 

8. 

<< 

9. 

<( 

10. 

«< 

11. 

<< 

12. 

u 

13. 

<< 

14. 

<< 

15. 

(< 

16. 

<i 

17. 

«< 

18. 

<< 

19. 

<i 

20. 

1885.]  natural  sciences  of  philadelphia.  49 

March  17. 

Mr.  George  W.  Tryon,  Jr.,  in  the  chair. 

Twenty-four  persons  present. 

The  following  papers  were  presented  for  publication  : — 

"  Entomologia  Hongkongensis. — Report  on  the  Lepidoptera  of 
Hongkong,"  by  F.  Warrington  Eastlake. 

"  Description  of  a  supposed  new  species  of  the  genus  Cyano- 
corax,"  by  Alan  F.  Gentry. 

The  death  of  Titian  R.  Peale,  a  member,  was  announced. 


March  24. 
The  President,  Dr.  Leidy,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-six  persons  present. 

Remarks  on  Mylodon. — Prof.  Leidy  remarked  that  among  the 
fossils  of  Mastodon,  Equus,  etc.,  from  the  salt  mines  of  New 
Iberia,  La.,  noticed  in  the  Proceedings  of  1884,  p.  22,  there  are 
three  teeth,  which  are  probably  to  be  referred  to  the  reputed 
Mylodon  Harlani.  Of  this  species  we  are  sufficiently  well 
acquainted  with  the  posterior  three  lower  molars,  but  know  little 
of  the  first  lower  molar,  and  nothing  of  the  upper  teeth.  One 
of  the  Louisiana  specimens  accords  in  form  and  size  with  the 
third  lower  molar,  in  the  best  preserved  jaw-fragment  (see 
Extinct  Sloth  Tribe,  pi.  xiv,  1,  2),  from  Big-bone-lick,  Ken., 
regarded  as  characteristic  of  Mylodon  Harlani.  The  other 
Louisiana  specimens,  in  comparison  with  the  complete  dental 
series  in  both  jaws  of  Mylodon  robustus,  as  represented  in  the 
famous  memoir  of  Prof.  Owen,  are  so  unlike  any  of  the  teeth  of 
this  animal,  that  they  might  readily  be  considered  as  pertaining 
to  another  genus.  One  of  the  specimens,  of  which  the  tritu- 
rating extremity  and  a  transverse  section  are  represented  in  the 
outline  figures  1;  2,  he  took  to  be  a  first  lower  molar.  It  has  lost 
all  its  cementum,  but  is  otherwise  well  preserved.  It  is  worn  off 
in  deep  slopes,  of  which  the  posterior  is  more  than  an  inch 
long,  and  the  anterior  little  less  than  an  inch.  The  transverse 
section  is  reniform,  widest  in  front,  and  agrees  in  shape  and  size 
with  a  fragment  of  the  corresponding  tooth  (pp.  cit.,  pi.  xvi,  19  a) 
retained  in  the  jaw-fragment  from  Kentucky.  In  all  the  teeth  of 
Mylodon  robustus,  the  triturating  surface  inclines  comparatively 
little  from  a  level.  Such  also  is  the  case  in  all  the  teeth  of  the 
ramus  of  a  lower  jaw,  from  Natchez,  Miss.,  attributed  to  a  half- 


50 


PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF 


[1885. 


grown  animal  of  Mylodon  Harlani,  preserved  in  our  museum. 
In  this,  among  some  rude  casts  in  plaster,  the  originals  of  which 

were  described  by  Dr. 
Harlan,  under  the  name 
of  Orycterotherium  mis- 
souriense  (Am.  Jour.  Sci., 
1843,  G9),  and  subse- 
quently7 referred  to  Mylo- 
don Harlani,  is  one  of 
a  lower-jaw  fragment, 
which  contains  the  first 
molar,  and  the  mutilated 
base  of  the  second.  The 
latter,  in  the  perfect  state, 
would  appear  to  accord 
in  shape  and  size  with 
the  corresponding  tooth 
l.  in    the     Kentucky    jaw- 

fragment,   referred    to    3Iylodon  Harlani.      The   first   molar   is 
unlike  that  of  Mylodon  robustus,  but  sufficiently  accords  in  size, 

shape,  and  condi- 
tion of  wear,  with 
the  Louisiana  tooth 
to  regard  this  as 
pertaining  to  the 
same  animal.  The 
remaining  Louisi- 
ana specimen  is 
not  only  unlike 
any  of  the  teeth  of 
Mylodon  ?'obustus, 
but  differs  from 
them  to  such  a 
degree  as  to  render  it  doubtful  whether  it  belongs  to  the  same 
genus.     In  comparison  with  other  teeth  of  the  lower  or  upper 

series,  in  size  and 
shape,  it  accords 
with  the  canine 
molars  of  Megalonyx 
more  than  it  does 
with  any  of  the  teeth 
of  Mylodon.  The 
triturating  extrem- 
ity and  transverse 
section  are  repre- 
sented  in  the  outlines 
3  and  4.  It  is  more 
uniformly  elliptical  in  transverse  section  than  in  the  canine 
molars  of  Megalonyx,  and  is  devoid  of  the  abrupt  median  bulge 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  51 

inwardly  of  the  latter.  Regarding  it  as  a  first  upper  molar, 
it  is  twice  the  breadth  of  the  corresponding  tooth  of 
Mylodon  robustus,  not  only  absolutely,  but  also  proportion- 
ately in  comparison  with  all  the  other  teeth,  except  the  last 
one  of  the  lower  series.  The  triturating  extremity  is  worn  away 
obliquely  and  concavely  behind  for  about  two-thirds  the  breadth 
of  the  tooth,  and  obliquely  in  front  the  remaining  third  of  the 
breadth,  but  the  slopes  extend  only  half  the  depth  observed  in 
the  accompanying  specimen  of  the  first  lower  molar.  In  view  of 
the  dentition  of  Mylodon  robustus,  it  seems  improbable  that  this 
tooth  should  belong  to  an  animal  of  the  same  genus,  nor  would  it 
appear  to  be  adapted  as  an  opponent  to  the  comparatively 
narrow,  long-pointed  tooth  which  accompanies  it.  Nevertheless, 
he  was  suspicious  that  both  these  teeth  may  pertain  to  the 
Mylodon  Harlani,  partly  from  the  fact  that  the  lower-jaw 
fragment,  originally  referred  to  Orycterotherium  missouriense, 
and  then  to  the  latter,  contains  a  first  molar  like  the  Louisiana 
specimen,  and  partly  from  the  fact  that  the  jaw-fragment  was 
accompanied  by  an  isolated  molar  tooth  nearly  resembling  the 
supposed  upper  first  molar  from  Louisiana.  A  plaster  cast  of 
the  tooth  referred  to  Orycterotherium,  of  which  the  triturating 
extremity  and  transverse  section  are  represented  in  the  outlines 
5  and  6,  though  rather  smaller,  is  sufficiently  like  the  corres- 
ponding Louisiana  tooth  to  render  it  probable  this  belonged  to 
the  same  animal.  Admitting  that  the  two  Louisiana  specimens 
may  not  belong  to  the  reputed  Mylodon  Earlani,  he  felt  that  the 
coincidence  of  facts  is  such  as  not  to  justify  a  conclusion  to  refer 
them  to  a  new  genus,  and  if  further  discovery  should  demon- 
strate that  they  really  pertain  to  this  animal,  it  becomes  a 
question  whether  the  difference  of  the  teeth  from  those  of  Mylodon 
robustus  is  not  sufficient  to  restore  the  name  of  Orycterotherium, 
missouriense. 

Fig.  1.  Outer  view  of  the  first  lower  molar;  Louisiana  speci- 
men ;  length,  85  mm.  Fig.  2.  Transverse  section  ;  the  front 
above,  the  outer  side  to  the  right ;  fore  and  aft,  24  mm. ;  short 
diameter,  IT  mm.  Fig.  3.  Outer  view  of  the  first  upper  molar, 
Louisiana  specimen  ;  length,  83  mm.  Fig.  4.  Transverse  sec- 
tion ;  fore  and  aft,  34  mm.;  short  diameter,  19  mm.  Fig.  5. 
Outer  view  of  cast  referred  to  Orycterotherium ;  length,  67  mm. 
Fig.  6.  Transverse  section;  fore  and  aft,  29  mm. ;  short  diameter, 
17  mm. 

The  following  were  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


52  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

A  REVIEW  OF  THE  AMERICAN  GENERA  AND  SPECIES  OF  BATRACHID.E. 
BY    SETH    E.    MEEK  AND   EDWARD  A.  HALL. 

In  the  present  paper  we  have  attempted  to  collect  the  synonymy 
of  all  the  genera  and  species  of  Batrachida1  known  from  American 
waters. 

The  specimens  examined  by  us  all  belong  to  the  Museum  of  the 
Indiana  University. 

Analysis  of  Genera  of  Balrachidse. 
a.  Dorsal   spines   two ;    opercle   very  small,   its   posterior  part 
developed   as   a   single    strong    spine ;    subopercle    feebly 
developed,  narrowed   and   not   ending   in   a   spine ;    body 
scaleless. 
b.  Spines  of  dorsal  fin  and  operculum  hollow  and  connected 
with  venom  glands  ;  lateral  line  on  sides  of  body  single ; 
no  canine  teeth.  Thalassophryne.     1. 

bb.  Spines  solid,  without  venom  glands ;  several  lateral  lines 
on   sides  of  head   and   body,  composed  of  pores  and 
shining   spots,    some    of  these    accompanied   by  cirri ; 
canine  teeth  present;  vertebrae  12  +  31  ;  frontal  region 
depressed,  forming  a  triangular  area  below  level  of  tem- 
poral region,  its  median  ridge  very  low.    Porichthys.    2. 
aa.  Dorsal    spines    three ;    opercle    developed    as    two    strong 
diverging   spines ;    subopercle   rather    strong,   with   two 
spines  similar  to  those  of  opercle. 
c.  Body  scaleless ;  branches  of  subopercular  spine  parallel, 
the  lower  branch  much  the  shorter ;  vertebra?  10  +  22 ; 
frontal  region  not  depressed,  its  median  ridge  promi- 
nent. Batraciius.     3. 
cc.  Body  scaly ;   branches  of  subopercular  spine   subequal 
and  diverging  ;  frontal  region  broad,  flat  and  slightly 
depressed,  its  median  ridge  rather  prominent. 

Batrachoides.     4. 

1.  THALASSOPHRYNE. 
Thalassophryne  Giinther,  Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  iii,  1801,  174  (maculosa). 
In  this  genus  only  five  species  are  recognized.  These  have  been 
well  described  by  Dr.  Giinther  and  Dr.  Steindachner.  They  are 
noted  for  the  development  of  poison  glands  in  connection  with 
their  spinous  armature. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  53 

Analysis  of  Species  of  Thalassophryne. 
Common  Characters. — Dorsal  spines  two ;  opercle  very  small, 
its  posterior  part  developed  as  a  single  strong  spine  ;  subopercle 
feebly  developed,  narrowed  and  not  ending  in  a  spine;  no  scales 
on  body.  Spines  hollow  and  connected  with  venom  glands. 
Lateral  line  on  sides  of  body  single  ;  no  canine  teeth.     America. 

a.  Dorsal  and  anal  fins  joined  to  the  caudal ;  teeth  on  premaxil- 
laries  smaller  than  on  lower  jaw ;  eye  very  small ;  lower  jaw 
the  longer.     D.  11-20  ;  A.  18  or  19. 
b.  Anterior  teeth  on  jaws  in  two  rows. 

c.  Pectoral  fins  short,  their  tips  reaching  just  to  front  of  anal ; 

head  as  wide  as  long ;  opercular  spine  about  \  length  of 

head  ;  caudal  ^  length  of  head.     Color  chocolate-brown; 

no  distinct  dark  bands  on  head ;  body,  except  belly  and 

under  side  of  head  covered  with  numerous  small,  dark, 

round    spots  ;     anal   clear  brownish  gray,  edged  with 

dark  brown  ;    no  dark  bands  on  sides  of  body.     (Stein- 

dachner.)  Punctata.     1. 

cc.  Pectoral  fins  longer,  reaching  past  third  or  fourth  anal 

ray  ;  head  1^  times  as  long  as  wide  ;  opercular  spine 

about  ^  length  of  head  ;    caudal  §  of  length  of  head ; 

mouth  very  oblique.     Color  brownish,  marbled  with 

darker ;  two  distinct  bands  on  head  ;  dorsal  and  anal 

with  brown  spots  arranged  in  distinct  rows  ;  six  dark 

bands  on  sides  of  body,  the  first  at  spinous  dorsal,  the 

others  along  the  base  of  soft  dorsal.     {Steindachner.) 

Amazonica.  2. 
bb.  Anterior  teeth  on  lower  jaw  forming  a  band  ;  mouth  mod- 
erately oblique  ;  head  less  than  3  in  length  of  body ; 
interorbital  width  5^  to  5^  in  length  of  head.  Color  more 
or  less  clear  reddish  brown  ;  belly  brownish  yellow  ;  base 
of  fins  reddish  brown  or  whitish,  the  upper  part  of  the  fins 
deep  dark  brown,  the  two  colors  separated  by  a  distinctly 
marked  whitish  streak.  (Steindachner.)  Nattereri.  3. 
aa.  Dorsal  and  anal  fins  not  joined  to  the  caudal. 

d.  Dorsal  and  anal  fins  rather  short  (D.  11-19;  A,  18); 
pectoral  fins  short,  their  tips  reaching  to  origin  of 
anal.  Color  brown,  marbled  with  darker ;  pectoral 
fins  and  sides  of  body  with  some  round  black  spots ; 
chin  and  ventrals  brownish  ;  belly  white.   (G'unther.) 

Maculosa.     4. 


54  PROCEEDINGS    OF   THE   ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

dd.  Dorsal  and  anal  fins  longer  (D.  11-24 ;  A,  24)  ;  pec- 
toral fins  longer,  their  tips  reaching  to  sixth  anal 
ray.  Color  of  head,  body,  and  fins  brown,  with  a 
network  of  }rellowish  lines  ;  dorsal,  anal,  caudal 
and  pectoral  fins  with  white  margins.     {Gunther.) 

Reticulata.     5. 

1.  Thalassophryne  punctata. 

Thalassophryne  punctata  Steindachner,  Ichthyol.  Beitrilge,  v,  1876,  121 
(Bahia ;  Porto  Segro.) 

Habitat. — Coast  of  Brazil. 

This  species  is  known  to  us  only  from  Steindachner's  descrip- 
tion. 

2.  Thalassophryne  amazonica. 

Thalassophryne  amazonica  Steindachner,  Ichthyol.  Beitriige,  v,  1876, 
113  (Amazon  River). 

Habitat. — South  America,  Amazon  Basin,  in  fresh  water. 
This  species  is  known  to  us  only  from  the  description  of  Stein- 
dachner. 

3.  Thalassophryne  nattereri. 

Thalassophryne  nattereri  Steindachner,  Ichthyol.  Beitriige,  v,  1876,  115 
(Para). 

Habitat. — Amazon  Basin  ;  Para. 

This  species  is  known  to  us  only  from  the  description  of  Stein- 
dachner. 

4.  Thalassophryne  maculosa. 

'.'  ?  Batrachus  (jronovii  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  xii, 

1837,  482  (America). 
?  ?  Callionymus  niqui  Gronow,  Cat.  Fish.,  Ed.  Gray,  1854,  45. 
Thalassophryne  maculosa  Gunther,   Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  1861,  175 

(Puerto  Cabello) ;  Gunther,  Fishes  of  Central  America,  1869,  436, 

pi.  68,  fig.  1  (Puerto  Cabello). 

Habitat. — Eastern  Coast  of  Central  America ;  Puerto  Cabello. 

This  species  is  known  to  us  only  from  the  description  of  Dr. 
Gunther. 

Batrachus  gronovii  of  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes  =  Gallionymus 
niqui  Gronow,  perhaps,  belongs  to  some  species  of  this  genus ; 
but  of  this  there  can  be  no  certainty,  the  descriptions  are  too 
imperfect. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  55 

5.  Thaiassophryne  reticulata. 

Thalassopliryne  reticulata  Giinther,  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  London,  1864,  150 
155  (Panama);  Giinther,  Fish.  Central  America,  1869,  437,  pi.  68, 
fig.  2  (Panama);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  626 
(Panama). 

Habitat. — Western  Coast  of  Central  America  ;  Panama. 
This  species  is  known  to  us  only  from  the  accounts  of  Dr. 
Giinther  and  Professors  Jordan  and  Gilbert. 

2.  PORICHTHYS. 
Porichthys   Girard,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.    Sci.  Phila.,  1854,  141    (notatus  = 

margaritatus). 

This  genus  is  remarkable  for  the  development  of  its  mucous 
pores,  or  "  lateral  lines."  The  number  of  vertebrae  in  Porichthys 
is  much  greater  than  in  Batrachus,  and  the  skull  is  somewhat 
different. 

Analysis  of  Species  of  Porichthys. 

Common  Characters. — Dorsal  spines  two  ;  opercle  very  small, 
its  posterior  part  developed  as  a  strong,  single  spine  ;  suboper- 
culum  feebly  developed,  narrowed  and  not  ending  in  a  spine  ; 
no  scales  on  body;  spines  solid,  without  venom  glands  ;  several 
lateral  lines  on  sides  of  head  and  body,  composed  of  pores  and 
shining  spots,  some  of  these  accompanied  by  cirri ;  canine  teeth 
present;  vertebras  12  +  31;  frontal  region  depressed,  forming  a 
triangular  area  below  level  of  temporal  region,  its  median  ridge 
very  low.  Branchiostegals  6  ;  interorbital  area  short,  wide,  and 
with  shallow  grooves.  Air  bladder  more  or  less  deeply  divided 
into  lateral  parts.     Pyloric  appendages  none. 

a.  Abdomen  with  two  longitudinal  series  of  pores,  none  of  them 

accompanied  by  shining  bodies  ;  vomer  with  one  canine  tooth 

on  each  side.     Color  above  brown,  sides  and  belly  silvery; 

dorsal  fin  with  four  oblique  dark  bands  ;  posterior  half  of  the 

caudal   blackish,  or  with   blackish    spots;   anal   with   two 

blackish    spots    posteriorly.      Head    4f    in    total    length. 

D.  11-34 ;  A.  33.  Porosus.     6. 

aa.  Abdomen  with  four  longitudinal  series  of  pores ;    each  of 

which  is  accompanied  by  a  shining  silvery  body  ;  four  rows 

of  pores  on  sides  of  body.     Color  dark  brownish  above, 

below  with  brassy  reflections ;  dorsal  and  anal  with  dark 

margins,  a  dark  blotch  below  eye.     Head  3|  in  length.   D. 

11-37 ;  A.  33. 


56  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

b.  Teeth  on  palatines  numerous,  subequal,  none  of  them  much 
enlarged ;  two  canine  teeth  on  each  side  on  vomer,  the 
inner  ones  usually  about  \  length  of  outer  ones. 

Margaritatus.     'I. 

bb.  Teeth  on  palatines  unequal,  few ;  one  to  three  on  each  side 
enlarged  and  canine-like ;  one  canine  tooth  on  each  side 
on  vomer.  Porosissimus.     8. 

6.  Porichthys  porosus. 

Batrachus  porosus  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  xii,  1837, 
506  (Valparaiso);  Gay,  "Hist.  Chili  Zool.,  ii,  1844-54,  296  (Chili)." 

Porichthys  porosus  Gi'mther,  Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  iii,  1861,  177  (Chili); 
Jordan,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1884,  41. 

Habitat. — Western  Coast  of  South  America,  Chili. 
We  have  not  seen  this  species ;    we  only  know  it  from  the 
accounts  above  cited. 

7.  Porichthys  margaritatus.     Midshipman  ;  Singing-fish  ;  Cabezon  ;  Sapo. 

Batrachus  margaritatus  Richardson,  "  Voyage  Sulphur,  Fishes,  1844- 
45,  67  (Pacific  Coast  of  Central  America)." 

Porichthys  margaritatus  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882, 
368  (Cape  San  Lucas  ;  no  description);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  626  (Central  America ;  no  description);  Jordan  & 
Gilbert,  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1883,  958 ;  Jordan,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci., 
1883,  291  (Panama;  Vancouver's  Island);  Jordan,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  1884,  41. 

PoricJithys  notatus  Girard,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  1854,  141  ;  Girard,  U. 
S.  Pacific  R.  R.  Survey,  1859,  134  (San  Francisco);  Goode,  Bull.  U. 
S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1879,  32  (Pacific  Coast). 

Porichthys  porosissimus  Giinther,  Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  iii,  1861,  176 
(in  part;  Vancouver  Island);  Gill,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.,  1862, 
280  (California);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1880,  25 
(San  Diego;  no  description);  Bean,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1880,  83 
(West  Coast ;  San  Diego  ;  Santa  Barbara  ;  Monterey  ;  no  description); 
Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1880,  454  (Puget  Sound  ; 
San  Francisco ;  Monterey  Bay  ;  San  Luis  Obispo  ;  Santa  Barbara  ; 
San  Pedro ;  San  Diego ;  no  description) ;  Rosa  Smith,  Ichth.  San 
Diego,  1880  (San  Diego) ;  Jordan  &  Jouy,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1881, 
5  (Santa  Barbara  ;  Monterey  ;  San  Francisco  ;  Puget  Sound  ;  no  de- 
scription); Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1881,  65  (West 
Coast  U.  8.;  no  description);  Bean,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1881,  268 
(Puget  Sound);  Jordan  «fc  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1881,  274 
(Gulf  of  California  ;  no  description);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Syn.  Fish.  N. 
A.,  1883,  751;  (not  Batrachus  porosissimus  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes). 

Habitat. — Western  Coast  of  North  America,  from  British  Co- 
lumbia to  Panama. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  51 

This  species  has  been  confounded  with  porosissimus,  but  the 
absence  of  canine  teeth  on  palatines  (a  constant  character  in  all 
known  specimens),  warrants  its  separation.  Professor  Jordan  has 
also  examined  the  specimens  in  the  British  Museum.  Those  in 
that  collection  from  the  Atlantic  have  canine  teeth  on  the  pala- 
tines, the  character  assigned  to  P.  plectrodon,  while  these  are 
wanting  in  the  examples  from  the  Pacific. 

A  letter  from  Dr.  H.  E.  Sauvage  to  Professor  Jordan,  states 
that  the  t}rpe  of  Batrachus  porosissimus  Cuv.  and  Val.  "  has  a 
strong  canine  tooth  on  each  side  of  the  vomer  ;  on  the  palatines  are 
seen  at  first  a  strong,  then  some  small  teeth,  and  finally  a  strong 
curved  tooth." 

The  application  of  the  name  po?*osissimus  to  the  present  form 
is  thus  shown  to  be  improper. 

8.  Porichthys  porosissimus. 

Batrachus  porosissimus  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  xii, 
1837,  501  (Surinam  ;  Cayenne  ;  Rio  Janeiro  ;  St.  Catherine);  Jenyns, 
"Zool.  Beagle,  1842,  99." 

Porichtliys  porosissimus  Giinther,  Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  iii,  1861,  176 
(Brazil);  Jordan,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1881,  41 ;  Jordan  &  Gilbert, 
Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1882,  751 ;  Jordan,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil., 
1883  (South  America). 

Porichthys  plectrodon  Jordan,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  291  (Gal- 
veston); Goode  &  Bean,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  236  (Gulf  of 
Mexico;  no  description);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
1882,  307  (Gulf  of  Mexico ;  no  description);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  616  (Charleston;  no  description);  Jordan  & 
Gilbert,  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1883,  958  ;  Bean,  Cat.  Fish.  Exhibited, 
London  Exhibit,  1883,  47. 

Habitat — Atlantic  Coast  of  North  and  South  America,  from 
Charleston  to  Rio  Janeiro. 

We  have  nothing  to  add  to  the  very  detailed  description  of 
this  species,  given  by  Jordan  and  Gilbert  under  the  name  of 
Porichthys  plectrodon.  The  single  specimen  examined  by  us  is 
from  Pensacola. 

3.  BATRACHUS. 

Batrachus  Bloch  &  Schneider,  Systema  Ichthyol.,    1801,    42   {didactylus, 

tau,  etc.). 

In   this   genus  we  recognize  one  American  species,  with  two 
varieties  ;  all  found  in  the  Atlantic. 
5 


58  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Analysis  of  Species  of  Batrachus. 
Common  Characters. — Dorsal  spines  three ;  opercle  developed 
as  two  strong,  diverging,  subequal  spines  ;  subopercle  rather  well 
developed ;  branches  of  subopercular  spine  parallel,  the  lower 
branch  much  the  shorter.  No  scales  on  body.  Yertebra  10  +  22 ; 
frontal  region  not  depressed,  its  median  ridge  prominent.  Inter- 
orbital  long  and  narrow  with  a  deep  groove.  Branchiostegals  6. 
Teeth  conical  and  blunt ;  lateral  teeth  on  jaws  and  palatines  in 
single  rows.  A  large  foramen  in  axil  of  pectoral  fin  (in  North 
American  species).  Head  about  2f  in  length  of  body  ;  width  of 
head  from  3  to  4  in  length  of  body.  D.  111-24  to  28;  A. 
19  to  22. 
a.  Two  indistinct  rows  of  pores  on  sides  of  body. 

b.  A  fleshy  tentacle  between  nostrils  ;  color  brownish  or  dusky 

greenish,  mottled  with  darker  and  lighter,  the  dark  on 

sides  of  body  in  large  irregular  blotches  extending  from 

base  of  dorsal  to  about  §  distance  to  base  of  anal,  and 

more  or  less  covered  with  small  pale  spots ;   belly  and 

chin  plain  white  or  yellowish.     In  specimens  from  shallow 

water  or  algae,  the  brown  becomes  nearly  black  and  more 

extended,  the  belly  and  chin  spotted  with  darker,  and  top 

of  the  head  has  no  distinct  markings ;  in  specimens  from 

deeper  water  or  from  coral  sand,  the  coloration  is  more 

brownish   or   3^ellowish.     Soft   dorsal   with   six   to   nine 

oblique  light  bands  ;  anal  with  five  to  nine.     Caudal  and 

pectoral  fins  with  five  to  seven  light  cross-bands,  these 

formed  chiefly  from  light  spots ;  ventrals  with  some  dark 

markings.  Tau.     9. 

bb.  No  fleshy  tentacle  between  nostrils  ;  color  whitish  or  gray, 

everywhere  blotched  or  spotted  with  brownish  yellow  and 

black,  the  black  spots  on  top  of  head  smaller  and  more 

numerous  than  on  rest  of  body ;  a  large  black  blotch  at 

base  of  spinous  dorsal,  running  up  on  fin  ;  three  black 

blotches  along  base  of  soft  dorsal,  which  do  not  extend 

half  the  distance  to  base  of  anal.     Pectoral  with  black 

spots  which  do  not  form  cross-bands.      Ventrals  with 

more  dark  markings  than  in  tau.     Dorsal,  anal  and  caudal 

marked  nearly  as  in  tau.  Tau  pardus.     9  b. 

aa.  Two  very  prominent  rows  of  pores  on  sides  of  body  ;  teeth 

more  numerous  than  in  Batrachus  tau.     Cirri  above  eyes 

very  large  (Cuv.  and  Val.).  Tau  cryptocentrus.     9  c. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  59 

9  a.  Batrachus  tau.     Toad-fish  :  Sapo. 

Gadus  tau  Linnaeus,  Systema  Naturae,  ed.  xii,  1766,  439  (Carolina)  ; 
Scboepf,  Beobacht.  viii,  1788,  141  (New  York)  ;  Walbaum,  Genera 
Pise.,  1792,  135  (Eastern  America). 

Batrachus  tau  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  xii,  1837, 
478  (New  York)  ;  De  Kay,  New  York  Fauna,  Fish,  1842,  168,  pi. 
28,  f.  26  (New  York)  ;  Storer,  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1846,  132  ;  Giinther, 
Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  iii,  1861,  167  (New  York ;  New  Orleans) ; 
Gill,  Cat.  Fish.  East  Coast  N.  A.,  1861  (name  only) ;  Poey,  Syn, 
Pise.  Cuba,  1868,  390  (Cuba)  ;  Gill,  -Report  U.  S.  Fish  Comm., 
1871-72,  798  (New  Jersey  ;  Florida  ;  Cuba  ;  no  description)  ;  Baird, 
Report  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  1871-72,  824  (Wood's  Holl)  ;  Poey, 
Enumeratio  Pise.  Cubensium,  1875,  136  (Cuba)  ;  Jordan  &  Gilbert, 
Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1878,  372  (Beaufort,  N.  C.  ;  no  description)  ; 
Goode,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1879,  110  (Mouth  of  the  St.  John's 
River,  Fla.  ;  no  description)  ;  Goode  &  Bean,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
1879,  127  (Pensacola)  ;  Goode  &  Bean,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1879, 
334  (Pensacola  ;  Beasley's  Point,  N.  J.  ;  Norfolk,  Va.  ;  Punta  Russa, 
Fla.  ;  Wood's  Holl,  Mass.  ;  Indianola,  Tex.)  ;  Goode,  Bull.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  xiv,  1879,  32  (Wood's  Holl ;  no  description)  ;  Jordan  & 
Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1880,  83  (Wood's  Holl,  Mass.  ; 
Noank,  Conn.)  ;  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882, 
291  (Pensacola,  Fla.)  ;  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  TJ.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
1882,  616  (South  Carolina  ;  no  description)  ;  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Syn. 
Fish.  N.  A.,  1882,  750 ;  Bean,  Cat.  Fish.  Ex.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1883, 
47;  Jordan,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1884,  143  (Key  West;  no 
description). 

Lophius  bufo  Mitchill,  Trans.  Lit.  and  Phil.  Soc,  New  York,  1815, 
463  (New  York). 

Batrachoides  vernullasLe  Sueur,  "Mem.  Mus.,  v,  1819,  157,  pi.  17." 

Batrachoides  variegatus  Le  Sueur,  Jour.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  iii, 
1823,  399  and  401  (Egg  Harbor,  New  Jersey). 

Batrachus  variegatus  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  xii, 
1837,  484  (copied)  ;  Storer,  Fish.  Mass.,  1839,  74  (Holmes'  Hole)  ; 
Storer,  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1846,  133  (New  York)  ;  Gill,  Cat.  Fish. 
East  Coast  N.  A.,  1861,  43  (Name  only). 

Batrachus  celatus  De  Kay,  New  York  Fauna,  Fish,  1842,  170,  pi.  50, 
f.  161  (New  York)  ;  Storer,  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1846,  133 ;  Gill,  Cat. 
Fish.  East  Coast  N.  A.,  1861,  43  (Name  only). 

Habitat. — Atlantic  Coast  of  North  America,  from  Cape  Cod  to 
Cuba. 

We  have  examined  numerous  specimens  (from  3  to  9f  inches 
in  length)  of  this  species  from  Key  West,  Florida.  We  find 
among  these  apparently  the  varieties  A  and  B  of  Dr.  Giinther, 
and  also  intermediate  grades. 


60  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

In  the  young  specimens  the  head  is  more  narrow  and  rounded, 
and  the  lower  branch  of  the  subopercular  spine  proportionally 
larger  than  in  the  adult. 

The  deeper-water  specimens  are  lighter  in  coloration  than  those 
from  near  the  surface,  and  those  from  the  coral  reefs  are  paler 
than  those  from  the  green  algae  and  sea-wrack,  otherwise  no  dif- 
ferences seem  to  exist. 

9  b.  Batrachus  tau  pardus. 

Batrachus  tau  var.  pardus  Goode  &  Bean,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1879, 
336  (Pensacola,  Fla.);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1883, 
751. 

Batrachus  pardus  Goode  &  Bean,  Proc.  U.S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  336' 
(Gulf  of  Mexico);  Bean,  Cat.  Fish.  London  Exhibit.,  1883,  47  (Pensa- 
cola, Fla.);  Jordan,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1884,  45  (Egmont 
Key). 

Habitat. — Gulf  of  Mexico  ;  Egmont  Key  ;  Pensacola. 

The  coloration  of  ^tardus  is  very  different  from  that  of  tau.  In 
the  specimen  (13|  inches  in  length,  from  Pensacola)  which  we 
have  examined,  the  fleshy  tentacle  between  nostrils  is  wanting, 
while  in  all  the  specimens  of  B.  tau  this  is  present. 

The  former  seems  to  be  a  deep-water  variety  or  subspecies  of 
the  latter.  The  few  specimens  of  pardus  known  are  from  con- 
siderable depths.  The  texture  of  the  flesh  and  the  skin  is  less 
firm  than  in  tau. 

9  c.  Batrachus  tau  cryptocentrus. 

Batrachus  cryptocentrus  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss., 
1837,  485  (Bahia). 

Habitat — Eastern  Coast  of  South  America  (Bahia). 

This  form  is  known  only  from  the  meagre  description  of  Cuvier 
and  Valenciennes.  We  venture  to  place  it  among  the  varieties  of 
tau,  as  no  diagnostic  character  of  importance  appears  in  the 
description. 

4.  BATRACHOIDES. 

Batrachoidcs  Lacepede,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  iii,  1798,  306  (Batrachoidcs  tau 
Lacopede  =  Batrachus  surinamcnsis  Bloch). 

This  genus  is  closely  allied  to  Batrachus,  but  it  seems  to  be 
sufficiently  distinguished  by  the  scaly  body.  Two  species  are 
found  in  American  waters. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  01 

Analysis  of  Species  of  Batrachoides. 

Common  Characters. — Dorsal  spines  three ;  opercle  developed 
as  two  strong  diverging  spines  ;  subopercle  strongly  developed  ; 
branches  of  subopercular  spine  subequal  and  diverging ;  body 
covered  with  small  ctenoid  scales ;  frontal  region  broad,  flat,  and 
slightly  depressed,  its  median  ridge  rather  prominent. 

a.  Teeth  small,  abont  14  on  vomer;  anterior  teeth  on  lower  jaw 

in  a  band  ;  lateral  teeth  on  palatines  enlarged  and  canine-like, 

irregularly  arranged  ;  pectoral  without  pores  on  its  inner 

surface.  Color  grayish,  darker  on  sides  and  head ;  base  of  soft 

dorsal  pale,  with  a  dark  irregular  line  above ;  upper  part  of 

fin  lighter ;  caudal  nearly  black ;  anal  fin  light,  with  some 

dark  markings.     Head  3£  in  length  of  body ;  depth  6.     D. 

Ill— 29  ;  A.  26.  Surinamensis.     10. 

aa.  Teeth  larger,  about  8  on  vomer ;  anterior  teeth  on  lower  jaw 

in  two  rows  ;  lateral  teeth  on  lower  jaw  gradually  increasing 

to   middle  of  jaw,  behind  which  they  become  abruptly 

smaller,  and  then  gradually  increase  to  end  of  jaw ;  three 

teeth  on  middle  of  palatines  enlarged  and  canine-like,  the 

middle  one  the  smallest ;  pectoral  with  a  row  of  pores  on 

inner  surface.     Color  olivaceous  brown ;  some  indistinct 

dark  cross-bands  on  body  ;  dorsal  with  about  seven  very 

irregular  oblique  dark  bars,  anal  with  about  five;  pectorals 

and  caudal  dark,  with  few  light  cross-bands.     Head  3  in 

length  of  body.     D.  111-26  ;  A.  22.  Pacifici.     11. 

10.  Batrachoides  surinamensis. 

Batrachoides  tau  Lacepede,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  iii,  1798,  30G,  pi.  12,  fig. 
1  (not  Gadus  tau  L.) 

Batrachus  surinamensis  ~B\oc\i  &  Schneider,  Systemalchthyol.,  1801,  43, 
tab.  7  (Surinam);  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  xii,  1837, 
488  (Surinam);  Giinther,  Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  iii,  1861,  174  (Dema- 
rara  ;  British  Guiana  ;  West  Coast  Central  America). 

Habitat. — Atlantic  Coast  of  Tropical  America;  a  specimen 
recorded  by  Dr.  Giinther  from  the  Pacific  Coast. 

The  single  specimen  of  this  species  examined  by  us  is  from 
Curuca.  The  record  given  by  Dr.  Giinther  of  this  species  from 
the  Pacific  Coast  needs  verification.  It  was  not  found  at  Panama 
by  Professor  Gilbert. 


C2  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

11.  Batrachoides  pacifici 

BatracJius  pacifici    Giinther,    Cat.   Fish.   Brit.    Mus.,    iii,   1861,    173 

(Panama);  Giinther,  Fishes  Central  Amer.,  1869,  435  (Panama). 
Batrachoides  pacifici  Gill,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1863,  170  (West 

Coast  of  Central  America);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish. 

Com.,  1882,  3  (Panama;  no  description);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc. 

U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  626  (Panama ;  no  description). 

Habitat. — West  Coast  of  Tropical  America ;  Panama. 

The  single  specimen  of  this  species  examined  by  us  is  from 
Panama,  at  which  place  the  species  was  found  to  be  abundant  by 
Professor  Gilbert. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  63 


A  REVIEW  OF  THE  SPECIES  OF  THE  GENUS  PIMEPHALES. 
BY   WILLIS   S.   BLATCHLEY. 

I  have  examined  numerous  specimens  of  Pimephales  and 
Hyborhynchus  from  various  parts  of  the  United  States,  with  a 
view  to  discrimination  of  the  species. 

The  genus  Hyborhynchus  is  evidently  unworthy  of  retention, 
and  the  entire  group  is,  in  my  opinion,  composed  of  but  two 
species,  Pimephales  promelas  and  Pimephales  notatus. 

I  give  the  synonymy  of  each  and  an  analytical  key  giving  the 
principal  characters  by  which  they  may  be  separated. 

The  specimens  examined  belong  to  the  Museum  of  the  Indiana 
University. 

a.  Body  comparatively  short  and  deep,  the  greatest  depth  about 

4  times  in  length  of  body ;  head  short,  convex,  almost  as 

broad  as  long  in  the  adult,  its  length  4  in  body  ;  mouth 

slightly  oblique  ;  lateral  line  of  various  lengths,  sometimes 

wanting   on  twenty  or  more  scales ;   sometimes   complete 

(variety    confertus) ;    origin    of    dorsal    midway   between 

pupil  and  base  of  caudal ;  ventrals  reaching  to  or  beyond 

first  ray  of  anal ;  head,  dorsal  and  pectoral  fins  of  breeding 

males    jet   black,   the    snout  with    a    few   moderate-sized 

tubercles  ;  scales  8-47-6.  Promelas.     1. 

aa.  Body  elongate,  rather  slender,  the  greatest  depth  about  4f 

times  in  length  of  body  ;   head  comparatively  long,  its 

length  4i  in  body,  its  surface  much  depressed  above  and 

descending  abruptly  in  front  of  nostrils  ;  mouth  horizontal; 

lateral  line  complete  ;  origin  of  dorsal  midway  between 

snout  and  base  of  caudal ;  ventrals  not  reaching  vent ; 

males  in  spring  with   16   large   nuptial   tubercles,  often 

accompanied  by  a  small  protuberance  of  skin,  resembling 

a  barbel,  at  angle  of  mouth  ;  scales  6-44-4.      Notatus.     2. 

1.  Pimephales  promelas  Raf. 

Pimephales  promelas  Rafinesque,  Ichth.  Oh.,  1820,  53  (Lexington, 
Ky.);  Kirtland,  Rept.  Zool.  Ohio,  1838,  194;  Kirtland,  Bost.  Jour. 
Nat.  Hist.,  iii,  J838,  475  ;  Storer,  Synopsis,  1846,  418 ;  Agassiz, 
Amer.  Jour.  Sci.  Arts,  1855,  220 ;  Putnam,  Bull.  M.  C.  Z.,  1863,  8 ; 
Giinther,  Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  vii,  1868,  181  ;  Jordan,  Ind.  Geol. 
Surv.,   1874,    224;    Jordan,  Bull.  Buff.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  1876,  94; 


64  PROCEEDINGS   OP   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Jordan,  Man.  Vert..  1st  cd.,  1876,  275  ;  2d  ed.,  1878,  288  ;  3d  ed., 
1880,  288  ;  Nelson,  Bull.  111.  Lab.  Nat.  Hist.,  i,  1876,  45  (Bailey's 
Creek,  111.,  Evanston,  111.) ;  Jordan  &  Copeland,  Check  List  Fresh 
Water  Fish.  N.  A.,  1876,  146;  Jordan,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  ix, 
1877,  32  ;  Jordan,  Annals  N.  Y.  Acad.  Sci.,  1877,  No.  4,  107  (Wis- 
consin R.,  Pecatonica  R.,  Ohio  R.,  Kentucky  R.);  Jordan,  Bull.  111. 
Lab.  Nat.  Hist.,  ii,  1878,  55  (Bailey's  Cr.;  Rock  R,,  111.);  Jordan  & 
Brayton,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  xii,  1878,  78  (Tributaries  Cumber- 
land R.);  Jordan,  Bull.  Hayden's  Geol.  Surv.,  iv,  1878,  402,  419  and 
783  (Rio  Grande);  Jordan,  Rept.  Geol.  Surv.  Ohio,  iv,  1882,  839; 
Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Synopsis  Fish.  N.  A.,  1883,  158  ;  Bean,  Cat.  Fish. 
Internat.  Fish  Exhibition,  London,  1883,  95  (Lake  Beaver,  Peters- 
burgh). 

Pimephales  maculosus  Girard,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1856,  180 
(Arkansas  R.);  Girard,  Pac.  R.  R.  Surv.,  x,  1858,  234  (Arkansas  R.). 

Pimephales  fasciatus  Girard.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1850,  180 
(Yellowstone  R.;  MilkR.);  Girard,  Pac.  R.  R.  Surv.,  x,  1858,  234 
(Yellowstone  R.;  MilkR.). 

Ilyhorhynchus  confertus  Girard,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1850,  179 
(Pecos  R.);  Girard,  Pac.  R.  R.  Surv.,  x,  1858,  233  (Pecos  R.);  Jor- 
dan &  Gilbert,  Synopsis  Fish.  N.  A.,  1883,  159. 

/ '/ u rgyrus  meletnocephalus  Abbott,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1860, 
325  (Lake  Whittelsey,  Minn.). 

Phn ephales  milesii  Cope,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1864,  282  (Detroit 
R.);  Gi'mther,  Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  vii,  1868,  181  (copied)  ;  Nelson, 
Bull.  111.  Lab.  Nat.  Hist,,  i,  1876,  45  ;  Jordan,  Man.  Vert,,  1st  ed., 
1876,  276. 

Pimephales  agassizii  Cope,  Cyp.  Penn.,  1866,  394  (Whitewater  R., 
Ind.);  Jordan,  Ind.  Geol.  Surv.,  1874,  224. 

Ilyhorhynchus  nigellus  Cope,  Zool.  Wheeler's  Expl.  W.  100th  Mer., 
v,  671  (Arkansas  R.,  Pueblo,  Col.). 

Pimephales  nigellus  Jordan,  Bull.  Hayden's  Geol.  Surv.,  iv,  1878,  664 
Rio  Grande  R.). 

Habitat. — Lake  Champlain  to  the  Upper  Missouri,  south  to 
Tennessee  and  the  Rio  Grande.  The  species  H.  confertus 
Girard,  is,  in  my  opinion,  not  a  distinct  species,  but  only  the 
western  form  of  promelas,  having  the  lateral  line  better 
developed. 

2.  Pimephales  notatus. 

Minnilus  notatus  Rafinesque,  Ichth.  Oh.,  1820,  47  (OhioR.). 

Hyborhynchus  notatus  Agassiz,  Amer.  Jour.  Sci.  Arts,  185."),  222 
(Frankfort,  Ky. ;  Scioto R. ;  Quincy,  111.;  Burlington,  Iowa;  Lebanon, 
Tenn.;  Natchez,  ^Miss. ;  Beardstown  and  La  Salle,  111.;  Rome,  N.  Y.; 
L.  Huron,  L.  Champlain);  Cope,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1804, 
282;  Cope,  Jour.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1808,  235;  Giinther,  Cat. 


188.0.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  6S 

Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  vii,  18G8,  182  (Montreal;  Kanawha  R.);  Cope, 
Cyp.  Penn.,  186G,  392  ;  Jordan,  Ind.  Geol.  Snrv.,  1874,  224  (L.  Michi- 
gan, Ohio  R.);  Nelson,  Bull.  111.  Lah.  Nat.  Hist.,  i,  1876,  45  ;  Jordan, 
Man.  Yert.,  1st  ed.,  1876,  275  ;  2d  ed.,  1878,  288  ;  3d  ed.,  1880,  288  ; 
Jordan,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1877,  45  (Lakes,  Laporte  Co., 
Ind.;  St.  Joseph's  R.,  Kankakee  R.,  Tippecanoe  R.,  Lower  Wabash 
R.,  White  R,,  Ind.);  Jordan,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  ix,  1877,  27; 
Jordan,  Annals  N.  Y.  Lye.  Nat.  Hist.,  xi,  1877,  373  (Rock  Castle 
R.,  Ky.);  Jordan,  Annals  N.  Y.  Acad.  Sci.,  i,  1877,  No.  4,  107  (L. 
Michigan,  Fox  R.,  Rock  R.,  Wisconsin  R.,  White  R.,  Ohio  R.,  Salt 
R.,  Rock  Castle  R.);  Jordan,  Bull.  111.  Lab.  Nat.  Hist.,  ii,  1878,  55 
(Mackinaw  Cr.,  Woodford  Co.;  McLean  Co.;  Rock  R.  at  Oregon; 
Little  Wabash,  Effingham  Co.;  111.  R.,  Peoria;  Crystal  Lake,  Mc- 
Henry  Co.,  111.);  Forbes,  Bull.  111.  Lab.  Nat.  Hist.,  ii,  1878,  79  (Food 
of  Hyborhynchus  notatus)]  Jordan  &  Brayton,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
xii,  1878,  63  and  78  (Chickamauga  R.,  Cumberland  R.);  Hay,  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  hi,  1880,  502  (Corinth,  Miss.;  Catawba  Cr.,  Miss.; 
Noxubee  R.);  Hay,  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Com.,  ii,  1882,  67  (Miss.  R., 
Yicksburg  ;  Big  Black  R.,  Yalabusha  R,  Tombigbee  R.,  Chicka- 
sawha  R.);  Jordan,  Rep.  Geol.  Surv.  Ohio,  1882,  iv,  840  ;  Jordan  & 
Gilbert,  Synopsis  Fish.  N.  A.,  1883,  159 ;  Bean,  Cat.  Fish.  Internat. 
Fish  Exhibition,  London,  1883,  95  (Yellow  Cr.,  Ohio);  Jordan  & 
Swain,  Proc  IT.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1883,  248  (Cumberland  R.,  Ky.). 
Pimephales  notatus  Gilbeit,  Proc.U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1884,  200  (Salt  Cr., 

Brown  Co.,  Ind.). 

Hyborhynchus  perspicuus  Girard,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1856,  179 

(Arkansan  R.);  Girard,  Pac.  R.  R.  Surv.,  x,  1858,  231  (Arkansas  R.). 

Hybognathus  perspicuus  Giinther,  Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  vii,  1868,  185. 

Hyborhynchus  tenellus  Girard,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1856,  179 

( Arkansas  R.);  Girard,  Pac.  R.  R.  Surv.,  x,  1858,  231  (Arkansas  R.). 

?  Hyborhynchus  puniceus  Girard,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.,  1856,  179 

(Canadian  R. );  Girard,  Pac.  R.  R.  Surv.,  x,  1858,  232  (Canadian  R.). 

Hyborhynchus  superciliosus  Cope,  Jour.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1868, 

234  (Kanawha  R.);  Jordan,  Man.  Yert.,  1st.  ed.,  1876,  276  ;  2d  ed., 

1878,-289  ;  3d  ed.,  1880,  289  ;  Jordan,  Bull.  IT.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  ix,  1877, 

27;  Jordan,  Bull.  111.  Lab.  Nat.  Hist.,  ii,  1878,  56  (Cache  R.  and 

Clear  Cr..  Union  Co.;    Rock  R.,  Ogle  Co.,  111.);  Jordan  &  Gilbert, 

Synopsis  Fish.  N.  A.,  1883,  160  ;  Jordan  &  Swain,  Proc.  IT.  S.  Nat. 

Mus.,  1883,  248  (Cumberland  R.). 

Habitat. — St.  Lawrence  River  to  Delaware  ;  Ohio  Yalley  and 
Great  Lake  Regions,  southward  to  Tennessee  and  Mississippi. 
Very  abundant 

The  nominal  species,  H.  superciliosus  Cope,  is,  as  has  already 
been  noted  by  Jordan  and  Swain,  but  a  spring  form  of  the  breed- 
ing male  of  notatus. 


66  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 


A    EEVIEW    OF    THE    AMERICAN    ELEOTRIDIN.E. 
BY  CARL  H.  EIGENMAN  AND  MORTON  W.  FORDICE. 

We  have  attempted  to  give  in  this  paper  the  synonymy  of  the 
genera  and  species  of  Eleotridinae  found  in  the  waters  of 
America,  with  analytical  keys  by  which  they  may  be  distin- 
guished. All  the  specimens  examined  belong  to  the  Museum  of 
the  Indiana  University,  most  of  them  having  been  collected  by 
Professor  Jordan. 

All  the  species  are  referred  by  Dr.  Gunther  to  a  single  genus, 
Eleotris.  This  group,  however,  seems  to  us  rather  of  the  nature 
of  a  subfamily.  An  examination  of  the  skeletons  of  some  of  the 
species  shows  important  differences,  which  we  must  regard  as 
having  generic  value. 

We  place  the  American  species  in  six  genera,  which  may  be 
characterized  as  follows  : — 

Analysis  of  Genera  of  Eleotridinae. 
Common  Characters. — Ventral  fins  separate,  each  with  one 
spine  and  five  soft  rays ;  dorsal  spines  six  or  seven. 
a.  Vomer  with  a  broad  patch  of  villiform  teeth ;  isthmus  very 
narrow;  gill-openings  extending  forward  below  to  posterior 
angle  of  mouth ;  teeth  villiform,  the  outer  scarcely 
enlarged  ;  vertebra?,  12  +  13  (dormitator)  ;  skull  above  with 
conspicuous  elevated  ridges,  one  of  these  bounding  orbit 
above ;  the  orbital  ridges  connected  posteriorly  above  by  a 
strong  cross-ridge  ;  a  sharp  longitudinal  ridge  on  each  side 
of  the  occipital,  the  two  nearly  parallel,  the  post-temporals 
being  attached  to  their  posterior  ends.  Insertions  of  post- 
temporals  widely  separated,  the  distance  between  them 
greater  than  the  rather  narrow  interorbital  width  ;  the  post- 
temporal  bones  little  divergent ;  top  of  head  depressed, 
both  before  and  behind  the  cross-ridge  between  eyes ;  a 
flattish  triangular  area  between  this  and  the  little  elevated 
supraoccipital  region ;  preopercle  without  spines ;  lower 
pharyngeals  with  slender  depressible  teeth,  and  without 
lamelliform  appendages  ;  scales  of  moderate  size,  ctenoid. 

Gobiomorus.     1. 
da.  Vomer  without  teeth  ;  isthmus  broad  ;  gill-openings  scarcely 
extending  forward  below  to  posterior  angle  of  preopercle  ; 
skull  without  crests. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  67 

b.  Body  and  head  entirely  scaly. 

c.  Lower  pharyngeal  teeth  setaceous,  the  bones  with  an  outer 
series  of  broad  flexible  lamelliform  appendages  or  teeth  ; 
body  short  and  elevated,  cyprinodontiform ;  teeth 
slender,  those  in  the  outer  row  scarce^  larger,  and 
movable;  top  ot  head  without  raised  crests,  flattish,  its 
surface  uneven;  post-temporal  bones  rather  strongly 
diverging,  the  distance  between  their  insertions  about 
half  the  broad  flattish  interorbital  space  ;  no  spine  on 
preopercle  or  branchiostegals ;  scales  large,  ctenoid. 
Species  herbivorous.  Dormitator.     2. 

cc.  Lower  pharyngeals  normal,  subtriangular,  the  teeth  stiff, 
villiform,  none  of  them   lamelliform ;   scales  of  mod- 
erate or  small  size  ;  body  oblong  or  elongate. 
d.  Body  moderately  robust,  the  depth  4-5^  times  in  the 
length  to  base  of  caudal ;  cranium  without  distinct 
median  keel ;  a  small  supraoccipital  crest. 
e.  Post-temporal    bones   little    divergent,   not  inserted 
close  together,  the  distance  between  their  insertions 
greater  than  the  moderate  interorbital  space,  or  3f 
in   length  of  head ;    top   of   skull   little   gibbous ; 
interorbital    region    sqmewhat    concave    or    chan- 
neled ;  lower  pharyngeals  narrower  than  in  Eleotris; 
preopercle  without  spine ;  scales  very  small,  ctenoid, 
about    100    in   a   longitudinal    series.      Vertebrae, 
11  +  13 ;  teeth  moderate,  the  outer  series  enlarged. 

Guavina.  3. 
ee.  Post-temporal  bones  very  strongly  divergent,  their 
insertions  close  together,  the  distance  between 
them  about  §  the  narrow  interorbital  space,  and 
less  than  |  the  length  of  the  head ;  top  of  skull 
somewhat  elevated  and  declivous ;  interorbital 
area  slightly  convex  transversely ;  lower  pharyn- 
geals rather  broad,  the  teeth  bluntish ;  preopercle 
with  partly  concealed  spine  directed  downward  and 
forward  at  its  angle ;  scales  moderate,  ctenoid,  45 
to  60  in  a  longitudinal  series.  Vertebrae  (pisonis) 
11  +  15  ;  teeth  small.1  Eleotris.     4. 

1  These  characters  of  the  skeleton  are  taken  from  Eleotris  pisonis,  and 
have  not  been  verified  on  other  species. 


68  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

dd.  Body  very  slender,  elongate,  the  depth  about  ^  the 
length  to  base  of  caudal ;  post-temporal  bones  short, 
strongly  divergent,  the  distance  between  their  inser- 
tions about  equal  to  the  narrow  interorbital  space,  or 
about  ^  length  of  head  ;  top  of  head  with  a  strong 
median  keel,  which  is  highest  on  the  occipital  region  ; 
no  supraoccipital  crest ;  preopercle  without  spine ; 
mouth  very  oblique ;  the  teeth  small ;  scales  very 
small,  cycloid.  Erotelis.     5. 

bb.  Body  naked  on  the  anterior  part ;  head  naked  ;  lower  jaw 
with  four  larger  recurved  teeth.  Gymneleotris.     6. 

1.  GOBIOMORUS. 

Gobiomorus  Lacepede,   Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  ii,  599,  1798  (dormitor,   etc.). 
PMlypnus   Cuvier   &   Valenciennes,    Hist.    Nat.    Poiss.,   xii,    255,    1837 

(dormitator). 
Lembus  Giinther,  Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  i,  505,  1859  (maculatus). 
Oobiomorus  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  TJ.  S.  Nat.  Mus  ,  1882,  571  (restricted 

to  dormitator) . 

This  genus  is  well  characterized  by  the  presence  of  vomerine 
teeth,  and  b}^  the  narrowness  of  the  isthmus.  Equally  good  char- 
acters may  be  taken  from  the  cranium,  which  is  provided  with 
elevated,  longitudinal  and  transverse  ridges,  which  are  not  found 
in  any  other  of  our  genera  of  this  t3rpe.  The  species  reach  a 
larger  size  than  those  of  our  other  genera. 

The  reasons  for  preferring  the  name  Gobiomorus  to  PMlypnus 
have  been  given  in  detail  by  Jordan  and  Gilbert  (loc.  cit.). 

Analysis  of  Species  of  Gobiomorus. 

Common  Characters. — Body  elongate ;  the  head  somewhat 
depressed  ;  body  compressed  behind.  Scales  ctenoid  ;  55  to  66  in 
a  longitudinal  series.  Dorsal  with  "7  spines  and  9  or  10  rays  ;  anal 
rays  I,  9  or  10;  lower  jaw  considerably  projecting;  teeth  in  jaw 
rather  small,  slender,  recurved,  the  outer  scarcely  enlarged  ;  teeth 
on  vomer  villiform,in  a  broad  crescent-shaped  patch ;  gill-openings 
extending  forward  to  below  posterior  angle  of  mouth,  the  isthmus 
being  very  narrow.  No  preopercular  spine ;  insertion  of  post- 
li-mporals  almost  midway  between  occipital  crest  and  edge  of 
skull ;  parietals  with  a  crest  running  from  insertion  of  post- 
temporal  forward  to  just  behind  eye,  where  they  are  connected 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  69 

by  a  thin,  high,  transverse  crest ;  supraocular  with  a  short  high 
crest,  extending  from  above  front  of  eye  back  to  posterior  edge 
of  orbit,  thence  extending  outward  parallel  with  the  transverse 
crest,  leaving  a  deep  groove  between  them ;  bony  projections 
before  and  behind  e}^e  prominent.  Vert.  12+13  (dormitator)', 
lower  pharyngeals  triangular,  with  slender  teeth. 

a.  Scales  large,  55  in  a  longitudinal  series  ;  28  scales  on  median 
line  between  occiput  and  front  of  spinous  dorsal.  Body 
robust ;  depth  4  in  length  ;  head  2f.  D.  VI-1,  9  ;  A.  1-10  ; 
crests  on  skull  very  high.  Lateralis.     1. 

aa.  Scales  moderate,  57  to  66  in  longitudinal  series ;  head  3  to  3^ 
in  length ;  depth  5  to  6. 
b.  Scales  in  median  line  from  occiput  to  front  of  spinous  dorsal 
26 ;  head  3^  in  length  ;  transverse  frontal  crest  not  con- 
tinuous.    D.  VI-1,  9  ;  A.  I— 10  ;  57  to  60  scales  in  a  longi- 
tudinal series.  Maculatus.     2. 
bb.  Scales  on  median  line  from  occiput  to  spinous  dorsal  35 ; 
transverse  frontal  crest  continuous, 
c.  Scales  medium,  57  to  60  in  a  longitudinal  series;  head  3£ 
in  length;  depth  5^.     D.  VI-1,  9;  A.  1-9;  crests  on 
skull  moderate.                                           Dormitator.     3. 
cc.  Scales  smaller,  66  in  a  longitudinal  series  ;  depth  6  in 
length ;  head  3.     D.  VI-1,  10.  Longiceps.     4. 

1.  Gcbiomorus  lateralis. 

Philypnus  lateralis  Gill,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1860,  123  (Cape 
San  Lucas);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1881,  232  (West 
Coast  Mexico);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  TJ.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  368 
(Cape  San  Lucas);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882, 
372  (Colima);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  377 
(Panama);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  380  (San 
Jose). 

Eleotris  lateralis  Giinther,  iii,  122,  1861  (Cape  San  Lucas). 

Habitat. — Pacific  Coast  of  America,  from  San  Jose  to  Panama. 

This  species  represents  on  the  Pacific  Coast  the  G.  dormitator 
of  the  Atlantic.  It  is  readily  distinguished  by  its  shorter  body, 
larger  scales,  and  by  the  greater  development  of  its  cranial 
crests. 


70  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

2.  Gobiomorus  maculatus. 

4         Lembus  maculatus  Giinther,  Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  i,  505,  1859  (Andes 
of  Ecuador);  Giinther,  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  Lond.,  1860,  236  (Ecuador, 
Esmeraldas). 
Meotris  lembus  Giinther,  Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  iii,  121,  1861  (Ecuador). 

Habitat. — Streams  of  Ecuador. 

This  species  is  known  to  us  only  from  the  descriptions  of  Dr. 
Giinther. 

3.  Gobiomorus  dormitator. 

Guavina  Parra,  Descr.  Dif.  Piezas  Hist.  Nat.  Cuba,  tab.  39,  fig.  i,  1787 
(Havana ;  fide  Poey). 

Gobiomorus  dormitor  Lacepede,  nist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  ii,  599,  1798  (from 
a  drawing  by  Plumier). 

Gobiomorus  dormitator  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882, 
572  (name  only). 

Platycephalus  dormitator  Bloch,  Syst.  Ichth.,  Plate  xii,  1790  (Mar- 
tinique); Bloch  &  Schneider,  Syst.  Ichth.,  60,  1801. 

Meotris  dormitatrix  Cuvier,  Regne  Animal,  ed.  ii,  1829  (Antilles); 
Oken,  Naturgeschichte,  vi,  173,  1836;  Giinther,  iii,  119,  1861  (Bar- 
badoes,  Jamaica,  Mexico). 

Philypnus  dormitator  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  xii,  255,  1837  (Porto  Rico, 
San  Domingo,  Martinique);  Poey,  Mem.  de  Cuba,  ii,  381,  1856  (Cuba); 
Girard,  U.  S.  and  Mexican  Boundary  Survey,  27,  plate  xii,  fig.  13, 
1859  (Rio  Grande);  Poey,  Syn.  Pise.  Cub.,  395,  1868  (Cuba);  Poey, 
Enum.  Pise.  Cub.,  128,  1875  (Mexico,  Rio  Grande,  San  Domingo, 
Martinique,  Jamaica);  Goode  &  Bean,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882, 
236  (name  only);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  631,  1882. 

Batrachus  guavina  Bloch  &  Schneider,  Syst.  Ichth.,  44,  1801  (based 
on  Guavina  of  Parra). 

Habitat. — Rio  Grande  to  Martinique,  in  fresh  waters. 

This  species  is  generally  common  in  the  streams  of  the  West 
Indies  and  Eastern  Mexico.  We  follow  later  writers  in  changing 
the  incorrectly  spelled  dormitor  of  Lacepede  to  dormitator. 
According  to  Poey,  the  type  of  Parra 's  Guavina,  still  preserved 
in  the  Museum  at  Madrid,  has  teeth  on  the  vomer,  and  is  therefore 
a  Gobiomorus,  not  a  Guavina.  The  many  specimens  examined 
by  us  are  from  Havana. 

4.  Gobiomorus  longioeps. 

Eleotris  longiceps  Giinther,  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  Lond.,  1864,  151  ;  Giinther, 
Fish.  Central  America,  1869,  440  (Nicaragua). 

Habitat. — Lake  Nicaragua. 

This  species  is  known  to  us  only  from  Dr.  Giinther's  description. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  71 

2.  DOBMITATOR. 

Prochilus  Cuvier,  Regne  Animal,  ed.  i,  1817  (mugiloides),  (preoccupied). 
Dormitator  Gill,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,    1862,   240  (gundlachi  = 

maculatus). 

This  genus  is  not  adopted  by  Dr.  Gunther,  but  it  seems  to  us 
well  founded,  its  peculiarities  in  dentition  being  important.  The 
name  Prochilus  at  first  given  to  this  group  is  preoccupied  by 
Prochilus  of  Illiger,  a  genus  of  mammalia,  as  well  as  by  the 
prebinominal  Prochilus  of  Klein,  which  belongs  to  the  Poma- 
centridae. 

The  known  species  of  this  type  are  very  closely  related  and 
should  perhaps  be  regarded  as  geographical  varieties  of  a  single 
one. 

Analysis  of  the  Species  of  Dormitator. 

Common  Characters. — Body  short,  robust ;  head  broad  and  flat 
above ;  mouth  little  oblique ;  maxillary  reaching  to  anterior 
margin  of  orbit ;  lower  jaw  little  projecting  ;  no  teeth  on  vomer  ; 
scales  large,  ctenoid,  30  to  33  in  a  longitudinal  series ;  skull 
much  as  in  Eleotris,  but  everywhere  broader.  D.  VII-1,  8 ;  A.  I, 
9  or  10 ;  no  spine  on  preopercle ;  post-temporals  inserted  midway 
between  occipital  crest  and  edge  of  skull ;  supraoccipital  crest  low. 

a.  Scales  large,  becoming  much  smaller  on  belly ;  25  series  on  a 
median  line  from  base  of  ventrals  to  vent;  18  series  across 
breast  from  pectoral  to  pectoral ;  18  on  a  median  line  from 
posterior  border  of  orbit  to  dorsal.  Interspace  between 
dorsals  equal  to  orbit.  Highest  anal  ray  If  in  head  ;  highest 
dorsal  ray  1^  in  head.    33  scales  in  a  longitudinal  series. 

Maculatus.  5. 
aa.  Scales  larger  than  in  maculatus,  not  much  smaller  on  belly  ; 
18  series  on  a  median  line  from  ventrals  to  vent;  13  series 
from  pectoral  to  pectoral;  16  on  a  median  line  from  pos- 
terior border  of  orbit  to  front  of  soft  dorsal ;  interspace 
between  dorsals  less  than  diameter  of  orbit.  Highest  anal 
ray  1|  in  head ;  highest  dorsal  ray  equals  head.  31  scales 
in  a  longitudinal  series.  Latifrons.     6. 

5.  Dormitator  maculatus. 

Sciama  maculata  Bloch,  "Ichth.,  tab.  299,  f.  2,"  1790  (West  Indies); 

Bloch  &  Schneider,  Syst.  Ichth.,  80,  1801  (copied). 
Eleotris  maculatus  Gunther,  iii,  112,  1861    (West  Indies ;  Trinidad  ;. 
Demerara);  Gunther,  Fish.  Cent.  Am.,  440,  1869  (Anamahal). 


*72  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Dormitator  macidatus  Goodc  &  Bean,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  236 

(Gulf  of  Mexico). 
Eleotris  mugiloides  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  xii,  226,  1837  (Martinique  ; 

Surinam). 
Eleotris  somnolentus  Girard,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1858,  169 

(Rio  Grande) ;  Girard,  U.  S.  and  Mex.  Bound.  Survey,  28,  pi.  12,  f. 

1-3,  1859  (Rio  Grande);  Giinther,  iii.  557,  1861  (Cordova). 
Dormitator  somnolenta  Poey,   "Repert.,  ii,  168,"  1868;  Poey,  Enum. 

Pise.  Cuben.,  128,  1875  (Cuba). 
Eleotris  omocyaneus  Poey,  Memorias,  ii,  269,  1860  (Havana). 
Dormitator  omocyaneus,  Poey,  Syn.  Pise.  Cuben.,  296,  1868  (Cuba); 

Poey,  Enumer.  Pise.  Cuba,  128,  1875  (Cuba). 
Eleotris  gundlacfri  Yoey,  Mem.,  ii,  272,  1860  (Cuba). 
Dormitator  gundlacM  Poey,    Syn.    Pise.    Cuben.,   396,  1868   (Cuba); 

Poey,  Enum.  Pise.  Cub.,  128,  1875  (Cuba). 
Dormitator  lineatus  Gill,    Proc.    Acad.    Nat.    Sci.   Phila.,    1863,   271 

(Savannah). 

Habitat. — East  Coast  of  America;  South  Carolina,  Texas, 
Louisiana,  south  to  Surinam ;  chiefly  in  fresh  water. 

As  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes  have  identified  the  type  of  Bloch's 
Scieena  maculata  with  their  Eleotris  mugiloides,  we  adopt  the 
latter  name  for  this  species.  We  are  unable  to  distinguish  the 
somnolentus  of  Girard  from  maculatus,  and  the  omocyaneus  of 
Poey  is  certainly  the  same.  Gill's  lineatus  is  also,  doubtless,  a 
young  example  of  the  same  type. 

We  find  nothing  (unless  it  be  the  greater  height  of  the  fins)  in 
the  description  of  Eleotris  gundlachi  Poey,  by  which  it  can  be 
distinguished  from  Dormitator  maculatus.  Poey 's  type  was  about 
8  inches  in  length,  and  its  large  size  ma}'  account  for  the  slight 
differences  indicated. 

The  single  specimen  studied  by  us  is  from  the  West  Indies. 
6.  Do'mitator  latifrons. 

Eleotris  latifrons  Richards,   "Voy.  Sulph.  Fishes,  57,  pi.  35,  f.  4-5," 

1837  (Pacific  Coast  Central  America). 
Eleotris  maculata  Giinther,   iii,  112,   1861  (Guayaquil),   (not  Scia'na 

maculata  of  Bloch). 
Dormitator  sp.,  Bean,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1880,  83  (Colima). 
Dormitator  maculatus  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1881, 
232  (Salina  Cruz);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.Nat.  Mus.,  1882, 
368  (Cape  San  Lucas);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
1882,  372  (Colima);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882, 
377  (Panama);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  380 
(Cape  San  Lucas);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish.  Com.,  1882, 
108  (Mazatlan);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1883,  632 
(Mazatlan). 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  73 

Dormitator  microphthalmus  Gill,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila.,  1863, 
170  (Panama). 

Habitat. — Pacific  Coast  of  Central  America,  from  Cape  San 
Lucas  southward  to  Panama. 

This  species  is  abundant  on  the  Pacific  slope  of  Mexico  and 
Central  America.  It  differs  from  D.  maculatus  in  few  respects, 
and  should,  perhaps,  be  regarded  as  a  variety  of  the  latter.  They 
have,  however,  not  yet  been  shown  to  intergrade. 

3.  GUAVINA. 

Guavina  Bleeker,  Esquissed'unSyst.  Nat.  Gobioid.,302, 187 4  {guavina). 

This  genus  is  externally  distinguished  from  Eleotris  only  by 
the  absence  of  preopercular  spine,  and  by  the  smaller  size  of  the 
scales.  The  skulls  in  the  two  genera  are,  however,  strikingly 
different,  and  we  think  that  the  two  groups  should  be  regarded 
as  generically  distinct.    We  know  only  one  species  of  this  genus. 

Analysis  of  Species  of  Guavina. 

a.  Body  stoutish,  oblong;  mouth  oblique;  maxillary  reaching 
opposite  middle  of  eye,  its  length  about  3^  in  head. 
Lower  jaw  little  projecting.  Teeth  in  broad  bands,  the 
outer  ones  enlarged.  Scales  on  head  imbedded ;  those  on 
body  very  small,  ctenoid  on  sides,  cycloid  on  back  and 
belly,  100  to  110  in  a  longitudinal  series.  Isthmus  very 
broad.  Pectorals  reaching  to  middle  of  spinous  dorsal. 
Highest  anal  ray  If  in  head.  Head  3|  in  length  to  base  of 
caudal ;  depth  4£  to  5£.  D.  VI,  I,  10  ;  A.  I,  9  or  10.  Post- 
temporals  inserted  twice  as  far  from  occipital  crest  as  in 
Eleotris  pisonis.  Parietals  ending  in  a  sharp  point 
behind.  Preopercular  spine  none ;  a  broad  thin  extension 
on  the  lower  limb  of  preopercle  taking  its  place.  Lower 
pharyngeals  triangular,  normal,  rather  narrow  ;  the  teeth 
small.     Vomer  without  teeth.  Guavina.     7. 

7.  Guavina  guavina. 

Eleotris  guavina  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  xii,  223,  1837  (Martinique)  ; 
Giinther,  iii,  124,  1861  (Demarara)  ;  Poey,  "Kepert.  i,  337,  1867  ;" 
Poey,  Syn.  Fish.  Cuba,  395,  1868  (Cuba)  ;  Poey,  Enum.  Pise.  Cuba, 
127,  1875  (Cuba). 

Habitat — East  Coast  of  tropical  America,  West  Indies,  south 
to  Surinam,  in  fresh  waters. 

6 


74  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

This  species  is  abundant  in  the  streams  of  Cuba.  The  num- 
erous specimens  examined  by  us  were  obtained  by  Prof.  Jordan 
in  the  Rio  Almendares,  near  Havana.  In  life  this  species  may 
be  readily  distinguished  from  Eleotris  pisonis,  which  abounds  in 
the  same  waters,  by  the  bright  cherry -colored  edgings  to  its 
ventrals  and  anal. 

4.  ELEOTRIS. 

Eleotris  "Gronow,  Mus.  Iehthyol.,  16,"  1757  (Non-binominal). 

Eleotris  Bloch  &  Schneider,  Syst.  Ichtli.,  65,  1801  {pisonis). 

Eleotris  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  xii,  216,  pi.  356,  1837  (gyrinus). 

Culius  Bleeker,  Esquisse  d'un  Syst.  Nat.  des  Gobioides,  303,  1874  (fuscus). 

As  Eleotris  pisonis  possesses  the  preopercular  spine  assumed 
to  characterize  the  genus  Culius,  we  place  the  latter  name  in  its 
synonymy.  In  large  specimens  of  Eleotris  pisonis,  this  spine  is 
somewhat  concealed  by  the  flesh,  but  it  may  always  be  found  by 
dissection.  The  four  following  species  resemble  each  other  very 
closely,  and  probably  agree  in  the  structure  of  the  skeleton,  but 
in  this  regard  we  have  been  able  to  examine  only  Eleotris  pisoyiis. 

Analysis  of  Species  of  Eleotris. 

a.  Body  comparatively   robust ;   head   broad,   depressed ;   body 
compressed;   mouth   oblique,  lower  jaw  little   projecting; 
maxillary  reaching  to  below  eye ;  scales  ctenoid,  46  to  61 
in  longitudinal  series.     Dorsal  rays,  VI— I,  8  ;  anal  rays,  I, 
7    or   8.     Vomer   without   teeth.     Gill-openings   extending 
forward    below   to   angle    of    preopercle ;    isthmus   broad. 
Preopercle  with  a  spine  projecting  downward  and  forward 
at   its   angle.      Post-temporals   slender,   widely   diverging, 
inserted   very  near  the    scarcely   evident   occipital   crest. 
Skull  highest  in  the  middle,  very  broad  and  short ;  bony 
projections  in  front  of  and  behind  eye  prominent.     Verte- 
brae about  10  +  14  (pisonis).      Lower  pharyngeals  subtri- 
angular,  rather  broad,  with  comparatively  coarse  teeth. 
b.  Scales  large,  about  48  in  longitudinal  series ;    depth  4.)   in 
length  to  base  of  caudal ;  head  3£.      D.  VI,  9  ;  A.  1,8; 
teeth  rather  small,  those  of  the  inner  series  in  each  jaw 
largest.  Amblyopsis.     8. 


1885.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELriHA.  15 

66.  Scales  moderate,  about  60  in  lateral  series.     D.  "VT-I,  8;  A. 

I,  7  or  8. 

c.  Body  comparatively  robust ;  depth  4  to  5  in  length  ;  teeth 

in  jaws  all  small,  subequal.  Pisonis.     9. 

cc.  Body  comparatively  slender  ;  depth  6  in  length  ;  head  3^. 

d.  Teeth  in  jaws  all  small,  subequal.  JEquidens.     10. 

dd.  Teeth  in  jaws  unequal,  some  of  those  in  the  outer  row 

enlarged.  Belizana.     11. 

8.  Eleotris  amblyopsis. 

Culius  amblyopsis  Cope,  Proc.  Am.  Phil.  Soc,  1870,  473  (Surinam); 
Goode  &  Bean,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  236  (Gulf  of  Mexico); 
Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  610  (Charleston); 
Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  619  (Pensacola);  Jor- 
dan &  Gilbert,  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1882,  944. 

Habitat. — Atlantic  coast  of  America,  from  Charleston  to  Suri- 
nam. 

Only  three  specimens  of  this  species  are  yet  known.  It  is  well 
distinguished  from  its  congeners  by  its  larger  scales. 

9.  Eleotris  pisonis. 

Eleotris  capite  plagioplateo,  etc.  "Gronow,  Mus.  Ichth.,  ii,  n.  168," 
1757. 

Gobius  pisonis  Gmelin,  Syst.  Nat.  1206,  1788  (based  on  Eleotris  of 
Gronow). 

Eleotris  pisonis  Bloch  &  Schneider,  Syst.  Ichth.,  68,  1801  (based  on 
Eleotris  of  Gronow). 

6 obius  pisonis  Turton,  Syst.  Nat.,  751,  1807  (South  America). 

Gobius  amorea  Walbaum,  Artedi  Piscium,  iii,  205,  1792  (based  on 
Eleotris  of  Gronow). 

Eleotris  gyrinus  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  xii,  220,  1837,  PI.  356  (Mar- 
tinique, San  Domingo,  Surinam);  Girard,  U.  S.  and  Mexican  Boun- 
dary Survey,  28,  PI.  xii,  figs.  11-12,  1859  (Rio  Grande);  Giinther, 
Catalogue  Fish,  in  Brit. Mus., iii,  122, 1861 ;  Poey,  "Repert.,  i,  336," 
1867;  Poey,  Syn.  Pise.  Cubens.,  395,  1868  (Cuba);  Poey,  Enumer. 
Pise.  Cub.,  127,  1875  (Cuba);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  TJ.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  1882,  571  (name  only);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A., 
631,  1883. 

Eleotris  picta  Kner  &  Steindachner,  Abhandl.  bayer.  Ak.  Wiss.,  1864, 
18,  PI.  3,  fig.  1  (Rio  Bayano,  near  Panama). 

Culius  per  nig er  Cope,  Proc.  Am.  Phil.  Soc,  1870,  473  (St.  Martins). 

Habitat — Both  coasts  of  Central  America,  north  to  Cuba  and 
Texas,  chiefly  in  fresh  waters. 


76  PROCEEDINGS   OP   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

The  Gobius  pisonis  of  Gmelin  and  its  synonym,  Gobius  amorea 
of  Walbaum,  arc  based  on  the  Eleotris  of  Gronow.  This  is  un- 
doubtedly identical  either  with  Eleotris  gyrinus  or  Guavina  gua- 
vina.  To  us  there  is  little  doubt  that  the  former  species  was  the 
one  intended,  as  the  phrase  "  P.  D.  prior  declinata  6  radiata ; 
secunda  equalis,  priori  vicina  "  applies  well  to  the  Eleotris  gyri- 
nus and  not  at  all  to  the  Guavina  guavina,  in  which  species  the 
second  dorsal  is  much  larger  than  the  first.  We  therefore  adopt 
the  name  Eleotris  pisonis  instead  of  Eleotris  gyrinus. 

We  have  examined  numerous  specimens  of  this  species  from 
the  Rio  Almendares,  near  Havana.  All  these  possess  the  antrorse 
preopercular  spine  supposed  to  distinguish  the  genus  Culius  from 
Eleotris.  In  the  larger  ones  it  is  partly  hidden  by  the  encroach- 
ment of  the  skin  and  from  this  has  arisen  the  erroneous  suppo- 
sition (of  Giinther  and  others)  that  this  species  is  one  in  which 
the  spine  is  wanting. 

A  comparison  of  the  figure  and  description  of  Eleotris  picta, 
given  by  Kner  and  Steindachner,  shows  no  constant  point  of 
difference  whatever.  We  therefore  regard  picta  as  a  synonym  of 
pisonis. 

The  Culius  perniger  of  Cope  is  evidently  identical  with  pisonis, 
Professor  Cope  being  the  first  describer  of  the  species  who  did 
not  overlook  the  preopercular  spine. 

10.  Eleotris  aequidens. 

Eleotris  sp.,  Bean,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1880,  83  (name  only). 

Culius  cequidens  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  IT.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1881,  461 
(Mazatlan);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  372 
(Colima);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  380  (Cape 
San  Lucas,  San  Jose);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Com.,  1882, 
108  (Mazatlan). 

Habitat. — Streams  about  the  Gulf  of  California,  south  to  Colima. 

This  species  is  known  to  us  from  the  original  description  by 
Jordan  and  Gilbert ;  it  is  said  to  be  abundant  in  the  streams  of 
Sinaloa  and  Lower  California. 

11.  Eleotris  belizana. 

Culius  belizanus  Sauvage,  "Bull.  Soc.  Philom.  Paris,  1879,  16 
(reprint)"  (Belize);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1881, 
462  (foot-note). 

Habitat. — Belize. 


1885.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  77 

This  species  is  known  to  us  only  from  a  foot-note  by  Jordan 
and  Gilbert,  referring  to  the  description  by  M.  Sauvage.  It  is 
said  to  differ  from  E.  sequidens,  by  having  the  teeth  of  the  outer 
row  enlarged. 

5.  EROTELIS. 

Ereotelis  Poey,  Memorias  de  Cuba,  ii,  273,  1861  (valenciennesi  =  smaragdus") . 

This  genus  differs  from  the  others  in  having  the  scales  small, 
cj^cloid,  the  body  long,  slender,  and  the  tail  lanceolate.  In  form 
this  genus  differs  strikingly  from  Eleotris,  its  nearest  ally.  It 
presents  a  strong  analogy  to  Gobionellus,  differing  from  Eleotris 
much  as  the  latter  does  from  Gobius. 

But  one  species  seems  to  be  known. 

Unlike  the  other  Eleotridinse,  this  is  strictly  marine,  inhabiting 
the  coarse  algse  on  the  coral  reefs. 

Analysis  of  Species  of  Erotelis. 

a.  Body  long,  slender;  depth  about  ^  the  length  to  base  of 
caudal;  head  broad,  depressed;  mouth  large,  very  oblique, 
the  lower  jaw  projecting.  Maxillary  reaching  to  below  centre 
of  eye,  its  length,  2^  in  head.  Vomer  without  teeth  ;  teeth 
on  jaws  small,  equal.  Scales  small,  cycloid,  about  100  in  a 
longitudinal  series,  largest  on  caudal  peduncle.  Caudal  fin 
lanceolate ;  caudal  peduncle  slender,  3  in  length  of  body. 
D.  VI- 1,  9;  A.  1-9.  Gill-openings  extending  forward  to 
below  centre  of  opercle.  Post-temporals  diverging,  inserted 
near  occipital  crest,  which  is  obsolete.  Skull  uneven  and 
rather  thick.  Preopercular  spine  absent.  Vertebrae  10+15. 
Pectorals  reaching  past  middle  of  first  dorsal.  Dorsal  and 
anal  high ;  highest  anal  ray  1^  in  head.        Smaragdus.     12. 

12.  Erotelis  smaragdus. 

Eleotris  smaragdus  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,   xii,   231,    1837  (Cuba); 

Guichenot,   "Poiss.  in  Ramon  de  la  Sagra,  Hist.  Cuba,  130,"  1855  ; 

Giinther,  Cat.  iii,  123,  1861  (Cuba);  Jordan,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 

1884,  141  (Key  West). 
Erotelis  valenciennesi  Poey,  Mem.  de  Cuba,  ii,  173,  1861  (Cuba);  Poey, 

Syn.  Pise.  Cub.,  396,  1868  (Cuba);  Poey,  Enum.  Pise.  Cub.,  127, 

1875  (Cuba). 


78  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

Habitat. — Florida  Keys  to  Cuba  ;  strictly  marine,  not  ascending 
rivers. 

This  species  is  rather  abundant  on  the  coast  of  Cuba.  A  single 
specimen  was  obtained  by  Professor  Jordan  at  Key  West.  It 
reaches  a  length  of  about  a  foot.  It  is  confounded  by  Cuban 
fishermen  with  the  Esmeralda  (Gobionellus),  although  it  lacks 
the  emerald-colored  prominences  on  the  tongue.  From  this  con- 
fusion the  not  appropriate  name  of  smaragdus  has  come  to  be 
given  to  this  species.  This  Poey  has  proposed  to  change  to 
Valenciennesi ;  but  this  change  the  law  of  priority  forbids. 

6.  GYMNELEOTRIS. 

Gymneleotris  Bleeker,  Esquisse  d'un  Syst.  Nat.  des  Gobioides,  304,  1874 

(seminuda). 

The  distinguishing  mark  of  this  genus  seems  to  be  the  absence 
of  scales  on  the  head  and  anterior  part  of  the  trunk.  Nothing 
is  known  either  of  the  genus  or  of  its  single  species,  except 
what  is  contained  in  Giinther's  description  of  the  latter. 

Analysis  of  the  Species  of  Gymneleotris. 

a.  Head  and  trunk  naked ;  tail  covered  with  small  scales ;  head 
f  of  total  length  ;  maxillary  extending  >to  below  anterior 
margin  of  orbit.  Teeth  in  upper  jaw  in  a  narrow  band  ;  the 
lower  has  four  somewhat  larger  and  recurved  teeth  in 
front ;  palate  toothless.  Fin-rays  not  prolonged.  Pectorals 
not  quite  extending  to  origin  of  second  dorsal.  Ventrals 
much  shorter  than  pectoral.     D.  VII,  11 ;  A.  9. 

Seminuda.    13. 

13.  Gymneleotris  seminuda. 

Eleotris  seminuda,  Giinther,  Proc.  Zoological  Soc,  London,  18C4,  24, 
"Plate  iv,  f.  2,  2  a"  (Pacific  Coast  of  "Panama)  ;   Giinther,  Fish. 
Central  America,  441,  1869. 
Gymneleotris  seminuda  Bleeker,  Esquisse  d'un   Systema  Nat.  Gobi- 
oides, 304,  1874. 

This  species  is  known  from  the  description  by  Dr.  Giinther  of 
a  small  specimen  in  the  British  Museum. 


1885.1  natural  sciences  op  philadelphia.  79 

List  of  Nominal  Species  of  Eleotridin^;,  arranged  in  Chrono- 
logical  Order,  with   Identifications. 

(Tenable  Specific  Names  are  in  Italics.) 

Nominal  Species.  Date.  Identification. 

Gobius  pisonis  Gmelin,  1788,  Eleotris  pisonis. 

Sciama  macnlata  Bloch,  1790,  Dormitator  maculatus. 

Gobius  amorea  Walbauni,  1792,  Eleotris  pisonis. 

Gobiomorus  dormitor  Lacepede,  1798,  Gobiomorus  dormitator. 
Platycephalus  dormitator  Blocb  &  Schneider,  1801,  "  " 

Batrachus  guavina  Bloch  &  Schneider,  1801,  " 

Eleotris  mugiloides  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,    1837,  Dormitator  maculatus. 

Eleotris  guavina  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  1837,  Guavina  guavina. 

Eleotris  gyrinus  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  1837,  Eleotris  pisonis. 
Eleotris  smaragdus  Cuvier  &,  Valenciennes,    1837,  Erotelis  smaragdus. 

Eleotris  latifrons  Richardson,  1837,  Dormitator  latifrons. 

Eleotris  somnolentus  Girard,  1858,  Dormitator  maculatus. 

Lembus  maculatus  Gunther,  1859,  Gobiomorus  maculatus. 

Philypnus  lateralis,  Gill,  1860,  Gobiomorus  lateralis. 

Eleotris  omocyaneus  Poey,  1860,  Dormitator  maculatus. 

Eleotris  gundlachi  Poey,  1860,  "  " 

Erotelis  valenciennesi  Poey,  1861,  Erotelis  smaragdus. 

Dormitator  lineatus  Gill,  1863,  Dormitator  maculatus. 

Dormitator  microphthalmus  Gill,  1863,  Dormitator  latifrons. 

Eleotris  longiccps  Gunther,  1864,  Gobiomorus  longiceps. 

Eleotris  seminuda  Gunther,  1864,  Gymneleotris  seminuda. 

Eleotris  picta,  Kner  &  Steindachner,  1864,  Eleotris  pisonis. 

Culius  amblyopsis  Cope,  1870,  Eleotris  amblyopsis. 

Culius  perniger,  Cope,  1870,  Eleotris  pisonis. 

Culius  belizanus  Sauvage,  1879,  Eleotris  belizana. 

Culius  cequidens  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  1881,  Eleotris  sequidens. 

Recapitulation. 
In  this  review  we  have  admitted  13  species  and  6  genera  of 
Eleotridinse  as  probably  valid.  We  give  here  a  list  of  the  species. 
The  general  distribution  of  the  species  is  indicated  by  the  letters 
"W.  (Western  Atlantic,  West  Indies,  etc.) ;  U.  (Coast  of  United 
States);  P.  (Eastern Pacific, Mazatlan, Panama, etc.);  G.  (Western 
slopes  of  South  America). 

Subfamily  Eleotridinse. 

Genus  1.  GOBIOMORUS  Lacepede. 

1.  Gobiomorus  lateralis  Gill  (P.). 

2.  Gobiomorus  maculatus  Giinther  (G.).     (Species  unknown  to  us.) 

3.  Gobiomorus  dormitator  Lacepede  (W.  U.). 

4.  Gobiomorus  longiceps   Giinther  (W.). 


80  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

Genus  2.   DORMITATOR  Gill. 

5.  Dormitator  maculatus  Bloch  (U.  W.).     (Possibly  more  than  one  species  in  our 

synonymy.) 

6.  Dormitator  latifrons  Richardson  (P.).     (Possibly  a  variety  of  maculatus.) 

Genus  3.  GUAVINA  Bleeker. 

7.  Guavina  guavina  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes  (W.). 

Genus  4.    ELEOTRIS  (  Gronow)  Bloch  &  Schneider. 

8.  Eleotris  amblyopsis  Cope  (U.  \V.). 

9.  Eleotris    pisonis    Gmelin    (W.    P.).     (Possibly    two   species    contained    in    our 

synonymy.) 

10.  Eleotris  aequidens  Jordan  and  Gilbert  (P.). 

11.  Eleotris  belizana  Sauvage  (W.).     (Unknown  to  us.) 

Genus  5.  EROTELIS  Poey. 

12.  Erotelis  smaragdus  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes  (U.W.). 

Genus  6.  GYMNELEOTRIS  Blocker. 

13.  Gymneleotris  seminuda  GUnther  (P.).     (Unknown  to  us  ) 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  81 


ENTOMOLOGIA  HONGKONGENSIS  —  REPORT  ON  THE  LEPIDOPTERA  OF 
HONGKONG. 

BY    F.    WARRINGTON    EASTLAKE. 

The  province  of  Kwangtung,  to  which  the  island  of  Hongkong 
properly  belongs,  has  long  been  celebrated  throughout  the  Chinese 
Empire  for  the  beauty  and  great  variety  of  the  insects  to  be  found 
within  its  borders.  The  soil  is,  in  most  parts,  exceptionally  rich, 
and  teems  with  an  ever-busy  world  of  animal  life.  But,  great  as 
is  the  fecundity  of  the  larger  part  of  the  province,  there  are,  here 
and  there,  sand}7,  arid  wastes,  which  even  the  untiring  labor  of 
the  native  agriculturists  fails  to  make  yield  more  than  the  scan- 
tiest of  crops.  This  is  especially  the  case  along  the  southeastern 
littoral.  Here  the  formation  is  igneous  and  the  rocks  granitic,  as 
a  rule,  with  occasional  intrusive  traps  and  seams  of  trachytic 
porphyry.  The  island  of  Hongkong,  in  particular,  consists 
mainly  of  hornblendic  granite,  of  which  silica,  alumina,  and 
various  oxides  of  iron  are  the  principal  components.  The  rock 
is,  at  the  same  time,  composed  throughout  of  materials  unusually 
susceptible  to  climatic  influences,  particularly  to  the  action  of 
heavy  rains.  The  decomposed  and  disintegrated  rock  makes  an 
admirably  fertile  soil,  especially  in  the  ravines,  valleys,  and  low- 
lands ;  the  hills,  however,  being  constantly  exposed  to  all  sorts  of 
weather,  are  signally  barren  and  verdureless.  Tufts  of  "  arrow- 
grass,"  long,  trailing  mosses,  coarse  ferns  and  hardy  flowering- 
plants  are  sparsely  scattered  over  the  mountain-slopes;  pines,  firs, 
and  a  few  other  resinous  trees  cover  the  less-exposed  portions, 
but  the  heavy  rains  annually  sweep  down  quantities  of  this  local 
vegetation  into  the  sea.  In  such  places  insect  life  is  rare.  And 
yet  the  entomology  of  Hongkong,  although  so  small  an  island,  is 
unusually  rich  and  worthy  of  attention.  This  is  chiefly  due  to 
the  fact  that  the  island  is  connected  with  the  famous  Lo-fan  Shan 
— a  small  range  of  mountains  some  fifteen  miles  north  of  the 
thriving  market-town  of  Shek  Lung  ("  Stone  Dragon,")  and  about 
seventy  miles  east  of  Canton.  Starting  from  the  westernmost 
spur  of  this  range,  a  limestone  formation  runs  to  the  north  and 
northwest.  Here  the  flora  is  both  beautiful  and  luxuriant ; 
flowering  plants  laden  with  tempting  pollen  cover  the  hillsides, 


82  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

and  insects  find  in  the  verdant  groves  a  veritable  paradise.  The 
Lo-fan  Mountains  besides  this,  probably  owing  to  their  majestic 
scenery  and  rich  flora,  have  for  more  than  ten  centuries  enjoyed 
a  reputation  of  great  sanctity.  In  the  deep  caves  and  mountain 
forests  of  the  Lo-fan,  hermits,  sages  and  priests  have  lived  and 
taught  their  disciples  from  time  immemorial ;  while,  in  accordance 
with  both  Buddhistic  and  Taoistic  precepts,  all  animals,  birds, 
reptiles,  insects,  and  even  the  delicious  trout  of  the  mountain- 
streams  have  been  kept  from  harm  and  allowed  to  breed  undis- 
turbed. Passing  through  the  thickly  populated  districts  of  Pok-lo 
and  Tong-kun,  a  low,  undulating  range  of  hills  connects  the  Lo- 
fan  with  the  mountainous  country  opposite  Hongkong.  And 
hence  it  comes  that  the  entomology  of  the  island  is  so  extensive 
and  varied. 

Hongkong  lies  between  22°  9'  and  22°  1'  north  latitude,  and 
114°  5'  and  114°  18'  east  longitude  ;  the  island  is,  therefore,  just 
inside  the  tropics,  but  near  enough  to  the  boundary  to  enjoy  fine, 
temperate  weather  from  September  to  April.  To  a  considerable 
extent,  the  insular  fauna  shows  close  relationship  with  the  fauna 
of  the  tropics ;  and  yet  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  some  few  of 
the  tropical  features  are  not  characteristic  of  Hongkong.  To  this 
category  belong  notably  Python  7'eticulatus,  Gray,  the  rock  python 
of  India,  and  the  venomous  cobra,  Naja  tripudians,  Merr.;  very 
possibly,  also  Macrochlamys  superlita,  Morelet — a  fine  land  snail. 
The  Lepidoptera,  however,  are  very  distinctty  related  to  the 
entomic  fauna  of  the  Himalayas,  East  India,  and  the  Malayan 
Archipelago.  During  a  stay  of  several  years  in  Hongkong,  the 
writer  devoted  much  time  and  attention  to  the  study  of  the 
insular  fauna,  and  formed  large  collections  of  the  lepidoptera  and 
terrestrial  mollusks.  In  the  spring  of  1883,  the  writer  published 
a  work  on  Hongkong,  in  which  a  short  list  of  the  diurnal  Lepi- 
doptera was  given.  But  this  list  was  necessarily  incomplete,  as 
the  writer  had  not  enjoyed  any  opportunity  of  subjecting  his 
collections  to  competent  scientific  inspection  and  classification. 
Since  then,  thanks  to  several  important  works  which  have 
appeared  on  the  Insect  Fauna  of  various  parts  of  Asia,  the  writer 
has  been  enabled  to  compile  the  following  list  in  a  far  more 
thorough  manner.  Outside  of  Donovan's  "  Insects  of  China  " — 
which  will  be  mentioned  later  on — no  work  has  ever  been  published 
on  the  entomology  of  China,  and,  beyond  a  few  chapters  in  the 


1885.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  83 

journals  of  passing  naturalists,  the  enumeration  and  description 
of  the  Hongkong  insects  have  been  entirely  neglected.  Despite 
this  fact,  a  rich  field  there  awaits  the  collector  and  the  scientist, 
as  the  beetles,  butterflies  and  moths  are  often  of  exceptional  size 
and  great  beauty.  An  Attacus  (male)  in  the  writer's  possession 
measures  no  less  than  eleven  and  one-half  inches  across  the  wings. 
Of  beetles  alone — according  to  Frauenfeld — Mr.  John  Bowring 
(son  of  Governor  Bowring,  of  Hongkong),  collected  more  than 
twelve  hundred  species,  many  of  which  were  new  to  science. 

In  compiling  the  following  list,  the  entomology  of  various  other 
localities  throughout  the  province  of  Kwangtung  has  been  taken 
into  special  consideration.  Notably  that  of  the  other  islands  in 
the  Ladrones  group  of  the  Lo-fan  Mountains — where  some  time 
was  spent  in  collecting — and  of  Macao.  In  the  latter  port  the 
writer  passed  several  months,  and  succeeded  in  making  valuable 
collections,  thanks  to  the  courtesy  of  Governor  da  Graca,  who 
did  everything  in  his  power  to  facilitate  the  work.  A  complete 
catalogue  and  description  of  the  collections  then  made  have  since 
been  embodied  in  a  work  entitled  "  Fauna  Macanensis,"  recently 
forwarded  to  the  Portuguese  Government.  It  is  somewhat  diffi- 
cult to  keep  the  entomology  of  Hongkong  entirely  distinct  from 
that  of  adjacent  islands  and  mainland.  As  has  already  been  stated, 
the  hills  opposite  Hongkong  practically  introduce  the  insect  fauna 
of  the  entire  Kwangtung  Province.  At  times,  months  or  even 
years  may  pass  before  the  reappearance  of  a  certain  species ;  and 
then  a  favorable  wind  may  waft  it  unexpectedly  into  the  flower- 
gardens  of  Victoria,  there,  mayhap,  to  completely  puzzle  the 
brains  of  some  ardent  entomologist.  In  the  following  list,  how- 
ever, all  doubtful  species  have  been  so  far  as  possible  excluded, 
and  only  such  admitted  as  have  been  identified  by  scientists  of 
acknowledged  ability. 

Reference  has  been  made  to  the  following  works : — 

Donovan,  A.     The  Insects  of  China,  2d  ed.,  1842  (Westwood). 
Frauenfeld.      Die  Novara  Expedition,  Sitzungsber.  d.  mathem. 

naturw.  CI.  K.  K.  Acad.  d.  Wissensch.,  Wien,  xxxv,  1859, 10. 
Butler,  A.     Lepidoptera  Heterocera  in  the  British  Museum,  Pts. 

ii,  iii,  1878. 
Elwes,  H.  J.     Butterflies  of  Amurland,  North  China  and  Japan. 

Proc.  Zoolog.  Soc.  London,  1881. 


84 


PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY   OF 


[1885. 


Distant,  W.  L.     Rhopalocera  Malayana,  Pts.  i-v,  London  and 

Penang,  1882. 
Pryer,  H.     A  Catalogue  of  the  Insects  of  Japan,  Trans.  Asiatic 

Soc.  of  Japan,  1883. 

Donovan's  "  Insects  of  China  "  is  a  mere  primer  on  the  vast 
subject  included  in  its  title,  and  very  incorrect  at  that.  Since  his 
day,  entomological  nomenclature  has  undergone  many  changes, 
and  even  the  classification  of  genera  and  species  has  not  been  left 
undisturbed.  For  the  sake  of  completeness,  however,  it  is  per- 
haps advisable  to  append  the  meagre  list  of  Lepidoptera,  which 
Donovan  notes  as  coming  from  Hongkong.  It  includes  but  fifteen 
butterflies  and  four  moths  : — 


Papilio  paris,  Linn. 
Papilio  agenor,  Linn. 
Papilio  agamemnon,  Linn. 
Papilio  epius,  Jones. 
Papilio  demetrius,  Linn. 
Pieris  hyparete,  Linn. 
Pieris  (Iphiaa)  glaucippe,  Linn. 
Pieris  (Thestias)  pyrene,  Linn. 
Argynnis  eurymanthus,  Drury. 
Cynthia  orithya,  Linn. 
Cynthia  cenone,  Linn. 


Cynthia  almana,  Linn. 
Limenitis  leucothoe,  Linn. 
Limenitis  eurynome,  Linn. 
Thecla  mmcenas,  Jones. 

Sesia  hylas,  Linn. 
Glaucopis  polymeria,  Linn. 
Phalana  attacus. 
Saturnia  atlas,  Linn. 
{Euaemialectrix,  Linn.,  doubtful.) 


In  Mr.  H.  J.  Elwes'  list  I  find  further  one  butterfly  mentioned 
as  coming  from  Southern  China,  which  I  have  never  met  with  in 
Hongkong.  This  is  Thaumantis  howgua,  Westwood,  named  prob- 
ably after  that  rich  Cantonese  merchant  so  well  known  twenty 
or  thirty  years  ago.  Those  marked  with  an  asterisk  (*)  in  the 
following  list  are  contained  in  the  writer's  collection,  but  several 
others  in  this  collection  have  still  to  be  identified. 

^Papilio  xuthus.  Linn,  (xuthulus,  Linn.). 

This  insect  occasionally  finds  its  way  to  Hongkong,  but  is 
tolerably  numerous  around  Canton  and  further  north,  and  abun- 
dant in  Japan.  The  imago  invariably  appears  under  the  xuthulus 
form  in  the  spring.  The  female  is  dimorphic,  it  feeds  on  various 
kinds  of  Citrus,  especially  C.  trifoliata. 

*Papilio  maackii,  Mon.  (Dehaani,  Feld.). 

Very  frequent  in  the  Lo-fan  Mountains ;  less  so  in  Hongkong. 
Found  also  in  North  China  and  Japan. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  85 

*Papilio  helenus,  Linn. 

Rare  ;  has  been  taken  also  in  Shanghai  and  Nagasaki. 

*Papilio  pamnon,  Linn. 

This  gorgeous  butterfly  is  not  uncommon  about  May,  and  con- 
tinues to  visit  the  island  from  time  to  time  until  September. 

*Papilio  memnon,  Linn. 

This  is  one  of  the  largest  of  the  Hongkong  Lepidoptera.  The 
markings  of  the  female  are  totally  different  from  those  of  the 
male,  which  is  altogether  a  smaller  insect.     Also  Southern  Japan. 

♦Papilio  sarpedon,  Linn. 

Quite  common  throughout  the  year.  North  China  and  Japan. 
'Papilio  demetrius,  Cramer. 

Occasionally  seen  in  autumn.     Common  in  Japan. 
*Papilio  paris,  Linn. 

Abundant.  A  beautiful  insect,  always  to  be  found  near  Hyliscus: 
rosa  sinensis. 

Papilio  clytia,  Linn.  (var.  dissimilis,  Swainson). 
*Papilio  panope,  Linn. 

Papilio  polytes,  Linn. 
*Papilio  agenor,  Linn.  (var.  alcanor,  Cramer). 
*Papilio  bianor,  Cramer. 
*Pieris  rapae,  Linn,  (crucivora,  Butler). 

One  of  the  commonest  butterflies ;  found  all  the  year  round. 
In  markings  and  size  it  is  very  variable.  As  a  rule,  it  feeds  on 
cultivated  Cruciferse. 

*Pieris  napi,  Linn,  {megamera,  Butler;  melete,  Men.), 
Pieris  canidia,  Sparrm. 

*Tereias  multiformis,  H.  Pryer  {Hecabe,  Linn.;  mandarina,  Del'Orza;  kccabeoides, 
Men.;  sinensis,  Sue  J  Mariesi,  Butler;  anemone,  Felder;  connexiva,  Butler; 
tesiopc,  Mon. ;  sari,  Horsfield). 

Thanks  to  the  scientific  investigation  of  Mr.  H.  Pryer,  it  is 
now  demonstrated  that  this  butterfly  is  found  in  nearly  every 
country,  and  that  the  long  list  of  varieties  do  not  constitute 
special  species,  as  most  of  them  interbreed  without  difficulty. 
It  is  abundant  throughout  China  and  Japan. 


86  PROCEEDINGS   OP   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Eurema  blanda,  Loisduval. 
*Delias  pasithoe,  Linn. 
*Delias  hierte,  Hiibner. 
*Lyoaena  baetica,  Linn. 
*Lycaena  lysimon,  Hiibner. 

Both  of  these  are  common  throughout  the  greater  part  of  the 
year. 

*Neptis  aceris,  Lep.  (intermedia,  Pryer). 

Abundant,  and  very  variable  in  size. 

Vanessa  charonia,  Drury. 
♦Vanessa  callirhoe,  Fabricius. 

Quite  common,  but  a  very  beautiful  insect.  Feeds  on  several 
Urticacese. 

*Vanessa  cardui,  Linn. 

This  butterfly  has  a  very  wide  spread,  and  comes  early  in  spring 
and  stays  throughout  the  summer.     It  is  quite  as  abuudant  as 
the  foregoing. 
•Argynnis  niphe,  Linn. 

Not  uncommon,  but  very  local. 

*Argynnis  eurymanthus,  Drury. 
*Melanitis  leda,  Linn. 
•Mycalesis  gotama,  Moore. 
*Mycalesis  perseus,  Fabricius. 

Mycalesis  perseus,  var.  vitala,  Moore. 
-Mycalesis  igoleta,  Felder. 
"Mycalesis  medus,  Fabricius. 
-■■  Mycalesis  mineus,  Linn. 
-Ypthima  baldus,  Fabricius. 

Ypthima  asterope,  Klug. 

Ypthima  philomela,  Joh. 

The  first  of  these  three  is  very  abundant,  but  varies  remarkably 
in  size,  markings  and  colorations.  I  am  inclined  to  believe  that 
the  latter  two  are  one  and  the  same  species. 

Discophora  celinde,  Stoll. 

Junonia  lemonias,  Linn. 
'  Junonia  laomedia,  Linn. 
*Junonia  Wallacei. 

Junonia  hierta,  Fabricius. 

Junonia  hierta,  var.  cebrene,  Trim. 

Junonia  orithya,  Linn. 
■Junonia  asterie,  Linn. 

Junonia  almana,  Linn. 
*Precis  iphita. 


s 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  8t 

*Ergolis  ariadne,  Linn. 
*Athyma  perius,  Linn. 

Athyma  leucothoe,  Linn. 

Athyma  sulpitia,  Cram. 
'Athyma  kasa,  Moore. 
*Euthalia  puseda. 
*Lethe  Europa,  Fabrieius. 
*Danais  genutia,  Cramer. 
*Danais  tytia,  Gray. 

This  and  the  foregoing  insects  attain  unusual  dimensions  in  the 
warm  climate  of  Hongkong.  The  latter  is  found  also  in  Japan, 
but  is  invariably  smaller  in  size. 

*Danais  limniace,  Cramer. 

Danais  similis,  Linn. 
*Danais  plexippus,  Linn. 
*Catopsilia  philippina,  Cramer. 

Catopsilia  pyranthe,  Linn. 
*Hebomoia  glaucippe,  Linn. 

Hebomoia  erocale,  Cramer. 

Ixias  pyrene,  Linn. 
'Miletus  chinensis,  Felder. 

This  pretty  member  of  the  Lycsenidse  is  said  to  be  confined  to 
Hongkong,  but  I  have  taken  it  in  several  places  on  the  mainland. 

*Euplcea  superbus,  Herbst. 
*Euploea  midamus,  Linn. 

The  latter  is  much  more  frequent  than  the  former.     It  varies 

remarkably  in  size ;  more  so,  perhaps,  than  any  other  butterfly 

haunting  the  gardens  of  Hongkong. 

*Hesperia  flava,  Murray. 

Common  throughout  China  and  Japan. 

*Pamphila  mathias,  Fabr. 
Pamphila  maro,  Fabr. 
Plesioneura  folus,  Cramer. 
Hipparchia  eumea,  Drury. 

I  have,  in  the  foregoing  list,  not  made  any  attempt  at  correct 
classification.  The  field,  so  far  as  the  province  of  Kwangtung,  or 
indeed  southern  China,  is  concerned,  is  a  virgin  one.  Much 
remains  still  to  be  done,  as  the  greater  part  of  those  who  collect, 
<or  have  collected,  in  Southern  China,  have  neglected  to  give 
careful  data  as  to  the  localities,  seasons,  etc.  By  far  the  most 
important  part  of  the  little  work  hitherto  done  is  thus  untrust- 
worthy or  often  downright  misleading. 


PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF 


[1885. 


The  following  list  of  moths  includes  merely  the  most  important 
species  ;  from  personal  observation  I  believe  that  more  than  three 
hundred  species  can  be  identified  as  coming  from  Hongkong : — 


Chcerocampa  suffusa,  Walker. 

*  Chcerocampa  pallicosta,  Walker. 

*  Acherontia  medusa,  Butler. 
Diludia  discistriga,  Walker. 
*Diludia  increta,  Walker. 
Northia  ten  iris,  Butler. 

* PMssama  vacillans,  Walker. 
Spilarctia  subcarnea,  Walker. 


*La>lia  sinensis,  Walker. 
Pantana  ampla,  Walker. 
*Acontia  bimacula,  Walker. 

(Acontia  maculosa '.') 
*Boarmia  repulsaria,  Walker. 


*  OpJiiusa  aretotcenia. 

*  Tropica  artemis,  Butler. 


In  conclusion,  it  is  necessary  to  state  that  the  list  of  butterflies 
is  by  no  means  exhaustive.  There  are  some  five  or  six  doubtful 
species  which  the  writer  has  thought  best  not  to  include;  and, 
besides  these,  there  are  one  or  two  others  that  may,  very  probably, 
turn  out  to  be  species  novae. 


1885.]  natural  sciences  of  philadelphia.  89 

March  31. 

Mr.  George  W.  Tryon,  Jr.,  in  the  chair. 

Thirt3'-four  persons  present. 
The  following  was  presented  for  publication  : — 
"  Remarks  on  Lanius  robustus  Baird,  based  on  an  examination 
of  the  type  specimen,"  by  Leonhard  Stejneger. 
The  following  were  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


90  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 


DESCRIPTION  OF  A  NEW  SPECIES  OF  THE  GENUS  CYANOCORAX. 
BY  ALAN   F.  GENTRY. 
Cyanocorax  Heilprini,  n.  sp. 

Sp.  Char. — Above  light  brown,  with  decided  purplish  shade. 
Front  of  head  from  a  line  directly  back  of  eye,  sides  of  head  and 
neck,  together  with  the  throat,  black ;  frontal  plumes  bristly  and 
recurved  ;  spot  of  purplish-blue  at  base  of  lower  mandible.  Crown, 
occiput  and  hind-neck  lilac  or  light  violet.  Breast  and  abdomen 
brown,  with  deeper  purplish  reflections  than  on  the  rest  of  the 
body,  and  becoming  lighter  towards  the  vent.  Tail  concolorous 
with  back  above,  brownish  underneath,  and  broadly  tipped  with 
white  ;  under  tail-coverts  white.  Tibiae  ashy  ;  bill  and  legs  black. 
Length,  14-25  ;  wing,  6-75  ;  tail,  6-31 ;  tarsus,  2-75  ;  bill,  1-50. 

Habitat.' — Rio  Negro.  A  single  specimen,  marked  <$,  and  part 
of  the  T.  B.  Wilson  Collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural 
Sciences. 

Mr.  R.  B.  Sharpe,  in  his  Catalogue  of  the  Birds  of  the  British 
Museum,  vol.  iii,  divides  the  genus  into  two  sections,  which  are 
respectively  characterized  by  the  presence  or  absence  of  white 
tips  to  the  tail-feathers.  While  properly  coming  under  the  first 
di  vision  by  reason  of  the  existence  of  tips,  it  differs  very  markedly 
from  the  species  therein  included,  the  breast  and  abdomen  being 
purplish  brown  and  dusky  instead  of  white,  and  the  blue  or  white 
spot  above,  as  well  as  below  the  eye,  being  wanting.  But  in  the 
close  resemblance  which  obtains  between  the  upper  and  lower 
surfaces  of  the  body,  there  is  a  manifest  relationship  to  the  group 
with  uniform  tail-feathers. 

The  species  is  dedicated  to  my  friend,  Prof.  Angelo  Heilprin, 
of  Philadelphia,  in  recognition  of  his  services  to  science. 


'885. J  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  01 


BEMABKS  ON  LANIUS  BOBUSTUS  (Baird),  BASED  UPON  AN  EXAMINATION 
OF  THE   TYPE   SPECIMEN. 

BY    LEONHARD    STEJNEGER. 

In  April,  1843,  there  was  referred  to  the  Academy,  for  publica- 
tion, a  paper  by  Dr.  William  Gambel,  entitled  "  Descriptions  of 
some  New  and  Rare  Birds  of  the  Rocky  Mountains  and  Cali- 
fornia," where  he  had  been  traveling  at  the  instance  of  Mr. 
Nuttall.  The  Committee  on  Publication,  of  which  Mr.  Cassin 
was  a  member,  recommended  it,  and  consequently  it  was  printed 
in  the  Proceedings  of  that  year  (vol.  i,  pp.  259-262). 

We  make  at  once  the  remark,  that  the  Academy  at  that  time 
had  not  received  specimens,  as  will  appear  from  the  note  on  page 
258.  On  the  contrary,  the  transfer  of  Gambel's  collection  was  not 
made  before  1847  (of.  Proc.  Phila.  Acad.,  iii,  p.  346).  During  that 
very  year  several  large  collections  were  also  received  and  arranged 
for  exhibition  by  Cassin  and  Gambel,  viz. :  the  Rivoli  collection, 
Boucier's  collection,  Wilson's  collection,  Cassin's  collection  of 
West  African  birds,  altogether  nearly  18,500  specimens! 

The  history  of  the  specimen  of  Lanius,  which  afterwards 
became  the  type  of  Cassin's  elegans  and  Baird's  robustus  cannot 
(from  the  catalogues  and  records  of  the  Academy,  as  I  am  kindly 
informed  by  Prof.  A.  Heilprin)  be  traced  further  back  than  1857, 
when  it  was  described  by  Cassin  in  the  Proceedings  as  L.  elegans. 

It  will  be  remarked,  however,  that  Gambel  already,  in  his  paper 
mentioned  above,  enumerates  L.  elegans  as  a  bird  observed  by 
him  in  California.  But  it  is  evident  that  he  does  not  refer  to  any 
particular  specimen,  and  that  the  birds  referred  to  elegans  were 
nothing  but  L.  excubitorides.  He  says  :  "  This  species,  of  which 
but  a  single  specimen  is  known  to  ornithologists  [viz.,  the  type 

in  the  British  Museum],  I  found  abundant  in  California 

in  the  adults  the  breast  is  pure  white ;  in  the  young  blended  with 
dark  brown,  like  our  common  species,  except  the  throat  and  vent, 
which  are  white."  In  his  later,  more  elaborate  paper,  published 
in  the  same  year  as  his  collection  was  turned  over  to  the  Academy, 
Gambel  realizes  the  fact,  and  simply  calls  the  species  met  by  him 
L.  ludovicianiis  with  which   he  identifies  excubitorides  (Proc. 


92  PROCEEDINGS    OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

Phila.  Acad.,  iii,  1846-47,  p.  200).     Nor  is  mention  made  in  this 
paper  of  any  particular  specimen. 

In  his  special  report  upon  the  increase  of  the  ornithological 
collection  during  1847,  Cassin,  while  mentioning  the  incorpora- 
tions of  the  collection  made  by  Gambel  in  California, enumerates 
Lanius  elegans  as  among  the  species  "  especially  interesting," 
but  no  allusion  to  any  specimen  is  made. 

It  is  not  before  ten  years  later  that  we  encounter  a  description 
and  special  notice  referable  to  the  specimen  in  question,  when 
Cassin  in  his  "  Notes  on  the  North  American  species  of  Archi- 
buteo  and  Lanius  "  (Proc.  Phila.  Acad.,  ix,  1857, !  p.  213),  gives 
the  characters  of  Lanius  elegans  Swainson,  which  evidently  are 
taken  from  the  bird  now  before  me.  Regarding  the  distribution 
of  this  species,  he  says :  "  This  appears  to  be  exclusively  a 
western  and  northern  species,  the  only  specimens  of  which  that 
we  have  ever  seen  are  in  the  Museum  of  the  Philadelphia  Academy. 
Our  specimen  was  brought  from  California  by  Dr.  Gambel."  It 
will  be  noted  that  he  speaks  of  several  specimens  in  the  Academy's 
Museum. 

Prof.  Baird,  in  the  "Birds  of  North  America,"  page  327, 
simultaneously  describes  the  same  specimen  under  the  heading 
of  Golly rio  excubitoroides.  He  refers  to  it  as  "  Collected  in 
California  by  Dr.  Gambel,"  and  remarks :  "  This  bird  has  been 
referred  to  L.  elegans  of  Swainson,  but  seems  to  differ  in  some 
appreciable  points." 

The  specimen  was  figured  on  plate  lxxv. 

A  more  detailed  description  of  the  specimen  is  given  by  the 
same  author  in  his  "  Review  of  American  Birds,"  page  444 
(1866),  but  he  seems  to  have  become  doubtful  as  to  the  origin  of 
the  specimen,  since  the  locality  is  given  as  "  California?"  and  in 
the  text  he  says  that  it  is  "  labeled  as  having  been  collected  in 
California  by  Dr.  Gambel."  Though  "  by  no  means  satisfied  that 
the  bird  is  the  true  Lanius  elegans  of  Swainson,"  the  author 
introduces  it  under  the  heading  Gollurio  elegans.  It  may  be 
remarked  that  no  mention  is  made  of  other  specimens. 

Next  we  find  the  specimen  mentioned  in  Cooper's  "  Ornith- 
ology of  California,"  edited   by  Prof.  Baird.     On  page  140  is 

1  Published  in  1858  ;  the  paper  was  recommended  for  publication  at  the 
meeting,  Dec.  29,  1857,  cf.  p.  210. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  93 

given  a  woodcut  representing  the  head  and  one  of  the 
secondaries.  Of  the  locality  is  said :  uHab. — Of  original  speci- 
men, uncertain,  but  somewhere  in  western  North  America." 

In  Dr.  Coues'  "Key"  (1872),  for  the  lirst  time  is  seriously 
doubted  the  North  American  origin  of  the  specimen.  He  says 
(page  125):  "To  this  species  [C.  ludovicianus]  I  must  also 
refer  the  G.  elegans  of  Baird,  considering  that  the  single  speci- 
men upon  which  it  was  based  represents  an  individual  peculiarity 
in  the  size  of  the  bill.  This  specimen  is  supposed  to  be  from 
California,  but  some  of  Dr.  Gambel's,  to  which  the  same  locality 
is  assigned,  were  certainly  procured  elsewhere,  and  it  may  not 
be  a  North  American  bird  at  all." 

The  "  History  of  North  American  Birds,"  by  Baird,  Brewer 
and  Ridgway,  contains  little  additional  information,  except  that 
the  bird  here  is  made  the  type  of  the  new  name  Collurio  ludo- 
vicianus, var.  robustus,  since  it  had  been  shown  by  Sharpe  and 
Dresser  that  the  type  of  L.  elegans  Sw.  was  referable  to  some 
Old  World  species,  erroneously  said  to  have  come  from  the 
"  Fur-countries."  The  authors  also  assert  that  they  "  have  no 
reason  to  discredit  the  alleged  localitj'  of  the  specimen." 

Not  being  able  to  reconcile  the  statement  of  Prof.  Baird,  that 
the  specimen  in  question  "  is  very  decidedly  different  from  any 
of  the  recognized  North  American  species,"  with  the  reduction 
of  it  to  a  variety  under  ludovicianus,  I,  in  1878,  named  the  bird 
Lanius  bairdi  (Arch.  Math.  Naturv.,  iii,  p.  330),  a  synonym 
which,  together  with  many  others,  Dr.  Gadow  has  seen  fit  to 
entirely  ignore  in  the  eighth  volume  of  the  "  Catalogue  of  the 
Birds  in  the  British  Museum  "  (1883). 

Finally,  we  have  to  mention  the  position  taken  by  Dr.  Coues, 
who,  in  his  "  Birds  of  the  Colorado  Valley  "  (p.  546)  "  under  the 
circumstances,  declines  to  take  further  notice  of  the  supposed 
species  in  the  present  work."  "The  circumstances"  alluded  to 
seem  to  be  the  doubt  as  to  the  correctness  of  the  locality  attributed 
to  Gambel's  specimen,  as  expressed  already  in  his  "  Key."  We  are 
compelled,  however,  to  take  exception  to  a  statement  contained 
in  the  sentence  commencing  his  account,  though,  as  will  be 
found  later  on,  we  agree  with  him  as  to  the  result.  He  says : 
"But  Dr.  Gambel,  in  1843  (Proc.  Phila.  Acad.,  1843,  261), 
described  a  shrike,  supposed  to  be  from  '  California,'  which  he 
identified  with  Swainson's  bird,  and  called  L.  elegans.1''  The 
fact    is,   however,   that    the    species    which   Gambel,   in    1843, 


94  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

described  I.  c,  not  only  was  supposed  to  be,  but  also  really  was, 
from  "  California,''  being  excubitorides,  collected  there  by  himself, 
and  the  statement  should  correctly  read  thus :  "  But  Cassin 
and  Baird,  in  1858,  described  a  shrike,  supposed  to  be  from 
'  California,' "  etc. 

The  latest  account  of  the  bird  is  found  in  the  eighth  volume 
of  the  "Catalogue  of  Birds  in  the  British  Museum"  (1883),  p.  243, 
by  Dr.  Gadow,  solely  based  on  Baird,  Brewer,  and  Ridgway 's  work. 
The  name  is  given  as  Lanius  robustus,  and  the  habitat,  California, 
is  not  questioned. 

This  finishes  the  literary  history  of  the  specimen,  which  may 
be  tabulated  thus  : — 

1858.  Lanius  elegans  Cassin,  Pr.  Phila.  Acad.,  ix,  1857,  p.  213  (nee  Swains., 

1831). 
1858.    Collyrio  excubitoroides  Baird,  B.  North  Am.,  p.  327  (part). 
1858.   Collyrio  elegans  Baird,  B.  North  Am.,  pi.  lxxv,  fig.  1. 
1866.   Collurio  elegans  Baird,  Rev.  Am.  B.,  p.  444  ;  Baird  and  Cooper,  Orn. 

Califom.,  i,  p.  140(1870). 

1872.  Collurio  ludovicianus  Cones,  Key,  p.  125. 

1873.  Collurio  ludovicianus  var.  robustus  Baird,  Am.  Natural.,  vii,  1873  (p. 

608);  B.,  Br.  and  Bidgw.,  Hist.  N.  Am.  B.,  i,  p.  420  (1874). 

1878. Coues,  B.  Color.  Vail.,  i.  p.  545. 

1878.  Lanius  bairdi  Stejneger,  Archiv  Math.  Naturv.,  iii,  1878,  pp.  326, 

330 ;  Ld.,  ibid.,  iv,  1879,  p.  263. 
1880.  Lanius  ludonirianus  robustus  Ridgw.,  Pr.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,   1880,  p. 

175  ;  Ld.,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  No.  21,  p.  20  (1881). 
1883.  Lanius  robustus  Gadow,  Cat.  B.  Brit.  Mus.,  viii,  p.  243. 

We  shall*  now  examine  the  specimen  itself,  which,  by  the 
courtesy  of  the  authorities  of  the  Academy,  I  have  before  me. 

It  is  mounted  and  in  a  state  of  preservation  which,  though  not 
very  good,  still  makes  it  sufficient  for  all  practical  purposes.  No 
label  is  attached  to  it,  but  on  the  underside  of  the  stand  is  written 
in  Cassin's  handwriting  : — 

Dr.  Gambel 

Lanius  elegans 

Sw.  Faun.  Bor.  Am. 

I).    \.6o 

fig^"  Observe  larger  bill 
J.  C. 

No  number  or  reference  to  a  catalogue  is  found  anywhere,  nor 
does  the  Academy  seem  to  possess  any  special  record  of  the 
specimen.  The  inscription  is  in  ink,  except  the  name,  which  is 
written  with  a  lead-pencil. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  95 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  locality  is  not  inscribed  on  the  stand, 
and  that  now,  at  least,  the  specimen  is  not  "  labeled  as  having 
been  collected  in  California." 

The  U.  S.  National  Museum  possesses  a  very  rich  collection  of 
North  American  Shrikes,  and  the  Old  World  forms  are  also 
tolerably  well  represented,  partly  due  to  the  incorporation  of  my 
own  collection  of  Shrikes,  of  which  formerly  I  made  a  specialty. 
I  have  compared  the  type  of  L.  robustus  with  these,  the  result 
being  as  follows  : — 

The  statement  of  Professor  Baird,  that  it  is  "very  decidedly 
different  from  any  of  the  recognized  North  American  species," 
is  eminently  confirmed.  The  material  in  the  Museum  has  been 
doubled  many  times  during  the  twent}r  years  since  he  wrote  the 
above,  but  still  the  type  remains  unique  in  its  peculiar  characters. 
I  need  not  repeat  here  his  excellent  description,  but  think  it 
proper  to  sum  up  the  most  diagnostic  features  of  the  bird,  mainly 
to  counteract  any  erroneous  impression  that  might  arise,  caused 
by  the  quotation  above  from  Dr.  Coues'  "  Key,"  in  which  it  is 
asserted  "  that  the  single  specimen  represents  an  individual  pecu- 
liarity in  the  size  of  the  bill."  Lanius  robustus  is  not  only 
remarkable  for  its  large  bill,  but  also  for  its  general  dark  color, 
total  absence  of  light  superciliary  stripe,  the  ashy  wash  of  the 
lower  parts,  the  gray  loral  spot,  the  restriction  of  the  white  on 
the  tail-feathers,  particularly  at  the  base,  and  the  peculiar  distri- 
bution of  black  and  white  on  the  secondaries,  so  well  illustrated 
by  the  figure  in  Cooper  and  Baird 's  Californian  Ornithology 
quoted  above. 

Of  all  the  Old  World  members  of  the  restricted  subgenus 
Lanius,  the  present  bird  only  needs  comparison  with  a  few  dark- 
colored  species.  In  many  respects  it  resembles  L.  algeriensis 
Less.,  particularly  in  the  shade  of  the  gray  on  the  back,  the 
absence  of  a  white  superciliary  stripe,  the  ashy  under  surface ; 
but  the  wing  speculum  is  much  larger,  the  secondaries  differently 
colored,  and  the  tail  with  less  white,  not  to  speak  of  the  difference 
in  the  size  of  the  bill.  In  the  latter  respect  our  bird  agrees 
rather  closely  with  a  specimen  of  a  Lanius  collected  by  H.  B. 
Tristram  at  Gennesareth,  March,  9,  1864,  but  it  is  darker  both 
above  and  beneath,  and  the  pattern  of  secondaries  and  tail  is 
different.  This  specimen  from  Palestine  seems  referable  to  the 
form  which  Gadow  says  is  "  intermediate  between  L.  fallax  and 


96  PROCEEDINGS   OP   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

L.  uncinatus"  the  latter  being  a  big-billed  island  form  from 
Socotra,  off  the  coast  of  Eastern  Africa,  and,  judging  from  his 
remarks  (Cat.  B.  Brit.  Mus.,  viii,  p.  248)  some  of  the  specimens 
from  that  region  east  of  the  Mediterranean  may  be  even  more  like 
the  t}'pe  of  robustus.  The  conclusion  of  my  comparison  is  that 
the  latter  is  more  closety  allied  to  some  of  the  forms  inhabiting  the 
regions  south  and  east  of  the  Mediterranean,  than  to  any  of  the 
known  Nearctic  species,  but  that  it  is  entirely  distinct  from  any 
other  species  known. 

We  shall  now  shortly  review  the  evidence  bearing  upon  the 
origin  of  the  type  :  1.  Gambel  himself  nowhere  directly  and  par- 
ticularly refers  to  the  specimen  in  question  ;  2.  His  collection  was 
turned  over  to  the  Academy  four  years  after  his  original  paper 
was  published  ;  3.  During  the  same  year  the  Academy  received 
more  than  18,000  specimens,  a  great  many  of  which  were  from  the 
Old  World  ;  4.  Not  before  ten  years  after  is  any  direct  allusion 
made  to  the  specimen  by  Cassin  ;  5.  No  indication  of  it  having 
been  collected  in  California,  can  now  be  found  attached  to  the 
bird  or  the  stand ;  6.  We  have  Dr.  Coues'  testimony  that  "  some 
specimens  of  Dr.  Gambel's,  to  which  the  same  locality  (California) 
is  assigned,  were  certainly  procured  elsewhere  " ;  7.  So  far  as  the 
evidence  goes,  the  bird  is  nearer  related  to  some  Old  World  forms 
than  to  those  from  North  America.  The  sum  of  all  this  would 
indicate  that  the  specimen  in  all  probability  is  not  North  Ameri- 
can, and  enough  reasons  are  given  to  explain  how  the  mistake  may 
have  easily  originated.  It  would  not  be  human,  if  in  receiving 
and  putting  on  exhibition  more  than  18,000  specimens  in  one  year 
some  such  mistakes  did  not  happen.  I  therefore  think  we  would 
be  fully  justified  in  excluding  Lanius  robustus  from  the  list  of 
North  American  birds. 

But  it  should  always  be  borne  in  mind,  that  notwithstanding  the 
apparent  conclusiveness  of  the  above  remarks,  the  question  is  not 
fully  solved  before  we  have  pointed  out  where  the  species  really 
occurs,  since  there  is  a  bare  possibility  that  some  day  it  may  be 
discovered  not  far  from  its  alleged  habitat  in  spite  of  all  our 
arguments.  L.  robustus  is  very  distinct  from  the  other  American 
Shrikes,  but  not  so  much  so,  that  its  eventual  discovery  in  any 
part  of  the  Nearctic  region  would  cause  a  great  surprise  as  far 
as  this  point  is  concerned.  The  large  bill  and  the  dark  color 
suggest  some  southern  island,  and  explorers  of  islands  off  our 
southwest  coast  should  be  on  the  look-out. 


PROG,  ACAD,  NAT,  SGI,  PHILA,  1885, 


PLATE 


ScnbnEr  Del. 


SCRIBNER  ON  MELICAE. 


! 


1885.]  natural  sciences  of  philadelphia.  97 

April  7. 
The  President,  Dr.  Leidy,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty  persons  present. 

The  Primary  Conditions  of  Fossilization. — Mr.  Charles  Morris 
made  a  communication  in  answer  to  the  query  :  "  Why  are  there 
no  fossil  forms  found  in  the  strata  preceding  the  Cambrian  ?  "  In 
mineral  conditions  there  is  little  difference  between  the  two  sets 
of  strata.  Yet  the  Cambrian  contain  numerous  fossils,  while 
the  preceding  strata  are  barren  in  this  respect.  This  Cambrian 
life,  however,  does  not  come  in  the  succession  we  might  naturally 
expect,  and  it  ma}'  be  desirable  to  consider  the  succession  which 
actually  occurs. 

Of  Protozoa  there  is  not  a  trace,  if  we  reject  the  doubtful 
Eozob'n.  Yet  vast  numbers  of  Protozoa  must  have  existed,  and 
if  there  were  any  calcareous-  or  siliceous-shelled  forms,  as  at 
present,  they  must  have  left  some  indication  in  the  rocks.  The 
Metazoa  do  not  begin  with  the  lowest  forms,  but  the  different 
orders  make  their  appearance  in  very  odd  conjunction.  Thus,  at 
the  very  beginning,  we  have  a  great  variety  of  tribolites,  in  con- 
junction with  a  much  smaller  variety  of  annelides  and  mollusks, 
while  there  are  very  scanty  traces  of  sponges,  echinoderms  and 
the  lower  crustaceans.  The  most  advanced  form  of  these  animals, 
the  trilobite,  greatly  outnumbers  all  its  contemporaries. 

At  a  considerably  later  date  two  widely  separated  forms  come 
together  into  existence.  The  low  order  of  Hydrozoa  makes  its 
first  appearance  as  the  Graptolite,  and  at  a  closely  related  date 
appear  Cephalopods,  the  highest  order  of  Mollusks.  The  Silurian 
era  opens  with  an  abundance  of  Graptolites  and  a  considerable 
increase  of  Cephalopods.  It  is  much  later  ere  any  clear  trace  of 
Vertebrates  appears,  and  this  in  what  is  certainly  not  their  lowest 
form. 

The  appearance  of  land  animals  presents  a  somewhat  similar 
phenomenon.  No  land  Vertebrates  appear  below  the  Carboniferous 
rocks,  yet  it  is  now  known  that  insects  existed  well  down  in  the 
Silurian,  proving  that  the  conditions  necessary  for  land  life  had 
very  long  prevailed  ere  Vertebrates  left  the  sea  for  the  land. 

It  is  impossible  to  believe  that  these  fossils  represent  truly 
either  the  beginning  or  the  actual  succession  of  life  upon  the 
earth.  Such  an  idea  would  be  utterly  inconsistent  with  the 
development  theory,  and  even  under  the  creation  hypothesis  it  is 
incredible  that  life  could  have  begun  with  such  a  confused  mixture 
of  high  and  low.  No  one,  for  instance,  can  accept  what  the  rocks 
seem  to  teach,  that  advanced  forms  of  Mollusks  and  Crustaceans 
came  into  existence  before  the  Ccelenterata.     It  may  be  taken  for 


98  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

granted  that  we  have  but  fragments  of  the  primeval  life,  and  these 
fragments  associated  in  a  manner  that  cannot  indicate  the  actual 
life  conditions. 

These  earliest  animals  are  mainly  burrowing,  crawling,  or  sta- 
tionary forms.  There  is  very  little  indication  of  the  abundance 
of  swimming  life  which  now  crowds  the  ocean  and  must  have 
then  done  so.  We  find  only  minute  swimmers,  such  as  Pteropods 
and  Phyllopods,  while  if  the  Trilobites  were  able  to  swim  it  must 
have  been  but  a  sluggish  movement.  There  is  no  indication  of 
the  existence  of  rapid  and  powerful  swimmers. 

Yet  there  are  several  reasons  for  believing  that  swimming 
animals  existed  in  abundance.  The  rapid  swimmer  has  an  advan- 
tage in  food-getting  and  in  escape  from  danger  over  the  slow- 
moving  surface  animals.  Natural  selection,  therefore,  must  have 
tended  to  produce  swimming  forms. 

The  facts  of  embryology  yield  evidence  to  the  same  effect. 
Nearly  or  quite  all  ocean  animals  begin  life  as  swimmers.  The 
stationary  forms  become  fixed  only  after  their  larval  period  is 
passed.  This  fact  indicates  that  at  some  early  period  the  ances- 
tors of  our  present  fixed  forms  were  free  swimmers. 

But  a  stronger  proof  of  this  is  found  in  the  condition  of  the 
animals  whose  fossil  forms  we  possess.  They  are  all  covered  with 
protective  armor.  It  is,  indeed,  to  the  preservation  of  this  armor 
that  we  owe  our  knowledge  of  their  existence.  We  find  no  weapons 
of  offense.  Everything  is  defensive.  Even  the  trilobite,  which 
had  nothing  to  fear  from  the  other  known  forms,  was  clothed  in 
a  strong  coat  of  mail,  and  had  acquired  the  habit  of  rolling  him- 
self into  an  impenetrable  ball.  There  can  be  no  question  that  he 
had  foes,  stronger  than  himself,  against  whom  he  found  defense 
only  in  his  chitinous  armor.  Yet  of  these  predatory  foes  we 
know  nothing. 

All  other  preserved  forms  tell  the  same  story.  We  would 
know  nothing  of  them  but  for  their  hard  parts,  and  these  hard 
parts  are  all  protective.  The  soft-bodied  annelid  saved  itself 
by  burrowing  in  the  mud.  The  mollusk  clothed  itself  in  a  firm 
limy  covering.  Of  the  remaining  forms  each  wore  some  kind  of 
defensive  armor.  Many  of  them  doubtless  needed  defense 
against  the  trilobites,  but  the  foes  of  the  trilobite  are  missing. 

If  we  ascend  higher  in  the  rocks,  the  same  tale  is  told.  The 
Hydrozoa,  which  had  probably  swum  the  earlier  seas  in  forms 
allied  to  our  soft-bodied  Medusae,  become  stationary  and  protected 
as  Graptolites.  And  simultaneously  the  powerful  Cephalopods 
make  their  appearance  as  surface  forms,  clothed  in  a  heavy  and 
cumbrous  defensive  armor.  If  they  formerly  had  mastery  of  the 
seas,  as  we  may  conjecture,  they  had  been  driven  from  it  by  some 
more  powerful  and  rapid  foe. 

In  fact  all  the  preserved  forms  may  be  looked  upon  as  to  some 
extent  degenerated  types  of  life.     They  very  probably  represent 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  99 

earlier  free-moving  forms,  which  have  been  driven  to  wear  heavy 
armor  for  protection  from  stronger  foes,  and  have  been  forced  by 
the  weight  and  the  character  of  this  armor  to  take  up  a  life  on  the 
ocean  bottom,  either  as  stationary,  crawling,  or  sluggishly  swim- 
ming forms. 

Where  are  the  foes  who  have  forced  these  forms  of  life  into 
degenerated  conditions  ?  They  are  indicated  in  the  rocks  by  no 
hard  parts,  either  offensive  or  defensive.  They  probabl}'  needed 
no  protective  armor,  they  had  no  internal  hard  skeletons,  and  the 
only  trace  of  early  offensive  weapons  are  found  in  the  dubious 
Conodonts,  of  the  lower  Silurian  strata.  Not  until  undoubted 
fish  teeth  appear  do  we  find  unquestionable  weapons  of  offense. 
And  there  is  no  indication  of  active  predatory  swimmers  until  we 
find  the  earliest  fish  remains.  We  may  conceive  that  fishes  had 
so  increased  as  to  sweep  the  seas  of  any  overabundance  of  food 
forms,  and  had  begun  to  actively  prey  upon  each  other.  Then 
they  developed  the  protective  armor  to  which  they  had  previously 
driven  their  prey.  And  this  armor  increased  in  thickness  and 
strength  until  the  remarkable  bony  plates  of  the  Devonian  fishes 
were  produced.  But  in  all  probability  several  successive  types 
of  life  obtained  mastership  of  the  ocean,  each  superior  form 
driving  all  earlier  forms  to  seek  protection.  Of  these  the  fish 
was  the  last  and  most  powerful,  and  it  cleared  the  open  seas  of 
all  competitors. 

Only  from  some  such  cause  as  this  can  we  understand  the  sud- 
den appearance  of  the  Cambrian  Orthoceratites,  with  their 
bulky  and  clumsy  shells,  which  certainty  would  never  have  been 
developed  except  through  pressure  of  sheer  necessity.  This 
armor  must  have  greatly  diminished  the  motor  powers  of  the 
cephalopod ;  it  was  solely  protective  in  character,  and  it  is 
impossible  to  impute  it  to  any  cause  save  that  of  defense  from  a 
powerful  predacious  foe.  All  the  early  lords  of  the  ocean  had 
successively  to  clothe  themselves  in  strong  armor,  or  to  vanish 
from  existence  as  more  powerful  forms  appeared. 

There  are  strong  indications,  therefore,  that  in  addition  to  the 
armored  forms  preserved  in  the  rocks,  there  was  abundance  of 
naked  forms  of  life,  mainly  swimmers,  and  pursuing  a  predatory 
mode  of  life.  If  we  pass  backward  through  the  succession  of 
fossil  forms,  it  is  to  find  the  armored  types  decreasing  in  numbers 
and  variety.  We  seem  to  gradually  approach  a  period  in  which 
the  naked  swimming  forms  were  greatly  in  excess.  This  may 
have  been  preceded  by  a  period  in  which  there  were  no  armored 
forms.  In  such  a  case,  though  life  may  have  been  as  abundant  as 
now,  it  could  not  have  been  fossilized.  Such  ma}r  possibly  have 
been  the  pre-Cambrian  life  condition. 

There  could  have  been  no  era  of  life,  indeed,  in  which  preda- 
tory forms  did  not  exist.  But  there  may  have  been  a  long  period 
during  which  animals  were  incapable  of  secreting  armor.     The 


100  PROCEEDINGS   OP   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

organic  functions  are  certainly  not  all  of  primitive  origin.  Many 
of  them  may  have  been  the  product  of  ages  of  slow  development. 
Such  may  have  been  the  case  with  the  development  of  glands  suit- 
able for  the  secretion  of  chitin,  carbonate  of  lime,  and  the  other 
protective  substances.  We  know  that  it  was  at  a  late  date  in  the 
history  of  life  when  animals  first  began  to  secrete  an  internal 
hard  skeleton.  The  need  of  protection  undoubtedly  caused  a 
more  rapid  evolution  of  the  power  to  secrete  an  external  hard 
covering,  and  yet  life  may  have  long  prevailed  before  this 
adaptation  was  gained.  The  mantle  of  the  bivalve  mollusks,  for 
instance,  with  its  glands  for  the  secretion  of  a  limy  shell,  cannot 
have  been  a  primitive  feature  of  molluscan  life.  So  the  chitin- 
forming  glands  of  the  crustaceans  may  have  been  a  late  product  of 
evolution.  It  is  possible  that,  in  the  early  days  of  life,  all  the 
mineral  ingredients  of  food  were  directly  excreted.  It  is  equally 
possible  that  the  power  of  transforming  food  elements  into  hard 
substances  did  not  exist.  The  development  of  dermal  glands, 
necessary  to  the  secretion  of  external  skeletons,  teeth,  etc.,  must 
have  occupied  a  considerable  time,  and  its  completion  may  have 
taken  place  but  shortly  before  the  opening  of  the  Cambrian 
period. 

If  such  was  the  case,  the  preceding  life  must  have  been  of  a  low 
order,  and  of  small  dimensions.  Animals  might  have  grown  to 
considerable  size  with  cartilaginous  skeletons,  but  scarcely  without 
teeth  or  other  hard  weapons  of  offense,  of  which  no  trace  remains. 
It  may  be  that  the  earlier  forms  of  life  were  in  great  part  swim- 
ming animals,  that  they  waged  constant  war  upon  each  other,  and 
that  in  time,  through  the  action  of  natural  selection,  the  power  of 
secreting  defensive  armor  was  evolved..  As  this  armor  grew 
denser  and  heavier  the  swimming  powers  became  abridged,  and 
the  armored  animals  were  successively  carried  to  the  bottom,  and 
forced  into  slow-moving  or  stationary  habits  of  life. 

In  corroboration  of  this  idea  is  the  fact  that  the  power  of 
secreting  an  internal  skeleton  appeared  only  at  a  much  later  date. 
It  has  never  been  developed  in  the  Invertebrates,  except  in  late 
cephalopods,  and  in  all  these  animals  the  external  armor  has 
necessarily  been  utilized  for  muscular  attachment.  The  superi- 
ority of  the  vertebrates  is  largely  due  to  the  fact  that  their 
muscular  attachment  has  alwa3's  been  internal,  a  method  which 
gives  much  greater  flexibility  and  power  of  movement.  Yet  for 
a  long  period  after  the  appearance  of  vertebrate  life  the  basis  of 
muscular  attachment  was  merely  a  rod  of  cartilage.  Even  the 
great  Devonian  fishes,  with  their  dense  epidermal  plates,  were 
destitute  of  internal  bone,  except  that  in  a  few  cases  they  possessed 
ossified  vertebral  arches.  The  next  evidence  of  power  to  secrete 
internal  bone  is  found  in  certain  Carboniferous  Ganoids,  which 
possessed  a  mere  ring  of  bone  in  the  external  portion  of  their 
vertebrae.     It  cannot  reasonably  be  argued  that  bony  skeletons 


1885.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OP  1'HILADELPHIA.  101 

would  have  been  of  no  use  to  these  ancient  swimmers.  The  pos- 
session of  bony  skeletons  by  all  the  Teleostei  shows  that  this 
adaptation  is  a  valuable  one.  Modern  Sharks  and  Ganoids,  while 
often  cartilaginous,  frequently  possess  completely  ossified  verte- 
brae. Thus  we  have  reason  to  believe  that  the  absence  of  internal 
bone  in  the  most  ancient  fishes  came  from  the  fact  that  the  con- 
ditions for  the  secretion  of  such  bone  had  not  yet  been  devel- 
oped. 

This  leads  to  one  further  conclusion.  Though  a  cartilaginous 
basis  of  muscular  attachment  might  suffice  for  large  swimming 
animals,  it  would  not  answer  for  large  forms  of  terrestrial  life. 
In  these  a  greater  rigidity  was  necessary.  Therefore  land  verte- 
brates of  large  size  could  not  appear  until  after  the  power  of 
forming  a  bony  skeleton  had  been  attained.  And  it  is  significant 
that  shortly  after  the  appearance  of  bone  in  fish  skeletons  the 
Batrachians  make  their  appearance  in  the  rocks.  We  know  that 
the  land  had  been  adapted  for  animal  life  for  long  ages  before, 
and  peopled  b}-  insects  and  scorpions,  and  possibly  by  forms  of 
life  of  which  we  have  no  comprehension.  It  is  very  probable  that 
fishes  had  long  used  the  land  as  a  temporary  place  of  residence 
and  feeding-ground.  This  we  may  safely  infer  from  the  existence 
of  fossil  Dipnoi,  with  their  powers  of  breathing  air  or  water  at 
will.  Yet  it  was  impossible  that  large  land  vertebrates  could 
appear  until  the  bone-making  power  was  fully  developed.  Archee- 
gosaurus  one  of  the  earliest  air-breathers,  possessed  but  a  ring 
of  bone  in  its  vertebra?,  like  the  Carboniferous  Ganoids.  But  in 
all  the  remaining  Carboniferous  Batrachians  a  fully  ossified  skel- 
eton appears,  and  this  has  been  ever  since  an  absolute  requisite 
of  all  land  vertebral  life,  and  of  all  ocean  vertebrates  except  a  few 
survivals  of  the  antique  types. 

Thus  we  reach  the  general  conclusions  that  fossilization  of 
animal  forms  was  not  possible  until,  after  a  long  period  of  evolu- 
tion, the  power  of  secreting  hard  external  coverings  was  gained  ; 
and  that  the  existence  of  large  land  vertebrates  was  not  possible 
until,  after  a  still  longer  period  of  evolution,  the  power  of  secret- 
ing internal  bony  skeletons  was  developed.  If  these  conclusions 
be  well  founded,  many  of  the  conditions  of  early  life  must  remain 
forever  unknown  to  us,  and  we  cannot  hope  to  recover  more  than 
a  fragment  of  the  antique  fauna. 


April  14. 

The  President,  Dr.  Leidy,  in  the  chair. 

Thirty-one  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  Notes  on  Mesozoic  Cockroaches,"  by  Samuel 
H.  Scudder,  was  presented  for  publication. 


102  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Hibernation  and  Winter  Habits  of  Spiders. — The  Rev.  Dr. 
McCook  remarked  that  the  effect  of  a  low  temperature  upon 
spiders  was  observed  in  the  cases  of  several  young  specimens  of 
Theridion  tepedariorum.  They  hung  on  a  few  short  lines  to  the 
plastered  wall  of  a  brick  out-building,  the  plaster  being  laid 
directly  on  the  brick,  forming  a  very  cold  surface.  The  spiders 
were  protected  from  the  wind  and  snow,  but  wholly  exposed  to 
the  frost.  January  14  (1885),  with  thermometer  ranging  from 
20°  to  25°  above  zero  (Fahrenheit),  the  spiders  were  hanging 
motionless.  When  touched  by  the  tip  of  a  pencil  the}"  dropped 
down  in  the  usual  manner  of  their  kind,  holding  on  by  the  out- 
spun  threads  which  reached  a  length  of  over  one  foot.  They 
ascended  to  their  perch  afterward,  and  crawled  over  the  roof  a 
little  ways. 

At  a  temperature  of  18-6°  the}'  again  were  able  to  drop  from 
the  perch.  January  19,  with  thermometer  ranging  from  17 '5°  to 
20°,  they  seemed  less  active — one,  when  touched,  dropping  about 
one  inch,  another  six  inches.  Four  hours  thereafter  they  were 
suspended  in  the  same  position.  As  the  natural  habit  of  the 
creature  is  to  ascend  in  a  moment  or  two  after  disturbance,  this 
shows  that  the  frost  had  somewhat  affected  the  normal  energy. 
But  one  of  them,  being  gently  lifted  on  the  finger,  moved  its  legs 
and  very  slowly  began  to  ascend.  Five  hours  thereafter  it  was 
at  its  perch  against  the  roof.  These  spiders,  at  this  temperature, 
with  some  variations  (January  21),  moved  their  position,  one 
passing  along  the  angle  of  the  roof,  a  distance  of  four  feet.  This 
change  of  site  was  probably  caused  by  the  annoyance  which  the 
experiments  produced. 

February  11,  the  thermometer  stood  at  zero  at  the  City  Signal 
Service  Office  ;  in  West  Philadelphia,  where  his  observations  were 
made,  the  temperature  was  lower.  On  the  12th,  the  Signal  Ser- 
vice reported  1°  above  zero ;  at  his  house  it  was  below  zero.  On 
this  day  he  removed  from  its  position  one  of  the  specimens,  a 
young  female  about  two-thirds  grown,  and  placed  it  in  his  library 
where  the  temperature  was  summer  heat.  She  was  laid  upon  the 
table  in  the  sun.  The  legs  were  drawn  up  around  the  cephalo- 
thorax  in  the  usual  "  hunched  "  way  when  torpid  or  feigning 
death.  There  was  a  slight  and  regular  pulsation  of  the  feet.  In 
less  than  ten  minutes,  upon  being  touched,  she  stretched  forth 
her  legs  and  began  to  move  slowly  over  the  paper  upon  which 
she  had  been  placed.  When  touched,  her  motion  was  much 
accelerated,  and  she  began  vigorously  to  perambulate  her  bounds, 
anchored  to  and  pulling  out  after  her  the  usual  drag-line.  When 
lifted  up  on  the  tip  of  a  pencil  she  spun  out  a  long  thread,  to  the 
end  of  which  she  hung  in  the  little  basket-like  structure  of  silken 
cords  which  he  had  elsewhere  described.  Indeed,  her  action  was 
in  ever}-  respect  normal,  and  showed  a  remarkably  sudden  and 
complete  revival  of  activity  after  so  long  an  exposure  to  such 
extreme  cold. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  103 

February  26,  a  younger  specimen,  about  one-third  grown, 
hanging  in  a  crevice  in  the  site  above  described,  when  touched 
and  lightly  pressed  down,  slowly  moved  its  legs  and  began  to 
struggle  back  to  its  perch.  The  thermometer  ranged  from  20° 
to  25°  ;  on  the  day  before  the  range  was  from  21°  at  7  A.  M.,  to 
28°  at  11  A.  M. 

During  the  six  weeks  over  which  these  observations  extended, 
the  temperature  was  unusually  low  for  this  vicinity  ;  for  a  great 
part  of  the  time,  the  thermometer  stood  below  freezing  point,  and 
several  times  reached  zero.  The  month  of  March  following  was 
unusually  severe,  the  thermometer  frequently  reaching  winter 
temperature.  On  the  first  of  April,  however,  the  above-named 
spiders,  and  others  of  a  younger  brood,  were  in  their  webs  hale 
and  active,  drawn  out  by  the  first  soft  days  of  spring.  It  would 
seem,  therefore,  that  the  hibernation  of  spiders  (of  this  species, 
at  least),  is  not  accompanied  with  a  great  degree  of  torpidity; 
that  they  preserve  their  activity  and  spinning  habit  while  exposed 
to  cold  ranging  from  freezing  point  to  zero  (Fahrenheit)  ;  that 
after  long  and  severe  exposure,  the  recovery  of  complete  activity 
when  brought  into  a  warm  temperature  is  very  rapid,  almost 
immediate ;  and  that  on  the  return  of  spring,  even  after  a  pro- 
longed and  severe  winter,  they  at  once  resume  the  habits  of  their 
kind. 

In  all  the  above  specimens  the  abdomens  were  full,  indicating 
perfect  health.  Other  spiders  hung  upon  their  webs  with  shriv- 
eled abdomens,  quite  dead,  among  them  one  of  his  specimens,  a 
male,  who  died  during  the  course  of  the  observations.  A  Pholcus 
phalangioides  hung  thus  dried  up,  holding  with  a  death-grip  to 
her  web  b}r  the  two  fore-pairs  of  legs  which  supported  the  cephalo- 
thorax  in  a  position  parallel  to  the  plane  of  the  horizon,  while 
the  long  abdomen  hung  down  at  right-angles  thereto,  and  the 
third  and  fourth  pairs  of  legs  were  drooped  downward  and  back- 
ward. He  could  not  determine  that  these  and  other  spiders 
perished  by  the  cold.  The  living  individuals  were  all  characterized 
by  the  plump  abdomen,  as  though  there  had  been  little  or  no  ab- 
sorption of  tissues  for  nourishment  of  life.  There  appeared  to 
be  no  growth  during  hibernation. 

The  same  facts  hold  good  as  to  the  winter  habits  of  Orb- 
weavers.  The  young  survive  the  winter  in  the  admirably  ar- 
ranged cocoons  provided  by  maternal  instinct.  But  earl}'  in  the 
spring  many  adults  of  both  sexes  are  found  nearly  full-grown, 
who  have  also  safely  weathered  the  cold  months.  He  had,  at 
various  times  in  midwinter,  collected  examples  of  Epeira  strix, 
and  had  found  the  species  adult  in  spring.  Specimens  of  Strix 
may  be  frequently  taken  during  the  winter  months  from  rolled 
leaves,  within  which  they  have  weathered  our  hard  frosts.  These 
rolled  leaves  also  serve  for  nests  during  summer.  Dr.  Geo.  Marx 
had  informed  him  that,  on  the  capacious  Government  grounds  in 


104  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

Washington  city,  lie  often  sees  such  curled  leaves  suspended 
conspicuously  amid  the  verdureless  branches,  and  had  learned  to 
recognize  them  easily  as  the  winter-quarters  of  this  species.  It 
of  course  follows  that,  either  from  purpose  or  by  the  accidental 
unwrapping  of  the  threads  during  continual  journeys  back  and 
forth  trailing  her  drag-line  behind  her,  the  spider  prevents  the  leaf 
from  falling. 

A  vast  colony  of  Epeira  vulgaris  inhabits  the  boat-houses 
grouped  around  the  inlet  wharf  at  Atlantic  City.  Dr.  McCook 
stated  that  he  had  once  visited  this  colony,  May  22,  1882.  The 
season  had  been  a  remarkably  backward  one,  cold,  and  very  rainy. 
The  trees  on  the  island  had  not  yet  leaved ;  insect  life  had 
scarcely  appeared  ;  in  short  the  season  had  advanced  little  further 
than  the  first  of  May  in  ordinary  years.  The  inlet  colony,  how- 
ever, had  already  appeared  in  large  numbers,  and  had  swung  their 
orbs  between  the  timbers  of  the  houses  and  the  piles  which  sup- 
ported them.  These  were  of  various  sizes,  full-grown,  half-grown, 
and  young  several  weeks  out  of  the  cocoons.  All  the  cocoons — 
which  were  thickly  laid  along  the  angles  of  the  joists  and  cor- 
nices— were  empty.  The  number  of  young  spiders  was,  however, 
remarkably  small,  a  fact  which  he  could  account  for  only  on  the 
supposition  that  in  the  absence  of  the  usual  insect  food  supply, 
the  adults  had  been  driven  to  prey  upon  the  young  and  the  3'oung 
upon  each  other  to  an  unusual  degree.  Many  of  the  spiders  were 
hanging  in  the  centre  of  their  round  snares.  Others — the  greater 
part,  indeed — were  sheltered  within  a  thick  tubular  or  arched 
screen,  open  at  both  ends,  which  was  bent  in  the  angles  of  the 
woodwork,  or  beneath  an  irregular  rectangular  silken  patch 
stretched  across  a  corner. 

Many  others  were  burrowed  behind  cocoons,  quite  covered  up 
by  the  thick  flossy  fibre  of  which  these  are  composed.  In  this 
condition  the}'  had  undoubtedly  spent  the  winter.  He  had  found 
examples  of  E.  strix  blanketed  in  precisely  the  same  way  during 
the  winter  months.  Unfortunately  he  had  never  been  able  to 
make  a  mid-winter  journey  to  this  favorite  spider-haunt,  in  order 
to  see  the  araneads  in  extreme  hibernation  ;  but  he  asked  some  of 
the  young  boatmen  what  the  spiders  did  in  winter-time.  "  They 
crawl  into  their  bags,"  one  answered,  referring  to  the  screens 
and  tubes  above  described,  "and  stay  there.  They  came  out 
about  a  month  ago  (the  last  of  April),  and  then  '  shed.'  A 
couple  of  weeks  ago  the  sides  of  the  houses  were  all  covered  with 
these  '  sheds  '  " — by  which,  of  course,  the  young  man  meant  their 
moults. 

The  following  was  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  105 

NOTES  ON  MESOZOIC  COCKROACHES. 
BY  SAMUEL  H.  SCUDDER. 

I.  Pterinoblattina,  a  remarkable  type  of  Palaeoblattariae. 

Among  the  many  fossil  cocki-oaches  figured  by  Westwood 
thirty  years  ago,  was  one  which  Giebel  afterwards  named  Blatta 
plama,  on  account  of  the  resemblance  of  its  neuration  to  the 
barbs  of  a  feather,  where  the  shaft  is  on  one  side.  Several 
species  are  now  known,  and  on  account  of  this  curious  arrange- 
ment of  the  veins,  the  generic  name, 

PTERINOBLATTINA  (^ript^) 
is  proposed.  The  wings  were  very  broad,  expanding  consider- 
ably beyond  the  base,  broadest  beyond  the  middle,  and  filled 
with  an  abundance  of  branching  veins.  The  mediastinal,  scapular, 
and  externomedian  veins  ran  close  together,  side  by  side,  in  a 
perfectby  straight-course  (the  shaft  of  the  feather),  from  near  the 
middle  of  the  base  of  the  wing  toward  and  nearly  to  a  point  on 
the  costal  margin  a  little  within  the  apex  of  the  wing,  and  the 
superior  mediastinal  and  inferior  externomedian  branches,  crowded 
closely  together,  parted  from  this  apparently  common  stem  at 
nearly  similar  angles  on  either  side  of  it.  The  complete  inde- 
pendence of  the  mediastinal,  scapular,  and  externomedian  veins 
shows  that  the  genus  falls  in  the  Palaeoblattariae.  The  species  are 
all  small. 

Pterinoblattina  pluma. 

Blatta  pluma  Gieb.,  Ins.  der  Vorw.,  322.     Figured  by  Westw.,  Quart. 
Journ.  Geol.  Soc.  Lond.,  x,  pi.  15,  fig,  14f. 

The  specimen,  the  original  of  which  I  have  had  the  privilege  of 
studying,  by  the  favor  of  my  kind  friend  Rev.  P.  B.  Brodie,  is 
rather  imperfect,  and  a  little  deceptive  from  the  fact  that  just 
that  portion  of  the  tip  is  missing  which  contains  the  scapular 
branches  ;  it  is  probable,  however,  from  the  longitudinal  character 
of  the  apical  externomedian  offshoots  that  the  species  more  closely 
resembles  P.  chrysea  than  P.  intermixta.  All  the  mediastinal 
branches  art:  simple,  parallel,  equidistant,  almost  straight,  closely 
crowded,  and  part  from  the  main  stem  at  an  angle  of  about  45°. 
The  externomedian  branches,  the  only  others  preserved,  part  at  a 
less  angle,  gradually  become  quite  horizontal  apically,  are  nearly 


106  PROCEEDINGS  OP   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

as  close  at  base  as  the  scapular  branches,  and  as  most  of  them 
fork  and  even  re-fork,  though  with  entire  irregularity,  become 
excessively  crowded  toward  the  margin.  The  length  of  the 
fragment  is  9  mm.,  its  breadth  5  ram.  Probably  the  wing  was  12 
mm.  long,  and  5'5  mm.  broad. 

It  was  found  in  the  Corbula  or  Pecten  beds  of  the  Dorset 
Purbecks  of  England. 

Pterinoblattina  penna,  sp.  nov. 

The  single  specimen  of  this  species  at  hand  is  preserved  in 
much  the  same  manner  as  the  last,  but  shows  a  fragment  of  the 
internomedian  region.  The  three  principal  veins  approach  each 
other  very  gradually  so  as  to  give  them  the  appearance  of  a 
tapering  rod.  The  mediastinal  branches  part  from  the  stem  at 
nearly  a  right-angle  near  the  base  of  the  wing,  gradually  increasing 
in  obliquity  distally,  until  they  form  an  angle  of  45°  with  it;  they 
are  slightly  curved,  the  concavity  outward,  very  closely  crowded, 
and  about  every  third  one  forked  near  the  middle,  but  with  no 
regularity.  The  scapular  branches  are  not  preserved,  but  as  in 
P.  pluma,  and  for  the  same  reason,  they  probably  resemble  P. 
chrysea  rather  than  P.  intermixta.  The  externomedian  branches 
are  very  closely  crowded,  generally  straight,  part  from  the  stem 
at  an  angle  of  45°  next  the  base,  and  become  almost  wholly 
longitudinal  at  the  apex  ;  they  fork  about  as  frequently  as,  and 
more  irregularly  than,  the  mediastinal  branches.  The  interno- 
median area  extends  far  out  on  the  wing,  and  its  branches 
(what  few  can  be  seen)  resemble  those  of  the  preceding  area,  and 
at  its  extremity  are  parallel  to  them.  Length  of  fragment,  13 
mm.;  width,  9  mm.  Probable  length  of  wing,  15  mm.;  probable 
width,  9  mm. 

Described  from  a  specimen  from  the  English  Purbecks  sent  me 
for  examination  by  Rev.  P.  B.  Brodie. 

It  is  not  impossible  that  the  fragment  of  a  larger  wing  figured 
by  Westwood  (Quart.  Journ.  Geol.  Soc.  Lond.,  1854,  pi.  1.7,  fig.  7  ), 
from  the  Lower  Purbecks  of  Durdlestone  Bay  may  be  a  species 
very  close  to  this. 

Pterinoblattina  chrysea. 

Mattina  chrysea  E.  Geinitz,  Zeitschr.  Deutsch.  Geol.  Gesellsch.,  1880, 
520,  pi.  32,  fig.  2. 

In  this  case  we  have  a  more  perfect  wing,  the  tip  being  almost 
completely  preserved.     The  mediastinal  vein  terminates  before 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  107 

the  middle  of  the  outer  half  of  the  costal  border,  and  is  furnished 
with  simple,  straight,  oblique  branches,  not  so  numerous  as  in  the 
other  species,  to  judge  by  the  figure,  though  they  are  spoken  of 
by  Geinitz  as  "  very  numerous  and  closely  crowded."  Just  before 
the  scapular  reaches  the  tip  of  the  mediastinal,  it  turns  parallel 
to  the  costal  margin,  runs  to  the  upper  tip  of  the  wing,  and  emits 
branches  similar  to  those  of  the  mediastinal,  but  of  course  of 
equal  length.  All  the  externomedian  branches  run  almost  longi- 
tudinally, are  straight,  sometimes  forked,  and  appear  from  the 
figure  to  be  less  crowded  than  the  mediastinal  branches,  though 
they  are  compared  by  Geinitz  to  the  barbs  of  a  feather.  The 
internomedian  runs  to  just  beyond  the  broadest  part  of  the  wing, 
being  thus  longer  than  the  mediastinal,  and  sends  less  crowded, 
gently  curved,  usually  forked,  rather  short  branches  to  the  border. 
The  few  anal  branches  curve  and  strike  the  inner  margin.  Length, 
5  mm.;  breadth  about  2*25  mm. 

From  the  Lias  of  Dobbertin,    Germany.     The  description  is 

drawn  up  from  the  data  given  by  Geinitz. 
i 
Pterinoblattina  intermixta,  sp.  nov. 

A  nearly  complete  wing  of  this  species  has  almost  the  same 
shape  as  P.  chrysea,  but  the  upper  part  of  the  apex  is  more  pro- 
duced. The  mediastinal  vein  terminates  before  the  middle  of  the 
outer  half  of  the  wing,  and  the  area  narrows  more  gradually  than 
in  any  of  the  others  ;  its  branches  are  gently  curved,  and  often 
forked,  but  not  excessively  crowded.  Just  before  reaching  the 
tip  of  the  mediastinal,  the  scapular  vein  suddenly  bends  toward 
the  apex,  running  subparallel  to,  but  away  from  the  costal  margin, 
terminating  at  the  tip  and  emitting  a  crowd  of  curved  and  forked 
branches.  The  closely  crowded  externomedian  branches  part  at 
an  angle  of  45°  with  the  stem,  are  straight,  and  fork  only  just 
before  the  tip,  forming  a  tolerably  regular  belt  of  crowded  vein- 
lets  along  the  margin.  The  basal  branches,  however,  are  inter- 
fered with  and  affected  by  the  internomedian  vein,  which  is  nearly 
straight,  at  first  running  plump  against  the  externomedian 
branches,  curves  then  downward  parallel  to  these  and  terminates 
a  little  before  the  mediastinal ;  it  is  furnished  abundantly  with 
branches  curving  like  its  extremitj^  and  branching  next  the  border 
like  the  externomedian  branches,  but  where  it  abuts  against  these 
latter  they  simulate  the  appearance  of  the  internomedian  branches 
so  as  to  appear  as  if  a  part  of  the  internomedian  area,  and  thus 


108  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

give  the  latter  the  appearance  of  extending  out  beyond  the 
broadest  part  of  the  wing.  The  anal  appears  to  be  insignificant, 
reaching  less  than  a  third  the  distance  from  the  base  and  resem- 
bling a  narrower  and  smaller  internomedian  area.  Length  of 
fragment,  10*5  mm.,  probable  length  of  wing  12  mm.  , 

Received  from  Rev.  P.  B.  Brodie,  as  coming  from  the  Upper 
Lias  of  Alderton,  Gloucestershire,  England. 

Pterinoblattina  hospes. 

Ricania  Jio&pes  Germ.,  Acta  Acad.  Leop.  Carol.,   xix,  220-21,  PI.  23, 
fig.  18. 

Germar  took  this  for  one  of  the  Fulgorina,  in  the  neighbor- 
hood of  Ricania  and  Pceciloptera.  It  is  pretty  plain,  however, 
that  it  belongs  here,  though  the  figure  given  by  Germar  is  not 
sufficiently  clear  to  enable  one  to  formulate  any  characteristics. 
Assmann  thought  it  a  Neuropteron,  falling  in  the  neighborhood 
of  Drepanopteryx. 

It  comes  from  the  Oolite  of  Solenhofen. 

Pterinoblattina  gigas. 

Ricania  gigas  Weyenb.,  Arch.  Mus.  Tcyl.,  ii,  270-71,  pi.  35,  fig.  23. 

Following  Germar,  Weyenbergh  placed  this  enormous  species 
in  llicania,  but  it  as  evidently  falls  here  and  bears  a  close  general 
resemblance,  excepting  in  size,  to  P.  penna  of  the  Purbecks. 
Ricania  fulgens  Gieb.  (Brodie,  PI.  4,  fig.  12),  from  the  Vale  of 
Wardour,  has  nothing  to  do  with  Pterinoblattina. 

This  gigantic  form  also  come  from  the  Oolite  of  Solenhofen. 

II.   Triassic  Blattarise  from  Colorado. 

In  a  recent  paper  I  described  some  of  the  Triassic  Palreoblat- 

tarise,  which   I  mentioned  as   interesting   on   account   of  their 

special  relation  to  the  Blattarise  of  the  same  formation.     Brief 

diagnoses  of  these  latter  forms  will  therefore  have  some  interest, 

Mini  I  mention  them  in  the  order  of  their  relation  to  the  Palaeo- 

blattariae. 

NEORTHROBLATTINA  ( ,  cos,  fy0po{),  gen.  nov. 

In  this  genus  the  wings  are  about  two  and  a  half  times  longer 
than  broad,  with  fairly  well  rounded  apices,  the  mediastinal  and 
scapular  veins  amalgamated  into  a  single  vein,  which  extends 
nearly  to  the  tip  and  in  the  middle  of  the  wing  occupies  nearly 
one-half  its  width.     The  internomedian  vein  is  of  varying  impor- 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  109 

tance,  and  in  the  large  anal  area  the  veinlets  terminate  on  the 
margin ;  the  anal  furrow  is  strongly  arcuate,  and  deeply  impressed. 

Neorthroblattina  albolineata,  sp.  nov. 

The  single  wing  has  lost  the  tip,  but  all  the  essential  features  are 
preserved,  excepting  the  form  of  the  tip.  The  wing  is  very  dark 
colored,  and  the  veins  appear  as  very  pale  lines  upon  it.  The 
costal  margin  is  gently  and  equably  arched,  while  the  inner  margin 
is  perfectly  straight.  The  externomedian  vein  is  little  developed, 
first  forking  and  then  not  widely  in  the  middle  of  the  wing,  its 
fuller  development  being  prevented  by  the  ample  and  unrestricted 
development  of  the  internomedian  vein,  which  runs  in  a  full 
rounded  course  nearly  to  the  tip  of  the  wing.  The  anal  area  is 
interesting  because  the  veins  of  the  upper  half  run  close  to,  but 
do  not  impinge  upon  the  anal  furrow,  curving  downward  just  before 
reaching  it,  and  either  running  into  the  next  vein  below  and  ter- 
minating there,  or  continuing  parallel  to  the  furrow  and  termi- 
nating on  the  inner  border.  Length  of  fragment,  T  mm. ;  probable 
length  of  wing,  9  mm. ;  breadth  of  wing,  3*5  mm. 

Triassic  beds  near  Fairplay,  Coloradg. 

Neorthroblattina  Lakesii,  sp.  nov. 

Several  specimens  of  this  species  were  found.  The  costal 
margin  is  arched  as  in  the  last  species,  and  the  inner  margin  has 
an  almost  equal  opposite  curvature.  The  externomedian  vein  has 
a  very  sinuous  course,  and  forks  before  the  middle  of  the  wing 
with  abundant  neuration,  occupying  on  the  margin  the  entire  tip 
of  the  wing,  and  almost  the  outer  half  of  the  lower  margin,  while 
the  internomedian  is  reduced  to  an  arching  vein,  extending  but 
little  beyond  the  anal  furrow,  and  with  onty  two  or  three  branches  ; 
the  anal  veins  are  all  parallel  to  the  anal  furrow  and  simple.  Length 
of  wing,  9  mm.;  breadth,  3*5  mm. 

Triassic  beds  near  Fairpla}',  Colorado.  This  species  is  named 
after  Prof.  Arthur  Lakes,  of  the  School  of  Mines,  in  Golden, 
Colorado,  who  first  made  known  these  beds ;  this  species  being 
one  of  the  first  discovered  by  him. 

Neorthroblattina  rotundata,  sp.  nov. 

The  costal  margin  in  this  species  is  very  strongly  arched,  while 
the  inner  margin  is  straight,  giving  a  very  different  aspect  to  the 
wing.   It  closely  resembles  the  preceding  species  in  the  mediastino- 


110  PROCEEDINGS    OF   THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

scapular,  and  anal  areas,  and  also  in  the  peculiarities  of  the 
externomedian  vein,  excepting  that  the  latter  does  not  encroach 
to  so  large  a  degree  upon  the  internoraedian,  the  terminal  offshoot 
of  which  creeps  along  the  border  so  as  to  limit  the  marginal 
extent  of  the  externomedian  area  almost  as  much  below  as  above, 
although  the  branching  of  the  externomedian  vein  is  scarcely 
lessened.  Length  of  wing,  8*5  mm.;  breadth,  3*3  mm. 
Triassic  beds  near  Fairplay,  Colorado. 

Neorthroblattina  attenuata,  sp.  nov. 

This  species  departs  from  the  t}'pical  forms  in  its  slenderness 
and  pointed  apex,  but  it  agrees  so  fairly  in  general  structure  that 
it  would  best  be  placed  here.  The  costal  margin  is  not  regularly 
arched,  being  flattened  mesially,  while  the  whole  wing  tapers 
beyond  the  basal  third  ;  the  inner  margin  is  also  arcuate,  and  the 
tip  bluntly  pointed.  The  mediastino-scapular  vein  terminates 
considerably  befoi'e  the  apex,  and  the  oppositely  arcuate  interno- 
median  reaches  almost  as  far  out,  the  branches  of  both  nearly 
always  simple.  The  anal  veins  are  only  slightly  irregular. 
Length  of  wing,  15  mm.;  .breadth,  4  mm. 

Triassic  beds  near  Fairplay,  Colorado. 

SCUTINOBLATTINA  (mririvo;),  gen.  nov. 

In  this  genus,  composed  of  small  species,  the  front  wings  are 
decidedly  more  coriaceous  than  the  hind  wings,  so  that  the  neura- 
tion  is  often  more  or  less  obscured  by  it.  The  wing  itself  is 
convex,  as  in  the  modern  Phoraspis,  and  subtriangular  in 
form,  its  greatest  width  being  near  the  base,  while  the  tip  is 
bluntly  pointed.  The  mediastinal  and  scapular  veins  are  again 
blended  into  one,  which,  instead  of  having  a  sinuous  course,  is 
nearly  or  quite  straight,  and  terminates  below  the  apex  of  the 
wing,  while  the  externomedian  vein  follows  closely  parallel  to  it, 
and  the  oblique  veins  of  this  and  the  internomedian  veins  follow 
each  other  so  as  to  make  it  difficult  to  tell  where  the  line  of 
demarkation  may  lie.  The  anal  veins  sometimes  fall  on  the 
margin  and  sometimes  on  the  anal  furrow. 

Scutinoblattina  Brongniarti,  sp.  nov. 

In  this  interesting  species  the  wings  are  very  strongly  convex 
at  the  base,  and  the  whole  surface  is  flecked  with  dark  spots. 
The  branches  part  from  the  main  veins  at  a  similar  angle  on  either 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  Ill 

side  of  the  middle  of  the  wing.  The  anal  area  extends  nearly  to 
the  middle  of  the  wing,  where  it  is  marked  by  a  considerable 
emargination,  and  its  veins  are  frequent,  oblique,  mostly  simple, 
and  terminate  on  the  margin.  Length  of  wing,  7  mm.;  breadth, 
3  mm. 

Triassic  beds  near  Fairplay,  Colorado.  Named  after  Mr.  Chas. 
Brongniart,  of  Paris,  well  known  for  his  remarkable  discoveries 
among  the  older  fossil  insects. 

Scutinoblattina  intermedia,  sp.  nov. 

This  species  resembles  the  last,  but  is  not  marked  by  any  dots, 
and  the  anal  area,  while  shorter,  shows  no  emargination  of  the 
border  at  its  extremity ;  the  anal  veins  are  very  close,  parallel  to 
the  inner  margin,  and  terminate  not  on  the  margin,  but  on  the 
anal  furrow.  It  further  differs  in  that  the  externomedian  branches 
are  considerably  more  longitudinal  than  those  terminating  on  the 
costal  margin.     Length  of  wing,  7  mm.;  breadth,  2*75  mm. 

Triassic  beds  near  Fairplay,  Colorado. 

Scutinoblattina  recta,  sp.  nor. 

This  species,  the  smallest  and  most  abundant  of  all  in  the 
Triassic  rocks,  is  rather  slenderer  than  the  others,  and  has  the 
surface  finely  reticulated.  The  mediastino-scapular  and  externo- 
median veins  run  side  by  side  in  perfectly  straight  lines  from  the 
middle  of  the  base  to  the  middle  of  the  tip,  the  branches,  very 
few  in  number,  parting  similarly  on  the  two  sides.  The  costal 
is  more  arched  than  the  inner  margin,  and  where  they  can  be 
made  out,  the  one  or  two  anal  veins  seem  to  run  to  the  margin, 
but  all  the  veins  on  the  wing  are  exceedingly  obscure.  Length 
of  wing,  6*3  mm.;  breadth,  2*4  mm. 

Triassic  beds  near  Fairplay,  Colorado. 

III.   On  the  Genera  hitherto  proposed  for  Mesozoic  Blattarise. 

Brodie,  in  1845,  published  figures  of  a  considerable  number  of 
mesozoic  cockroaches,  but  named  only  one,  which  he  referred  to 
the  genus  Blatta.  In  1852  Heer  figured  and  named  another  under 
the  equally  broad  generic  name  Blattina.  Westwood,  in  publish- 
ing in  1854  a  considerable  addition  to  our  knowledge  of  the  cock- 
roaches of  the  English  mesozoic  rocks,  separated  four  somewhat 
peculiar  forms  under  the  generic  term  Blattidium ;  the  rest  were 


112  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

unnamed.  Giebel  two  years  later  named  a  considerable  propor- 
tion of  Brodie's  and  Westwood's  species ;  while  placing  a  con- 
siderable number  under  Blatta  and  Blattina,  he  divided  the  rest 
•under  three  new  genera,  Bithma,  Elisama  and  Nethania,  the  last 
including  the  only  one  of  Westwood's  species  of  Blattidium  which 
was  noticed.  On  the  other  hand,  Heer,  in  1864,  divided  all  the 
mesozoic  species  between  Blattina  and  Blattidium,  placing  in  the 
latter  all  of  Westwood's  species,  together  with  all  those  referred 
to  new  genera  by  Giebel.  Finally,  a  few  years  ago  E.  Geinitz 
proposed  for  a  triassic  species  described  by  him,  and  one  pre- 
viously published  by  Heer,  the  new  generic  term  Mesoblattina. 

There  is  no  question  that  the  forms  described  by  Westwood, 
after  eliminating  the  one  separated  by  Giebel,  under  the  name  of 
Nethania,  form  a  very  distinct  group ;  but  none  of  the  species 
since  added  to  it  belong  here,  so  that 

BLATTIDIUM 

should  stand  much  as  first  limited  (though  not  described)  by 
Westwood.  Probably,  however,  it  should  be  still  further 
restricted  by  the  elimination  of  B.  Achelovs  Westwood.  The 
wings  are  exceedingly  long  and  slender,  particularly  in  B. 
Symyrus  Westw. — which  may  be  taken  as  the  type — with  nearly 
or  quite  parallel  sides.  The  mediastinal  vein  terminates  not  far 
from  the  middle  of  the  wing,  and  sends  out  a  multitude  of 
crowded  offshoots  to  the  margin.  The  scapular  vein  unites  in  the 
basal  third  of  the  wing  with  the  externomedian,  and  throws  off 
rather  distant  oblique  veins,  first  to  the  mediastinal,  and  after- 
wards to  the  border.  The  externomedian  and  internomedian 
veins  have  together  several  more  or  less  forked,  very  longitudinal 
branches,  all  of  which  appear  to  terminate  on  the  apical  margin, 
while  the  main  anal  vein,  longitudinally  oblique,  extends  nearly 
as  far  as  the  mediastinal,  and  the  outer  half  of  the  inner  margin 
of  the  wing  seems  to  have  no  veins  falling  upon  it ;  the  veins  of 
the  anal  area  run  obliquely  from  the  margin  upward  and  outward 
to  the  main  anal  vein. 

As  to  the  genera  of  Giebel,  six  species  are  placed  by  him  in 
Bithma,  two  in  Elisama  and  one  in  Nethania.  The  species  of 
Nethania  is  rather  too  uncertainly  figured  to  determine  by  the 
illustration  alone  where  it  belongs.     The  two  species  of 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  113 

ELISAMA 

figured  by  Broclie  certainly  belong  together,  and  seem  to  consti- 
tute a  natural  genus.  By  the  kindness  of  Rev.  Mr.  Broclie,  I 
have  seen  the  original  of  his  pi.  v,  fig.  1  (Elisama  Kneri  of 
Giebel)  and  another  specimen  which  seems  to  belong  to  E. 
minor,  so  that  I  can  more  fully  characterize  this  genus.  The 
mediastinal  and  scapular  veins  appear  here  to  constitute  one 
vein,  and  to  occupy  almost  the  entire  upper  half  of  the  wing. 
The  externomedian  and  internomedian  veins  fill  the  lower  half 
between  them  with  parallel  veins,  which  at  their  origin  curve  at 
once  strongl}'  downward,  and  then  run  longitudinally  to  the 
apical  margin,  leaving  only  the  meagrest  possible  space  to  the 
anal  area,  which  is  indeed  broken  off  from  the  two  specimens  I 
have  seen,  and  does  not  appear  in  the  figures  published  by 
Brodie.  In  addition,  in  both  the  species,  there  is  an  abundant, 
but  imperfect,  cross-venation  at  the  base  of  the  externomedian 
and  internomedian  areas,  and  on  the  latter  a  large  discolored 
spot,  which  may  of  course  be  confined  to  these  two  species  only. 

RITHMA 

contains  more  incongruous  material.  I  have  myself  recognized 
in  the  English  species  I  have  examined  autoptically  only  one  of 
the  species  referred  to  it,  named  R.  Murchisoni  \>y  Giebel,  and 
this  is  certainly  to  be  referred  to  Mesoblattina  Geiriitz.  R.  rami- 
ficata  is  cpiite  too  imperfect  to  be  considered  until  better 
specimens  occur.  It  is  probable  that  R.  antiqua  should  be 
separated  from  the  others,  and  the  same  may  be  true  of  R. 
Westivoodi.  This  leaves  two  species,  R.  purbeccensis  and  R. 
Morrisi,  which  agree  well  together,  and  represent  a  group  which 
seems  to  have  flourished  in  mesozoic  times,  as  I  have  seen  a 
number  of  species  from  the  English  Lias  belonging  with  them,  and 
Blattina  formosa  Heer  from  Schambelen,  and  Blattina  Hasina 
Gieb.,  figured  by  Brodie,  also  belong  here.  These  wings  are 
rounded  wedge-shaped,  with  the  amalgamated  mediastinal  and 
scapular  area  so  large  as  to  occupy  about  half  of  the  wing, 
the  vein  running  in  a  slightly  sinuous  course  to,  or  even  below, 
the  tip.  The  anal  area  is  generally  pretty  large,  convex,  and  filled 
with  parallel  veins,  which  terminate  on  the  margin.  The  space 
between  is  divided  about  equally  between  the  externomedian  and 
internomedian  veins,  which  generally  take  a  somewhat  sinuous 

9 


114  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

course,  and  fork  with  tolerable  abundance,  filling  the  space  with 
graceful  lines,  spreading  like  (sinuous)  rays  of  a  fan.  The 
genus  is  closely  related  to  Neorlh  rdblattina  of  the  American  Trias1 
but  differs  from  it  in  the  much  greater  area  covered  by  the  amal- 
gamated mediastinal  and  scapular  veins. 

The  following  described  species  may  be  referred  to  it: — 

Rithma  purbeccensis  Gieb.,  Faun.  d.  Vorw.,  iii,  319.  Figured  by  Westw.,  Quart. 
Journ.  (Jeol.  Soc.  Loud.,  x,  PI.  18.  fig.  32.  Lower  Purbecks,  Durdlestone  Bay, 
England. 

Rithma  Morrisi  Gieb.,  Faun.  d.  Vorw.,  iii.  319.  Figured  by  Westw.,  Quart.  Journ. 
Geol.  Soc  Loud.,  x,  PI.  18,  fig.  34.     Lower  Purbecks,  Durdlestone  Bay,  England. 

Rithma  formosa, 

Blattina  formosa  Ilcer,  Lias  Ins.  Aarg.,  15,  PI.  IT,  figs.  41,  42  ;  liter, 
Urw.  Schweiz,  PL  7.  figs.  1,  \b, ;  Lias,  Schambelen,  Switzerland. 

Rithma  liasina. 

Blattina  Hasina  Gieb.,  Faun.  d.  Vorw.,  iii,  :;17.  Figured  by  Brodie, 
Foss.  Ins.  Engl.,  PL  8,  fig.  12;  Lower  Lias  of  Wainlode,  Strensham, 
England. 

MESOBLATTINA, 

proposed  by  E.  Geinitz,  as  stated,  for  two  Liassic  species  of 
continental  Europe,  is  a  most  prolific  type,  a  considerable  num- 
ber of  English  mesozoic  forms  falling  here,  and  among  others,  as 
remarked  above,  those  figured  by  "Westwood  and  described  by 
Giebel  under  the  names  of  Rithma  Murchisoni  and  R.  antiqua. 
The  former  of  these,  as  well  as  a  considerable  number  of  new 
species  have  been  sent  to  me  by  Mr.  Brodie.  In  this  genus  the 
basal  sweep  of  the  externomedian  and  internomedian  veins  is  very 
noticeable,  following  as  they  do  the  curve  of  the  anal  furrow 
before  branching  to  fill  the  lower  half  of  the  wing.  In  this 
respeel  they  remind  one  strongly  of  Elisama,  but  the  wings  are 
much  slenderer  than  there,  and  what  is  of  more  importance  the 
anal  area  isof  the  normal  size, while  next  the  humeral  angle  is  seen  a 
flat  unveined  Held,  so  frequent  in  modern  cockroaches.  To  this 
belong  among  others  the  following  species: — 

Mesoblattina  protypa  Gein.,  Zeitschr.  Deutsch.  Geol.  Gesellsch.,  1880,  519-20,  PL 
22,  fig.  I.     Litis  of  Dobbertin,  (lermany. 

Mesoblattina  angustata  Gein-,  ih.,  5 10-20. 

Blattina  angustata  Beer,  Viert.  naturf.  Gesell.  Zurich,  ix,  288,  299-800, 
PL  fig.  <».    Lias  of  Schambelen,  Switzerland. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  115 

Mesoblatina  dobbertinensis  Gein.,  Zeitschr.  Deutsch.  Geol.  Gesellsch.,  1881,  570, 
PI.  13,  fig.  1.     Lias  of  Dobbertin,  England. 

Mesoblattina  Murchisoni. 

Rithma  Murchisoni  Gieb.,  Ins.  d.  Vorw.,  319.  Figured  by  Westw., 
Quart.  Journ.  Geol.  Soc.  Loud.,  x,  PI.  18,  fig.  43.  Lower  Purbecks 
of  Durdlestone  Bay,  England. 

Mesoblattina  antiqua. 

Rithma  antiqua  Gieb.,  Ins.  d.  Vorw.,  319.  Figured  by  Westw.,  Quart. 
Journ.  Geol.  Soc.  Lond.,  x,  PI.  17,  fig.  10.  Lower  Purbecks  of 
Durdlestone  Bay,  England. 

Mesoblattina  elongata.  \ 

Blatta  elongata  Gieb.,  Ins.  d.  Vorw.,  322.  Figured  by  Westw.,  Quart. 
Journ.  Geol.  Soc.  Lond.,  x,  PI.  15,  fig.  23.  Middle  Purbecks  of 
Durdlestone  Bay,  England. 


116  proceedings  of  the  academy  op  [1885. 

Aprtl  21. 
Mr.  Thomas  Meeiian,  Vice-President,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-seven  persons  present. 

Persistence  in  Variations  Suddenly  Introduced. — Mr.  Thomas 
Meeiian  remarked  that  some  public  notice  had  been  given  to  his 
observations  on  Gypripedium  insiyne  (see  page  :;0  of  the  Proceed- 
ings, 1885),  and  hence  correspondents  had  written  to  him  of  similar 
behavior  in  this  plant.  A  correspondent  at  Lee,  Mass.,  had 
plants  that  had  subspicate  flowers  last  year ;  and  one  from 
Sharon,  Western  Pennsylvania,  wrote  that  Mr.  O'Brien  of  that 
place  had  a  plant  that  produced  such  flowers  four  years  ago,  and 
the  same  plant  had  produced  them  annually  ever  since.  There 
could  be  very  little  of  what  is  understood  by  the  term  environ- 
ment to  so  ailed  one  plant  that  it  should  change  in  this  manner 
any  more  than  other  plants  growing  under  the  same  condi- 
tions of  environment ;  and  when  we  found  the  same  species 
producing  identical  variations  in  localities  two  or  three  hundred 
miles  apart,  the  application  of  the  term  environment  had  abso- 
lutely no  meaning  at  all.  We  must  still  continue  to  search  for 
some  power  that  gave  law  to  the  production  of  variation — in 
other  words,  we  had  yet  no  comprehensible  theory  of  the  origin 
of  species.  That  new  species  owed  allegiance  to  the  power  of 
variation  must  be  admitted,  for  these  variations  were  species. 
The  subspicate  inflorescence  and  accompanying  changes  in  the 
forms  of  the  flower,  were  specific  characters.  We  had  no  right 
to  undervalue  the  characters  because  we  happened  to  know  the 
parentage.  The  form  once  produced  had  the  hereditary  character 
of  a  species.  It  had  endured  for  four  years.  By  analogy  with 
similar  changes  in  other  plants,  we  were  justified  in  assuming  that 
it  would  reproduce  itself  indefinitely  from  seeds,  as  it  had  done 
by  offsets ;  and  again  we  had  the  recognized  character  of  a 
species. 

The  most  interesting  deduction,  however,  from  the  facts  now 
presented,  was  that  it  is  not  necessary  to  assume  that  every 
species  sprang  from  one  parent  form,  and  from  this  one  centre  of 
origin  spread  by  long  lapses  of  time  over  a  wide  extent  of  country. 
We  see  that  identical  forms  may  appear  simultaneously  in  locali- 
ties widely  separated  ;  and,  the  circles  meeting,  cover  a  district  in 
a  comparatively  short  time.  There  would,  of  course,  still  have  to 
be  explained  how  the  original  forms  from  which  these  modern 
variations  sprung,  first  had  such  a  wide  distribution,  but  that  was 
a  question  which  must  wait  for  its  own  facts  to  properly  solve. 
This  difficulty  could  not  invalidate  what  we  saw  must  be  a  truth, 
that  in  these  modern  times  new  and  identical  forms  do  appear 
simultaneously  in  widely  separated  localities. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  117 

Influence  of  Temperature  on  the  Separate  Sexes  of  Flowers. — 
Mr.  Meehan  referred  to  his  former  observation,  recorded  in  the 
Proceedings,  that  the  male  flowers  in  Amentaceae,  and  other 
dioecious  plants  would  grow,  become  perfectly  developed,  and 
mature  the  pollen  under  a  temperature  wholly  insufficient  to 
excite  the  growth  of  the  female  flower,  which  would  remain 
undeveloped  until  a  warmer  temperature  ensued.  He  had  shown 
that  the  infertility  of  hickories,  oaks,  walnuts,  hazelnuts,  and 
other  plants,  a  complaint  common  among  orchardists  in  our 
country,  arose  from  this  fact,  there  being  very  little  or  often  no 
pollen  to  fertilize  the  flowers  in  seasons  when  a  few  moderately 
warm  days  in  winter  would  bring  the  aments  to  perfection  a 
month  or  even  months  before  the  female  flowers  grew.  This 
season  we  had  no  warm  winter  days,  and  at  this  time,  middle  of 
April,  the  aments  in  the  hazelnuts  and  the  female  flowers  were 
maturing  together. 

Mr.  Meehan  added  that  when  he  first  reported  these  observa- 
tions to  the  Academy  he  believed  them  wholly  original,  but  he 
had  since  noted  that  similar  observations  had  been  communicated 
to  the  Horticultural  Society  of  London,  on  the  18th  of  February, 
1823,  by  Rev.  George  Swayne.  "  I  entertain,"  says  he,  "  a  strong 
suspicion  that  the  xery  frequent  failures  of  the  filbert  crop  (Mr. 
Williamson  tells  us  that  they  totally  fail  three  years  out  of  five) 
are  in  great  measure  occasioned  by  a  deficiency  either  in  number 
or  in  power  of  the  male  blossom."  He  remedied  this  by  experi- 
ment, by  getting  aments  from  other  trees  and  hanging  them  in  the 
trees  that  had  lost  them.  This  gentleman,  however,  did  not 
apparently  perceive  the  underlying  principle  that  it  took  less  heat 
to  perfect  the  male  flowers  than  the  female  flowers  of  the  same 
species.  It  was  quite  possible  this  generalization  might  be 
carried  out  of  the  region  of  amentaceous  or  allied  plants,  and 
carried  to  a  wide  range  of  vegetable  species,  or  even  into  zoology. 


April  28. 
Mr.  Edw.  Potts  in  the  chair. 

Fourteen  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  On  the  genus  Aphredoderus,"  by  Willis  S. 
Blatchley,  was  presented  for  publication. 

Mr.  Philip  Laurent  and  the  Rev.  J.  R.  Danforth,  D.  D.,  were 
elected  members. 

Elasticity  in  the  Fruit  of  Gactacese. — At  the  last  meeting  of  the 
Botanical  Section,  Mr.  Thomas  Meehan  exhibited  fruit  of  Mam.il- 
laria  Heyderi,  and  remarked  on  the  elastic  characters  of  this  and 
other  species.     This  Mamillaria,  under  culture,  flowers  in  April 


118  PROCEEDINGS  OP   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

or  May,  and,  after  flowering  there  is  no  sign  of  any  development 
in  the  fruit.  The  ovarium  is,  indeed,  buried  between  the  closely 
appressed  walls  of  the  bases  of  the  mammae.  Here  they  remain, 
undiscernible,  till  just  before  the  next  flowering  season,  when  they 
suddenly  emerge,  and  in  a  single  night  apparently  stretch  out  to 
their  full  length.  All  attempts,  however,  to  get  at  the  exact 
time  of  development  had  failed,  for  the  fruit  was  alwaj^s  of  full 
Length. when  first  observed.  In  this  species,  the  fruit  is  about 
two  inches  in  length,  clavate  and  incurved,  and,  as  they  are  bright 
red,  and  more  than  double  the  length  of  the  mammas,  and  pro- 
duced in  considerable  numbers,  the  effect  on  a  plant  where  they 
were  wholly  absent  a  few  days  before,  is  very  striking.  This 
same  sudden  appearance  of  the  fruit  a  3rear  after  the  ovaria  had 
been  fertilized,  has  been  noticed  in  Mamillaria  Niittalliana, 
and  some  Mexican  allied  species.  That  the  sudden  development 
is  the  result  of  an  elastic  projection,  and  not  of  a  proper  growth, 
is  manifest  from  the  fact  that  the  fruit  is  mature  from  its  first 
appearance,  has  its  dark  red  color,  and  succulence,  and  the  seeds 
are  perfect  in  color  and  size.  Growth  has  to  finish,  in  all  fruits, 
before  maturity  is  reached.  A  related  form  of  elasticity  has 
already  been  recorded  by  him  in  the  Botanical  Gazette.  He  has 
noted  that  after  the  maturity  of  the  fruit  of  Opuntia  Bigelovii 
the  seeds  are  projected  from  the  apex,  and  run  down  the  sides  of 
the  fruit  like  lava  from  a  burning  mountain.  In  a  letter  to  the 
speaker,  Dr.  Engelmann  a  short  time  before  his  death,  referred 
to  this  observation  as  a  matter  of  great  importance  as  explaining 
a  fact  for  which  he  had  never  been  able  to  account,  that  fruit 
evidently  seed-bearing,  had  generally  been  found  by  him  to  have 
no  seed  when  cut  open. 

Mr.  Median  remarked  that  cases  where  ovaria,  though  fertilized, 
would  remain  a  year  without  signs  of  growth,  were  not  unknown. 
1  ndeed,  large  numbers  of  Coniferae,  and  species  of  Querent  or  oak 
had  especially  this  peculiarity.  There  was  often  little  or  no 
growth  in  the  fertilized  fruit  till  the  second  year. 

He  knew  of  no  author  who  had  made  any  mention  of  this  sudden 
and  elastic  development  in  the  fruit  of  the  Cacti,  though  the 
fact  must  surely  have  come  within  the  view  of  some  observers. 
Pfeiffer,  Decandolle,  Zuccarini,  and  other  leading  writers  on  Cac- 
taceae,  seldom  make  any  reference  at  all  to  the  fruit,  while  Dr. 
Engelmann,  who,  of  all  others,  has  given  us  the  most  of  what  we 
do  know  in  reference  to  this  interesting  part  of  the  history  of  this 
plant,  simply  says  in  a  few  instances  that  the  "  fruit  matures 
about  the  same  time  with  the  opening  of  the  Mowers.''  He  had 
however,  nearly  perceived  the  fact  in  one  instance.  He  notices 
in  Plantse  Lindheimeriansc  that  in  this  very  species  (he  then 
regarded  it  as  M.  applanata)  "the  scarlet  fruit  is  still  persis- 
tent .and  forms  an  outer  circle,"  while  the  new  flowers  are  opening; 
and  in  the  Botany  of  the  Mexican  Boundary,  p.  '.),  referring  to  a 
eloscly  allied  species.   M.  miacantha,  lie  says:    "  Fruil   ripening 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  1  1 '.» 

the  second  spring  and  summer,  till  then  hidden  between  the  bases 
of  the  surrounding  tubercles,  and  for  the  greater  part  buried  in 
the  tissues  of  the  plant;  in  spring  the  young  fruit  suddenly  (in 
one  or  two  weeks)  grows  to  its  full  size,  9-12  or  even  15  lines 
long,  protruding  far  above  the  tubercles,  and  forming  an  interior 
(exterior?)  scarlet  circle,  around  the  inner  circle  of  rose-colored 
flowers."  He  did  not  perceive  that  the  development  of  the  fruit 
was  not  a  growth,  but  the  emergence  and  stretching  out  of  struc- 
ture the  actual  growth  of  which  had  already  been  matured  ;  that 
it  was  an  elastic  and  not  a  growing  fruit. 


May  5. 

Mr.  John  H.  Redfield  in  the  chair. 

Twenty-one  persons  present. 

The  following  papers  were  presented  for  publication  : — 

"  On  the  Air-bladder  of  Fishes,"  by  Charles  Morris. 

"A  Review  of  the  Genus  Phrynosoina,"  by  Alan  F.  Gentry. 

Spawning  of  Fidgur  perversus. — Mr.  Jos.  Willcox  remarked 
that  during  the  month  of  March,  1884,  and  recently,  during  the 
past  March,  in  Clearwater  Harbor  and  Sarasota  Bay,  in  Florida, 
he  observed  many  egg-cases  (more  than  a  hundred)  of  Fulgur 
perversa S,  both  recently  completed  and  during  the  process  of 
their  formation. 

When  completed,  one  end  of  the  string  of  egg-cases  floats  freely 
in  the  water,  while  the  small  end  is  fastened  to  a  shell  under  the 
sand.  Being  thus  anchored  it  is  not  liable  to  be  removed  from 
its  original  position  113-  the  force  of  the  tide.  Whenever  both 
ends  of  the  egg-case  are  found  to  be  under  the  sand,  the  middle 
portion  being  above  the  surface  in  the  form  of  a  loop,  the  parent 
conch  will  always  be  attached  to  one  of  the  ends,  but  invisible  to 
the  beholder.  All  the  processes  connected  'with  the  subject  of 
the  reproduction  of  this  species  are  performed  under  the  sand, 
until  the  egg-cases  are  completed.  When  about  to  spawn,  a  place 
is  selected  where  the  sand  is  not  packed  hard.  At  that  time 
a  disposition  is  manifested  to  assemble  in  communities,  usually 
upon  a  sand-flat  where  the  water  is  never  deep,  and  where  the 
receding  tide  leaves  the  egg-cases  dry  and  exposed  to  the  warm 
rays  of  the  sun  during  a  portion  of  each  day.  Many  egg  cases 
however,  are  to  be  seen,  which  are  always  submerged.  In  such 
instances  the  eggs  may  require  a  longer  time  for  their  develop- 
ment. Although,  during  the  early  part  of  April,  many  egg-cases 
were  observed  that  were  completed,  in  no  instance  were  the 
young  shells  found  to  be  developed  in  them. 

When  the  mollusk  is  about  to  spawn,  it  first  descends  into  the 
sand  deeply,  and  attaches  the  egg-case  to  a  bivalve  shell.     As  the 


L20  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

process  of  extrusion  permits,  it  ascends  until  the  small  end  of  its 
shell  or  siphon  reaches  the  surface  of  the  sand,  so  that  it  may 
respire  the  water  freely.  In  this  position  it  remains  until  the 
spawning  is  completed,  during  which  process  the  body  is  pro- 
truded from  its  shell  to  a  great  extent.  Only  four  or  five  of  the 
cells  or  capsules  were  observed  to  exist  in  the  body  of  the  female 
at  one  time,  which  were  closely  compacted  there,  occupying  little 
space;  but,  after  extrusion,  each  cell  becomes  enlarged  in  thick- 
ness, being  swollen  by  the  introduction  of  water.  During  the 
process  of  formation,  the  egg-case  is  forced  upward,  appearing  in 
the  form  of  a  loop  above  the  sand,  though  no  portion  of  the 
parent  is  then  visible. 

This  species  commences  to  spawn  early  in  life.  One  egg-case 
was  observed,  the  cells  of  which  were  about  a  half  inch  in  diam- 
eter, the  shell  of  the  parent  being  only  three  and  a  half  inches 
long.  If  handled  gently,  when  dug  from  the  sand,  the  conch 
does  not  withdraw  its  body  into  its  shell ;  but,  if  it  is  injured,  it 
will  quickly  eject  all  the  egg-cells  from  its  body,  and  close  its 
operculum.  As  only  four  or  five  of  the  egg-cells  are  found  in  the 
body  at  one  time,  in  the  process  of  formation,  it  is  presumed  that 
the  whole  series  of  cases  require  a  long  time  in  their  develop- 
ment. 

•     May  12. 
Mr.  Thomas  Meehan,  Vice-President,  in  the  chair. 

Twenty-four  persons  present. 

The  manuscript  diary  of  Wm.  Bartram  was  presented  to  the 
library  by  Mi-.  .Meehan.  It  covers  the  period  from  1802  to  1822, 
and  contains  notes  on  meteorology  and  natural  history, especialh' 
ornithology. 

A  paper  entitled  "A  Review  of  the  American  Genera  and 
Species  of  Mullidae,"  by  Edw.  A.  Hall  and  J.  Z.  McCaughan, 
was  presented  for  publication. 


May  19. 
Mr.  Edw.  Potts  in  the  chair. 
Fifteen  persons  present. 

Erythrite,  Genlliite  and  Cuprite  from  near  rhiladelphia. — 
Prof.  H.  Carvill  Lewis  stated  that  during  the  Saturday  excur- 
sions of  his  class  in  mineralogy,  a  number  of  new  mineral  Localities 
had  been  discovered,  three  of  which  were  of  sufficient  interest  to 
in-  recorded. 

Erj  thiute. — Erythrite,  the  beautiful  and  rare  arsenate  of  cobalt, 
not    heretofore    recorded    .is   occurring    in    North    America,  was 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  121 

found  at  the  Wheatley  lead  mines,  south  of  I'lmnixville.  It 
occurs  here  in  veins  and  incrustations  of  a  beautiful  rose-pink 
color.  Under  the  microscope  these  incrustations  are  shown  to  be 
for  the  most  part  composed  of  minute  globular  rosettes  of  crys- 
tals, while  earthy  and  fibrous  masses  also  occur.  The  mineral 
was  found  to  fuse  easily  in  the  name  of  a  Bunsen  burner,  coloring 
the  flame  pale  grayish  blue,  the  color  of  burning  arsenic.  A  borax 
bead  was  colored  deep  blue,  proving  the  presence  of  cobalt.  The 
erythrite  was  associated  with  fluorite  and  blende.  The  speci- 
mens were  collected  by  Mr.  L.  Woolman. 

Genthite. — Genthite,  a  hydrous  silicate  of  nickel  and  magnesia, 
was  discovered  in  emerald-green  coatings  on  the  Schuylkill  Valley 
Railroad,  about  a  hundred  feet  north  of  the  steatite  quarry  at 
Lafayette,  just  outside  the  city  limits.  It  occurs  on  an  actino- 
lite  rock  in  thin  coatings,  which,  under  the  microscope,  show  the 
mammillary  and  stalactitic  structure  characteristic  of  genthite. 
Fused  with  borax,  it  gives  a  bead  which  is  violet-brown  in  the 
oxidizing  flame,  and  in  the  reducing  flame  is  reduced  to  gray 
metallic  particles,  these  reactions  being  characteristic  of  nickel. 
The  genthite  is  associated  with  the  numerous  magnesian  minerals 
which  have  made  the  steatite  quarry  so  well  known.  Efflores- 
cences of  epsomite  and  veins  of  asbestos  were  found  within  a  few 
feet  of  the  genthite. 

The  discovery  of  genthite  has  a  geological  interest  in  demon- 
strating the  presence  of  nickel  in  the  serpentine  belt  which  here 
crosses  the  Schuylkill.  Some  years  ago  Mr.  T.  D.  Rand  1  had 
found  a  single  specimen  of  millerite,  another  nickel  mineral,  in 
capillary  crystals  in  the  dolomite  at  the  same  locality.  With  this 
exception,  nickel  had  not  been  known  in  this  serpentine  belt. 
Chromic  iron  and  other  chromium  minerals  are,  however  known 
to  occur  in  several  localities  in  the  same  zone  of  serpentine,  and 
the  association  of  chromium  and  nickel  is  well  known.  The  ser- 
pentines of  Cornwall,  the  Alps,  the  Yosges,  and  of  hundreds  of 
other  localities,  contain  both  chromium  and  nickel.  Dr.  T.  Sterry 
Hunt  states  2  that  the  serpentines  of  his  third  (Green  Mountain) 
series,  which  he  refers  to  the  lower  Silurian  age,  are  "  marked  by 
the  almost  constant  presence  of  small  portions  of  the  oxides  of 
chrome  and  nickel,"  a  character  which  distinguishes  them  from 
the  serpentines  of  the  Laurentian  series,  which  are  usually  free 
from  these  metals.  Dr.  Hunt,  however,  fails  to  identify  the  ser- 
pentine and  steatite  of  Lafayette  with  his  Green  Mountain  series, 
but  supposes  it  to  belong  to  another  horizon,'  refusing  to  believe 
that  it  was  derived  from  an  eruptive  rock. 

1  Proc.  Min.  and  Geol.  Sec.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1877. 

2  Chemical  and  Geological  Essays,  187o,  p.  -'>2. 

8  The  Geological  History  of  Serpentines.  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Canada, 
1883,  i,  p.  171. 


122  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Vi  t  the  presence  of  chromium  and  nickel  in  serpentine  are 
facts  in  favor  of  its  eruptive  origin.     For  very  many  serpentines 

arc  derived  from  peridotite,  as  has  been  clearly  shown  by  recent 
work  in  microscopic  lithology.  Most  peridotites,  whether  meteoric 
or  terrestrial,  as  the  numerous  analyses  collected  by  Dr.  M.  E. 
Wadsworth  '  demonstrate,  contain  chromium  and  nickel.  Most 
stony  meteorites  contain  these  same  elements,  and  even  the  iron 
meteorites,  in  which  the  presence  of  nickel  is  so  characteristic, 
frequently  contain  chromium.  The  late  Dr.  Lawrence  Smith  has 
described  2  nodules  of  chromite  in  meteoric  iron, and  has  described 
a  new  sulphide  of  chromium  and  iron,  under  the  name  of  Dau- 
breelite,3  peculiar  to  meteorites,  and,  as  he  believes,  almost  con- 
stantly present.4  Chromite  is  well  known  to  occur  in  terrestrial 
eruptive  rocks.  The  association  of  nickel  and  chrome  has  pre- 
viously been  noticed  in  Pennsylvania  at  Wood's  Chrome  Mine, 
Lancaster  County,  where  genthite5  (described  as  nickelgymnite) 
was  originally  found.  Genthite  is  associated  with  chromite  also 
at  Webster,  Jackson  County,  North  Carolina,  where  it  forms 
handsome  apple-green  specimens  incrusting  chromite,  and  it  is 
said  to  have  a  similar  association  at  Malaga,  Spain.  Zaratite,  a 
carbonate  of  nickel,  occurs  with  chromite  in  West  Nottingham, 
Chester  County.  Genthite  has  also  been  found  at  two  other 
chrome-ore  mines  in  Lancaster  County,0  but  until  now  not  else- 
where in  this  State. 

Cuprite. — -Bright  vermilion-red  earthy  incrustations  of  cuprite, 
were  noticed  at  Frankford,  Philadelphia,  in  the  quarries  of  horn- 
blendic  gneiss,  so  well  known  to  mineralogists.  This  red  oxide 
of  copper  here  sometimes  forms  a  coating  on  bornite,  which  latter 
is  a  beautiful,  and  somewhat  abundant,  mineral,  at  these  quarries. 
The  cuprite  has  in  this  association  a  peculiarly  resinous  lustre, 
and  the  specimens  collected  closely   resemble  red  sealing-wax. 

Bothriocephalus  in  a  Trout. —  Prof.  Leii>>  remarked  that 
through  Dr.  F>.  II.  Warren  he  had  recently  received  from  the 
Smithsonian  Institution,  several  vials  with  tape-worms,  obtained 

l>\  Mr.  L.  M.  Turner,  from  a  trout,  Salvelinus ? , at  Ft.  Chimo, 

Ungava.  One  of  the  vials  contained  eighl  worms  ranging  from 
3  to  8  inches  long,  together  with  fragments  of  others;  and  was 
labeled,  "  Passed  from  a  'front,  caught  in  the  river.  August  14, 
1882.''  The  worms  belong  to  a  species  of  Bothricephalus  or 
Dibothrium,  apparently  different  from  either  the  D.  infundibu- 
liforme  or  I '.  proboscidev m ,  round  in  Salmo  salvelinus,  S.  salar, 

Mem.  Mns.  Comp.  Zool.  Oambr.,  \i,  I,  Lithological  studies,  tables. 
:  Amer.  Jour.  Science,  sxi,  1881,  p.  161. 
■;  Amer.  Jour.  Science,  xii,  1876,  p.  107,  and  \\i.  1878,  p.  270. 
'  i  iriginal  Researches,  188 1,  p.  5  13. 

Keller-Tiedemi ,  Nordam.  Monatsbericht,  iii,  488. 

■  Report  B,  Second  Geolog.  Survej  ofPenna.,  p.  lis. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  123 

S.  trutta,  and  other  fishes  of  the  kind.  The  specimens  are  all 
mature;  the  segments  from  near  the  head  throughout  being  dis- 
tended with  brownish  eggs.  The  characters  of  the  worm  arc  as 
follow: — Body  linear,  band-like,  widest  just  behind  the  head,  and 
gradually  narrowing  to  the  posterior  extremity,  thickened  along 
the  middle  and  to  a  less  degree  along  the  lateral  borders,  which 
are  narrowly  obtuse  at  the  free  edge,  apparently  continuous  but 
irregularl}'  crenulate ;  the  broad  surfaces  transversely  wrinkled, 
with  the  lateral  borders  defined  from  the  middle  by  longitudinal 
striae  ;  anterior  extremity  wider  and  transversely  convex ;  pos- 
terior extremity  obtusely  rounded.  Head  small,  oval,  equitant 
across  the  anterior  border  of  the  body,  with  an  oval  bothria 
fore  and  aft,  directed  obliquely  from  the  broad  surfaces  of  the 
body.  No  distinct  neck.  Segments  of  the  body  commencing 
immediately  after  the  head,  wider  than  long,  indistinctly  defined 
at  the  lateral  margins  and  most  marked  transversely  along  the 
middle  of  the  body,  becoming  narrower  and  slightly  longer  at 
the  posterior  part  of  the  latter,  fertile  throughout,  and  furnished 
on  one  side  of  the  body,  in  the  median  line,  with  a  prominent 
penal  papilla  and  just  behind  with  a  genital  pore.  Animal  whitish 
with  a  median  chain  of  brownish  spots  due  to  the  ova-distended 
uteri. 

In  a  specimen  of  eight  inches  in  length,  the  anterior  extremity 
of  the  body  is  3  mm.  wide  ;  at  the  middle  2  mm. ;  and  at  the 
posterior  extremity  l-5  mm.  The  head  measures  0*16  mm. 
transversely  and  0*18  mm.  deep  or  long  on  the  broad  aspect  of 
the  worm.  The  segments  generally  measure  about  0*(>25  mm. 
long.  The  ova  are  brownish,  oval,  and  0*04  mm.  long  by  0-024 
broad. 

The  second  vial  contains  a  single  worm,  and  is  labeled,  "  Taken 
from  the  intestine  of  a  Trout,  Aug.  29, 1882."  This  worm  I  sus- 
pect to  represent  an  immature  stage  of  the  former.  It  is  30  mm. 
long,  and  in  shape  resembles  a  fluke-worm  or  a  leech.  It  is  elon- 
gated elliptical,  flat,  widest  in  front,  with  the  lateral  margins 
apparently  entire,  the  broad  surfaces  transversely  striated,  and 
longitudinally  divided  in  three  bands,  with  the  median  band  indis- 
tinctly divided  into  segments,  on  one  surface  in  the  median  line 
provided  each  with  a  minute  pore.  Head  oval,  situated  fore  and 
aft  across  the'  anterior  transversely  convex  border  of  the  body  ; 
with  a  minute  oval  bothria  fore  and  aft.  Caudal  extremity  nar- 
rowest, transversely  convex  at  the  end,  and  emarginate  or  with  a 
pore.  Breadth  at  fore-part  3  mm. ;  at  back  part  2  mm.  The 
species  may  be  named  Bothriocephalus  (Dibothrium)  cestus. 

The  following  were  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


124  PROCEEDINGS    OP   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 


ON  THE  AIR-BLADDER  OF  FISHES. 
BY   CHARLES   MORRIS. 

The  generally  accepted  explanation  of  the  use  of  this  singular 
organ,  that  it  serves  to  enable  the  fish  to  readily  rise  and  sink  in 
the  water,  while  it  is  in  all  probability  true  in  a  measure,  has 
undoubtedly  been  too  greatly  extended.  It  is  usually  offered  as 
applying  generally  to  fishes  with  an  air-bladder,  with  little 
regard  to  the  fact  that  in  many  cases  the  air-bladder  is  too  small 
to  serve  anjr  useful  purpose  as  a  gravity  organ.  This  being 
the  case,  some  further  examination  into  its  functions  and  organic 
relations  seems  not  amiss. 

Cuvier  tells  us  that  "  the  most  obvious  use  of  the  swim-bladder 
is  to  keep  the  animal  in  equilibrium  with  the  water,  or  to  increase 
or  reduce  its  relative  weight,  and  thereby  cause  it  to  ascend  or 
sink,  in  proportion  as  that  organ  is  dilated  or  compressed.  For 
this  purpose,  the  fish  contracts  the  ribs  or  allows  them  to 
expand."  This  is,  however,  not  always  the  case,  for  in  many 
cases  the  bladder  is  provided  with  compressing  muscles,  and,  as 
Van  Der  Hoeven  says  :  "  In  many  fishes  it  is  difficult  to  show 
how  they  are  in  a  condition  to  expand  the  bladder  and  to  rarefy 
the  air."  Cuvier  says  further :  "  With  regard  to  the  presumed 
assistance  which  the  swim-bladder  affords  in  respiration,  it  is  :i 
fact  that,  when  a  fish  is  deprived  of  that  organ,  the  product  of 
carbonic  acid  b}^  the  branchiae  is  very  trilling ;  but  there  is  no 
sufficient  foundation  for  assuming  that  it  oilers  any  analogy  to 
the  lungs."  This  is  no  doubt  true  as  regards  the  usual  condition 
of  the  organ.  It  may  perform  some  function  in  facilitating  the 
exchange  of  gases  in  the  blood,  but  this  is  not  a  direct 
respiratory  function.  In  some  cases,  however,  its  function  is 
directly  respiratory,  and  in  a  few  instances  it  constitutes  an 
actual  lung,  closely  approaching  the  Batrachian  lung  in  organ- 
ization. 

A  similar  view  is  offered  by  the  latest  writers.  Giinther,  in 
his  "Study  of  Fishes,"  remarks  that  "this  organ  serves  to 
regulate  the  specific  gravity  of  the  fish,  to  aid  it  in  maintaining 
a  particular  level  in  the  water,  in  rising  or  sinking,  in  raising  the 
front  part  of  its  body  or  depressing  it  as  occasion  ma\  require." 
This  theory  is  based  on   hypothesis,  since   it    would  be  no  easy 


' 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  125 

matter  to  prove  or  disprove  it  hy  experiment.  As  above  said, 
however,  it  is  in  consonance  with  physical  laws  in  certain  cases, 
and  in  such  cases  it  very  probably  gives  a  correct  view  of  the 
function  of  the  organ.  Yet  there  are  many  cases  in  which  the 
small  size  of  the  organ  must  render  it  nearly  or  quite  useless  for 
anj^  such  purpose,  while  its  entire  absence  in  very  many  instances 
of  active  species  of  fish,  shows  that  this  function  is  of  no  special 
value  to  the  fish  tribe  as  at  present  constituted,  and  suggests 
that  the  original  purpose  of  the  air-bladder  must  have  been  very 
different  from  that  here  surmised.  A  general  examination  of  the 
subject  may  aid  us  in  gaining  some  definite  conception  of  the 
character  of  this  original  function. 

The  air-bladder  of  fishes  is  an  internal  sac,  occupying  usually 
the  dorsal  aspect  of  the  body,  and  in  some  cases  connected  with 
the  intestinal  canal  by  a  pneumatic  duct,  though  in  the  great 
majorit}r  of  cases  this  duct  is  wanting,  or  its  cavity  is  closed. 
Thus,  most  generally,  the  bladder  is  a  closed  sac,  containing  gas 
which  could  only  have  come  from  the  blood-vessels,  with  which 
it  is  abundantly  provided  in  the  form  of  retia  mirabilia.  This 
gas,  in  fresh-water  fishes,  is  nearly  pure  nitrogen.  In  ocean 
fishes,  particularly  the  deeper  swimmers,  oxygen  is  in  excess, 
and  has  been  found  in  some  instances  to  constitute  as  much  as 
87  per  cent,  of  the  contents.  Some  naturalists  advance  the 
singular  theory  that  the  absolute  weight  of  the  fish  may  be 
increased  or  diminished  by  compression  or  dilation  of  this  gas, 
as  if  the  same  quantity  of  gas  could  change  its  weight  by  a 
variation  in  its  density.  But  that  the  relative  weight  of  the  fish, 
or  its  displacement  of  water,  might  be  changed  by  a  variation  of 
its  body-volume,  through  a  variation  in  the  state  of  compression 
of  the  air-bladder,  is  unquestionable,  though  in  those  numerous 
cases  where  the  bladder  is  very  small  its  influence  must  be  of 
very  little  aid  in  the  movements  of  the  fish. 

In  addition  to  its  use  in  aiding  the  fish  to  ascend  or  descend 
in  the  water,  its  dorsal  position  must  also  act  to  keep  the  back 
of  the  fish  uppermost.  In  certain  cases  it  also  doubtless 
subserves  another  gravitative  purpose — that  of  elevating  or 
depressing  the  anterior  region  of  the  body,  at  the  will  of  the 
fish.  This  is  possible  in  those  cases  in  which  the  bladder  has  a 
considerable  longitudinal  extension.  In  some  cases,  it  is  pro- 
longed into  the  tail  of  the  fish.     In  others,  it  sends  processes 


12P>  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

into  the  head.  And  in  certain  instances,  the  ductless  bladder  is 
divided  Ity  constrictions  into  two  or  three  compartments,  in  the 
Longitudinal  direction.  In  these  cases,  the  fish  may  have  the 
power  to  shift  the  gaseous  contents  of  the  bladder  forward  or 
backward  at  will,  and  thus,  by  a  variation  in  the  weight  of  the 
different  regions  of  the  body,  to  change  its  line  of  motion  from  a 
horizontal  to  a  more  or  less  inclined  direction.  Yet  such  a  func- 
tion cannot  be  of  any  absolute  importance  to  the  fish,  or 
preparation  for  it  Avould  be  far  more  general  than  we  find  it. 

I  f  we  consider  the  conditions  under  which  the  air-bladder  exists 
in  fishes,  it  becomes  exceedingly  doubtful  that  it  was  originally 
evolved  as  a  gravity-organ.  In  one  important  order  of  fishes, 
the  Elasmobranchs,  it  does  not  exist.  No  shark  or  ray  possesses 
this  organ,  in  the  main  body  of  the  fish  tribe,  the  Teleostean, 
its  occurrence  and  character  are  very  irregular.  In  those  which 
possess  it,  it  exhibits  an  extraordinary  variation  in  shape,  size 
and  relations  to  the  body,  and  this  sometimes  between  closely 
related  genera  and  species.  With  some  Teleosteans  the  air- 
bladder  has  an  open  pneumatic  duct,  connecting  with  the 
oesophagus,  or  in  a  few  cases  with  the  stomach.  With  others 
this  duct  exists,  but  its  cavity  is  closed.  In  some  cases  it  is 
reduced  to  a  fine  ligament.  In  many  others  no  trace  of  it  exists. 
The  air-bladder  itself  is  a  hollow  sac,  composed  usually  of  two 
tunics,  and  compressible,  in  whole  or  in  part,  by  the  aid  of 
muscles  on  its  external  surface,  or  by  other  means.  It  is  situated 
in  the  abdominal  cavity,  above  the  intestinal  canal,  and  outside 
the  peritoneal  sac,  its  ventral  surface  being  invested  by  a  fold  of 
the  peritoneum.  In  some  fishes  it  is  almost  loose  in  the 
abdominal  cavity.  In  others  it  is  intimately  adherent  to  the 
vertebral  column  and  the  abdominal  tissues.  In  many  cases  it  is 
inclosed  in  osseous  capsules  formed  lry  the  vertebrae,  which 
-ccin  capable  of  exerting  a  pressure  upon  it.  In  addition  to  the 
cases  of  its  longitudinal  division  into  chambers,  it  is  sometimes 
composed  of  two  lateral  divisions,  and  in  some  families  there  is  an 
extraordinary  development  of  lateral  appendages. 

Its  occurrence  is  as  irregular  as  it-  shape  and  relation  to  the 
body.  In  this  respect,  it  varies  remarkably  in  species  of  the 
same  genus.  Thus  the  mackerel  has  no  air-bladder;  yet  one 
exists  in  Scomber  pneumatophor us,  a  species  which  in  every  other 
respect    very   closely    resembles  the   mackerel.     So   Polynemus 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  127 

paradise  us  is  without  an  air-bladder,  while  all  other  species  of 
the  genus  have  one.  The  same  condition  occurs  in  related 
genera.  Thus  in  the  species  of  Sebastes  the  air-bladder  is  very 
large,  while  in  the  uexl  genus  of  the  family  it  is  scarcely  the 
size  of  a  pea. 

These  examples  will  serve  to  show  the  great  diversity  in  the 
shape,  size  and  condition  of  this  organ.  And  it  may  be  said 
here  that  these  variations  have  no  appreciable  effect  upon  the 
velocit}'  and  activity  of  the  fish.  Those  that  have  no  air-bladder 
seem  in  no  respect  at  a  disadvantage,  as  compared  with  those 
that  have  one.  Again,  it  ma}r  be  said  that  no  animal  organ 
whose  function  is  of  known  importance  presents  such  extraor- 
dinary modifications.  In  the  heart,  lungs,  brain,  etc.,  there  is 
one  shape,  position  and  condition  of  greatest  efficiency,  and 
throughout  the  lower  forms  we  find  a  steady  and  undeviating 
advance  towards  this  condition.  There  is  in  all  these  organs  a 
persistent  movement  towards  homogeneit3r ;  not  towards  hetero- 
geneity, such  as  we  find  in  the  air-bladder.  The  natural  conclusion 
from  this  would  be  that  the  air-bladder  is  not  an  organ  of  func- 
tional importance,  while  its  absence  from  many  fish,  and  great 
diversity  in  others,  indicates  that  it  is  of  minor  value  to  the  fish 
tribe.  If  it  is  of  absolute  necessity  to  any  fish  as  a  gravitating 
organ,  why  is  it  not  necessaiy  to  all,  and  why  has  it  not 
developed  into  some  shape  and  condition  of  greatest  efficiency? 
The  existence  of  the  air-bladder  is  proof  that  it  has  had,  at  some 
time,  a  function  of  considerable  importance ;  but  its  many 
variations  go  to  prove  that  it  has  ceased  to  perform  any 
essential  function,  and  is  on  the  road  towards  extinction.  On 
no  other  theory  can  we  explain  its  great  diversity  in  nearly 
related  species. 

That  the  air-bladder  is  degenerating  we  have  evidence  in  cases 
like  that  above  mentioned,  where  it  is  no  larger  than  a  pea.  It 
is  difficult  to  imagine  that  this  minute  organ  is  of  any  use  to  the 
animal.  But  no  process  of  evolution  can  take  place,  except  the 
organ  is  of  use  at  every  stage  of  its  development.  The  natural 
conclusion  is  that  the  air-bladder  evolved  long  ago,  under  some 
influence  not  now  active,  and  is  now  on  the  road  towards  extinc- 
tion, being  retained  only  in  those  forms  where  it  serves  some 
minor  purpose,  but  being  nearly  or  quite  obliterated  in  forms  in 
which   it   is   put   to    no   practical    use.     This    secondary  use  of 


128  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

degenerating  organs  is  not  uncommon.  We  have  one  instance  in 
poinl  in  the  adaptation  of  the  embryonal  gill-arches  of  mammals 
to  other  uses.  Of  these  secondary  einphrvments  of  the  air- 
bladder  one  seems  to  have  some  connection  with  the  organ  of 
hearing.  Another  seems  to  be  to  change  the  direction  of  the 
fish-body  from  the  horizontal  towards  the  vertical  line.  As  a 
general  rule,  when  present,  it  may  fix  the  special  buoyancy  of 
the  fish-bod}',  and,  by  its  situation  near  the  back  of  the  fish,  may 
aid  to  keep  the  dorsal  surface  upward  in  the  water.  This  may 
be  the  purpose  of  its  lateral  appendages,  as  the  former  is  of  its 
longitudinal  extension.  Yet  the  fishes  which  have  no  air-bladder 
seem  none  the  worse  off  in  any  of  these  particulars.  It  is 
impossible  that  such  an  organ  could  have  developed  to  perform 
functions  which  were  satisfactorily  performed  without  it,  and  it 
seems  more  probable  that  it  is  an  organ  arrested  at  various 
points  in  its  process  of  degeneration,  as  it  proved  serviceable  in 
some  minor  function. 

If,  then,  we  may  look  upon  the  air-bladder  as  an  organ  which 
has  partly  or  wholly  lost  its  original  function,  the  question 
follows,  what  was  that  function  ?  There  are  certain  good  reasons 
for  believing  that  the  breathing  of  air  was  the  original  purpose 
of  this  organ.  In  mature  Telcosteans  this  is  occasionally  indi- 
cated by  the  existence  of  a  pneumatic  duct  connecting  with  the 
(esophagus.  It  is  true  that  this  duct  is  usually  of  no  functional 
use.  and  varies  from  partial  to  complete  disappearance.  But  the 
fact  is,  that  all  fishes  with  an  air-bladder  possess  a  duct  in  the 
early  stage  of  embryological  development.  In  the  mature  stage 
it  is  lost  by  all  Teleosteans  except  the  Physostomes. 

Thus  embryological  evidence  indicates  that  one  original  function 
of  the  air-bladder  was  the  introduction  of  external  air  into  the 
body,  a  function  which  has  now  lost  its  importance.  And  the 
apparatus  for  compressing  and  dilating  the  bladder  may  have 
been  originally  developed  as  an  aid  in  this  function.  Also  the 
extraordinary  development  of  retia  mirabilia,  in  the  inner  tunic 
of  many  air-bladders,  now  used  only  to  secrete  gas  into  the 
interior,  may  be  a  survival  of  ancient  pulmonary  capillaries, 
which  have  changed  their  character  with  their  function. 

There  are  other  reasons  beyond  those  here  given  thai  the  air- 
bladder  was  originally  an  air-breathing  organ.  Embryology 
points  back  to  the  condition  of  the  primal  fishes.     But  of  these 


188:").]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  129 

antique  vertebrates  we  have  existing  representatives  in  the 
Ganoids  and  the  Elasmobranchs,  and  it  is  of  interest  to  find  that 
in  these  modern  survivals  of  the  ancient  fish  life,  the  Elasmo- 
branchs are  entirely  destitute  of  air-bladders,  both  in  the  mature 
and  the  larval  stage,  while  all  Ganoids  possess  an  air-bladder, 
which  retains  a  fully  developed  pneumatic  duct  in  the  mature 
stage.  And  in  the  suborder  of  Dipnoi,  the  air-bladder  is  func- 
tional^ active  as  a  lung.  It  is  well-known  that  counterparts  of 
the  modern  Dipnoi  existed  in  the  Devonian  age,  and  it  is  highly 
probable  that  they  breathed  air  then  as  they  do  now.  In  fact, 
we  have  some  warrant  for  the  belief  that  the  antique  fishes  were 
divided  into  two  orders,  as  clearly  b}T  their  breathing  habits  as 
by  other  characteristics,  the  Elasmobranchs  breathing  b}'  gills 
only,  while  the  Ganoids  had  developed  a  supplementary  organ 
for  an  occasional  breathing  of  the  air. 

If  we  compare  the  air-bladder  with  the  lungs  of  the  higher 
vertebrates,  we  find  that  its  general  condition  in  the  Ganoids  is 
that  of  a  single  cavity,  with  an  effective  duct  opening  into  the 
dorsal  side  of  the  oesophagus.  But  there  is  an  exception  to 
this  in  the  Dipnoi,  and  in  Polypterus.  In  these,  the  duct  con- 
nects with  the  ventral  side  of  the  oesophagus,  as  in  the  lungs  of 
higher  animals.  Wilder  shows  that  there  is  a  series  of  forms, 
mostly  Ganoids,  leading  from  Amia  and  Lepidosteus,  with  the 
pneumatic  duct  entering  the  throat  on  the  dorsal  side,  to  Lepi- 
dosi?-en,  in  which  it  enters  on  the  ventral  side,  as  in  lung- 
breathing  animals. 

In  all  the  fishes  just  named  the  air-bladder  functions  as  a  lung. 
In  Polyterus  it  has  lateral  divisions,  and  is  probably  used  in  air 
breathing,  while  in  the  Dipnoi  it  becomes  a  functional  lung.  In 
Lepidosteus,  the  American  Gar-Pike,  the  air-bladder  becomes 
cellular  and  lung-like.  This  fish  keeps  near  the  surface,  and  may 
be  seen  to  emit  air-bubbles.  It  apparently  takes  in  a  fresh  supply. 
The  American  Bow  Fin  or  mud-fish  (Amia)  has  a  bladder  of  the 
same  lung-like  character,  and  it  has  been  seen  by  Wilder  to  come 
to  the  surface,  open  its  jaws  widel}T,  and  apparently  swallow  a 
large  quantity  of  air.  Wilder  remarks  that  "  so  far  as  the  experi- 
ments go  it  seems  probable  that,  "with  both  Amia  and  Lepidosteus, 
there  occurs  an  inhalation  as  well  as  exhalation  of  air  at  pretty 
regular  intervals,  the  whole  process  resembling  that  of  the 
Menobranchus  and  other  salamanders,  and  the  tadpoles,  which, 

10 


130  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

as  the  gills  shrink  and  the  lungs  increase,  come  more  frequently 
to  the  surface  for  air."1 

The  Dipnoi  have  the  air-bladder  developed  into  :i  true  lung. 
Of  these  the  Australian  lung  fish  (Ceratodus),  has  but  a  single 
air-bladder,  bul  (his  is  provided  with  breathing  pouches  that  pos- 
sess a  symmetrical  lateral  arrangement.  It  has  no  pulmonary 
artery,  l>ul  receives  branches  from  the  Arteria  cceliaca.  It  is 
supposed  that  this  fish  ordinarily  breathes  with  the  gills, but  uses 
its  lungs  when  the  water  has  become  thick  and  muddy,  or  is 
charged  with  gases  from  decomposing  organic  matter.  Finally 
Lepidosiren  and  Protopterus  have  completely  formed  lungs, 
divided  into  two  lateral  chambers,  and  provided  with  a  pulmonary 
artery.  Their  cellular  structure  nearly  approaches  that  of  the 
batrachian  lung. 

The  facts  here  cited  certainly  seem  to  lead  to  the  conclusion 
that  the  ait-bladder  Avas  originally  developed  as  an  air-breathing 
Organ,  and  only  became  adapted  to  other  purposes  when  it  had 
become  no  longer  of  value  in  this  direction.  We  may  find  evi- 
dence in  favor  of  this  conclusion  in  the  condition  of  the  fishes 
which  still  use  it  as  a  breathing  organ.  With  them  the  gill  is  the 
ordinary  breathing  apparatus.  The  lung  is  not  called  into  use 
except  when  the  water  becomes  foul  or  unaerated.  It  is  a  sup- 
plementary organ,  which  could  be  easily  dispensed  with  if  the 
fish  should  gain  the  habit  of  swimming  in  search  of  better  aerated 
water.  It  is  impossible  to  imagine  that  the  air-bladder  developed 
into  a  lung  under  the  force  of  such  a  minor  necessity  as  this.  It 
is  very  much  more  probable  that  it  was  once  an  important  breath- 
ing organ  with  these  fishes,  and  has  retained  its  functional  value 
from  its  occasional  use,  but  has  become  of  minor  importance,  and 
has  been  largely  superseded  by  the  gill.     • 

If  now  we  ask,  what  were  the  conditions  of  life  under  which 
this  organ  was  developed,  and  what  were  the  later  conditions 
which  rendered  it  in  great  measure  or  entirely  useless,  some 
definite  answer  may  be  given.  The  question  takes  us  back  to  the 
Devonian  and  Silurian  geological  periods,  during  which  it  is 
probable  that  its  original  development  took  place.  In  thiserathe 
sens  were  thronged  with  fishes  of  two  distinct  orders,  the  Elas- 
mobranchs  and  the  Ganoids,  the  former  without,  the  latter  with. 

For  other   instances  of  the  same  character,  sec  Scinpcr's    "Animal 
Note  75. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  131 

as  air-bladder.  This  difference  in  organization  was  probably  the 
result  of  some  marked  difference  in  their  life  habits.  The  Ganoids 
may,  in  their  original  state,  have  inhabited  poorly  aerated  waters 
or  waters  otherwise  ill-adapted  to  breathing,  while  the  Elasmo- 
branchs  may  have  had  their  primordial  habitat  in  clearer  and 
purer  waters. 

But  there  were  other  conditions  which  may  have  been  the  main 
influencing  causes  in  the  development  of  an  organ  for  air-breathing. 
We  know  that  the  land  was  habitable  during  long  ages  ere  it 
gained  any  vertebrate  inhabitants.  The  presence  of  insects  in 
Devonian  and  Silurian  strata  proves  this.  It  must  have  possessed 
much  food  material,  both  vegetable  and  animal,  and  it  is  hard  Im- 
probable that  the  active  fish  forms  of  the  earty  seas  made  no 
effort  to  obtain  a  share  of  this  food.  Long  ages  passed  during 
which  we  have  no  evidence  of  land  animals  higher  than  insects 
or  snails.  It  is  highl}'  probable  that  many  fishes  gained  the  habit 
of  leaving  the  water  temporarily  for  the  land  in  search  of  food 
during  this  period.  We  know  that  many  fishes  do  so  now,  and  that 
some  even  climb  trees,  in  spite  of  the  rnany  dangerous  foes  that 
now  exist  on  land.  In  the  era  referred  to  there  were  no  such 
dangerous  foes.  Such  fishes  as  left  the  sea  for  the  land  would  find 
only  food  to  repay  their  enterprise.  Thus  there  must  have  been 
a  powerful  inducement  for  fishes  to  assume  this  habit. 

The  indications,  however,  do  not  lead  to  the  idea  that  the 
original  development  of  an  air-breathing  organ  was  due  to  occa- 
sional visits  from  sea  to  shore.  Such  an  organ  must  have  slowly 
developed  under  the  pressure  of  less  extreme  changes  of  condi- 
tions. It  probably  arose  through  the  effect  of  such  influences  as 
still  act  upon  fish,  and  force  them  to  occasionally  breathe  air ; 
such  as  foul  or  muddy  water,  or  a  lack  of  proper  aeration  arising 
from  any  cause.  Another  important  influence  is  the  drying-out 
of  pools,  by  which  fish  are  left  in  the  moist  mud  until  the  recur- 
rence of  rains,  or  are  even  buried  in  the  dried  mud  for  the  six 
months  of  the  dry  season.  Such  is  the  case  with  Lepidosiren, 
which  uses  its  lungs  during  this  period.  In  certain  other  fresh- 
water fishes,  of  the  family  Ophiocephalidae,  air  is  breathed  while 
the  mud  continues  soft  enough  for  the  fish  to  come  to  the  surface, 
but  during  the  remainder  of  the  dry  period  it  remains  in  a  torpid 
state.  In  these  fishes  the  air  is  breathed  into  a  simple  cavity  in 
the  pharynx,  whose  opening  is  partly  closed  by  a  fold  of  the 


132  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

mucous  membrane.  In  the  family  Labyrinthici  the  accessory 
breathing  cavity  becomes  an  organ,  with  thin  lamina1  or  plates, 
which  undoubtedly  perform  an  oxygenating  function.  This  organ 
is  greatly  developed  in  Anabas  scandens,  the  Climbing  Perch.    In 

addition  t<>  these  there  are  eases  in  which  fish  have  drying  pools, 
and  migrate  for  a  considerable  distance  overland  in  search  of 
water,  with  no  breathing  organ  but  the  gills. 

[f  even  now,  when  the  land  is  everywhere  occupied  with  active 
and  dangerous  foes,  so  many  fish  find  occasion  to  venture  on 
shore,  it  i-  quite  probable  that  in  the  early  period,  when  it  conld 
he  visited  without  danger,  very  many  lishes  may  have  paid  tem- 
porary visits  to  the  land.  And  if  now.  under  this  influence,  and 
that  of  drying  pools  and  stagnant  water,  many  fish  have  acquired 
a  partial  air-breathing  habit,  this  was  far  more  likely  to  take 
place  under  the  more  favorable  conditions  of  ancient  times.  It 
seems  quite  possible  that  the  development  of  the  air-bladder  was 
due  to  influences  of  this  character.  The  occasional  habit  of 
breathing  air  is  quite  common  with  fish,  especially  of  fresh-water 
species.  Cuvier  remarks  that  air  is  perhaps  necessary  to  every 
kind  of  fish  ;  and  that,  particularly  when  the  atmosphere  is  warm, 
most  of  our  lacustrine  species  sport  on  the  surface  for  no  other 
purpose. 

It  may  be  even  possible  to  draw  a  hypothetical  scheme  of  the 
original  process  of  development  of  the  air-bladder  as  a  breathing 
organ.  Embryology  indicates  that  its  existence  began  in  an 
eversion  of  the  intestinal  canal,  in  its  (esophageal  portion,  and 
that  this  gradually  became  an  air-bladder  with  its  pneumatic  duct. 
It  may  have  had  its  primal  form  in  a  simple  pharyngeal  cavity, 
like  that  of  the  Ophiocephaluhe.  partly  closed  otf  from  the  food- 
passage  by  a  fold  of  the  mucous  membrane.  A  step  further 
would  reduce  this  membraneous  fold  to  a  narrow  opening,  leading 
to  an  inner  pouch.  From  such  a  condition  the  development  of 
the  Ganoid  air-bladder,  with  its  pneumatic  duct  of  greater  or  less 
length,  is  a  probable  and  natural  one,  and  is  sustained  by  embryo- 
logical  evidence.  Though  we  do  not  possess  the  intermediate 
steps,  and  the  breathing  organ  of  the  Labyrinthici  is  a  specialized 
apparatus  aside  from  this  line  of  progress,  yet  the  breathing  pouch 
of  the  Ophiocephalida'  is  in  the  direct  line  of  development  of  the 
Ganoid  air-bladder.  We  can  scarcely  look  upon  it  as  in  any 
sense  a  survival  of  the  archseic  air-breathing  organ.     It  is  more 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  133 

probably  a  modern  reproduction  from  the  action  of  similar  causes, 
of  the  first  existing  stage  of  an  air-breathing  apparatus.  And 
though  it  is  hardly  probable  that  the  reproduction  is  an  exact  one, 
yel  it  may  not  be  very  divergent  from  the  original  organ.  Thus 
from  a  simple  pouch  in  the  wall  of  the  (esophagus  may  have 
arisen,  by  successive  steps,  the  air-bladder,  with  its  pneumatic 
duct,  its  compressing  muscle  and  its  plexus  of  blood  capillaries. 
And  this  may  have  unfolded,  through  further  successive  steps, 
several  of  which  vet  exist,  into  a  lung  like  that  of  Lepidosiren. 
Thus  we  seem  to  possess  existing  representatives  of  every  impor- 
tant phase  in  lung  development,  from  that  in  which  the  simple 
wall  of  the  intestine  performed  an  air-breathing  function,  to  the 
lung  of  the  batrachian. 

In  this  view  of  the  cast',  the  original  lung  was  a  simple,  smooth- 
walled  bladder,  provided  with  abundant  vessels  to  subserve  blood- 
aeration,  with  muscles  to  aid  in  inhalation  and  exhalation,  and 
with  an  air-duct  opening  into  the  oesophagus  on  its  dorsal  aspect. 
This  dorsal  connection  may  have  arisen  from  the  upward  pressure 
of  the  air  in  the  swimming  fish,  which  would  tend  to  give  this 
position  to  the  original  intestinal  pouch.  But  when  any  fish  came 
to  frequently  visit  the  shore  two  new  influences  necessarily  came 
into  play.  The  effect  of  gravity  on  the  growing  organ  would 
tend  to  drag  it  and  its  duct  from  the  dorsal  to  the  ventral  posi- 
tion. And  the  increased  use  of  the  bladder  in  breathing  must 
have  required  a  more  extended  surface.  It  first  grew  cellular,  then 
the  cells  became  laterally-arranged  pouches.  Finally  a  constric- 
tion of  the  wall  separated  these  Lateral  pouches,  and  two  chambers 
were  produced.  Of  every  stage  of  this  process  instances  still 
exist,  and  there  is  much  reason  to  believe  that  the  development 
of  the  lung  followed  the  path  here  pointed  out. 

At  the  opening  of  the  Carboniferous  era  there  may  have  been 
many  lung-  and  gill-breathing  Dipnoi,  finned  Batrachians  as  we 
may  call  them,  who  spent  much  of  their  life  on  shore.  And  their 
habit  of  land-life  would  naturally  be  attended  by  a  gradual  change 
of  the  fins  into  better  walking  organs,  from  which  by  a  long  con- 
tinued process  of  evolution,  may  have  arisen  the  leg  and  foot  of 
the  primordial  batrachian.  For  this  purpose  to  become  fully 
achieved,  however,  the  development  of  an  internal  bony  skeleton 
was  oecessary,  and  with  the  completion  of  this  step  of  evolu- 
tion the  lung-breathing  fish  probably  directly  unfolded  into  the 


134  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY    OP  [1885. 

batrachian.  But  from  that  time  forward  the  dominion  of  the  Iish 
on  the  land  must  have  steadily  decreased.  The  fin  could  not 
compete  with  the  leg  and  foot  as  an  organ  of  land  motion,  and 
the  Dipnoid  fishes  were  probably  driven  back  to  the  water.  As 
a  result  of  this  change  of  condition  a  retrogressive  evolution 
took  place  in  the  air-breathing  organ.  Some  fishes  continued  to 
use  it  occasionally  as  a  lung,  of  which  we  have  instances  in  the 
modern  Dipnoi.  Yet  with  the  Ganoids,  as  a  rule,  it  probably 
never  attained  a  lung-like  development,  and  was  used  only  for 
temporary  breathing  purposes.  This  is  its  condition  in  most  of 
the  few  existing  Ganoids.  But  with  their  successors,  the  Teleos- 
teans,  it  lias  lost  all  air-breathing  capabilities,  and  has  passed 
through  every  stage  of  degeneration,  from  a  condition  closely 
resembling  that  of  the  Ganoids  to  complete  extinction.  And  in 
this  process  of  degeneration  it  has  been,  in  certain  cases,  adapted 
to  minor  uses,  some  of  the  most  probable  of  which  have  been 
above  enumerated,  while  there  ma}'  be  others  as  yet  unknown 
to  us. 

A  consideration  of  the  gaseous  contents  of  the  air-bladder  may 
lead  to  a  conception  of  one  such  possible  use.  It  is  somewhat 
remarkable  that  it  contains  nearly  pure  nitrogen  in  fresh-water 
forms,  while  in  the  deep-swimming  sea  fish  oxygen  forms  its  main 
contents,  often  to  a  very  large  percentage.  There  must  be  some 
sufficient  cause  of  this  difference  of  contents.  It  is  not  due  to 
any  difference  in  the  gases  contained  in  water  at  various  depths, 
for  the  percentage  of  nitrogen  is  closely  the  same  at  all  depths, 
while  oxygen  diminishes  in  quantity  from  the  surface  downward. 
Thus,  if  its  contents  depended  on  the  relative  quantity  of  gases 
present,  nitrogen  should  predominate  below  as  well  as  above.  It 
is  probable,  however,  thai  the  presence  of  oxygen  in  the  bladder 
of  deep-sea  fishes  is  really  due  to  the  smaller  quantity  of  oxygen 
there  present  in  the  water.  The  bladder  may  serve  as  a  comple- 
mentary aerating  apparatus,  as  suggested  by  Semper,  a  reservoir 
of  oxygen  for  the  use  of  the  Iish  during  sleep,  or  when,  from  any 
cause, no1  actively  breathing,  or  in  poorly  aerated  water.  Such  a 
fund  ion  would  be  of  little  or  no  importance  to  surface  fish,  which 
can  readily  obtain  water  rich  in  oxygen.  Ami  these  fish,  for  this 
reason,  may  secrete  only  the  useless  nil  rogen  into  the  air-bladder. 
But  for  deep-water  fishes  this  function  may  be  highly  necessary. 
When  actively  breathing  they  probablj  obtain  little  more  ox3*gen 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  135 

than  is  required  for  immediate  use.  And  the  small  excess  gained 
may  be  secreted  into  the  air-bladder  as  a  reservoir,  to  be  taken 
up  again  by  the  blood  during  inactivity  of  the  breathing  function. 
This  seems  probable  from  what  Cuvier  tells  us,  that  when  a  fish 
is  deprived  of  the  swim-bladder,  the  product  of  carbonic  acid  by 
the  branchiae  is  very  trifling.  We  cannot  imagine  such  a  result 
unless  the  bladder  in  some  way  supplies  oxygen  to  the  blood.  If 
this  be  the  case,  the  air-bladder  still  performs,  in  an  indirect 
manner,  its  probable  original  function  of  a  breathing  organ. 

If  the  113-pothesis  here  offered  be  a  well-founded  one,  an  inter- 
esting conclusion  as  to  the  process  of  organic  evolution  involved 
may  be  taken.  For  we  would  have  the  air-breathing  function  at 
first  performed  by  the  unchanged  walls  of  the  oesophagus.  Then 
this  became  pouched.  Then  the  pouch  became  constricted  off, 
with  a  duct  of  connection.  Then  the  duct  disappeared,  as  the 
original  function  vanished,  and  what  was  originally  a  portion  of 
the  wall  of  the  intestinal  canal,  became  a  separate  internal  sac. 
Then  this  sac  decreased  in  size,  until  in  some  instances  it  became 
a  closed  internal  bladder,  of  the  size  of  a  pea,  far  removed  from 
and  utterly  disconnected  with  its  place  of  origin.  Finally  it 
completely  vanished.  This  process,  if  correctly  drawn,  certainly 
forms  a  very  remarkable  organic  cycle  of  development  and 
degeneration,  which  probably  has  no  counterpart  of  a  similarly 
striking  character  in  the  whole  circle  of  organic  life. 


136  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 


ON  THE  GENUS  APHREDODERUS. 
BY  WILLIS  S.  BLATCHLEY. 

With  a  view  to  ascertaining  whether  more  than  one  species  of 
Pirate  Perch  {Aphredoderus  Le  Sueur)  exists  in  our  waters,  I 
have  compared  numerous  specimens  from  various  localities  of 
the  United  States,  in  the  Museum  of  the  Indiana  University. 

I  find  individual  variations,  but  no  constant  differences  distin- 
guishing Eastern,  Western  or  Southern  forms  of  this  species 
from  one  another. 

Since  the  variation  in  the  position  of  the  vent,  upon  which  the 
nominal  genus  Sternotremia  Nelson  was  based,  has  been  shown 
by  Profs.  Forbes  and  Jordan  to  depend  upon  the  age  of  the  fish, 
there  is,  in  my  estimation,  but  one  species,  Aphredoderus  sayanus, 
belonging  to  the  genus. 

The  following  is  the  synonymy  of  the  genus  and  species :. — 

Aphredoderus  (Le  Sueur)  Cuv.  ,t  Val.,  Hist.  Nat.des  Poiss.,  ix,  L833,  115  (gibbosus). 
Aphredodirus  Cope,  Proc.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc,  L870,  455  (emended  orthography). 
Sternotremia  Nelson,  Bull.  Til.  Lab.  Nat.  Hist.,  i.  1876,  39  (isolepia). 
Aphododerus    Jordan,    Annals    X.   Y.   Acad.   Sei.,    i.    1  s 7 7 ,    No.  4,    101    (emended 
orthographj   . 

Asternotremia    (Nelson),  Jordan,  Bull     U.   S.    Nat.    Muf.,    x,    1S77,  il    {isolepia: 
emended  meaning). 

Aphrodedirus  .Ionian,  Proc.  icad.  Nat.  Sri.  Phil.,   1877,  60  (emended  orthographj   . 

Aphredoderus  sayanus. 

Scolopsia  sayanus  Gilliams,  Join-.  Acad.  Mat.  Sei.  Phila.,  iv.  1824,  si 
1  Harrowgate,  Pa.  i. 

Aphredoderus  sayanus  De  Kay,  N.  Y\  Fauna,  Fishes,  184'2.  35;  Baird, 
Ninth  SinilliM.il.  Kept..  1855,  326  (Cedar  Swamp  Cr.,  Cape  May  Co., 
N.  J.);  Giinther,  Cat.  Fish. Brit.  Mas.,  i.  1859,  271  ;  A-bbott,  Proc. 
Acad.  Nat.  Sei.  Phila..  1861,  95  (Camden,  N".  J.,  Habits  of  A.  sayanus); 
Co]  e,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sei.  Phila.,  1865,  274  (Streams  of  Lowlands  of 
N.  .1.  and  Del.);  Putnam,  Amer.  Nat.,  Jan.,  1872,3.");  Jordan  & 
Copeland,  Check  List.  L876,  139;  Hay,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  iii, 
1880,  501,  515  Noxubee  1!.):  Jordan.  Geol.  Kept.  Ohio,  iv,  L882,  920; 
Hay,  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish.  Com.,  ii.  1882,  64,  M  (R.  at  Vicksburg  and 
Memphis,  Big  Black  R.,  Pearl  R.,  Tombigbee  R.,  Chickasawha  R.); 
Jordan  <&  Gilbert,  Synopsis  Fish.  \.  A..  1882,  L60 ;  Bean,  Cat.  Fish. 
International  Fish  Exhibition,  London,  1883,  82  (Vaughan's,  Mis-.  : 
Forbes,  Studies  0f  F I  of  Fishes,   111.   Lab.   Nat.   Hist.,   L883,  66 


15.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES    OF    rill  LA  DELPHI  A.  13? 

(Anatomy  and  food  oi  A.  sai/anus)  ;  Gilbert)  Proc.  I  .  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
L884,  204    Salt  Creek,  Brown  Co.,  Ind.). 

Aphredodirus  sayanus  Cope,  Proc  Amer.  Phil.  Soe.,  1870,  455  (Tribu- 
taries Neuse  R..  Wake  Co.,  N.  C). 

Aplwdoderus  sayanus  Jordan,  Annals  N.  Y.  Acad.  Sei.,  i,  18TT,  No.  4, 
101  (Delaware  R.,  Neuse  R..  Miss.  R.  in  Louisiana,  Flint  R.); 
Jordan,  Annals  N.  Y.  Lye.  Nat.  Hist.,  xi,  1877,  308  (Coosa  1!. 
Jordan,  Amer.  Nat.,  Oct.,  1877,  613;  Jordan,  Man.  Vert..  2d  ed., 
1878,  249  ;  3d  ed.,  1880,  249  ;  Jordan  &  Brayton,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  xii,  1878,  41,  47,  89  (Neuse  R.,  Chattahoochee  R.,  Alabama 
R.):  Jordan,  Bull.  Hayden's  Geol.  Surv.,  iv,  1878,  434. 

Aphredoderus  gibbosus  (Le  Sueur),  Cuv.  &  Yal.,  Hist.  Nat.  des  Poiss.. 
ix.  1833,  448  (Lake  Pontchartrain). 

Sternotremia  isolepis  Nelson,  Bull.  111.  Lab.  Nat.  Hist.,  i,  1870,  39 
(Calumet  R.,  111.);  Jordan  &  Copeland,  Check  List,  1876,  139; 
Jordan,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1877,  61. 

Astern otremia  isolepis  (Nelson),  Jordan,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  x. 
1877,  51  (Tributaries  Ohio  R.). 

Aplwdoderus  isolepis  Jordan,  Annals  N.  Y.  Acad.  Sci.,  i,  1877,  No.  4, 101 
(Wabash  R.,  Maumee  R.,  Calumet  R.,  Streams  of  S.  111.,  Arkansas 
R.)  ;  Jordan,  Bull.  111.  Lab.  Nat.  Hist.,  ii,  1878,  48  (Calumet  R., 
Wabash  R.  at  Mt.  C'armel,  Streams  of  S.  111.;  Variation  in  position 
of  vent)  ;  Forbes,  Bull.  111.  Lab.  Nat.  Hist.,  ii,  1878,  77,  84  (Food  of 
A.  isolepis,  and  account  of  change  in  position  of  vent)  ;  Jordan, 
Man.  Vert.,  2d  ed  ,  1878,  249;  Jordan,  Bull.  Hayden's  Geol.  Surv., 
iv,  1878,  434. 

Aphrodedirus  cookianus  Jordan,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,.  1877,  60 
(Sawyer's  Cr.,  Kendallville,  Ind.). 

Aplwdoderus  cookianus  Jordan,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  ix,  1877,  49 
(Wabash  R.)  ;  Jordan,  Bull.  TJ.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  x,  1877,  52. 

Asternotremia  mesotrema,  Jordan,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  x,  1877.  52 
(Little  Red  R.,  Arkansas). 


138  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 


A  REVIEW  OF  THE  GENUS  PHRYNOSOMA. 
BY  ALAN  F.  GENTRY. 

Phrynosoma  Wiegmann,  in  Oken,  Lis.  xxi,  1S28,  p.  .">fi7:  Wagler,  Natnrl.  Syst.  Amph., 
L830,  p.  145;  Gruy,  Cat.  Liz.  Brit.  Mus.,  1845,  p.  227:  Dumeril  .1  Bibron,  Erpet. 
gener.,  iv,  18J7,  p.  311;  Holbrook,  N.  A.  Berp.,  ii,  1842,  p.  85 ;  Fitzinger,  Syst. 
Kept.,  184.1,  p.  78;  A.  Dumt'iil,  Cat.  Moth.  Rept.,  i,  1851,  p.  78;  Girard,  Stans. 
Expl.  Vail.  Gt.  Salt  Luke,  1852,  p.  354;  (iirard,  Herp.  U.  S.  Expl.  Exped., 
1  s 5 •< ,  p.  388;  Dumeril  <t  Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci.  au  Mex.  et  Am.  Crnt.,  1870,  p. 
217;   Cope,  Chock  List  X.  A.  Batrach  and  Rept..  1875,  p.  19. 

Anota  Eallovell,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1832,  p.  182. 

Gen.  Char. — Head  short,  cordiform,  elevated  at  the  vertex,  and 
armed  behind  and  on  the  sides  with  strong  spines,  variable  in 
length  and  number.  Cephalic  plates  small,  rugose  and  polygonal. 
Palatine  teeth  wanting.  Gular  fold  present.  Auricular  aperture 
inconspicuous  in  certain  species,  or  entirely  absent.  Body  short, 
rounded,  depressed,  and  ordinarily  fringed.  Dorsal  and  caudal 
crests  lacking.  Limbs  short,  digits  moderately  developed.  Tail 
comparatively  short.     Femoral  pores  present,  but  anal  wanting. 

This  genus,  which  is  probably  the  best  defined  and  the  most 
strikingly  distinct  of  its  family,  is  wholly  restricted  to  North 
America.  Its  northernmost  range,  so  far  as  has  been  determined, 
is  the  boundary  line  between  the  United  States  and  the  British 
possessions,  Dr.  Coues  having  met  with  it  in  the  region  of  the 
Milk  River  during  the  summer  of  1814,  while  its  southern  limit 
is  the  scope  of  country  that  occupies  the  terminus  of  Mexico. 
Montana,  Dakota,  Nebraska,  Kansas,  Indian  Territory.  Texas, 
and  the  countries  stretching  thence  to  the  Pacific,  are  the  only 
portions  of  the  Union,  as  far  as  are  known,  that  have  yielded  evi- 
dences of  its  existence.  Of  the  many  specie-  which  have  been 
described  from  this  area,  but  twelve  seem  to  me  as  valid,  seven 
being  denizens  of  the  United  States,  and  the  residue  of  the  table- 
lands Of  Mexico. 

While  differing  from  previous  writers  in  an  estimate  of  the 
number  of  species,  1  am  consl  rained  to  disallow  any  separation  of 
the  genus  into  subgenera,  as  has  been  done  by  GKrard,  and  by 
Dumeril  and  Bocourt,  since  the  characters  upon  which  they  are 
founded  are  not  sufficiently  strong  to  warranl  such  a  division. 
The  interests  of  science  are  doubtless  best  subserved  by  consider- 
ing bul  a  single  undivided  genus,  whose  species-representatives, 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  139 

with  their  most  salient  marks  of  distinction,  1  shall  now  proceed 
to  tabulate. 

Synopsis  of  Species. 

I.  Nostrils  lateral ;    opening  on  the  anterior  extremity  of  the 

superciliary  ridge. 

A.  A  single  row  of  pyramidal  scales  at  the  periphery  of  the 

abdomen  ;  gular  scales  subequal;  abdominal  scales  smooth. 

1.  Cephalic  spines  very  short  and  tubercular  ;  oceipitals  less 

prolonged  than  the  longest  of  the  temporals,  posteri- 
orly;  head  broader  than  long.  •  Douglassi.     1. 

2.  Cephalic   spines    of    medium   length ;     occipital    spines 

directed  obliquely  upwards,  and  a  little  less  prolonged 
than  the  longest  of  the  temporals,  posteriorly ;  head 
broader  than  long.  Boucardi.     2. 

3.  Cephalic  spines  of  medium  length  ;  occipital  spines  hori- 

zontal, more  prolonged  than  the  longest  of  the  tempor- 
als, posteriorly ;  head  as  broad  as  long,  orbicular e.     3. 

B.  Two  rows  of  pyramidal  scales  at  the  periphery  of  the  abdo- 

men ;  three  or  four  rows  of  enlarged  pointed  gular  scales 
upon  each  side  of  the  median  line. 

1.  Abdominal  scales  smooth  ;  cephalic  spines  to  the  number 

of  twelve  or  thirteen  ;  occipital  spines  horizontal  or 
nearly  so.  coronatum.     i. 

2.  Abdominal  scales   carinated ;    cephalic  spines  eight   in 

number;  occipital  spines  vertical.  asio.     5. 

II.  Nostrils  anterior ;  situated  within  the  superciliary  ridge ;  two 

rows  of  enlarged  gular  scales,  one  row  on  each  side  of,  and 
distant  from,  the  median  line. 
A.  Two  rows  of  pyramidal  scales  at  the  periphery  of  the  abdo- 
men ;  auricular  opening  conspicuous. 

1.  Abdominal  scales  carinated,  sometimes  smooth  or  nearly 

so ;  occipital  spines  directed  obliquely  backward,  much 
longer  than  the  longest  of  the  temporals,  from  which 
they  are  separated  by  one  or  two  flattened  scales. 

cornutum.     6. 

2.  Abdominal  scales  carinated  ;  cephalic  spines  forming  with 

the  inframaxillary  plates  a  continuous  circular  series  ; 
occipital  spines  projecting  posteriorly  as  far  as,  and 
not   separated   from,   the   longest   of  the   temporals. 

regale.     1. 


140  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

B.  One  row  of  pyramidal  scales  al  the  periphery  of  the  abdo- 

men :  auditory  aperture  conspicuous. 

a.  Abdominal    scales   carinated ;   tail   very   short,  not 
equal  in  length  to  the  femur. 

1.  One  temporal  on  each  side  strongly  developed  and  coni- 

cal, very  much  more  prolonged  posteriorly  than  the 
occipitals,  which  are  small.  taunts.     8. 

2.  Temporal  spines  moderate,  flattened,  four  or  five  on  each 

side,  scarcely  projecting  beyond  the  occipitals,  poste- 
riorly. Braconnieri.     9. 
6.  Abdominal  scales  smooth  ;  tail  of  ordinary  length  ; 
occipital  spines  projecting  beyond  the  longest  of 
the  temporals,  posteriorly.           platyrhinos.     It). 

C.  No  pyramidal   scales    at  the    periphery   of  the   abdomen  ; 

auditory  aperture  sometimes  absent  on  one  or  both  sides 
in  modest um  ;  alwa3'S  absent  in  Mac c alii ;  abdominal 
scales  smooth. 

1.  Occipital  spines  short,  projecting  about  as  far  as   the 

longest  temporal,  posteriorly;  one  row  of  enlarged 
gular  scales  next  to  the  inframaxillary  plates. 

modes/ ma.     11. 

2.  Occipital  spines  very  long  and  recurved,  projecting  much 

farther  than  the  longest  temporal,  posteriorly;  one 
row  of  enlarged  gular  scales  on  each  side,  distant  from 
the  inframaxillary  plate.  Maccalli.     12. 

1.  Phrynosoma  Douglassi. 

Agatna,  Douglassi  Bell,  Trans.  Linn.  Soc.  Lond.,  xvi,  L8283  \>.  105,  pi. 
x;  Harlan,  Med.  and  Phys.  Researches,  L835,  p.  141. 

Phrgnoxoma  Douglassi  Wagler,  Naturl.  Syst.  Amph.,  ls:',0,  p.  146; 
Gray,  Griff,  Anim.  King.,  i\,  L831,  p.  II:  Wiegmann,  fferp.  Mex., 
1834,  \k  5  I  ;  Dumeril  &  Bibron,  Erpet.  gener.,  iv.  1837,  p.  323; 
Holbrook,  N.  Am.  Herp.,  ii.  1842,  \>.  101,  pi.  \i\  ;  Dekay,  Zool.  New 
Fork,  iii.  1842,  p.  31  ;  Fitzinger,  Syst.  Rept.,  i.  1843,  p.  78;  Gray, 
Cat.  Liz,  Brit.  Mus.,  L845,  p.  227  ;  A.ug.  Dumeril,  Cat.  Meth.  Coll. 
Rept.  Mus.  Paris,  1851,  \>.  78;  Girard,  Stans.  Expl,  Vail.  Gt.  Salt 
Lake.  L852,  p.  362,  pi.  \ii,  figs.  6  9;  A.ug.  Dumeril,  Arch.  Mus. 
Hist.  Nat.  \iii.  I^.")ti.  p.  554 ;  <  lope,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  1'liila., 
1866,  p.  302;  Mien,  Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  xvii,  1874,  p.  69 ; 
t  lope,  Am.  Nat..  \ii.  1879,  p.  135. 

Phrynosoma  orbiculare  Hallowell,  Sitgreaves'  Expl.  Zuni  and  Col.  Riv., 
L853,  p.  125,  pi.  viii  and  ix. 


L885.  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  141 

Tapaya  Dougiassi  Girard,  Herp.  l  •  s-  ExPl-  Exped.,  1858,  p.  398,  pi. 
xxi,  fig.  1-5  ;  Baird,  P.  R.  R.  Rep.,  x.  1859,  Gunnison  &  Beckwith's 
Route,  Rept.,  p.  18  :  /</..  Williamson  &  Abbott's  Route,  Rept.,  \>.  9  ; 
Cooper  A  Suckley,  Nat.  Hist.  Wash.  Terr.,  I860,  \>.  294  ;  Dumeril  .V 
Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci.  an  Mex.  el  Am.  ('cut.  Rept.,  lsnt.  p.  226,  pi.  xi, 
fig.  ."). 

Tapaya  brerirostre  Girard,  Herp.  V.  S.  Expl.  Exped.,  1858,  p.  :»07  ; 
Cope,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1866,  i>.  302. 

Tap"//a  Hemandesi  Girard,  Herp,  U.  S.  Expl.  Exped.,  1858,  p.  395; 
Baird,  C.  S.  and  Mex.  Bound.  Surv.,  ii,  pt.  ii.  1859,  p.  8. 

Tapaya  ornatissima  Girard,  Herp.  V.  S.  Expl.  Exped.,  1858,  p.  396; 
Baird,  U.  S.  and  Mex.  Bound.  Surv..  ii.  pt.  ii.  1859,  p.  9;  Baird,  P. 
R.  R.  Rep.,  x,  1859,  Whipple's  Route,  Kept.,  p.  38;  Demeril  & 
Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci.  an  Mex.  el  Am.  Cent.  Rept.,  1870,  p.  227,  pi.  xi, 
fiy.  li. 

Phrynosoma  Dougiassi,  subsp.  Dougiassi  Cope,  ClieckListN.A.  Batracli. 
and  Rept.,  187o.  p.  49;  Yarrow,  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  west  of  the  100th 
Meridian,  v,  1875,  p.  580  ;  Coues,  op.  cit..  p.  590  :  Coues  A:  Yarrow, 
Bull.  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  of  Terr.,  iv,  1878,  p.  285. 

Phrgnosoma  Dougiassi,  subsp.  ornatissvma  Cope,  Check  List  N.  Am. 
Batrach.  and  Rept.,  1878,  p.  49  ;  Yarrow,  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  west  of 
100th  Meridian,  v,  1875,  p.  581  ;  Coues,  op.  cit.,  p.  591  ;  Coues  & 
Yarrow,  Bull.  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  of  Terr.,  iv.  1878,  p.  286. 

Phrynosoma  Dougiassi  pygmma  Yarrow,  Bull.  1".  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  v. 
1882,  p.  443. 

Head  broader  than  long ;  nostrils  lateral,  opening  upon  the 
anterior  extremity  of  the  superciliary  ridge  ;  cephalic  spines  small 
and  tuberculous  ;  occipital  spines  more  prolonged  than  the  longest 
temporal,  posteriorly  ;  last  three  or  four  sublabial  scales  on  each 
side,  enlarged  and  pointed ;  submaxillary  plates  small  and  sub- 
equal,  about  the  size  of  the  posterior  sublabials  ;  a  conical  scale 
at  the  angle  of  the  mouth  ;  gular  scales  nearly  equal,  the  row 
next  to  the  inframaxillary  plates  slightly  largest ; .  one  row  of 
pyramidal  scales  at  the  periphery  of  the  abdomen;  abdominal 
scales  smooth  ;  back  armed  with  several  rows  of  spiny  scales  ;  tail 
of  medium  length,  similar  to  back  above,  smooth  beneath,  and 
fringed  laterally  with  conical  spines. 

Habitat. — Washington  Territory,  Oregon,  California,  Montana, 
Dakota,  Nebraska,  Kansas,  Indian  Territory,  Texas,  Wyoming, 
Colorado,  Utah,  and  New  Mexico. 

A  careful  study  of  Dougiassi,  and  an  institution  of  comparison 
between  its  characters  and  those  of  Hernandezi,  convince  me 
that  the  two  are  identical.     The  row  of   enlarged  gular  scales 


142  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

next  to  the  inframaxillary  plates,  as  given  by  Girard  as  a  mark 
of  distinction,  is  also  found  in  Douglassi.  The  abdominal  scales 
are  spoken  of  as  being  acuminate,  and  such  is  the  case  with 
those  of  the  upper  portion  of  the  belly  in  Douglassi,  although 
lower  down  they  are  somewhat  obtuse. 

Bel  ween  Douglassi  and  the  subspecies  ornatissima  and  pygmeea, 
of  some  authors,  I  can  perceive  no  differences.  Examina- 
tions of  numerous  specimens  in  the  collection  of  the  Academy 
of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia,  from  all  parts  of  its 
extended  habitat,  convince  me  that  there  are  no  fixed  discrimi- 
nating characters,  not  even  of  size,  as  the  smaller  northern  forms 
are  found  to  grade  imperceptibly  into  their  larger  southern 
neighbors.  And,  as  pygmsea  was  described  from  the  region  of 
the  Columbia  River,  and  ornatissima  from  New  Mexico,  the 
former  as  small  and  the  latter  as  large,  and  corresponding 
otherwise  as  they  do  with  Douglassi,  there  is  good  reason  for  con- 
sidering them  onby  as  extreme  forms  of  this  species. 

2.  Phrynosoma  Boucardi 

I'upaya  Boucardi  Dumeril  &  Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci.  au  Mex.  et  Am.  Cent. 
Kept.,  18T0,  p.  225,  pi.  xi,  fig.  4. 

Head  broader  than  long ;  cephalic  spines  of  medium  length ; 
occipital  spines  directed  nearly  vertically  upwards,  not  pro- 
longed as  far  posteriorly  as  the  longest  temporal;  sublabials 
small,  increasing  in  size  posteriorly  ;  inframaxillary  plates  some- 
what smaller  than  the  posterior  sublabials ;  no  enlarged  pointed 
gular  scales  ;  one  row  of  pyramidal  scales  at  the  periphery  of  the 
abdomen;  abdominal  scales  smooth;  back  with  numerous  spinous 
scales  ;  tail  of  ordinary  length,  similar  to  the  body,  with  but  few 
spines  along  the  margin. 

Habitat. — Plateau  of  Mexico. 

This  species  is  very  easily  separated  from  its  nearest  allies, 
Douglassi  and  orbicularis,  by  the  character  of  the  occipital 
spines.  In  the  two  latter  these  spines  are  directed  nearly  hori- 
zontally backward,  while  in  the  present  species  the}'  project 
nearly  vertically  upward. 

:;.  Phrynosoma  orbicularis. 

Lacertus  orbicularis  Hernandez,  Nov.  Plant.  Anim.  Min.  Mex.,  \\i,  1651, 
p.  327,  fig;  Linnaeus,  Syst.  Nat..  1789,  p.  L061 ;  Cuvier,  Regn. 
Anim.,  ii,  1817,  ]..  35;  Id.,  Sded.,  ii,  L819,  i».  37, 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  143 

Agama  orbicularis  Daudin,  Hist.  Nat.  Rept.,  iii.  1805,  p.  406;    Voigt, 

Ucbcrs.  Thierr.  Cuv.,  ii,  1831,  p.  54. 
Phrynosoma  orbiculare  Wiegmann,  in   Oken.,   Isis,   xxi,  1828,  p.  367; 

Wagler,    Naturl.    Syst.    Amph.,    1830,   p.  14G;  Gray,  Grill'.  Anim. 

King.,   ix,   1831,  p.  45;  Wagler,  Descr.  and  Lou.   Amph.,  1*33,  pi. 

xxiii,  figs.  1  and  2  :  Schinz,  Naturg.  und  Abild.  der  Rept.,  1833,  p. 

88,  pi.  xxvii,  fig.  2  :  Gravenhorst,  Act.  Acad.  Cses.  Leop.  Carol.  Nat. 

Cur..  \\i.  pt.  ii,  1833,  p,  912,  pi.  Ixiii  ;  Wiegmann,  Herp.  Mex.,  1834, 

p.  53  :  Dumeril  &  Bibron,  Erpet.  gener.,  iv,  1837,  p.  321 ;  Gray,  Cat. 

Liz.  Brit.  Mus.,  1845,  p.  228;  Aug.  Dumeril,  Cat.  Meth.  Coll.  Rep. 

Mus.  Paris,  1851,  p.  78;  Girard,  Stans.   Expl.  Vail.  Gt.  Salt  Lake, 

1852,  p.  359  ;  Sumiehrast,  Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  xiii,  1864,  p. 

507  ;  Peters,  Berlin  Monatsb.,  1869,  p.  875  ;  Midler,  Verh.  Natur. 

Gesell.,  Basel,  1878,  p.  634  ;  AVeidersheim,  Zool.  Anz.,  i,  1878,  p.  105. 
Phrynosoma  Wiegmanni  Gray,  Beechey's  Voy.  Pacif.  Zool.,  1839,  p.  96. 
Tapaya   orbicularis   Girard,    Herp.   U.  S.    Expl.  Exped.,  1858,  p.  394  : 

Dumeril  &  Bocourt,  Miss.  Bci.  an  Mex.  et  Am.  Cent.  Rept.,  1870,  p. 

221,  pi.  xi,  fig.  1. 

Tapaya  orbicularis,  var.   Cortczi  Dumeril  &  Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci.  au  Mex. 

'    et  Amer.  Cent.  Kept.,  1S70,  p.  223,  pi.  xi,  fig.  2. 
Tapaya  orbicularis,  var.  Dugesi  Dumeril  &  Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci.  au  Mex. 
et  Am.  Cent.  Kept.,  1870,  p.  224,  pi.  xi,  fig.  3. 

Head  as  broad  as  long ;  cephalic  spines  moderately  developed  ; 
occipital  spines  equal  to,  or  a  little  more  prolonged  than,  the 
longest  of  the  temporals,  posteriorly ;  sublabial  plates  very 
small ;  a  large  conical  scale  at  the  angle  of  the  mouth  ;  infra- 
maxillary  plates  small,  equal  in  size  to  the  posterior  sublabials  ; 
one  row  of  pj^ramidal  scales  at  the  periphery  of  the  abdomen ; 
abdominal  scales  smooth  ;  back  spinous;  tail  of  ordinary  length, 
similar  to  the  bocl3',  and  sparsely  fringed  with  conical  scales. 

Habitat. — The  plateaus  of  Mexico. 

4.  Phrynosoma  coronatum. 

Phrynosoma  coronatum  Blainville,  Nouv.  Ann.  Hist.  Nat.,  iv,  1835,  p. 
284,  pi.  xxv,  fig.  Irtand6c;  Dumeril  &  Bibron,  Erpet.  gener.,  iv, 
1837,  p.  318  ;  Holbrook,  N.  A.  Herp.,  ii,  1842,  p.  97,  pi.  xiii ;  Dekay, 
Zool.  New  York,  iii,  1842,  p.  31  ;  Aug.  Dumeril,  Cat.  Meth.  Coll. 
Rept.  Mus.  Paris,  1851,  p.  7s  ;  Girard,  Stans.  Expl.  Vail.  Gt.  Salt 
Lake,  1852,  p.  300,  pi.  viii,  figs.  7  1 2  ;  Hallowell,  Sitgreaves'  Exped. 
Zuni  and  Colorado  Riv.,  1853,  p.  122  ;  Sanders,  Proc.  Zool.  Soc. 
Lond.,  1874,  p.  71-78  (Myology);  Cope,  Check  List  of  N".  A.  Batrach. 
and  Rept.,  1875,  p.  50 ;  Lockington,  Am.  Nat.,  xiv,  1880,  p.  295. 


144  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Phrynosoma  Blainmllei  Gray,  Beechey's  Voy.  Pacif.  Zool.,  1839.  p.  96> 
pi.  xxix,  fig.  1  ;  Gray,  Cat.  Liz.  Brit.  Mus.,  1845,  p.  228  ;  Cope,  Check 
List  N.  A.  Batrach.  and  Kept.,  1875,  p.  49;  Yarrow,  U.  S.  Geol. 
Surv.  west  of  100  Meridian,  v,  1875,  p.  582. 

Batrachosoma  coronatum  Fitzinger,  Syst.  Kept.,  i,  L843,  p.  79 ;  Girard, 
Ilerp.  U.  S.  Expl.  Expecl.,  1858,  p.  400,  pi.  xx,  figs.  10-13;  Dumeril 
&  Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci.  an  Mex.  el  Am.  Cent.,  1870,  p.  239,  pi.  xii, 
fig.  lit. 

Eead  la  rue ;  nostrils  lateral ;  cephalic  spines  strongly  developed ; 
occipital  spines  separated  from  each  other  by  a  single  plate  or 
small  spine,  directed  horizontally  backward,  beyond  the  longest 
temporals;  snblabial  plates  small;  a  large  flattened  scale  at  the 
angle  of  the  mouth  ;  inframaxillary  plates  beneath  it  very  small, 
the  others  large  and  sharp-edged  ;  three  or  four  rows  of  enlarged 
pointed  gular  scales  upon  each  side  of,  and  separated  by,  the 
median  line  ;  two  rows  of  pyramidal  scales  at  the  periphery  of 
the  abdomen  ;  abdominal  scales  smooth ;  back  spinous  ;  tail  of 
ordinaiy  length,  similar  to  the  body,  fringed  with  conical  spines. 

Habitat. — Oregon  and  California. 

In  coronatum  the  plate  or  scale  that  separates  the  two  occipital 
-j lines  shows  intermediate  gradations  between  a  nearly  flattened 
and  a  tubercular  and  even  spiny  surface.  Therefore,  the  posses- 
sion of  a  flattened  scale  by  a  specimen,  which  was  the  leading 
character  upon  which  Blainvillei  was  established,  loses  its  impor- 
tance and  necessitates  its  incorporation  with  the  species  under 
consideration. 

:>.  Phrynosoma  asio. 

Phrynosoma  asio  Cope,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  18G4,  p.   178 ; 

Sumiclirast,  Bibl.  Univers.  et  Rev.  Suisse,  1873,  p.  258;  Sumichrast, 

Bull.  Soc.  Zool.  Fr.,  1880,  p.  177. 
Phrynosoma  spinimentum  Peters.  Berlin  Monatsb.,  1873,  p.  742. 
Batrachosoma  asio  Dumeril  &  Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci.    au  Mex.  et  Am. 

Cent.,  1870,  p.  211,  pi.  xvii,  fig.  0. 

Head  large;  nostrils  lateral;  cephalic  spines  well  developed  ; 
occipital  spines  vertical,  separated  from  each  other  by  four  or 
five  small  plates;  temporal  spines  separated  from  the  occipitals, 
and  directed  horizontally  backward;  sublabials  small;  infra- 
maxillary plates  increasing  in  size  posteriorly;  three  or  four 
rows  of  enlarged  pointed  subgular  scales  on  each  side  of,  and 
separated  by,  the  median  line;  two  rows  of  pyramidal  scales  at 
the  periphery  of  the  abdomen;  abdominal  scales  carinated;  hack 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  145 

spinous  ;  tail  of  medium  length,  similar  to  the  body,  and  margined 
with  conical  scales. 

Habitat. — Tehuantepec,  Mexico. 

This  large  and  beautiful  species  is  most  nearly  allied  to  coro- 
natam,  from  which  it  is  separated  by  the  character  of  the  cephalic 
spines,  and  also  that  of  the  abdominal  scales.  It  is  also  closely 
related  to  the  succeeding  species,  differing,  however,  in  the  posi- 
tion of  the  nostrils,  and  in  the  number  and  position  of  the  rows 
of  enlarged  gular  scales. 

6.  Phrynosoma  cornutum. 

Agcnna  comuta  Harlan,  Journal  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  iv,  1825,  p. 
299,  pi.  xx. 

Lacerta  comuta  Cuv.,  Regn.  Anim.,  2d  edit.,  ii,  1819,  p.  37. 

Phrynosoma  cornutum  Gray,  Griff.  Anim.  King.,  ix,  1831,  p.  45  ;  Hol- 
brook,  N.  Am.  Herp.,  ii,  1842,  p.  87,  pi.  xi  ;  Dekay,  Zool.  New  York, 
iii,  1842,  p.  31;  Gray,  Cat.  Liz.  Brit.  Mus.,  1845,  p.  229;  Girard, 
Stans.  Expl.  Vail.  Gt.  Salt  Lake,  1852,  p.  360,  pi.  viii,  figs.  1-6  ; 
Blanchard,  Organ.  Regn.  Anim.,  1852,  pt.  v,  pi.  xii ;  Hallowell,  Sit- 
greaves'  Exped.  Zuni  and  Col.  Rivers,  1853,  p.  119  ;  Girard,  Herp. 
U.  S.  Expl.  Exped.,  1858,  p.  403,  pi.  xxi,  figs.  6-9  ;  Baird,  U.  S.  and 
Mex.  Bound.  Surv.,  pt.  ii,  1859,  p.  9  ;  Dumeril  &  Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci. 
au  Mex.  et  Am.  Cent.,  Rept.,  1870,  p.  236,  pi.  xii,  fig.  9  ;  Cope,  Check 
List  N.  A.  Batrach.  and  Rept.,  1875,  p.  49  ;  Yarrow,  U.  S.  Geol. 
Surv.  west  of  100th  Meridian,  v,  1875,  p.  579  ;  Midler,  Verh.  Nat. 
Gesell.,  Basel,  1878,  p.  634 ;  Cope,  Proc.  Am.  Phil.  Soc,  1879,  p.  261; 
Cope,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  No.  17,  1880,  p.  17. 

Phrynosoma  Harlani  Wiegmann,  Herp.  Mex.,  i,  1834,  p.  54  ;  Dumeril 
&  Bibron,  Erpet.  gener.,  iv,  1837,  p.  314  ;  Spring  &  Lacordaire, 
Bull.  Acad.  Roy.  Brussels,  1842,  pt.  ii,  p.  192,  fig.  2  ;  Aug.  Dumeril, 
Cat.  Meth.  Coll.  Rept.  Mus.  Paris,  1851,  p.  28. 

Tropidogaster  cornutus  Fitzinger,  Sys.  Rept.,  i,  1843,  p.  79. 

Phrynosoma  planiceps  Hallowell,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1852,  p. 
178  ;  Hallowell,  Sitgreaves'  Exped.  Zuni  and  Col.  Rivers,  1853,  p.  124, 
pi.  vii  ;  Dumeril,  Arch.  Mus.  Hist.  Nat.,  viii,  1855,  p.  552  ;  Dumeril 
&  Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci.au  Mex.  et  Am.  Cent.,  1870,  p.  238,  pi.  xii, 
fig.  11  ;  Cope,  Check  List  N.  A.  Batrach.  and  Rept.,  1875,  p.  49 ; 
Yarrow,  TJ.  S.Geol.  Surv.  west  of  100th  Meridian,  v,  1875,  p.  579, 
pi.  xxiv,  fig.  1  ;  Coues,  in  the  above,  p.  593. 

Head  broad  ;  nostrils  anterior,  placed  Avithin  the  superciliary 
ridges  ;  cephalic  spines  strongly  developed  ;  occipital  spines  long, 
directed  obliquely  upward,  a  smaller  spine  between  the  two ;  pos- 
terior inframaxillary  plates  largest ;  one  row  of  enlarged  pointed 
gular  scales  on  each  side,  distant  from  the  median  line ;  two  rows 

11 


146  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

of  pyramidal  scales  at  the  periphery  of  the  abdomen  ;  abdominal 
scales  carinated,  occasionally  smooth  or  nearly  so  ;  back  with 
several  rows  of  spiny  scales ;  tail  of  ordinary  length,  similar  to 
the  body,  and  fringed  with  conical  scales. 

Habitat. — Kansas,  Indian  Territory,  Texas,  and  Js'ew  Mexico. 
Possibly  from  Arkansas  and  Louisiana. 

The  only  dilference  between  cornutum  and  the  supposed  species 
planiceps,  was  in  the  character  of  the  abdominal  scales,  the  former 
being  carinated,  and  the  latter  smooth.  Prof.  Cope,  however, 
after  examining  numbers  of  specimens,  finds  that  the  above  forms 
grade  into  each  other,  and,  consequently,  considers  them  but  one 
species. 

7.  Phrynosoma  regale. 

Phrynosoma  regale  G-irard,  Herp.  U.  S.  Expl.  Exped.,  1858,  p.  406 ; 
Baird,  U.  S.  and  Mex.  Bound.  Surv.,  1859,  pt.  ii,  p.  9,  pi.  xxviii,  fig. 
1-3 ;  Cope,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1866,  p.  310  ;  Dumeril  &  Bo- 
court,  Miss.  Sci.  au  Mex.  et  Am.  Cent.  Rept.,  1870,  p.  235,  pi.  xii, 
fig.  12  ;  Cope,  Check  List  N.  A.  Batrach.  and  Rept.,  1875,  p.  49  ;  Yar- 
row, U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  west  of  the  100th  Meridian,  v,  1875,  p.  578 ; 
Coues,  in  the  above  work,  p.  593 ;  Midler,  Verh.  Nat.  Gesell.,  Basel, 
1878,  p.  634  ;  Lockington,  Am.  Nat.,  1880,  p.  295. 

"  Phrynosoma  Solaris  Gray,  Cat.  Liz.  Brit.  Mus.,  1845,  p.  229?" 

Head  large  ;  nostrils  anterior ;  cephalic  spines  strongly  devel- 
oped, directed  backwards  ;  the  longest  two  of  the  temporals  being 
in  the  same  plane  as,  and  touching,  the  occipitals,  all  four  being 
subequal ;  no  plate  or  scale  separating  the  occipital  spines ;  two 
rows  of  enlarged  pointed  gular  scales,  one  on  each  side  of,  and 
distant  from,  the  median  line ;  last  inframaxillary  plate  smaller 
than  the  preceding  ;  two  rows  of  pyramidal  scales  at  the  periphery 
of  the  abdomen,  lower  one  very  small ;  abdominal  scales  carinated ; 
back  spinous ;  tail  of  medium  length,  similar  to  the  body,  and 
fringed  with  conical  scales. 

Habitat. — Valle}^  of  the  Gila  and  Colorado  Rivers. 

8.  Phrynosoma  taurus. 

Phrynosoma  taurus  Duges  MSS.,  1868 ;  Duges,  Cat.  Vert.  Mex.,  1869  ; 
Dumeril  &  Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci.  an  Mex.  ft  Am.  Cent.  Rept.,  1870,  p. 
2!34,  pi.  xii,  fig.  8  ;  Duges,  La  Naturaleza,  ii,  1S71-73,  p.  302,  fig. 

Head  broad;  nostrils  anterior;  occipital  spines  small  and  coni- 
cal ;  temporals  strongly  developed,  conical,  projecting  very  much 


1885. J  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  147 

farther  posteriorly  than  the  occipitals ;  inframaxillary  plates 
nearly  equal ;  one  row  of  enlarged  pointed  gular  scales  upon  each 
side  of,  and  distant  from,  the  median  line  ;  a  single  row  of  pyram- 
idal scales  at  the  periphery  of  the  abdomen ;  abdominal  scales 
carinated  ;  back  spinous ;  tail  very  short,  about  as  long  as  the 
femur,  and  with  very  few  conical  scales  along  the  margins. 
Habitat. — Puebla,  Southern  Mexico. 

9.  Phrynosoma  Braconnieri. 

Phrynosoma  Braconnieri  Dumeril  &  Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci.  au  Mex.  et 
Am.  Cent.  Rept.,  1870,  p.  233,  pi.  xii,  fig.  7. 

Head  as  broad  as  long ;  nostrils  anterior ;  cephalic  spines  of 
medium  size ;  occipital  spines  somewhat  less  prolonged  posteriorly 
than  the  longest  of  the  temporals ;  four  or  five  temporal  spines 
upon  each  side ;  one  row  of  enlarged  pointed  gular  scales  upon 
each  side  of,  and  distant  from,  the  median  line;  inframaxillary 
plates  nearly  equal ;  a  single  row  of  pyramidal  scales  at  the 
periphery  of  the  abdomen ;  abdominal  scales  carinated  ;  tail  very 
short,  little  more  than  half  as  long  as  the  femur. 

Habitat. — Oaxaca,  Southern  Mexico. 

10.  Phrynosoma  platyrhinos. 

Phrynosoma  platyrhinos  Girard,  Stans.  Expl.  Vail.  Gt.  Salt  Lake,  1852, 

p.  361,  pi.  vii,  fig.  1-5  ;  Cope,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1866,  p. 

oO'i ;  Dumeril  &  Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci.  au  Mex.  et  Am.  Cent.  Rept., 

1870,  p.  232 ;  Cope,  Check  List  N.  A.  Batrach.  and  Rept.,  1875,  p. 

49  ;  Yarrow,  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  west  of  the  100th  Meridian,  v,  1875, 

p.  577  ;  Coues,  in  the  above  work,  p.  594. 
Doliosaurus  platyrhinos  Girard,  Herp.  U.  S.  Expl.  Exped.,  1858,  p.  409  ; 

Baird,  P.  R.  R.  Rept.,  Gunnison  &  Beckwith's  Route,  Rept.,  1859, 

p.  18. 

Head  small ;  nostrils  anterior  ;  cephalic  spines  of  medium  size  ; 
occipital  spines  produced  further  than  the  longest  of  the  tem- 
porals, posteriorly  ;  sublabial  plates  nearly  equal ;  inframaxillary 
plates  becoming  larger  posteriorly ;  one  row  of  enlarged  gular 
scales  on  each  side  of,  and  distant  from,  the  median  line ;  one 
row  of  pyramidal  scales  at  the  periphery  of  the  abdomen ; 
abdominal  scales  smooth ;  back  with  several  rows  of  spinous 
scales  ;  tail  of  medium  length,  fringed  with  conical  scales. 

Habitat. — Utah,  Nevada,  New  Mexico,  Arizona  and  California. 


148  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

II.  Phrynosoma  modestum. 
Phrynosoma  modest 'mi  Girard,  Stans.  Expl.  Vail.  Gt.  Salt  Lake,  1852,  p. 

361,  ]>1.  vi,  fig.  4-8;  Cope,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1866,  p.  302; 

Dumeril  &  Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci.  an  Mex.  ct  Am.  Cent.,  Kept.,  INTO,  p. 

232;    C<>\«:   Check  List  N.   A.   Batrach.  and   Rept.,  1875,   p.  49; 

Yarrow,  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  west  of  100th  Meridian,  v,  1875,  p.  577 ; 

Coues,  in  the  above  work,  p.  594. 
Doliosaurus  modestus  Girard,  Ilerp.  U.  S.  Expl.  Expcd.,  1858,  p.  409  ; 

Baird,  U.  S.  and  Mex.  Bound.  Surv.,  ii,  pt.  ii,  1859,  p.  10  ;  Baird, 

P.  R.  R.  Rept.,  x,  1859,  Whipple's  Route,  Rept.,  p.  38. 

Head  broader  than  long ;  nostrils  anterior ;  cephalic  spines 
small;  occipital  spines  extending  as  far  as  the  longest  of  the 
temporals,  posteriorly  ;  auricular  aperture  sometimes  wanting  on 
one  or  both  sides,  but  when  present,  small  and  granular  ;  sub- 
labial  plates  small  and  nearly  equal ;  inframaxillary  plates  broad 
and  pointed ;  gular  scales  next  to  the  inframaxillary  plates 
slightly  larger  than  the  others  ;  no  pyramidal  scales  at  the  periph- 
ery of  the  abdomen ;  abdominal  scales  smooth  ;  back  nearly 
smooth,  devoid  of  conical  scales;  tail  nearly  equal  in  length  to 
the  body,  a  few  conical  scales  along  the  basal  margin. 

Habitat. — Western  Texas,  Utah,  New  Mexico  and  Arizona. 

12.  Phrynosoma  Maccalli. 

Anota  Maccalli  Ilallowell,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1852.  p.  122  ; 

Hallowell,  Sitgreaves'  Exped.  Zuni  and  Col.  Rivers,  1853,  p.  127,  pL 

x,  figs.  1,  2 ;  Dumeril  &  Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci.  au  Mex.  et  Am.  Cent. 

Rept.,  1870,  p.  230. 
Doliosavrus  Maccalli  Girard,  Ilerp.  U.  S.  Expl.  Exped.,  1858,  p.  408  ; 

Baird,  U.  S.  and  Mex.  Bound.  Surv.,  ii,  pt.  ii,  1859,  p.  9,  pi.  xxviii, 

figs.  4-6. 
Phrynosoma  Maccalli  Cope,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1866,  p.  310; 

Cope,  Check  List  N.  A.  Batrach.  &  Rept.,  1875,  p.  49 ;  Coucs,  U.  S. 

Geol.  Surv.  west  of  100th  Meridian,  v,  1875,  p.  593. 

Head  small;  snout  truncated ;  nostrils  anterior;  cephalic  spines 
long,  strongly  developed ;  occipital  spines  slightly  recurved ; 
middle  inframaxillary  spines  broadest  and  longest;  one  row  of 
enlarged  gular  scales  upon  each  side  of,  and  distant  from,  the 
median  line  ;  auricular  apertures  always  wanting ;  no  pyramidal 
scales  at  the  periphery  of  the  abdomen;  abdominal  scales  smooth  ; 
back  smooth  as  in  modestum;  tail  as  long  as  the  body,  margined 
with  conical  scales. 

Habitat. — Deserts  of  the  Gila  and  Colorada  Rivers. 


1885.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  149 

A  REVIEW  OF  THE  AMERICAN  GENERA  AND  SPECIES  OF  MULLIDiE. 
BY   EDWARD  A.  HALL  AND   J.  Z.  A.  McCAUGHAN. 

In  the  present  paper  we  have  attempted  to  collect  the  synonym}' 
of  all  the  American  genera  and  species  of  the  family  of  Mullidae. 
All  the  specimens  examined  by  us  belong  to  the  Museum  of  the 
Indiana  University. 

Analysis  of  American  Genera  of  Mullidse. 

a.  Teeth  on  lower  jaw,  vomer  and  palatines  ;  upper  jaw  toothless; 
caudal  lobes  equal.  Vertebrae  9  +  14  ;  the  nasal  bone,  which 
forms  a  downward  hook  over  maxillary,  strongly  developed  ; 
interorbital  space  flat  and  wide;  opercle  without  spine. 
D.  VII-I,  8  ;  A.  II,  6.  Mullus.     1. 

aa.  Teeth  on  both  jaws ;  vomer  and  palatines  toothless.  Verte- 
brae 9  +  14  ;  the  nasal  bone,  which  forms  a  downward  hook 
over  the  maxillary,  moderately  developed ;  interorbital 
space  concave  and  narrow;  opercle  ending  in  a  single 
spine.  Upeneus.     2. 

1.  MULLUS. 

Mullus  Linnaeus,  Syst.  Nat.,  1758,  ed.  10,  299  {barbatus ;  surmuletus). 

The  species  of  this  genus,  two  or  three  in  number,  are  very 
closely  related.  They  are  chiefly  confined  to  the  waters  of 
Europe. 

Analysis  of  Species  of  Mullus. 

a.  Depth  less  than  4  in  length  ;  maxillary  scarcely  reaching  front 
of  orbit ;  eye  much  larger  than  in  M.  surmuletus,  less  than 
5  in  head ;  barbels  scarcely  reaching  to  lower  angle  of  pre- 
opercle,  more  than  1^  in  head.  Scales  more  deciduous  than 
in  M.  surmuletus.     (  Vinciguerra.)  barbatus.1 

1  For  purposes  of  comparison  we  insert  the  characters  of  this  European 
species  as  given  by  Vinciguerra.  We  have  examined  no  specimens  of  it. 
The  descriptions  given  by  Guuther  and  others,  of  M.  surmuletus  and  M. 
barbatus,  are  said  to  show  a  confusion  of  the  two  forms. 


150  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

aa.  Length  of  head  greater  than  depth  of  body,  3£  in  length  of 

body;  depth  4  in  length;  snout  1]   in  length  of  body; 

maxillary  not  quite   reaching  the  vertical  from  front  of 

eye  ;  eye  5  in  head  ;  interorbital  space  12^  in  length  of 

body  ;  barbels  reaching  to  a  point  half-way  between  angle 

of  preopercle  and  extremity  of  opercle,  1^  in  head.    Sides 

of  body  with  three  yellow  longitudinal"  stripes  ;  first  dorsal 

barred  with  light  and  black.  surmuletus.     1. 

aaa.  Length  of  head  about  equal  to  depth  of  body,  about  3f  in 

length  of  body ;  snout  7T6o  in  length  of  body  ;   maxillary 

just  reaching  vertical  from  front  of  eye;  eye  4  in  head; 

interorbital  space  14|  in  length  of  body  ;  barbels  reaching 

to  extremity  of  opercle,  L\  in  head  ;  scales  in  lateral  line 

32.     Sides  of  body  with  two  yellow  longitudinal  stripes  ; 

first  dorsal  with  an  orange  band  at  base  and  a  yellow  one 

higher  up  ;  second  dorsal  mottled  with  scarlet  and  pale  ; 

no  black  on  dorsals.  surmuletus  auratus.     1  (b). 

1.  Mullus  surmuletus. 

(a.)  Var.  surmuletus. 

Trigla  capite  glabro,  Uneis  utunque  quatuor,  luteis  longitudinalibus paral- 
lellis  Artcdi,  Ichthyol.,  1738,  43  (Mediterranean  Sea ;  Ocean  by 
Cornwall). 

Mullus  surmuletus  Linnaeus,  Syst.  Nat.,  1758,  ed.  10,  300  (Mediter- 
ranean); Linnaeus,  Syst.  Nat.,  1766,  ed.  12,  496  (Mediterranean); 
Brunich,  Ichthyol.  Massiliensis,  1768,  72  (Marseilles);  Pennant, 
"Brit.  Zool.,  iii,  1769,  368,  pi.  64";  Bloch,  Ichthyologia,  Taf.  57, 
1785;  Bonnature,  "Ichthyol,  1790,  144,  pi.  59,  fig.  233";  Linnaeus, 
"Fauna,  Suec.  ed.  Retz,  1800,  341  ";  Shaw,  "Brit.  Zool.,  iv,  1800, 
1819,  613,  pi.  88";  Bloch  &  Schneider,  Syst.  Ichthyol.,  1801,  77, 
Taf.  18;  Donovan,  "Brit.  Fish.,  i,  1801,  pi.  12";  Turton,  "Brit. 
Zool.,  1807,  102";  Risso,  Ichthyol.  de  Nice,  1810,  215  (Nice);  Mar- 
tens, "Reise  nachVenedig,  ii,  1824,  427"  (Venice);  Fleming,  "Brit. 
An.,  1828,  216";  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss,  iii,  1829, 
433  (Marseilles ;  Ivica ;  Nice;  Naples);  Cuvier,  Regne  Animal,  ed. 
ii,  1829. 

Mullus  xurmuletus  Lacepede,  Poiss.,  v,  1832,  75  (Mediterranean,  Baltic, 
Atlantic  Ocean);  Jenyns,  "Manual  Brit.  Vert.,  1835,337";  Yarnll. 
"Brit.  Fishes,  i,  1841,  ill":  Guichenot,  Explor.  Sci.  Alger.  Poiss., 
1850,  38  (Algiers);  White,  "Cat.  Brit,  Fish.,  1851,  14";  Thompson, 
"Nat.  Hist.  Ireland,  iv,  1856,  70"  (Ireland);  Giinther,  Cat.  Fish. 
Brit.  Mus.,  i,  1859,  401  (Brixham  ;  British  Channel;  Medeira,  Medi- 
terranean; Dalmatia);  Couch,   "Fish.  Brit,  Isles,   i.   1862,  2i>8,  pi. 


1885.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  151 

47";    Collet,  Norges  Fiske,  1875,  17  (Christianafjord  ;   Lindesnaes ; 

Bergen):   Bean,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1879,  26  (Europe);   Vinci- 

guerra,  Risult.  Ittiol.  del  Violante.  1883,  41  (Dalmazia  ;  Marcova, 

Melida;  Curzola  ;  Lissa  ;  Lagosta  and  Cazza). 
Mullus  barbatus  De  la  Roche,  "Ann.  Mus.  xiii,  1809,  306";  Gronow, 

Cat.  Fish.    1854,    108 ;    Steindachner,   Uebersicht    Meeresfische  an 

Kiisten  Spaniens  und  Portugals,  1867,  33  (Cadiz;  Lisbon;  Gibraltar; 

Tenerifte);  Botteri,  Cat.  Pisci  di  Lesina,  1873,  60  (Lesina). 
Mullus  barbatus  surmuletus  Day,  Fishes  of  Great  Brit.,  1880,  22,  pi.  8, 

fig.  2  (Mevagissey). 
Mullus  dubius  Malm,   "Ofversigt  of  Kongl.  Vet.    Akad.    Forhandl., 

1852,  224"  (Sweden). 

(b.)  Var.  auratus. 

Mullus  barbatus  auratus  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
1882,  280  (Pensacola);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1882,  931 
(Pensacola ;  Wood's  Holl). 

Mullus  auratus  Jordan  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1884,  39  (Pensacola). 

Habitat. — Var.  surmuletus,  on  all  southern  and  western  coasts 
of  Europe,  from  Sweden  to  Africa ;  the  most  common  species  in 
most  parts  of  Europe.  Var.  auratus,  eastern  coast  of  America, 
Wood's  Holl  to  Pensacola. 

This  form  called  auratus,  has  been  occasionally  taken  on  our 
Atlantic  and  Gulf  coasts,  but  it  is  evidently  rare.  The  single 
specimen  examined  by  us  came  from  deep  water  at  Pensacola. 
It  seems  to  us  to  be  a  variety  of  M.  surmuletus  rather  than  a 
distinct  species,  and  it  is  certainly  nearer  M.  surmuletus  than  31. 
barbatus,  as  the  latter  is  described. 

Many  European  writers  have  denied  the  distinctness  of  M.  sur- 
muletus and  M.  barbatus.  The  following  account  of  the  two, 
translated  from  Vinciguerra's  Risultati  Ittiologici  del  Crociere  del 
Violante,  seems  to  give  a  final  answer  to  the  question  as  to  the 
difference  between  these  two  species. 

"  No  one  of  the  Mediterranean  ichthyologists  has  yet  been 
willing  to  accept  the  fusion  of  these  two  forms,  an  opinion  which 
I  regard  as  really  incorrect,  and  caused  by  the  scarcity  of  M. 
barbatus  in  the  waters  of  the  Atlantic  and  Baltic.  I  have  been 
able  to  verify,  on  an  extensive  series  of  examples,  that  in 
barbatus,  as  in  surmuletus,  there  exist  two  forms ;  the  one  with 
the  profile  oblique,  the  other  with  the  pi-ofile  rectilinear.  These 
probably  represent  the  two  sexes,  and  those  who  wish  to  take  as 


152  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

a  differential  character  the  form  of  the  head  are  thus  easily  led 
into  error.  The  real  differences  which  exist  between  surmuletus 
and  barbatus,  besides  that  of  coloration,  are  the  following:  In 
M.  surmuletus,  the  diameter  of  the  eye  is  much  smaller,  and  the 
barbels  are  more  robust  and  longer,  reaching  beyond  the  lower 
angle  of  the  opercle  (in  barbatus  they  scarcely  reach  this  point), 
and  the  body  is  notably  deeper.  To  these  characters  may  be 
added  the  greater  adherence  of  the  scales  in  surmuletus,  while  in 
barbatus  these  are  readily  deciduous,  and  only  in  extraordinary 
cases  is  a  specimen  found  possessing  a  single  scale.  In  every 
market  on  the  coast  of  the  Mediterranean  the  fishermen  distin- 
guish between  the  two  species  by  different  names,  according  to 
their  coloration,  relative  length  of  barbels  and  the  place  where 
they  live  by  preference ;  inasmuch  as  surmuletus  is  found  most 
readily  in  rocky  places  (and  hence  the  common  name  '  Triglia 
di  Scoglia'),  and  barbatus  is  found  in  muddy  places  (and  hence 
the  common  name  '  Triglia  di  Fango  ').  " 

2.  UPENEUS. 

Upeneus  Cuvier,  Rc-gnc  Animal,  ed.  2,  1829  (vittatus;  rutsellij  lifasciatux;  trifas- 

ciatun). 
Hypeneus  Agassiz,  Noni.  Zool.,  Index  Universalis,  184G,  190  (amended  orthography). 
Mulloides  Bleeker,  "Ceram  II,  097,  1852-G5  {flavolineatiu)." 
Pseudupeneus  Bleaker,  Poiss.  Cote  de  Guint'e,  18G2,  56  ( prayettsis). 
Parupeneus  15leeker,  Notice  sur  le  Parupeneua  bifaaciatUB  de  l'lle  de  la  Reunion, 

1867,  345  (bifaeciatua). 
Mullhypeneus  Poey,  Syn.,  1868,  307  [maculattu). 

We  include  under  the  head  of  Upeneus  all  the  Mullidse  having 
teeth  on  both  jaws  and  none  on  the  vomer.  The  variations  in 
the  size  and  number  of  the  teeth  seem  to  us  of  minor  importance. 

Analysis  of  Species  of  Upeneus. 

a.  Teeth  on  under  jaw  uniserial,  on  upper  jaw  uniserial  or  occa- 
sionally irregularly  biserial  with  the  outer  teeth  turned 
outward  ;  nil  the  teeth  coarse  and  distinct;  maxillary  2f  in 
head,  not  reaching  vertical  from  front  of  eye  by  one-half  of 
its  length;  barbels  extending  to  a  point  half-way  between 
the  vertical  of  preopercle  and  extremity  of  opercular  spine, 
1£  in  length  of  head  ;  eye  4  in  head  ;  scales  in  lateral  line 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PITTLADELPHIA.  153 

31 ;  depth,  4  in  length ;  dorsal  VIII-I,  8 ;  anal,  II,  6. 
Color  in  spirits,  steel-blue  above,  descending  on  sides  in 
three  blotches ;  one  above  point  of  opercular  spine,  some- 
times extending  on  opercle ;  one  under  each  dorsal  fin. 
Under-parts  of  body  pale.  maculatus.  2. 

aa.  Teeth  of  upper  jaw  uniserial,  of  lower  biserial ;  teeth  rather 
strong,  weaker  than  in  U.  grandisquamis ;  barbels  extending 
nearly  to  vertical  of  preopercle ;  eye  large,  3  in  head ; 
scales  in  lateral  line,  37  ;  depth  about  5f  in  total  length,  4£ 
in  length.  Dorsal  VII-I,  7  ;  anal  I,  5  or  6.  Color,  bright 
pink  or  rose,  with  broad  red  band  extending  from  eye  to 
caudal  and  suffusing  caudal  {Gill).  dentatus,  3 

aaa.  Teeth  on  both  jaws  in  more  than  one  series. 

b.  Teeth  on  anterior  part  of  jaws  in  two  irregular  series ;  lateral 
teeth  on  jaws  in  a  single  series ;  all  the  teeth  obtusely 
conical  and  distinct  from  each  other ;  teeth  on  upper  jaw 
turned  inwards ;  barbels  extending  to  vertical  of  preop- 
ercle, H  in  length  of  head ;  eye  3^  in  length  of  head ; 
scales  in  lateral  line  39 ;  depth  4  in  length.  Dorsal 
VIII-I,  8;  anal  II,  6.  "Color  in  life,  flesh-color  above, 
sides  silvery,  tinged  with  yellow  below ;  a  bright  yellow 
band  from  eye  to  base  of  caudal ;  a  whitish  streak  above 
and  below  this ;  another  above  lateral  line  ;  both  dorsals 
and  caudals  bright  yellow."  Martinicus.     4. 

bb.  Teeth  on  anterior  part  of  jaws  in  two  series ;  the  outer 
series  of  the  upper  jaw  being  formed  by  very  obtuse  and 
partly  confluent  teeth.  Barbels  extending  to  vertical 
from  root  of  pectoral  fins  ;  eye  4  in  head  ;  scales  in 
lateral  line  32  ;  dorsal  VIII-I,  8  ;  anal  I,  6.  Color  light 
greenish  brown  above,  rose-color  below  lateral  line ; 
scales  with  indistinct  pearly  spot  at  centre  ;  black  blotch 
on  lateral  line  behind  spinous  dorsal ;  a  smaller,  some- 
times indistinct  black  spot  behind  orbit ;  dorsal  fins  with 
spots  the  color  of  the  back  ;  other  fins  immaculate. 

grandisquamis.     5. 
2.  Upeneus  maculatus. 

Mullus  maculatus  Bloch,  "Ichthyol.  about  1790,  Taf.  348  (Brazil);" 
Lacepede,  Poiss.,  iii,  1798-1803,  403  (West  Indies  •  Brazil]. 

Mullus  surmuletus  var.  maculatus  Bloch  &  Schneider,  Systemalchthyol., 
1801,  78  (Brazil). 


154  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Upeneus  maculatus  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  iii,  1829, 
478  (Martinique;  Brazil);  Btorer,  "Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1846,  48;" 
Poey,  Mem.  Pise.  Cuba,  i,  1851,  223  (Martinique  ;  Brazil);  Castelnau. 
"Aiiim.  iiouv,  on  rares  Amer.  Sud,  1850-01,  0  (South  America); 
Cunt  her,  Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  i,  1850,  408  (Atlantic  coasts  of 
Tropical  America  ;  Jamaica);  Cope,  Trans.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc,  1870, 
471  (St.  Croix);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1882,  5G5  ; 
Jordan,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1884,  120  (Key  West). 

Mnllhy peneus  maculatus  Poey,  Syn.,  1868,  307  (Cuba). 

Mullhypcncus  maculatus  Poey,  Enum.  Pise.  Cuba,  1875,  34  (Havana  ; 
Jamaica). 

////peneus  maculatus  Goode,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  v,  1870,  49  (no 
specimen). 

Upeneus  punctatus  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  iii,  1829, 
482  (Mexico);  Kner,  Novara  Fiscbe,  1857-59,71  (Rio  Janeiro);  Cope, 
Trans.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc,  1870,  471  (St.  Kitts). 

Habitat. — Atlantic  coasts  of  Tropical  America,  from  Key 
West  to  Rio  Janeiro. 

The  specimens  of  this  species  examined  by  us  are  from  Key 
West  and  Havana. 

:'..  Upeneus  dentatus. 

Upeneus  dentatus  Gill,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat  Sci.  Phila.,  1862,  256  (Cape  San 
Lucas);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  363  (Cape 
San  Lucas). 

Habitat. — Pacific  coast  of  Tropical  America  ;  Lower  California. 
This  species  is  known  to  us  only  from  the  description  of  Gill, 
and  the  notes  of  Jordan  and  Gilbert  on  Gill's  original  types. 

4.  Upeneus  martinicus. 

Upeneus  martinicus  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,   Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,   iii, 

1829,  483  (Martinique). 
Upeneus  balteatus  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.,  Nat.  Poiss.,  iii.  L829, 

484  (Cuba);  Poey,  Mem.  Cuba,  i,  1851,  224  (Cuba);  Jordan,  Proc. 

U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1884,  129  (Key  West). 
Mulloidcs  balteatns  Cope,    Trans.   Amer.   Phil.   Soc,    1870,    471    (St. 

Kilts). 
Upeneus  flavovittatus  Poey,  Mem.  Cuba,  i,  1851,  225  (Cuba). 
Mulloidex  flavovittatus  Giinther,  Cat.    Fish.    Brit.  Mus.,  i,  1859,  403 

(Caribbean  Sea  ;  Jamaica  ;  Cuba). 
Upeneus  parvus  Poey,  Mem.  Cuba,  i,  1859,  225  (Cuba). 

The  specimens  of  this  species  examined  by  us  are  from  Key 
West  :iinl  Eavana.  Poey  lias  identified  his  flavovittatus  and 
parvus  with  the  balteatus  of  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes.  There 
seems  to  be  little  room  for  doubt  that  the  scanty  description  of 
martinicus  re  bis  to  this  species  also. 


1885.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OE  PHILADELPHIA.  155 

5.  Upeneus  grandisquamis. 

Upeneus  grandisquamis  Gill,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1863,  1G8 
(West  coast  Central  America);  Giinther,  Fish.  Central  America,  18G4, 
420  (copied  from  Gill);  Jordaii  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
1882,  62G  (no  description);  Steindachner,  Ichthy.  Beitriige,  iv,  1875, 
6  (Panama). 

Upeneus  tetraspilus  Giinther,  "Proc.  Zool.  Soc,  1804,  148;"  Giinther, 
Fish.  Central  America,  18G4,  420,  PL  GG,  fig.  1  (Panama). 

Habitat. — Pacific  coast  of  Tropical  America  ;  Panama. 

This  species  is  known  to  us  only  from  the  descriptions  of  Gill, 
Giinther,  and  Steindachner.  Professor  Jordan  tells  us  that  the 
Upeneus  tetraspilus  of  Giinther  is  certainly  the  same  as  the 
Upeneus  grandisquamis  of  Gill. 


[We  regret  to  announce  that  while  this  paper  was  going  through  the 
press,  one  of  the  authors,  Mr.  Edward  Allen  Hall,  was  drowned  in  Salt 
Creek,  about  eleven  miles  from  Bloomington,  Ind.,  on  May  22,  1885.  He 
was  born  at  Rushville,  Ind.,  January  9,  1864,  and  had,  during  his  course 
of  study  at  the  State  University  of  Indiana,  proven  himself  to  be  an 
energetic  and  faithful  student. — E.  J.  N.  ] 


156  PROCEEDINGS  OP   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 


May  20. 
Mr.  John  H.  Redfield  in  the  chair. 

Forty-one  persons  present. 

The  following  papers  were  presented  for  publication  : — 
"  Marginal  Karnes,"  by  H.  Carvill  Lewis. 

"  Description  of  New  Species   of  Lepidoptera,"   by  Herman 
Strecker. 

The  death  of  Jacob  P.  Jones,  a  member,  was  announced. 
Antonio  de  Gregorio,  of  Palermo,  was  elected  a  correspondent. 


June  2. 

Mr.  Edward  Potts  in  the  chair. 
Thirty-seven  persons  present. 
The  following  papers  were  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  157 


MARGINAL  KAMES. 
BY    II.    CAKVILL    LEWIS. 

Introduction. — During  the  course  of  an  investigation,  in  1881, 
of  the  extreme  southern  edge  of  the  great  ice-sheet  in  Pennsyl- 
vania, as  marked  by  its  terminal  moraine,  the  writer  had  an 
opportunitj7"  of  studying  several  phenomena  produced  by  the 
glacier  along  the  line  of  its  southern  terminus  ;  one  of  the  most 
interesting  of  which  phenomena  were  certain  short  hummocky 
ridges  of  stratified  drift,  which,  often  closely  connected  with  the 
terminal  moraine,  appear  to  belong  to  a  class  of  surface  deposits 
elsewhere  called  Karnes. 

The  kames  of  Scotland,  the  Eskers  of  Ireland,  and  the  Asar, 
or  osars,  of  Scandinavia,  all  closely  related,  if  not  identical, 
deposits,  find  an  analogue  in  the  ridges  of  stratified  drift  which 
have  been  described  by  a  number  of  geologists  as  occurring  in 
northeastern  America,  including  Canada. 

They  may  be  described  as  narrow  ridges  of  stratified,  water- 
worn,  generally  sandy  drift,  which,  sometimes  forming  a  series 
of  tortuous  and  reticulated  hills,  sometimes  a  nearly  regular 
straight  ridge,  and  often  forming  knob-like  conical  hills  ("  hum- 
mocks "),  alternating  with  similar  conical  depressions  ("kettle- 
holes  "),  generally  lie  along  valleys  or  depressions,  and  have  a 
general  downward  slope  from  a  higher  to  a  lower  level. 

These  gravel  ridges  are  generally  quite  steep — as  steep  often 
as  the  nature  of  the  material  will  allow.  This  steepness  is  quite 
striking  to  a  geologist  accustomed  to  the  gentle  slopes  of  the 
gravel  formations  in  the  non-glaciated  portion  of  this  country, 
and  at  once  suggests  the  recency  of  their  origin. 

The  internal  structure  of  kames  is  in  general  anticlinal. 
"  Flow-and-plunge  "  structure,  and  oblique  lamination,  the  evi- 
dence of  rapid  fluviatile  action,  is  often  seen  in  their  interior; 
and  as  a  rule  the  material  is  finest  in  the  interior,  and  most 
coarse  on  the  exterior  portions  of  the  kame. 

Wherever  along  the  course  of  the  terminal  moraine  the  writer  has 
had  an  opportunity  of  examining  recently  made  transverse  sections 
of  these  drift  ridges,  he  has  found  clean  water-worn  sand  within, 

1  Read  before  the  British  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science, 
Montreal,  August  29,  1884. 


158  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

showing  distinct  torrential  action,  and  a  coarse  gravel  on  the 
outside.  Sometimes,  but  rarely,  large  boulders  lie  on  top  of  the 
kames.  The  writer  has  never  observed  large  boulders  within 
them.  The  material  is  generally  small,  and  well  water-worn  and 
rounded,  showing  no  glacial  scratches  on  its  pebbles,  and  for  the 
most  part  is  of  local  origin. 

The  contours  of  these  kames  in  their  "  hummocky  "  appearance, 
are  very  like  those  of  moraines.  Indeed,  it  is  often  impossible 
to  distinguish  kames  from  moraines  by  external  features  alone. 
When,  however,  we  take  into  consideration  their  structure  and 
their  position,  they  cannot  readily  be  confounded.  Their  distin- 
guishing characters  are  (1)  their  internal  structure,  kames  being 
distinguished  by  an  absence  of  till  and  glaciated  pebbles,  and  by 
stratified,  generally  anticlinal,  structure — all  of  these  characters 
being  very  different  from  the  unstratified  pell-mell  character  of 
moraines  ;  (2)  their  geographical  position  and  the  influence  of 
the  surrounding  topography  upon  them.  Topography  has  prac- 
tically no  influence  on  the  moraine  of  the  great  glacier.  The 
terminal  moraine  on  the  Pocono  plateau  closely  resembles  that 
in  Cherry  Valley,  1000  feet  below  it;  and  the  moraine  at  the 
height  of  2500  feet,  in  central  Pennsylvania,  cannot  be  distin- 
guished from  that  in  New  Jersey,  at  the  sea-level.  The  moraine 
may  lie  on  the  downward  slope  of  a  hill,  as  at  Fishing  Creek, 
Columbia  Co.;  may  form  a  dam  across  a  creek,  as  at  Cole's  Mills, 
or  it  may  stretch  transversely  across  a  mountain  ridge  such  as 
the  Kittatinny  Mountain.1 

On  the  other  hand,  kames  as  a  rule  depend  directly  upon  topo- 
graphy. While  they  do  not  always  coincide  with  the  present 
drainage  systems,  they  extend  from  higher  to  lower  levels.  They 
follow  valleys  generally  along  the  central  line,  but  sometimes, 
indeed,  rising  over  considerable  elevations.  Where  the  valleys 
are  distinct  and  sharply  defined  by  high  ridges  on  either  side, 
the  kames  are  confined  to  them,  and  follow  more  or  less  closely 
the  modern  water-courses ;  but  where,  as  in  southeastern  Massa- 
chusetts, the  valleys  are  not  wrell  marked,  and  there  is  no  defining 
wall,  the  country  being  nearly  level  or  rolling,  and  there  being 
no  mountain  ranges,  kames  often  cross  where  there  are  now  no 

1  This  independence  of  the  terminal  moraine  as  regards  topography,  is 
prominently  brought  out  in  the  detailed  deseription  of  it  given  by  the 
writer  in  Report  Z,  Second  Geological  Survey  of  Pennsylvania. 


1885.J  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  159 

water-courses,  even  crossing  rivers,  as  may  be  seen  on  the  Merri- 
mac  at  Lawrence,  which  is  said  to  he  crossed  at  right-angles  by  :i 
kanie.1  In  no  sense,  however,  can  kames  be  regarded  as  the  work 
of  rivers  merely.  For,  as  Prof.  Stone  has  shown  so  clearly  in 
Maine,  they  sometimes  rise  out  of  a  valley  and  pass  through  a  gap 
in  the  hillside  or  cross  a  ridge  perhaps  150  feet  high,  to  low 
grounds  beyond.  Prof.  Stone  has  in  several  cases  followed  them 
up-hill  for  a  short  distance. 

Such  facts  may  best  be  explained  by  the  supposition  that  the 
stream  of  water  which  formed  them  must  have  either  been 
enclosed  within  high  walls  of  ice,  or  have  flowed  in  a  subglacial 
tunnel. 

Literature. — A  large  number  of  kames,  occurring  under  various 
conditions,  have  been  observed  in  different  portions  of  the  glaciated 
area  of  North  America.     None  occur  south  of  that  area. 

As  long  ago  as  1842,  Dr.  Edward  Hitchcock  described  a  series 
of  gravel  ridges  which  pass  through  Andover,  Mass.,  and  which  is 
known  locally  as  "  Indian  Ridge."  At  that  time  he  regarded  this 
ridge,  composed,  as  he  well  described  it,  "  of  a  collection  of 
tortuous  ridges  and  rounded  even  conical  hills  with  corresponding 
depressions  between  them," 2  as  a  species  of  moraine.  These  have 
been  more  recently  studied  in  detail  by  Prof.  G.  F.  Wright,3  who 
has  shown  that  they  form  part  of  a  chain  of  such  ridges,  many 
miles  in  length,  running  from  Franklin,  N.  H.,  to  Maiden  on  the 
ocean,  and  are  true  kames. 

The  most  complete  studies  of  kames  in  this  country  are  those 
made  by  Prof.  Geo.  H.  Stone,4  who  has  mapped  some  thirty-one 
linear  systems  of  kames  in  the  State  of  Maine,  all  running  from 
the  high  interior  of  the  State  southeastward  toward  the  sea. 
He  describes  them  as  meandering  like  rivers  in  their  course  from 
the  mountains  oceauward.  They  start  sometimes  at  elevations  as 
high  as  1600  feet  above  the  ocean,  they  freely  cross  low  transverse 
hills  100  feet  high,  but  not  200  feet  high,  and  they  have  a  strong 
inclination  to  keep  within  straight  lines,  notwithstanding  minor 
obstacles.  These  ancient  gravel  streams  were  not  so  easily  turned 
from  their  course  as  streams  of  to-day.     When  once  in  a  valley 

1  Wright,  Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  xix,  47. 

2  Trans.  Am.  Assn.  Geol.  and  Nat.,  1841-2,  p.  101. 

3  Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  Dec,  1870. 

*  Kames  of  Maine.     Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  xx,  430,  1880. 


160  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

coinciding  with  the  main  direction  of  the  kame,  the  latter  is  apt 
to  keep  in  it.  Prof,  Stone  states  that  these  long  ridges  are 
homologous  with  the  Scandinavian  Osars,  rather  than  with  the 
short  ridges  classed  as  kames. 

In  other  parts  of  New  England,  kames  have  been  described  by 
several  authors.  In  New  Hampshire,  Prof.  C.  H.  Hitchcock  and 
M  i .  Warren  Upham  have  made  noteworthy  contributions  to  this 
subject.  In  vol.  iii  of  the  New  Hampshire  Geological  Survey, 
Mr.  Upham  has  contributed  a  valuable  chapter  on  surface  deposits, 
among  which  the  most  important  are  the  numerous  kames.  One 
of  these,  described  by  Mr.  Upham  as  occupying  the  valley  of  the 
Connecticut  River,  has  subsequently  been  studied  by  Prof.  Dana, 
who  believes  '  that  it  is  merely  a  portion  of  the  terrace  formation 
in  that  valley,  and  that  the  name  of  kame  should  not  properly  be 
applied  to  it.  Prof.  Hitchcock,2  however,  has  subsequently 
examined  a  critical  localit}'  in  the  Connecticut  Valley,  and  finds 
the  arched  kame-gravel  dipping  beneath  a  horizontal  terrace- 
loam,  thus  showing  the  greater  age  and  different  origin  of  the 
kame,  and  supporting  Mr.  Upham 's  views. 

Prof.  J.  S.  Newberry 3  and  Prof.  N.  H.  Winchell  have  described 
kames  in  Ohio,  where  they  are  known  locally  as  "hog-backs.' 
Prof.  Newberry  at  that  time  regarded  them  as  due  to  the  action 
of  breakers  and  shorewaves  at  a  period  when  the  region  was  sub- 
merged under  an  inland  fresh-water  lake.  Kames  and  kame-like 
ridges  have  also  been  described  in  Michigan  and  in  Minnesota. 
In  Canada,  Sir  William  Dawson  4  has  described  certain  ridges 
known  as  "  Boar's-backs  "  and  "  Horse-backs,"  which  he  regards 
as  eskers.  One  of  these,  in  Cumberland,  is  a  narrow  ridge,  so 
level  on  top  that  it  forms  a  natural  carriage-road  for  eight  miles; 
another  one,  in  Shelburne  County,  is  a  long  ridge,  also  used  as  a 
carriage-road;  while  shorter  and  more  interrupted  ridges  occur  in 
a  number  of  places.  Sir  William  Dawson  remarks  that  they  bear 
no  resemblance  to  glacial  moraines,  and  believes  that  they  were 
thrown  up  by  "  the  surf  or  marine  currents  and  tides."  Prof.  T. 
C.  Chamberlin  ■"'  has   given  an  excellent   description  of  kames 

1  Am.  Jour.  Be,  xxii,  451,  1881. 

2  Proc.  Am.  Assn.  Adv.  Be.,  \\\i.  325,  1882. 

3  Geol.  Surv.  of  Ohio.  vol.  ii.  p.  41-47. 

*  Notes  <>ii  the  Post-Pliocene  <  leol.  of  <  'anada,  ls?2.  p.  40. 
Hillocks  of  angular  gravel  and  disturbed  stratification.     Amor.  Jour. 
Sc,  xxvii,  1884,  p.  378. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  161 

associated  with  terminal  moraines  in  Wisconsin  and  elsewhere, 
and  his  paper  contains  a  good  reference  list  to  the  literature  of 
kames.  The  kames  described  by  him  differ  from  those  described 
in  the  present  paper  in  being  knob-like  hills,  "simple  isolated 
mounds,"  or  clusters  of  such  mounds,  rather  than  linear  ridges, 
and  also  in  lying  transverse  to  the  glacial  movement,  which  is 
not  the  case  with  the  Pennsylvania  deposits. 

Origin  of  Kames. — The  early  view  of  geologists  as  to  the 
origin  of  kames,  was  that  they  were  washed  into  shape  by  the 
waves  and  currents  of  the  ocean.  This  was  the  view  held  by  Dr. 
Jas.  Geikie  in  the  first  edition  of  his  "  Great  Ice  Age," l  and  was 
formerly  advocated  by  many  geologists  both  in  Europe  and 
America.  But  recent  researches  have  shown  that  this  view  is 
untenable,  and  in  the  second  edition  of  Dr.  Geikie's  book  kames 
are  regarded  as  the  work  of  subglacial  rivers.2 

The  researches  of  American  geologists,  especially  the  work  in 
New  England  of  Upham,  Wright  and  Stone,  have  shown  the 
occurrence  of  kames  in  positions  out  of  the  reach  of  oceanic 
currents.  When  marine  deposits  occur,  as  they  do  along  the 
border  of  New  England,  in  the  St.  Lawrence  Valley,  and  else- 
where, they  are  seen  to  be  horizontally  stratified  sands  and  clays 
often  holding  marine  fossils,  and  clearly  overlying  the  kame 
ridges.  The  terrace  material  of  flooded  rivers  is  also  observed 
to  overlie  the  kames. 

On  the  other  hand,  kames  are  newer  than  glacial  till,  and 
overlie  and  swing  around  the  drumlins  of  Massachusetts.  These 
"  drumlins,"  like  those  described  by  Kinahan  and  Close  in 
Ireland,3  are  low  oval  hills,  composed  of  unstratified  glacial  till, 
and  are  most  satisfactorily  explained  as  lenticular  ground  moraines 
formed  under  the  ice  sheet  during  its  advance.  They  have  been 
called  "  lenticular  hills."  Their  longer  diameter  is  generally 
parallel  to  the  direction  of  the  ice  flow,  as  shown  by  neighboring 
stria?,  and  they  appear  to  be  of  a  mid-glacial  age.4 

1  Page  229. 

2  Page  217,  etc. 

3  Glaciation  of  Iar-Connaught,  Kinahan  and  Close,  1872. 

4  For  discussion  of  "lenticular  hills,"  sec  papers  inProc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat. 
Hist.,  by  N.  S.  Shaler  (xiii,  190),  and  by  C.  H.  Hitchcock  (xix,  63),  and 
Geol.  Survey  of  N.  H.,  iii,  p.  287  ;  also,  an  article  by  W.  M.  Davis,  Science, 
iv,  419. 

12 


162  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Kames,  therefore,  would  appear  to  be  intermediate  in  age 
between  the  time  of  the  deposition  of  the  till  or  ground  moraine 
and  the  age  of  the  terraces  and  marine  deposits.  Mr.  Upham  l 
regards  them  as  due  to  rivers  flowing  in  channels  formed  upon 
the  surface  of  the  ice  near  its  retreating  edge.  As  the  wall  of 
ice  on  either  side  disappeared  at  the  final  melting  of  the  ice  sheet, 
the  gravel  and  sand  remained  in  long  ridges  or  in  mounds.  He 
believes  that  kames  were  formed  at  or  near  the  mouths  of  these 
surface  streams,  extending  along  the  valley  as  fast  as  the  ice  front 
retreated. 

Prof.  G.  F.  Wright2  believes  that  in  many  cases  they  are  due 
to  the  sliding  down  from  the  surface  of  the  ice  of  morainic  debris 
accumulated  near  its  end,  so  that  they  may  represent  medial 
moraines.  He  shows  that  they  do  not  lie  in  channels  worn  in  the 
till,  and  that  very  often  they  are  unstratified,  and  thinks  that  the 
material  composing  them  may  have  first  formed  lines  upon  the  top 
of  the  ice.  But,  as  Prof.  Stone  has  shown,  it  is  only  among  the 
highlands  that  the  material  of  kames  are  poorly  stratified  ;  as 
soon  as  open  valleys  are  reached  the  materials  are  worn,  rounded 
and  stratified. 

Quite  recently  Prof.  T.  C.  Chamberlin,  of  the  U.  S.  Geological 
Survey,  in  an  important  paper  "  On  the  Terminal  Moraine  of  the 
Second  Glacial  Epoch,"3  proposes  to  separate  kames  from  "Asar," 
regarding  kames  proper  as  tranverse  to  the  slope  of  the  surface, 
the  course  of  the  valleys  and  the  direction  of  the  drift  move- 
ment,"4 while  the  term  asar  is  employed  to  designate  long  river- 
like ridges  of  gravel.  Asar  are  described  as  extending  "  from 
higher  to  lower  levels,  following  in  general  but  not  in  detail  the 
course  of  the  greater  valleys  and  the  direction  of  glacial  stria- 
tion."  As  stated  elsewhere,5  the}r  are  held  to  be  "  the  products 
of  the  drainage  system  of  practically  extinct  glaciers." 

This  is  practically  the  view  of  Professor  Stone,  and  of  other 
recent  workers  in  this  field,  as  it  is  that  of  the  present  writer. 
Moraines  are  the  product  of  the  advance  of  the  ice-sheet,  osars 

1  Geol.  of  N.  II.,  vol.  3,  pp.  14-176. 

2  Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  xx,  219. 

3  Third  An.  Rep.  U.  S.  Gcol.  Surv.,  p.  295,  etc. 

4  Loc.  cit.,  p.  300. 

5  Amer.  Jour.  Sc.,  xxvii,  378. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  163 

and  kames  of  its  retreat.  If  the  distinction  between  osars  and 
kames  be  sustained,  the  deposits  described  in  the  present  paper 
might  more  properly  be  called  "  marginal  osars."  In  many 
characters,  however,  they  are  intermediate  between  osars  and 
kames  as  defined  by  Professor  Chamberlin. 

Kames  are  shown  by  the  same  authority  to  be  composed  of 
material  derived  from  the  adjacent  till,  and  of  loeal  derivation, 
and  from  a  study  of  their  topographical  situations  and  other 
features,  the  just  conclusion  is  drawn  1  "that  these  hills  could 
not  have  been  produced  by  any  form  of  beach  action,  whether 
assisted  by  ice  or  not,"  but  that  "  they  were  formed  along  the 
edge  of  the  ice-sheet  by  numerous  marginal  streams." 

Prof.  Chamberlin  makes  these  kames  "associates  if  not  con- 
stituents of  terminal  moraines  ;  "  and  classes  them  among  moraine 
deposits.  He  says,2  "  It  is  my  belief  that  they  were  due  to 
special  aqueous  action  attending  glacial  advances  in  such  close 
relationship  that  they  become  distinctive  incidental  products, 
and  mark  the  position  of  halt  and  retreat,  as  characteristically 
as  the  true  moraines  of  mechanical  origin  themselves,  which  they 
so  often  overlie  and  conceal." 

He  therefore  regards  certain  stratified  knob-like  hills  of  gravel 
in  western  and  central  New  York  State  as  representing  a  true 
terminal  moraine  of  the  second  glacial  epoch,  and  he  has  traced 
such  a  kame-moraine  from  Chautauqua  Lake  to  the  Mohawk  and 
Catskills.  These  lines  of  hills  he  regards  as  representing  the 
boundary  of  the  great  ice  sheet  at  the  period  of  its  longest  halt. 
He  says  that  this  inner  morainic  belt  is  "  more  massive  and 
pronounced  in  development  than  the  moraine  referred  to  the  older 
epoch,"3  and  "that  its  surface  is  fresher  and  less  subdued  by 
meteoric  modification." 

Granting  that  the  line  of  kames  so  carefully  traced  out  by 
Professor  Chamberlin  is  correctly  interpreted  as  representing  a 
halt  in  the  retreating  ice-sheet,  the  present  writer  holds  that,  on 
account  of  their  stratified  character,  such  gravel  deposits  should 
not  be  identified  with  the  unstratified  masses  of  glacier-made  till 
which  constitute  the  true  terminal  moraine.     The  one  is  due  to 

1  Loc.  cit.,  p.  387. 

2  Third  An.  Rep.  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.,  p.  376. 

3  Loc.  cit.,  p.  340. 


164  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

water  action,  the  other  to  ice  action.  The  term  lame-moraine  is, 
in  the  opinion  of  the  writer,  a  more  appropriate  name  for  such 
deposits  than  terminal  mox-aine,  which  latter  term  would  then  be 
kept  to  designate  the  extreme  outer  mass  of  debris  pushed  out 
or  dropped  by  the  glacier  at  the  time  of  its  farthest  extension. 

That  kames  may  be  associated  with  the  terminal  moraine,  is  a 
fact  which  the  writer  will  endeavor  still  further  to  demonstrate. 
But  that  they  are  distinct  from  it  in  structure,  origin,  and  signifi- 
cance, will,  it  is  believed,  be  granted  after  a  careful  consideration 
of  the  facts  observed  in  Pennsylvania. 

Marginal  Kames  in  Pennsylvania. — That  the  terminal  moraine 
separating  the  glaciated  from  the  non-glaciated  district  has, 
throughout  the  greater  part  of  its  course  in  Pennsylvania  (Plate 
III),  an  essentially  unstratified  character,  has  been  sufficiently 
demonstrated  in  the  author's  report  describing  it.1 

It  has  been  shown  that  even  where  crossing  river-valleys  its 
unstratified  condition  is  maintained;  as,  for  example,  opposite 
Belvidere  in  the  Delaware,  and  at  Beach  Haven  on  the  Susque- 
hanna, at  both  of  which  places  it  is  clearly  distinguished  from 
the  stratified  material  lapping  up  against  it.  But  immediately 
back  of  the  moraine  there  occur  in  many  places  other  stratified 
deposits,  which,  although  similar  in  contour  to  the  moraine 
proper,  are  worthy  of  separate  consideration. 

The  class  of  kames  which  it  is  now  proposed  to  describe,  have, 
the  writer  believes,  not  heretofore  been  recognized  in  their  true 
significance.  These  are  either  directly  connected  and  continuous 
with  the  terminal  moraine  in  Pennsylvania,  or  they  are  in  such 
close  proximity  to  it  that  they  may  properly  be  known  as 
marginal  kames.  This  term  is  given  in  order  to  distinguish 
them  from  longer  kames  or  osars  which  may  have  no  relation  to 
the  margin  of  the  ice-sheet.  None  of  them  are  transverse  to  the 
motion  of  the  glacier,  like  a  moraine,  unless  the  drainage  makes 
them  so,  and  in  this  respect  they  do  not  answer  to  the  definition 
of  a  kame  given  by  Prof.  Chamberlin,  but  have  distinct  characters 
of  their  own.  They  are  all  short,  from  a  few  hundred  feet  to  a 
few  miles  in  length,  and  they  all  follow  the  direction  of  the 
drainage.  They  have  a  general  downward  slope,  and  all  lead 
toward  a  river-valley  or  other  water-course.  All  those  observed 
are  made  of  water-worn  materials,  and  where  sections  can  be 

1  Report  Z,  Second  Geological  Survey  of  Penna. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF  PHILADELPHIA.  105 

obtained  show  an  anticlinal  structure  within.  As  already  stated, 
their  materials  are  finer  in  the  interior,  and  most  coarse  in  the 
exterior,  and  sometimes,  though  rarely,  large  boulders  lie  on  the 
surface.  The  comparative  shortness  of  their  courses  distin- 
guish them  from  the  long  river-like  osars.  Their  origin  and 
significance  can  best  be  appreciated  after  a  description  of  a  few 
of  them  in  detail.  The  accompanjnng  map  gives  their  general 
position  with  regard  to  the  terminal  moraine. 

There  are  three  kames  in  Northampton  County,  Pa.,  which  are 
especially  instructive.  The  most  prominent  of  these  is  that 
which  traverses  the  centre  of  Mt.  Bethel  Township  in  a  north- 
east direction,  follows  approximately  the  valley  of  Jacobus 
Creek,  and  ends  upon  the  banks  of  the  Delaware  at  Portland.1 

This  kame,  which  has  been  mistaken  for  the  terminal  moraine,2 
is  composed  of  a  series  of  interlacing  ridges  and  hummocks, 
often  enclosing  kettle-holes,  and  formed  of  stratified  sand  and 
water-worn  gravel,  carrying  occasional  rounded  boulders  upon 
the  surface. 

The  town  of  Portland  is  built  upon  the  kame,  which  here  rises 
100  or  more  feet  above  the  river,  forming  a  prominent  hill.  Some 
fine  railroad  cuts,  through  several  ridges  of  the  kame,  2^  miles 
from  Portland,  show  it  to  consist  of  a  stratified  sand  overlaid  b}T 
a  boulder-bearing  clay,  or  till,  as  though  it  had  been  formed  by 
running  water  beneath  the  ice,  which  on  melting  dropped  the  till. 
At  this  place,  one  mile  southeast  of  Roxborough  ( Johnsonville 
P.  0.),  the  kame  is  composed  of  a  series  of  reticulated  ridges, 
enclosing  typical  kettle-holes.  One  of  these,  known  locally  as 
the  devil's  kettle,  and  supposed  by  some  to  be  an  old  Indian  fort, 
is  a  symmetrical  oval  depression,  surrounded  by  a  raised  rim,  300 
feet  long  by  200  wide,  and  30  deep.  Like  most  kettle-holes,  it 
has  its  longer  axis  parallel  to  the  direction  of  the  kame  in  which 
it  lies.  In  the  same  neighborhood,  similar  rounded  shallow  depres- 
sions, with  neither  inlet  nor  outlet,  lie  upon  the  very  summit  of 
sandy  ridges  100  feet  above  the  level  of  the  surrounding  country. 

These  kettle-holes  do  not  appear  to  be  the  result  of  natural 
erosion,  and  they  are  in  no  way  allied  to  ordinary  valleys  or 
ravines,  produced  by  the  action  of  running  water.     The  instruc- 

1  See  Page  Plates  8  and  9,  in  Report  Z,  pp.  53,  68. 

2  F.  Prime,  Proc.  Amer.  Phil,  Soc,  xviii,  85. 


166  PROCEEDINGS  OP   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

tive  fact  that  a  raised  rim  frequently  completely  surrounds  the 
kettle-hole,  so  as  to  elevate  it  above  the  surrounding  country,  is 
conclusive  against  any  theory  of  ordinary  erosion.  In  fact,  the 
comparative  absence  of  erosion,  is  one  of  the  most  remarkable 
facts  relating  to  kames  and  their  kettle-holes. 

The  kame  here  described  is  confined  to  the  valley  of  Jacobus 
Creek.  The  high  hills  on  the  south  are  sprinkled  with  boulders, 
but  hold  no  deposits  of  stratified  drift. 

The  length  of  the  kame  is  five  miles.  Its  general  elevation 
near  Johnsonville  is  600  feet  above  the  sea,  or  300  feet  above  the 
Delaware  River  at  Portland  ;  giving  a  northeastward  slope  to 
the  kame  of  nearly  100  feet  to  the  mile.  It  seems  to  have  been 
caused  by  a  stream,  probably  subglacial,  draining  backwards  into 
the  Delaware  River  at  Portland.  The  direction  taken  by  the 
stream  producing  the  kame  was  just  contrary  to  the  direction  of 
ice-flow,  which  was  southeast.  This  kame  is  a  good  example  of 
a  backward-draining  marginal  kame. 

Another  locality  which  throws  light  on  the  origin  of  kames  is 
in  Upper  Mount  Bethel  township,  close  to  the  base  of  the 
Kittatinny  Mountain,  and  about  a  mile  east  of  the  moraine. 

Here,  on  the  road  to  the  Fox  Gap,  a  number  of  small,  rounded, 
hummocky  drift  hills,  and  a  series  of  ridges,  irregularly  inter- 
laced with  each  other,  composed  of  sandy  water-worn  drift 
within,  but  bearing  upon  their  surface  many  boulders,  form  a 
fine  series  of  small  kames.  These  kames  are  not  straight ;  they 
follow  a  curved  line  around  Offset  Knob. 

Close  to  the  flank  of  the  mountain  they  bear  south  20°  west ; 
somewhat  lower  and  farther  from  the  mountain,  they  bear  south 
30°  west;  still  farther  down  the  road,  they  veer  yet  more  south- 
west. They  seem  to  represent  streams  which,  descending  from 
the  melting  ice  on  the  mountain,  flowed  at  first  southward,  and 
then  westward  around  Offset  Knob,  and,  after  issuing  from  the 
end  of  the  glacier,  emptied  into  the  deeply  flooded  valley  of 
Bushkill  Creek,  in  Plainfield  township. 

Immediately  north  of  these  kames,  a  great  accumulation  of 
till  and  boulders  forms  a  high  ridge  upon  the  side  of  the 
mountain.  Most  of  the  boulders  are  of  Medina  sandstone,  but 
occasional  boulders  of  limestone,  and  of  fossiliferous  rocks 
1  in  (light  from  the  valley  on  the  other  side  of  the  mountain,  are 
found.     This  accumulation  at  a  higher  elevation  than  the  series 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  1G7 

of  karaes  represents  the  portion  of  the  glacier  whose  melting 
supplied  the  kame  streams.  These  small  kames  represented  an 
outward  drainage. 

There  are  two  curious  little  kames  immediately  south  of 
Ackermanville,  in  Washington  Township,  Northampton  Count}', 
which,  though  but  miniature  examples,  have  all  the  characters  of 
larger  kames,  and  offer  a  suggestion  as  to  their  origin. 

Two  small,  straight,  narrow  ridges  of  stratified  drift,  15  feet 
high  and  about  100  feet  long,  may  be  seen  just  below  the  village, 
running  nearly  at  right-angles  to  the  valley  of  the  west  branch 
of  Martin's  Creek.  Both  of  these  ridges  run  from  the  base  of  a 
hill  west  of  the  creek  toward  the  stream,  their  direction  being 
south  75°  east;  and  west  of  each  of  them  there  is  an  opening  in 
the  hill,  near  the  summit  of  which  the  moraine  lies.1 

Upon  examining  the  structure  of  these  ridges,  as  exposed  by 
transverse  cuts  made  by  the  railroad,  they  are  found  to  be  com- 
posed of  fine  stratified  sand  within  and  gravel  without.  The 
sand  shows  flow-and-plunge  stratification,  with  a  distinct  anti- 
clinal structure. 

Here  again  the  only  satisfactory  explanation  is  that  they  are 
due  to  subglacial  streams  which  drained  the  melting  edge  of  the 
glacier  on  the  hillside  backward  into  the  subglacial  valley,  now 
occupied  by  the  west  branch  of  Martin's  Creek.  They  are  here 
at  an  elevation  of  500  feet  above  the  sea  and  about  190  feet  below 
the  edge  of  the  moraine  and  are  beautiful  examples  of  miniature 
kames.  An  important  point  to  note  is  that  on  placing  the  eye 
along  the  crest  of  each  of  these  they  are  seen  to  be  opposite  small 
depressions  in  the  hill  on  which  the  moraine  rests.  They  are  thus 
in  precisely  the  position  that  would  be  occupied  by  the  natural 
drainage  of  the  edge  of  the  ice-sheet. 

The  most  interesting  of  all  the  kames  of  Monroe  County  are 
the  curious  conical  hills  and  short  ridges  of  sandy  drift  which  lie 
along  the  centre  of  Cheny  Yalley,  between  the  moraine  and  the 
Delaware  River.  A  remarkable  series  of  conical  hills  of  peculiar 
and  characteristic  topography  either  stand  singly,  or  (more  gene- 
rally) are  connected  one  with  another  by  irregular  banks  of 
gravel,  to  form  a  series  parallel  with  the  valley. 

Near  the  Delaware  Water  Gap  these  hills  rise  often  over  200 
feet  above  the  river,  and  often  inclose  basin-shaped  depressions 

1  See  sketch-map  in  Report  Z,  p.  34. 


108  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

or  kettle-holes.  They  are  most  abundant  between  Storm ville  and 
the  river.  Where  the  valley  widens,  just  east  of  Stormville,  two 
sets  of  kame-like  ridges  on  either  side  of  the  valley  have  the  form 
of  a  V. 

Short  tributary  kames,  whose  axes  are  at  right-angles  to  the 
main  kame  in  the  valley,  appear  opposite  ravines  or  depressions 
in  the  hills  bordering  the  valley. 

A  buried  kame  lies  along  the  north  and  south  valley  of  Broad- 
head's  Creek,  almost  completely  covered  by  subsequent  deposits 
of  terrace  material.  The  top  of  the  kame  stands  out  of  the  level 
terrace  plain  which  borders  the  creek  at  Stroudsburg  and  vicinity. 
A  fine  section  of  the  buried  kame  at  Stroudsburg  shows  its 
anticlinal  structure  and  a.  fault  in  it  caused  by  settling. 

Another  most  interesting  buried  kame  is  in  the  valley  of  Mc- 
Michael's  Creek,  in  Hamilton  Township,  where  the  top  of  the 
kame  appears  through  the  sand}'  terrace  plain  which  covers  the 
valley.  The  kame  runs  along  the  centre  of  the  valley  while  the 
creek  wanders  irregularly  through  it.  The  kames  are  clear]}' 
older  than  the  terrace  material. 

Of  the  other  kames  and  kame-like  ridges  of  Monroe  County, 
reference  onby  need  here  be  made  to  certain  kames  upon  the  sum- 
mit of  the  Pocono  plateau,  which  are  of  interest  in  draining 
northward ;  of  these  there  may  be  mentioned  the  steep,  sharp 
ridges  of  sand  near  Tompkinsville,  Tolyhanna  Township,  which 
run  toward  lower  ground  northward,  thus  draining  the  glacial 
waters  toward  the  Lehigh.  These  are  immediately  back  of  the 
terminal  moraine. 

Again,  just  west  of  the  Lehigh  River,  and  immediately  north 
of  the  moraine,  there  appear  kame-like  ridges  of  sand  and  gravel 
in  small  valleys  emptying  into  the  Lehigh.  These  are  parallel 
to  the  moraine,  and  are  so  simply  because  the  drainage  is  here 
south  of  east,  while  the  moraine  trends  to  the  northwest. 

Below  Scranton,  on  the  Lackawanna  River,  and  also  on  the 
Susquehanna,  are  long  ridges  of  stratified  sandy  material,  which 
are  quite  distinct  from  the  terrace  deposits  of  those  rivers,  and 
which  appear  to  be  portions  of  a  kame  similar  to  that  described 
by  Mr.  Upham  on  the  Connecticut  River,  and  of  similar  origin. 
These  cannot  be  classed  among  the  marginal  kames. 

In  "  Pope  Hollow,"  close  to  the  line  between  South  Valley 
township,   Cattaraugus    County,   and    Carroll   township,    Chau- 


1885.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  169 

tauqua  County,  N.  Y.,  and  resting  upon  the  water-shed  between 
Pope  Run  (a  tributary  of  the  Allegheny)  and  Case  Run  (a  tribu- 
tary of  the  Conewango),  the  moraine  is  finely  shown  as  a  ridge 
of  till,  which,  stretching  completely  across  the  valley,  and 
covered  by  numerous  boulders  of  gneiss,  rises  upon  the 
highlands  on  either  side.  The  moraine  ridge  here,  as  in  other 
places,  is  most  prominent  behind  or  toward  the  west. 

A  very  small  marginal  kame  runs  westward  and  down-hill 
from  the  back  of  the  moraine,  in  Chautauqua  County,  as  though 
a  subglacial  stream  had  drained  the  moraine  backward,  into  the 
valley  of  the  Conewango.  The  moraine  itself  is  apparently 
unstratified,  and  no  drift  was  noticed  in  front  (E.)  of  it.  Its 
only  drainage,  therefore,  must  have  been  backward,  into  the 
Conewango. 

An  interesting  double  kame,  consisting  of  two  ridges  of  sand 
united  into  one,  the  double  anticlinals  being  exposed,  was 
observer  by  the  writer  in  Mercer  County.1  It  is  probably  not 
a  true  marginal  kame. 

An  examination  of  the  marginal  kames,  of  which  sufficient 
examples  have  now  been  given,  leads,  as  has  been  seen,  to  the 
conclusion  that  they  were  made  b}r  subglacial  streams  draining 
the  edge  of  the  ice-sheet.  The  occasional  boulders  and  till  on 
top  of,  but  not  in,  these  kames  argue  a  subglacial  origin,  the 
boulders  and  till  having  been  dropped  by  the  retreating  glacier 
on  the  kames :  while  the  position  and  direction  of  each  of  the 
kames  described  is  just  such  as  would  be  taken  by  streams 
flowing  beneath  the  ice-sheet.  Among  the  facts  ascertained  with 
regard  to  marginal  kames  are  their  water-worn  and  stratified 
character  ;  their  rude  anticlinal  structure,  often  of  finer  sand 
within  than  without ;  the  presence  of  occasional  boulders  and 
even  till  on  top  of  them  ;  the  absence  of  any  fixed  relation  to  the 
movement  of  the  glacier ;  the  genei'al  coincidence  of  their 
course  with  that  of  the  natural  drainage  ;  the  total  absence  of 
shells,  driftwood,  beach-marks,  or  other  indications  of  the  action 
of  ocean  currents,  waves  or  tides  ;  their  intimate  connection  with 
the  terminal  moraine  in  such  positions  as  to  indicate  a  backward, 
as  well  as  a  forward  subglacial  drainage. 

These  kames  are  very  different  from  those  tongues  of  stratified 
drift  which  often  occur  in  or  near  the  glaciated  region  at  the 

1  Report  Z,  p.  191. 


170  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

junction  of  two  streams  (ancient  or  modern).  These  deposits  do 
not  show  an  anticlinal  structure,  and  instead  of  occurring  in  the 
centre  of  a  valley,  are  seen  at  points  where  an  eddy  in  the  drift- 
laden  waters,  or  more  commonly  the  shelter  of  a  projecting  rock, 
has  allowed  them  to  be  formed.  They  may  be  termed  eddy-ridges 
or  terrace-deltas,  and  are  clearly  of  entirely  different  origin  from 
kames.  The  writer  has  seen  a  number  of  such  ridges  in  northern 
Pennsylvania,  and  there  is  little  difficulty  in  distinguishing  them 
from  kames. 

That  stratified  deposits  ma}'  exist  beneath  a  glacier,  undisturbed 
by  the  weight  or  motion  of  the  ice,  has  been  shown  by  observa- 
tion at  the  base  of  the  Swiss  glaciers.  Among  the  most  interesting 
of  these  observations,  because  so  well  correlated  with  the  phe- 
nomena of  the  American  ice  sheet,  are  those  of  Prof.  Chamberlin, 
made  at  the  base  of  the  Rhone  glacier.  He  remarks  :J  "At  other 
points,  near  the  centre  of  the  valley,  the  ice  may  be  seen  resting 
directly  upon  well-assorted  stratified  sand  and  gravel.  Level 
sheets  of  fine  detrital  matter  extend  without  disturbance  of  con- 
tinuit}r  or  surface  beneath  the  edge  of  the  glacier.  The  assorting 
and  stratification  of  this  material  was  apparently  accomplished 
by  subglacial  streams,  which  seem  afterwards  to  have  found 
other  avenues,  when  the  ice  occupied  their  place  either  by 
settling  down  from  above,  or  advancing  from  behind.  The 
singular  fact  is  that  the  stratified  sands  should  not  have  been 
disturbed." 

The  similarity  between  the  contours  of  kames  and  of  moraines 
is  accounted  for  on  the  supposition  that  both  were  moulded 
beneath  the  ice  sheet.  While  the  moraine  shows  the  edge  of  the 
glacier,  the  kames  indicate  the  direction  of  its  drainage.  Flat 
terrace  plains,  such  as  that  at  Berwick,  on  the  Susquehanna, 
are  made  by  floods  issuing  from  the  front  of  the  glacier,  but  when 
the  drainage  was  subglacial,  whether  forward  or  backward,  kames 
are  the  result. 

Siil>glacial  Drainage. — The  most  important  conclusion  arrived 
at  by  a  study  of  the  backward-draining  marginal  kames  is  that 
of  a  great  subglacial  drainage.  The  same  conclusion  is  drawn 
from  observations  on  the  terminal  moraine  itself,  which  in  many 
places  shows  evidence  of  having  been  drained  northward,  not 
southward.     Many  sucli  instances  might  be  described. 

1  Wis.  Geol.  Survey  Report  for  1878,  p.  17. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  171 

On  the  high  mountain  plateau  of  Potter  County,  Pa.,  for 
example,  at  an  elevation  of  2500  feet,  although  the  Allegheny 
River  flowed  at  the  very  foot  of  the  glacier,  there  is  no  drift  in 
the  valley  of  the  river,  and  no  indication  of  any  drainage  to  the 
south  ;  while  north  of  the  moraine  the  whole  country  is  covered 
with  clays,  terrace  plains,  kames  and  ever}'  indication  of  the 
presence  of  both  ice  and  water. 

Again,  in  Columbia  County,  Pa.,  although  Fishing  Creek  flows 
in  front  of  the  edge  of  the  ice  sheet  which  once  rested  on  its 
eastern  bank,  there  are  no  gravel  deposits  in  the  creek ;  while 
immediately  back  of  the  moraine  we  find  them  in  great  quantities, 
leading  around  to  another  outlet. 

So  on  the  Pocono  plateau,  in  Carbon  Co.,  the  drainage  was 
reversed ;  while  in  Northampton  County,  and  Monroe  County  it 
was  clearly  in  both  directions,  outward  and  inward. 

The  writer  has  adduced  evidence  that  the  Allegheny  River, 
near  Olean,  N.  Y.,  flowed  into  the  glacier  and  out  of  it  again  in 
the  same  channel  that  it  now  occupies  ;  flowing  in  a  subglacial 
channel  through  or  under  a  tongue  of  ice  ten  miles  broad  by  two 
miles  long.1 

Everj^where  there  are  indications  of  a  great  subglacial  drainage. 
The  observations  of  other  geologists,  especially  of  Prof.  New- 
berry, in  Ohio,  lead  to  the  same  conclusion.  Studies  among 
modern  glaciers  confirm  these  interpretations  of  glacial  phe- 
nomena. 

Prof.  Nordenskiold  described  the  "  large  and  swift  rivers," 
plunging  from  the  surface  into  profound  crevasses  of  the  Green- 
land ice-sheet,  and  Dr.  Rink  speaks  of  the  copious  subglacial 
streams  which  flow  out  from  under  the  Greenland  ice. 

From  beneath  the  Muir  glacier  of  Alaska,2  there  issues  a  sub- 
glacial stream  100  feet  wide,  and  4  feet  in  average  depth,  the  flow 
being  the  same  winter  and  summer.  Prof.  Dana  3  has  rightly 
assumed  that  the  ice  sheet  of  North  America  would  have  had 
"  subglacial  streams  as  much  more  extensive  than  those  of  Green- 
land, as  the  precipitation  was  more  copious  and  the  drainage 
areas  larger." 

Much  of  the  boulder  clay  and  till  throughout  the  lower  por- 

1  Report  Z,  p.  154. 

2  Meehan,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sc.  Phila.,  1883,  p.  249. 

3  Am.  Jour.  Sc,  xxii,  p.  366,  1882. 


172  PROCEEDINGS    OP   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

tions  of  both  the  United  States  and  Canada,  shows  evident 
aqueous  action,  not  onty  subsequently  to,  but  during  its  depo- 
sition. 

The  great  lake  basins,  and  the  St.  Lawrence  Valley,  receiving 
subglacial  streams  from  south  as  well  as  from  north,  may  have 
been  flooded  with  water  while  the  ice  still  covered  them. 

Important  deductions  regarding  the  physical  condition  of  the 
lowlands  while  covered  by  the  glacier,  and  of  the  origin  of  certain 
aqueous  varieties  of  till  might  be  drawn  from  a  further  consider- 
ation of  this  subglacial  drainage.  The  method  of  movement  of 
a  great  glacier,  a  problem  not  yet  fully  understood,  is  also  largety 
dependent  upon  the  presence  or  absence  of  water  beneath  the  ice. 

The  northward-draining  marginal  kames  are  undoubtedly  but 
an  insignificant  portion  of  the  widespread  deposits  made  by  the 
subglacial  drainage  which  they  indicate. 

Since  this  paper  was  read  at  Montreal,  Mr.  J.  H.  Kinahan,  of  Dublin, 
who  was  present  when  the  paper  was  read,  has,  in  an  article  entitled  "On 
the  use  of  the  term  Esker  or  Kam  Drift"  (Amer.  Journ.  Science,  xxix,  188o, 
p.  135),  criticized  the  pronunciation  and  use  of  the  word  kame  by  Ameri- 
can geologists;  while  at  the  same  time  reaffirming  his  belief  that  "true 
eskeror  kam  drift"  is  "due  to  currents  and  eddies  generated  by  the  meeting 
or  colliding  of  two  or  more  currents  in  a  mass  of  water,  such  as  that  of  a 
sea  or  large  lake."  He  argues  that  because  of  an  ancient  Celtic  word 
"cam"  or  "kam"  meaning  crooked  or  winding,  we  should  pronounce  the 
word  kame  short,  as  if  spelled  cam. 

It  is  not  probable  that  American  geologists  will  adopt  this  short  pronun- 
ciation. The  word  has  long  been  pronounced  kame  both  in  England  and 
Scotland,  and  in  tin;  latter  country  is  often  spelled  kaim.  Indeed  Mr.  Kina- 
han himself  formerly  used  this  spelling,  and  therefore  also,  the  long  pro- 
nunciation. (See  his  article  "  On  the  Drift  in  Ireland,"  Journ,  Hoy.  Geol. 
Soc.  Ireland,  vol.  i,  p.  200,  where  he  speaks  of  "eskers  or  kaim$.'n) 

The  now  antiquated  idea  that  eskers  and  kames  are  due  to  oceanic  or 
lacustrine  currents  has  naturally  enough  been  held  in  Ireland,  where  the 
land  often  lies  but  little  above  ocean  level,  but  such  a  theory  is  untenable 
in  America.  Mr.  Kinahan  himself  says,  that  the  marginal  kames  of 
America  must  lie  quite  different  from  the  Irish  eskers,  and  ventures  the 
explanation  that  "there  were  at  times  'flashes'  or  areas  of  shallow  water 
accumulated  margining  the  faces,  portions  of  which  were  still  water,  while 
in  other  portions  there  were  currents  ;  or  it  might  have  been  a  mass  of  snow 
margining  a  narrow  flash  of  flowing  water.''  This  explanation,  like  one 
held  by  Sir  William  Dawson  (Proc.  Amer.  Assoc.  Adv.  Sci.,  xxxii,  1884, 
p.  35),  that  the  terminal  moraine  simply  marks  the  "limit  of  the  deep 
water  of  a  glacial  sea,"  would  probably  be  greatly  modified  had  those  geolo- 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  173 

gists  the  opportunity  of  studying  in  the  field  the  margin  of  the  glaciated 
area  of  Pennsylvania. 

How  could  any  area  of  water,  still  or  flowing,  accumulate  along  the 
margin  of  an  ice  sheet  which  rests  against  an  upward  slope,  as  it  so  often 
does  in  this  State?  And  if  such  areas  of  water  did  exist  south  of  the 
moraine,  why  have  not  some  relics  of  such  a  body  of  water  been  left  in  the 
shape  of  sand,  gravel  or  clay?  There  is  no  fact  in  relation  to  glaciation 
more  sat:sfactorily  determined  in  the  writer's  "Report  on  the  Terminal 
Moraine"  than  the  absence  of  any  body  of  water,  deep  or  shallow,  in 
front  of  the  moraine.  This  unexpected  fact  is  clearly  shown  by  the  entire 
absence  of  drift  south  of  the  moraine  except  in  river  valleys  (the  narrow 
glacial  "fringe,"  elsewhere  described,  is  excepted).  While  kames  and 
many  other  deposits  made  by  melting  ice  abound  immediately  back  of  the 
moraine,  all  these  stop  abruptly  at  the  moraine,  and  the  line  of  demarka- 
tion  is  at  times  so  sharp  that  "it  is  almost  possible  to  stand  with  one  foot 
upon  the  glaciated  and  the  other  upon  the  non-glaciated  ground  "  (Second 
Geol.  Surv.  of  Pa.,  Z,  p.  103). 

The  study  of  glacial  phenomena  is  in  a  much  more  advanced  stage  in 
America  than  it  is  in  Europe.  To  the  smaller  areas  studied,  and  to  the 
artificial  changes  which  have  modified  the  surface  deposits  of  the  Old 
World,  are  in  great  part  due  the  limited  views,  the  confusion  of  terms,  and 
the  contradictory  theories  which  characterize  much  of  the  very  voluminous 
literature  of  the  glaciation  of  Europe.  No  better  field  for  the  prosecution 
of  glacial  studies  can  be  found  than  in  America,  where  single  deposits 
extend  for  thousands  of  miles  under  varying  conditions  of  mountain  and 
valley,  of  flood  plains  and  of  prairies,  and  where  in  many  places  they  stand 
to-day  almost  in  the  form  in  which  they  were  originally  made,  untouched 
by  the  hand  of  man,  and  gently  dealt  with  by  that  of  time. 


174  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY    OP  [1885. 


DESCRIPTIONS  OF  NEW  SPECIES  OF  LEPIDOPTERA. 

BY  HERMAN  STRECKER. 
Papilio  Nezahualcoyotl. 

S  expands  3  to  3^  inches.  Head  and  body  of  same  color, 
and  marked  as  in  the  ordinary  Philenor ;  all  the  wings  broader, 
and  not  nearly  as  elongate  as  in  that  species,  and  the  secondaries 
without  tails. 

Upper  surface.  Primaries  blackish  brown,  with  a  dark  blue 
shimmer  towards  the  inner  angle  ;  a  submarginal  transverse  row 
of  five  white  spots,  the  first  which  is  between  the  discoidal  ner- 
vules  is  much  the  smallest,  the  next  three  are  of  nearly  uniform 
size,  and  the  last  one,  between  the  last  median  nervule  and  the 
submedian  nervure,  is  geminate.  Fringe  near  the  apex  black, 
from  thence  to  the  lower  discoidal  nervule  black  and  white 
alternately,  and  from  the  latter  to  inner  angle  white,  with  black 
only  at  the  termination  of  the  veins. 

Secondaries  dark  shining  blue,  with  a  submarginal  row  of  six 
large  white  more  or  less  lunate  spots,  the  one  at  anal  angle 
narrow,  and  much  the  smallest.  Fringe  of  marginal  indenta- 
tions white ;  at  termination  of  veins  bluish  black. 

Under  surface.  Primaries  paler  than  above,  markings  the 
same. 

Secondaries  after  the  manner  of  Philenor,  but  the  brown  of 
basal  half  extending  over  greater  area ;  the  continuous  submar- 
ginal band  of  large  spots  of  a  deeper  orange,  more  inclined  to  a 
red  or  brick-color. 

From  New  Mexico,  close  to  the  Mexican  border. 

This  insect  bears  about  the  same  relation  to  the  true  Philenor 
that  Hospiton  does  to  Machaon,  or  Anticostiensis  to  Asterius, 
though  in  neither  of  the  latter  is  there  that  almost  total  obso- 
lescence of  the  wing-tails  that  so  remarkably  distinguishes  the 
present  form.  It  would  be  curious  to  know  by  what  process 
nature  has  effected  this  abortion  of  the  caudal  appendages,  and 
why  it  should  occur  in  an  exceedingly  limited  extent  of 
territory. 

All  the  examples  of  Philenor  which  I  have  seen  from  Cali- 
fornia have  short  tails  to  the  wings,  not  much  over  half  the 
length  of  eastern  examples,  and  often  much  less  ;    in  the  Cali- 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  175 

fornian  examples  the  wings  are  also  broader  than  in  the  eastern 
ones,  but  there  is  not  that  wide  aberrancy  that  marks  in  a 
moment  the  above-described  New  Mexican  form. 

The  largest  examples  of  Philenor  that  I  have  seen  were  from 
Ohio,  Pennsylvania  and  New  York,  whilst  the  smallest  were 
from  Georgia,  and  especially  Florida,  where,  to  the  contrary, 
another  of  our  species,  the  well-known  Tarnus,  is  found  of 
large  and  frequently  enormous  size.  The  Californian  examples 
of  Philenor  are  small,  or,  at  most,  only  of  medium  size. 

Papilio  Cleombrotus. 

Expands  3  j  inches.  Head  and  body  black ;  on  head  are  two 
obscure  yellowish  spots,  two  more  on  the  collar,  and  one  on 
each  shoulder.     Abdomen  with  yellow  lateral  stripes. 

Primaries  narrow. 

Upper  surface  black,  with  greenish  blue  sheen  on  basal  third ; 
a  large  yellow  central  spot,  partly  within  the  median  cell,  and 
partly  outside  the  median  nervure.  Fringes  on  upper  half 
outer  margin  black,  on  inner  half  black  and  white. 

Secondaries  rounded  outwardly,  outer  margin  dentated.  Deep 
shining  greenish  blue,  except  along  the  costa,  where  the  blue 
shades  into  or  is  replaced  by  black ;  a  row  of  small  white  sub- 
marginal  lunules  ;  dentations  narrowly  fringed  with  white. 

Under  surface.  Primaries  uniform  dark  chestnut-brown,  with 
the  yellow  central  spot  of  upper  side  repeated. 

Secondaries  same  brown  as  primaries,  with  the  same  small 
white  submarginal  lunules  of  upper  surface  ;  above  each  of  these 
latter  is  a  crimson  more  or  less  lunate  spot,  the  one  near  the  anal 
angle  very  much  larger  than  the  others  ;  at  the  base  of  wing  three 
crimson  spots  placed  one  at  shoulder,  one  within  base  of  discoidal 
cell,  and  one  between  the  median  vein  and  inner  margin ;  this 
latter  is  the  largest,  and  is  sagittate  in  shape. 

From  the  condition  of  the  abdomen  I  am  unable  to  decide  as 
to  the  sex  of  the  single  example  on  which  the  above  description 
was  based. 

Hab. — Amaz.  Sup. 

This  insect  is  closely  allied  to  Pausanias  Hew.,  but  differs 
decidedly  from  it  in  the  following  particulars :  In  the  entire 
absence  of  the  large  pale  semitransparent  apical  patch,  and  in 
the  fringe  of  inner  half  of  outer  margin  being  white  and  black 


176  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

instead  of  black  only  as  in  its  analogue.  In  the  much  greater 
length  of  secondaries,  and  in  their  rounded  outer  margin,  which 
in  Pausanias  is  in  a  straight  line  from  anal  angle  to  apex.  In 
the  secondaries  being,  except  along  the  costa,  entirely  blue, 
whilst  in  the  other  species  that  color  is  confined  to  the  basal  half 
of  wing  only. 

On  the  underside  in  all  wings  being  uniform  dark  brown,  the 
primaries  being  devoid  of  the  paler  color  of  outer  margin  and 
apical  part,  as  well  as  of  the  two  or  three  small  yellowish  sub- 
marginal  spots  near  the  inner  angle,  and  in  the  secondaries  being 
without  the  alternating  pale  brown  rays  which  emanate  from  the 
submarginal  crimson  lunules  in  Pausanias,  as  well  as  in  the 
absence  of  the  crimson  line  which  in  the  latter  continues  from 
the  anal  lunule  along  the  median  nervure  to  base. 

Both  these  species  imitate  in  a  remarkable  manner  Heliconius 
Clytia,  but  the  mimicry  is  more  complete  in  Pausanias,  owing  to 
its  greater  length  of  fore-wing  and  narrowness  of  hind-wing. 

Of  the  last-named  species  I  have  seen  many  examples,  of  the 
present  described  only  the  single  type  now  before  me. 

Theorema  Titania. 

Expands  2  inches ;  form  of  T.  Eumenia. 

Upper  surface.  Primaries  black,  disc  and  base  covered  with 
dark  shining  greenish  scales ;  apex  tipped  with  a  paler  silvery 
green,  which  is  cut  with  white  hy  the  veins  at  and  near  their 
termination ;  a  black  marginal  line  succeeded  by  pure  white 
fringe. 

Secondaries  black  with  a  slight  powdering  of  shining  green 
atoms ;  a  fairly  broad  glittering  green  marginal  band  extending 
from  apex  where  it  is  narrowest  to  beyond  the  last  median 
nervulc  where  it  attains  its  greatest  width,  this  band  is  cut  by 
the  veins,  which  are  black,  and  is  separated  from  the  white  fringe 
by  a  black  line  ;  on  the  inner  margin  above  anal  angle  is  a  small 
white  spot.     Tail  black,  fringed  with  white. 

Under  surface.  All  wings  black.  Primaries  narrowly  mar- 
gined with  greenish  silver,  broadest  at  apex ;  fringe  white. 
Secondaries  with  three  parallel  rows  of  bluish  white  or  silvery 
spots;  those  nearest  the  margin  are  crescent-shape,  connected 
with  a  marginal  line  of  same  color;  in  the  next  row  they  are 
small,  and  with  the  exception  of  one,  which  is  lunate,  are  round 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  17  T 

or  oval ;  those  composing  the  innermost  row  are  smallest,  and 
slightly  and  somewhat  variously  lunate.     Fringe  white. 

From  one  example  taken  by  the  late  Prof.  Gabb  in  Costa  Rica, 
now  in  Mus.  Strecker. 

On  the  upper  side,  omitting  the  tails,  this  insect  bears  a  close 
resemblance  to  the  females  of  Eumeeus  Toxea  and  Minyas. 

There  is,  as  far  as  I  am  aware  of,  but  one  other  species  of  this 
genus  known,  T.  Eunomia  Hew.,1  from  New  Granada,  from  which 
the  one  here  described  is  entirely  distinct. 

Agrias  Amydon,  Hew.     9 

Expands  3j  inches.  Head  black  with  four  minute  white  spots 
above ;  palpi  }Tellowish  white.  Body  above  deep  ochraceous 
orange,  below  black  with  pale  spots  and  marks.  Wings,  pri- 
maries broader  than  in  the  male ;  exterior  margin  straight  until 
near  inner  and  outer  angles,  where  it  is  rounded. 

Upper  surface.  Primaries,  basal  half,  or  rather  more,  bright 
ochraceous,  deepening  in  tint  towards  the  base  ;  the  outer  part  of 
wing  black ;  this  latter  color  starts  at  the  inner  angle  and  extends 
across  in  an  arched  line  to  within  the  middle  of  costa,  forming  a 
large  triangular  patch,  which  covers  the  outer  part  of  the  wing; 
a  dash  or  an  abbreviated  band  of  black  extends  from  inner  angle 
along  inner  margin  to  over  half  its  length  ;  a  band  of  three  whitish 
yellow  spots  cross  the  black  color  towards  the  apex. 

Secondaries,  black  with  a  small  patch  of  deep  ochraceous  near 
the  base,  and  a  whitish  edging  at  the  apex. 

Under  side  of  all  wings  colored  and  marked  as  in  the  male,  with 
the  exception  of  the  ground-color  of  primaries,  which  is  ochre 
yellow  instead  of  red. 

Described  from  a  single  example  which  came  to  me  in  a  lot  of 
several  thousand  butterflies,  taken  at  or  near  Pebas,  on  the  Peru- 
vian Amazon. 

On  the  upper  side  this  insect  is  the  exact  counterpart  on  a 
gigantic  scale,  of  Gatagramma  Sinamara  Hew.,  and  (if  my  ex- 
ample, received  from  Mr.  Hewitson  be  that  species)  of  G.  Amazona 
Bates,  which  is. doubtless  the  9  of  G.  cynosura  Hew.,  and  further 
between  which  and  the  figure  of  G.  Sinamara  I  can  see  no  dif- 
ference. 


1  Hew.  111.  Diur.  Lep.,  p.  69,  t.  27,  figs.  1,  2  (1865). 
13 


178  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

As  far  as  they  are  known  the  females  of  the  red  species  of 
Agrias  mimic  in  an  extraordinary  manner  the  females  of  certain 
Catagrammas,  and  the  blue  ones  the  same  sex  in  some  of  the 
species  of  Callithea. 

Plusia  corusca. 

Size  and  shape  of  Mortuorum  Guen.  Head  and  body  pale 
brown,  inclining  to  ochrey  beneath- 
Upper  surface.  Primaries,  ground  color  brownish  pink ;  sinuate 
white  or  silvery  basal  and  transverse  anterior  lines  edged  irregu- 
larly with  deep  bronzy  brown  ;  a  transverse  posterior  line,  this 
latter  is  broken,  irregular,  of  exceeding  fineness,  and  edged  at 
intervals  with  deep  brown  ;  the  space  between  this  line  or  band 
and  the  transverse  anterior  line,  and  between  the  median  nervure 
and  inner  margin  is  a  deep  golden  or  coppery  bronze,  according 
to  the  light  in  which  it  is  seen,  the  same  shade  occupies  most 
of  the  space  between  the  submarginal,  which  is  pink  and  sinuate, 
and  the  transverse  posterior  line,  and  also  covers,  except  at  inner 
angle,  the  space  between  the  former  and  the  exterior  margin  ;  a 
large  and  very  distinct  gamma  mark  as  in  P.  gamma  L. 

Secondaries  brownish,  pale  and  ochraceous  at  basal  half,  and 
smoky  on  outer  half. 

Hab. — Colorado.     One  example,  Mus.  Strecker. 
Though  in  detail  the  markings  are  somewhat  different,  still  this 
insect  forcibly  reminds  one  of  P.  mortuorum,   were  the  silver 
ground  of  the  latter  to  be  replaced  by  coppery  bronze  the  resem- 
blance would  be  very  strong. 

Plusia  alterna. 

Expands  If  inches.  Allied  to  Ampla  Wlk.,  but  entirely  dis- 
tinct, all  wings  narrower  than  in  that  species,  and  primaries  not 
as  much  produced  at  inner  angle.  Head  and  thorax  light  ashen 
or  purplish  gray;  patagia?  with  broad, dark  brown  margin,  which 
color  forms  a  continuous  band  across  the  back.  Abdomen  light 
brown. 

Primaries  of  an  even,  shining  pale,  somewhat  purplish  gray,  and 
without  the  shading  and  clouding  of  outer  half  as  in  Ampla  ;  a 
large  dark  space  interior  to  the  median  nervure,  and  between  the 
transverse  anterior  and  posterior  lines,  this  space  is  a  dark  rich 
brown,  shading  into  black  at  upper  part  where  it  is  outlined  by  a 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  179 

strong,  well-defined  silver  mark,  straight  nearest  to  base,  hooked 
outwardly  ;  this  mark  is  quite  different  from  the  nearly  straight 
insignificant  mark  of  Ampla  ;  above  the  outer  edge  of  the  dark 
central  patch,  the  transverse  posterior  line  is  double  and  incon- 
spicuously continued  towards  the  costa  ;  the  transverse  anterior 
line  does  not  extend  beyond  the  central  patch,  only  at  the  place 
where  it  should  terminate  on  the  costa,  is  a  dark  spot.  A  small 
dark  inconspicuous  apical  spot. 

Secondaries  orchrey  brown,  shading  into  smoky  towards  outer 
margin. 

Uab. — Colorado.     One  example,  Mus.  Strecker. 


180  proceedings  op  the  academy  op  [1885. 

June  9. 
Dr.  Geo.  A.  Koenig  in  the  chair. 
Seventeen  persons  present. 


June  16. 

Dr.  W.  S.  W.  Rusciienberger  in  the  chair. 

Fifteen  persons  present. 

The  death  of  Dr.  J.  Henle,  a  correspondent,  on  May  15,  1885, 
was  announced. 


June  23. 

Mr.  John  H.  Redfield  in  the  chair. 

Fourteen  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  Descriptions  of  new  species  of  Partula,  and 
a  synonymical  catalogue  of  the  genus,"  by  Wm.  D.  Hartman, 
M.  D.,  was  presented  for  publication. 


June  30. 

Rev.  Henry  C.  McCook,  D.  D.,  Vice-President,  in  the  chair. 

Twenty-eight  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  Cervalces  Americanus,  a  fossil  Moose,  or 
Elk,  from  the  Quaternary  of  New  Jersey,"  by  W.  B.  Scott,  was 
presented  for  publication. 


July  7. 

Mr.  Thomas  Meehan,  Vice-President,  in  the  chair. 

Fifteen  persons  present. 

The  death  of  Dr.  Franklin  B.  Hough,  a  correspondent,  on  June 
11,  1885,  was  announced. 

The  following  were  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  181 


CERVALCES  AMERICANUS,  A  FOSSIL  MOOSE,  OR  ELK,  FROM  THE 
QUATERNARY  OF  NEW  JERSEY. 

BY    W.    B.    SCOTT. 

Several  species  of  Elk  or  Moose  have  been  found  in  the  Qua- 
ternary deposits  of  the  United  States,  and  have  been  described 
by  various  observers.  For  the  most  part,  however,  the  remains 
described  have  been  so  imperfect  as  to  be  of  little  value  from  a 
morphological  point  of  view.  The  earliest  account  we  have  of 
such  fossils  is  to  be  found  in  the  Proceedings  of  the  American 
Philosophical  Society  for  1818,  p.  375.  This  is  "an  account  of 
two  heads  found  in  the  morass  called  the  Big-Bone  Lick,  and 
presented  to  the  Society  by  Mr.  Jefferson,"  and  was  written  by 
Dr.  Caspar  Wistar.  One  of  these  heads  is  assigned  by  Dr.  Wistar 
to  Gervus,  and  is  thus  described  :  "  If  it  belonged  to  the  genus 
Cervus,  it  was  one  of  the  largest  species  of  that  genus. 

"  The  comparison  of  figures  4  and  5  with  figures  6  and  7  (skull 
of  wapiti),  shows  that  the  lately  discovered  skull  resembles  that 
of  the  Round-Horned  Elk  at  the  occiput,  although  it  differs  from 
it  greatly  in  the  position  and  projection  of  the  horns.  There 
is  also  in  the  Round-Horned  Elk  a  considerable  prominence  of 
the  frontal  bone  between  the  bases  of  the  horns,  which  does  not 
appear  to  have  been  the  case  in  the  newly-discovered  head.  [In 
part,  at  least,  this  is  due  to  abrasion  of  the  specimen. — S.]  The 
bones  of  this  last-mentioned  head  have  a  concavity  or  depression 
on  the  under  surface  near  the  root,  which  is  not  the  case  in  the 
Round-Horned  Elk. 

"  The  cranium  of  the  Moose,  or  Cervus  alces,  is  very  different. 
The  occipital  portion  is  concave  exteriorly,  and  the  superior 
margin  has  an  angular  indentation  in  it.  There  is  a  remarkable 
prominence  between  the  horns,  which  extends  considerably  towards 
the  nose.  The  horns  of  it  project  laterally  like  those  of  the  newly- 
discovered  head,  and  they  have  a  concavity  on  the  under  surface 
near  the  root."  .  .  .  "I  believe  that  each  of  the  last-mentioned 
heads  (i.  e.,  wapiti  and  moose),  is  at  least  of  the  ordinary  size,  as 
their  horns  are  large,  and  it  appears,  from  a  comparison  of  the 
respective  measurements,  that  the  head  lately  discovered  is  larger 
than  either  of  them." 


182  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Wistar  did  not  name  the  species  here  described  ;  this  was  done 
in  1825  by  Harlan,  in  his  Fauna  Americana,  who  called  it  Cervus 
americanus.  The  only  addition  of  importance  to  our  knowledge 
of  this  species  we  owe  to  Dr.  Leidy,  who,  in  his  "Ancient  Mam- 
malian Fauna  of  Dakota  and  Nebraska,"  p.  379,  describes  a  pair 
of  metacarpals  accompanying  the  head  described  by  Wistar, 
which  Leidy  says  indicate  an  animal  of  greater  stature,  but  more 
graceful  proportions,  than  the  great  Irish  Deer. 

When  Harlan  named  the  species,  the  genera  Cervus  and  Alces 
had  not  been  separated  ;  their  later  separation  gave  rise  to  a  great 
confusion  of  nomenclature.  In  1835  Sir  William  Jardine  (Natu- 
ralists' Library,  vol.  xxi,  p.  125),  elevated  Alces  into  a  distinct 
genus,  and  called  the  American  species  A.  americanus.  Jardine 
supposed  that  Harlan's  species  was  a  true  Cervus,  and  refers  to 
it  as  the  "  fossil  cranium  and  horns  of  a  stag,  ...  to  which 
Dr.  Harlan  has  applied  the  name  of  G.  americanus,"  (p.  162).  In 
1836  Ogilby  named  the  European  elk  Alces  machlis  (P.  Z.  S., 
1836,  p.  135),  the  name  now  generally  employed  for  both  varie- 
ties, while  Harlan's  name  for  the  species  described  by  Wistar  has 
never  been  disturbed  or  questioned.  But  judging  from  Wistar's 
specimen,  it  becomes  at  once  evident  that  this  species  is  altogether 
different  from  Cervus,  and  belongs  either  to  Alces  or  some  closely 
allied  genus.  If  it  is  to  be  classed  in  Alces,  its  specific  name 
must  be  A.  americanus,  which  name  has  been  used  by  Jardine  for 
the  American  moose.  It  will  thus  be  seen  that  a  serious  confu- 
sion of  names  has  arisen. 

No  other  American  fossil  moose  has  received  a  special  name, 
though  many  specimens  have  been  found,  some  of  the  finest  of 
which  were  in  the  Museum  of  the  Chicago  Academy  of  Sciences, 
and  were  destined  in  the  great  fire  of  187 1.1 

Through  the  kindness  of  the  Rev.  A.  A.  Haines,  the  Museum 
at  Princeton  has  received  an  almost  complete  skeleton  of  a  very 
large  extinct  species  of  elk  or  moose,  which  was  discovered  in  a 
shell-marl  deposit  under  a  bog  at  Mt.  Hermon,  New  Jersey,  six 
miles  from  Delaware  Station  on  the  Delaware,  Lackawanna  and 
Western  Railroad.  This  superb  specimen  is  practically  complete, 
the  only  missing  bones  being  five  caudal  vertebras;  two  ribs;  the 
right  scapula  and  humerus  ;  the  right  unciform  and  pisiform,  and 


See  Judge  Caton's  Antelope  and  Deer  of  America,  p.  194. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  183 

the  trapezium  of  each  side  ;  one  anterior  ungual  phalanx  ;  the  left 
calcaneum,  and  a  number  of  bones  of  the  rudimentary  lateral 
digits.  With  the  exception  of  the  caudal  vertebrae  ever}-  missing 
bone  of  importance  is  represented  by  its  fellow  of  the  opposite 
side,  so  that  it  was  well  nigh  impossible  to  go  astray  in  making 
the  necessary  restorations. 

The  skeleton  was  of  an  adult,  but  not  old,  individual,  as  is 
shown  by  the  condition  of  the  epiphysis  and  teeth.  The  missing 
parts  have  been  restored,  and  the  entire  specimen  most  skilfully 
mounted  by  Curator  F.  C.  Hill.     (See  PI.  II). 

A  careful  comparison  of  the  Princeton  specimen  with  that 
described  b}r  Wistar,  which,  together  with  the  metacarpals  de- 
scribed by  Leidy ,  is  preserved  in  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences 
of  Philadelphia,  convinces  me  that  in  all  probability  the  two 
specimens  belong  to  the  same  species.  There  are  some  unim- 
portant differences  and  the  old  specimen  is  too  imperfect  to  put 
this  identification  beyond  question.  But  what  remains  of  the 
Philadelphia  skull  agrees  almost  perfectly  with  the  Princeton 
one,  and  at  present  there  can  be  no  reason  for  assigning  them  to 
different  species. 

On  examination,  however,  it  becomes  evident  that  the  species 
in  question  cannot  be  included  in  any  known  genus,  as  these  are 
at  present  defined.  While  its  affinities  are  undoubtedly  closest  to 
Alces.  yet  if  we  include  it  in  that  genus,  the  generic  definition 
must  be  altogether  remodeled  and  some  of  its  most  prominent 
characteristics  wouid  have  to  be  suppressed.  The  differences  from 
all  known  species  which  this  fossil  form  shows,  are  of  sufficient 
importance  to  entitle  it  to  rank  as  a  separate  genus.  With  con- 
siderable reluctance,  therefore,  and  in  view  of  the  confused 
nomenclature  of  the  species,  I  feel  compelled  to  form  a  new  name 
for  the  genus.  I  would  propose  the  name  Cervalces,  as  indicating 
the  types  which  it  seems  to  connect.  The  genus  may  be  defined  as 
follows:  Cervalces.  Antlers  dichotomous  and  palmated,  though 
much  less  so  than  in  Alces;  beams  horizontal^  directed,  as  in 
that  genus,  but  with  much  longer  pedicels  ;  bez-antler  and  pos- 
terior tine  present  as  in  Dama,  but  these  are  connected  by  a  broad 
and  flaring  process  of  bone,  which  descends  below  the  level  of 
the  eyes.  This  does  not  occur  in  any  other  member  of  the 
Cervidse.     Nasals  much  longer  than  in  Alces,  a  little  shorter  than 


184 


PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF 


[1885. 


in  Cervus ;  anterior  nares  very  much  smaller  than  in  the  former, 
but  larger  than  in  the  latter ;  premaxillai  shaped  as  in  Cervus 
and  reaching  the  nasals.  Head  broader  than  in  Alces,  promi- 
nence on  frontal  ridge  and  supra-occipital  indentation  absent. 
Upper  and  lower  molars  with  supplementary  columns ;  no  upper 
canines.  Ante-orbital  vacuity  bounded  above  by  a  separate  bone 
(prefrontal?).  Neck  and  trunk  short,  legs  exceedingly  long. 
Distal  ends  of  lateral  metacarpals  present ;  internal  cuneiform 
fused  with  the  metatarsal. 

As  Harlan's  name  must  undoubtedly  be  retained  this  species 
will  be  known  as  Cervalces  americanus. 

In  the  skeleton  of  this  curious  and  striking  fossil,  the  most 
obvious  peculiarity  is  the  great  length  of  the  legs,  which  gives 
the  animal  a  remarkably  stilted  appearance,  while  the  thorax  is 
shallow,  and  the  neck  short.  The  shoulders  are  higher  than  the 
hips,  as  in  the  moose,  and  unlike  the  stag.  The  combined  length 
of  the  head  and  neck  shows  that  in  the  ordinary  position  of  the 
legs,  the  muzzle  would  not  reach  the  ground  by  14  or  15  inches. 
Measured  in  the  same  manner  the  moose's  muzzle  reaches  within 
about  10  inches  from  the  ground,  and  that  of  Megaceros  8  or  9. 
These  facts  are  of  importance  with  reference  to  the  question  of 
the  animal's  habits  and  the  presence  of  a  prehensile  upper  lip. 

Turning  now  to  the  characteristics  of  the  skeleton  in  detail,  we 
begin  with  : 


Flo.  1.    Side  view  of  face  of  Cervus  Canadensis. 


1885.] 


NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA. 


185 


Fig.  2.    Side  view  of  face  of  Cervatces  Americanus. 


Fig.  3.    Side  view  of  face  of  Alee*  machlU. 


The  Skull. 

The  skull  resembles  most  that  of  the  living  moose,  though  strik- 
ingly different  from  it  in  many  respects,  in  which  it  approximates 
to  Gervus.  In  spite  of  the  greater  size  of  the  animal,  the 
skull  is  both  absolutely  and  relatively  shorter  than  in  the  moose ; 
this  reduction,  however,  is  chiefly  confined  to  the  region  in 
front  of  the  molar  teeth.  The  cranium  is  considerably  broader 
than  in  Alces,  especially  between  the  bases  of  the  antlers.  The 
appearance  of  that  part  of  the  face  which  is  in  advance  of  the 
molar  teeth  is  strikingly  different  from  the  same  region  in  the 
moose,  and  approximates  rather  that  of  Gervus  (see  figs.  1,  2  and 
3).     This  difference  is  further  increased  by  the  fact  that  the  nasals 


180  I'KoOEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

of  the  fossil  are  more  than  twice  as  long  as  in  the  moose ;  this 
increase  of  length  of  the  nasals,  together  with  the  shortening  of 
the  face  renders  the  appearance  of  the  anterior  nares  very  dif- 
ferent from  those  of  the  moose.  The  edge  of  the  nares  in  the 
latter  measures  nearly  1 1  inches,  in  the  fossil  hardly  8  ;  in  a  large 
skull  of*  Gervus  canadensis  the  measurement  is  44  inches. 

The  Premaxillse  are  like  those  of  Cervus  and  not  at  all  like 
those  of  Alee  s ;  they  lie  external  to  the  anterior  ends  of  the 
maxillae  and  reach  up  to  the  nasals  with  which  they  articulate  by 
a  surface  nearly  an  inch  in  length,  while  in  the  moose  the  ascend- 
ing ramus  of  the  premaxilla  is  inserted  into  a  groove  in  the 
front  edge  of  the  maxilla  and  does  not  reach  tfle  nasals  by  several 
inches.  This  is  not  due  merely  to  a  shortening  of  the  nasals,  for 
though  the  ascending  ramus  is  very  long,  its  direction  is  so  ob- 
lique that  it  does  not  rise  to  the  level  of  the  nasal,  and  no  pro- 
longation of  the  latter  would  effect  a  junction.  The  shape  of  the 
premaxilla  is  also  very  different  in  the  two  species,  the  horizontal 
portion  being  shorter,  the  ascending  portion  longer,  and  the 
posterior  angle  between  the  two  sharper  in  the  fossil  than  in  the 
recent  form.  In  all  these  respects  the  former  shows  an  approxi- 
mation to  the  shape  of  the  bone  in  Cervus.  Seen  from  the  side 
the  edge  of  the  nasal  opening  is  very  different  from  that  of  the 
moose.  In  the  latter  this  edge  is  very  long  and  directed  ob- 
liquely downwards  and  forwards  (see  fig.  1),  while  in  the  former 
the  descent  is  much  more  abrupt.  The  whole  tube  inclosing  the 
nasal  cavity  is  much  longer  than  in  the  moose,  in  which  animal 
the  turbinal  bones  project  beyond  the  edge  of  the  premaxillse 
(fig.  3),  and  so  can  be  seen  from  the  side,  while  in  the  fossil  they 
do  not  quite  reach  the  edge  of  the  nares  (fig.  2). 

The  Maxillae  are  more  like  the  corresponding  bones  of  Cervus 
than  those  of  the  moose.  The  difference,  however,  is  almost  al- 
together in  the  anterior  part.  The  front  edge  is  much  less 
oblique  and  takes  no  part  in  the  formation  of  the  anterior  nares. 
The  edentulous  part  of  the  bone  in  advance  of  the  molars  is 
much  shorter  than  in  the  moose,  but  the  upper  facial  portion  is 
of  about  the  same  length.  As  in  Alces,  the  palatine  plates  in 
front  of  the  molar  teeth  arc  contracted  much  more  than  in  Cervus. 
There  is  a  further  difference  from  either  of  the  genera  in  the  fact 
that  the  alveolus  behind  the  last  molar  is  very  narrow  and  short, 


1885.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  187 

ending  in  a  mere  book.     The  condition  is  not  unlike  that  seen  in 
Megaceros. 

The  Nasals  are  intermediate  in  size  and  shape  between  those  of 
C'ervus  and  Alces.  In  0.  canadensis  these  bones  are  about  j£  the 
entire  length  of  the  skull,  in  the  moose  a  little  less  than  £,  in 
Gervalces  ^.  In  length,  in  their  narrower  and  emarginate  free 
ends,  the  nasals  are  like  those  of  the  true  deer,  but  resemble  those 
of  the  moose  in  not  being  so  flat,  but  having  the  upper  and  lateral 
parts  meeting  at  nearly  a  right-angle.  The  nasals  in  the  fossil  are 
in  contact  throughout  their  entire  length,  not  having  their  pos- 
terior ends  separated  by  the  wedge-shaped  process  of  the  frontals, 
as  is  the  case  in  the  moose.  These  posterior  ends  are  sharper 
and  less  abruptly  truncated  than  in  the  latter  animal. 

The  length  of  the  nasals  and  shape  of  the  anterior  nares  in 
Gervalces  show  that  if  the  animal  possessed  a  proboscis-like  snout 
at  all,  it  could  not  have  been  anj'thing  like  as  prominent  and  well 
developed  as  in  the  moose  ;  such  a  proboscis  being  always  accom- 
panied by  a  great  shortening  of  the  nasals,  as  in  the  elephant, 
tapir,  moose,  Sivatherium,  etc. 

The  Frontals  present  us  with  another  difference  from  the  moose 
and  resemblance  to  the  deer.  As  in  both  genera,  there  is  an 
abrupt  depression  of  the  forehead  in  front  of  the  antlers,  but  this 
is  less  than  in  Alces.  In  the  latter  there  is  a  sharp  knob  on  the 
ridge  connecting  the  pedicels  of  the  antlers,  but  in  the  fossil  this 
knob  is  but  faintly  indicated.  The  forehead  is  broader  and  the 
orbits  more  projecting  than  in  the  moose,  in  both  respects  show- 
ing approximations  to  the  cervine  type. 

The  Lachrymal  is  of  the  ordinary  size  and  shape,  but  the  pit  is 
unusually  shallow.  The  ante-orbital  vacuity  is  more  quadrate  in 
shape  than  is  the  case  in  Alces.  The  upper  edge  of  this  vacuity 
is  bounded  by  a  small  distinct  bone  which  I  have  not  been  able 
to  find  in  any  other  of  the  Cerridee,  though  what  looks  like  a 
rudiment  of  it  is  attached  to  the  nasal  in  the  moose.  The  bone 
in  question  articulates  with  the  nasal,  frontal  and  maxillary  ; 
thus  in  position  corresponding  to  the  prefrontal,  though  morpho- 
logically it  may  be  a  separated  portion  of  the  nasal.  It  is  hardly 
probable  that  this  is  a  mere  sport,  as  the  bone  is  present  on  both 
sides,  and  is  certainly  a  great  peculiarity.     (Fig.  2,  P.  F.) 

The  Jugal  has  more  the  shape  of  that  in  Cervus  than  that  of 


188  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

the  moose,  in  the  simpler  maxillary  suture  and  shorter  anterior 
process.  The  orbit  is  somewhat  smaller  than  in  the  moose,  and 
more  nearly  circular,  the  vertical  diameter  being  greater  in  the 
latter,  while  the  antero-posterior  diameter  is  about  the  same  in 
both.  While  the  frontal  rim  of  the  orbit  is  more  projecting  than 
in  Alces  and  the  whole  orbit  is  deeper,  the  jugal  rim  is  less  dis- 
tinctly marked  off  from  the  body  of  the  bone. 

The  Squamosal,  with  its  zygomatic  process,  is  almost  exactly 
like  that  of  the  moose,  the  zygoma  being  directed  downwards 
and  forwards,  instead  of  being  almost  horizontal  as  in  the  other 
Cervidde.  This  peculiar  shape  of  the  zygoma  is  due  to  the  great 
depression  of  the  forehead,  which,  though  somewhat  less  than  in 
the  moose,  is  greater  than  in  the  deer.  If  the  plane  of  the  upper 
molar  alveolus  be  produced  backwards,  it  will  be  found  that  the 
distance  from  the  summit  of  the  sagittal  crest  to  this  plane  is 
much  greater  than  in  Megaceros  (Cervalces  9  in.,  Megaceros  not 
quite  6). 

The  Occiput.  As  Wistar  pointed  out,  the  occiput  of  the  fossil 
is  rather  deer-like,  in  lacking  the  indentation  of  the  supra-occipital, 
and  in  the  greater  flatness  of  the  entire  occiput.  As  in  the  moose, 
however,  the  condyles  are  nearl}'  in  contact  below,  while  in  Gervus 
they  are  quite  widely  separated.  The  basi-occipital  has  two  large 
rugosities  just  in  advance  of  the  condyles,  as  in  Alces  and  Mega- 
ceros. The  paroccipital  processes  are  stout  and  of  the  same 
shape  as  in  the  moose,  though  somewhat  shorter.  The  propor- 
tions of  the  exposed  part  of  the  periotic  are  about  as  in  that 
animal.  The  same  is  true  of  the  tympanic  which  does  not  form 
an  inflated  auditoiy  bulla. 

The  structures  at  the  base  of  the  skull — sphenoids,  pterygoids, 
palatines,  vomer  and  turbinals— need  no  special  description,  being 
veiy  much  as  in  the  moose. 

The  Inferior  Maxillary  resembles  the  corresponding  bone  in 
the  moose  more  than  that  of  the  other  Cervidse,  but  with  some 
differences.  The  jaw,  as  a  whole,  is  somewhat  shorter  and  broader, 
the  diastema  and  symphysis  slightly  shorter,  and  the  coronoid 
process  shorter  and  heavier. 

The  Dentition  is  like  that  of  the  moose,  though  with  some 
cervine  features.  The  crowns  of  the  upper  molars  are  shorter 
than  in  Gervus,  bul  us  in  some  species  of  that  genus  they  have 


1885.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA. 


189 


well-marked  internal  supplementary  columns  ;  all  the  lower  molars 
have  distinct  external  columns.  In  some  specimens  of  the  moose 
there  is  a  small  column  on  the  first  molar,  a  slight  indication  of 
one  on  the  second,  and  none  on  the  third  ;  in  others  the  second  and 
third  have  small  rudimentary  columns.  This  may,  perhaps,  indi- 
cate that  in  this  species  the  columns  are  in  process  of  disappear- 
ance, having  vanished  in  the  upper  jaw  from  all  but  the  first 
molar.  According  to  Owen,  these  columns  are  present  in  the 
upper  molars  of  A  Ices  (Brit.  Foss.  Mam.,  p.  450).  This  may  be 
true  of  the  Swedish  elk,  but  not  of  the  American  specimens  I 
have  been  able  to  examine.  These  supplementary  columns  do 
not  appear  to  be  constant  generic  characters,  perhaps  not  even 
specific,  though  this  latter  is  doubtful. 

The  stylo-lryals  are  present  in  the  specimen,  but  are  not  espe- 
cially peculiar. 

The  Antlers.  The  most  striking  peculiarities  of  Gervalces  are 
to  be  found  in  the  antlers,  which  are  different  from  those  of  any 
of  the  Cervidse,  recent  or  fossil,  with  which  I  have  been  able  to 
compare  it,  or  of  which  I  have  seen  any  figure  or  description. 


Fig.  4.    Skull  and  antlers  of  Megacerot  hibernicut. 


190 


PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF 


[1885. 


FT 


Via.  5.    Skull  and  antlers  of  Ccrvalres  Americanus. 


Fict.  6.    Skull  and  antlers  of  Alee*  machlii. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  191 

The  pedicels  have  an  altogether  horizontal  direction,  are  some- 
what longer  than  in  the  moose,  and  show  a  deeper  posterior  con- 
striction, to  allow  the  unobstructed  movement  of  the  coronoid 
process.     The  burrs  are  quite  widely  separated,  almost  an  inch 
more  than  in  the  specimen  described  by  Dr.  Wistar.     The  beam 
is  directed  horizontally  outwards,  as  in  Alces,  even  drooping  a 
little,  as  noticed  by  Leidy,  and  is  unusually  long  before  reaching 
the  point  of  branching.     Leaving  out  of  account  for  the  present 
the  peculiar  portion  of  the  antler,  it  obviously  belongs  to  the 
palmated  dichotomous  t}'pe  of  Alces.     The  ordinarily  accepted 
view  with  regard  to  the  antlers  of  that  animal  is  that  brow-antlers 
are    not    present.      Sir  Victor   Brooke,   however,  considers   the 
anterior  division  of  the  antler  the  homologue  of  the  brow-branch 
(P.  Z.  S.,  1878,  p.  915).  Assuming  the  correctness  of  the  ordinary 
view,  the  fossil  form  agrees  with  the  recent  in  being  devoid  of 
the  brow-branch.     The  main  antler  is  divided  into  two  palmated 
portions,  of  which  the  anterior  is  the  smaller,  though  it  is  both 
proportionally  and  absolutely  much  larger  than  in  the  moose 
(figs.  5  and  6,  A).     This  portion  is  twisted  on  itself  so  that  its 
flat  side  is  presented  forwards  in  a  plane  almost  at  right-angles 
to  that  of  the  posterior  division.     The  palmation  of  this  anterior 
portion  is  somewhat  more  pronounced,  and  the  tines  more  flat- 
tened than  in  the  moose.     In  the  figures  all  the  tines  appear 
somewhat  blunt,  though  this  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the  animal 
died  while  the  antlers  were  yet  in  "  the  velvet."     In  the  moose 
the  division  into  the  two  palms  takes  place  in  a  plane  only  a  littie 
above  the  level  of  the  frontal  ridge  (2^  in.),  in  the  fossil  the  beam 
turns  sharply  upwards  for  several  inches  (6i)  before  the  point  of 
separation  is  reached.     The  appearance  of  the  anterior  branch  is 
very  different  from  what  is  seen  in  the  moose.     In  the  specimen 
before  us  there  arises  from  the  point  of  division  a  narrow  flat 
plate  somewhat  twisted  on  itself,  which  gives  off  a  sharp  and 
stout  lateral  tine,  two  or  three  inches  above  the  point  of  division ; 
above  this  tine  the  plate  broadens  for  a  little  distance  and  then 
bifurcates.     On  the  right  side  both  of  these  divisions  are  again 
bifurcated,  the  outer  one  much  more  deeply  than  the  inner ;  on 
the  left  side  the  inner  prong  does. not  divide,  though  it  is  broad 
and  flat.     This  gives  five  prongs  on  the  right  side  and  four  on  the 
left.     Except  the  lateral  tine,  all  the  tines  are  flattened  antero- 
posteriorly,  having  a  plate-like  appearance  from  the  front. 


192  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

In  the  moose,  on  the  other  hand,  the  anterior  division  shows  a 
broad  basal  palm,  which  sends  up  a  number  of  long,  sharp  and 
rounded  tines,  all  arising  at  about  the  same  level  (fig.  fi,  A), 
though  adjacent  ones  may  be  more  or  less  connected  by  palma- 
tion. 

The  posterior  division  of  the  antler  also  diners  markedly  from 
that  of  the  moose  in  being  much  smaller  and  much  less  palmated. 
The  size  of  the  palm  in  its  greatest  diameter  being  9  b}T  8  inches, 
while  in  one  specimen  of  the  American  moose  at  Princeton  these 
dimensions  are  28  by  17  inches.  In  the  latter  animal  the  tines 
of  this  division  of  the  antler  are,  with  the  exception  of  the  first 
mere  finger-like  processes  from  the  top  of  the  palm  (fig.  6).  In 
Gervalces,  as  in  the  European  elk,  and  some  specimens  of  the 
American  moose,  the  tines  are  very  much  longer,  though  the- palm 
in  the  European  variet}^  is  still  much  greater  than  in  the  fossil. 
Owing  to  the  height  at  which  division  into  the  anterior  and  pos- 
terior branches  of  the  antlers  takes  place  in  Gervalces,  the  first 
tine  of  the  hinder  branch  is  very  much  shorter  than  in  the  moose 
(Gervalces  13^  inches,  Alces  21  inches). 

The  pi-oportionate  number  of  tines  in  the  two  divisions  is  also 
different  in  the  living  and  extinct  species.  In  one  American 
moose  I  find  the  numbers  to  be  :  right  antler,  anterior  3,  posterior 
8  ;  left,  ant.  4,  post.  8.  Another  specimen  gives  :  ant.  2,  post.  5  ; 
in  a  third  specimen,  ant.  4,  post.  8.  A  European  specimen  gives 
ant.  4,  post.  1 ;  another  is  ant.  3,  post.  6.  In  the  fossil,  on  the 
other  hand,  we  have  on  the  right  side,  ant.  5,  post.  5;  left  side, 
ant.  4,  post.  4;  showing  a  different  method  of  growth  in  Gervalces 
from  that  observed  in  any  known  species  of  Alces. 

The  feature,  however,  which  differentiates  the  antler  of  Gervalces 
from  that  of  all  other  known  Cervidse  remains  to  be  described. 
Where  the  upper  edge  of  the  beam  rises  to  form  the  palmated  por- 
tion of  the  antlers,  the  lower  edge  expands  into  an  immense  con- 
cave process,  which  is  presented  outwards  like  the  mouth  of  a 
trumpet,  and  which  ends  both  anteriorly  and  posteriorly  in  a  round, 
pointed  tine,  the  latter  being  long,  the  former  quite  short  (fig.  5, 
P.  T.  and  Bz.).  The  posterior  tine  is  directed  obliquely  outwards 
and  backwards,  s<>  that  the  distance  between  those  of  the  two 
antlers  exceeds  five  feet.  On  the  left  side  there  is  a  rudimentary 
tine  or  snag  at  the  base  of  the  long  posterior  tine,  on  the  right 


1885.] 


NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA. 


193 


P.T 


side  the  broad  plate  of  bone  gradually  tapers  off  into  the  tine. 
It  is  a  curious  fact  that  these  great  ear-like  processes  descend 
considerably  below  the  level  of  the  eyes,  so  that  the  animal's 
vision  in  a  lateral  direction  must  have  been  seriously  intei'fered 
with.  It  is  difficult  to  understand  how  any  such  structure  of  the 
antlers  could  have  arisen  or  what  its  purpose  was. 

On  comparing  the  antlers  of  the  extinct  species  with  those  of 

the  moose,  it  becomes  evident 
that  the  former  consist  of  the 
same  pai'ts  as  those  of  the  lat- 
ter, with  something  added  to 
them.  Just  what  these  addi- 
tional parts  are  is  by  no  means 
easy  to  say.  The  anterior  tine 
(of  the  ear-shaped  process)  may 
be  the  bez-antler,  while  the  pos- 
terior one  may  correspond  to 
the  tine  which  in  Megaceros 
(figs.  4  and  4  a,  P.  T.),  the  fal- 
low deer  (see  Brooke,  P.  Z.  S., 
1878,  p.  914,  fig.  9),  and  some 
others,  is  given  off  from  the 
hinder  surface  of  the  beam 
nearly  opposite  the  bez-antler 
(d  in  Brooke's  system).  If  in  Megaceros  the  palmated  portion 
of  the  antler  were  bent  sharply  upwards  nearly  at  right-angles 
with  the  beam,  the  posterior  tine  directed  more  outwards  and 
connected  by  a  broad  and  flaring  plate  of  bone  with  the  bez-antler 
in  front,  the  resulting  condition  would  be  very  much  what  we 
find  in  Cervalces.  If  this  conjecture  as  to  the  homologies  of 
these  tines  be  correct,  Sir  Victor  Brooke's  views  on  the  parts  of 
the  moose's  antler  can  hardly  be  accepted  (P.  Z.  S.,  1878,  p.  915). 
It  is  worthy  of  notice  that  in  Cervalces  almost  all  the  weight  of 
the  antlers  is  in  advance  of  the  occiput.  To  a  much  smaller 
extent  this  is  true  of  the  moose,  while  in  most  of  the  Cervidse 
the  weight  is  entirely  back  of  the  occiput. 

It  might  be  suspected  (as  for  a  time  1  did  suspect)  that  in  this 
fossil  we  have  to  do  with  a  case  of  monstrosity  rather  than  with 
a  true  species  character — some  such  phenomenon  as  the  double- 


Fig.  4  a. 

Right  antler  of  Megaceros  hibemicus,  from 

the  inside. 


14 


194  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

palmed  moose  antlers  from  Sweden,  and  those  found  fossil  in 
America,  as  illustrated  by  Judge  Caton,1  or  as  in  the  case  of  the 
curiously  palmated  antlers  from  Texas,  reported  by  the  same  ob- 
server (American  Naturalist,  vol.  xviii,  p.  136).  While  of  course 
this  may  possibly  be  the  case,  it  seems  very  improbable  for  the 
following  reasons  :  (1)  The  symmetry  of  the  antlers,  which  show 
no  sign  of  injury  or  distortion,  and  which  are  precisely  alike  on 
both  sides,  except  that  on  one  side  two  tines  ai-e  bifid,  which  on 
the  other  are  single.  But  such  inequality  is  very  common  on  all 
large  antlers  ;  in  fact,  is  rather  the  rule  than  the  exception.  The 
double-palmed  antlers  of  which  Judge  Caton  speaks  are  so  only 
one  side.  (2)  Monstrosities,  except  in  cases  of  atavism  or  in 
mere  repetition  of  parts  normally  present,  are  much  more  apt  to 
be  in  the  direction  of  simplification  than  of  increased  complexit}'. 
It  is  therefore  very  unlikely  that  these  antlers  are  simply  sports 
from  the  ordinary  Alces  type,  for  they  contain  elements  which  are 
never  found  in  the  moose,  but  which  seem  rather  to  belong  to 
the  true  deer. 

Gray's  view  that  Cariacus  lacks  the  brow-antler  can  hardly  be 
correct,  as  the  so-called  "basal-snag"  of  that  genus  is  clearly 
nothing  else.  Prof.  Cope's  statement 2  that  palmation  of  the 
antlers  transfers  a  form  from  Cariacus  to  Alces,  is  one  that  I 
cannot  accept.  Of  the  many  differences  which  separate  the  two 
genera,  the  palmation  of  the  antlers  is  the  least  important.  Any 
such  transfer  must  ignore  the  much  more  significant  features  of 
the  teeth,  skull,  and  limbs. 

Skeleton  of  the  Trunk. 

Cervical  Vertebrae.  The  neck  is  short  when  compared  with  the 
height  of  the  animal,  shorter  even  than  in  the  moose.  The  atlas 
is  provided  with  a  large  and  heavy  hypapophysis,  of  which  only 
a  small  rudiment  is  to  be  seen  in  the  moose  or  in  Megaceros,  but 
is  quite  well  developed  in  Cervus  elaphus.  Richardson,  however, 
figures  a  moose's  atlas  from  Canada,  in  which  the  hypapophysis 
is  very  distinct  (Zoology,  Voyage  of  Herald,  pi.  xxi  and  xxii). 
The  remaining  cervicals  show  only  differences  of  detail  from  those 
of  Alces;  thus  the  transverse  process  of  the  axis  is  more  slender, 


1  Antelope  and  Deer  of  America,  p.  194. 

2  American  Naturalist,  vol.  xviii,  p.  738. 


1885.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  195 

the  pleurapophysial  plate  on  the  sixth  vertebrae  is  smaller,  that 
on  the  fifth  larger. 

The  only  other  member  of  the  Cervidas  with  which  Gervalces 
can  be  compared  in  size,  is  the  great  extinct  Irish  deer  Megaceros. 
But  in  the  latter  we  find  a  very  much  longer  neck,  the  vertebrse 
of  which  are  vastly  heavier,  and  all  the  processes  are  larger  and 
stouter,  showing  the  great  muscular  power  necessary  to  wield 
the  immense  antlers.  In  Gervalces  the  cervical  vertebrse  appear 
puny  in  comparison. 

Trunk  Vertebrae.  In  Megaceros  these  vertebrae  are  provided 
with  very  long  and  heavy  spines  ;  those  of  the  anterior  thoracic 
being  twelve  or  thirteen  inches  in  length,  on  the  posterior  about 
eight.  In  Cervalces  the  spines  are  shorter  and  especially  lighter. 
The  rise  of  the  back  at  the  withers  is  even  less  marked  than  in 
the  moose.  The  vertebral  centra  are  also  shorter  and  lighter 
than  in  Megaceros,  giving  a  much  shorter  trunk.  The  lumbar, 
sacral  and  caudal  vertebrse  do  not  differ  in  any  important  way 
from  those  of  the  moose,  except  that  the  neural  spines  of  the 
sacrum  are  somewhat  more  closely  co-ossified. 

The  Bibs  are  rather  short,  only  a  very  little  longer  than  in  the 
moose,  and  therefore  proportionately  considerably  shorter.  The 
thorax  is  consequently  shallow,  and  together  with  the  long  limbs 
gives  the  animal  a  stilted  appearance.  The  greatest  depth  of 
thorax  from  tip  of  neural  spine  to  the  sternum  is  in  Megaceros 
34  inches,  in  Cervalces  29,  in  the  moose  28. 

The  Sternum,  curiousty  enough,  is  somewhat  different  from 
that  of  the  moose ;  the  manubrium  being  smaller  and  of  a  some- 
what different  shape.  The  first  two  segments  of  the  mesosternum 
resemble  the  corresponding  parts  in  Cervus,  and  differ  from  those 
of  Alces  in  being  long  and  narrow,  instead  of  short  and  broad. 

The  Limbs. 

The  limbs  are  remarkable  for  their  great  length  and  slender- 
ness.  Though  considerably  longer  than  those  of  the  great  Irish 
deer,1  they  are  not  nearly  so  stout.  The  hind  legs  are  especially 
long,  but  the  withers  are  higher  than  the  rump,  as  is  the  case 

1  It  is  very  unfortunate  that  the  name  "Irish  Elk"  is  so  commonly 
applied  to  this  animal,  which  seems  rather  to  have  been  a  gigantic  fallow- 
deer. 


196  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

with  the  moose.  The  Scapula  is  rather  small  in  proportion  to 
the  size  of  the  animal,  being  a  little  shorter  than  in  the  moose, 
and  much  more  so  than  in  Megaceros.  In  shape  the  bone  is  more 
cervine  than  alcine  ;  the  anterior  border  is  straighter,  and  the 
prescapular  fossa  smaller  than  in  the  moose,  while  the  neck  is 
less  contracted  and  the  coracoid  larger. 

The  Humerus  is  not  different  in  any  important  way  from  that 
of  the  moose,  except  for  a  slight  increase  in  length. 

The  Ulna  and  Radius  show  a  still  greater  increase  in  length, 
but  are  only  slightly  thicker  than  in  the  moose,  so  in  proportion 
they  are  more  slender.  As  in  Alces,  the  two  bones  are  co-ossified 
only  at  the  distal  end,  instead  of  being  firmly  united  for  two- 
thirds  their  length  as  in  most  deer. 

The  Carpus  is  like  that  of  the  moose  in  almost  every  particu- 
lar, consisting  of  scaphoid,  lunar,  cuneiform,  pisiform,  trapezium, 
trapezo-magnum,  and  unciform. 

The  Metacarpus  is  very  long,  much  of  the  great  height  of  the 
animal  being  due  to  it.  It  is  about  one-half  an  inch  shorter  than 
in  the  largest  of  the  two  Philadelphia  specimens,  but  the  propor- 
tions are  almost  identical.  The  rudimentary  lateral  metacarpals 
are  like  those  of  the  moose  in  shape,  but  are  longer. 

The  Phalanges  of  the  median  digits  are  unusually  long  and 
slender,  even  when  compared  with  those  of  the  moose.  The 
unguals  are  veiy  long  and  pointed.  The  phalanges  of  the  rudi- 
mentary digits  are  larger  and  heavier  than  in  the  moose. 

The  Pelvis  is  almost  precisely  like  that  of  the  moose,  and  needs 
no  particular  description. 

The  Femur  is  slightly  longer,  but  no  heavier  than  in  the  moose, 
and  offers  a  striking  contrast  to  the  massive  thigh-bone  of  Mega- 
ceros, which  is  as  heavy  as  that  of  an  ox.  The  trochlear  groove 
is  shallow,  with  sharp  edges,  and  the  patella  is  small.  The  great 
trochanter  is  higher  than  in  the  Megaceros,  and  rises  more  verti- 
cally from  the  shaft,  but  all  the  other  processes  for  muscular 
attachment  are  much  less  prominent. 

The  Tibia  is  an  exceedingly  long  bone,  but  its  increase  in 
length  has  not  been  accompanied  by  any  corresponding  increase 
in  thickness.  The  astragalar  groove  is  like  that  of  Alces,  the 
fibular  facet  and  the  fibula  are  like  those  of  Cervus. 


1885.] 


NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA. 


197 


The  Tarsus  is  somewhat  longer  than  in  the  moose,  of  about 

the  same  length,  but  narrower  than 
in  Megaceros.  The  calcaneum  is 
nearly  an  inch  longer  than  in  either 
form,  giving  a  prominent  "  hock- 
joint."  In  the  smaller  bones  of  the 
tarsus  we  find  some  curious  relations. 
On  the  left  side  the  arrangement  of 
these  bones  is  nearly  the  usual  one 
among  the  Cervidse.  That  is  to  say, 
the  cuboid  and  navicular  are  fused 
into  one  bone,  the  second  and  third 
cuneiforms  into  another,  but,  strange 
to  say,  the  first  cuneiform  is  firmly 
ankylosed  with  the  metatarsus,  form- 
ing a  little  step  against  which  the 
compound  cuneiform  abuts.  In  the 
right  foot  the  process  of  ankylosis 
has  gone  further  and  gives  a  tarsus 
which  is  even  more  concentrated  than 
fig.  7.  in  the  Tragulina.     (See  fig.  7).     The 

Right  Tarsus  of  Cervalces  Americanus.  compound   Cuneiform    is    fused   with 

the  cubo-navicular  (fig.  7,  N.  and  Gb.  and  (7.,  2  and  3),  and  the 
first  cuneiform,  as  in  the  left  foot,  with  the  metatarsus  (fig.  7,  G  3). 
This  fusion  of  tarsal  bones  with  the  metatarsus  is  very  curious. 
It  does  not  occur  in  any  known  ungulate,  and  I  am  acquainted 
with  no  other  mammal  in  which  it  can  be  found.  A  tarso- 
metatarsus,  in  the  same  sense,  but  to  a  less  degree,  as  in  birds, 
is  thus  formed. 

The  Metatarsus  is  very  long,  and  of  about  the  same  propor- 
tions as  in  the  moose. 

The  Phalanges  of  the  median  digits  are  a  little  longer  than  in 

the  fore-foot,  those  of  the  rudimentary  digits  of  about  the  same 

size. 

Conclusion. 

Cervalces  Americanus  is  a  very  interesting  form,  and  offers 
some  morphological  suggestions  of  great  value.  Geologically  it 
teaches  little  that  was  not  known.  Its  occurrence  so  far  south 
of  the  moose '8  range,  points  to  a  colder  climate  than  the  present, 


198  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

though  the  perfect  preservation  and  freshness  of  the  bones  in  the 
Princeton  skeleton  make  it  hard  to  believe  that  they  are  more 
than  a  few  years  old. 

In  all  probability  the  habits  of  the  animal,  and  to  a  great 
degree  its  appearance,  were  those  of  the  moose.  Its  short  neck 
shows  that  it  would  have  great  difficulty  in  grazing,  and  so  prob- 
ably lived  by  browsing  upon  shrubs  and  trees.  This  was  aided, 
no  doubt,  by  a  more  or  less  prehensile  upper  lip,  which  the  char- 
acter of  the  nasal  opening  shows  to  have  been  more  proboscis- 
like than  in  the  deer,  though  far  less  so  than  in  the  moose. 

Morphologically  the  fossil  is  of  interest  for  the  light  which  it 
seems  to  throw  upon  the  question  of  the  origin  of  the  genus 
Alces,  and  its  relations  to  the  typical  deer.  Sir  Victor  Brooke 
and  Prof.  Garrod  have  shown  that  the  Cervidee  may  be  subdivided 
into  great  groups  according  to  the  characters  of  the  skull  and 
fore-feet.  According  to  the  latter  we  have  the  Plesio-  and  Tele- 
metacarpi,  or  those  which  retain  the  proximal  and  distal  ends  of 
the  metacarpals  respectively.  With  one  exception,  Cervus  cana- 
densis, all  American  deer  are  Telemetacarpi,  while  nearly  all  of 
the  Old  World  deer  are  Plesiometacarpi.  Those  of  circumpolar 
range,  the  reindeer  and  moose,  are  both  Telemetacarpi.  Another 
distinction  is  found  in  the  structure  of  the  skull.  In  one  division, 
the  American  deer  (except  G.  canadensis),  the  vomer  reaches  the 
palatines  and  projects  beyond  them,  dividing  the  posterior  nares 
into  two.  The  Old  World  deer  have  a  vomer  that  does  not  reach 
the  palatines,  and  the  posterior  nares  are  not  divided.  In  Alces 
we  have  the  latter  type  of  skull. 

The  chief  differences  between  the  true  Gervus  and  Alces  are  as 
follows  :  (1)  The  former  is  plesio-,  the  latter  tele-metacarpal,  both 
agreeing  in  the  structure  of  the  nasal  passages.  (2)  Gervus  has 
cylindrical  antlers,  with  brow-  and  bez-tines  rising  abruptly  from 
long  pedicels.  Alces  has  palmated  antlers,  without  brow-  or  bez- 
tines,  the  beam  directed  horizontally  from  the  short  pedicels.  (3) 
In  Alces  the  nasals  are  very  short,  the  anterior  nares  of  great 
extent;  in  Cervus  the  nasals  are  long,  and  the  anterior  nares 
small.  (4)  In  Alces  the  premaxillse  are  imbedded  in  a  groove  of 
the  maxilla',  and  do  not  reach  the  nasals;  in  Cervus  they  lie 
external  to  the  maxillae,  and  (in  some  species  at  least)  do  reach 
the  nasal.     (5)  In  Alces  there  is  a  deep  notch  on  the   supra- 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  199 

occipital,  and  a  prominent  knob  on  the  frontal  ridge,  neither  of 
which  is  present  in  Cervus.  (6)  In  Cervus  the  skull  is  short  and 
broad,  and  the  diastema  of  moderate  length  ;  in  Alces  the  skull 
is  long  and  narrow,  and  the  diastema  ver}'  long.  (7)  In  Cervus 
the  tympanic  bulla  is  inflated ;  in  Alces  not.  (8)  Cervus  has  a 
horizontal  zygoma;  in  Alces  it  is  directed  downwards  and  forwards. 

(9)  Cervus  possesses  canine  teeth  in  both  sexes;  Alces  in  neither. 

(10)  Alces  has  a  short  neck  and  trunk,  long  limbs  and  head; 
Cervus  has  longer  neck  and  trunk  and  shorter  legs.  (11)  In 
Alces  there  is  a  proboscis-like  upper  lip  and  almost  obsolete 
rhinarium;  Cervus  has  larger  rhinarium  and  ordinary  snout.  In 
nearly  all  of  these  particulars,  Alces  is  plainly  a  greater  departure 
from  the  ordinaiy  cervine  type  than  is  Cervus,  and  must,  there- 
fore, be  regarded  as  a  more  differentiated  and  highly  specialized 
form.  If  this  be  the  case,  we  should  naturally  conclude  that 
Alces  is  the  descendant  of  some  form  much  more  closely  allied  to 
Cervus  than  itself  is.  That  the  descent  cannot  be  from  the  actual 
genus  Cervus  seems  to  be  plain  from  the  character  of  the  fore- 
foot. A  reasonable  inference  seems  to  be  that  the  common  ances- 
tor of  the  two  genera  had  already  attained  the  structure  of  skull 
found  in  the  Old  World  deer,  but  that  its  fore-feet  were  tetra- 
dactyl,  the  lateral  metacarpals,  though  slender,  were  complete  or 
nearly  so  in  length. 

Now  Cervalces  throws  some  light  upon  this  community  of 
origin  and  subsequent  divergence  of  the  two  genera.  In  many 
respects,  as  we  have  already  seen,  Cervalces  differs  very  decidedly 
from  Alces,  and  nearly  all  these  differences  are  approximations 
to  the  structure  of  Cervus,  a  result  which  can  hardly  be  accidental. 
But  except  in  the  skull,  the  structure  of  the  fossil  form  is  much 
nearer  to  that  of  Alces.  The  fossil  agrees  with  Alces:  (1)  In 
the  short  neck  and  trunk  and  very  long  legs ;  (2)  in  being 
telemetacarpal ;  (3)  in  having  palmated  antlers ;  (4)  in  the  absence 
of  an  inflated  tympanic  bulla;  (5)  in  the  shape  of  the  zygoma; 
(6)  in  the  absence  of  canine  teeth. 

On  the  other  hand  it  agrees  with  Cervus:  (1)  In  the  presence 
of  the  bez-tine  (?)  and  posterior  tine  on  the  antlers  ;  (2)  in  having 
long  nasals;  (3)  in  the  shape  and  relations  of  the  premaxillae ; 
(4)  in  the  absence  of  the  supra-occipital  notch  and  knob  on  the 
frontal  ridge ;    (5)  in  the  greater  proportionate  breadth  of  the 


200  PROCEEDINGS   OF   TIIE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

skull ;  (G)  Cervalces  almost  certainly  bad  a  rhinarium  and  upper 
lip  more  like  that  of  Cervus  than  of  Alces. 

Cervalces  differs  from  both  genera:  (1)  In  the  intermediate 
condition  of  the  anterior  nares  ;  (2)  the  peculiar  antlers  ;  (3)  the 
distinct  prefrontals ;  (4)  the  remarkable  concentration  of  the 
tarsals. 

It  thus  seems  very  probable  that  Alces  is  descended  from  a 
type  with  limbs,  skull  and  antlers  of  the  ordinary  type  and  with 
tetradactyle  fore-feet,  but  has  modified  these  in  various  ways. 
The  length  of  limb  seems  to  be  connected  with  the  habitat  of  the 
animal  in  snowj'  regions,  and  we  are  told  that  the  moose  can  make 
his  way  with  great  swiftness  through  snow-drifts  that  will  engulf 
ordinary  cattle.  The  unusual  size  of  the  lateral  digits  seems  to 
have  reference  to  the  animal's  habit  of  living  in  swampy  lands 
during  the  summer,  and  so  needing  a  broad  surface  to  prevent 
sinking  in  the  mud.  The  shortening  of  the  neck  is  difficult  to 
account  for,  but  the  proboscis-like  upper  lip  seems  to  be  clearly 
connected  with  the  habit  of  browsing  upon  ti'ees.  Shortening  of 
the  neck  is  very  generally  associated  .with  the  development  of  a 
prehensile  lip  ;  e.  g.,  the  combined  length  of  head  and  neck  in  the 
rhinoceros  is  relatively  greater  than  in  the  tapir. 

Cervalces  seems  to  have  been  a  contemporary  of  the  moose 
which  also  occurs  in  quaternary  deposits,  though  in  all  probability 
the  former  is  the  older  of  the  two.  Its  extinction  may  be  referred 
to  the  general  causes  which  destroyed  so  many  of  the  large  qua- 
ternary mammals,  though  the  competition  of  the  more  perfectly 
adapted  moose  may  have  had  something  to  do. with  it. 

Whatever  taxonomic  value  be  allowed  to  the  peculiarities  of 
this  strange  fossil,  the  fact  remains  that  in  it  we  can  catch  some 
glimpse  of  the  successive  steps  by  which  the  remarkable  genus 
Alces  has  originated. 


1885.] 


NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA. 

Measurements. 


201 


Alces. 

Cervalces. 

Megaceroi. 

M. 

M. 

M. 

Length  of  trunk   from  1st  rib  to  end  of 

ischium, 

1-478 

1  -550 

1  -lis:; 

Length  of  thorax,      ..... 

•703 

•755 

•840 

Length  of  lumbar  region. 

•440 

•435 

•444 

Length  of  sacrum,     ..... 

•235 

•225 

•241 

Length  of  neck,          ..... 

•515 

•563 

•756 

Length  of  skull, 

•550 

•536 

•453 

Breadth  of  forehead,           .... 

•205 

■255 

•220 

Distance  between  burrs  of  antlers,    . 

•165 

•234 

•120 

Length  of  nasals,        ..... 

•103 

•181 

•170 

Anterior  nares  from  nasals  to  tip  of  premax. 

•285 

•185 

•120 

Span  of  antlers,         ..... 

M75 

1-620 

2-260 

Length  of  antler,  measured  along  outside 

curve,           ...... 

•925 

•863 

1-702 

Length  of  pedicels,    ..... 

•020 

•028 

•048 

Greatest  height  at  withers, 

1-695 

1-810 

1-890 

Height  at  sacrum,      ..... 

1-565 

1-680 

1.610 

Height  at  occiput,       ..... 

1-610 

1-790 

1-940 

Height  at  tip  of  antler,      .... 

2-253 

2-342 

2-740 

Length  of  fore-leg  (straight  line),     . 

1-565 

1-685 

1-620 

Length  of  scapula,     .         . 

•443 

•443 

•455 

Length  of  humerus  (fr.  tuberosity), 

•405 

•425 

•375 

Length  of  radius, 

•415 

•450 

•378 

Length  of  carpus,       ..... 

•043 

•055 

045 

Length  of  metacarpus  (outside', 

•318 

•355 

•324 

Length  of  phalanges,         .... 

•193 

•025 

•188 

Circumference  of  humerus,  (below  exter. 

tuber. ),...... 

•175 

•185 

•200 

Circumference  of  radius,  .... 

•132 

•140 

•145 

Circumference  of  metacarpus, 

•lis 

■132 

•135 

Length  of  hind-leg  (straight  line  i.    . 

1-450 

1-477 

1-300 

Length  of  femur  (from  head)    . 

•435 

•440 

•435 

Length  of  tibia,          ..... 

•485 

•512 

•450 

Length  of  tarsus,        ..... 

•097 

•117 

•114 

Length  of  metatarsus,        .... 

•385 

•421 

•343 

Length  of  phalanges,         .... 

•213 

•234 

•197 

Circumference  of  femur,   .... 

•147 

•155 

•180 

Circumference  of  tibia,      .... 

•175 

•170 

•190 

Circumference  of  metatarsus,    . 

•135 

•147 

•150 

Longest  dorsal  spine,          .         .         .         . 

•283  3d 

-290  :;'i 

•367  ^t'11 

Circumference  4th  cerv.  vertebra, 

•340 

j    -373 

•490 

Circumference  of  last  lumbar  (incl.  spine  i, 

•290 

I    -295 

•375 

Length  of  pelvis,       ..... 

•501 

•490 

•520 

Longest  rib  (from  tubercle), 

•533  8th 

•550  -'" 

•610  -'t>i 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  dimensions  here  given  for  Megaceros, 
which  are  taken  from  a  skeleton  in  the  Princeton  Museum,  are 
very  different  from  those  given  by  Owen  in  his  "  British  Fossil 
Mammals."  The  discrepancy  is  largely  due  to  different  methods 
of  mounting. 


202  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 


EXPLANATION  OF  FIGURES  AND  PLATE. 

Fig.  1.  Side  view  of  skull  of  Cervus  canadensis. 
Fig.  2.  Side  view  of  Oervalces  americanus. 
Fig.  3.  Side  view  of  Alces  machlis. 

References  for  figs.  1-3. — Fr.,  frontal;  N.,  nasal;   Tb.,  turbinal; 
Pmx.,  premaxilla  ;  M.,  maxilla  ;  Pf.,  prefrontal  (?);  0.,  orbit; 
A.  0.,  ante-orbital  vacuity. 
Fig.  4.  Skull  and  antlers  of  Megaceros  hibernicus. 
Fig.  4  a.  Right  antler  of  Megaceros  hibernicus,  from  the  inside  (from  Owen, 

British  Foss.  .Mam.  and  Birds,  fig.  186,  p.  4">6). 
Fig.  5.  Skull  and  antlers  of  Oervalces  americanus. 
Fig.  C.  Skull  and  antlers  of  Alces  machlis. 

References  for  figs.  4-6. — Br.,  brow  antlers  ;  Bz.,  bcz-tine;  P.T., 

posterior  tine  (as  of  Brooke's  system);  A.,  anterior  division  of 

main  antler;  P.,  posterior  division  of  main  antler. 

Fig.  7.  Right  tarsus  of  Oervalces  americanus.     T.,  tibia  ;  Ca.,  calcaneum  ; 

As.,  astragalus;  iV,  Cb.  &  0  2  &  3,  compound  bone  formed  by 

fusion  of  cuboid,  navicular,  second  and  third  cuneiforms ;    CI, 

first  cuneiform,  fused  with  metatarsus  ;  Mt.,  metatarsus. 

Plate  II. 

Skeleton  of  Oervalces  americanus  (from  a  photograph).     The  scale  is  in 
feet,  and  tenths  of  feet. 


I  wish  to  express  here  my  obligations  to  Dr.  F.  C.  Hill,  Curator  of  the 
Museum,  for  his  invaluable  assistance  in  this  work.  I  am  indebted  to  him 
for  the  drawings  of  Figs.  1,  '2,  :!  and  7. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  203 


DESCRIPTIONS   OF  NEW  SPECIES   OF   PARTULA   AND  A  SYNONYMIC     ' 
CATALOGUE  OF  THE  GENUS. 

BY    WM.    D.    HARTMAN,    M.  D. 

Partula  Magdalinae,  nobis. 

Shell  short,  conic,  dextral,  inflated,  thin  and  fragile;  spire 
short,  half  the  length  ;  umbilicus  somewhat  compressed  ;  whorls 
H,  apical  whorls  veiy  thin,  rounded  and  sub-transparent,  with 
the  embiyonic  lines  of  fovea  deeply  impressed,  which 
^L  become  numerous  waved  spiral  stria;,  decussated  by  fine 
^K^A.  oblique  lines  of  growth,  causing  a  granulated  appear- 
^^SK\     ance  of  the  surface;  body-whorl  much  inflated,  with  the 

^^5^  basal  half  thickened  and  rounded  ;  columella  wide  at 
the  base,  and  nodulose;  color  white,  epidermis  thin, 
pale  green,  in  bands  on  the  basal  half;  aperture  perpendicular, 
large,  rounded  ovate,  lip  thin,  white,  concave  and  reflected. 

Length  10,  width  11  mill.;  aperture,  length  8,  width  5  mill. 

Hab. — Magdalena  Island,  Marquesas. 

Obs. — I  am  indebted  to  Mr.  Andrew  Garrett,  of  Huaheine,  for 
four  examples  of  this  shell ;  it  is  about  the  size  of  P.  decussatula, 
but  more  inflated,  thinner,  with  a  short,  and  less  acute  spire. 
Like  P.  Ganymedes  and  P.  inflata,  from  Marquesas,  the  basal  half 
of  the  shell  is  thicker  and  more  opaque  than  the  superior  part. 

Partula  bellula,  nobis. 

Shell  abbreviately  ovate,  dextral,  umbilicate,  thin,  translucent ; 
whorls  5,  rounded,  suture  impressed,  apex  acute,  spiral 
striaa  decussated  by  coarse  oblique  lines  of  growth, 
giving  the  surface  a  waved  appearance ;  aperture  per- 
pendicular, round-ovate,  columella  wide  at  the  base,  lip 
thin,  white,  reflected ;  color  pale  straw,  with  the  apex 
very  pale  rose. 
Length  15,  width  9  mill.;  aperture,  length  7,  width  4  mill. 
Hab. — Wapo  Island,  Marquesas. 

Obs. — Mr.  A.  Garrett  collected  one  example  of  this  pretty 
species  on  Wapo,  at  an  altitude  of  2500  feet  above  sea-level.  A 
similar  shell,  sent  by  him  to  the  Museum  Godeflroy,  was  found  at 
Dominique  at  the  same  altitude. 


204  PROCEEDINGS    OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Partula  Tryoni,  nol>i.<. 

Shell  acuminately  oblong,  dextral,  moderate!}'  thick,  rimate 
perforate  ;  whorls  5,  rounded,  body-whorl  equal  to  the 
spire,  oblique  lines  of  growth  coarse,  spiral  striae 
almost  obsolete;  color  pale  fawn,  with  white  oblong, 
interrupted,  lime-like  dots,  in  oblique  rows,  in  the  sub- 
stance of  the  shell;  aperture  perpendicular,  ovate,  with 
a  nacreous  deposit  connecting  the  margins  of  the  peri- 
treme,  lip  white,  flat,  and  broadly  expanded. 
Length  21,  width  12  mill.;  aperture,  length  9,  width  4  mill. 
Hub. — Solomon  Islands. 

Obs. — For  one  example  of  this  fine  species  I  am  indebted  to 
Mr.  Garrett,  who  received  it  from  our  mutual  friend,  Dr.  Cox,  of 
Sydney,  Australia.  Like  P.  actor  Albers,  =  zebrina  Gould,  it 
possesses  the  lime-like  deposit  in  the  substance  of  the  shell.  It 
is  a  larger  and  more  oblong  shell  than  the  latter,  but  like  it,  has 
a  broadly  reflected  flat  lip. 

Partula  flexuosa,  n 

Shell  acuminately  oblong,  flexuose,  dextral,  umbilicate,  thin 
and  semi-transparent;  whorls  5, slightly  rounded,  spiral 
striae  numerous  and  very  fine ;  body-whorl  half  the 
length,  slightly  compressed  at  base  ;  color  light  brown 
or  ash  ;  aperture  oval,  slightl}"  oblique,  lip  concave  and 
reflected,  with  a  very  thin  deposit  connecting  the  mar- 
gins of  the  peritreme. 

Length  15  to  20,  width  8  to  9  mill. ;  aperture,  length 
7  to  8,  width  4  mill. 

Hab. — St.  George's  and  Kd<l\  stone  Islands,  Solomon  Islands. 
Obs. — Several  examples  of  this  shell,  from  Dr.  Cox  and  Mr. 
Garrett,  have  been  in  my  possession  for  a  long  time,  and  I  hesi- 
tate to  describe  them,  supposing  they  might  be  P.  cinerea 
Albers.  Dr.  Cox  having  kindly  sent  me  all  Ins  collection  of 
Partula,  for  examination,  I  found  the  same  shell  amongst  others 
from  Eddystone  and  St.  George's  Islands.  Some  examples  are 
thin  and  quite  flexuose,  while  others  are  stouter  and  more 
direct. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  205 

Partula  glaber,  nobis. 

Shell  acuminately  oblong,  dextral,  somewhat  inflated,  trans- 
lucent, rimate-perforate ;  spire  more  than  half  the 
length;  whorls  6,  slightly  convex,  smooth,  oblique  lines 
obscure,  spiral  strirc  absent,  except  the  spiral  fovea  on 
the  two  apical  whorls;  a  white  fillet  beneath  the  suture; 
aperture  widely  oval, perpendicular,  lip  slightly  reflected, 
columella  expanded  at  base,  of  a  pale  rose  color,  stain- 
ing the  umbilicus  ;  color  white,  aperture  a  very  pale 
rose,  with  the  apex  dark  purple. 

Length  21,  diam.  10  mill.;  aperture,  length  10,  diam.  5  mill. 
Hab.— ? 

Obs. — This  pretty  species  was  received  amongst  other  shells  as 
P.  turricula  Pease,  New  Hebrides  (?),  without  a  voucher.  A 
comparison  with  the  description  of  turricula  disproves  its  iden- 
tity with  that  species.  It  is  very  distinct  from  any  Partula  with 
which  I  am  acquainted. 

Synonymic  Catalogue  of  the  Genus  Partula. 

In  the  year  1881  I  published  a  catalogue  of  the  genus  Partula, 
Ferussac,  in  which  I  proposed  several  sub-genera.  These  were  sub- 
sequently withdrawn  in  consequence  of  not  possessing  sufficient 
distinctive  characters.  In  the  present  list  I  have  arranged  the 
species  in  groups,  designating  each  by  the  name  of  a  well-known 
species,  which,  in  most  instances,  typifies  its  general  characters 
and  facies.  Hybridization  is  probably  a  factor  in  the  variability 
of  some  species,  which  may  account  for  the  confusion  of  their 
synonymy.  Owing  to  similarity  of  general  appearance,  it  is  often 
difficult  to  recognize  a  species  by  the  diagnosis,  when  unaided 
by  figures.  Since  the  publication  of  my  Bibliographic  Catalogue 
of  Partula,  in  1881,  I  have  embraced  every  opportunity  to  perfect 
my  list,  in  which  I  have  been  aided  by  a  number  of  friends.  To 
Capt.  Jno.  Brazier,  C.  M.  Z.  S.,  and  Jas.  C.  Cox,  M.  D.,  C.  M. 
Z.  S.,  I  am  indebted  for  correct  localities  of  the  species  from 
New  Hebrides  and  Solomon  Islands,  as  well  as  for  examples 
from  several  habitats  on  those  groups.  To  the  generosity  of 
Mr.  Andrew  Garrett,  of  Huaheine,  I  am  indebted  for  several  new 
species.  When  in  London  in  1883,  I  was  unable  to  inspect  the 
Cumingian   Collection,  which   was    boxed    preparatory   to    its 


206  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

removal  to  the  Xew  Kensington  Museum  of  Natural  History. 
By  the  kindness  of  E.  A.  Smith,  F.  Z.  S.,  some  of  my  species 
have  been  compared  with  those  in  the  British  Museum,  which 
has  partly  atoned  for  this  disappointment.  I  am  indebted  to  the 
politeness  of  Dr.  Paul  Fischer  and  Dr.  A.  T.  de  Rochebrunne,  of 
the  Jardin  des  Plantes,  for  affording  me  every  facility  in  the 
examination  of  the  Partuhe  in  the  Museum. 

All  species  marked  with  a  dagger  (f)  are  embraced  in  my 
collection. 

Genus  PARTULA,  Fer. 

Auriform  Division. 
I.  Faba  Group. 

fP.  faba  Mar'yn  (Limax),  Univers.  Conch.,  vol.  2,  p.  667,  figs.  78,  79,  80,  vars. 
Raiatea. 

Limax  faba  Chenu.     Bib.  Conch.,  ii,  p.  24,  pi.  24,  f.  2  a. 

Helix  faba  Gmel.,  p.  3625  ;  Wood,  Index,  p.  33,  fig.  47.     Liim.,  Dill., 
Mull. 

Helix  substriata  Gmel.,  p.  3437,  n.  11. 

Otis  faba  Humph. 

Auris  Afidce  fasciata  Chemn.     Conch.,  tab.  141,  fig.  1041. 

Voluta  auris  malc7d,  var.,  Gmel.,  p.  3437. 

Valuta  fasciata  Dill.     Des.  Cat.,  p.  502,  Id.     Helix  faba,  p.  906. 

Bulimus  Australis  Brag.     Enc.  Meth.,  i,  p.  347.     Desh. 

Bulimus  inconstans  and  tricolor  Muhlf.    Teste  Anton,  Verz.,  p.  40. 

Bulimus  faba  Albers. 

Partulus  Australis  Beck.     Lad.  Moll.,  p.  37.    Albers. 

Partulus  bulimoides  Fer. 

Partulus  bulimoides  Pfr.     Mon.  Hel.  Viv.,  302  (non  Lesson). 

Partula  Australis  FSr.     Prod.,  p.  66,  n.  2. 
\  Partula  faba  Sowb.   Rve.,  Pfr.,Woodw.,  Chenu,  A.  Adms.,  Pse.,  Piiet., 

Schm.,  Ilartm.,  Garr. 
\  Partula  faba,  var.  subangulata,  Pse.     Jour.  Conch.,  491.    Hart.,  Garr. 
f  Partula  ventricosa  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Haitm.,  Garr. 
\  Partula  amanda  Garr.  MS.     Hartm. 
\  Partula  dubia  Garr.  MS.     Hartm. 
f  Partula  ma/rginata  Garr.  MS.      Ilartm. 

Partula  bella  Pse.  MS.     Ex.  in  A.  N.  S.  ex  auctore.     Raiatea.     Non 
bellaPae.  in  P.  Z.  S.,  p.  473,  1871.     Hartm.,  Garr. 
|  Partula  brunnea  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 
\  Partula  pallida  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 
\ Partula  biangulatu  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 
\  Partula  propinqua  Pse.  MS.    Coll.  Pse,  Ilartm.,  Garr. 
]  Partula  ventrosa  Autli.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Ilartm. 

Partula  maryinata  Garr.  MS. 


1885.1  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  207 

f  P.  citrina  P.-c     A.  J.  C,  ii.  p.  195,  1866.     Raiatea. 

P.  citrina  Garr.     Terr.  Moll.  Society  Isls.,  J.  A.  N.  S.,  vol.  ix,  p.  6, 

pi.  3,  fig.  52.     Schni.,  Pfr. 
P.  citrina  Pfr.     Mon.  Ilelic.  Viv.,  p.  302. 
P.faba,  var.,  Carpt.,  Hartm. 

Obs. — In  common  with  Pse.,  Cuming  and  Pfr.,  in  former 
catalogues,  I  regarded  this  shell  as  a  variety  of  /aba.  Other 
varieties  of  / aba  are  equally  constant  in  ccflor,  but  less  abundant. 
I  defer  to  the  opinion  of  Mr.  Garrett,  who  is  fully  convinced  of 
its  specific  value,  having  collected  it  in  great  quantity. 

f  P.  vittata  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  p.  194, 1866.     Raiatea. 

P.  vittata  Garr.     Terr.  Moll.  Soct.  Isls.,  J.  A.  N.  S.,  vol.  ix,  p.  75,  pi.  3, 
fig.  56. 

P.  vittata  Pfr.     Hartm. 
\  P.  terresfris  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Piietl.,  Gloy.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 
f  P.  castunea  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 
\  P.  approximata  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Schm.,  Gloy.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 

P.  faba,  var.,  Carpt.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  675,  1864. 
\  P.  microstoma  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Hartm.  (non  Garr.). 

P.  vittata  Pfr.     Mon.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  302. 

Obs. — Mr.  Garrett  very  properly  unites  the  three  MS.  varieties 
of  Mr.  Pease,  terrestris,  castanea  and  approximata,  with  vittata 
of  which  the}-  are  modified  forms.  P.  microstoma  Pse.  MS. 
Coll.  Pse.,  are  large  examples  of  vittata  without  the  pillar  tooth. 
P.  microstoma  Pse.,  is  certainly  not  synonymous  with  P.  radiata 
Pse.  MS. 

f  P.  fusca  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  p.  193,  1866.     Raiatea. 

P.fusea  Paetel.     W.  G.  Binn.,  Pfr.,  Schm.,  Hartm. 

P.  fusca  Garr.     Terr.  Moll.  Society  Isls.,  J.  A.  N.  S.,  vol.  ix,  p.  71,  pi. 

3,  fig.  50. 
P.  ovalis  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  ii,  p.  194,  1866.     Pfr.,  Hartm.  (non  Garr.). 
P.  dentifera  Carpt.  =  ovalis  (non  Pfr.). 
P.faba,  var.,  Carpt.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  675,  1864  =  protea. 
P.  protea  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Schm.,  Pfr,  Hartm.  (non  Garr.). 
P.  navigatoria  Carpt.  (non  Pfr.). 

Obs. — In  former  catalogues  I  included  all  the  variable  terres- 
trial species,  lugubris,p>rotea,  ovalis  and  fusca,  under  fusca.  The 
type  examples  of  fusca  (Coll.  Pse.)  are  immature  shells  of  the 
uniform  dark  fuscous  ovalis,  two  quarts  of  which  were  included 
in  the  Pease  duplicates,  labeled  P.  ovalis  by  Pease.     The  shell 


208  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

is  solid,  of  a  uniform  dark  chestnut-brown  or  fuscous  color,  with 
a  white  expanded  lip,  and  the  pillar  tooth  is  absent.  I  have  seen 
several  suites  labeled  fusca,  from  the  hands  of  Mr.  Pease,  in 
which  the  banded  ovalis  and  protea  predominated.  His  descrip- 
tion calls  for  "  an  edentate  shell,  of  a  wholly  dark  chestnut  color, 
or  with  an  occasional  light  band  encircling  the  last  whorl,  or 
yellowish  striped  longitudinally  and  irregularly  with  chestnut, 
and  the  lip  stained  with  brownish  purple."  Mr.  Garrett's  fig.  = 
protea,  as  it  possesses  the  denticle  and  peripheral  band.  There 
is  considerable  variation  in  my  suites  of  this  shell,  which  may 
eventually  result  in  its  being  divided  into  two  species. 

t  P.  Iugubri8  Pse.     P.  Z.  S.,  \>.  672,  1864.     RaiaU  a. 

P.  lugubris  Pfr.     Schni.,  Garr.,  Hartm. 
P.  oralis  Garr.     Hartm.  (non  Pse.). 
P.  fusca  Hartm.  (non  Pse.). 

Obs. — I  have  followed  Mr.  Garrett  in  separating  lugubris  from 
fusca.     P.  lugubris  is  certainly  not  Pacifica  Pfr.  (E.  A.  Smith). 

t  P.  Navigatoria  Pfr.  (Bulimus),  Mon.,  iii,  p.  449.     Uaiatea. 

P.  Navigatoria  Rve.     Mon.  Part.,  tab.  4,  fig  21. 

P.  Navigatoria  Carpt.     Hartm.,  Garr. 

P.  variabilis  Pse.    A.  J.  C,  ii,  p,  203  ;  Id.,  p.  81,  pi.  1,  f.  13-15,  1806-07. 

/'.  variabilis  Pfr.     Schm.,  Piietel.,  Hartm. 

Obs. — A  comparison  of  examples  with  Pfeiffer's  tj'pes  in  the 
British  Museum,  establishes  the  fact  that  these  species  are  syn- 
onymous. As  variabilis  is  found  only  on  the  island  of  Raiatea, 
and  not  at  the  Navigator  Islands,  the  former 'is  a  misnomer,  and 
the  name  of  Mr.  Pease  should  be  retained  for  the  species. 

i  P.  radiata  Pse.  MS.     Type  in  A.  N.  S.,  ex  auotore.     Raiatea. 

P.  radiata  Garr.     Terr.  Moll.  Society  Isls.,  J.  A.  N.  S.,  vol.,  ix,  p.  74, 

fig.  45. 
P.  radiata  Hartm.     An.  <  j  . 
P.  comprexsa  Carpt.  i.non  Pi'r.).     Pse,  Schm. 
/'.  microstoma  Garr.  (non  Pse.). 
P.  vittata  L> ;ui.    mm  Pse.,  Hartm.). 

Obs. — This  shell  has  been  disseminated  by  Pease  and  the 
Museum  Godeffroyas  compressa  Pfr.,  an  error  which  1  corrected 
in  my  Bibliographic  Catalogue  of  the  Genus  Partula,  and  which 
was  subsequently  noted  by  Mr.  Ancey. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  209 

|  P.  planilabrum  Pse.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  672,  1864.     Tahaa. 

P.  planilabrum  Pfr.     "W.  G.  Binn.,  Schm.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 
P.  suturalis  Pse.  MS.  (non  Pfr.). 

Obs. — The  dark  variety  with  white  suture  is  the  Pease  type  of 
suturalis,  MS.  P.  suturalis  Pfr.,  in  the  British  Museum  =  alter- 
nata  without  bands. 

II.  Auriculata  Group. 

f  P.  auriculata  Brod.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  33,  1832.     Raiati  ■<. 

Bulimus  auriculatus  Pfr.,  1841.     Jay,  Cat.,  p.  204. 

Partulus  auriculatus  Beck,  Index. 

Partula  Otaheitana  Rve.     Mon.,  pi.  2,  fig.  11  a,  11  b. 

Partula  Otaheitana  Pfr.     Mon.  Helie.  Viv.,  p.  302. 

Partula  robusta  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Hartm. 

Partula  solidula  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse. 

Partula  auriculata  Mull.     Carpt.,  Piietel,  Schm.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 

Obs. — Owing  to  the  variable  size  and  coloration  of  this  species, 
some  of  the  old  authors  confounded  this  shell  with  Otaheitana 
Brug.,  from  which  it  is  very  distinct. 

t  P.  bilineata  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  p.  201 ;  Id.,  p.  81,  pi.  1,  fig.  10,  1866-67.     Tahaa. 

P.  bilineata  ¥m,  G.  Binn.     Pfr.,  Gloy.,  Schm.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 
P.  auriculata  Carpt.  (non  Brod.). 

f  P  compacta  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  ii,  p.  200:  Id.,  iii,  p.  81,  pi.  1,  fig.  9,  1866-67.  Raiatea. 

P.  compacta  Piietel.     Schm.,  Pfr.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 

P.  auriculata,  var.,  Carpt. 

P.  callifera  Gloyne  (non  Pfr.). 

Obs. — Mr.  E.  A.  Smitli  writes  :  "  This  shell  agrees  exactly  with 
solidula  in  the  British  Museum,  except  that  compacta  possesses 
a  denticle." 

f  P.  thalia  Garr.      Terr.   Moll.    Society   Isls.,  J.  A.  N.  S.,  vol.  ix,  p.   69,  fig.  46. 
Raiatea. 

P.  abbreviata  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.  (non  Mouss.). 

P.  auriculata,  var.,  Carpt.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  675,  1864. 

P.  Peaseiana  Garr.  MS.  (non  Peasei  Cox). 

P.  Thalia  Garr.  MS.     Hartm. 

P.  solidula  Kiist.     See  fig.  (non  Pfr.). 

Obs. — This  shell  has  been  distributed  as  abbreviata  Pse. 

15 


210  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

III.    Dentifera  Group. 
t  P.  dentifera  Pfr.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  85,  1852.     Raiatt  a. 
P.  dentifera  Chemn.     T.  44,  figs.  14,  15. 
P.  dentifera  Pse.     Carpt.,  Schm.,  ITartm.,  Garr. 
P.  decorlicata  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Hart  m. 
P.  recta  Pse.  MS.     (Non  recta  Pse.,  in  A.  J.  C.)  Hartm. 
P.  Raiatensis   Garr.  MS.      Exemp.  ex  auctore.      Hartm.,    Bib.  Cat., 

p.  186. 
P.  laUata  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Hartm.,  Paetel.,  Schm.,  Pfr. 

Obs. — My  examples  of  Raiatensis  from  Mr.  Garrett  are  much 
smaller  than  imperforata  Pse.,  to  which  he  has  recently  referred 
it.  See  Obs.  on  the  Pease  duplicates,  Bibliographic  Catalogue, 
p.  194. 

f  P.  callifera  Pfr.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  333,  1856.     Raiatea. 

P.  callifera  Garr.     Terr.  Moll.  Society  Isls.,  J.  A.  N.  S.,  vol.  ix,  p. 

60,  fig.  82. 
P.  callifera  Carpt.     Pse.,  Hartm. 
P.  megastoma  Pse.  MS.     Schm. 
P.  callistoma  Schm. 

f  P.  formosa  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Hartm.     Raiatea. 

P.formosa  Garr.     Terr.  Moll.  Society  Isls.,  J.  A.  N.  S.,  vol.  ix,  p. 

60,  pi.  3,  fig.  49. 
P.  formosa  Hartm. 

f  P.  imperforata  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse,  Hartm.     Raiatea. 

P.  imperforata  Garr.     Terr.  Moll.  Society  Isls.,  J.  A.  N.  S.,  vol.  ix, 

p.  54,  pi.  3,  fig.  53. 
P.  imperforata  Paetel.     Pfr.,  Hartm. 
P.  dentifera  Carpt.  (non  Pfr.). 

P.  recta  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.  (non  recta  Pse.  in  A.  J.  C). 
P.  auriculata  var.  Carpt.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  675,  1864. 
P.  Raiatensis  Garr.  MS.  (non  Hartm.). 

|  P.  virginea  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Hartm.     Tahaa. 

P.  virginea  Garr.     Terr.  Moll.  Society  Isls.,  J.  A.  N.  S.,  vol.  ix,  p. 

61,  pi.  3,  fig.  54. 

P.  virginea  "W.  G.  Binn.     Schm.,  Hartm. 

P.  solidula,  var.,  Carpt.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  675,  1864. 

t  P.  lutea  Lesson.     Voy.  Coq.,  p.  .'525,  1856.     Bora-bora  Islands. 
Bulimus  luteus  Desh.     Pfr. 
Partula  lutea  Pfr.     Pse.,  Hartm. 
P.  solidula  Schm.  (non  Rve.). 
P.  lilacina  Pfr.    Pse.,  Hartm. 

Obs. — The  type  lilacina  is  an  example  denuded  of  epidermis, 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  211 

exhibiting  the  lilac  color  of  the  shell  beneath.     The  locality,  Mar- 
quesas, is  probably  an  error. 

f  P.  Garrettii  Pse.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  672,  1864,  p.  473,  187J.    Raiatea. 

P.  Garrettii  Garr.     Terr.  Moll.  Society  Isls.,  J.  A.  N.  S.,  vol.  ix,  p. 

56,  pi.  3,  fig.  48. 
P.  Garrettii  Ph.     Schm.,  Hartm. 
P.  gonocheila  Schm.  (non  Pfr.). 

IV.    Umbilicata  Group. 

t  P.  umbilicata   Pse.     A.  J.  C,  ii,  p.  200,  1866;    Id.,  iii,  p.  81,  pi.  1,  fig.  7,   1867. 
Taliaa. 

P.  umbilicata  Piietel.     W.  G.  Binn.,  Schm.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 
P.  auriculata,  var.,  Carpt. 

f  P.  gibba  Fe>.     Prodr.,  p.  66,  No.  66.     Guam  Island. 

P.  gibba  Rve.     Con.  Icon.,  Monog.  Part.,  fig.  15  a,  15  b. 

Helix  gibba  Quoy. 

Bulimus  gibbus  Desh.     Chemn. 

Partula  gibbus  Beck. 

Partula  mastersi  Pfr.     Hartm. 

f  P.  bicolor  Pse.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  473,  1871.     Guam  Island. 

P.  bicolor  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  vii,  p.  26,  pi.  9,  f.  4,  1872. 
P.  bicolor  Hartm.     Bib.  Cat.,  p.  180,  1881. 

t  P.  crassilabris  Pse.    A.  J.  C,  ii,  p.  199 :  Id.,  iii,  p.  81,  pi.  1,  f.  6,  1866-67.    Raiatea. 
P.  crassilabris  Schm.     Pfr.,  Hartm. 
P.  Otaheitana  Rve.     (NonBrug.)    Baiatea. 
P.  Hebe,  var.,  Carpt. 

P.  rustica  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  ii,  p.  199  ;  Id.,  p.  81,  pi.  1,  fig.  5. 
P.  rustica  Schm.     Pfr. 
P.  auriculata  Carpt.  (non  Brod.). 
P.  crassilabris  Gloyne.     Hartm. 
P.  pinguis  Garr.  MS.    Hartm. 

Obs. — I  do  not  agree  with  Pease  and  others  in  separating  this 
variable  terrestrial  form  into  two  species.  See  Bibliographic  Cata- 
logue Partula,  page  187. 

f  P.  Hebe  Pfr.  (Bulimus).     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  39,  1846.     Raiatea. 
Bulimus  Hbe  Chemn. 

Partula  Hebe  Pfr.     Rve.,  Pse.,  Piietel,  Schm.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 
Partula  globosa  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Hartm.,  Gloyne,  Schm. 
Partula  ventricosa  Garr.  MS.     Hartm. 
P.irtula  Hebe,  var.  bella,  Pse.    P.  Z.  S.,  p.  473,  1871. 


212  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Y.  Expansa  Group. 

t  P.  expansa  Pse.    A.  J.  C,  p.  26,  pi.  9,  f.  3,  1871.     Tutvila. 

P.  externa  Pse.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  473,  1871  (error  for  expansa). 
P.  externa  Pfr.,  viii,  p.  204.     Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  302. 
P.  externa  Hartm.     Bib.  Cat.  Part.,  182. 

Obs. — In  Europe  this  shell  is  usually  mistaken  for  zebrina  Gld. 

f  P.  Peasei  Cox.     P.  Z.  S.,   p.  644,  pi.  52,   f.  2,  1871.        Malay ta   Island,   Solomon 

Islands. 

P.  PeaseiPfr.,  vi,  48.    Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  303. 
P.  Peasei  Hartm.     Bib.  Cat.  Part.,  185. 

Obs. — I  am  indebted  to  Dr.  Cox  for  this  extremely  rare  shell. 
This  group  does  not  approximate  in  structure  any  other  species 
except  umbilicata;  they  have  been  placed  here  provisionally,  the 
anatomy  of  the  animal  ma}*-  confer  upon  them  another  status. 

VI.   Otaheitana  Group. 

f  P.  Otaheitana  Brug.  (Bulimus).     Ency.  Meth.,  i,  p.  347,  No.  84,  1792.      Tahiti. 

Bulimus  Otaheitanus  Desh.     Lam.,  Kiist.,  Pfr. 

Bulimus  amabilis  Pfr. 

Bulimus  Isabellinus  Pfr. 

Bulimus  luccis  Gray. 

Bulimus  auriculatus  Pfr. 

Helix  perversa  Chemn. 

Helix  Otaheitana  Dilhv. 

Helix  laevis  ?  Wood. 

Partulus  Otaheitanus  Beck.     Albers. 

Partulus  Vanikorensis  Beck. 

Partulus  auriculatus  Beck. 

Partula   Otaheitana  Fer.      Grat.,    Rve.,  Jay,  Pfr.,  Piietel,    Hartm., 
Garr. 

Partula  Vanikorensis  Lam.     Pfr.,  Gld.,  Piietel,  Hartm.,  Garr.  (non  P. 
Vanikorensis  Quoy  and  Gaim.  (Helix), 
f  Partula  Isabellina  Rve.     Pfr.,  Piietel,  Hartm.,  Garr. 
f  Partula  amabilis  Pfr.     Rve.,  Pse.,  Piietel,  Gloyne,  Hartm.,  Garr. 
t  Partula  rubescens  Rve.     Pfr.,  Pse..  Hartm.,  Garr. 
f  Partula  Reeveiana  Pfr.     Cliemn.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 

Partula  Tahitana  Gld.     Pse.,  Schm.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 

Partula  Taheitenxis  Piietel. 

Partula  Tahulana  Anton.     Hartm. 

Partula  lignaria  Garr.  (non  Pse.,  Pfr.,  Chemn.,  Hartm.). 

Partula  affinis  Garr.  (non  Pse.,  Plr.,  Schm.,  Hartm.). 

Partula  rufa  Carpt.     Hartm.  (non  Less.). 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  213 

f  Partula  sinistorse  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Paetel,  Schin.,  Pfr.,  Gloyne, 
Hartm.,  Garr. 

Partula  sinistralis  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Paetel,  Pfr.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 
t  Partula  crassa  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 
t  Partula  perversa  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 
t  Partula  turricula  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.  (non  turricula  Pse.,  in  A.  J.  C, 
1872),  Hartm.,  Garr. 

Partula  varia  Carpt.  (non  Brod.). 

Partula  Pacifica  Pfr.     Hartm. 

Partula  diminuta  C.  B.  Adms.     Hartm. 

Obs. — From  the  list  of  synonyms  attached  to  this  variable 
shell,  it  would  seem  that  for  many  years  it  has  been  regarded  as 
"  a  refuge  for  the  destitute.'' 

P   Vanikorensis  Quoy  and  Gaim.  (Helix).     Voy.  Astrolabe,  ii,  p.  115,  pi.  9,  fig.  12- 
17,  1830.      Yaiiikoro  Island. 

Bulimus  Vanikorensis  Lam.,  Pfr. 

Partulus  Vanikorensis  Beck. 

Partula  Vanikorensis  Pfr.     Paetel,  Hartm.,  Garr. 

Obs. — In  former  catalogues  I  followed  Dr.  Gould,  who  placed 
this  species  as  a  synonym  of  Otaheitana  Brug.  After  an  exami- 
nation of  the  types  of  Quo}-  and  Gaimard,  in  the  Collection  of 
the  Jardin  des  Plantes,  Paris,  I  cannot  but  restore  the  species. 
The  shell  is  thinner  than  Otaheitana,  of  a  uniform  pale  red  color, 
with  the  apical  whorls  inflated  and  rounded.  In  collections  it  is 
usually  represented  by  Otaheitana,  affiiiis,  and  stolida. 

f  P.  lineata  Lesson  (  3ulimus).     Voy.  Coquille,  p.  324,  figs.  8-9, 1826.     Ounlan  Island. 
Partulus  torosus  Beck. 
Partula  lineatus  Albers. 
Partula  lineata  Hartm.     Bib.  Cat.,  p.  183. 

Obs. — Lesson's  figure  is  so  very  different  from  that  of  Mr. 
Reeve,  that  for  the  present  I  am  inclined  to  keep  the  species 
separate,  notwithstanding  Captain  Brazier  writes, "  that  he  crossed 
the  Island  of  Oualan  twice,  without  finding  it."  Mr.  Reeve  first  con- 
founded it  with  vexillum  Pse.  Mr.  E.  A.  Smith  writes, "  Vexillum 
Pease  is  not  lineata  in  the  British  Museum,"  and  he  believes  that 
"  Reeve's  determination  of  vexillum  —lineata  Less.,  is  erroneous." 
Pease  in  the  Smithsonian  Collection  says  lineata  =elongata.  The 
latter  is  smaller,  and  wants  the  single  narrow  bright  red  band  on 
the  middle  of  the  body-whorl.  Lesson's  figure  is  the  size  and 
outline  of  P.  producta  Pse.,  and  like  producta  the  denticle  is 
absent  on  the  pillar  lip,  both  in  his  figure  and  description. 


214  rROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

("  P.  Mooreana  Ilartm.     Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  p.  229,  1880.     Moorea,  Mair/nfnas.     (iarr., 
Terr.  Moll.  Society  Isls.,  J.  A.  N.  S.,  vol.  ix,  p.  59,  fig.  55,  tab.  iii. 

t  P.  lignaria  Pse.    P.  Z.  S.,  p.  671,  1864.     Tahiti. 

P.  lignaria  Pfr.     Schm.,  Piietel,  Gloyne,  Hartm.  (non  Garr.). 

P.  affinis  Pse.    Pfr.,  Schm.,  Hartm.  (non  Garr.). 

P.  nit  ens  Pfr.     Hartm. 

P.  rufa  Carpt.     Hartm.  (non  Lesson). 

P.  Otaheitana,  var.  fasciata,  Fer.     Coll.  Jardin  des  Plantes. 

Obs. — I  do  not  assent  to  lignaria  and  affinis  as  synonyms  of 
Otaheitana.  See  my  Bibliographic  Catalogue  of  Partula,  pages 
119  and  183.  I  possess  numerous  examples  of  all  the  varieties 
of  this  species  ;  several  are  albinos,  some  are  white  with  a  brown 
band,  var.  fasciata  Fe'r.,  others  are  dark  brown  with  darker 
oblique  striae  and  a  dark  band  at  the  periphery,  var.  lignaria. 
The  variety  affinis  is  always  of  a  dark  bay-brown,  usually  with 
darker  oblique  striae  and  a  smooth  surface.  All  possess  a 
button-like  pillar  tooth,  and  the  base  of  the  aperture  has  a  looped 
appearance,  which  is  a  constant  character  of  this  shell.  Some  of 
the  smaller  examples  of  Otaheitana  resemble  it  (probably  the 
result  of  hybridization),  but  they  may  always  be  distinguished 
by  the  red  color  of  the  shell  and  lip.  In  most  collections  this 
shell  is  labeled  rufa. 

f  P.  stolida  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  ii,  p.  198,  1868.     Tahiti. 

P.  stolida  Garr.     Terr.  Moll.  Society  Isls.,  J.  A.  N.  S.,  vol.  ix,  p.  70, 

pi.  3,  fig.  58. 
P.  stolida  Pfr.     Hartm. 
P.  Vanikorensis  Carpt.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  675,  1864  (non  Quoy  and  Gaim.). 

f  P.  filosa  Pfr.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  262,  1851.      Tahiti. 
P.  filosa  Chemn.     Hartm. 

P.  filosa  Garr.     Terr.  Moll.  Society  Isls.,  J.  A.  N.  S.,  vol.  ix,  p.  64. 
P.  lineolata  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  p.  224,  1867.     Schm.,  Pfr. 

f  P.  nodosa  Pfr.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  262,  1851.     Tahiti. 

P.  trilineata  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  iii,  t.  1,  f.  10,  Pfr. 

P.  nodoxa  Hartm. 

P.  nodosa,  var.  trilineata,  Pse. 

|  P.  producta  Pse.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  671,  1864.     Raiatea. 

P.  producta  Garr.     Terr.  Moll.  Soct.  Isls.,  J.  A.  N.  B.,  vol.  ix,  p.  66, 

pi.  3,  fig.  51. 
P.  producta  Pfr.     Schm.,  Hartm. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP  PHILADELPHIA.  215 

t  P.  suturalis  Pfr.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  98,  1865.     Moorea. 

P.  suturalis  Pfr.     Nov.  Conch.,  vol.  i,  tab.  17,  figs.  18-19. 

P.  stenostoma,  Pfr.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  97,  1855.     Hartm. 

P.  stenostoma.     Nov.  Conch.,  vol.  i,  tab.  17,  figs.  1G— 17. 

P.  strigosa  Pfr.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  384,  1850.     Hartm. 

P.  vexillum  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  ii,  p.  198 ;  Id.,  iii,  p.  81,  pi.  1,  fig.  8,  18GG-G7. 

Hartm. 
P.  alternata  Pse.  MS.     Coll.  Pse.,  Hartm. 
P.  nodosa  Carpt.  (non  Pfr.). 
P.  lineata  Rve.     Garr.  (non  Lesson). 

Obs. — I  agree  with  Mr.  Garrett  in  combining  all  these  variable 
shells  from  Moorea  under  one  species,  but  I  doubt  if  they  = 
lineata  Lesson.  Suturalis  and  strigosa,  in  the  Cumingian  Collec- 
tion, are  only  varieties  of  the  Moorea  shell;  stenostoma  and 
suturalis  were  described  by  Pfeiffer  from  examples  in  the  British 
Museum,  which  are  only  varieties  of  alternata  and  vexillum 
Pease. 

VII.    Tseniata  Group. 

f  P.  taeniata  Mb'rch  (Bulimus).     Cat.  Conch.     Kierulf.,  p.  29,  pi.  1,  fig;  5,  1840. 
Moorea. 
P.  tceniata  Pfr.,  iii,  p.  451.     Carpt.,  Hartm. 
P.  spadicea  Chenu,  t.  64,  fig.  31-32.     Pfr.,  Rve.,  Hartm. 
P.  striolata  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  ii,  p.  197,  1866  ;  iii,  p.  81,  pi.  1,  fig.  4,  1867. 

Pfr.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 
P.  simulans  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  ii,  p.  202,  1866,  p.  81,  pi.  1,  fig.  11.     Pfr., 

Hartm.,  Garr. 
P.  elongata  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  ii,  p.  196,  1866  ;  iii,  p.  81,  pi.  1,  fig.  2,  1867. 

Pfr.,  Schm.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 
P.   Erhelii  Morelet.     J.  Conchyl.,   t.    2,    f.  7,    1853.     Moorea.     Pfr., 

Hartm. 
P.  nucleola  Pse.  MS.     Coll.,  Pse.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 
P.  peraffinis  Pse.  MS.     Pfr. 

Obs. — Mr.  Garrett  very  properly  remarks,  "  this  is  truly  a 
protean  species."  Of  this  fact  I  have  been  cognizant  since  I 
examined  the  duplicate  collection  of  the  late  Mr.  Pease.  In  six 
pints  of  duplicates  from  Moorea  the  connection  between  the 
varieties  was  readily  traceable ;  on  comparison  "  there  is  no 
difference  between  examples  of  these  shells  and  those  of  spadicea 
in  the  British  Museum,  except  that  some  are  a  trifle  shorter." 
Morch's  habitat,  Fiji  Isles,  for  taeniata,  is  probably  an  error,  as 
his  examples  "  were  purchased  of  a  whale  fisher."  Pfeiffer,  in 
the  last  edition  of  his  Catalogue  of-  Partula,  says  peraffinis  Pse. 
MS.  =  elongata  Pse. 


21G  PROCEEDINGS  OP   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

t  P.  clara  Pse.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  671,  1864.     Tahiti. 
P.  clara  Pfr.     Hartm. 
P.  clara  Garr.     Terr.  Moll.  Society  Isls.,  J.  A.  N.  S.,  vol.  ix,  p.  56,  pi. 

iii,  fig.  75. 
P.  hyalina  var.?  Carpt.     Pfr.,  Norn.  Hel.  Viv.,  p.  301. 

P.  micans  Pfr.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  138,  1852.     Solomon  Islands. 
P.  micans  Chenin.     Tab.  66,  figs.  12,  13. 
P.  micans  Pfr.     Nona.  Helic.  Viv.,  p,  303  (non  Hartm.). 

f  P.  Carteriensis  Quoy  and  Gaim.  (Helix).    Voy.  Astrol.,  ii,  p.  117,  pi.  9,  fig.  10. 
Carteret  Island,  N.  Ireland. 

Bulimus  Carteriensis  Pfr.,  ii,  68.    Desh. 

Partulus  Carteriensis  Beck. 

Partula  Carteretensis  Rve. 

Partula  Carteriensis  Hartm.     Pfr.,  Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  301. 

f  P.  hyalina  Brod.  (Bulimus).     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  32,  1832.     Tahiti,  Maguaia  hid.,  Garr., 
Rurutu,  Le  Gage  ;   Tumaco  Cuming. 

P.  hyalina  Pse.,  ii,  p.  67.     Chemn.,  t.  64,  f.  19,  20. 

Bulimus  hyalinus  Desh. 

Partulus  hyalinus  Beck. 

Partula  hyalina  Rve.     Hartm.;  Pfr.,  Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  301. 

Obs. — This  is  the  most  widely  distributed  of  any  known  spe- 
cies of  Partula. 

t  P.  attenuata  Pse.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  672,  1864.     Ilaiatea,  Tahiti. 

P.  attenuata  Pfr.,  iv,  507.     Schni.,  Gloyne,  Hartm.,  Garr. 

P.  gracilis  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  p.  197,  1867  ;  Id.,  p.  81,  pi.  1,  fig.  3. 

P.  gracilis  W.  G.  Binn.     Pse.,  Paetel,  Hartm.,  Garr. 

P.  gracilior  Pse.  MS.     Hartm.,  Ex.  in  A.  N.  S.,  ex  auctore.     Isabel 

Island. 
P.  Carteretensis  Garr.  (non  Rve.). 

Obs. — Mr.  Garrett  makes  Carteretensis  Rve.  synonymous  with 
this  shell,  to  which  I  do  not  assent. 

P.  Hartmani  E.  A.  Smith.     P.  Z.  S.,  1884.      Wild  and  Pigeon  Islands. 
P.  cinerea  Albers.     Mai.  Blatt.,  p.  98,  1857.     Solomon  Islands. 

P.  cinerea  Pfr.,  iv,  510.     Hartm. 

P.  cinerea  Pfr.     Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  301. 

■f  P.  lyrata  Mousson.     Jour.  Conehyl.,  xviii,  p.  126,  1870.     Tavinu,  Viti  Isles. 

P.  lyrata  Hynein.,  in  Mai.  Blatt.,  xiv,  t.  1,  fig.  1  (Dentes).     Somma 

Island,  Feejee  Islds. 
P.  lyrata  Ph.,  iv,  158;  Haitm.;  Pfr.,  Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  301. 

|  P.  flexuosa  Bartm.     P.  A.  N.  S.,  1885. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  217 

f  P.  laevigata  Pfr.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  334,  1856. 

P.  laevigata  Pfr.,  iv,  Hartm.;  Pfr.,  Nona.  Helic.  Viv.,  302. 
P.  grisea  Lesson  (Bulimus).     Voy.  Coquill.,  xiii,  p.  325,  pi.  13,  f.  11,  1829.     New 
(iitinea. 

Bulimus  griseus  Pfr. 
Partulus  griseus  Alb. 
Par  tula  grisea  Pfr.,  Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  301.     Hartm. 

f  P.  concinna  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  vii,  p.  196,  1872.      Tanna  Island,  New  Hebrides. 

P.  concinna  Pfr.,  viii,  205  ;  Pfr.,  Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  302.     Hartm. 
f  P.  pellucida  Pse.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  457,  1871.     Guadelcanar  Itland,  Solomon  [elands. 

P.  pellucida  Pfr.,  viii,  199 ;  Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  301. 

P.  micaiis  Hartm. 

Obs. — This  shell  was  collected  by  Mr.  John  Brazier  and  pre- 
sented to  Mr.  Pease.  Heretofore  I  confounded  this  shell  with 
Coxi  Angas  MS.,  and  micans  Pfr.,  it  is  smaller  than  either  of 
the  former  and  very  thin  and  pellucid.  It  is  the  smallest  Partula 
known. 

f  P.  Coxi  Angas  MS.     Cox,  Cat.  Land  and  Mar.  Shells,  Austr.  and  adjacent  Islands, 
p.  46,  1868.      Isabel  Isld.,  Solomon  Isles. 

P.  Coxi  Hartm.     Bib.  Cat.  Part.,  p.  181,  1881.      „ 

Obs. — Through  the  kindness  of  Captain  Brazier,  of  Sydney, 
Australia,  I  have  been  presented  with  a  number  of  examples 
from  the  original  lot  collected  by  himself.  It  is  rather  larger 
than  pellucida  Pse.,  more  elongated ;  the  aperture  is  also  larger 
and  more  elongate,  and  the  lip  more  expanded.  The  length  of 
pellucida  is  10  mill.,  while  that  of  Coxi  is  15  mill. 

VIII.  Decussatula  Group. 

t  P.    decussatula    Pfr.    (Bulimus).      P.    Z.    S.,    p.    131,    1850.     Dominique    Island, 
Marquesas. 

P.  decussatula  Rve.     Mon.  Part.,  Spec.  24,  pi.  4,  fig.  23,  1849. 
P.  decussatula  Chemn.,  t.  65,  figs.  8,  9.     Hartm. 
P.  decussatula  Pfr.     Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  303. 

t  P.  Magdalinae  Hartm.     P.  A.  N.  S.,  1885.     Magdalena  Isld.,  Marquesas. 

f  P.  bellula  Hartm.     P.  A.  N.  S.,  1885.      Wapo  Isld.  and  Dominique,  Marquesas. 

IX.    Turgida  Group. 

t  P.  turgida  Pse.  (Bulimus).     P.  Z.  S.,  p   670,  1864      Baiatea. 
P.  turgida  Hartm.     Bib.  Cat.  Part.,  188. 

P.  turgida  Garr.     Terr.  Moll.  Society  Isls.,  J.  A.  N.  S.,  vol.  ix,  p.  56, 
pi.  3,  fig.  74. 


218  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

i  P.  annectens  Pse.  (Bulimus).     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  671,  1864.     Huaheine. 

P.  annectens  Pfr.,  vi,  p.  48 ;  Pfr.,  Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  303.     Hartm. 
P.  tinnecteits  Garr.     Terr.  Moll.  Society  Isls.,  J.  A.  N.  S.,  vol.  ix,  p. 
66,  pi.  3,  fig.  70. 
I  P.  arguta  Pse.  (  Bulimus).     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  670,  1864.     Hu«h,  ine. 

P.  arguta  Pfr.,  vi,  46  ;  Hartm.;  Garr.,  Terr.  Moll.  Society  Isls.,  vol.  ix, 

p.  G'2,  pi.  3,  fig.  57. 
P.  arguta  Schm.,  Martn.  and  Langk. 

P.  minuta  Pfr.     P.  Z.  S.,  p   381,  18:6.     Admiralty  Minds. 
P.  minuta  Pfr.,  iv,  p.  514.    Hartm. 
P.  minuta  Pfr.     Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  303. 

X.  Rosea  Group. 

t  P.  rosea  Prod.  (Bulimus).     P.  Z.  S  ,  p.  125,  1832.     Enah  in. . 

P.  rosea  Mull.     Rve.,  Jay,  Pfr.,  Pse.,  Piietl.,  Schm.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 

P.  rosea  Pfr.     Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  301. 

P.  purpurascens  Pfr.,  iv,  p.  511.     Hartm. 

P.  simplaria  Morelet.     Jour.  Conchyl.,  iv,  p.  370,  pi.  11,  figs.  13-14, 

1*53. 
P.  cognata  Pse.     Coll.  Pse.,  Schm.,  Gloyne,  Hartm.,  Garr. 

f  P.  calypso  0.  Semper.     Jour.  Conchyl.,  xiii,  t.  12,  fig.  7.     Island  /'.  lelin. 
P.  calypso  Pfr.,  vi,  185  ;  Hartm.  ;  Pfr.,  Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  300. 
P.  thetis  O.  Semp.     Jour.  Conchyl,,  xiii,  t.  12,  fig.  6. 
P.  thetis  Pfr.,  vi,  155  ;  Hartm.  ;  Pfr.,  Nom.  Hel.  Viv.,  p.  300. 
P.  leucotha'e  O.  Semp.     Jour.  Conchyl.,  xiii,  t.  12,  f.  5. 
P.  leucothai ?  Pfr.,  vi,  .155  ;  Hartm.  ;  Pfr.,  Nom.  Hel.  Viv.,  p.  300. 

Obs. — These  shells  are  all  from  one  island.     "  The  figures  are 
all  of  one  type,  differing  only  in  size  and  coloration."1 
f  P.  varia  Brod.     P.  Z.  S..  p.  125,  1832.     Huafo  in. . 

P.  varia  Mull.     Rve.,  Pfr.,  Pse.,  Piietel,  Schm.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 

Btdimus  varius,  Pfr. 

Bulimus  roseus,  var.,  Pfr. 

P.  varia  Pfr.     Nom.  Hel.  Viv.,  p.  301. 

P.  glutinoso  Pfr.     Piietel,  Hartm.,  Garr. 

P.  mncida  Pfr.     Hartm.,  Garr. 

P.  pulchra  Pse.,  MS.     Mus.  Godeff.  Cat.,  v,  p.  92. 

P.  Huaheinensis  Garr.,  MS.     Hartm.,  Garr. 

P.  bicolor  Garr.,  MS.     Hartm.,  Garr. 

P.  adusta  Garr.     Hartm.,  Garr. 

P.  perplexa  Pse.     Coll.  Pse.,  Hartm.,  Garr. 

Obs. — Mr.  Garrett's  residence  at  Huaheine  for  some  years  has 


Hartm.,  in  Bib.  Cat. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES    OF    PIHLADELPHIA.  219 

afforded  him  excellent  opportunities  of  observing  this  species, 
and  he  records  very  full  particulars  of  its  varieties  and  distribu- 
tion. I  have  been  in  accord  with  him  for  a  long  time  in  assign- 
ing glutinosa  Pfr.  to  varia.  I  think  Pfeiffer  at  one  time  claimed 
Reeve's  fig.  17  &,  pi.  3,  Monog.  Part.,  as  his  glutinosa.  This  fig. 
represents  the  shell  in  Coll.  A.  N.  S.  labeled  P.  strigosa  Pse. 
ex  auctore.  The  latter,  however,  is  a  Marquesas  shell,  which  I 
have  recently  discovered  to  =  a  dark  variety  of  recta  Pse. 
See  recta  Pease. 

t  P.  assimilis  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  p.  230,  pi.  15,  f.  28,  29,  1867.     Earotongn    Inland. 
P.  assimilis  Pfr.,  viii,  197  ;  Pfr.,  Norn.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  301  ;  Hartm. 
P.  Cookiana  Mouss.  MS.,  p.  28,  figs.  28,  29  ;  Garr.  in  litt. 
P.  Cookiana  Mouss.     Paetel. 

t  P.  virgulata  Pse.     Jour.  Conchyl.,  3d  series,  p.  401,  1876.     Rarotonga. 
P.  virgulata  Hartm.     Bib.  Cat.  Part.,  p.  189,  1881. 

f  P.  subgonocheila  Mousson.     Jour.  Conchy.,  xix,  t.  3,  fig.  4.     Fortuna  and  Bauao 

hiamh. 

P.  subgonocheila  Pfr.,  viii,  p.  203,  Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  302  ;  Hartm. 
XI.   Ganymedes  Group. 

t  P.  ganymedes  Pfr.  (Bulimus).     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  39,  1850.     Dominique  hid.,  Marquesas. 
P.  ganymedes  Rve.     Mon.  Part.,  No.  16,  pi.  3,  fig.  16. 
P.  ganymedes  Pfr.     Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  302.     Hartm. 
P.fasciata  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  ii,  p.  202,  1866,  var.     Hartm. 
P.  gonocheila  Hartm.  (non  Pfr.). 

t  P.  inflata  Rve.  (Bulimus)      P.  Z.  S.,  p.  197,  1842. 

P.  inflata  Rve.     Conch.  Syst.,  pi.  175,  fig.  11,  12. 

P.  inflata  Rve.     Mon.  Part.,  No.  3,  figs.  3  a,  3  b,  1849. 

Bulimus  thersites  Pfr. 

Bulimus  thersites  Chemn.,  t.  64,  figs.  5,  6. 

Partulus  thersites  Albers. 

Partula  inflata  Pfr.     Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  303.     Hartm. 

P.  gonocheila  Pfr.  (Bulimus).     Zeit.  fur  Malaool.,  p.  82,  1847.     Navigator  Islands. 
P.  gonocheila  Pfr.,  ii,  69. 
P.  gonocheila  Rve.     Mon.  Part.,  t.  4,  fig.  19. 
P.  gonocheila  Chem.,  t.  64,  figs.  33,  34. 
P.  ganymedes  Hartm.     Bib.  Cat.  Part.,  p.  182. 
P.  gonocheila  Pfr.     Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  302. 

Obs. — There  seems  to  be  some  confusion  about  this  species  ; 
the  examples  of  gonocheila  in  the  British  Museum  do  not  agree 


220  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

with  the  figure  of  gonocheila  Reeve,  which  latter  =  ganymedes 
in  nrv  collection.  This,  however,  may  be  explained  by  Cuming's 
habit  of  substituting  what  he  considered  better  examples  for 
those  already  in  the  Museum  collection.  Reeve's  habitat  is 
Navigator  Islands.  I  have  restored  the  species  with  the  expec- 
tation that  his  gonocheila  may  yet  be  found  at  the  Navigator 
Islands.  The  present  examples  in  the  British  Museum  look  to 
me  like  some  varieties  of  recta  Pease. 

f  P.  recta   Pse.     A.  J.  C,  iv,  p.  155,  pi.   12,  f.  8,  1868.      Mountains  of  M«nni  and 
Nukuhiwa   Ixlds.,  Marquesas. 

P.  recta  Pfr.,  viii,  202.  Nom.  Helic  Viv.,  p.  302. 

P.  strigata  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  iv,  p.  155,  pi.  12,  f.  7,  1868.     Marquesas. 

P.  repanda  Hartm.  (non  Pfr.). 

Obs. — This  is  a  very  variable  shell  in  size,  shape,  color  and  tex- 
ture. See  recta  Pse.,  Bib.  Cat.  Part.,  p.  186.  P.  strigata  Pease  = 
the  dark  brown  variety  of  recta.  There  were  about  one-and-a-half 
pints  of  examples  of  this  species  amongst  the  duplicates  of  the 
collection  of  the  late  Wm.  H.  Pease  ;  four  varieties  were  seem- 
ingly embraced  in  the  lot ;  the  larger  number  were  of  the  white 
variety,  some  of  which  resemble  repanda  Pfr.  On  a  comparison 
with  repanda  in  the  British  Museum  they  proved  to  be  distinct. 
These  shells  vary  from  white  through  different  shades  of  yellow 
and  reddish  to  dark  reddish  brown.  The  inner  margin  of  the 
aperture  is  more  or  less  waved  and  the  columella  more  or  less 
nodose,  the  lip  usually  partaking  of  the  color  of  the  shell. 

P.  repanda  1'fr.,  iv,  512.     New  Hebrides. 
P.  recta  Hartm.  (non  Pse. ). 
P.  repanda  Pfr.     Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  302. 

t  P.  actor  Alliers  (Partulus).     Helicien,  p.  87,  1850.     Samoa  Tsldt. 
P.  actor  Pfr.,  iii,  p.  450. 
P.  actor  Chemn.,  t.  48,  figs.  13,  14. 
P.  actor  Pfr.     Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  303. 

P.  Recluziana  Petit.     Jour.  Oonchyl.,  t.  7,  f.  5,  1850.     Tntuila. 
P.  Recluziana  Pfr.,  iii.  p.  45  J. 
P.  Recluziana  Pfr.     Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  303. 
P.  zebrina  Gld.     Exped.  Shells,  t.  6,  f .  89.     Tntuila  and  Samoa. 
P.  zebrina  Pfr.     Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  303. 
P.  zebrina  Hartm.     Bib.  Cat.  Part.,  p.  189. 

Obs. — I  have  several  examples  of  this  shell  from  the  collection 
of  the  late  Mr.  Taylor,  England.     They  were  obtained  by  the 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  221 

Belcher  Expedition  (Voyage  Samarang).  Similar  examples  are 
contained  in  the  collections  of  Gould,  Cox  and  others,  from  Upolu, 
Tutuila  and  Samoa.  In  Europe  P.  expansa  Pse.,  from  Tutuila,  is 
the  shell  often  mistaken  for  zebrina. 

t  P.  Tryoni  Hartm.     P.  A.  N.  S.,  1885.     Solomo,,  Islands. 


Buliminoid  Division. 
XII.    Guamensis  Group. 

f  P.  Guamensis  Pfr.  (Bulimus).     Phil ,  Abbild.  und  Beschreib.  Conch.,  ii,  p.  173, 
pi.  4,  f.  9,  1821.      Ponape,  Caroline  Islands. 

P.  Guamensis  Pfr.,  ii,  p.  73. 

P.  Guamensis  Rve.     Mon.  Part.,  t.  1,  f.  4. 

P.  brumalis  Rve.     Mon.  Part.,  t.  1,  f.  2. 

Partula  Guamensis  Pfr.     Norn.  Helic,  302.     Hartm. 

Obs — P.  Guamensis  Pfr.,  is  not  found  at  Guam,  one  of  the  La- 
drone  Islands,  and  hence  is  a  misnomer,  which  might  be  changed 
to  Ponapensis,  one  of  the  Caroline  Islands,  at  which  it  occurs. 
The  Cox  collection  contained  examples  labeled  Ascension  Island. 

P.  obesa  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  iii,  p.  223,  t.  15,  f.  12,  1867.     Fortuna  and  Vavao  Islands. 
P.  obesa~Pfr.,  viii,  201. 
P.  obesa  Pfr.     Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  302. 
P.  obesa  Hartm.     Bib.  Cat.  Part.,  p.  184. 

Obs. — This  species  is  very  scarce  as  no  one  has  collected  in 
those  islands  since  Dr.  Graff  visited  them. 

P.  abbreviata  Mousson     Jour.  Conchyl.,  xvii,  p.  339,  pi.  15,  f.  7,  1869.     Tutuila. 
P.  abbreviata  Pfr.,  viii,  p.  200. 
P.  abbreviata  Hartm.    Bib.  Cat.  Part.,  p.  179  (non  abbreviata  Pse.  MS. ). 

f  P.  rufa  Lesson   (Bulimus).     Voy.   Coquille,  tome  2,  pt.  1,  p.  324,  1S30.     0><alan, 
Caroline   Islands. 

P.  rufa  Pfr.,  ii,  229  ;  Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  302. 

Partnlus  rufus  Beck. 

Partula  rufa  Less,  (non  Carpt.,  Hartm.). 

Obs. — This  shell,  of  which  Dr.  Cox  and  Capt.  Brazier  have  given 
me  examples,  has  been  re-discovered  on  the  Island  of  Oualan  by 
Capt.  Brazier.  It  is  a  much  larger  shell  than  stolida  or  ajfinis, 
with  which  it  is  usually  confounded. 


222  PEOCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

t  P.  conica  Gld.     Proc.  Bost.  S.  N.  Hist.,  p.  196,  1841.     Raraka  and  Samoa  Islands. 
P.  conica  Gld.     Exped.  Shells,  fig.  88. 
P.  conica  Pfr.,  iii,  445,  iv,  507. 
P.  conica  Pfr.     Novit.  Conch.,  i,  tab.  34,  f.  8,  9. 
P.  conica  Pfr.     Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  300. 
P.  Upolensis  Mouss.  MS.     Paetel.,  p.  104.     Upolu. 
P.  canalis  Mouss.     Jour.  Conchyl.,  xiii,  p.  132,  1800.     Upolu,  Tulare. 
P.  canalis  Pfr.     Nona.  Ilelic.  Viv.,  p.  300. 
P.  bulimoides  Hartm.     Bib.  Cat.  part,  p.  180  (non  Less.). 

Obs. — I  possess  these  shells  from  the  Islands  of  Tutuila,  Upolu 
and  Samoa.  Like  actor  Albers,  it  is  a  denizen  of  several  islands  of 
this  group.  Dr.  Gould,  in  his  description  of  this  species,  embraces 
the  dextral  and  sinistral  forms  of  the  yellow  and  brown  varieties. 
Others  profess  to  see  a  difference,  which  has  resulted  in  a  needless 
synonymy. 

P.  bulimoides  Lesson.     Voy.  Coq.,  p.  326,  1829.     New  Guinea, 
P.faba  ?  var.,  Pfr.     Norn.  Helic.  Viv.  p.  302. 
P.  bulimoides  Hartm.     Bib.  Cat.  Part.,  p.  180. 

Obs. — Although  Lesson's  brief  diagnosis  of  bulimoides  approxi- 
mates nearer  to  some  varieties  of  conica  than  to  any  known 
species,  his  measurements  of  the  shell  and  the  locality  induce  me 
to  restore  the  species. 

XIII.    Macgillivrayi  Group. 
f  P.  Macgillivrayi  Pfr.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  325,  185(5.     .V.  w  IT,  brides. 

P.  Macgillivrayi  Pfr.,  iv,  508  ;  Nov.  Conch.,  i,  t.  17,  f.  14,  15. 
P,  Macgillivrayi  Pfr.     Nona.  Helic.  Viv.,  p.  301  ;    Hartm.,  Bib.  Cat., 
Part.,  184. 
jP.  TurneriVtr.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  140,  1860  vi,  159';    Norn.  Helic,  Viv., 
302.     Erromango  Island. 
P.  Margillivarayi  Hartm.     Bib.  Cat.  Part.,  188. 

Obs. — I  have  a  number  of  examples  of  this  shell,  which  is 
somewhat  variable.  I  am  indebted  to  Capt.  Brazier  for  speci- 
mens from  Vati,  Sandwich  Island,  New  Hebrides. 

f  P.  Caledonica  Pfr.  ( Bulimus).     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  387, 1861,  V«vn«.    Tavu,  Hayiks  Island, 
N.  Hi  brides. 

\P.  Pfeifferi  Crosse.     Jour.  Conchyl.,  xix,  p.  184,  1871.     Vavua,  Tavu. 

P.  Pfeifferi  Pfr.     Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  301. 
+  P.  Brazieri  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  vii,  p.  27,  pi.  9,  f.  5,  1872.     Tutuila. 

P.  Macgillivrayi  Pfr.,  viii,  194  ;  Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  300. 

P.  Macgillivrayi  Hartm.     Bib.  Cat.  Part.,  p.  180. 

Obs. — Capt.  Brazier  writes  that  he  only  obtained  one  example 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  223 

of  this  shell  at  Tutuila,  which  was  given  to  Mr.  Pease,  and  never 
returned.  The  example  in  the  Coll.  A.  N.  S.,  labeled  "  P.  Brazieri 
Pease  ex  auctore  "  is  of  the  New  Hebrides  type  and  agrees  with 
my  example  of  Turneri. 

P.  turricula  Pse.     A.  J.  C,  p.  190,  1*72.     N<  »   Hebrides? 
P.  turricula  Pfr.,  viii,  197  ;  Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  301. 
P.  turricula  Hartm.     Bib.  Cat.  Part.,  p.  188. 

f  P.  glaber  Hartm.     P.  A.  N.  S.,  1885.     Hah. .' 

f  P.  compressa  Pfr.  {BuHmui),  iii,  447.     Fiji  Islands. 

P.  compressa  Rve.     Mon.  Part.,  t.  4,  f.  20. 

P.  compressa  Pfr.     Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  301. 

P.  compressa  Hartm.     Bib.  Cat.  Part.,  181. 

f  P.  alabastrina  Pfr.  (Bulimus).     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  39,  1856.     Fiji  Mauds. 
P.  alabastrina  Pfr.,  iv,  509  ;  Norn.  Helic.  Viv.,  301. 
P.  alabastrina  Hartm.     Bib.  Cat.  Part.,  179. 

f  P.  radiolata  Pfr.     P.  Z.  S.,  p.  39,  1846.      Guam  Inland. 

P.  radiolata  Pfr.,  ii,  69  ;  Nom.  Helic.  Viv.,  301.     Hartm. 
P.  radiolata  Chemn.,  t.  64,  f.  17,  18. 
Partulus  radiolatus  Albers. 

f  P.  Layardii  Brazier.     Mand  of  Salisboe. 

Obs. — Unlike  other  Partulae  this  species  is  devoid  of  emb^onic 
fovea  or  spiral  striae.  The  former  are  minute  longitudinal 
wrinkles,  which  are  continued  over  the  coarse  longitudinal  striae 
of  the  surface.  The  aperture  is  of  a  reddish  orange  color,  with 
a  large  mammilliform  tooth  on  the  pillar  lip,  and  a  wide  columella 
above,  together  with  an  open  umbilicus.  The  general  facies  is 
that  of  a  Placostylus,  which  induced  Mr.  C.  F.  Ancey  to  create 
the  subgenus  Diplomorpha  for  the  species.  Mr.  Layard  having 
sent  me  several  of  the  animals  in  alcohol,  they  were  referred  to 
Mr.  Wm.  G.  Binne}r,  and,  notwithstanding  the  external  differences, 
"  he  finds  the  jaw,  lingual  dentition  and  genitalia  like  other 
Partulae." 


224  proceedings  of  the  academy  of  [1885. 

July  14. 
Mr.  Geo.  Y.  Shoemaker  in  the  chair. 
Thirteen  persons  present. 

On  large  Crystals  of  Stibnite. — Dr.  A.  E.  Foote  exhibited  a 
specimen  of  stibnite  which  was  shown  by  the  Commissioners  of 
the  Japanese  Empire  at  the  World's  Exposition,  New  Orleans, 
and  pronounced  by  them  to  be  the  finest  ever  found.  It  is  a 
large  fan-like  group,  twenty-two  inches  high  by  nine  inches  wide. 
The  crystals  vary  in  diameter  from  one  to  two  inches.  The 
largest  is  perfectly  terminated.  The  Japanese  locality,  which 
h:is  hitherto  been  incorrectly  given,  is  Iyo.  On  account  of  their 
remarkable  brilliancy,  extraordinary  size,  and  great  number  of 
crystalline  planes,  it  is  the  most  remarkable  metallic  mineral 
ever  found.  The  known  planes  of  stibnite  are  now  eighty-five, 
of  which  forty,  described  by  E.  S.  Dana  from  this  locality, 
are  new. 


July  21. 
Dr.  A.  E.  Foote  in  the  chair. 
Seventeen  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  Revision  of  the  Pakeocrinoidea,  Part  III," 
by  Charles  Wachsmuth  and  Frank  Springer,  was  presented  for 
publication. 

July  28. 

Mr.  Thos.  Meehan,  Vice-President,  in  the  chair. 

The  death  of  Gen.  U.  S.  Grant,  a  member,  was  announced. 

The  following  was  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


PROC.  ACAD  NAT  SEC  PHILA 


pl  n 


IifliWemw  i.WmieT,Fianhfo:te'M 


CERVALCES    AMERICANUS. 


PROC.  ACAD.   NAT.  SCI.   PHILAD'A,  1885 


MAP    OF 

MARGINAL    KAMES 

in  Eastern  Pennsylvania, 


H.  CARVILL  LEWIS. 

The  Terminal  Moraine  and  Karnes  are  marked  in  red. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  225 


REVISION  OF  THE  PAL.EOCRINOIDEA. 
BY   CHARLES   WACHSMUTH   AND   PRANK    SPRINGER. 

Part  III. 

DISCUSSION  OF  THE  CLASSIFICATION  AND  RELATIONS  OF 

THE  BRACHIATE  CRINOIDS,  AND  CONCLUSION 

OF  THE  GENERIC  DESCRIPTIONS. 


Introductory  Remarks. 

During  the  five  years  that  have  elapsed  since  the  publication 
of  the  first  part  of  this  work,  great  progress  has  been  made  in 
the  study  of  the  Crinoids,  both  recent  and  fossil,  and  many  new 
and  interesting  forms  have  been  discovered  and  described. 

A  number  of  publications  have  appeared,  "which  must  be 
regarded  as  among  the  most  important  contributions  that  have 
ever  been  made  to  the  literature  of  the  subject.  During  the 
course  of  our  studies  for  the  present  paper,  we  have  had  the 
benefit  of  these  discussions  and  researches,  in  many  instances 
through  the  personal  kindness  of  our  scientific  friends.  We  have 
been  especially  favored  in  this  respect  by  receiving  from  Dr.  P. 
Herbert  Carpenter  many  of  the  proof-sheets  of  plates  and  text, 
in  advance  of  publication,  of  his  magnificent  work  on  the  Crinoids 
of  the  Challenger  collections.  This  has  been  of  the  utmost  value 
to  us,  and  we  feel  that  we  cannot  be  too  grateful  to  the  distin- 
guished author  for  his  courteous  attention. 

We  may  be  pardoned  for  alluding  to  the  satisfaction  we  have 
felt  at  the  kind  reception  our  work  has  met,  at  the  hands  of  our 
co-laborers  both  in  this  country  and  in  Europe.  That  our  views 
would  encounter  criticism,  was  expected,  and  indeed  desired  by 
us.  The  criticisms  have  for  the  most  part  been  made  in  a  true 
scientific  spirit,  with  a  view  to  elucidating  the  truth.  They  have 
in  many  cases  been  of  value  to  us,  and  have  enabled  us  to  review 
the  questions  raised  in  a  new  light.  As  a  matter  of  course  errors 
on  our  part  have  been  discovered  and  pointed  out. 

In  the  meantime  we  ourselves  have  learned  a  great  deal  more 
about  Crinoids  than  we  knew  at  the  time  we  wrote  our  first  part, 
independently  of  the  discussions  and  criticisms  above  referred 
to.    We  have  now  a  far  more  complete  collection  of  the  literature 

16 


226  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

than  existed  in  the  United  States  at  that  time.  Our  materials 
for  study  in  the  way  of  specimens  have  also  been  greatly  aug- 
mented, and  for  many  of  the  advantages  we  possess  in  this 
respect  we  are  under  extraordinary  obligations  to  the  naturalists 
and  collectors  of  the  United  States  and  Canada.  Many  of  these 
gentlemen,  with  rare  liberality,  have  placed  their  collections  at 
our  disposal,  and  forwarded  to  us,  at  the  risk  of  loss  in  transit, 
unique,  valuable  and  original  specimens.  We  desire  to  express 
our  grateful  thanks  for  favors  of  this  kind  to  Prof.  Whiteaves, 
Director  of  the  Canada  Survey  ;  Prof.  Whitfield,  of  the  American 
Museum,  New  York ;  Dr.  C.  A.  White,  of  the  Smithsonian  Insti- 
tution ;  Prof.  Worthen,  Director  of  the  Illinois  State  Survey ;  Mr. 
Walter  R.  Billings,  of  Ottawa ;  Mr.  S.  A.  Miller  and  Prof.  Wetherby, 
of  Cincinnati ;  Mr.  I.  H.  Harris,  of  Waynesville,  0.;  Mr.  William 
Gurley,  of  Danville,  111.;  Mr.  R.  R.  Rowley,  of  Curryville,  Mo.; 
Mr.  James  Love,  of  Burlington,  Iowa,  and  others.  We  are  also 
under  great  obligations  to  our  friend,  Orestes  St.  John,  who 
executed  the  drawings  which  illustrate  this  paper.  We  consider 
ourselves  peculiarly  fortunate  in  enlisting  the  co-operation,  for  this 
purpose,  of  one  who  is  both  a  trained  and  able  naturalist  and  a 
skilful  artist. 

As  a  result  of  our  recent  researches,  we  have  naturally  been  led 
to  entertain  new  ideas,  and  in  some  cases  to  a  modification  of 
views  at  first  entertained. 

In  the  present  paper,  which  appears  as  Part  III  of  the  Revi- 
sion, we  give  a  description  of  the  genera  that  have  not  been 
considered  in  Parts  I  and  II,  and  shall  also  state  the  results  ot 
our  further  studies  in  their  bearing  upon  the  genera  heretofore 
discussed. 

In  the  beginning  of  this  work  we  recognized  two  great  divisions 
among  Crinoids,  viz. :  Palaeocrinoidea  and  Stomatocrinoidea,  for 
the  latter  of  which  we  afterwards  adopted  Carpenter's  preferable 
name  Neocrinoidea.  We  divided  the  Paleeocrinoidea  into  three 
great  families,  based  upon  as  many  distinct  plans  of  structure. 
We  did  not  at  first  undertake  to  identify  the  different  subgroups 
into  which  these  might  be  divided,  except  provisionally  in  some 
instances,  although  we  recognized  the  propriety  of  such  subdi- 
vision. Prof.  Zittel  had  established  twenty-two  families  of 
Crinoids,  and  while  his  classification  has  great  merit,  and  is  in 
many  essential  particulars  in  accordance  with  our  own  views,  it 


1885.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  22? 

was  defective  in  not  recognizing  the  more  comprehensive  relations 
which  exist  among  these  animals.  His  groups  failed  to  express 
the  distinctions  in  plan  of  structure,  which  we  have  pointed  out. 
While  we  are  satisfied  that  the  necessities  of  classification 
require  the  recognition  of  a  large  number  of  family  groups,  which 
we  have  not  hitherto  sought  to  define,  we  are  more  than  ever 
convinced  that  the  three  great  groups  which  we  originally  estab- 
lished, are  the  only  really  reliable  ones,  for  the  reason  that  they 
are  founded  upon  well-defined  plans  of  structure. 

The  Plates  of  the  Abactinal  System. 

Dr.  P.  Herb.  Carpenter  in  his  Challenger  Report,  p.  1,  describes 
"  the  organization  of  a  Crinoid  to  be  broadly  divisible  into  two 
well-marked  portions,"  to  which  he  applies  the  general  names 
"ambulacral  and  antiambulacral."  The  ambulacral  portion  is 
"  the  visceral  mass  or  disk  in  which  is  situated  the  whole  of  the 
digestive  tube  with  both  its  terminal  openings,  and  it  contains  the 
central  ends  of  the  radial  water-vessels  and  blood-vessels."  The 
antiambulacral  portion  "  consists  of  the  stem  and  its  appendages, 
the  calyx,  and  the  skeleton  of  the  rays,  arms  and  pinnules."  The 
two  portions,  he  states,  correspond  on  the  whole  to  the  actinal 
and  abactinal  systems  of  Echinoderms  generally,  and  were  de- 
veloped, respectively,  around  the  left  and  right  water-tube,  or 
what  are  generally  called  the  left  and  right  larval  antimers. 
The  whole  of  the  calyx  and  the  arm  skeleton  are  formed  on  the 
right  antimer ;  the  disk  and  the  extensions  of  the  peristome,  and 
the  perisomic  plates  clothing  its  ventral  surface,  on  the  left 
antimer. 

In  all  recent  Crinoids,  and  so  far  as  known,  in  all  Neocrinoids, 
the  calyx  is  restricted  to  the  dorsal  side  of  the  Crinoid,  and  all 
structures  along  the  ventral  side  form  a  part  of  the  disk  or  its 
extensions.  The  calyx  consists  of  few  plates,  as  a  general  rule 
only  of  basals  and  radials.  Comparatively  few  genera  have  under- 
basals.  Interradials  have  been  described  only  in  Guettardicrinus, 
in  a  few  species  of  Apiocrinus,  in  Uintacrinus,  and  in  the  remark- 
able recent  genus  Thaumatocrinus  which  exceptionally  also  has 
anal  plates.  None  of  these  plates,  however,  extend  beyond  the 
limits  of  the  dorsal  cup. 

In  the  Palseocrinoidea  the  structure  of  the  calyx  is  much  more 
complex.     Underbasals  are  represented  in  nearly  one-half  of  the 


228  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

known  genera,  and  all  have  interradials,  by  means  of  which  fre- 
quently a  large  series  of  arm  plates  are  incorporated  into  the 
calyx,  and  thereby  elevated  to  the  rank  of  radials.  The  term 
"calyx,"  although  applied  sometimes  in  a  general  way  to  the 
whole  skeleton  exclusively  of  arms  and  column,  has  been  of  late 
restricted  to  the  dorsal  cup,  and  all  structures  upon  the  ventral 
surface  were  called  variously  vault,  dome  or  disk.  It  has  been 
the  general  opinion  that  all  plates  located  ventrally,  in  analogy 
with  the  Neocrinoidea,  either  were  perisomic,  or  at  least  formed  a 
part  of  the  actinal  system.  This  is  the  view  expressed  by  Car- 
penter in  the  Challenger  Report,  and  we  must  acknowledge  it 
was  our  own  until  quite  recently.  We  now  hold  that  a  large  part 
of  the  ventral  surface,  throughout  the  Palaeocrinoidea,  was  covered 
by  abactinal  plates,  and  that  the  calyx  extended  to  the  summit 
pieces,  the  so-called  "  apical  dome  plates."  In  this  sense  the 
term  "  calyx  "  will  be  used  by  us  in  this  part  of  the  Revision, 
while  the  plates  beneath  the  free  arms  comprise  the  "  dorsal  cup." 
We  further  use  the  term  "  ventral  disk  "  exclusively  to  denote  the 
upper  surface  of  the  visceral  mass,  in  which  the  mouth  is  situated, 
and  from  which  the  food  grooves  radiate  outward.  The  "  disk  " 
is  clothed  by  the  "  perisome,"  which  may  be  exposed  to  view  or 
subtegminal,  simply  membranous  or  studded  with  plates  ;  if  sub- 
tegminal,  it  is  covered  by  the  "  vault,"  which  may  be  rigid  or 
pliable. 

The  name  "  Camarata  "  is  proposed  for  all  Palaeocrinoidea  in 
which  the  lower  arm  plates  are  incorporated  into  the  calyx  by 
interradial  plates,  and  in  which  all  component- parts  of  the  test, 
dorsally  and  ventrally,  are  solidly  connected  by  suture. 

Under  the  name  "  Articulata  "  we  include  those  families  in 
which  the  plates  of  the  test  are  united  by  loose  ligaments  or 
muscles,  and  in  which  they  are  somewhat  movable. 

The  name  u Inadunata"  is  proposed  for  all  Palaeocrinoidea  in 
which  the  arms  are  free  above  the  first  radials  and  which  have 
five  single  interradials,  located  ventrally. 

These  groups  will  be  better  defined  at  the  proper  place. 

A.   The  Basals  and  Underbasals. 

The  basals  are  represented  in  the  Palaeocrinoidea  by  one  or  two 
rino-s  of  plates.  The  basals  proper  constitute  the  first  ring  beneath 
the  radials  ;  the  second  or  proximal  ring  contains  the  underbasals. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OP   PHILADELPHIA.  229 

There  is,  however,  one  exception  to  this  rule,  presented  by  the 
remarkable  genus  Acrocrinus  (PL  6,  fig.  1),  in  which  the  basals 
and  radials  ai'e  separated  by  from  four  to  fifteen  rings  of  small 
pieces,  their  number  varying  in  species,  and  increasing  in  the 
growing  Crinoid. 

The  plates  of  the  basal  ring  are  laterally  connected  except  in 
the  two  genera  Zeacrinus  and  Calpiocrinus.  In  the  former  they 
are  small,  trigonal,  acuminate  pieces,  which  externally,  and  also 
at  the  inner  floor  of  the  calyx,  are  separated  by  the  radials,  which 
with  their  truncated  lower  angle  meet  the  underbasals.  In  Cal- 
piocrinus four  of  the  basals  seem  to  be  totally  absent  externally, 
and  only  the  posterior  one  is  represented  by  a  small  quadrangular 
piece.  The  underbasals  differ  considerably  in  size,  and  are  fre- 
quently covered  entirely  b}r  the  column.  In  such  cases  it  is  often 
exceedingly  difficult  to  distinguish  them  from  the  upper  stem 
joint.  Several  species  have  been  described  with  underbasals 
which  do  not  possess  them,  and  Heterocrinus  and  Glyptocrinus 
were  thought  to  contain  species  with  underbasals  and  without 
them. 

Considering  the  importance  that  has  been  given  to  the  presence 
of  underbasals  in  classification,  and  the  difficulty  of  identifying 
them  in  some  groups,  it  is  of  some  importance,  that  we  have 
discovered  a  method,  by  which,  in  most  cases,  the  presence  or 
absence  of  underbasals  can  be  ascertained  accurately  from  the 
column,  the  position  this  occupies  toward  the  general  symmetry 
of  the  cal}x  ;  from  the  outer  angles  of  the  stem  joints,  their  posi- 
tion and  that  of  the  cirrhi,  whether  these  are  radial  or  interradial, 
and  from  the  direction  of  the  rays  in  the  axial  canal.  The  follow- 
ing rules  prevail : — 

1.  In  species  with  underbasals,  whenever  the  column  is  pentan- 
gular, its  longitudinal  angles  are  directed  interradially,  the  sides 
and  columnar  cirrhi  radially ;  on  the  contrary,  in  species  with 
basals  only,  those  angles  are  radial,  the  sides  of  the  column  and 
the  cirrhi  interradial. 

2.  When  there  are  underbasals  and  the  column  is  pentapartite, 
the  five  sections  of  the  column  are  radial,  the  longitudinal  sutures 
interradial,  the  radiation  along  the  axial  canal  radial ;  but  the 
opposite  is  the  case  when  basals  only  exist. 

For  further  particulars,  we  refer  to  our  diagrams  on  Plate  6, 
which  represent  species  of  widely  different  groups ;  and  we  will 


230  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

state  that,  notwithstanding  we  have  made  the  most  scrupulous 
researches  throughout  our  extensive  collections  and  closely 
examined  the  descriptions  and  figures,  we  have  not  found  a  single 
exception  to  this  rule  among  all  Palaeocrinoidea.  There  are  slight 
deviations,  caused  by  the  quadrangular  form  of  certain  columns 
in  species  which  have  otherwise  a  pentamerous  symmetry,  but  we 
find  this  also  among  the  basals,  which,  when  composed  of  four 
pieces,  cannot  be  strictly  interradial. 

Among  Neocrinoidea,  our  investigations  could  be  extended 
only  to  comparatively  few  genera,  as  unfortunately  these  forms 
have  either  a  round  column  or  a  circular  canal.  Only  in  a  few 
species  of  Pentacrinus,  Miller  ocrinus  and  Ajriocrinus  did  we 
succeed  in  making  out  one  or  the  other  of  these  points.  In  these 
genera,  underbasals  are  said  to  be  absent,  but,  curiously  enough, 
the  outer  angles  of  the  column  are  interradial,  the  cirrhi  and 
radiation  along  the  axial  canal  radial,  exactly  as  in  the  column  of 
Palasocrinoidea  with  underbasals,  and  what  is  more  remarkable, 
as  in  Extracrinus,  in  which,  on  the  contrary,  underbasals  are  said 
to  be  present.  The  latter  seems  to  suggest  that  probably  many 
Neocrinoidea  either  possess  small  underbasals,  or  these  were 
present  in  their  larval  form.  This  view  is  strengthened  by  the 
fact  that  underbasals  have  been  found  lately  in  the  younger 
stages  of  many  Ophiurids  and  Asteroids. 

Prom  our  observations  it  is  proved  conclusively  that  the  under- 
basals are  not  developed  from  the  upper  stem  joint,  as  had  been 
supposed  by  some  writers,  but  represent  an  independent  element, 
as  shown  by  the  fact  that  the  longitudinal  sections  in  Crinoids 
with  a  quinquepartite  column,  always  alternate  with  the  proximal 
plates  in  the  calyx.  It  is  also  now  apparent  to  us  that  the  under- 
basals are  morphologically  of  greater  importance  than  has  been 
generally  supposed. 

Carpenter's  important  discovery  that  the  basals  represent  the 
genitals,  the  first  radials  the  oculars  of  the  Echini,  and  conse- 
quently that  the  proximal  radial  ring  of  plates  in  dicyclic  Crinoids 
cannot  be  basals,  has  been  now  generally  conceded  by  European 
naturalists,  while  in  America  it  has  been  accepted  only  by  Prof. 
Wetherby,  Prof.  Williams  and  ourselves,  although  no  objections 
were  urged  against  it  until  lately  by  S.  A.  Miller.  The  latter, 
instead  of  attempting  to  prove  the  falsity  of  Carpenter's  views, 
makes  the  singular  remark  1  hat  the  use  of  the  term  underbasals, 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  231 

in  describing  species  "  has  given  rise  to  the  expression  "  "  under- 
basals  obsolete,"  "  which  everyone  must  concede  is  ridiculous." 
Is  the  phrase  "  subradials  unrepresented  "  or  "  obsolete  "  less 
ridiculous  to  Mr.  Miller,  especially  considering  that  those  plates 
are  interradial  in  position  ?  He  further  says :  "  The  policy 
of  changing  the  nomenclature  may  well  be  doubted."  "The 
claim  is  made  that  the  change  will  bring  the  nomenclature  used 
in  denning  recent  Crinoids  in  conformity  with  that  used  in 
describing  fossils,  but  as  long  as  this  is  doubted,  it  is  better  to 
adhere  to  the  established  or  prevailing  methods  of  description." 
We  cannot  see  what  this  has  to  do  with  recent  and  fossil  Crinoids. 
If  it  is  right  in  the  one  group  it  is  right  in  the  other,  for  they  are 
built  fundamentally  on  the  same  plan.  The  question  is  simply 
this:  In  Crinoids  with  a  dic}Tclic  base  are  the  plates  of  the 
proximal  ring  or  those  of  the  inner  ring  the  homologues  of  the 
basals  in  monocyclic  Crinoids  ?  If  the  latter  is  the  case,  and  we 
think  it  has  been  most  satisfactory  proved  by  Carpenter,  the 
term  basals  should  be  applied  iu  all  cases  to  the  interradial  ring, 
no  matter  what  the  "  prevailing  methods  "  have  been  heretofore. 
Certainly  Mr.  Miller  would  not  call  the  anus  of  fossil  Crinoids 
the  mouth,  for  the  reason  that  it  was  called  so  by  the  most 
eminent  earlier  writers.  Besides,  the  term  "  subradials  "  is  illog- 
ical, as  the  plates  to  which  the  name  was  applied  are  interradial 
in  position. 

In  the  Neocrinoidea,the  basals,  with  the  exception  of  Hyocrinus, 
consist  of  five  pieces,  and  in  comparatively  few  cases  an  anclry- 
losis  took  place.  In  the  Palseocrinoidea,  however,  among  Crinoids 
with  a  monocyclic  base,  anchylosis  of  two  or  more  of  its  plates  is 
the  rule.  We  find  five  basals  only  in  Silurian  genera,  but  asso- 
ciated with  one  genus  having  four.  Four  basals  do  not  prevail 
beyond  the  Devonian,  and  apparently  not  bej^ond  the  middle 
portion  of  it.  Three  basals  commence  in  the  Upper  Silurian  and 
continue  to  the  close  of  the  Subcarboniferous,  while  two  basals 
are  found  exclusively  in  the  latter  epoch. 

The  number  of  underbasals  is  five,  with  but  few  exceptions. 
Xenocrinus  has  four ;  the  Ichthyoci'inidae,  Gissocrinus,  Lecythio- 
crinus,  Tribrachiocrinus,  three ;  while  in  the  Carboniferous 
Stemmatocrinus  the  underbasals  form  a  perfectly  anch}rlosed 
disk.  The  latter  was  taken  by  Carpenter  to  be  a  top-stem 
joint,  an   interpretation   which    we   cannot    accept,   but   as   we 


232  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

discuss  this  question  under  Stemmatocrinus,  we  need  not  enter 
upon  it  here.  An  anchylosis  of  the  underbasals  occurs  also 
in  Agassizocrinus  by  the  deposition  of  new  material  around  the 
outer  surface  before  reaching  maturity,  b}T  means  of  which  the 
sutures  externally  and  internally  become  obliterated.  The  same 
is  the  case  with  the  basals  in  Edi'iocrinus. 

In  cases  of  three  unequal  basals,  the  position  of  the  smaller 
plate  varies  among  the  different  orders,  but  is  unchanged  in  the 
same  one.  In  all  Palaeocrinoidea  this  plate  is  located  between 
the  anterior  and  left  postero-lateral  ray  (PI.  6,  figs.  21,  25,  26); 
in  the  Blastoidea  between  the  anterior  and  right  postero-lateral 
ray  (PL  6,  fig.  24);  in  the  recent  genus  Hyocrinus  immediately 
to  the  right  of  the  anus  (Challenger  Report,  p.  218).  In  genera 
with  only  two  basals,  such  as  Dichocrinus,  Talarocrinus,  Pteroto- 
crinus  and  Acrocrinus,  the  interbasal  suture  passes  from  the 
posterior  to  the  anterior  side  (PI.  6,  fig.  3,  and  PL  9,  fig.  1). 
When  there  are  three  unequal  underbasals,  as  in  the  case  of  the 
Ichtlryocrinidse  (PL  6,  fig.  23),  and  in  Tribrachiocrinus  (PL  6, 
fig.  5),  the  smaller  one  is  placed  anteriorly. 

B.    The  Radial  and  Arm  Plates. 

With  the  exception  of  Acrocrinus,  the  radials  proper,  the  repre- 
sentatives of  the  oculars,  constitute  the  first  row  of  plates 
succeeding  the  basals,  with  which  they  alternate.  In  most  of  the 
Palaeocrinoidea  they  do  not  form  a  continuous  ring,  being  inter- 
rupted posteriorly  by  an  anal  piece,  and  sometimes  by  additional 
plates,  while  in  some  groups  all  five  radials  are  separated  by  five 
interradials,  so  as  to  form  jointly  a  ring  of  ten  plates  around  the 
basals.  In  the  Palaeocrinoidea  generally,  the  radials  and  their 
associates  are  united  by  suture  with  each  other  and  with  the 
basals.  In  Cromyocrinus  the  union  is  by  syzygy,  but  in  a  few 
of  the  later  Poteriocrinidae  those  plates  are  provided  laterally, 
and  toward  the  basals,  with  more  or  less  deep  fossae,  which 
suggest  a  less  close  union  and  a  certain  degree  of  mobilit}r.  In 
some  species  of  Forbesiorrin  us,  Ichthyocrinus  and  Taxocrinus,  and 
probably  in  the  Ichthyocrinidae  generally,  the  radials  were  united 
with  one  another  by  muscles;  with  the  interradials,  however,  by 
ligament,  their  lateral  faces  being  provided  with  deep  fossae  and 
dentations  along  the  edges.     (PL  5,  figs.  3-5). 

In  some  Silurian  genera,  the  radial  at  the  right  posterior  side 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  233 

makes  an  exception  to  the  general  rule,  by  either  not  touching 
the  basals  at  all,  or  only  toward  the  right,  as  in  most  of  the 
Poteriocrinidae  and  Cyathocrinidae,  while  the  lower  left  side  abuts 
against  the  azygous  plate.1     In  still  others,  one  or  more  of  the 
radials  are  compound,  consisting  of  two  sections,  horizontally 
connected  by  suture,  which,  combined,  have  about  the  form  and 
size  of  the  adjoining  single  radials,  and  are  succeeded  by  the  same 
number  of  brachials  as  the  others.    This  peculiar  structure,  which 
to  some  extent  disturbs  the  general  symmetry,  and  which  occurs 
throughout  different  families,  but  onty  among  Silurian  and  Lower 
Devonian  genera,  is  evidently  of  some-importance  as  representing 
a  very  early  phase  of  these  Crinoids.     The  lower  segments  are 
probably  embiyonal  plates,  which  were  resorbed  by  the  upper 
segments,  i.  e.,  the  permanent  radials  ;  in  a  similar  manner  as  the 
az}'gous  and  anal  plate  are  resorbed  by  the  right  posterior  radial, 
which  in  most  of  the  earlier  Inadunata  either  is  missing,  as  in  the 
case  of  Baerocrinus,  or,  as  in  others,  imperfectly  developed.     In 
Baerocrinus2  one  of  the  earliest  known  Crinoids,  the  azygous 
piece  forms  a  continuous  ring  with  its  four  radials,  and  has  the 
same  proportion.     In  the  allied  Hoplocrinus,  however,  the  right 
upper  corner  of  the  azygous  plate  is  absorbed  and  replaced  by  a 
small  trigonal  arm-bearing  piece,  the  right  posterior  radial ;  the 
left  corner  of  the  plate  remaining  intact.    This  is  taken  up  by  the 
anal  piece  in  Hybocrinus.     In  Dendrocrinus  the  azygous  plate  is 
reduced  to  the  size  of  the  posterior  radial,  with  which  it  is  con- 
nected by  a  horizontal  suture.  In  Homocrinus  this  suture  assumes 
a  sloping  position,  thereb}7  again  decreasing  the  proportions  of 
the  azygous  plate.     In  Poteriocrinus  the  latter  is  reduced  to  quite 
a  narrow  piece,  and  the  radial  toward  the  right  is  almost  as  large 
as  that  on  the  opposite  side.    In  Cyathocrinus  and  Graphiocrinus 
the  azygous  plate  has  disappeared  entirely,  and  both  posterior 
radials  are  equal  in  size,  but  separated   b}_  an  anal  piece.     In 

1  The  term  "  azygous  plate  "  is  used  here,  and  throughout  Part  III,  exclu- 
sively for  the  uusymmetrical  lower  plate  of  the  posterior  (anal  or  azygous) 
interradius,  the  so-calk'd  "  first  anal  plate"  of  most  American  writers.  We 
reserve  the  term  "anal  piece"  for  the  plate  enclosed  within  the  ring  of 
radials. 

2  For  further  information  on  Baerocrinus  and  the  gradual  resorption  of 
the  azygous  and  anal  plate  in  the  Inadunata  generally,  we  direct  attention 
to  our  paper  on  Hybocrinus,  Hoplocrinus  and  Baerocrinus ;  Amer.  Journ. 
Sci.,  1883,  vol.  xxvi,  p.  365. 


234  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Erisocrinus  the  anal  plate  also  is  resorbed,  and  all  five  radials 
are  perfectly  uniform. 

Comparing  the  gradual  reduction  of  the  azygous  piece,  from  a 
strictly  radial  non-arm-bearing  plate  to  its  ultimate  resorption  by 
the  light  posterior  radial,  with  the  modifications  which  the  lower 
sections  of  the  compound  radials  undergo  among  species,  it 
appears  to  us  that  the  azygous  piece  may  represent  the  lower 
segment  of  the  posterior  radial.  This  is  further  suggested  by 
the  genera  Anomalocrinus  and  Heterocrinus,  in  which  the  azygous 
piece,  upon  its  truncate  upper  side,  supports  the  right  posterior 
radial,  which  has  the  form  and  position  of  the  upper  section  of 
the  compound  radials  ;  while  the  az3^gous  piece  has  the  form  of 
their  lower  section.  The  respective  plates  in  both  cases  resemble 
each  other  so  closely,  jointly  and  separately,  that  they  were  all 
described  as  radials. 

In  the  Actinocrinidse,  Platj'crinidse,  Rhodocrinidae,  and  in  all 
groups  in  which  the  general  symmetry  is  not  disturbed  by  the 
presence  of  an  azygous  plate,  the  radials  are  more  or  less  equal 
in  size,  the  only  remarkable  exceptions  being  the  Catillocrinidse 
and  Calceocrinidae.  In  Catillocrinus  only  the  two  antero-lateral 
radials  are  approximately  alike.  All  the  others  differ  widely  in 
shape  and  size,  and  while  these  two  plates  support  from  fourteen 
to  thirty  arms  each,  the  three  others  have  rarehy  more  than  one. 
Another  peculiarity  of  this  genus  is  that  it  has  no  axillary  plates, 
all  the  arms  being  given  off  directly  from  the  radials  without  the 
assistance  of  brachials.  Calceocrinus  has  but  three  radials,  of 
which  the  anterior  one  is  composed  of  two  parts,  which,  however, 
are  not  alwa}rs  continuous. 

Our  view,  that  the  arms  fundamentally  commence  with  the 
plate  above  the  first  radials,  whether  this  is  free  or  incorporated 
into  the  calyx,  has  been  fully  accepted  by  P.  H.  Carpenter,  Chall. 
Rep.,  p.  48,  who  further  proves  it  by  the  developmental  history  of 
the  plates.  The  outer  radials,  he  states,  "  commence  as  imperfect 
rings,  which  soon  become  filled  up  with  lengthening  fasciculated 
tissue,  just  as  in  the  case  with  the  stem  joints  and  Inter  brachials;" 
but  "  the  first  radials,  like  the  basals  and  orals,  commence  as  ex- 
panded cribiform  films."  He  further  agrees  with  us  that  in 
practice,  for  purposes  of  description,  it  is  more  convenient  to 
regard  the  arms  as  commencing  with  the  first  free  plate,  provided 
their  real  nature  is  tiol  lost  sight  of. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  235 

The  mode  of  union  between  the  higher  radials  is  either  by 
suture  or  articulation.  A  sutural  union  is  found  in  the  Actino- 
crinidae,  Rhodocrinidae,  Platvcrinidae,  Eucalyptocrinidae,  and  all 
genera  for  which  we  propose  the  collective  name  Camarata.  Union 
by  articulation  prevails  in  the  radials  of  the  Ichthyocrinidae, 
Crotaloerinidaa  and  the  Articulata  generally.  In  most  of  the 
Ichthycrinidse,  the  transverse  faces  had  muscles  and  ligament  so 
as  to  permit  motion  in  all  directions  (PI.  6,  figs.  3,  4).  The  lateral 
faces  contain  deep  fossaa,  surrounded  by  a  dentated  margin  (PI. 
6,  fig.  5).  P.  H.  Carpenter  and  other  writers  express  the  opinion 
that  in  Platycrinus  also  the  first  radials  were  united  to  the  outer 
plates  by  articulation.  They  evidently  were  led  to  this  supposi- 
tion by  some  of  the  figures,  which  show  what  appears  to  be  a 
transverse  articular  ridge,  but  which  really  marks  out  the  inner 
end  or  termination  of  the  small  wedge-shaped  second  radial.  This 
plate,  in  man  3'  of  the  Platyeriniche,  does  not  extend  out  to  the 
end  of  the  scar,  the  remaining  part  being  only  covered  by  the 
third  plates.  We  have  examined  thousands  of  detached  radials 
of  this  genus,  which  indicate  plainly  that  the  union  was  in  most 
of  the  species  by  syzygy,  and  this  explains  why  the  upper  radials 
became  so  generally  detached.  Others  are  joined  by  a  more  or 
less  close  suture,  but  none  by  muscles. 

The  primary  radials  of  the  Camarata  consist  as  a  rule  of  three 
plates,  exceptionally  of  two  or  four.  Platycrinus  generally  has 
two,  but  here  the  second  and  third  evidently  were  anchylosed. 
Many  plates  show  a  depression  indicating  the  former  suture,  which 
in  some  of  the  earlier  species  is  yet  visible.  The  second  radial 
of  Stereocrinus  has  the  proportions  of  the  combined  second  and 
third  of  the  allied  Dolatocrinus,  and  the  same  is  true  with  regard 
to  Anthemocrinus  and  Eucrinus.  In  Batocrinus  the  second  radial 
is  short,  linear,  and  found  occasionally  anchylosed  with  the  third. 
Four  primary  radials  occur  in  Beteocrinus,  and  also  in  the  im- 
perfectly known  Schizoci'inus.  From  Hall's  figure  of  Schizo- 
crinus  heterodactylus,  N.  York  Palaeont.,  i,  PI.  28,  fig.  3  a,  it  would 
appear  as  if  the  first  and  second  plate  combined  were  equivalent 
to  the  first  radial  in  other  genera,  and  here,  as  in  the  case  of  Eete- 
rocrinus  and  Hoplocrinus,  composed  of  two  parts. 

In  the  Articulata  the  numbers  of  their  primary  radials  is  more 
variable,  and  the  presence  of  four  radials  by  no  means  the  excep- 
tion ;   but  four  are  often  associated  in  the  same  specimen  with 


236  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

three  or  five.  Taxocrinus  Egertoni  Phill.  (Geol.  Yorksh.,  PI.  3, 
fig.  39),  even  has  seven  in  one,  and  six  in  another  ray.  Onycho- 
crinus  very  frequently  has  five,  Ichthyocrinus  generally  three  and 
four  in  alternate  rays,  Taxocrinus  three  or  four,  Forbesiocrinus 
robust  us  three  and  two,  and  Pycnosaccus  two  as  a  rule.  Forbesio- 
crinus Agassizi  sometimes  has  two  primary  radials  in  one  or  more 
of  its  rays,  most  frequently  three,  but  very  often  four,  and  all  are 
articulated  on  a  similar  plan. 

The  secondar}^  and  higher  orders  of  radials  in  the  Camarata 
rarely  consist  of  more  than  two  plates,  sometimes,  however,  of 
one,  three  or  even  four.  Only  Glyptocrinus,  Reteocrinus  and 
allied  genera  sometimes  have  a  larger  number.  In  the  typical 
Actinocrinidae,  which  branch  from  alternate  sides,  the  higher 
orders  consist  as  a  rule  of  a  single  piece  to  each  division  of  the 
ray.  which  always  at  the  one  side  supports  the  radial  of  the  suc- 
ceeding order,  at  the  other  a  row  of  brachials.  The  latter,  how- 
ever, as  should  be  expected  from  the  term,  are  not  free,  but 
connected  laterally  by  suture  with  their  fellows  of  alternate  orders. 
In  the  Ichthyocrinidae,  the  higher  orders  of  radials  agree  in  num- 
ber and  form,  more  or  less,  with  the  primary  ones,  and  all  are 
similarly  articulated. 

Free  rays  are  found  as  a  rule  in  the  Platycrinidae  ;  in  Euclado- 
crinus  they  extend  to  nearhy  the  full  length  of  the  ray,  giving  off 
alternately  from  every  second  or  third  plate  an  arm,  and  two  at 
the  distal  end.  Similar  rays  are  formed  in  Steganocrinus  and  in 
Melocrinus;  among  the  Rhodocrinidae  in  Ripidocrinus. 

The  arms  of  the  Camarata  bifurcate  in  their  free  state  only  in 
the  genera  which  Zittel  included  under  the  name  Glyptocrinidae, 
in  the  Rhodocrinidae,  and  in  a  few  Actinocrinidae,  but  all  branch 
at  least  once  in  the  calyx.  In  all  young  specimens,  as  well  as  in 
the  earlier  forms,  the  arms  are  composed  of  a  single  row  of  plates, 
which  gradually,  embryologically  and  paleontologieall}',  turn  into 
wedge-shaped  pieces  at  the  distal  end,  or  even  interlock,  while  in 
all  later  genera  the  arms  are  composed  of  alternate  joints.  In 
the  Upper  Silurian,  the  biserial  arm  structure  predominates  and 
there  is  not  a  single  species  with  uniserial  arms  in  the  Devonian. 
Among  the  free  anus  there  are  no  syzygies,  but  ever}' joint  in 
this  group  bears  a  pinnule,  and  these  are  frequently  so  closely 
folded  together,  that  they  appear  as  if  suturally  connected.  In 
the  Articulata,  all  arm-  are  composed  of  single  joints,  which  in 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  231 

their  external  form  agree  with  the  higher  radials,  being  only 
narrower,  and  free  plates. 

In  the  Inadunata,  in  which  the  arms  are  free  from  the  first 
radial,  the  homologies  of  the  outer  primary  radials,  which  we 
have  distinguished  as  brachials,  vary  in  some  genera  considerably 
in  number.  The  greatest  variation  in  this  regard  occurs  among 
the  typical  Cyathocrinid^e  (Cvathocrinites  as  we  called  them  here- 
tofore), in  which  the  number  varies  even  among  the  rays  of  the 
same  species,  so  much  indeed,  that  one  ray  may  have  one,  the 
adjoining  two,  the  next  perhaps  five  or  six.  The  other  groups 
have  rarely  more  than  two  brachials,  and  most  of  them  but  one. 
The  brachials  are  regular  arm  plates,  with  a  well-developed  ambu- 
lacral  furrow,  but  without  pinnules.  The  arms  are  composed  of 
single  joints,  except  in  the  Poteriocrinidae  and  Eucrinidae,  in 
which  the  biserial  arm  structure  is  associated  with  the  uniserial 
one.  Pinnules  are  wanting  in  the  Hybocrinidse,  Symbathocriniclse 
and  Cyathocrinidae,  and  in  the  two  former  the  rays  are  undivided, 
consisting  of  a  single  arm.  In  the  Heterocrinidae  and  Belemno- 
crinidae,  the  pinnules  are  arranged  from  every  second  or  third 
joint  throughout  the  entire  arm,  the  non-arm-bearing  joints  being 
united  by  syzygy,  while  among  the  Poteriocrinidae  every  joint 
from  the  second  up,  bears  a  pinnule. 

C.    The  Interradial,  Inter  axillary  and  Interbrachial  Plates. 

The  interradial  plates  occupy  the  intermediate  spaces  between 
the  primarj'  rays;  the  interaxillaries  between  the  main  divisions 
of  the  ray  ;  the  interbrachials  between  the  arm  bases.  All  these 
plates  may  be  considered  as  parts  of  the  same  element.  The 
interradials  consist  primarily  of  five  single  plates,  which  rest 
either  upon  the  upper  or  between  the  lateral  margins  of  two  first 
radials.  Only  in  the  genus  Briarocrinus,  and  in  a  few  Ichthyo- 
crinidsB,do  the  interradials  commence  higher  up.  Higher  orders 
of  interradials  are  only  found  in  the  Camarata  and  Articulata. 
Their  office  is  to  increase  the  capacity  of  the  visceral  cavity  by 
incorporating  the  lower  arm-plates  into  the  calyx,  and  also  to 
strengthen  it.  The}-  are  auxiliary  pieces,  and  serve  to  fill  up 
spaces,  and  in  this  capacity  adapt  their  form  to  adjoining  plates. 
The  higher  interradials  do  not  possess  the  morphological  import- 
ance of  the  primary  ones,  which  are  early  developed  in  the  young 
individual,  and   represent    important   elements   throughout   the 


238  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

earlier  Crinoids.  The  interradials  increase  by  age,  vary  greatly 
in  number,  often  in  the  same  species,  and  even  in  different  rays. 
There  are  generally  two  plates  in  the  second  row,  but  sometimes 
one  or  three  ;  beyond  these  the  arrangement  of  the  interradials  is 
more  or  less  irregular.  In  the  Inadunata  the  interradials  are 
located  exclusively  on  the  ventral  side;  in  the  Camarata  both 
dorsallv  and  ventrally. 

The  Reteocrinidse  and  Acrocrinidse,  exceptionally,  possess  no 
primary  interradials  properly  speaking.  In  the  former  group,  all 
radials,  from  the  basals  up,  are  separated  lateralty  by  numerous 
minute  pieces,  without  definite  arrangement.  Acrocrinus  has  a 
large  belt  of  small  plates,  separating  radials  and  interradials  from 
the  basals,  and  the  interradial  series  proper  commences  with  two 
plates. 

In  Part  II,  p.  15,  when  describing  the  structure  of  the  vault  of  the 
"  Spha?roidocrinidae,"  we  discriminated  between  true  interradials 
and  interradial  dome  plates,  the  former  as  being  developed  around 
the  dorsal,  the  latter  ai'ound  the  ventral  pole.  At  that  time  we 
were  under  the  impression,  and  it  was  the  general  opinion  among 
naturalists,  that  the  plates  of  the  ventral  side  in  all  Crinoids, 
recent  and  fossil,  constitute  a  part  of  the  actinal  system.  It  was 
known  to  be  the  case  throughout  the  Neocrinoidea,  and  among 
Palseocrinoids  we  found  several  genera  in  which  the  interradials 
of  the  dorsal  side  are  separated  from  those  of  the  ventral  side. 
In  Batocrinus,  the  higher  orders  of  radials  frequently  are  not 
separated  bjr  interradials,  as  in  the  case  of  the  primary  ones,  but 
join  laterally  with  their  fellows,  thereb}^  causing  an  interruption 
in  the  interradial  series.  These  cases,  however,  form  exceptions 
to  the  rule ;  the  interradials  of  the  two  hemispheres  almost  always 
meet  each  other,  and  there  is  no  dividing  line  by  which  they  can 
be  distinguished. 

That  the  abactinal  interradials  extend  to  the  ventral  side,  is 
well  shown  by  the  Platycrinidae  and  Hexacrinidse,  our  former 
subdivisions  Platycrinites  and  Hexacrinites,  in  which  the  first 
interradials  occupy  the  equatorial  zone,  and  all  succeeding  ones 
are  located  ventrally.  When  we  defined  these  groups,  we  described 
the  first  row  of  interradials  to  be  composed  of  a  single  plate,  a 
statement  which  is  not  strictly  correct. 

Consulting  our  figures  (PI.  t,figs.  5-8,  and  PI.  9,  fig.  6),  it  will 
be  seen  that  in  the  Platycrinidse  and  Hexacrinida1,  the  first  row 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  239 

of  interradials  contains  not  one  alone,  but  invariably  three  or 
more  plates,  placed  side  by  side,  all  resting  upon  the  upper  faces 
of  the  first  radials.  Only  the  middle  plate,  the  one  placed  upon 
the  outer  ends  of  two  radials,  corresponds  with  the  first  interra- 
dial  of  other  groups;  the  plates  at  the  sides  are  accessory  pieces, 
and  rank  as  interradials  of  the  second  and  third  row,  respectively. 
Species  with  a  discoid  base  have  sometimes  five  plates  in  the  same 
row,  of  which  only  the  outer  ones  meet  the  second  radials.  In 
the  simplest  form  of  Platycrinus,  the  middle  plate  connects 
directly  with  the  proximals,  and  at  the  azygous  side  with  anal 
plates.  In  most  species,  however,  the  first  row  is  succeeded  by 
other  interradials,  which  either  connect  laterally  with  their  fellows 
of  adjoining  sides,  forming  with  them  a  continuous  belt  around 
the  peristome  (PL  5,  fig.  9,  and  PL  ?,  fig.  6),  or  are  separated  by 
radial  structures.  In  either  case  there  is  no  dividing  line 
between  the  plates  of  the  outer  and  inner  rows,  and  the  upper 
rows  always  rest  against  the  proximals.  The  case  is  the  same  in 
Marsujriocrinus  ( PL  8,  fig.  7),  Hexacrinus,  Dichocrinus  and  Tala- 
rocrinus,  and  similar  in  Coccocrinus  and  Culicocrinus,  which  we 
shall  discuss  farther  on. 

In  the  organization  of  the  Actinocrinidse,  Melocrinidse,  Euca- 
lyptocrinidse,  Rhodocrinidse,  Glyptasteridse  and  Reteocrinidag, 
the  interradials  form  even  more  important  parts  than  in  the  two 
groups  above  mentioned-  That  here  the  plates  of  the  ventral 
side  form  a  continuation  of  the  interradials  at  the  dorsal  side,  is 
clearly  indicated  in  genera  whose  arms  are  given  olf  in  clusters, 
or  in  which  the  rays  are  formed  into  lateral  extensions.  In 
such  species,  the  interradial  series  are  not  disturbed  by  so  many 
radials,  nor  by  interaxillary  plates,  and  the  interradials  decrease 
in  size  gradually  all  the  way  from  the  first  interradial  up  to  the 
proximals.  In  species,  however,  in  which  the  arms  are  arranged 
in  a  continuous  ring,  the  interradials  decrease  in  size  more  or  less 
from  the  poles  toward  the  periphery.  This  decrease  in  the  size 
of  the  plates  toward  the  equatorial  regions  is  easily  explained  by 
the  extravagant  increase  of  arms  in  those  species,  and  by  the 
nature  of  the  interradial  plates,  which,  as  stated,  are  accessory 
pieces,  filling  up  spaces.  An  occasional  interruption  of  the 
series,  therefore,  is  no  proof  that  the  two  sections  represent 
different  elements. 

In  some  genera  the  interradials  of  the  ventral  side  are  exceed- 


240  PROCEEDINGS  OP   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

ingly  small,  without  definite  arrangement,  and  they  cover  the 
surface  radially  and  Lnterradlally.  This  is  frequently  the  case  in 
the  Silurian  genera,  Glyptocrinus,  Periechocrinus,  Melocrinus  and 
Reteocrinus.  Their  ventral  covering  resembles  so  closely  the 
<li-k  of  certain  Comatulae,  that  it  might  appear  as  if  this  multi- 
tude of  irregular  plates,  which  sometimes  decrease  in  size  toward 
the  periphery,  and  extend  out  to  the  free  rays,  could  not  be  true 
vault  pieces.  In  proof,  however,  that  this  is  the  case,  we  refer  to 
Mr.  St.  John's  carefully  prepared  diagram  of  Glyptocrinus  ramu- 
losus  Billings,  drawn  from  a  specimen  in  the  Canada  Survey 
Museum,  and  kindty  loaned  to  us  by  Prof.  Whiteaves.  Of  the 
specimen  only  one-half  of  the  calyx  is  preserved,  and  this  is 
imbedded  in  rock,  exposing  only  the  inner  floor.  Glyptocrinus 
ramulosus  is  the  largest  species  of  the  genus,  and  this  facilitates 
the  study  of  the  plates.  Like  all  other  species  of  Glyptocrinus 
it  has  a  large  number  of  irregular  interradial,  interaxillary  and 
interbrachial  plates,  which  meet* laterally  over  the  arm  openings, 
and  are  continued  to  the  summit,  leaving  no  line  of  demarkation 
between  the  plates  of  the  two  hemispheres.  In  the  direction  of 
each  arm  opening  the  floor  is  distinctly  grooved,  and  these 
grooves  or  depressions,  which  diverge  from  the  centre  to  the 
arm  furrows,  evidently  lodge  the  ambulacra.  That  the  grooved 
plates  are  not  covering  pieces,  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  they 
have  the  same  irregular  arrangement  as  the  other  plates.  The 
whole  structure  reminds  us  of  Physetocrinus,  and  we  have  no 
doubt  that  the  vault  in  those  two  genera  was  built  essentially  on 
the  same  plan.  We  find  this  further  confirmed  by  the  fact,  that 
in  the  Canada  specimen  the  inner  faces  of  the  interradial  and 
interaxillary  plates — but  not  any  of  the  radial  ones — are  provided 
with  short  nodes,  such  as  are  found  in  many  Actinocrinidse,  and 
which  serve  there  as  pillars  or  partition  walls  between  disk  and 
vault. 

In  the  Crotalocrinidae,  which  include  Grotalocrinus  and  Enallo- 
crinus,  the  whole  ventral  surface,  in  what  appear  to  be  the  best- 
preserved  specimens,  is  composed  of  strong,  convex  plates, 
without  definite  arrangement.  In  these  specimens  there  is  no 
central  piece,  nor  proximals,  nor  traces  of  ambulacra  (Icon.  Crin. 
Suec,  PI.  7,  fig.  3  a ;  PI.  8,  figs.  G,  7,  and  PI.  25,  fig.  2) ;  there  are, 
however,  other  figures  of  Angelin,  apparently  of  a  closely  allied 
species  (Ibid.,  PI.  17,  fig.  3  a),  in  which  the   plates  paving  the 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  241 

ventral  surface  arc  much  more  delicate,  and  consist  of  a  centra! 
plate,  large  proximals,  and  several  rows  of  covering  pieces, 
without  the  intervention  of  either  anambulacral  or  interradial 
pieces.  It  would  lie  difficult  with  the  utmost  stretch  of  our 
imagination  to  recognize  in  the  former  figures  either  proximals 
or  central  piece,  which,  as  admitted  by  Carpenter,  are  present  in 
all  these  Crinoids,  and  we  think  there  can  be  little  doubt  that 
the  two  sets  of  figures  represent  different  parts  of  the  animal,  the 
one  the  disk,  the  other  the  vault,  and  that  the  one  covered  the 
other.  A  similar  opinion  was  evidently  entertained  by  Zittel 
(Hanclb.  d.  Paheont.,  i,  p.  357),  who  stated  that  Crotalocrinus  pos- 
sessed five  "  grosse  Oralplatten,  bald  unter  der  Decke,  bald 
ausserlich  sichtbar."  According  to  our  interpretation,  the  calyx 
of  the  Crotalocrinida-  extends  ventrally  to  the  oral  pole,  and 
the  ambulacra,  central  piece  and  proximals  are  subtegminal, 
covered  by  interradial  plates,  which  extend  out  to  the  lower  rows 
of  covering  plates  and  side-pieces  (Icon.  Crin.  Suec,  PL  7,  fig.  6, 
and  PI.  25,  fig.  15).  A  similar  condition  probably  prevailed  in 
the  Ichthyoerinida?,  with  which  the  Crotalocrinid;e  have  close 
atlinities. 

In  the  Ichthyoerinida*,  inter radials  have  been  observed  only 
at  the  dorsal  side,  where  they  are  subject  to  many  irregularities. 
In  some  of  the  genera  they  are  always  present,  in  others  entirely 
absent ;  while  there  are  still  other  genera  and  certain  species,  in 
which  they  are  occasionally  undeveloped  dorsally.  The  interra- 
dials  of  the  Ichthyocriniclse  are  united  by  ligamentous  articulation 
among  themselves,  and  also  laterally  with  the  radials,  as  shown  by 
the  presence  of  deep  fossa1  at  the  sides  of  the  plates  (PI.  .">,  fig.  5). 
The  mobility  in  the  test,  resulting  from  this  structure,  led  us 
formerly  to  state  that  the  ventral  covering,  which  is  so  rarely 
preserved.  "  perhaps  "  consisted  of  a  "  soft  or  scaly  integument." 
The  word  "  soft  "  was  ill-chosen,  and  did  not  express  our  real 
meaning,  we  should  have  said,  as  we  did  in  other  places,"  pliable." 
There  is  nothing  to  indicate  a  membranous  surface  structure,  but 
the  pavement  evidently  was  pliable  in  conformity  with  the  con- 
dition of  the  test  at  the  dorsal  side.  In  Onychocrinus  exsculp- 
tus,  the  only  [chthyocrinoid  in  which  portions  of  the  ventral 
covering  have  been  observed.  Lyon  and  Casseday  found  in  the 
radial  regions   rather  large,  alternately  arranged  plates   (Amer. 

17 


242  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Journ.  of  Sci.,  18f»9,  vol.  xxix,  p.  79),  and  in  another  specimen 
we  found,  inter  radially  disposed,  small  imbricating  plates  con- 
uecting  with  larger  pieces.  Whether  the  latter,  as  we  supposed, 
represent  the  summit  plates,  or  Lyon  and  Casseday's  alternating 
pieces,  we  could  not  make  out  satisfactorily.  Carpenter  took 
them  to  be  "  covering  plates  of  the  ambulacra,  which  perhaps 
\\ire  permanently  closed  as  in  the  Platycrinidae,  or  only  tem- 
porarily so  as  in  the  Neocrinoids ;  while  the  small  irregular 
plates,  which  form  the  interradial  portions  of  the  vault,  corres- 
pond to  the  anambulacral  plates  of  recent  Crinoids.  They  pass 
downward  into  the  interradials  at  the  sides  of  the  calyx,  just  as 
in  the  recent  species  and  in  the  Liassic  Exlracrinus"  (Chall. 
Hep.,  p.  181).  We  accept  the  first  part  of  this  explanation  that 
these  alternate  plates  probably  correspond  to  the  covering 
pieces  of  the  Platycrinidae ;  we  even  admit  these  plates  to  be 
morphologically  identical  with  those  along  the  disk  of  the 
Neocrinoidea.  Bui  we  doubt  if  the  interradial  portions  in 
Onychocrinus,  or  Plati/crinus  either,  correspond  to  the  anambu- 
lacral plates  of  recent  Crinoids.  The  interradial  plates  of  vault 
and  disk  are  very  distinct  structures  ;  the  former  constitute  a 
part  of  the  abactinal  system,  while  those  of  the  disk  are  actinal. 
Before  we  enter  upon  further  discussion  of  this  subject,  we  direct 
attention  to  the  ventral  structure  of  the  Blastoidea  and  Cyatho- 
crinidae. 

The  Cj'athocrinida'  were  described  by  us  as  having  no  inter- 
radials, and  until  lately  we  considered  this  a  fixed  character  of 
this  group.  The  fact  that  the  only  plates  interradial  in  position 
are  located  ventrally,  seemed  to  us  as  sufficient  evidence  that 
they  were  actinal  plates,  and  as  such  they  seemed  to  be  the 
representatives  of  the  oral  plates  in  the  Neocrinoidea.  We 
thought  the  same  regarding  the  deltoids  in  the  Blastoidea,  which 
occupy  essentially  the  same  position  in  relation  to  adjacent  parts 
.■is  the  above  plates  in  the  Cyathocrinidae.  Prof.  Zittel,  in  his 
"  Handbuch  der  Palseontologie,  i,"  like  us,  called  the  plates  orals 
in  all  three  groups,  and  this  interpretation  was  afterwards 
accepted  by  Mr.  Etheridge,  Jr.,  and  P.  Herb.  Carpenter,  in 
their  paper,  "On  certain  points  in  the  Morphology  of  the 
Blastoids  "  (Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Eist.,  April,  1882,  p.  214),  in  which 
these  writers  state   thai    in    Blastoids  the  calyx   is  formed  "by 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  243 

the  basals,  radials  <>r  forked  pieces,  and  the  deltoid  pieces  or 
orals."1 

The  latter  statement  seems  to  us  an  anomaly.  It  is  impossible 
that  those  plates  can  be  orals,  and  at  the  same  time  form  part  of 
the  calyx.  The  orals  in  recent  Crinoids  have  never  been  con- 
sidered as  calyx  pieces,  and  hence,  if  the  deltoids  are  orals,  they 
do  not  belong  to  the  calyx.  That,  however,  they  are  calyx 
plates  is  indicated  by  their  position  and  relations  to  other  parts, 
and  still  more  by  their  enormous  variation  in  size  among  species 
of  the  same  genus.  If  the  deltoids  were  orals,  the  actinal 
system  in  the  Blastoids,  in  forms  like  Elseacrinus  obovafus. 
would  occupy  over  three-fourths  of  the  entire  test,  while  in 
Heteroschisma,Y?hich  has  exceedingly  small  deltoids,  these  regions 
would  be  reduced  to  a  small  circum-oral  space.  The  proportions 
of  the  actinal  and  abactinal  regions  in  the  test,  respectively, 
were  looked  upon  by  Prof.  L.  Agassiz  as  determining  the 
different  outlines  of  the  various  "  orders "  of  Echinoderms, 
which  he  ranked  according  to  the  greater  preponderance  of  the 
one  over  the  other,  and  this,  if  true,  proves  conclusively  that  the 
deltoids  are  not  actinal  plates,  and,  therefore,  are  not  orals,  but 
must  be  interradials.  The  same  argument,  however,  cannot  be 
applied  to  the  Cyathocrinidae.  in  which  the  so-called  orals  are 
located  ventrally.  and  from  analogy  with  recent  Crinoids  should 
be  actinal  plates. 

By  carefully  removing  the  arms  in  some  of  our  best  specimens 
of  Gyathocrinus,  we  succeeded  in  exposing  the  ventral  surface  in 
several  species,  and  were  enabled  to  observe  its  structure  in 
various  stages  of  preservation.  In  a  specimen  of  Gyatkocrinus 
Gilesi  (PI.  4,  fig.  2),  from  the  Burlington  and  Keokuk  Transition 
beds,  we  found  in  situ  the  five  large  interradial  plates,  the  so- 
called  orals,  all  connected  laterally,  and  each  one  provided  along 
its  upper  face  with  a  conspicuous  central  node.  In  another 
specimen  of  the  same  species  (PI.  4,  fig.  3),  these  interradials 
were  partly  covered  along  their  surface  by  numerous  irregular 
pieces,  but  so  as  to  leave  the  central  node  exposed,  the  face  at  a 
level   with   the    small    tegminal    pieces.      In   two   specimens    of 


1  We  are  pleased  to  state  that  Dr.  P.  H.  Carpenter,  whom  we  had 
acquainted  with  the  modification  of  our  views  regarding  these  plates,  now 
fully  agrees  with  us  that  neither  those  of  the  Blastoidea  nor  Cyathocrinidaa 
are  orals  (see  C'hall.  Rep.,  p.  162). 


244  PROCEEDINGS    OP   THE   ACADEMY    OP  [1885. 

Cyathocrinus  multiradiatus  from  Crawfordsville,  of  which  the 
one  is  figured  (PI.  4,  fig.  6),  the  entire  surface  of  the  interradials, 
and  also  the  circum-oral  space,  is  covered  by  minute  plates, 
except  at  one  end  (see  figure)  where  the  plate  underneath  is 
exposed  -to  view.  The  structure  is  similar  in  Cyathocrinus 
iowensis  from  the  Lower  Burlington  limestone  (PI.  5,  fig.  7),  hut 
there  the  plates  closing  the  peristome  consist  of  eight  consider- 
ably larger  pieces,  placed  around  a  central  one,  arranged  in  pairs, 
of  which  each  pair  corresponds  in  form  and  position  to  one  of 
the  four  large  proximals  in  other  genera. 

In  the  above  specimens,  the  so-called  orals  are  covered  along 
their  sutures  by  well-defined  ambulacra,  lined  by  side-pieces 
and  covering  plates,  and  these  connect  laterally  with  the  small 
tegminal  plates  which  we  have  described.  That  all  surface  plates 
in  these  species  are  perisomic,  nobody  will  doubt  after  consulting 
our  figures,  and  that  the  plates  supporting  them  are  interradials 
and  not  orals,  is  proved  by  the  fact  that  the}T  surround  the  peris- 
tome, but  do  not  cover  it,  and  are  succeeded  by  numerous  other 
plates. 

This,  however,  was  not  the  structure  of  the  Inadunata  gener- 
ally, or  even  of  all  Cyathocrinidae.  Angelin  figures  from  the 
Silurian  of  Sweden  (Icon.  Crin.  Suec,  PI.  23,  figs.  10  6,  11),  two 
specimens  under  the  name  of  Cyathocrinus  alutaceus,  in  which 
the  interradials  (orals)  were  exposed,  and  not  covered  by  plates. 
The}T  have  a  central  piece,  surrounded  by  four  large  proximals, 
and  there  are,  alternating  with  them,  live  conspicuous  radial  dome 
plates,  with  numerous  irregular  pieces  along  the  posterior  or  anal 
side,  which  join  the  central  plate,  and  extend  outwards,  forming 
a  short  protuberance,  composed  of  small  pieces.  There  are  at 
the  surface  no  traces  of  ambulacra,  and  the  whole  structure  ven- 
trally  is  almost  identical  with  that  of  certain  forms  of  Platycrinus; 
while  the  dorsal  side  of  the  species  shows  clearly  the  characters 
not  only  of  the  Cyathocrinidae  generally,  but  the  detail  structure 
of  the  genus  Cyathocrinus.  The  total  absence  of  ambulacra  upon 
the  surface  proves  that  in  this  species  the  disk  was  subtegminal. 
covered  by  the  plates  which  have  been  heretofore  called  orals,  but 
which  are  identical  with  the  first  interradial  plates  of  Platycriiuis, 
and  with  the  lirsl  interradials  of  Actinocrinus  and  other  Camarata. 
The  structural  identity  with  all  these  plates  proves  that  the  inter- 
radials of  the  Cyathocrinidae, and  the  deltoids  of  the  Blastoidea, 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  245 

arc  abactinal  plates,  that  they  constitute;  a  part  of  the  calyx  ;  and 
it  proves  further,  which  is  equally  important,  that  some  of  the 
Palaeocrinidse  have  abactinal  [dates  along  their  ventral  side.  That 
C.  alutaceus  cannot  be  retained  in  the  same  genus  with  the  Car- 
boniferous forms  is  self-evident.  The  two  are  morphologically 
in  a  very  different  condition,  and  we  should  propose  for  the  former 
a  new  generic  name  if  we  had  before  us  specimens  in  place  of 
figures. 

Carpenter  fully  accepts  the  views  previously  held  by  us,  that 
in  the  Camarata  all  interradials  located  dorsally  are  abactinal 
plates,  and  those  at  the  ventral  side  actinal.  It  should  be  stated, 
however,  that  we  had  communicated  to  him,  in  time  for  the  Chal- 
lenger Report,  the  modifications  our  views  had  undergone  on  this 
point.  We  make  this  statement  to  show  that  Carpenter's  inter- 
pretation of  the  plates  was  not  based  upon  our — as  we  believe — 
erroneous  observations,  but  was  the  result  of  his  own  studies. 
Carpenter  even  goes  further  than  we  ever  did.  He  asserts  that 
the  plates,  which  we  took  to  be  the  actinal  representatives  of  the 
interradials,  in  some  groups,  are  anambulacral  plates,  and  form 
a  part  of  the  disk. 

His  interpretations  of  the  interradials  in  the  Platj'crinidae  are 
not  always  harmonious.  If  we  understand  him  correctby,  he 
regards  the  first  interradial  piece  as  a  calyx  plate  (Chall.  Rep.,  p. 
40 ),  but  all  succeeding  ones  as  perisomic,  "  much  more  substantial, 
however,  than  in  Neocrinoids,  and  forming  part  of  the  solid 
covering,  but  not  a  true  vault  or  tegmen  caHcis"  (Chall.  Rep.,  p. 
179).  On  the  same  page  he  states  further:  "  Although  believing 
that  the  vault  of  a  Platycrinoid  corresponds  collectively  to  the 
orals,  interradials,  ambulacral  and  anambulacral  plates  of  Neo- 
crinoids, I  do  not  wish  to  assert  that  the  Plat3^crinida3  either  had 
an  external  mouth  or  open  ambulacra  on  the  disk."  On  page  1T8, 
however,  he  states  that  the  "  series  of  four  or  six  interradials, 
corresponds  generally  to  the  single  large  interradial  of  Cyatho- 
crinus"  It  is  not  clear  to  us,  how  the  same  pieces  can  be  anam- 
bulacral, i.  e.  disk  plates,  and  at  the  same  time  "correspond 
generally  "  to  a  true  interradial  plate.  He  supports  his  theory 
by  pointing  to  the  alternating  pieces,  the  so-called  "covering 
plates,"  which  in  most  of  the  Platycrinidse  appear  along  the  radial 
portions  of  the  ventral  surface,  and  which  he  believes  are  always 
subtegminal  in  Actinocrinus.     He  says  :  "  I  do  not  myself  think 


24f>  PROCEEDINGS   OF   TUE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885 

that  the  vault  of  a  Platycrinite  was  exactly  of  the  same  nature 
as  thai  oi  an  A.ctinocrinite,  i.  e.,  that  it  covered  in  the  whole  of 
the  visceral  inns-  and  ambulacra  on  its  upper  surface.  For  if  the 
alternating  dome  plates  represent  the  covering  plates  of  recent 
Crinoids,  then  all  the  periphery  of  the  dome,  outside  of  the  apical 
dome  plates,  must  be  the  real  ventral  surface  of  the  body,  and 
not  a  tegmen  calicis  as  in  Actinocrinus."  And  he  states  further, 
on  page  1 T ' >  :  "  There  is  some  point  on  the  actinal  side  of  every 
Crinoid  where  the  food  grooves  leave  the  oral  system,  covering 
up  the  peristome  in  which  the}-  originate,  and  are  only  closed  by 
the  covering  plates  a1  their  sides."  This  is  quite  true  as  to  the 
Neocrinoidea,  in  which  the  calyx-  is  limited  to  the  dorsal  side,  but 
not  altogether  in  the  case  of  the  older  Crinoids,  in  which  the  calyx. 
as  we  believe,  takes  up  the  greater  part  of  the  ventral  surface, 
and  the  covering  pieces  frequently  are  embodied  among  abactinal 
plates.  In  the  Platycrinidse  the  disk  is  subtegminal,  although 
portions  of  the  covering  pieces  appear  along  the  surface,  but 
these,  in  place  of  lining  the  sides  of  the  food  grooves,  are  incor- 
porated between  the  interradials,  resting  between  them  as  solidly 
as  the  summit  plates,  and  cover  the  food  grooves  as  tightly,  as 
the  interradials  do  in  Actinocrin"*. 

Carpenter  agrees  with  us  that  the  radials  above  the  first  are 
fundamentally  arm  plates,  which,  in  the  growing  Crinoid,  by  the 
increase  of  interradials,  were  incorporated  into  the  calyx. 
During  the  process  of  incorporation,  by  the  widening  of  the 
equatorial  zone,  the  ambulacral  vessels  and  food  grooves  of  the 
incorporated  arm  plates,  gradually  were  lifted  .out  from  the  arm- 
furrows,  and  stretched  out,  along  the  disk  in  the  form  of  tubes, 
being  enclosed  from  above  and  below  by  plates.  These  ambula- 
cral tubes  in  most  of  the  Actinocrinidse  are  altogether  subteg- 
minal, and  located  at  a  distance  from  the  inner  floor  of  the  vault, 
until  on  approaching  the  arm  bases  they  not  only  come  in  contact 
with,  but  raise  up  the  interradial  plates  and  push  them  aside, 
exposing  to  view  the  upper  rows  of  tube  plates,  the  so-called 
covering  pieces,  which  are  thence  continued  along  the  arm 
furrows. 

In  the  Platycrinidse,  the  conditions  are  essentially  the  same  as 
in  the  Actinocrinidfe,  hut  most  generally  the  covering-plates  of 
the  tubes  penetrate  the  vault  before  they  pass  into  the  arms. 
This  takes  place  either  along  the  outer  edges  of  the  proximals, 


1885.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  247 

or  beyond  the  succeeding  ring  of  interradials.  In  either  case, 
however,  the  covering-plates  join  laterally  with  the  interradials, 
and  accommodate  themselves,  more  or  less,  in  form  and  size,  to 
the  surrounding  plates,  so  much,  indeed,  that  frequently  they 
attain  the  same  rigid  form  as  the  true  vault  pieces  (PI.  7,  figs.  5, 
7,  8).  Sometimes,  however,  as  in  the  case  of  Marsupiocrinus 
ccelatus,  the  alternating  plates  retain  their  original  form  and  deli- 
cate structure,  while  in  the  same  genus,  in  Marsupiocrinus 
Tennessese  (PI.  8,  fig.  7),  they  are  as  rigid  as  the  interradials. 

For  pi-oof  that  our  descriptions  of  the  alternating  plates,  and 
the  ambulacral  tubes  generally,  are  based  upon  actual  observa- 
tion, we  refer  to  the  casts  of  Dorycrinus  (?)  (PL  4,  fig.  5),  Stroto- 
crinus  (PI.  4,  fig.  4),  and  Platycrinus  (PI.  5,  fig.  '.)),  in  all  of  which 
the  ambulacra,  at  some  distance  before  entering  the  peristome, 
are  covered  up  in  the  cast  and  are  visible  upon  the  surface  only 
at  or  near  the  arm  bases.  The  cast  of  Platycrinus,  which  we  have 
illustrated,  shows  beautifull}-  the  alternate  arrangement  of  the 
covering  plates,  which  pass  out  from  beneath  a  belt  of  large 
interradials.  Looking  at  this  figure  we  do  not  see  how  Carpenter 
can  any  longer  maintain  that  Platycrinus  possessed  no  tubular 
skeleton,  and  that  the  upper  interradials  are  anambulacral  plates. 
The  specimen  will  also  convince  him  that  there  are  in  this  genus 
upon  the  surface  of  the  cast  no  "  elevated  rounded  ridges,  almost 
like  strings  overlying  the  surface,"  as  he  imagined  (Chall.  Rep.,  p. 
179),  and  which,  he  thought,  represented  "  the  open  food  grooves 
of  recent  Crinoids."  Among  the  twelve  or  more  casts  of  Platy- 
crinus which  we  examined  from  Mr.  Rowle}'^  collection,  not  one 
bears  that  string-like  structure,  and  in  all  of  them  the  ambulacral 
tubes  are  placed  around  the  peristome  at  a  distance  from  the 
vault.  That  even  in  the  Actinocrinidas  those  strings  which  we 
noticed  upon  the  casts  do  not  represent  organs  connected  with 
the  food  grooves,  will  be  shown  elsewhere. 

Among  Actinocrinidae,  and  probabby  in  other  families,  the 
covering  plates  sometimes  penetrate  the  interradials  in  a  similar 
manner  as  in  the  Platycrinidae,  and  this  is  so  even  in  the  genus 
Actinocrinus.  Actinocrinus  stellaris,  from  the  Mountain  lime- 
stone of  Belgium,  has  a  row  of  alternating  plates  covering  the 
food  grooves,  a  character  not  well  shown  in  Be  Koninck's  figures  • 
although  the  arrangement  of  the  plates  is  very  regular  in  the 
specimens,  and  almost  identical  with  that  of  certain  species  of 


213  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Platycrinus.  They  form  a  ridge  of  strong  tuberculous  plates. 
and  are  almost  as  prominenl  as  the  apical  or  summit  plates  of 
this  species,  while  the  in terradials,  from  the  first  to  the  last,  are 

scarcely  convex.  The  same  structure  is  also  found  in  Slegano- 
crinus  concinnus  (  PL  8,  fig.  4).  In  Carpocrinus  ornatus,  however. 
the  alternate  plates  retain,  more  or  less,  the  character  of  other 
perisomic  pieces. 

Wherever  covering  plates  in  the  Camarata  are  exposed,  they 
are  invariably  placed  on  a  level  with  the  in  terradials,  not  upon 
their  surface,  and  the  ambulacra  are  essentially  in  the  same  con- 
dition as  those  of  the  A  el  inocrinidic,  only  the  interradials  do  not 
close  over  them,  bul  are  pushed  aside.  The  case,  however,  is  very 
different  in  the  higher  form  of  Gyathocrinus,  in  which  not  the 
covering  plates  alone,  but  the  whole  tubular  skeleton  and  the 
entire  disk  is  exposed. 

The  discovery  of  anambulacral  plates  upon  the  surface  of  the 
interradials  is  morphologically  of  the  utmost  importance,  as 
throwing  light  upon  the  phylogenetic  as  well  as  the  ontogenetic 
development  of  the  older  Crinoids  and  their  relation  to  the 
Neocrinoidea.  II'  a  resorption  of  these  interradial  plates,  as  we 
believe,  took  place  in  the  Poteriocrinidse,  then  the  dividing  line 
between  the  older  and  later  Crinoids  becomes  so  narrow,  that  it 
is  difficult  to  decide  where  the  one  terminates  and  the  other 
begins.  A  resorption  of  the  interradial  plates  in  palaeontological 
times  is  in  accordance  with  the  embryological  development  of 
recent  Crinoids.  Carpenter  is  inclined  to  believe  (Chall.  Rep., 
p.  40),  that  the  interradial  plates,  which  SirWyville  Thomson 
(Philos.  Trans.,  1865,  p.  540)  observed  in  the  early  larval  stages 
of  Antedon  rosacea,  and  which  he  takes  to  be  primary  inter- 
radials, "  eventually  undergo  resorption  like  the  orals  and  the 
anal  plate." 

I)i  the  Neocrinoidea,  with  the  exception  of  Thaumatovrimi*. 
Guettardicrihus,  and  one  or  two  species  of  Apiocrinns,  the  inter- 
radials are  represented  by  indistinct  plates,  and  are  only  tem- 
porarily developed.  In  the  Pahcocrinoidea,  however,  the  inter- 
radials are  permanent,  and  in  some  groups  so  extravagantly 
developed  thai  they  constitute  the  greater  part  of  the  calyx.  It 
is  very  remarkable  thai  we  find  the  most  profuse  development  of 
interradials  among  Silurian  genera,  which  tends  to  prove  thai  a 
largely  developed    interradial    system    represents    a    lower    grade 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  219 

of  organization  in  these  Crinoids,  especially  as  these  plates  in- 
crease numerically  in  the  individual  by  growth.  In  the  Crotalo- 
crinidae  they  cover  the  entire  peristome,  including  the  central 
piece  and  proximals.  In  the  Reteocrinida?  and  Glyptoerinidae 
they  extend  from  the  basals  to  the  central  piece.  In  Actino- 
crinus,  Melocrinus  and  Platycrinus,  from  the  first  radial  to  the 
proximals,  exactly  as  in  the  early  Cyathocrinus,  only  that  in  the 
latter  the  interradials  consist  of  a  large  single  plate,  in  the  others 
of  numerous  small  ones. 

If  it  were  true  that  the  deltoids  of  the  Blastoldea,  and  their 
representatives,  the  interradials  of  the  Cyathocrinid;e,  were 
orals,  the  first  interradials  of  all  Camarata  would  be  oral  plates, 
and  all  higher  orders  upward  growth  of  the  orals.  That  this  is 
not  the  case  is  clearly  shown  by  the  fact  that  all  these  plates, 
from  the  first  to  the  last,  are  calyx  plates,  i.  e.,  abactinal ;  while 
the  orals  of  the  Neocrinoidea  are  actinal,  being  developed  around 
the  left  peritoneal  tube. 

That  the  interradials  and  their  associates,  the  interaxillaries 
and  interbrachials,  dorsally  and  ventrally,  are  abactinal  plates  is 
further  shown  by  the  presence  of  perisomic  plates  underneath 
the  vault,  which,  wherever  they  have  been  observed  subtegmin- 
all}-,  extend  from  the  first  interradial  to  the  end  of  the  central 
piece  (PL  2,  fig.  8).  The  disk  of  the  Palreocrinoida1,  thei-efore, 
begins  from  beneath  the  first  interradial,  and  rests,  as  in  the 
Neocrinoidea,  against  the  first  primary  radial,  thereby  making 
the  first  interradial,  in  the  true  sense  of  the  word,  a  vault  plate.1 

According  to  Carpenter,  the  Ichthyocrinidae  and  some  of  the 
doubtful   Silurian  forms,  such   as  Reteocrinus   and  Xenocrinus, 

1  The  term  "vault"  has  been  heretofore  applied  by  most  writers  to  all 
plates  of  the  ventral  side.  In  this  sense  it  is  actually  a  misnomer.  If  the 
term  is  used  at  all,  it  should  by  right  include  all  interradial,  interaxillary 
and  interbrachial  plates,  dorsally  and  ventrally,  and  these  might  be  very 
appropriately  designated  as  vault  plates,  to  distinguish  them  from  the 
perisomic  or  disk  plates,  which  are  placed  beneath  the  others,  and  follow 
their  direction.  But  fearing  that  the  introduction  of  a  new  term,  or  giving 
a  different  intei pretation  to  the  same  term,  might  produce  confusion,  we 
it  t ,i in  it  as  a  convenient  and  short  mode  of  expression  for  all  plates  of  the 
ventral  side  that  are  not  perisomic.  It  is  therefore  a  merely  conventional 
term.  Carpenter  applies  it  to  all  actinal  plates  of  the  dome,  with  the 
exception  of  the  perisomic  ones,  in  which  he  includes  all  interradials  of 
the  ventral  side  which  he  takes  to  be  actinal. 


250  PROCEEDINGS  OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

appear  to  occupy  an  intermediate  position  between  the  heavily 
vaulted  Platycrinidae  and  the  more  thinly  plated  recent  forms. 

We  have  shown  already  that  neither  the  small  irregular  plates 
in  Glyptocrinus,  nor  any  of  the   interradials  of  Platycrinus,  are 

perisomic  plates,  and  this  in  itself  is  a  strong  proof,  that  the 
structure,  which  occupies  relatively  the  same  position  in  the  allied 
genus  Reteocrinus,  cannot  represent  a  totally  different  thing. 
Carpenter  leaves  us  in  doubt  whether  the  so-called  disk  of  Beteo- 
crinus  and  Xenocrinus  begins  at  the  basals,  where  those  minute 
irregular  pieces  commence,  or  at  the  equatorial  zone,  as  he  be- 
lieves it  does  in  Glyptocrinus.  It  seems  to  us,  if  he  had  not 
meant  the  whole  interradial  series,  he  would  not  have  made  a 
comparison  of  these  parts  with  those  of  the  Liassic  Extrac?'imix 
and  recent  forms  without  interradials,  but  would  rather  have 
-elected  Thaumatocrinus,  in  which  interradials  are  present. 
He  also  indicates  it  by  his  remarks  on  the  fixed  pinnules  of 
Reteocrinus,  which,  as  we  know,  are  located  dorsally,  and  which 
he  says  (Chall.  Hep.,  pp.  39,  40)  are  soldered  together  by  the 
minute  irregular  plates,  winch  pass  insensibly  upwards  into  the 
plates  of  the  so-called  vault,  and  further:  u  This  condition  recurs 
constantly  in  the  Liassic  Exlracrinus,  and  in  the  recent  Penta- 
crinidae  and  Comatuhv  ;  and  I  see  no  reason  to  believe  that  the 
minute  interradials  of  Reteocrinus  are  in  any  way  different  from 
those  of  the  Neocrinoids.  But  I  regard  them  as  perisomic  plates, 
continuous  with  those  of  the  disk  above,  which  was  in  no  sense  a 
vault  like  that  of  the  Actinocrinidae." 

According  to  this,  if  we  understand  him  correctly,  the  calyx  in 
the  Reteoorinidae  consisted  only  of  basals,  underbasals  and  radials, 
which  latter  throughout  their  full  length  were  enclosed  by  peri- 
somic plates.  This  would  be  a  very  peculiar  condition  for  one  of 
the  earliest  known  Crinoids,  if  we  admit  that  the  Paheocrinoids 
are  developed  from  a  lower  morphological  level  than  the  Neocri- 
noidea.  In  support  of  it  Carpenter  has  no  other  proof  than  a 
superficial  resemblance  in  the  form  of  the  plates.  There  is 
nothing  to  show  that  any  of  the  plates  were  perforated,  there  is 
no  external  mouth,  no  food  grooves,  nor  plates  that  could  possibly 
be  considered  as  covering  pieces.  All  the  plates  dorsally  and 
ventially,  even  those  extending  to  the  free  rays,  have  the  same 
irregular  arrangement.  The  ventral  surface  of  Reteocrinus  is 
almost  identical  with  that  of  Glyptocrinus  decadactylus,  which 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  251 

S.  A.  .Miller  (Cinein.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  Dec,  1883),  decribes  as  fol- 
lows: "  It  is  composed  of  numerous  polygonal  plates.  Those  in 
the  central  part  are  the  larger  ones,  and  each  of  these  bears  a 
central  tubercle,  which  is  sometimes  prolonged  so  as  to  be  desig- 
nated a  spine.  Toward  the  margin,  or  rather  following  the  undu- 
lations toward  the  intertertiary  areas,  the  plates  are  smaller  and 
possessed  of  slight  convexity.  They  unite  in  the  depressions  in 
the  intertertiary  areas  with  the  plates  of  the  calyx,  or  rather  the 
interprimarv  radials  graduate  through  the  intersecondaries  and 
intertertiaries  to  the  plates  of  the  vault  without  any  line  of  sepa- 
ration. The  plates  become  smaller  as  they  approach  the  inner 
face  of  the  arms,  over  the  swelling  undulations  of  the  vault,  and 
continuing  to  decrease  in  size,  form  a  somewhat  granular,  con- 
tinuous integument,  that  covers  the  ambulacra!  furrows.  This 
continuation  of  the  vault  up  the  inner  side  of  the  arms,  has  been 
observed  for  a  distance  of  an  inch  above  the  vault,  and,  no  doubt, 
extended  as  far  as  the  arm  furrow  itself." 

We  have  carefully  examined  Miller's  original  in  Dr.  R.  M. 
Byrne's  collection,  and  can  attest  the  correctness  of  his  descrip- 
tion. The  decrease  in  the  size  of  the  plates  toward  the  periphery, 
which  evidently  led  Carpenter  to  consider  those  plates  as  an  out- 
growth from  the  oral  side,  is  readily  explained  by  the  enormous 
accumulation  of  plates  from  the  interradial,  interaxillaiy  and 
interbrachial  series,  which  terminate  soon  after  entering  the  ven- 
tral side,  or  else  diminish  in  width.  That  the  vault  in  Glypto- 
crinus  and  Reteocrinus  extends  over  the  full  length  of  the  arms, 
as  suggested  by  Miller,  and  that  only  their  large  pinnules  had 
open  food  grooves,  is  at  least  doubtful,  although  it  may  be  pos- 
sible, as  such  is  the  case  in  the  allied  genus  Melocrinus,  in  which, 
however,  the  pinnule-like  arms  are  provided  with  extra  pinnules. 

Carpenter  attaches  considerable  importance  to  our  incidental 
remark,  "  that  the  peculiar  depressed  state  of  the  interradial  and 
interaxillary  areas  of  Reteocrinus,  the  irregularity  in  the  arrange- 
ment of  their  plates,  suggests  the  possibility  that  those  parts 
were  adapted  to  expansion  by  the  animal."  And  he  makes  use 
of  this  as  an  argument  in  favor  of  his  theory  that  the  ventral 
plates  of  Reteocrinus,  like  those  of  the  Ichthyocrinidre,  represent 
"  the  plated  perisome  of  the  Neocrinoids."  That  the  test  of 
Reteocrinus  was  in  any  way  pliable,  has  been  given  up  }>y  us 
entirely,  nor  do  we  believe  that  the  pliable  test  of  the  Ichthyo- 


252  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

crinidae  bore  any  relation  to  the  disk  of  recent  Crinoids,  but  we 
believe,  as  strongly  as  ever, thai  their  ventral  surface  was  covered 
In  a  vault.     A  vault-paved  by  small  irregular  pieces,  and  folded 

like  the  disk  of  recent  Crinoids,  with  elevations  following  the  food 
grooves,  is  found  not  only  in  Glyptocrinus  and  Reteocrinus,  but 
also  among  t  he  later  Actinocrinidse.  The  surface  elevations,  which 
form  natural  grooves  at  the  inner  floor,  represent  more  or  less 
open  galleries,  which  in  other  forms  are  produced  by  a  thickening 
of  the  plates  along  the  inner  floor.  Miller's  description  of  the 
vault  of  Glyptocrinus  would  apply  equally  well  to  Physetocrinus 
reticulatus which,  as  we  know  from  actual  observation,  has  a  vault 
and  a  well-developed  disk  underneath.  An  open  disk  represents 
a  higher  form  in  the  developmental  history  of  the  Crinoids,  than 
a  closed  one.  This  is  shown  by  Cyathocrinus,  in  which  the  vault 
is  gradually  replaced  by  the  disk,  and  it  is  very  improbable  that 
the  Eleteocrinidae,  which  did  not  survive  the  Lower  Silurian  age, 
attained  a  higher  organization  than  most  of  the  Carboniferous 
Actinocrinidse. 

According  to  Carpenter  (Chall.  Rep.,  p.  172),  "the  vault  of 
Actinocrinus  has  been  developed  on  the  left  larval  antimer,  in 
exactly  the  same  wa}r  as  the  apical  or  abactinal  system  is  devel- 
oped on  the  right;  but  the  oral  system,  instead  of  being  limited 
to  five  oral  plates,  as  in  Neocrinoids,  reached  a  very  extensive 
development,  so  that  in  its  completest  form  it  represents  such  a 
parallel  to  the  apical  or  abactinal  system  as  is  to-be  met  with  in 
no  other  Crinoid."  A  similar  view  was  expressed  by  us  when  we 
wrote  Part  II  of  this  Revision,  but  we  believe  the  same  thing 
might  be  said  of  other  Actinocrinidse  and  all  Platycrinidse  and 
Rhodocrinidse. 

Carpenter,  as  we  have  stated,  applies  the  term  "  vault  "to  all 
actinal  plates  covering  the  disk  and  tentacular  vestibule,  and  in 
most  of  the  Actinocrinidse  he  regards  all  interradial  plates  of  the 
ventral  side  as  t  he  representatives  of  the  interradials  at  the  dorsal 
side.  However,  in  a  few  Actinocrinidse  and  in  the  Platycrinidse, 
Rhodocrinidse  and  allied  groups,  he  restricts  the  vault  to  the 
central  piece,  proximals  and  radial  dome  plates  if  such  are 
present, and  all  other  ventral  plates  he  takes  to  be  perisomie.  In 
the  Cyathocrinidae  and  Blastoidea  lie  limits  the  vault  to  the  sum- 
mit plates  ;  but  their  interradials,  although  located  ventrally,  are 
said  to  be  abactinal.      These  interpretations,  if  correct,  would 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  253 

suggest,  either  that  the  condition  of  the  ventral  surface  is  of 
comparatively  little  value  for  classificatory  purposes,  or  that 
certain  forms,  which  have  heretofore  been  described  under  Actino- 
crinus, are  structurally  very  different,  and  should  be  referred  to 
remote  groups.  It  would  further  prove,  if  the  upper  interradial 
plates  in  Platycrinus  were  anambulacral  pieces — because  some  of 
the  covering  pieces  are  interposed  between  them — that  the  higher 
interradials  of  Actinocrinus  stellatus,  which  are  in  the  same  con- 
dition, are  perisomic,  and  vice  versa  those  of  certain  Platycrinida' 
vault  plates  ;  indeed,  that  the  very  same  plates  which  in  the  youn» 
Platycrinoid  represent  vault  pieces,  are  perisomic  in  the  adult. 

Carpenter  will  admit  that  the  minute  temporaiy  interradials, 
which  Sir  Wyville  Thomson  observed  in  the  larva  of  Antedon, 
are  the  homologues  of  the  large  and  permanent  calyx  interradials 
in  the  Cyathocrinidae.     In  this  group,  in  which  the  rays  are  free 
from  the  first  radial,  the  interradials,  for  want  of  any  other  lateral 
support,  join  with  each  other,  and  thereby  attain  their  ventral 
position  ;  while  in  the  adult  Actinocrinidae  and  Rhodocrinida\ 
which  have  numerous  radial  and  interradial  plates,  the  first  inter- 
radials  naturally  had  to  be  located  dorsally.     The  increase  of 
interradial  plates  took  place  gradually  in  the  growing  animal  and 
from  that  we  may  reasonably  suggest  that  these  Crinoids  at  one 
time  in  their  larval  state  possessed  but  five  single  interradials 
which  met  over  the  disk  ventrally,as  in  the  case  of  Cyathocrinus 
alutaceus.     At  that  time  the  3Toung  Actinocrinus  was  essentially 
in  the  condition  Of  a  young  Antedon  in  which  the  interradials  had 
made  their  appearance,  however  the  interradials  of  the  Palseo- 
crinoid  were  more  fully  developed.     If  now  Allagecrinus  and 
Haplocririus,  as  suggested  by  Carpenter,  represent  palaiontologi- 
callv  a  very  early  stage  of  the  larva  of  Antedon,  we  should  like 
to  know  something  about  the  condition  of  the  interradial  plates 
in  those  genera.     Are  they  as  yet  contrary  to  all  other  Palaeo- 
crinoidea  altogether  unrepresented,  or  here  already  resorbed   by 
the  animal  ?    Both  genera  have  five  plates,  which  occupy  the  very 
same  position  as  the  interradials  of  Cyathocrinus  alutaceus,  and 
Cyathocrinus  Gilesi  (PL  -4,  fig.  2).     Why  should  these  be  orals. 
when  there  is  another  structure  covering  the  tentacular  vestibule 
which  may  represent  them,  and  which,  on  the  other  hand,  would 
be  totally  unrepresented   in   the  Antedon  larva  and    in   all   other 
Echinoderms  ? 


254  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

The  phylogenetic  evidence  indicates  clearly  that  the  inter  radial 

element  take-  a  most  prominent  part  in  the  composition  of  the 
Palaeocrinoidea,  and  we  hope  we  have  proved  that  these  plates 
were  much  more  extravagantly  developed  in  their  earlier  type-;. 
In  Silurian  genera  they  extended  over  the  whole  peristome,  or 
the  greater  part  of  it.  Gradually  the  summit  plates  made  their 
appearance,  evidently  pushed  out  from  beneath,  afterwards  the 
covering  pieces  of  the  ambulacra,  and  at  last  also  the  an  am- 
bulacra! plates.  Even  in  the  Cyathocrinidae,  in  which  the  ven- 
tral structure  attained  a  higher  form  than  in  any  other  group, 
with  the  exception,  perhaps,  of  the  Poteriocrinidse  and  Encrinidae, 
interradials  are  not  only  present,  but  they  occupy  the  greater 
portion  of  the  ventral  side,  and  even  in  those  genera  in  which, 
perhaps,  they  were  resorbed  before  the  Crinoid  reached  maturity, 
they  had  been  previously  well  developed.  Under  the  weight  of 
this  evidence,  is  it  probable  that  Haplocrinus  and  AUagecrinus, 
which  are  said  to  be  "  permanently  in  the  condition  of  a  very 
early  larva  "'  (Chall.  Rep.,  p.  157),  alone  among  all  Palaeocri- 
noidea, should  have  no  interradial  plates,  and  that  the  plates 
which  occupy  their  position  in  these  two  genera  are  "oral 
plates  ?"  We,  at  least,  wish  to  be  excused  if  we  doubt  it.  Upon 
palaeontological  grounds  we  expect  to  find  in  the  j^ounger  stages 
of  the  Palaeocrinoid  the  oral  S}rstem  feebly,  the  interradial  sj'stem 
extravagantly  developed,  while,  according  to  Carpenter's  inter- 
pretation of  the  plates,  in  the  Palaeocrinoid  larva,  the  entire 
ventral  surface  from  the  radials  up  would  be  oral,  i.  e,  actinal. 

From  an  embryological  standpoint  also,  Carpenter's  interpre- 
tation meets  with  very  serious  objections.  If  Haplocrinus  rep- 
resents, as  he  asserts,  a  very  early  stage  in  Crinoid  ontogeny, 
before  the  opening  of  the  tentacular  vestibule  to  the  exterior,  we 
should  like  to  know  how  the  central  piece,  the  so-called  orocen- 
tral  of  Carpenter,  made  its  appearance  in  the  Palaeocrinoid.  It 
is  not  very  probable  that  this  plate  was  present  in  the  earl}- 
larva,  or  it  would  certainly  be  represented  in  the  larva  of  the 
Neocrinoid  at  the  time  the  oral  pyramid  was  closed.  Carpenter 
claims  that  it  was  even  unrepresented  in  Allagecririus,  and  that 
the  oral  pole  was  closed  only  by  oral  plates.  This  would  suggest 
that  it  was  introduced  either  by  means  of  a  partial  resorption  of 
I  he  "  oral  "  pyramid,  or  ly  the  opening  of  its  plates.     The  former 

is  exceedingly  doubtful,  while  the  latter  is  clearly  not    the  case  in 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  255 

Haplocrinus  nor  other  Palaeocrinoidea,  for  the  proximals  which 
Carpenter  takes  to  be  the  representatives  of  the  orals,  are  per- 
manently closed,  with  the  exception  of  Coccocrinus,  in  which  the 
"orals  "  are  said  to  be  parted,  bnt  in  which  the  central  plate  is 
wanting. 

Another  difficulty  is  offered  by  the  fact  that  the  so-called 
"  oral  "  plates  are  pierced  b}r  the  anal  opening,  a  structure  which 
certainly  has  no  parallel  among  recent  Crinoids. 

Allagecrinus  was  described  by  Etheridge  and  Carpenter  (Ann. 
and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  April,  1881)  as  without  central  piece,  and 
the  latter  has  since  informed  us,  that  he  could  not  identify  any 
such  plate  on  re-examining  the  specimens.  This,  however,  does 
not  prove  that  it  was  wanting,  for  we  must  bear  in  mind  that 
Allagecrinus  Austinii  is  an  almost  microscopic  form,  not  larger 
than  a  coarse  grain  of  sand.  The  central  piece  was  overlooked 
by  the  European  naturalists,  in  the  much  larger  Haplocrinus. 
Goldfuss,  however,  observed  in  (Eugeniacrinites)  Haplocrinus 
mespiliformis  (Petref.  Germ.,  i,  p.  214)  "  ein  rundes  Knopfchen 
im  Scheitelpunkt,"  and  it  is  very  significant  that  Etheridge  and 
Carpenter  also  found  in  Allagecrinus  "  at  the  central  end  of  one 
or  more  of  the  plates  faint  tubercles,"  for  which,  according  to 
their  own  statement,  "  they  can  find  no  explanation."  Whether 
these  represent  the  tubercles  which  we  discovered  upon  the  face 
of  the  interraclials  in  Cyathocrinus  multiradiatus  (PI.  4.  fig.  2), 
we  are  of  course  not  prepared  to  assert  with  certainty,  but  it  is 
worthy  of  note  that  Carpenter  regards  the  latter  "  as  the  conical 
openings  in  Granatocrinus  Norivordi^1  and  it  is  very  possible 
that  they  are  the  same  thing  in  all  three  groups,  w7hich  would 
prove  better  than  anything  else,  that  the  plates  bearing  them  are 
not  orals  but  interradials.  The  tubercles  in  Allagecrinus  (com- 
pare Ann.  and  Mag.,  ser.  5,  vol.  7,  PI.  xvi,  figs.  3  &,  4,  5  and  lb), 
are  evidently  of  structural  value,  but  as  there  is  but  one  figured, 
although  the  description  speaks  of  one  to  each  plate,  and  this  is 
located  laterally  in  one  specimen  and  centrally  in  the  other,  all 
interpretations  by  us  must  necessarily  be  more  or  less  problemat- 
ical. We  are  inclined,  however,  to  believe  that  the  lateral  one  (fig. 
5),  in  analogy  with  Haplocrinus,  represents  the  anal  opening,  i.  e. 


1  This  suggestion  was  made  by  Dr.  P.  Herb.  Carpenter  in  his  letter  of 
Decembi  r  26,  after  sending  him  our  figures,  and  he  kindly  permitted  us  to 
make  use  of  it  in  our  writings. 


25fi  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

the  larger  tubercle  in  Granatocrinus,  and  the  central  one,  if  it 
exists  :it  all,  the  central  piece;  but  whether  this  plate  is  exposed 
or  not,  we  believe  it  was  represented  in  the  Crinoid,  and  if  it  was 
not  inserted  between  the  interradials,  it  was  subtegminal,  under- 
neath them. 

In  the  later  stages  of  Allagecrinns,  according  to  Carpenter 
and  Etheridge  (p.  285),  the  so-called  "orals"  are  plaeed  "at  the 
centre  of  the  dome,  in  close  contact  laterally,  so  that  no  opening- 
is  visible,  but  their  basal  angles  are  more  or  less  truncated, 
leaving  a  superficial  gap  between  every  pair  of  plates,  which 
corresponds  in  position  with  the  articular  facet  on  the  subjacent 
radial."  "  The  interior  of  this  gap,  however,  is  filled  up  by  the 
deeper  portion  of  the  oral  plates."  This  structure,  we  admit, 
indicates  that  possibly  at  a  more  advanced  stage  of  the  Crinoid, 
the  plates  had  separated  laterally,  similar  to  the  orals  in  the 
recent  Holopus.  This,  however,  which  we  believe  was  really  the 
case  in  Coccocrinus,  dbes  not  prove  that  the  plates  of  the  two 
groups  are  homologous,  as  similar  modifications  take  place  among 
the  interradials  in  the  Pahcocrinoidea,  or  as  we  should  say,  take 
place  in  the  earlier  Crinoids  exclusively  in  the  interradials,  while 
the  tentacular  vestibule  remains  perfectly  closed.  In  the  case  of 
Allagecrinus,  the  opening  out  of  the  plates  toward  the  arm  bases, 
indicates,  in  our  opinion,  that  the  Crinoid  is  approaching  the 
stage  of  a  Platycrinoid,  in  which  the  covering  plates  part  the 
interradials  and  enter  the  vault;  previous  to  the  later  Cyatho- 
crinoid  stage,  in  which  the  whole  ambulacral  skeleton  covers  the 
interradials.  Coccocrinus  represents  a  transition  form  between 
the  two  former,  the  interradials  being  separated  from  one  another, 
forming  open  clefts  with  the  ambulacra  at  their  bottom. 

The  ventral  side  of  Coccocrinus  rosaceus  in  the  best-preserved 
specimens  consists  of  ten  plates,  all  strictly  intcrradial  in  posi- 
tion, arranged  in  live  series,  which  are  not  in  contact  laterally 
nor  centrally,  leaving  live  rather  conspicuous  clefts  and  a  central 
opening.  The  outer  plate  of  each  series  is  smaller,  the  inner 
resting  upon  the  truncate  face  of  the  other.  The  inner  plate  at 
the  azygous  side  is  larger,  and  the  anal  opening  excavated  along 
the  suture  between  the  two  plates,  extending  as  deeply  into  the 
inner  as  into  the  outer  plate.  There  are  no  special  anal  piece-, 
neither  dorsally  nor  Neutrally. 

There  is  no  difference  of  opinion  as  to  the  outer  plates,  whi<  h 


1885.]  Natural  sciences  of  Philadelphia.  257 

all  recognize  as  interradials  ;  the  inner  ones,  however,  were  desig- 
nated by  Roemer  as  "  kleine  interradiale  Stiicke,  welclie  von  dem 
Mittelpunkte  der  Scheitelrlache  zu  den  Armeu  verlaufen." 
Schultze  called  them  "  Scheitelstiicke,"  Zittel  and  De  Loriol 
"  orals,"  and  all  speak  of  open  ambulacral  furrows  leading  to  the 
arms,  and  of  an  external  mouth.  The  latter  two  writers  refer  the 
genus  to  the  Haplocrinidse,  Schultze  to  the  Platycrinidae.  Car- 
penter (Chall.  Rep.,  p.  103),  regards  Goccocrinus, "  like  the  recent 
Holopus,  to  be  permanently  in  the  condition  of  a  Crinoid  larva  in 
which  the  orals  have  not  yet  moved  away  from  the  raclials, 
though  separated  from  one  another."  In  the  interpretation  of 
the  plates  he  agrees  with  Zittel,  De  Loriol  and  Allman. 

A  similar  interpretation  was  given  by  us  in  our  generic  descrip- 
tion in  Part  II,  when  we  took  the  plates  of  the  inner  ring  to  be 
identical  with  the  so-called  "  orals  "  of  Gyathocrinus,  but  this  has 
been  abandoned  after  finding  the  latter  plates  to  be  interradials, 
and  the}'  are  now  regarded  by  us  as  secondary  interradial  plates. 
When  we  adopted  Zittel's  interpretation,  we  were  misled  by  the 
superficial  resemblance  to  the  oral  pieces  in  the  recent  genus 
Hyocrinus,  overlooking  the  fact  that  the  latter  rest  within  a  belt 
of  perisomic  pieces,  in  place  of  interradials  in  the  former.  Gocco- 
crinus bacca,  as  seen  by  Roemer 's  figure  (Fauna  West.  Tenn.,  PI. 
4,  fig.  5  c),  has  three  interradials  arranged  transversely  as  in  the 
Platycrinidae,  the  outer  ones  resting  against  the  secondary 
radials.  The  presence  of  higher  interradials  in  this  species  is 
sufficient  to  prove  satisfactorily  that  the  genus  Goccocrinus  is  no 
Haplocrinite,  and  that  it  does  not  even  go  with  the  Inadunata. 
It  is  possible  that  Goccocrinus  rosaceus  had  exceptionally  but 
one  interradial  within  the  first  row,  but  as  a  member  of  the 
Camarata  it  must  have  possessed  higher  interradials,  like  other 
Palaeocrinoids  in  which  the  interradials  come  in  contact  with  the 
higher  radials,  contrary  to  the  Inadunata,  which  have,  as  a  rule, 
a  single  interradial  plate. 

We  doubt  if  even  Carpenter,  although  he  is  inclined  to  accept 
the  upper  series  of  interradials  in  Platycrinus  as  anambulacral 
plates,  will  go  so  far  after  examining  our  diagrams,  as  to  include 
among  these  the  lateral  plates  of  the  proximal  row,  either  in 
Platycrinus  or  Goccocrinus,  which  he  overlooked  in  both  genera. 
Goccocrinus  is  certainly  not  in  the  same  morphological  condition 
as  Holopus,  even  admitting,  which  we  do  not,  that  the   upper 

18 


258  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

interratlial  plates  were  orals.  In  the  latter  genus,  the  orals  rest 
against  the  radials,  and  the  ambulacra  are  exposed  only  along  the 
arms.  In  Coccocrinus,  however,  the  so-called  "  orals  "  abut  with 
their  outer  ends  against  the  interradials,  and  the  clefts  from  the 
"  orals,"  in  place  of  entering  the  arms,  are  continued  between  the 
interradial  plates. 

In  Part  II,  p.  58,  we  asserted  that  the  clefts  along  both  plates 
were  probably  filled  in  the  animal  by  alternate  (covering)  pieces, 
and  the  summit  openings  by  dome  plates ;  although  regarding  at 
that  time  the  inner  circlet  of  interradials  as  oral  pieces.  We 
admit  that  Carpenter  is  right  in  asserting  that  the  existence  of 
covering  plates  between  the  orals  is  contrary  to  the  structure 
of  recent  Crinoids,  and  at  variance  with  the  nature  of  oral 
plates  generally ;  but  considering,  as  we  do  now,  that  the  inner 
as  well  as  the  outer  plates  are  interradials,  this  objection  loses 
its  force,  since  covering  plates  are  found  between  interradials  in 
most  of  the  Platycrinidse.  Yet  the  case  of  Coccocrinus  is  some- 
what different  from  that  of  an  ordinary  Platycrinoid,  which 
together  with  covering  pieces  has  well-developed  summit  plates, 
of  which  no  trace  has  been  found  in  any  of  the  specimens  of 
Coccocrinus.  Carpenter  thinks  that  in  Coccocrinus  the  central 
piece  was  unrepresented,  that  its  five  inner  interradials  are  ho- 
mologous with  the  six  proximals  of  Platycrinus,  and  that  the 
tentacular  vestibule  with  the  mouth  at  the  bottom  was  exposed 
to  view.  This  interpretation  is  a  natural  consequence  of  his 
oral  theory,  and  shows  still  more  forcibly  the  difficulties  of 
his  position.  Not  only  has  he  to  admit  a  homology  of  five 
plates  to  six,  but  that  in  a  Silurian  genus  mouth  and  food 
grooves  were  not  covered.  This  assumption,  which  represents 
an  enormous  advance  in  the  development  of  the  group,  not 
attained  by  any  other  Palseocrinoid,  is  alone  sufficient  to  over- 
throw his  whole  theory,  and  this  the  more  when  applied  to  a 
genus  which  decidedly  represents  a  low  stage  among  these 
Crinoids.  What  is  left  to  make  Coccocrinus  a  Palaeocrinoid  ? 
Even  the  asymmetry,  which,  according  to  Carpenter,  is  one  of 
the  best  characters  for  separating  the  older  and  later  Crinoids, 
is  rather  problematical,  as  it  has  no  special  anal  plate. 

Admitting  that  the  inner  plates  in  Coccocrinus  are  secondary 
interradials  and  not  proximals,  we  have  to  account  for  thr  ab- 
sence of  i  hese  plates  in  this  case.     That  the  summil  plates,  which 


1885.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  259 

are  so  universally  represented  throughout  this  group,  should  be 
totally  absent  in  this  genus,  seems  to  us  not  very  probable. 
Yet  the  central  opening  which  should  contain  them  is  so  small, 
compared  -with  the  space  taken  up  by  them  in  Platycriniis-am\ 
allied  forms,  that  it  seems  almost  impossible  to  have  been  occu- 
pied by  seven  or  more  plates.  Besides,  there  is  not  a  single 
instance  known  to  us,  in  which  either  the  summit  plates  or  the 
covering  pieces  were  obliterated  in  the  specimen,  leaving  at  the 
same  time  the  interradials  in  position,  as  we  find  it  in  all  these 
specimens.  This  leads  us  to  the  conclusion  that  in  Coccocrinus, 
as  in  Platycrinus,  the  five  interradial  series  had  been  separated 
laterally  to  their  full  length,  but  that  the  disk  covered  by  the 
summit  plates  had  not  been  raised  to  the  surface  as  in  that  genus, 
leaving  an  open  gap  and  lateral  clefts  permanently  as  in  Holopus, 
with  the  exception,  however,  that  in  the  latter  genus  the  clefts 
are  formed  between  the  orals.  According  to  our  interpretation, 
Coccocrinus  represents  phylogeneticalby  a  transition  form  between 
Culicocrinus,  in  which  the  interradials  are  still  closed  and  its 
summit  plates  and  covering  pieces  subtegminal,  and  Platycrinus 
in  which  they  are  incorporated  with  the  calyx.  This  is  the  only 
explanation  which  meets  all  difficulties,  and  brings  these  genera, 
with  regard  to  the  distribution  of  the  plates,  under  the  same  rule 
with  the  other  Palseocrinoids. 

The  genus  Symbathocrinus  is  morphologically  a  much  higher 
form  than  either  Coccocrinus  or  Haplocrinus,  not  only  because 
it  had  better  developed  arms,  but  also  well  developed  summit 
plates.  Its  summit  had  never  been  observed  until  we  removed 
the  arms  in  ve^  perfect  specimens,  and  succeeded  in  laying 
bare  the  whole  ventral  surface.  It  consists  of  eight  plates, 
four  large  proximals,  which,  together  with  three  other  plates, 
along  the  azygous  side,  form  a  closed  ring  around  a  very  con- 
spicuous central  piece,  and  these  again  are  enclosed  by  ten  or 
more  smaller  pieces,  which  rest  upon  the  highly  elevated  articular 
facets  of  the  radials. 

These  outer  plates  (there  may  be  one  or  two  additional  ones 
toward  the  azygous  side)  are  smaller  than  the  proximals  ;  five  of 
them  are  placed  radially,  the  others  interradially.  In  the  first 
specimen  which  we  dissected,  and  which  was  sent  to  Dr.  Carpenter 
for  stud}-,  the  lateral  sutures  between  the  smaller  plates  could  not 
be  distinguished.    That  plates  were  interposed  between  the  radials 


260  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

and  proximals  (his  orals)  was  clearly  shown,  and  was  also  noticed 
by  him  in  his  letter.  We  were,  therefore,  somewhat  surprised 
when  we  found  them  ignored  in  his  discussion,  and  observed  his 
statement  that  "  the  so-called  apical  dome  plates  rest  directly 
upon  the  upper  edges  of  the  articular  faces."  We  regret  this  the 
more,  as  we  should  like  to  know  whether  he  regards  them  as  calyx 
or  perisomic  plates.  In  our  opinion  they  cannot  be  perisomic,  as 
five  of  them  have  a  strictly  radial  position.  Nor  do  we  believe 
that  the  five  radial  openings  which  we  at  first  thought  we  observed 
along  the  upper  angle  of  these  plates,  at  their  juncture  with  the 
proximals,  are  ambulacral  or  arm  openings,  as  Carpenter  suggests. 
We  are  inclined  to  take  them  for  mere  depressions  along  the 
suture,  as  it  is  very  improbable  that  the  ambulacra  in  proceeding 
to  the  arms  passed  over  these  plates.  We  regard  the  five  radial 
pieces  as  radial  dome  plates,  and  the  alternate  ones  as  interradials. 
Carpenter  also  omits  to  state  whether  the  "  orals  "  in  Symbatho- 
crinus  consist  of  live  or  six  pieces.  That  there  are  more  than 
five  is  clearly  seen  in  the  specimen  which  he  examined,  although 
the  exact  number  could  not  be  ascertained.  Other  specimens, 
however,  which  we  have  since  prepared  (PI.  4,  figs.  9,  10),  prove 
clearly  that  there  are  seven  pieces.  This  is  morphologically  of 
the  utmost  importance,  as  showing  that  the  summit  structure  of 
Symbathocrimis  is  altogether  different  from  that  of  Haplocrinus 
or  Bhizocrinus,  with  which  Carpenter  identifies  it,  and  it  is  more 
like  that  of  Platycrinus.  We  shall  return  to  this  when  we  take 
up  the  oral  plates. 

As  a  result  of  the  foregoing  observations,  we  draw  the  follow- 
ing conclusions,  viz.: — 

1.  Interradials  are  represented  in  all  groups  of  the  Palaeocri- 
noidea.  They  were  early  developed  in  the  larva,  attained  at  once 
large  proportions,  and  persisted  through  life  or  were  resorbed  on 
approaching  maturity. 

2.  They  extend  invariably  to  the  proximals,  or  even  cover  them 
completeby. 

3.  They  are  more  extravagantly  developed  in  the  earlier 
groups,  not  always  in  number,  but  by  extending  over  compara- 
tively larger  space. 

4.  In  all  groups  in  which  the  arms  are  free  from  the  first 
radials,  they  are  represented  by  only  five  single  plates,  and  these 
are  located  ventrally.     Groups  with   two  or  more   radials   have 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  261 

two  at  least,  and  the  number  increases  in  proportion  to  the 
increase  of  the  radials,  by  means  of  which  the  lower  series  attain 
gradually  a  dorsal  position. 

D.    The  Anal  Plates  and  Anal  Tube. 

It  has  been  a  general  practice  to  regard  all  plates  of  the 
azygous  interradius  as  anal  plates.  From  a  strictly  morpholog- 
ical standpoint  this  is  not  correct,  as  comparatively  few  of  these 
plates  are  connected  with  the  anal  aperture,  although  all  of  them  are 
more  or  less  affected  by  it.  Properly  speaking,  in  analogy  with 
recent  Crinoids.  there  is  but  one  true  anal  plate,  and  the  succeed- 
ing pieces  are  either  interradials,  or  they  constitute  parts  of  the 
anal  tube,  which,  in  the  growing  animal,  by  the  increase  of  inter- 
radials, were  incorporated  into  the  test.  The  latter  plates,  as 
representing  parts  of  the  calyx,  which  serve  the  same  purpose 
as  the  true  anal  piece,  might  be  very  appropriately  distinguished  as 
"higher"  anal  plates,  but  unfortunately  in  many  groups  it  is 
almost  impossible  to  separate  them  from  the  interradials.  A 
discrimination,  however,  should  be  made  wherever  it  is  prac- 
ticable. 

In  the  Pentacrinoid  larva  of  Antedon  rosacea,  according  to  Dr. 
W.  B.  Carpenter  (Philos.  Trans.  Royal  Soc.  London,  pp.  726— 
747),  the  anal  plate  makes  its  appearance  almost  contempo- 
raneously with  the  first  radials,  and  stands  on  a  level  with  them. 
It  is  at  first  a  rather  irregular  plate,  which  somewhat  later  takes 
an  elliptic  form,  and  is  gradually  lifted  out  from  between  the 
radials,  and  developed  into  a  conspicuous  funnel,  which  disap- 
pears at  the  end  of  Pentacrinoid  life,  being  removed  b}r  resorption. 

The  earlier  stages  of  the  anal  plates  in  the  Palseocrinoidea  are 
onty  known  from  phylogenetic  evidence,  but  this  shows  that  the 
modifications  which  they  undergo  in  palreontological  times  cor- 
respond closely  with  those  of  the  growing  Pentacrinoid.  In  the 
Inadunata,  which  have  closer  analogies  with  the  Neocrinoidea 
than  the  other  two  groups,  and  which  like  them  have  but  a  single 
anal  plate,  the  latter  can  be  traced  from  its  first  appearance  in 
the  Silurian  to  its  total  resorption  in  the  Carboniferous  and 
Trias,  and  the  various  conditions  of  development,  as  thus  repre- 
sented, form  excellent  characters  for  generic  distinction.  Among 
the  earliest  Inadunata,  however,  we  find  a  transition  state  which 
either  is  unrepresented,  or  has  not  been  recognized  in  the  Penta- 


2fi2  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

crinoid.  We  refer  to  the  development  of  the  anal  plate  from  the 
so-called  azygous  piece.  That  a  plate  which  takes  such  an  im- 
portant part  in  the  phylogeny  of  this  group  should  be  altogether 
unrepresented  in  the  young  Neocrinoid,  seems  to  us  somewhat 
doubtful,  the  more  so  as  the  Neocrinoidea  are  in  all  probability 
the  pala?ontological  successors,  if  not  the  linear  descendants,  of 
the  Inadunata.  Possibly  the  undivided  azygous  plate,  as  repre- 
sented in  Baerocrinu8,  has  been  overlooked  in  the  early  larva, 
and  this  would  not  be  surprising,  as  the  plate  occupies  the  posi- 
tion, and  has  very  nearly  the  form  of  an  ordinary  first  radial. 

In  our  chapter  on  the  radials  we  have  already  alluded  to  the 
azygous  piece,  and  expressed  our  conviction  that  its  gradual 
resorption  gave  origin,  not  only  to  the  right  posterior  radial,  but 
also  to  the  anal  plate.  We  have  shown  that  in  Haplocrinus,  a 
close  ally  of  Baerocrinus,  the  fifth  radial  is  somewhat  rudimen- 
tarily  represented  by  a  small  trigonal  piece  occupying  the  right 
upper  corner ;  that  this  genus,  as  yet,  had  no  anal  plate,  the  left 
corner  of  the  azygous  piece  being  still  intact ;  that  in  Hybocrinus 
the  left  side  of  the  plate  was  taken  up  b}'  a  small  anal,  and  the 
azygous  piece  proportionally  diminished  in  size  ;  that  in  the 
succeeding  stages,  which  arc  typified  by  Iocrinus,  Dendrocrinus, 
Homocrinus,  the  size  of  the  anal  plate  gradually  increased  as  the 
azygous  piece  diminished;  and  that  at  last  in  Cyatfiocrinus 
the  latter  plate  was  entirely  removed,  and  the  anal  plate  took  the 
position  of  that  in  the  larva  of  Antedon.  These  modifications 
were  introduced,  as  a  general  rule,  in  geological  succession,  but 
not  always  uniformly,  for  in  some  groups  the  development  went 
on  more  rapidly  than  in  others.  Such  a  rapid  development  took 
place  in  Gyathocrinus,  which  existed  already  in  the  Silurian, 
although  attaining  its  maximum  representation  in  the  Carbon- 
iferous ;  while  in  most  of  the  Poteriocrinida:,  which  eminently 
belong  to  the  Carboniferous,  the  very  opposite  is  observed.  The 
most  remarkable  deviation  in  this  respect  is  shown  by  the  sym- 
metrical Silurian  genus  Oodiacrinus,  which  apparently  has 
neither  azygous  nor  ana!  plate. 

The  final  resorption  of  both  plates  is  best  shown  in  the 
Poteriocrinidse.  1  u  Poteriocrinus,  Eupachycrin us  and  Zeacrin us, 
the  azygous  plate  is  comparatively  well  developed,  but  com- 
pletely pushed  OUt  of  the  radial  position  which  it  had  previously 
occupied,      in   these  genera  the  anal  plate   is   -mall,  and    the  first 


1885.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES  OF   rUILADELPHI A.  263 

plate  of  the  tube  forms  a  part  of  the  calyx.  The  allied  Graphio- 
crinus,  however,  has  no  azygous  plate,  and  the  posterior  basal, 
which  is  somewhat  elongate,  supports  upon  its  truncate  upper 
end  only  an  anal  plate.  In  Ceriocrinus,  which  is  in  a  similar 
condition,  the  anal  plate  is  partly  lifted  out  from  between  the 
radials,  and  extends  half  way  beyond  the  articular  faces  of  these 
plates.  In  Erisocrinus,  the  anal  plate  is  not  only  smaller,  but 
rests  wholly  upon  the  radials,  beyond  the  limits  of  the  dorsal 
cup.  Finally  in  Encrinus,  this  plate  seems  to  have  been  entirely 
removed  in  the  adult.  We  have  a  specimen  of  Encrinus  lilii- 
formis  only  an  inch  in  length,  including  the  arms,  which  contains 
between  the  arms  a  row  of  four  conspicuous,  slightly  convex 
plates,  the  upper  one  triangular,  which  we  regard  as  plates  of 
an  anal  tube.  This  discovery  is  of  some  importance,  as  it  tends 
to  prove  that  Encrinus  is  not  a  Neocrinoid,  but  a  highly-developed 
Poteriocrinoid. 

In  the  Silurian  Triacrinus  and  Pisocrinus,  which  we  arrange 
under  the  Symbathocrinidse,  we  find  dorsally  no  anal  plate,  but 
simply  an  azygous  piece.  This  supports  both  posterior  radials, 
which  are  less  than  half  as  large  as  the  two  antero-lateral  ones, 
and  join  laterally.  In  the  Carboniferous  genus  Symbathocrinus, 
however,  the  azygous  plate  is  wanting,  the  radials  are  almost 
equally  developed,  and  these  support  a  small  anal  piece.  In  the 
allied  Stortingocrinus  and  in  Stylocrinus  (Symbathocrinus  of 
Miller  and  Schultze),  although  exclusively  Devonian  genera,  we 
find  neither  azygous  nor  anal  plate,  but  Phimocrinus,  like  Sym- 
bathocrinus, possessed  a  large  anal  aperture  between  the  highly 
extended  articular  facets  of  the  radials,  and  may  have  had  an 
anal  plate.  Whether  the  summit  plates  of  the  two  former  genera 
had  reached  the  advanced  state  of  Symbathocrinus,  or  were  }ret 
in  the  condition  of  Haplocrinus,  cannot  be  ascertained  from  any 
of  the  specimens,  but  it  may  well  be  doubted.  In  Eaplocrinus 
the  anal  opening  is  pierced  through  one  of  the  interradials,  and 
the  same  may  be  the  case  in  Stortingocrinus  and  Pisocrinus.  In 
Coccocrinus  and  Gulicocrinus,  the  anus  is  located  between  the 
first  and  second  radials,  piercing  the  one  as  much  as  the  other ; 
in  Platycrinus  above  the  first  interradial,  being  separated  from 
the  proximals  by  a  special  anal  plate. 

It  has  been  stated  that  the  Inadunata  possess  no  higher  orders 
of  anal  pieces,  and  that  the  plates  succeeding  the  first,  form  a 


264  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

part  of  the  tube.  They  do  not  all,  however,  have  the  tube  well 
developed,  and  in  some  of  them  it  is  altogether  unrepresented. 
Haplocrinus  has  a  simple  anal  opening,  and  herein  deviates 
from  most  of  the  other  genera  of  this  group.  The  Hybocrinidre 
and  Cyathocrinus  alutaceus  have  only  a  short  protuberance,  com- 
posed of  small  plates. 

Tlic  simplest  tube  is  found  in  Catillocrinus  and  Calceocrinus 
(PI.  5,  figs.  15,  16),  in  which  it  consists  of  a  single  row  of  very 
large  solid  plates,  transversely  curved  like  an  arm-joint,  with  a 
semicircular  groove  along  the  ventral  side.  This  groove,  which 
extends  from  the  base  of  the  tube  to  its  distal  end,  is  open  in  all 
our  specimens.  A  somewhat  similar  tube  occurs  in  Symba/In). 
crinus,  in  which  the  proximal  plates  at  the  posterior  side  are 
considerably  thicker  than  those  upon  the  other  sides. 

More  important  from  a  morphological  standpoint, is  the  ventral 
tube  of  the  Heterocrinidse,  Anomalocrinida-  and  some  Silurian 
C3"athocrinoid  genera  in  which  the  anal  piece,  as  in  Catillocrinus, 
is  succeeded  by  a  row  of  heavy  curved  plates,  which  on  the  dorsal 
side  pass  up  to  the  end  of  the  tube.  These  plates  are  bordered 
laterally  by  several  rows  of  delicate  pieces,  pierced  by  pores  or 
slits  along  their  sides,  the  whole  forming  a  sac-like  appendage. 
It  is  very  evident  that  this  row  of  dorsal  plates  is  identical  with 
that  of  Catillocrinus  and  Calceocrinus,  and  also  that  the  ventral 
side  of  the  tube  in  the  latter  two  genera  was  closed  by  plates  in 
:i  similar  way. 

A  still  higher  form  is  represented  l>\  the  later  Cyathocrinidse, 
which  have  no  such  row  of  dorsal  plates,  the  entire  sac  being  com- 
posed of  delicate  pieces.  Most  of  these  are  perforated  with  pores, 
with  the  exception  of  the  proximal  rows  of  plates  dorsally,  which 
are  solid,  and  also  frequently  those  crowning  the  distal  end; 
while  those  facing  the  ventral  side  are  more  or  less  perforated. 
Among  the  earlier  Poteriocrinida-,  the  sac  is  large,  either  cylin- 
drical, club-shaped,  conical  or  balloon-shaped,  and  it  often  extends 
beyond  the  tips  of  the  arms.  In  the  later  Poteriocrinidae,  how- 
ever, the  sac  dwindles  down  to  a  short  cone,  even  in  the  asym- 
metrical EujMchycrirnis,  and  it  lias  apparently  no  pores,  at  least 
not  dorsally. 

In  most  of  the  Camarata  the  anal  plate  is  placed  between  the 
first  radials,  and  occupies  the  lower  portion  of  the  dorsal  cup. 
in  the  Rhodocrinkhe,  in  which  the  first  interradials  alternate  with 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  265 

the  first  radials,  the  posterior  interradial  takes  the  functions  of 
the  anal  plate,  and  the  second  order  of  interradials,  which  consists 
of  two  pieces,  generally  contains  the  second  anal  with  additional 
plates  above.  The  anals,  as  a  general  rule,  are  arranged  longi- 
tudinally, hut  the  row  is  often  interrupted  by  intervening  inter- 
radials. In  Reteocrinus,  in  which  the  interradial  series  consists 
of  small  irregular  pieces,  the  posterior  side  is  divided  equally  by 
a  vertical  row  of  large  convex  anals,  arranged  like  the  plates 
which  constitute  the  dorsal  side  in  the  tube  of  Catillocrinus. 
The  only  essential  difference  between  the  two  structures  is  that 
the  plates  in  the  latter  form  a  free  appendage,  similar  to  that  of 
Thaumatocrinus,  while  those  of  Reteocrinus  and  Xenocrinus  are 
incorporated  into  the  calyx. 

All  typical  Actinocrinidse,  Glyptasteridae,  Barrandeocrinidre, 
Acrocrinidse  and  Hexacrinidae  have  a  special  anal  plate  between 
their  first  radials,  and  in  most  of  them  the  first  posterior  inter- 
radial is  split  into  two  halves  to  receive  the  second  anal  plate. 
However,  in  Actinocrinus  and  allied  genera  which  we  separated 
under  Actinocrinites,  the  second  anal  is  pushed  up  to  the  line  of 
the  secondary  interradials,  although  the  first  interradial,  as  in  the 
other  groups,  is  divided.  The  splitting  of  the  first  interradial  for 
the  reception  of  an  anal  piece,  to  which  we  have  alluded,  is  of  the 
utmost  importance  for  the  study  of  the  summit  plates,  as  we  find 
the  same  thing  there  repeated  among  the  proximals. 

In  the  Meloerinidae  the  first  interradials  are  undivided,  and 
in  most  of  them  the  lower  anal  plate  is  inserted  between  the  two 
secondary  interradials  ;  in  others,  however,  which  have  no  anals 
within  the  dorsal  cup,  the  anals  commence  at  the  equatorial  zone. 
In  the  Platycrinidae  the  first  interradial  of  the  posterior  side  is 
considerably  larger,  and  evidently  consolidated  with  the  first  anal 
plate.  In  the  Calyptocrinidae,  finally,  the  whole  calyx,  dorsally 
and  ventrally,  is  strictly  symmetrical,  the  anus  central,  and  the 
only  asymmetry  in  their  structure  is  found  among  basals  and 
proximals. 

The  anal  opening  in  all  Camarata  is  located  at  the  distal  end 
of  the  tube,  whether  this  terminates  within  the  calyx  or  is  ex- 
tended into  a  proboscis,  and  its  position  is  more  or  less  lateral, 
except  in  the  Calyptocrinidae  in  which  it  penetrates  the  central 
piece.  The  plates  composing  the  tube  of  the  Camarata  are  ab- 
actinal,  and  form  a  part  of  the  posterior  interradial  series ;  they 


266  PROCEEDINGS  OP   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

are  strong,  rigid,  without  pores,  are  suturally  connected,  and  their 
arrangement  is  irregular.  This  tube  differs  essentially  from  the 
ventral  sac,  which  forms  a  part  of  the  disk,  and  is  composed  of 
anambulacral  plates,  into  which  the  plates  of  the  abactinal  tube 
arc  incorporated,  in  a  similar  manner  as  the  higher  radials  and 
proximal  pinnules  are  into  the  disk  of  the  Neocrinoidea.  More- 
over, the  ventral  sac  does  not  contain  the  anal  aperture,  which  is 
general^  located  within  the  disk.  For  further  consideration  of 
this  organ  we  refer  to  our  chapter  on  the  perisomic  plates. 

Among  the  Articulata,  the  Crotalocrinidae  and  Cleiocrinidoe 
have  an  anal  plate  in  lateral  contact  with  the  radials.  The  same 
is  the  case  in  the  Ichthyocrinidse,  with  the  exception  of  Ichthyo- 
crinas,  which  has  dorsally  no  anal  plate  and  generally  no  inter- 
radials.  Pycnosaccus,  Calpiocrinus,  Homalocrinus,  Lecano- 
crinus,  Gnorimocrinus  and  Mespilocrinus  have  even  an  azygous 
piece,  which  is  absent  in  Anisocrinus,  Taxocrinus,  Onycho- 
crinus,  Forbesiocrinus  and  Lithocrinus.  An  anal  appendage  has 
been  observed  only  in  Crotalocrinus  and  Enallocrinus,  located 
ventrally,  close  to  the  periphery.  In  the  former  it  consists  of  a 
tube  composed  of  eight  vertical  rows  of  heavy  quadrangular 
pieces,  connected  by  suture.  In  Enallocrinus  its  form  is 
unknown. 

In  Part  I  we  described  Taxocrinus,  Onychocrinns  and  Gnori- 
mocrinus as  having  a  small  lateral  tube  resting  upon  the  first 
anal  plate.  To  this  Dr.  P.  H.  Carpenter  objected  in  his  paper 
on  Thaumatocrinus  (Philos.  Trans.  Royal  Soc,  1884,  pt.  iii,  p. 
928).  He  admitted  "  that  the  arm-like  series  supported  the  lower 
portion  of  the  anal  interradius,"  but  doubted  "  that  the  plates 
had  been  hollowed  out  on  their  inner  side  for  the  reception  of 
the  hind-gut,"  which  "  undoubtedly  opened  to  the  exterior  at  a 
higher  level  through  a  regular  anal  tube,  just  as  in  other  Crinoids." 
These  objections  are  well  founded,  and  we  are  now  fully  con- 
vinced that  those  plates  were  bordered  laterally  by  interradial 
pieces  as  in  Reteocrinus. 

The  Plates  of  the  Actinal  System. 

A.    The  Summit  Plates. 

The  summit  plates  consist  of  the  actinal  plates,  overlying  and 

immediately  surrounding  the   peristome.     For   these  plates  we 

have  heretofore  proposed  the  name  "  apical  dome  plates,"  but 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  267 

finding  its  application  somewhat  cumbersome,  as  the  word 
"  apical  "  is  used  in  a  different  sense,  we  have  abandoned  it.  The 
summit  plates  are  represented  in  the  PaUvoerinoidea  by  the  central 
piece,  the  six  or  more  so-called  proximate,  and  the  radial  dome 
plates;  in  the  Neocrinoidea,  by  the  oral  plates  alone. 

The  orals  constitute  important  elements  in  the  ontogeny  of 
recent  Crinoids.  They  appear  at  first  in  the  form  of  a  closed 
pyramid,  composed  of  five  triangular  plates. 

According  to  Dr.  P.  H.  Carpenter  (Chall.  Rep.,  p.  71),  "  their 
rudiments  appear  in  the  free-swimming  larva  simultaneously  with 
those  of  the  basals,  which  are  developed  spirally  round  the  right 
peritoneal  tube ;  while  the  orals  appear  in  a  similar  spiral  around 
the  left  one.  The  skeleton  is  at  first  limited  entirely  to  these 
two  rings  of  plates,  the  edges  of  which  meet  around  the  equator 
of  the  growing  cup,  though  they  ultimately  become  separated  by 
the  appearance  of  the  radials  between  them.  At  the  base  of  the 
closed  pjn-amid  formed  by  the  oral  plates  is  the  upper  portion  of 
the  larval  body,  in  the  centre  of  which  the  opening  of  the  mouth 
is  formed.  .  .  .  At  a  certain  period  of  development,  the  five 
valves  of  this  oral  pyramid  gradually  separate  so  as  to  open  the 
mouth  to  the  exterior,  and  allow  the  protrusion  of  the  tentacles, 
while  the  floor  of  the  original  tentacular  vestibule,  with  the 
mouth  in  its  centre,  becomes  the  peristome  of  the  growing 
Crinoid."  Afterwards  the  orals  become  "  completely  separated 
from  the  basals  and  radials  by  the  equatorial  perisome  and  are 
relatively  carried  inwards,  while  the  second  radials  project  some- 
what outwards.  .  .  .  The  orals  are  thus  left  as  a  circlet  of  five 
separate  plates  protecting  the  peristome  in  the  centre  of  the 
upper  surface  of  the  disk."  In  all  Pentacrinidse  and  also  in  the 
Comatulre,  with  the  single  exception  of  Thaumatocrinus,  the  orals 
eventually  undergo  a  process  of  resorption,  while  in  Ehizocrinus, 
HyocrinuS)  HoIojjus  and  Thaumatocrinus,  the}'  persist  through 
life. 

Nothing  is  known  of  the  orals  in  Mesozoic  Crinoids. 

That  the  oi'als,  which  assume  such  an  early  prominence  in  the 
ontogeii3T  of  the  later  Crinoids,  should  be  unrepresented  in 
paheozoic  ones,  seems  scarcely  possible.  This  has  been  conceded 
by  various  writers,  but  there  is,  as  yet,  much  difference  of  opinion 
as  to  the  plates  which  represent  them. 

The   first   writer  who   referred   to   oral   plates   in   palaeozoic 


268  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Crinoids  was  Prof.  Allman.  He  suggested  an  analogy  between 
the  transition  stage  of  Antedon  and  the  permanent  condition  of 
Haplocrinu8f  Coccocrinus,  Stephanocrinus  and  Lageniocrinus. 
In  these  genera  he  took  the  plates  covering  the  ventral  surface 
to  be  the  orals.  We  have  already  shown  that  the  ventral  pyra- 
mid in  Haplocrinus  and  Coccocrinus  is  composed  of  interradials 
and  not  of  orals,  and  the  same  ma}'  be  said  of  Stephanocrinus ; 
while  the  so-called  orals  in  Lageniocrinus  are  radial  in  position, 
and  evidently  arm  pieces. 

The  next  writer  on  this  subject  was  Prof.  Zittel,  who  thought 
these  plates  were  present  in  Haplocrinus,  Coccocrinus,  Symbatho- 
crinus,  in  the  Cyathocrinidse,  Hybocrinidse  and  Crotalocrinidse. 
That  the  so-called  orals  in  the  Cyathocrinidse  and  Hybocrinidse  are 
interradials  can  no  longer  be  doubted  ;  while  the  orals  of  Zittel 
in  Symbathocrinus  prove  to  be  merely  articular  extensions  of  the 
radials,  which,  in  their  form,  somewhat  resemble  the  orals  of 
recent  Crinoids.  The  so-called  orals  in  the  Crotalocrinidse  are 
identical  with  the  proximals  (nobis),  and  will  be  discussed  in 
connection  with  them. 

De  Loriol  substantiall}"  accepts  Zittel's  classification,  and  also 
his  interpretation  of  the  plates. 

Dr.  P.  H.  Carpenter,  in  the  Challenger  Report,  no  longer 
regards  the  large  interradial  plates  in  the  Cyathocrinidse  and 
Blastoidea  as  orals,  but,  as  before,  he  applies  the  term  to  the 
interradials  of  Allagecrinus  and  Haplocrinus,  and  to  the  inner 
ring  of  interradials  in  Coccocrinus.  He  also  designates  as  orals 
the  six  proximals  surrounding  the  central  piece,  and  calls  the 
latter  the  "  orocentral."  He  further  states  that  orals  were 
"represented  in  the  vault  of  all  Palseocrinoidse,  whether  simple 
or  complex,  although  they  are  sometimes  very  greatly  reduced." 
Carpenter's  views  agree  essentially  with  those  of  Zittel,  only  that 
he  extends  the  term  to  the  proximals  in  all  cases,  while  Zittel 
applies  it  exclusively  to  those  of  the  Crotalocrinidse.  According 
to  his  description,  the  vault  in  the  Platycrinidae  is  paved  with 
well-developed  "  Centralplatten,"  and  in  his  general  remarks  on 
the  Actinocrinidse  he  speaks  of  "seven  Scheitelplatten,"  sur- 
rounded by  a  greater  or  smaller  number  of  radial  and  interradial 
plates. 

As  for  ourselves,  we  have  described  orals  in  Haplocrinus, 
Coccocrinus,  and  in  the  Cyathocrinidse;  but,  as  already  stated, 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  269 

later  investigations  have  convinced  ns  that  the  so-called  orals  in 
all  three  groups  are  calyx  interradials.  At  no  time,  however, 
have  we  held  these  plates  to  he  structurally  identical  with  the 
proximals. 

Before  attempting  to  determine  the  identity  and  relationship 
of  the  oral  plates  in  the  older  Crinoids,  it  will  be  necessary  to 
give  a  full  description  of  the  different  plates  which  constitute 
their  summit. 

The  central  piece,  as  a  rule,  is  the  largest  plate  of  the  ventral 
side.  It  is  not  only  the  centre  of  figure,  but  also  the  centre  of 
radiation,  and  as  such  occupies  the  same  position  ventrally  as  the 
basals  occupy  on  the  dorsal  side.  It  is  frequently  nodose,  even 
spiniferous,  but  always  more  or  less  convex,  and  has  a  concavity 
upon  its  inner  floor,  toward  which  all  organs  from  the  arms  con- 
centrate. The  central  piece  is  surrounded  variously  by  from 
seven  to  twelve  other  plates  ;  four  of  these  are  larger  than  the 
others,  interradial  in  position,  and  each  one  rests  upon,  and  con- 
nects with,  one  of  the  four  regular  interradial  series.  Toward 
the  posterior  side  there  are  three  smaller  plates  (PL  7,  figs.  2,  5, 
and  PI.  8,  figs.  7,  8),  rarely  two  (PI.  7,  figs.  6,  7,  8),  which  simi- 
larly connect  with  the  azygous  interradius.  The  three  smaller 
pieces  are  frequently  separated  from  the  larger  ones  at  each  side 
by  a  good-sized  plate,  radial  in  position  (Xr  in  PI.  7,  figs.  3-10, 
and  PI.  8,  figs.  1,  3);  sometimes,  however,  they  unite  laterally 
with  the  larger  ones.  This  is  the  case  in  the  simpler  forms,  such 
as  Symbathocrinus  (PL  5,  fig.  12),  and  in  Cyathocrinus  alutaceus. 
In  very  complex  genera,  and  especially  among  the  huge  forms  of 
the  Actinocrinidpe,  the  four  larger  plates  are  also  separated  by 
radial  structures,  general^  by  three  plates  longitudinally  arranged 
(PL  8,  figs.  1,  3,  and  PL  4,  fig.  4),  of  which  the  inner  ones  abut 
against  the  central  piece,  the  outer  ones  against  the  second  radial 
and  against  the  sloping  sides  of  the  four  large  proximals.  In 
species  in  which  the  latter  are  laterally  connected,  which  is  much 
more  frequently  the  case,  there  is  but  one  radial  plate,  and  this 
takes  the  position  and  functions  of  the  third  one.  In  species 
with  a  single  radial,  this  rests  at  the  three  anterior  rays  within 
the  angles  formed  by  the  four  large  proximals  ;  while  the  plates 
of  the  two  posterior  rays  are  often  laterally  inserted  between  the 
larger  and  smaller  proximals,  abutting  against  the  central  piece. 
These  two  posterior  radials  were  thought  by  us,  and,  we  suspect, 


270  PROCEEDINGS   OF  THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

also  by  P.  II.  Carpenter,  to  represent  a  bisected  proximal,  and 
the  two  or  three  plates  which  the}'  enclose  were  supposed  to  be 
anals  or  plates  of  the  anal  tube — a  mistake  easily  explained  by 
the  fad  that  the  plates  stand  in  line  with,  and  join  the  four  large 
proximals,  and  have  very  near  their  size.  We  discovered  our 
mistake  when  we  found  that  in  all  internal  casts  the  radiation 
follows  I  he  median  line  of  the  plates,  and  not  the  suture,  as  in  the 
case  of  the  proximals.  The  disturbance  in  the  arrangement  of 
the  two  posterior  radials  is  evidently  due  to  the  anal  structures, 
which  pushed  these  plates  out  of  their  regular  position.  In 
species  with  a  large  subcentral  anal  tube,  the  position  of  these 
radials  is  so  completely  altered  that  they  are  sometimes  actually 
placed  within  the  semicircle  of  the  four  large  proximals.  Such 
is  the  case  in  the  specimen  of  Te.leiocrinux  (PI.  4,  fig.  4),  in  which 
the  anal  appendage  is  almost  central.  In  this  specimen,  all  three 
anterior  rays  have  three  primary  radials,  while  the  two  posterior 
ones  have  four.  The  inner  plates  serve  as  a  kind  of  axillary  for 
the  ambulacra  of  the  postero-  and  antero-lateral  rays,  which  are 
undivided  for  some  distance,  giving  off"  underneath  a  branch  to 
the  outer  radials.  The  presence  of  a  fourth  radial  is  rather  an 
exception,  and,  indeed,  three  radials  are  found,  as  far  as  we  know, 
only  in  the  larger  species  of  the  Actinocrinidae.  In  species  in 
which  the  covering  plates  pass  out  to  the  surface  of  the  vault, 
the  radial  dome  plates  are  frequently  either  wanting  in  the  three 
anterior  rays,  or  the}'  are  exceedingly  rudimentary  and  very 
irregular  in  form,  while  those  of  the  posterior  rays  are  generally 
intact  (PL  7,  figs.  3,  9,  10).  But  in  some  species  the  posterior 
radials  are  partially  or  totally  resorbed  (PL  7,  fig.  8),  and  the 
covering  plates  pass  out  directly  from  beneath  the  central  piece. 
In  Melocrinus  and  Gyathocrinus  aluto.ceus,  in  which  the  anal 
structures  are  comparatively  narrow,  the  central  piece  being 
generally  surrounded  by  only  six  plates,  of  which  two  face  the 
posterior  side — all  five  radials  are  placed  outside  the  ring  of 
proximals;  but  we  have  a  specimen  of  Melocrinus  Konincki  in 
which,  exceptionally,  the  plate  of  the  right  postero-lateral  ray  is 
placed  in  line  with  the  proximals.  Another  interesting  departure 
from  the  general  rule  is  found  among  the  larger  species  of  Dory- 
crinus,  Megistocrinus  and  Agaricocrinus,  in  which  the  central 
plate  is  isolated  from  the  proximals  by  a  belt  of  small  pieces. 
\<>i    even   the    proximals  are   connected   with  the  radial  dome 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  271 

plates,  nor  with  one  another,  and  each  summit  plate  has  a  totally 
isolated  position.  In  the  smaller  species  and  younger  specimens, 
however,  all  summit  plates  are  connected,  showing  that  those 
small  inserted  plates  result  from  excessive  growth,  and  are  intro- 
duced to  increase  the  capacity  of  the  visceral  cavitj'. 

Higher  orders  of  summit  radials  exist  in  comparatively  few 
genera.  We  must  admit  that  the  descriptions  which  we  gave  of 
these  plates,  although  correct  as  to  certain  species,  cannot  he 
applied  to  the  Palseocrinoidea  generally,  nor  even  to  all  Actino- 
crinidae.  Manjr  of  them  have  but  a  single  radial,  and  the  plates 
which  we  took  to  be  radials  in  most  of  them,  prove  to  be  inter- 
axillaries  and  interbrachials,  which  often  attain  a  larger  size  than 
the  surrounding  plates.  A  very  conspicuous  case  of  this  kind  is 
Borycrinus,  in  which  the  large  spiniferous  plate  above  each  ray 
is  not  a  primar}r  radial  as  we  had  supposed,  but  an  interaxillary, 
for  the  bifurcation  of  the  ambulacral  tube  takes  place  beneath 
the  preceding  plate.  The  misconception  of  these  plates  in  this 
and  other  genera  led  us  to  suppose  that  the  arrangement  of  some 
of  the  summit  plates  was  more  or  less  disturbed  in  all  species 
with  a  large  number  of  arms,  while  in  fact  we  had  searched  for 
plates  which  are  unrepresented.  The  arrangement  of  the  summit 
plates,  as  a  rule,  is  very  regular,  and  only  disturbed  by  the  anal 
tube.  They  are  readily  recognized  even  in  Megistocrinus ,  Stroto- 
crinus  and  Teleiocrinus  as  seen  by  our  diagrams  (PL  8,  figs.  1, 
3,  5,  and  PL  4,  fig.  4). 

It  has  been  stated  that  the  proximals,  in  all  cases  in  which 
they  have  been  recognized  by  us,  consist  of  more  than  five  plates, 
generally  of  seven,  and  we  have  asserted,  which  has  been 
accepted  by  Carpenter  (Chall.  Rep.,  p.  167),  that  the  two  outer 
plates  at  the  azygous  side  are  equivalent  to,  and  take  the  place 
of  a  fifth  large  one,  being  separated  from  each  other  by  anal 
plates  or  the  proboscis.  The  structure  is  well  shown  by  our 
diagrams,  but  in  examining  them  it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that 
the  plates  marked  Xr  are  radials,  and  not  interradials  as  hereto- 
fore supposed.  The  more  central  the  position  of  the  anal 
aperture,  and  the  larger  the  size  of  the  tube,  the  greater  is  the 
disturbance  in  the  general  arrangement  of  the  summit  plates. 
This  might  be  expected,  but  it  is  certainly  ver}^  remarkable  that 
the  azygous  proximal  is  divided  also  in  species  in  which  the 
position   of   the  anal    opening   is  lateral   or  dorsal,   and   totally 


272  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

outside  the  ring  of  proximate.  Yet  such  is  the  case  in  Megisto- 
crinus  Evansii  and  in  Megistocrinus  brevicornis,  in  which  the 
anal  tube  is  extremely  small,  located  beneath  the  arm  regions, 
and  separated  from  the  proximals  by  from  ten  to  twenty  rings  of 
plates.  At  the  az}rgous*  side  they  have  two  well-defined  proxi- 
mals, separated  by  irregular  small  plates,  in  a  similar  manner  as 
in  other  groups.  If  these  pieces  were  orals,  as  asserted  by 
Carpenter,  it  is  difficult  to  understand  wh}r  they  should  be  divided 
in  these  species,  especially  if  we  take  into  consideration  that  the 
orals  in  all  recent  Crinoids,  even  in  the  asymmetrical  Thaumato- 
crinus,  consist  of  five  undivided  plates. 

There  is  not  a  single  instance  known  among  recent  Crinoids  in 
which  the  anal  opening  penetrates  the  orals,  not  even  in  the  early 
larva,  in  which  the  oral  pyramid  occupies  the  whole  ventral  sur- 
face. In  the  larva  the  opening  is  placed  within  the  equatorial 
zone,  beneath  the  orals,  and  the  same  is  probably  the  case  in 
Hoi  opus,  in  which  the  orals  retain  permanently  the  condition  of 
the  larva.  In  the  more  advanced  stages,  the  anal  opening  is 
carried  inward  by  the  gradually  increasing  perisome,  but  it 
remains  outside  the  oral  ring  in  all  cases,  whether  the  orals 
become  absorbed  as  in  Pentacrinus,  Bathycrinus  and  Antedon,  or 
are  retained  permanently  as  in  Rhizocrinus,  Thaumatocrinus 
and  Hyocrinus. 

In  the  face  of  such  evidence  it  seems  to  us  extremely  hazardous 
to  assert  that  in  Palaeozoic  Crinoids  the  anus  penetrated  the  orals, 
or  was  closely  connected  with  them.  But  we  must  make  this 
assertion  if  we  are  to  accept  the  interradials  in  Haplocrinus,  and 
the  so-called  proximals  in  other  genera,  as  the  representatives  of 
the  orals.  We  might  account  for  a  slight  disturbance  in  the  form 
of  the  plates  in  genera  in  which  the  anus,  or  its  component  parts, 
come  in  direct  contact  with  the  plates,1  but  in  our  opinion  no 
explanation  whatever  can  be  given  why  in  such  forms  as  Megisto- 
crinus, Grotalocrinus,  etc.,  the  posterior  oral  plate  should  be 
divided.  For  the  same  reason  we  cannot  accept  the  five  inter- 
radial  plates  in  Haplocrinus  to  be  orals.     If  Haplocrinus  was  in 

1  There  is  a  case  in  which  the  anus  penetrates  the  central  piece.  In  the 
Calyptocrinidse  in  which  the  whole  calyx — with  the  exception  of  the 
basals— is  symmetrical,  the  anus  is  strictly  central,  and  the  proximals  com- 
pletely pushed  out  of  position,  the  central  piece  is  bisected,  and  the  two 
halves,  jointly  with  the  proximals,  form  the  sides  of  the  anal  tube. 


18 85.]  NATUBAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  273 

the  condition  of  the  Pentacrinoid  larva,  as  suggested  by  Car- 
penter, it  should  have  its  anal  opening  beneath  the  orals,  and  not 
pierced  through  the  upper  portion  of  one  of  them.  The  very 
fact  that  the  anal  structures  are  invariably  connected  with  the 
proximals,  proves  to  us  that  the  latter  are  interradials,  developed 
around  the  left  peritoneal  tube,  in  a  similar  manner  as  the  cabyx 
interradials  around  the  right,  and  that,  as  such,  they  are  homol- 
ogous with  the  first  interradial  plate  in  the  cabyx,  and  not  with 
the  basals,  as  suggested  by  Carpenter.  The  interradials,  and  not 
the  basals,  enclose  the  anal  plates  ;  there  is  not  a  single  instance 
known  to  us  in  which  an  anal  plate  enters  the  basal  ring.  The 
az}ygous  side  of  the  proximals  is  generally  composed  of  three 
adjacent  pieces  transversely  arranged,  and  a  divided  interradial, 
which  encloses  an  anal  plate,  as  in  the  case  of  the  primary  calyx 
interradials.  Sometimes,  however,  the  anal  plate  is  lifted  out, 
and  the  first  row  is  occupied  exclusively  by  a  bisected  proximal 
(PI.  7,  figs.  8-10),  as  in  the  apical  system  of  Actinocrinas. 

It  has  been  observed  by  Goette  (Vergleichende  Entwickelungs- 
geschichte  d.  Comatula  mediterranean,  Arch.  f.  Microsk.  Anat., 
1876,  Bd.  xii,  pp.  621-624),  that  there  exists  a  complete  homology 
between  basals  and  orals,  and  that  both  were  developed  spirally, 
the  former  round  the  right,  the  other  round  the  left  peritoneal 
tube.  Upon  these  important  observations,  with  which  we  fully 
agree,  Carpenter  undertakes  to  build  up  his  proof  that  the  proxi- 
mals are  the  orals  of  the  Palaeocrinoidea.  He  reasons  as  follows 
(Chall.  Rep.,  pp.  169,  170) :  "  The  basals  are  primitively  next  to 
the  abactinal  centre  in  Urchins  and  Stellerids,  and  are  only  re- 
moved from  it  in  the  Crinoid  by  the  growing  stem ;  while  the 
orals  are  next  the  actinal  centre,  no  plate  being  developed  there, 
however,  in  the  recent  Crinoid.  Did  it  appear,  it  would  only  be 
in  the  way,  and  have  to  undergo  resorption  to  a  greater  or  less 
extent,  just  as  the  dorsocentral  of  many  Urchins  is  more  or  less 
completely  resorbed  after  the  appearance  of  the  anus." 

The  discovery  of  a  dorsocentral  plate  in  the  larva  of  the  Urchins, 
Starfishes  and  Ophiurids  b}-  Carpenter,  Sladen  and  Liitken,  which 
Carpenter  thinks  is  represented  by  the  terminal  plate  at  the  base 
of  the  larval  stem  in  Comatula,  is  to  our  minds  no  proof,  in  the 
total  absence  of  embrj'ological  evidence,  that  there  was  a  similar 
plate  at  the  oral  side.  The  so-called  "  orocentral  "  is  said  to  be 
present  exclusively  in  Palseocrinoids,  but  there  it  is  found  in  all 
19 


274  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

of  them.  It  is  difficult  to  believe  that  a  plate  so  prominent,  and 
so  universally  represented  among  the  older  forms,  should  be  un- 
represented in  the  larva  of  recent  Crinoids  before  the  opening  of 
the  oral  pyramid.  Carpenter's  argument,  that  if  the  plate  was 
present  in  the  larva  it  would  be  in  the  way,  and  have  to  undergo 
resorption,  is  certainly  not  a  strong  one,  for  he  admits  in  the 
Urchins  a  partial  resorption  of  the  dorsocentral  after  the  appear- 
ance of  the  anus,  and  similar  resorptions  are  going  on  constantly 
in  the  growing  Crinoid. 

Carpenter's  arguments  respecting  the  orals  are  based  essentially 
upon  the  existence  of  an  orocentral  plate,  and  if  this  cannot  be 
proved,  his  whole  oral  theory  must  fall  to  the  ground.  In  the 
recent  Crinoids,  he  states  :  "  The  embiyological  evidence  clearly 
indicates  that  the  basals  of  the  abactinal  system  are  represented 
in  the  actinal  S}Tstem  bjr  the  orals.  The  former  are  within  the 
ring  of  radials  and  next  to  the  dorsocentral  ;  and  it  seems,  there- 
fore, only  natural  to  regard  the  six  proximal  interradial  plates, 
surrounding  the  central  piece  (orocentral)  in  the  vault  of  a 
Palreocrinoid,  as  representing  oral  plates.'' 

Admitting  that  the  terminal  plate  at  the  base  of  the  larval 
stem  in  the  Comatula3  represents  the  dorsocentral  of  Stellerids 
and  Urchins,  a  question  which  we  will  not  discuss,  and  admitting 
further,  that  a  similar  plate  existed  dorsally  in  the  young  Palaeo- 
crinoid,  which  we  have  good  reason  to  doubt,1  we  cannot  make 
out  the  affinities  that  are  said  to  exist  between  this  plate  and  the 
central  piece,  the  so-called  "orocentral."  The  former  is  the 
outer  end  of  a  mere  transitory  appendage,  which  in  the  growing 
animal  soon  withers  off,  and  which  is  attached  to  the  outer 
face  of  the  skeleton,  forming  no  part  of  it.  The  latter  is  a 
permanent  plate,  which  rests  within  the  test  and  fills  a  con- 
spicuous  place  in  it.     It  is  the   most    important   plate   in   the 

1  We  have  examined  a  large  number  of  roots,  and  have  in  our  collection 
five  perfect  Crinoids  from  the  tips  of  the  arms  to  the  ends  of  the  rootlets. 
In  all  of  them  the  column  runs  out  into  numerous  branches,  which  all 
come  to  a  point,  having  no  special  terminal  plate.  It  is  evidetit  that  the 
majority  of  the  older  Crinoids,  either  must  have  lived  in  a  kind  of  oozy 
ground,  or  they  led  a  half-free  life  in  the  adult,  using  the  root  as  an  anchor. 
In  the  Lower  Silurian  only  we  find  attached  to  corals  or  shells  isolated 
disks,  with  a  pit  at  the  centre,  which  may  represent  the  terminal  plate-  of 
Glyptocrinus,  but  nothing  like  this  has  ever  been  found  elsewhere. 


1885.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  275 

summit,  as  it  covers  the  mouth,  and  lodges  underneath  the 
annular  vessel,  which  is  the  origin  and  centre  of  the  whole 
ambnlacral  system.  As  such  it  has  not  only  the  position  but 
performs  the  functions  of  the  closed  oral  pyramid  in  the  Penta- 
crinoid  larva.  Wh}r,  therefore,  should  the  proximals  be  the 
orals,  and  the  central  piece  represent  something  else  that  is 
totally  unknown  in  Crinoid  ontogeny,  and  among  Echinoderms 
generally  ?  The  proximals,  as  a  rule,  surround  the  peristome, 
but  do  not  cover  it.  The  tentacular  vestibule  is  closed  by  the 
central  piece.  This  is  well  shown  in  our  specimen  of  Batocrinus 
Christyi  (PL  5,  fig.  6),  in  which  the  perisomic  plates  extend  up 
to  the  central  piece.  Other  specimens  (PI.  4,  fig.  4,  and  PI.  8, 
figs.  1,  2,  5)  show  that  the  radiations  pass  out  from  beneath  the 
central  piece,  and  not  from  beneath  the  proximals.  If  there 
had  been  such  a  thing  as  an  "  orocentral,"  it  is  difficult  to 
understand  how  this  plate  could  have  entered  the  "  oral  ring," 
unless  it  was  developed  in  the  early  larva,  as  the  proximals 
remain  permanently  closed.  The  Palseocrinoids,  as  a  rule, 
have  a  central  piece,  but  they  do  not  all  have  proximals, 
and  it  is  very  significant  that  the  proximals  are  absent  in  the 
earliest  Silurian  genera,  and  are  most  conspicuous  in  the  later 
and  higher  types.  Eeterocrinus  juvenis  is  evidently  in  the  same 
morphological  condition  as  Haplocrinus.  The  ring  of  plates, 
which  Carpenter  no  longer  considers  orals  in  Cyathocrinus, 
encloses  a  central  piece  without  proximals,  and  in  all  probability 
the  same  is  the  case  in  Hybocystites  and  the  Hybocrinidae  gener- 
ally. The  Reteocrinidae  possess  on\y  a  small  central  piece,  but 
have  no  proximals.  Are  the  orals  here  resorbed,  and  also  the 
interradials  ?  That  would,  indeed,  suggest  a  very  peculiar  condi- 
tion for  a  Lower  Silurian  genus. 

The  basals,  as  pointed  out  by  Carpenter,  are  the  most  important 
plates  in  the  calyx.  They  lodge  within  their  cavity,  bounded  by 
the  radials,  the"  chambered  organ,  which  is  the  centre  of  the 
nervous  and  vascular  system,  and  from  the  basals  the  axial  canals 
pass  out  to  the  radials  and  arms.  In  the  summit,  the  central 
plate  occupies,  in  relation  to  the  radials,  the  same  position  as  the 
basals.  It  is  the  only  summit  plate  that  is  represented  in  every 
Palaaocrinoid,  and  it  lodges  underneath  the  most  important 
organs  of  the  oral  system.  In  view  of  these  facts,  and  admitting 
that  the  orals  are  the  homologues  of  the  basals,  there  can  scarcely 


276  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

be  a  doubt  that  the  central  piece,  undivided  as  it  is,  is  the  true 
horaologue  of  the  oral  pyramid  as  represented  in  the  Penta- 
crinoid  larva. 

It  is  true  that  the  pentamerous  nature  of  the  orals  is  an 
objection  to  this  interpretation,  but  we  do  not  believe  it  a  serious 
one,  certainly  not  so  great  as  is  found  in  attempting  to  homolo- 
gize  six  proximals  with  five  orals. 

Of  the  embryology  of  the  Palseocrinoidea  little  or  nothing  is 
known  except  from  phylogenetic  evidence,  and  even  this  is  limited, 
and  gives  information  only  as  to  the  later  stages  in  the  almost 
fully  developed  Crinoid.  In  recent  Crinoids,  from  their  earliest 
stages,  the  orals  are  composed  of  five  distinct  plates,  and  it  is 
very  possible  that  the  central  piece,  if  representing  the  orals  of 
the  Palseocrinoidea,  primitively  consisted  also  of  five  pieces, 
which  were  fused  together,  ami  that  the  suture  lines  gradually 
were  obliterated  by  deposition  of  new  material  at  the  outer  sur- 
face, as  in  the  case  of  the  underbasals  in  Agassizocrinus.  Who 
would  have  thought  that  in  this  genus  the  thick  plate  at  the 
dorsal  end  represented  five  anchylosed  plates,  if  the  sutures  had 
not  been  fortunately  observed  in  some  of  the  younger  specimens? 
That  a  similar  process  probably  took  place  at  the  outer  face  of 
the  central  piece,  is  somewhat  indicated  by  the  condition  of  the 
plate,  which  is  alwa}'s  more  or  less  conical  or  spinil'erous,  and 
wherever  the  point  of  the  plate  has  been  broken,  the  missing  part 
is  replaced  by  secretion  of  new  deposit.  It  seems  to  us  that  in 
a  group  like  the  Paloeocrinoidea,  in  which  the  tentacular  vestibule 
was  permanently  closed,  a  gradual  anchylosis  of  the  five  primary 
plates  is  deducible  from  analogy,  and  would  be  in  entire  accord- 
ance with  prevailing  rules  in  nature. 

Such  an  ancl^dosis  occurred  in  palaeozoic  times  among  the 
basals,  and  this  is  of  considerable  importance,  as  the  basals  are 
admitted  by  Carpenter  to  represent  the  orals.  In  the  larva  of 
Antedon,  the  basal  ring  is  formed  of  live  distinct  plates,  and  the 
same  number  prevails  in  the  adult  throughout  the  recent  Crinoids, 
if  not  throughout  the  Neocrinoidea  generally.  Among  mono- 
cyclic Pala?ocrinoids,  however,  this  number  forms  the  exception, 
and  occurs  only  in  a  few  Silurian  genera.  Five  are  soon  succeeded 
by  four,  three  and  two  plates.  Carpenter  finds  no  objection  to 
call  all  those  plates  basals, and  to  regard  them,  whether  composed 
of  two, three  or  five  plates,  as  the  representatives  and  homologues 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  27 T 

of  the  orals.  Similar  modifications  occur  in  the  number  of 
underbasals,  and  among  them  Carpenter  admits  three  and  four 
plates  ;  but  when  we  find  the  underbasals  in  Stemmatocrinus 
evidently  fused  together  to  a  single  piece,  he  regards  this  as  a 
stem  joint. 

Even  the  joints  of  the  column  are  sometimes  tri-  or  quinque- 
partite,  from  the  top  of  the  column  to  the  end  of  the  rootlets, 
and  principally  in  Lower  Silurian  genera ;  nevertheless  the  stem 
joints  of  the  Pentacrinoid  larva,  and  those  of  the  Neocrinoidea 
generally,  are  undivided  throughout.  Are  we  to  consider  the 
former  as  different  elements  from  the  latter  because  they  are 
composed  of  three  or  five  pieces  ?  Or  are  we  to  regard  the  five 
plates  collectively  as  the  homologues  of  the  undivided  joints  of 
recent  and  other  Crinoids  ?  In  the  latter  case,  why  should  not 
the  dorsocentral,  i.  e.,  the  terminal  plate  of  the  column,  be  divided 
in  one  or  the  other  species  ?  That  the  plate  is  undivided  in  the 
Pentacrinoid  larva,  and  in  the  few  species  of  Pentacrinus  in 
which  it  has  been  observed,  is  by  no  means  a  proof  that  it  is  so 
in  all  Crinoids. 

It  has  been  stated  by  Carpenter  that  "  the  basals  are  within 
the  ring  of  radials,  and  next  to  the  dorsocentral."  This  is  no 
doubt  frequently  the  case,  but  is  not  the  universal  rule.  In 
the  Rhodocrinidae  and  Reteocrinidae  the  interradials  are  placed 
between  the  radials,  forming  with  them  a  ring  of  ten  plates 
around  the  basals,  while  in  the  Acrocrinidse  the  radials  are  totally 
isolated  from  the  basals  by  a  wide  belt  of  plates,  which,  although 
not  true  interradials,  may  be  fairby  compared  with  them  (PI.  8, 
fig.  1). 

At  the  oral  side,  the  arrangement  is  fundamentally  the  same 
as  in  the  cahyx,  as  can  be  observed  in  species  in  which  all  summit 
plates  are  fully  developed.  Frequently,  however,  the  first  and 
second  radials  are  orally  unrepresented,  when  the  third  radials 
occupy  the  same  position  as  their  representatives  in  the  calyx, 
which  is  the  same  as  that  occupied  by  the  third  summit  radials 
of  Strotocrinus,  etc. 

If  the  orals  were  represented  by  the  proximals,  the  latter 
should  be  succeeded  in  all  cases  by  the  radials,  and  not  be 
included  in  the  same  ring.  There  is  not  a  single  instance  of 
Crinoids  known  to  us  where  either  a  radial  or  an  anal  plate 
entered   the   basal   ring,   or  where   an   anal   plate   entered   the 


278  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

ring  of  orals,  yet  all  of  this  must  be  encountered  if  we  con- 
sider the  proximals  to  be  the  orals.  Moreover,  in  Strotocrinus 
and  Teleiocrinus  the  two  posterior  radials  would  be  placed 
inside  the  oral  ring,  the  orals  of  Megistocrinus  would  enclose  a 
large  circlet  of  interradial  pieces ;  while  in  Beteocrinus,  Glypto- 
crinus  and  other  Silurian  genera,  the  orals  would  be  altogether 
unrepresented.  All  these  difficulties  are  removed  if  we  regard 
the  central  piece  as  the  representative  of  the  oral  pyramid,  and 
the  proximals  as  summit  interradials.  Basals  and  radials,  inter- 
radials  and  anal  plates  are  then  found  to  occupy  the  same  position 
orally  as  aborally,  and  even  the  small  intercalated  pieces  in  the 
dome  of  Megistocrinus  are  explained  by  analogous  plates  in 
the  catyx  of  Acrocrinus.  But  on  the  contraiy,  if  the  proximals 
were  the  orals,  it  would  follow  that  the  orals  were  represented  in 
the  calyx  by  the  proximal  interradials,  and  not  by  the  basals. 

That  the  proximals,  which  are  such  prominent  plates  in  the 
Palseocrinoidea,  are  unrepresented  in  the  Neocrinoids,  is  fully 
explained  by  the  fact  that  in  the  latter  the  interradials  generall}' 
were  imperfectly  developed  in  the  catyx,  and  hence  their  absence 
in  that  group  cannot  be  considered  a  serious  objection  to  our 
views. 

We  are  convinced  that  neither  the  underbasals  nor  the  dorso- 
central  are  represented  at  the  summit,  especially  not  the  latter. 
We  cannot  imagine  what  office  such  a  plate  could  possibly  have 
had  at  the  oral  side,  considering  that  it  constitutes  a  part  of  the 
column,  and  the  Echinoderms  at  no  time,  or  in  any  group,  were 
attached  at  their  oral  side.  That  it  is  represented  dorsally  in  the 
Stellerids  and  Urchins  is  natural,  as  it  represents  there  in  a 
wider  sense  the  entire  column  of  the  Crinoid,  but  its  presence  at 
the  oral  side  would  be  an  anomaly. 

It  seems  to  us  that  a  far  less  objectionable  explanation  of  the 
central  plate  than  that  given  by  Carpenter,  would  be  to  regard  it 
as  a  posterior  oral.  In  this  case  the  orals  would  he  represented 
by  five  plates  and  not  by  six  ;  the  anus  woidd  be  placed  outside 
the  oral  ring,  and  the  radial  dome  plates  would  occupy  the  same 
position  towards  the  orals  as  the  calyx  radials  toward  the  basals. 
But  it  would  place  the  mouth  underneath  the  posterior  oral,  and 
it  offers  no  explanation  of  the  central  piece  in  Eaplocrinus. 

This  view  was,  perhaps,  taken  by  Zittel  in  the  case  of  the 
summit  plates  of  Crotalocrinus  and  Enallocrinus,  in  which  the 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  279 

central  plate  has  a  somewhat  elongate  form,  and  which  he 
described  as  having  five  orals.  The  summit  plates  in  both 
genera  are  subtegminal,  being  covered  completely  by  interra- 
dials,  and  the  same  was  probably  the  case  in  the  allied  Ichtbyo- 
crinidse,  at  least  in  their  earlier  forms.  Reteocrinus  and  Xeno- 
crinus  were  evidently  in  a  similar  condition,  but  it  is  not  known 
whether  they  had  summit  plates  beneath  the  interradials  or  not. 
Ghjptocrinus  and  most  of  the  Silurian  genera  of  the  Camarata 
had  a  central  piece,  but  no  proximals.  In  all  Devonian  Crinoids 
both  plates  are  generally  represented,  but  they  do  not  attain  their 
full  development  until  the  Carboniferous. 

It  has  been  asserted  by  us  that  the  ventral  plates  in  Allage- 
crinus, Haplocrinus,  Gvlicocrinus  and  Coccocrinus,  are  calyx 
interradials  and  not  proximals.  In  Allagecrinus  and  Haplo- 
crinus  there  are  five  single  plates  occupying  the  same  space  as 
the  whole  series  of  interradials  in  other  genera.  In  their  simpli- 
city, and  in  resting  upon  the  raclials  and  closing  the  peristome, 
these  plates,  no  doubt,  closety  resemble  the  orals  in  the  Penta- 
crinoid  larva,  but  as  calyx  interradials  they  would  occupy  exactly 
the  same  position.  There  is,  however,  a  very  important  difference 
in  the  structure  of  the  two  forms  to  which  no  attention  has  been 
paid.  The  orals  of  the  larva  and  those  of  Holopus  rest  loosely 
upon  the  calyx ;  while  the  interradials  of  Haplocrinus,  like  all 
other  interradials,  are  united  with  the  raclials  by  a  close  suture. 

It  has  been  proved  from  palgeontological  evidence,  that  in  the 
earlier  genera  the  interradials  are  more  extravagantly  developed 
than  in  later  ones.  In  Crotalocrinus  and  Reteocrinus,  the  inter- 
radials cover  the  entire  ventral  surface ;  in  Glyptocrinus  and 
Glyptaster  they  extend  to  the  central  plate ;  while  in  the  Carbon- 
iferous genera  they  recede  gradually  toward  the  periphery,  and 
the  central  space  is  filled  by  large  proximals,  and  often  by  radial 
dome  plates.  Considering  these  facts,  is  it  safe  to  assert  that  in 
Allagecrinus  and  Haplocrinus,  which  are  regarded  as  larval 
forms,  interradials  are  entirely  absent,  and  that  all  ventral  plates 
are  actinal  ?  Is  it  not  more  reasonable  to  imagine  that  in  these 
low  forms  the  ventral  side  was  covered  by  the  one  plate,  in  a 
similar  manner  as  in  Crotalocrinus,  Reteocrinus  and  Glyptocrinus 
hy  the  whole  collection  of  plates  ?  In  the  Neocrinoidea,  from 
the  larva  to  the  adult,  all  ventral  plates  are  actinal,  but  in  all 
Pakeozoic  Crinoids,  and  we  may  say  in  all  Palaeozoic  Pelmatozoa, 


280  PROCEEDINGS   OP   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

the  "whole,  or  at  least  the  greater  part  of  the  ventral  side,  is  abac- 
tinal,  and  this  we  consider  one  of  the  best  distinctions  between 
the  two  groups.  We  do  not  understand  how  Carpenter  can 
maintain  that  those  plates  are  orals,  and  at  the  same  time  can 
retain  Allagecrinus  and  Haplocrinus  under  the  Palaeocrinoidea. 
He  must  either  refer  them  to  the  Neocrinoidea,  or  accept  the  so- 
called  "  Scheitelplatten  "  as  interradials  in  their  simplest  form. 

It  seems  to  us  that  in  Allagecrinus  the  interradials  cover  not 
only  the  disk  but  also  the  summit  plates.  Culicocrinus  is  in  a 
similar  condition,  but  has  additional  interradial  plates.  In  the 
somewhat  higher  developed  Coccocrinus,  the  interradials  are 
separated  from  one  another,  forming  lateral  clefts  and  a  central 
gap,  evidently  to  receive  the  oral  plate  and  the  ambulacra,  which, 
however,  retain  permanently  the  position  which  they  occupied 
before  the  valves  separated,  and  rest  in  the  bottom  part  of  the 
clefts.  In  Haplocrinus  the  interradials  evidently  separated  in 
the  growing  animal,  and  the  oral  plate  moved  outward,  but  not 
sufficiently  to  bring  it  to  a  level  with  surrounding  plates  ;  while 
the  ambulacra  remained  subtegminal.  The  interradials,  instead 
of  being  formed  into  lateral  clefts  as  in  Coccocrinus,  remained 
permanently  closed  by  means  of  lateral  growth,  as  shown  by  their 
beveled  edges,  which  are  formed  into  grooves. 

From  Haplocrinus  to  Cyathocrinus  alutaceus  and  Symbatho- 
crinus  there  is  but  one  step.  The  latter  two  have  proximals,  the 
former  not.  The  proximals,  we  think,  were  introduced  in  the 
Palreoerinoidea  in  a  similar  manner  as  the  perisomic  plates  in 
the  Neocrinoidea.  The  interradials  by  the  -increasing  width  of 
the  calyx  retreated  in  the  growing  Crinoid  toward  the  periphery, 
thereby  forming  an  open  space  around  the  oral  plate  which  was 
gradually  tilled  by  the  proximals  and  other  dome  plates.  Sym- 
bathocrinus  is  a  much  higher  form  than  Haplocrinus,  as  shown  by 
the  presence  of  proximals,  by  the  ventral  tube,  and  by  the  highly 
differentiated  mode  of  articulation. 

If  it  were  true  that  the  five  interradials  of  Haplocrinus  and 
Allagecrinus  are  homologous  with  the  six  proximals  of  Symbatho- 
crinus,  Platycrinus  and  Actinocrinus,  and  that  these  plates  are 
orals,  it  would  follow,  inasmuch  as  all  later  and  complex  Palseo- 
crinoidea  have  six  plates,  that  the  larger  number  represented  the 
higher  form.  And  further,  that  Jlaplocrinus  and  Allagecrinus 
had  reached  a  degree  of  development  such  as  attained  only  by 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  281 

Neocrinoidea,  but  existing  among  them  as  a  constant  character 
through  all  stages  of  growth.  In  the  Neocrinoid  larva  the  orals 
are  large,  occupying  the  entire  ventral  side,  or  one-half  of  the 
entire  test,  and  the  conditions  are  not  changed  by  the  introduc- 
tion of  perisome  in  the  adult.  In  the  adult  Palaeocrinoid  the 
actinal  system  of  plates  is  restricted  to  a  small  space,  and  it  is 
very  impi-obable  that  the  orals  extended  out  to  the  radials  in  the 
earlier  stages,  or  in  such  forms  as  Haplocrinus  and  Allagecrinus, 
which,  as  admitted  by  Carpenter,  are  in  the  condition  of  the 
Palaeocrinoid  larva. 

All  this  tends  to  prove  that  the  resemblance  between  the  proxi- 
mals  and  the  orals  in  the  adult  Rhizocrinite  or  Thaumatocrinite, 
and  the  "  Scheitelplatten  "  in  Allagecrinus  and  Haplocrinus  with 
the  Pentacrinoid  larva,  is  altogether  superficial,  and  that  the  orals, 
if  these  are  developed  in  Palseocrinoidea,  which  we  think  they 
are,  can  only  be  represented  by  the  central  plate. 

A  resorption  of  the  summit  plates  may  have  taken  place  in  the 

later  Inadunata  ;  throughout  the  Camarata  they  persisted  through 

life. 

B.    The  Ventral  Perisome. 

The  ventral  perisome  covers  the  visceral  mass  or  bod}- ,  and 
together  with  the  oral  plates,  forms  the  surface  of  the  disk.  It 
is  composed  of  the  "  ambulacral  "  and  "  anambulacral "  plates. 
The  anambulacral  plates  are  irregular  pieces  or  limestone  par- 
ticles along  the  interpalmar  areas,  which  consist  of  the  anambu- 
lacral plates  proper,  and  the  so-called  interradial  plates  of  the 
disk.  The  former  are  pierced  by  numerous  water  pores,  and 
occupy  the  spaces  between  the  ambulacra ;  the  latter  are  not 
perforated,  and  occur  in  the  substance  of  the  perisome,  uniting 
the  rays  and  their  subdivisions.  These  interradials  must  not 
be  confounded  with  the  calyx  interradials,  which  cover  those 
of  the  disk.  The  ambulacral  plates  extend  from  the  peristomial 
area  to  the  extremities  of  the. arms  and  pinnules,  and  consist 
of  the  so-called  "  Saumplattchen  "  or  "  covering  plates,''  and  the 
"  adambulacral  "  or  "side  pieces"  which  support  the  former 
and  border  the  outer  margins  of  the  ambulacra. 

In  the  Pentacrinidse,  the  perisome  is  always  studded  more  or 
less  with  plates,  and  these  often  have  a  very  solid  appearance ; 
while  in  the  Comatulae  the  entire  perisome  is  sometimes  almost, 
or  totally,  free  from  calcareous  incrustations. 


282  PROCEEDINGS   OP   THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

Among  the  earlier  groups  of  the  Neocrinoidea,  the  perisome  is 
only  known  in  the  Jurassic  Extracrinus  and  in  Marsupites,  in 
both  of  which  it  consists  of  small  irregular  pieces,  forming  a 
rather  substantial  pavement,  which  frequently  encloses  the  lower 
pinnules.  Among  Palseocrinoidea,  a  perisome  has  rarely  been 
observed,  but  it  was  preserved  among  several  groups,  and  we 
have  been  led  to  the  conclusion  that  the  perisome  was  probably 
subtegminal  in  the  Camarata,  the  Articulata,  and  the  earlier 
Inadunata,  but  external  in  the  later  Pistulata,  our  former  Cyatho- 
crinidte,  which  we  make  a  branch  of  the  Inadunata. 

The  perisomic  skeleton  of  the  Camarata  is  frequently  pre- 
served in  Baiocrinus,  Eretmocrinus,  Physetocrinns  and  Dory- 
crinus,  in  which  it  probably  attained  a  more  substantial  form 
than  in  any  of  the  other  genera.  It  is  there  composed  of  rather 
distinct  plates,  placed  parallel  to  those  of  the  test  or  tegmen 
calicis,  and  arranged  in  a  similar  manner.  Each  plate  of  the 
outer  test  has  a  corresponding  plate  in  the  ventral  perisome  ; 
the  plates  of  the  latter,  however,  are  not  connected  by  suture, 
but  disposed  loosely,  leaving  an  open  space  at  each  angle,  which 
was  perhaps  tilled  by  membranous  substance.  In  their  usual 
preservation  the  plates  are  frequently  dense,  owing  to  incrusta- 
tions of  inorganic  matter,  but  in  their  natural  state  they  consist 
of  a  fine  network,  and  resemble  similar  plates  in  recent  Crinoids. 
They  form  a  sort  of  internal  lining,  wdiich  extends  from  the 
second  primary  radials  and  first  intenadials,  uninterruptedly,  to 
the  central  piece,  or  near  it,  underlying  the  proximals  and  enter- 
ing the  anal  tube.  This  structure  is  well  shown  in  the  specimen 
(PL  5,  fig.  6),  in  which  the  sutures  between  central  plate  and 
proximals  are  visible.  Most  of  tin1  perisomic  plates,  along  their 
median  port  ions,  are  connected  with  the  plates  of  the  test  by 
small  pillars  or  partition  walls,  leaving  between  them  open 
chambers,  evidently  for  the  free  circulation  of  water.  The  water 
probably  entered  from  without  by  means  of  the  respiratory  pores, 
which  we  described  in  Part  I,  p.  11,  and  which  jointly  may  have 
performed  the  functions  of  a  madreporite.  There  are,  however, 
no  pillars  between  tin-  plates  along  the  radial  regions,  which  take 
the  shape  of  closed  galleries  or  corridors,  formed  by  groove- 
along  the  inner  floor  of  the  test,  and  closed  from  below  by  peri- 
some. These  passages  diverge  toward  the  arm  bases  and  contain 
the  ambulacral  tubes.     The  perisome  of  other  genera  was  prob- 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  283 

abty  less  substantial,  and  perhaps  in  some  of  them  altogether 
membranous.  We  never  observed  anything  like  plates  in  the 
Actinocrinites,  except  in  Physetocrinus,  in  which  they  are  well 
developed.  Of  this  genus  we  lately  obtained  a  specimen  which 
proved  that  the  small  tubercles  along  the  ventral  surface,  figured 
by  us  in  Rev.  ii,  PI.  19,  fig.  .r>,  are  not,  as  we  then  supposed, 
openings  through  the  "  vault,"  but  impressions  of  the  open 
spaces  between  the  anambulacral  plates.  In  Actinocrinus  and 
allied  genera  we  occasionally  find  little  pillars  or  nodes  along  the 
inner  floor,  which  sometimes  suspend  fragmentary  plates,  or 
portions  of  a  filmy  substance,  and  evidently  are  parts  of  the 
perisome.  We  found  similar  pillars  along  the  floor  of  Glypto- 
crinus  rarnulosus  (PI.  9,  fig.  2)  underneath  the  interradial  areas, 
but  not  beneath  the  plates  overlying  the  ambulacra.  The  latter 
plates  are  folded  as  in  Physetocrinus,  and  formed  into  natural 
grooves,  which  evidently  harbored  the  ambulacral  tubes. 

The  ambulacral  tubes  of  the  Actinocrinidae  rest  upon  the  peri- 
some, but  rarely  enter  the  plates  of  the  vault,  and  do  not  become 
exposed  until  they  enter  the  free  arms.  In  the  Platycrinidae  the 
structure  is  essentiall}'  the  same,  but  the  covering  pieces  frequent^ 
enter  the  calyx  at — or  close  to — the  proximals,  and  in  this  case 
often  take  the  form  of  vault  plates.  In  the  young  Crinoid, 
according  to  our  interpretation,  the  ambulacral  tubes  were 
attached  to,  and  rested  primarily  within  the  grooves  of  the  lower 
arm  joints,  from  which  they  were  gradually  lifted  out  when  these 
became  incorporated  with  the  calyx  and  transformed  into  radials. 
It  seems  to  us  that,  while  this  was  going  on,  the  radial  regions 
of  the  vault  were  raised  by  the  ambulacra,  thereby  producing 
elevations  or  folds  along  the  vault  of  Glyptocrinus  and  Physeto- 
crinus ;  while  in  Platycrinus  the  ambulacra  in  many  cases  pene- 
trated the  test. 

The  tubes  are  composed  of  four  rows  of  plates,  alternately 
arranged,  of  which  two  constitute  the  floor,  the  two  others  the 
upper  side.  The  upper  ones  are  the  covering  pieces,  but  we  are 
not  certain  whether  those  at  the  floor  are  side  pieces  or  form  a 
sort  of  suliambulacral  plates.  The  covering  plates  where  they 
entered  the  vault  were  suturally  connected,  but  on  entering  the 
arms  became  movable.  Side  pieces  have  never  been  observed  in 
the  Camarata,  but  covering  plates  are  found  occasionally  both  in 
arms  and  pinnules,  and  were  probabby  present  in  all  of  them. 


284  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

We  have  noticed  (Rev.  ii,  p.  31)  narrow  grooves  upon  the  inner 
surface  of  the  vault,  which  meet  beneath  the  median  part  of  the 
oral  plate,  and  follow  the  subtegminal  galleries  which  enclose  the 
ambulacral  tubes.  The  condition  of  these  grooves  can  be  studied 
most  profitably  from  natural  casts,  in  which  they  appear  as  string- 
like elevations  along  the  ventral  surface.  They  have  been  ob- 
served most  frequently  among  the  Actinocrinites,  where  they 
seem  to  be  universally  developed,  while  no  traces  of  them  are  to 
be  seen  in  the  twenty  or  more  casts  of  Platycrinus  which  we 
examined.  That  they  do  not  represent  the  ambulacral  tubes,  is 
proved  by  the  fact  that  these  are  always  located  at  a  distance 
from  the  inner  floor,  as  beautifully  shown  in  the  casts  (PI.  4,  fig. 
5,  iiinl  PL  5,  fig.  9),  and  wherever  we  found  the  tubes  intact,  they 
occupy  the  same  position.  That  the  strings  are  in  no  way  con- 
nected with  the  tubes,  is  further  shown  by  the  fact  that  they  always 
meet  in  the  centre,  while  the  tubes  form  a  ring  around  the  centre, 
as  also  by  the  irregularity  which  they  exhibit.  It  is  shown  by 
our  figures  (PL  4,  fig.  4,  and  PL  8,  figs.  1  and  3),  that  there  are 
always  two  of  them  side  by  side,  which  at  places  connect,  and 
again  at  others  depart  from  one  another,  with  irregular  knots  at 
each  bifurcation.  This  structure  could  not  be  explained  if  the 
strings  represented  the  inner  cavity  of  the  ambulacral  tubes,  as 
these  are  very  regularly  arranged.  That  the  grooves  are  placed 
along  the  solid  walls  of  the  test,  has  led  us  to  suppose  that  they 
were  axial  canals,  and  that  these  Crinoids  possessed  an  orocentral 
nervous  system  like  all  other  Echinoderms,  but  contrary  to  the 
Neocrinoidea,  in  which  the  nervous  system,  as  now  generally  admit- 
ted, is  connected  with  the  chambered  organ  within  the  basal  cavity. 
Our  interpretation  becomes  more  plausible  when  we  consider  that 
in  the  Camarata  the  radials  arc  never  pierced  by  canals,  and  it 
would  be  difficult  to  understand  how  these  ponderous  arms  could 
have  moved  without  axial  cords,  unless  their  movements  were 
altogether  passive.  That  the  canals  have  been  observed  only  in 
certain  groups,  may  be  explained  by  supposing  that  in  many 
cases  they  probably  rested  againsl  the  wall,  without  piercing  the 
floor. 

That  the  perisome,  wherever  found  in  place,  extends  all  the 
way  from  the  top  of  the  first  interradials  to  the  central  piece,  is 
very  interesting,  and  shows  a  complete  resemblance  between  the 
ventral  perisome  of  a  recent  Crinoid,  and  the  body  beneath  the 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OP   PHILADELPHIA.  285 

vault  of  an  Actinocrinoicl.  A  total  resorption  of  all  interradial 
plates,  dorsally  and  ventrally,  and  also  of  the  proximals,  would 
reduce  an  Actinocrinoid,  or  Platycrinoid,  essentiall}T  to  the 
condition  of  a  Neocrinoid  that  has  its  lower  arm  joints  connected 
by  perisome.  The  fact  that  the  perisome  is  continued  under- 
neath the  proximals,  and  extends  to  the  central  piece,  tends  to 
prove  that  the  latter,  and  not  the  proximals,  represents  the  oral 
pyramid,  as  these  plates  surround  the  peristomial  area  but  do 
not  cover  it  (PI.  1,  fig.  6).  It  further  proves  that  the  inter- 
radial plates  of  Platycrinus,  Glyptocrinus  and  Reteocrinus  cannot 
be  partly  plates  of  the  calyx  and  partly  pcrisomic,  but  must 
be  either  the  one  or  the  other.  If  the  Reteocrinidse  had  lived 
in  Carboniferous  times,  and  the  Actinocrinidse  in  the  Lower 
Silurian,  there  might  be  a  possibility  that  in  the  former  the 
interradials,  dorsally  and  ventrally,  as  well  as  the  summit  plates, 
had  been  resorbed ;  but  as  they  comprise  one  of  the  earliest 
known  groups,  this  interpretation  need  not  be  considered,  and  we 
can  only  regard  those  plates  as  ill-defined  interradials. 

We  find  it  difficult  to  believe  that  the  so-called  "interradials  " 
of  Guettardicrinus,  and  Apiocrinus  i-oissyanus  and  allied  species, 
are  homologous  with  the  calyx  interradials  of  an  Actinocrinoid  ; 
but  regard  all  those  pieces  as  enormously  developed  perisomic 
plates.  That  they  are  somewhat  heavier  pieces  and  more  regu- 
larly arranged  than  those  plates  usually  are,  is  not  sufficient  to 
make  them  calyx  plates,  as  they  evidentlj-  adapted  their  con- 
ditions to  surrounding  parts,  and  are  therefore  thick  plates  from 
necessity,  in  order  to  fill  the  deep  edges  of  adjoining  radials. 
De  Loriol,  in  the  Paleont.  Franc,  on  p.  2*72,  describes  them  in  Apio- 
crinus roissyanus  as  follows:  Pieces  interradiales  nombreuses, 
tres  inegales,  elles  varient  dans  chaque  espace  interradial  dans 
le  nombre  et  l'arrangement.  Presque  toujours  la  serie  commence 
par  une  piece  unique,  hexagone  ou  heptagone,  qui  est  la  plus 
grande,  quelquefois  fort  grande.  .  .  .  Au-dessus  il  y  a  deux,  trois, 
et  meme  quatre  pieces  plus  petites,  irregulieres,  polj-gonales," 
etc.  This  description  does  not  apply  to  calyx  interadials,  among 
which  the  first  plate  is  always  very  regular,  and  the  first  row 
never  consists  of  two  plates,  nor  the  second  variously  of  two, 
three  or  four  pieces.  This  irregularity  seems  to  have  puzzled 
Carpenter,  for,  on  p.  183  of  the  Challenger  Report,  he  suggests 
that  perhaps  the  "  smaller  interradials  were  perisomic  plates." 


286  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

Why  not  the  first  plate  also  ?  We  seriously  doubt  if  those  plates 
enclose  the  perisome  as  the  interradials  in  Actinocrinus,  or  were 
covered  by  perisome  as  in  Cyathocrinus^  and  hence  believe  they 
are  not  calyx  but  perisomic  plates,  which,  like  the  smaller  pieces 
of  Extracrinus,  united  the  lower  arm  divisions.  We  take  the 
same  view  of  the  so-called  interradials  and  interaxillaries  of 
Uintacrinus,  which  merely  attained  the  outer  form  of  calyx 
pieces,  hut  are  true  disk  plates,  and  on  approaching  the  ventral 
si  le  passed  into  anambulacral  pieces  instead  of  harboring  or  sup- 
porting a  perisome.  The  case  is  altogether  different  in  Thaumato- 
crinus,  in  which  the  interradials  are  placed  within  the  ring  of  first 
radials,  and  as  such  form,  like  the  anal  plate,  a  primitive  part  of 
the  calyx.  The  Crotalocrinidse  present  a  different  perisomatic 
arrangement  from  the  Actinocrinidae.  The  interradials  frequently 
commence  in  the  equatorial  zone,  and  extend  over  the  whole 
ventral  surface,  even  oral  plate  and  proximals  being  subtegminal. 
Their  perisome,  which  was  figured  by  Angelin  in  Crotalocrinns 
rugosus  (Icon.  Crin.  Suec,  PI.  xvii,  fig.  3  a),  is  composed  ex- 
clusively of  covering  plates.  The  proximals  are  long  and  narrow, 
and  abut  with  their  outer  edges  against  the  deflected  upper  ends 
of  two  radials.  leaving  radially  live  angular  spaces,  which  are 
occupied  by  the  ambulacra.  These  ambulacra,  of  which  the 
covering  plates  are  visible,  bifurcate  like  those  of  other  groups, 
but  their  subdivisions,  in  place  of  being  separated  by  anambu- 
lacral plates,  join  each  other  laterally,  and,  together  with  the 
summit  plates,  fill  the  entire  ventral  surface.  The  total  absence 
of  anambulacral  pieces  in  this  genus  is  a  most  remarkable  feature, 
hut  may  perhaps  be  explained  by  the  presence  of  hydrospires. 
There  are,  however,  no  spiracles  nor  pores  through  any  of  the 
plates,  except  along  the  anal  tube,  which  is  perforated  along  its 
walls. 

The  vault  of  the  Crotalocrinida'  extends  quite  a  distance  into 
the  free  rays,  us  shown  by  Midler's  and  Angelin's  figures  (Icongr., 
PI.  0,  figs.  6  ami  7,  also  PI.  25,  figs.  15  and  25,  and  Akademie  der 
Wissenschaften,  1853,  PI.  13,  fig.  10).  That  those  plates  are  not 
ambulacral  pieces  is  proved  by  the  tact,  that  they  cover  the 
Saumplatten,  and  have  a  different  style  of  ornamentation.  Those 
figures  further  prove,  that  the  ventral  covering  was  pliable,  or  the 
arms  could  not  have  assumed  that  horizontal  position,  and  be 
folded  in  other  specimens.     This  is  of  some  importance  as  dem- 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  287 

onstrating  that  a  pliable  vault  may  enclose  another  flexible 
integument  and  contain  the  food  grooves  underneath,  which  was 
seriously  questioned  by  Carpenter  (Chall.  Rep.,  p.  182).  He 
evidently  overlooked  Crotalocrinus,  for  we  doubt  if  he  could 
have  taken  the  small  covering  plates  (Icongr.,Pl.  17,  fig.  3  a)  for 
the  representatives  of  the  large  rigid  plates  of  figs.  6  and  7  on  PI.  G, 
or  the  irregular  pieces  around  the  oral  pole  to  be  summit  plates. 

Crotalocrinus  and  Enallocrinus  have  close  affinities  with  the 
Ichthyocrinidae,  not  only  in  that  both  have  a  flexible  skeleton, 
but  the}'  frequently  possess  no  interradials  dorsally,  and  they  all 
have  the  same  peculiar  arm  structure.  In  speaking  of  a  pliant 
vault  we  do  not  mean  a  surface  "  formed  of  connective  tissue  with 
numerous  interradial  plates  imbedded  in  it,"  as  supposed  by 
Carpenter  (Chall.  Rep.,  p,  182),  but  a  continuous  integument  of 
plates  connected  by  ligament  in  place  of  suture,  sometimes  with 
imbricating  plates.  We  postulated  the  prevalence  of  this  structure 
in  the  vault  of  the  Ichthyocrinidae  from  the  construction  of  the 
dorsal  plates2  which  could  not  be  movable  unless  the  ventral  side 
was  pliant  also.  Our  views  are  confirmed  by  the  vault  structure 
of  Crotalocrinus,  and  we  think  the  disk  ambulacra  of  Ichthyo- 
crinus  were  arranged  in  a  similar  manner,  and  covered  by  a 
similar  vault. 

A  very  different  perisome  is  found  in  the  higher  types  of  the 
Cyathocrinidse,  which  is  not  subtegminal,  but  exposed  upon  the 
surface  of  the  interradial  plates.  This  form  is  found  only  in 
genera  in  which  the  ambulacral  tubes  rest  upon  the  upper  edges 
of  the  interradials.  It  is  not  restricted  alone  to  the  later  genera, 
but  occurs  in  several  Silurian  forms.  Angelin  has  figured  such 
a  disk  in  Cyathocrinus  Isevis  (Iconogr.,  PL  26,  figs.  2  and  3),  and 
Gissocrinus  punctuosus  (ibid.,  PI.  29,  fig.  75  d),  but  we  think 
the  structure  was  not  correctly  understood.  In  all  cases  the  five 
interradial  plates  are  completely  covered  by  small  perisomic 
plates,  of  which  those  at  the  four  regular  sides  are  not  pierced 
with  water  pores,  while  those  toward  the  ventral  sac  are  generally 
profusely  perforated.  In  some  cases  we  found  the  summit  plates 
in  process  of  resorption.  In  Cyathocrinus  iovensis  (PI.  5,  fig.  7), 
the  larger  proximals  appear  in  the  form  of  eight  irregular  pieces, 
their  edges  rounded  off;  while  in  Cyathocrinus  multibrachiatus 
(PI.  4,  fig.  6)  only  fragments  of  the  plates  are  scattered  over  the 
perisome. 


288  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

The  disk  ambulacra  were  probably  differently  constructed  from 
those  of  the  arms  (PI.  4,  figs.  6  ami  7).  The  specimens  indicate 
that  the  plates  of  the  former  were  suturalljr  connected,  while 
those  :ilong  the  arms  were  movable.     All  Cyathocrinidae,  so  far 

as  observed,  have  side-pieces  which  support  Saumpliittchen  ;  and 
these  rest  upon  two  series  of  subambulacral  (?)  plates,  which  form 
the  floor  of  a  tube  as  in  the  Actinocrinidse. 

The  ''  ventral  sac  "  of  the  Pistulata  was  always  regarded  by  us 
as  functionally  and  structurally  distinct  from  the  "anal  tube"  or 
"  proboscis  "  of  the  Camarata.  We  held  the  former  to  be  an 
essential  part  of  the  body,  and  perisomic  in  its  origin;  the  latter 
as  a  mere  prolongation  of  the  azygous  interradius,  and  con- 
structed of  abactinal  plates. 

To  understand  the  two  structures,  we  must  bear  in  mind  that 
in  the  growing  Actinocrinoid  the  capacity  of  the  calyx  adequately 
increased  with  the  growth  of  the  body,  and  hence  was  at  any 
time  capable  of  holding  the  visceral  mass.  In  the  Fistulata, 
however,  in  which  all  brachials  remain  permanently  free,  and  the 
calyx  is  not  enlarged  in  proportion  to  the  visceral  mass,  the  pos- 
terior side  of  the  disk  forced  its  wa3'  out  through  the  anal  open- 
in--,  and  formed  the  so-called  ventral  sac,  which  has  always  a 
narrow  neck  along  the  base.  According  to  our  interpretation  the 
ventral  sac  is  an  enormously  developed  interpalmar  area  supported 
by  the  anal  plate,  and  as  such  reminds  us  of  the  asymmetrical 
disk  in  the  recent  genus  Aetinonometra,  in  which  the  anus  is 
central  and  the  mouth  marginal. 

In  most  of  the  Fistulata,  the  ventral  sac  is  perforated  with 
round  or  slit-like  openings,  transverse^  arranged,  which  enter 
the  outer  mar-ins  of  two  adjoining  pieces,  but  never  penetrate 
the  inner  portions  of  the  plates  like  the  water  pores  of  the 
Neocrinoidea.  The  openings  either  extend  over  the  whole  surface 
of  the  sac;  or  are  arranged  in  Longitudinal  rows — porous  plates 
alternating  with  solid  ones; — or  the  terminal  end  is  composed  of 
large  solid  pieces,  frequently  spiniferous  ;  or  as  in  the  Carboni- 
ferous species  of  Cyatkocrinus  the  entire  tube  is  composed  of  solid 
hexagonal  plate-,  and  the  porous  or  anambulacral  plates  are 
restricted  to  the  small  area  usually  occupied  by  the  smaller 
proximals.  In  the  Poteriocrinidse,  the  anambulacral  plates 
extend  over  the  greater  part  of  the  ventral  sac.  but  in  the 
Catillocrinidse  and  Calceocrinkhe  they  are  limited  to  one  side  of 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  289 

it.  The  two  latter  groups  possess  a  series  of  large  anal  plates, 
arranged  horizontally,  and  these  form  a  proboscis  with  a  furrow 
at  its  ventral  side.  This  proboscis  was  incorporated  into  the  sac 
in  a  somewhat  similar  manner  as  the  lower  arm  joints  and 
pinnules  into  the  disk  of  the  Neocrinoidea.  In  this  structure  the 
two  groups  have  close  analogies  with  the  recent  genus  Thaumato- 
crinus.  In  that  genus,  however,  the  row  of  anal  plates  does  not 
enter  the  perisome,  but  forms  an  independent  solid  appendage  in 
the  shape  of  a  cone,  which  apparently  has  no  functions,  as  the 
anal  opening  is  persomic,  and  we  regard  this  peculiar  appendage 
as  a  remarkable  instance  of  atavism. 

It  is  probable  that  in  the  latter  Poteriocrinidae  and  Encrinidse, 
the  interradials  and  summit  plates  became  finally  resorbed,  and 
the  perisome  was  more  or  less  restricted  to  the  ventral  disk,  as 
in  these  genera  the  sac  dwindled  down  to  a  small  conical  tube, 
which  probably  disappeared  in  Encrinus  before  reaching  maturity. 

That  the  openings  along  the  ventral  sac  are  not  genital  open- 
ings, as  suggested  lately  by  Trautschold,  need  not  be  discussed, 
as  most  of  the  Fistulata  have  well-developed  pinnules,  and  these 
are  not  prehensile  organs  as  supposed  by  him,  but  are  continua- 
tions of  the  arms  which  contained  the  genital  glands.  Neither 
is  it  true  that  the  ventral  sac  is  frequently  present  or  absent  in 
the  same  species.  It  existed  in  every  individual,  but  is  rarely 
preserved  in  the  fossil,  and  is  often  obscured  by  the  arms. 

Nothing  is  known  from  actual  observation  of  the  perisome  of 
the  Ichthyocrinidffi,  and  little  if  anything  of  the  construction  of 
the  ventral  side  in  any  of  their  genera.  The  interradial  plates 
of  the  dorsal  side  have  been  described  by  us  as  movable,  some- 
what irregular  in  form  and  arrangement,  and  upon  this,  prin- 
cipally, we  based  our  conclusion  that  the  plates  of  the  ventral 
covering  were  movable,  in  some  cases  perhaps  squamous.  In 
Onychocrinus  onl}r  there  has  been  observed  by  Lyon  and  us 
indistinct  traces  of  a  ventral  covering,  but  too  imperfect  to  give 
much  information  either  as  to  the  real  nature  of  the  plates,  or 
as  to  their  arrangement.  Carpenter  regards  all  interradials  of 
the  dorsal  side  as  cahvx  plates,  and  all  those  succeeding  them 
and  located  ventrally  as  parts  of  the  disk.  We  admit  that  the 
latter  may  have  a  superficial  resemblance  to  the  small,  irregular 
and  movable  perisomic  plates  of  Extracrinus  and  other  Neo- 
crinoidea to  which  he  alludes.  But  we  do  not  understand  why  a 
20 


290  PROCEEDINGS    OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

flexible  calyx,  with  a  flexible  vault,  may  not  enclose  a  soft  or 
even  a  plated  disk  such  as  we  find  in  Crotalocrinus  and  Enallo- 
crinus.  The  thiuness  and  irregularity  of  the  plates  is  no  valid 
argument  against  it.  We  find  such  plates  ventrally  in  Glypto- 
crinus  and  some  species  of  Physetocrinus,  and  there  are  plates 
of  the  same  nature  dorsally  in  the  Reteocrinidae.  On  the  other 
hand  we  find  massive  and  more  or  less  regular  plates  dorsally  in 
Apiocrinus,  which  Carpenter  considers  to  be  perisomic.  To  our 
minds  the  case  of  Extracrinus  is  by  no  means  parallel  to  that  of 
the  Ichthyocrinidae,  as  that  genus  is  destitute  of  calyx  inter- 
radials.  If  his  argument  were  correct,  then  all  the  plates  of  the 
Ichthyocrinidae  and  Reteocrinidae  should  be  considered  as  peri- 
somic. In  that  case  the  perisomic  portions  of  the  Crinoid  would 
predominate  so  enormously  that  nothing  would  be  left  for  the 
abactinal  part  except  the  base,  and  species  of  Beteocrinus,  which 
so  good  an  observer  as  S.  A.  Miller  considered  as  congeneric 
with  Glyptocriiius,  would  constitute  a  distinct  order.  And  we 
would  have  the  anomaly  that  the  earliest  known  forms  of  Crinoids 
would  be  in  this  respect  examples  of  the  highest  organized  types, 
and  most  closety  allied  to  the  recent  Crinoids. 

In  support  of  his  view,  Carpenter  has  no  other  proof  than  this 
superficial  resemblance.  There  is  no  evidence  of  the  existence 
of  external  food  grooves,  which  must  follow  if  these  plates  are 
perisomic.  The  same  reasons  that  led  us  to  regard  the  smaller 
interradials  in  Apiocrinus — massive  as  they  are — as  perisomic 
plates,  compel  us  to  consider  all  plates  of  the  Ichthyocrinidae, 
interradial  in  position,  as  belonging  to  the  same  element,  and 
either  all  perisomic  or  all  calyx  plates. 

If  the  plates  in  question  were  perisomic,  it  would  obliterate  the 
last  distinguishing  feature  between  Neocrinoidsand  Palaeocrinoids, 
and  we  should  like  to  know  upon  what  points  Carpenter  would 
separate  the  Ichthyocrinidae  and  Reteocrinidae  from  the  Neocri- 
noidae.  We  admit  that  the  direct  proof  of  our  views  as  to  the 
ventral  structure  of  the  Ichthyocrinidae  is  as  yet  wanting,  but  in 
this  respect  Carpenter  is  no  better  off,  and  it  seems  to  us  that  the 
weight  of  argument  from  analogy  is  in  our  favor. 

The  Relations  of  the  Pal^eocrinoidea  to  the  Neocrinoidea. 

The  name  "  Palaeocrinoidea  "  was  proposed  by  one  of  us  in  1877 
(Amer.  Journ.  Sci.,  vol.  xiv,  p.  190),  but  not  properly  defined 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  291 

until  1879  (Rev.  i,  p.  30).  At  that  time  we  also  proposed  the 
name  "  Stomatocrinoidea,"  and  made  both  groups  subdivisions  of 
the  "order  "  Crinoidea,  of  equal  rank  with  Blastoidea  and  Cystidea. 
To  the  Palaeocrinoidea  we  referred  the  earlier  brachiate  Crinoids 
in  which  mouth  and  food  grooves  are  subtegminal  or  hidden  from 
view  ;  to  the  Stomatocrinidae  the  Mesozoic  and  recent  Crinoids  in 
which  mouth  and  food  grooves  are  exposed  upon  the  disk.  Both 
groups  were  admitted  by  Carpenter  and  Etheridge,  Jr.,  in  1881, 
but  thej^  changed  the  name  Stomatocrinoidea  into  "  Neocrinoidea" 
because,  as  they  stated,  our  name  was  "  long  and  cumbersome," 
and  they  were  "  by  no  means  sure  that  some  of  the  Palseocri- 
noids  had  not  an  external  anal  opening."  We  might,  no  doubt, 
successfully  controvert  the  right  of  Carpenter  and  Etheridge  to 
change  our  name,  which  had  priority,  and  which  was  sufficiently 
defined  to  be  recognized,  until  they  proved  satisfactorily  that  the 
name-giving  characters  were  inconsistent  or  incorrect.  This  view 
of  the  case  was  evidently  taken  by  De  Loriol,  who  in  his  late  work 
(Paleont.  Francaise,  tome  xi,  p.  43)  placed  both  names  in  equal 
rank.  We  hold  there  is  not  a  single  Palseocrinoid  known  in 
which  either  mouth  or  food  grooves  are  exposed,  nor  a  "  Stomato- 
crinoid  "  in  which  they  are  closed,  and  this  we  still  regard  as  one 
of  the  best  distinctions  between  the  two  groups.  We,  therefore, 
wish  to  have  it  understood  that,  in  accepting  Carpenter's  name, 
we  do  not  give  up  our  original  position,  but  yield  to  the  preferable 
name. 

The  Crinoidea  were  subdivided  by  Joh.  Miiller  into  "  Crinoidea 
Articulata  "  and  "  Crinoidea  Tessellata,"  the  latter  including  the 
Inai'ticulata  and  Semiarticulata  of  Miller.  Midler's  definitions  of 
his  groups  were  extremel}T  vague,  but  we  may  conclude  from  the 
names  and  from  the  genera  which  he  referred  to  them, that  they  were 
based  upon  a  supposed  difference  in  the  mode  of  union  of  the  first 
radials  with  the  plates  which  they  bear.  Among  the  Tessellata, 
however,  we  find  Foteriocrinus  which  has  highly  developed  articular 
facets,  not  only  between  radials  and  brachials, butalsoat  the  bifurca- 
tions of  the  arms.  Zittel,  who  adopted  Midler's  divisions,  defined 
the  calyx  plates  of  the  Tessellata  as  "  Unbeweglich  durch  einfache 
Nathe  verbunden  ;  "  those  of  the  Articulata  as  "  durch  gelenkartig 
ausgehohlte  und  gewijlbte  oder  ebene  Nathflachen  vei'bunden." 
But  nevertheless  he  refers  to  the  Tessellata  the  Ichthyocrinidae, 
in  which  the  radials  are  united  with  one  another  by  ligament  and 


292  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

frequently  by  muscles  also,  as  seen  by  the  articular  faces  of 
Forbesiocrinus  nobilis  (PL  5,  figs.  3  and  4),  and  we  have  seen 
similar  faces  in  Ichthyocrinus  and  Taxocrinus.  Among  the  later 
Poteriocrinidse  there  are  also  several  genera  with  fossae  along  the 
lateral  faces  of  the  radials,  which  indicate  a  certain  degree  of 
mobility  even  among  the  plates  of  the  calyx.  On  the  other  hand, 
the  higher  radials  of  the  Apiocrinidse,  which  Zittel  refers  to  the 
Articulata,are  as  solidly  united  among  each  other  directly,  or  by 
means  of  intercalated  plates,  as  in  an y  so-called  "  tessellate  "  Cri- 
noid.  All  of  this  tends  to  prove  that  a  division  based  upon  the 
mode  of  union  between  the  plates  is  totally  impracticable,  if 
intended  to  separate  the  palaeozoic  from  the  later  Crinoids,  as 
done  by  Zittel.  We  think,  however,  it  affords  important  data  for 
establishing  subdivisions  of  the  Palseocrinoidse,  among  which  we 
recognize  Articulata  and  Camarata,  the  former  having  their  plates 
connected  by  articulation,  the  latter  by  suture. 

The  distinctions  between  the  Neocrinoidea  and  Palseocrinoidea, 
according  to  Carpenter  (Challenger  Report,  pp.  149-154),  are 
the  following : — 

1.  In  the  Neocrinoidea,  underbasals  are  rarely  represented ;  in 
the  Palseocrinoidea,  frequently. 

2.  In  the  Neocrinoidea  "  by  far  the  greater  number  of  genera 
have  five  equal  and  similar  basals,  with  five  equal  and  similar 
radials  resting  upon  them."  Exceptions  to  this  rule  are  found 
in  Hyocrinus,  which  has  three  basals,  and  JSolopus  and  Eudesi- 
crinus  in  which  the  radials  are  not  symmetrical ;  "  but  this  want 
of  symmetry  is  not  due  to  the  intercalation- of  any  anal  plate  as 
in  nearly  all  Palseocrinoids." 

3.  In  all  Neocrinoidea,  with  the  exception  of  Thaumatocrinus, 
"  the  primary  radials  are  in  contact  with  one  another  by  the 
entire  length  of  their  sides ;  or  more  rarely,  as  in  Guettardi- 
crinus,  Uintacrinus  and  Apiocrinus  roissyanus,  their  distal  angles 
are  cut  away  so  as  to  receive  the  lower  part  of  the  first  inter- 
radial.  This  feature,  which  is  common  enough  in  the  Palseo- 
crinoidea,  is  rare  in  the  Neocrinoidea." 

4.  Most  of  the  Neocrinoidea  have  no  interradial  plates  in  the 
calyx,  but  when  present  "  they  are  not  limited  to  any  special 
side  of  the  calyx,  but  are  equally  distributed  all  round  it,  so  that 
there  is  no  distinction  of  the  anal  side,  Thaumatocrinus  excepted." 
In  the  Palseocrinoidea,  however,  "the  pentamerous  symmetry  of 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OP   PHILADELPHIA.  293 

the  calyx  is  almost  always  disturbed  by  a  greater  or  less  modi- 
fication of  the  plates  on  the  anal  side." 

5.  In  the  Neocrinoidea  "the  basals  are  pierced  by  interradial 
canals  or  grooves,  which  lodge  the  cords  proceeding  from  the 
angles  of  the  chambered  organ,"  whence  they  pass  into  the 
radials.  None  of  them  have  permanently  imperforate  radials  as 
so  many  Palaeocrinoidea,  the  latter  group  remaining  in  an  embry- 
onic condition. 

6.  In  the  Neocrinoidea,  with  the  exception  of  Metacrinus  and 
Plicatocrinus,  the  axillary  is  the  third  of  the  primary  radials  ; 
while  in  the  Palaeocrinoidea  the  first  radials  themselves  may  be 
axillary  or  any  other  plate  bej^ond  the  first. 

7.  The  arms  of  the  Neocrinoidea,  with  the  exception  of  one  or 
two  species  of  Encrinus,  are  uniserial,  those  of  the  Palaeocrinoidea 
frequently  biserial. 

8.  The  mouth  and  food  grooves  of  all  adult  Neocrinoidea  are 
exposed  to  view  ;  in  the  Palagocrinoidea,  with  but  few  exceptions, 
closed  by  plates. 

In  most  of  these  points  we  agree  with  the  English  scientist, 
but  in  some  of  them  we  think  modifications  should  be  made,  and 
there  is  one  point  to  which  he  did  not  give  the  importance  which 
we  think  it  deserves. 

We  agree  with  Carpenter  that  underbasals  are  rarely  observed 
in  Neocrinoids,  which,  as  we  have  stated  elsewhere,  are  built 
upon  the  plan  of  dicyclic  Crinoids.  The  angles  of  the  column 
are  directed  interradially,  the  cirrhi  radially;  while  the  opposite 
is  the  case  in  Actinocrinus,  Glyptocrinus,  Belemnocrinus,  Hetero- 
crinus,  etc.,  which  are  known  to  be  monocyclic,  and  we  conclude 
from  this  structure  that  all  Neocrinoidea,  or  at  least  most  of 
them,  in  their  larval  state  may  have  possessed  rudimentary 
underbasals  hidden  by  the  column. 

Among  Neocrinoidea,  Thaumatocrinus  is  the  only  genus  in 
which  calyx  interradials  are  evident,  and  it  is  very  doubtful  to  us 
whether  even  these  plates,  which  rest  within  the  ring  of  the  first 
radials,  really  are  the  homologues  of  the  first  interradials  of  the 
Actinocrinidse,  Platycrinidas  or  Cyathocrinidae.  The  interradials 
of  Thaumatocrinus  were  covered  in  the  larva  by  the  oral  pyra- 
mid ;  while  those  of  the  young  Palaeocrinoid  form  the  whole  of 
the  ventral  surface.  The  so-called  "  interradials  "  of  Guettardi- 
crinus,  Apiocrinus  roissyayius,  and   Uintacrinus  we  take  to  be 


294  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

perisomic  plates,  and  we  cannot  understand  how  Carpenter  can 
admit  interradials  in  Apiocrinus  roissyanus,  and  not  in  Apio- 
crinus  Meriani  (De  Loriol,  Pal.  Franc,  tome  xi,  PI.  40),  Apio- 
crinus Ralhieri  (Ibid.,  PI.  50)  and  Apiocrinus  murchisonianus 
(Ibid.,  PI.  53).  But  it  is  still  more  remarkable  that  in  Apiocrinus 
roissyanus  Carpenter  considers  only  the  first  row,  and  not  the 
succeeding  ones  also,  as  calyx  plates.  The  latter  are  equally 
solid,  suturally  connected,  and  rest  like  the  first  plate,  between 
the  primary  radials. 

In  our  opinion  Carpenter  lays  too  much  stress  upon  the 
asymmetry  of  the  calyx  in  the  Palseocrinoidea,  which  he  attributes 
to  the  intercalation  of  an  anal  plate.  If  the  asymmetry  of  the 
basals  was  due  to  that  cause  only,  genera  such  as  Eucalypto- 
crinus,  Coccocrinus,  Mycocrinus,  Dolatocrinus  and  Corymbo- 
crinus,  which  have  no  anal  plates  in  the  calyx,  should  have  very 
regular  basals,  while  in  fact  Eucalyptocrinus  has  the  same  basal 
arrangement  as  Melocrinus,  Dolatocrinus  as  Hexacrinus,  Corymbo- 
crinus  as  Abacocrinus,  the  last  named  of  which  all  possess  anal 
plates.  It  is  also  well  known  that  in  Platycrinus  and  the  Blas- 
toidea,  and  all  other  genera  with  three  unequal  plates  in  the  basal 
ring,  the  smaller  plate  is  always  located  to  one  side,  not  pos- 
teriorly, and  it  is  difficult  to  understand  how  in  Haplocrinus  the 
asymmetry  of  the  calyx  could  be  attributed  to  an  anal  plate,  or 
to  the  anal  opening,  when  the  latter  penetrates  the  very  top  of 
the  so-called  "orals."  We  admit  that  the  dorsal  cup  is  more 
frequently  asymmetrical  in  Palreocrinoidea  than  in  Neocrinoidea, 
but  exceptions  are  so  numerous  that  we  cannot  attach  to  this 
point  the  importance  that  Carpenter  does,  who  considered  the 
s}Tmmetry,  or  want  of  symmetry,  to  be  the  best  distinction 
between  the  two  groups.  We  believe  the  condition  of  the  mouth, 
and  that  of  the  oral  surface  generally,  is  of  much  greater  import- 
ance, and  proves  to  be  a  more  constant  character  than  any  of 
those  to  which  attention  has  been  directed.  Carpenter  thinks 
Coccocrinus  forms  an  exception  to  this  rule,  which  he  regards  to 
be  in  the  condition  of  the  Xeocrinoid  genus  Holopus,  and  that 
consequently  its  mouth  was  exposed.  If  this  were  true,  we  should 
not  hesitate  a  moment  to  refer  that  genus  to  the  Neocrinoidea, 
as  nothing  would  be  left  to  make  it  a  Paloeocrinoid,  not  even  the 
asymmetry. 

Carpenter  denies  that  interradials  are  present   as  a   rule   in 


1885.1  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  295 

Palreozic  Crinoids,  and  he,  therefore,  does  not  attach  to  these 
plates  the  value  which  we  think  they  deserve.  According  to  our 
interpretation  they  are  present  in  all  Palreocrinoids,  but  absent 
or  incompletely  developed  in  the  Neocrinoidea.  By  means  of 
the  interradials  the  two  groups  differ  essentially  in  their  larval 
state ;  the  whole  ventral  surface  of  the  Neocrinoid  larva  is 
covered  by  the  orals,  but  in  the  Palseocrinoid  larva  the  inter- 
radials physiologically  take  their  place,  and  the  orals  or  their 
equivalent  is  subtegminal.  The  indistinct  calyx  interradials, 
which  appear  for  a  short  period  in  the  Pentacrinoid  larva,  be- 
came resorbed  before  taking  any  prominent  part  in  the  formation 
of  the  calyx,  while  the  interradials  of  all  Palsocrinoids  are  well 
defined  and  permanent  plates.  It  is  possible  that  the  interradials 
of  the  Encrinidae  were  similarly  resorbed  shortly  before  the 
Crinoid  reached  maturity,  but  they  were  evidently  well  developed 
in  their  earlier  life,  as  we  may  judge  from  their  affinities  with  the 
C}Tathocriniclae  and  Poteriocrinida?,  and  this,  principally,  has  in- 
duced us  to  refer  them  to  the  Palaeocrinoidea. 

We  propose  the  following  definitions  of  the  two  groups  : — 

PAL^EOQRHSTOIDEA  Wachsmuth. 

Crinoids  with  irregularty  pentamerous  calyx ;  plates  united  by 
suture  or  articulation.  Base  monocyclic  or  dicyclic.  Basals  and 
underbasals  variable  in  number.  First  radials  rarely  in  lateral 
contact  all  around,  two  of  them  often  separated  by  an  anal  plate, 
and  sometimes  all  of  them  by  interradials.  The  succeeding  plates 
of  the  rays  are  free  or  become  incorporated  into  the  calyx.  Arms 
more  frequently  biserial  than  uniserial.  There  is  always  at  least 
one  interradial  to  each  side  which  is  located  ventrally,  but  when 
there  are  a  number  of  them,  dorsally  and  ventrally.  The  interra- 
dials extend  to  the  summit  plates  or  cover  them,  occup\T  the 
greater  portion  of  the  ventral  surface,  and  either  form  a  vault 
over  the  perisome  or  support  the  perisome  ;  in  either  case,  how- 
ever, mouth  and  disk  ambulacra  are  completely  closed.  The 
summit  plates  are  substantially  a  repetition  of  the  plates  in  the 
calyx.  They  consist  of  an  undivided  plate  which  represents  the 
basals ;  of  the  proximals  or  interradials  and  anals  ;  and  frequently 
of  radial  dome  plates. 

NEOCRINOIDEA  Carpenter. 

Crinoids  with  regularly  pentamerous  calyx,  without  interradial 
or  anal  plates  (Thaumatocrinus  excepted).     Underbasals  rarely 


296  PROCEEDINGS  OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

well  developed,  being  either  rudimentary  or  absent.  Basals  five, 
exceptionally  three.  Radials  perforated,  and  generally  united  to 
succeeding  plates  by  a  muscular  articulation.  Rays  simple  or 
dividing  ;  the  lower  arm  joints  frequently  connected  laterally  by 
perisome.  The  first  axillary  plate  generally  the  second  joint 
after  the  first  radial ;  arms  uniserial.  Ventral  surface  completely 
occupied  by  actinal  structures,  either  simply  membranous  or 
paved  with  irregular  plates  ;  traversed  by  the  ambulacra,  which 
have  open  food  grooves.  Orals  five ;  always  represented  in  the 
larva,  but  frequently  resorbed  in  the  adult ;  at  first  in  lateral 
contact,  but  afterwards  separating  so  as  to  open  out  the  tentacular 
vestibule,  and  expose  the  mouth. 

Classification. 

The  "  Stalked  "  Echinoderms,  by  which  we  understand  the 
Crinoidea  in  their  widest  sense,  have  been  regarded  by  some 
writers  as  constituting  an  independent  class,  by  others  as  an 
"  order  "  of  the  class  Echinodermata.  The  latter  view,  which  has 
been  adopted  by  most  of  the  later  European  systeniatists,  was 
somewhat  modified  in  the  classification  of  Dr.  P.  H.  Carpenter, 
who  ranks  the  Stalked  Echinoderms  under  the  name  "  Pelma- 
tozoa  "  as  a  "  branch  "  of  the  "  phylum  "  Echinodermata,  and  he 
makes  the  Crinoidea — sensu  str. — and  the  Cystidea  and  Blas- 
toidea,  full  classes,  of  equal  rank  with  the  Holothurians,  Echi- 
noids,  Asteroids  and  Ophiurids. 

The  name  Pelmatozoa,  as  stated  by  Carpenter  (Chall  Rep.,  p. 
193),  was  introduced  by  Leuckart  in  an  essay  published  in  1848, 
and  more  fully  discussed  in  1865,  in  his  "  B'ericht  iiber  die  wis- 
senschaftlichen  Leistungen  in  der  Xaturgeschichte  der  niederen 
Thiere."  In  the  latter  paper  he  subdivides  the  Echinodermata 
into  three  groups  :  the  Pelmatozoa,  to  include  the  Stalked  Echi- 
noderms, i.  e.,  Crinoidea  in  the  broadest  sense;  the  Sc}'toder- 
mata,  to  embrace  the  Holothurians  ;  and  the  Echinozoa,  under 
which  he  placed  the  Urchins,  Starfishes  and  Ophiurans. 

That  the  Stalked  Echinoderms  and  Holothurians  are  more 
distinct  from  each  other,  and  from  the  three  groups  for  which 
Leuckart  proposed  the  name  Echinozoa,  than  these  are  among 
themselves,  cannot  be  denied,  but  it  is  questionable  whether  it  is 
necessary  or  even  desirable  to  express  this  in  the  classification, 
any  further  than  by  placing  in  juxtaposition  the  nearest  allied 
groups.     To.>  many  subdivisions  encumber  the  classification,  and 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  297 

as  long  as  the  Scytoderniata  and  Echinozoa  of  Leuckart  are  not 
accepted,  we  think  it  unnecessary  to  establish  a  branch  for  the 
Pelraatozoa.  In  principle,  however,  we  agree  with  Carpenter, 
and  admit  that  the  "Pelmatozoa  "  differ  very  essentially  "  in  the 
presence  of  a  stem,  and  in  the  consequent  departure  from  the 
ordinary  habits  of  an  Urchin,  Starfish  or  Holothurian.  Whether 
sessile  or  provided  with  a  stem,  the  Crinoid  lies  on  its  aboral 
surface  instead  of  creeping  about  mouth  downwards  in  search  of 
food"  (Chall.  Rep.,  p.  193),  and  they  differ  also  in  having  no 
locomotor  organs  in  connection  with  the  ambulacral  system  (Ibid., 
p.  188).  All  this,  however,  we  think  is  sufficiently  expressed  by 
giving  the  Pelmatozoa  the  rank  of  a  class,  and  placing  them  at 
the  end  of  the  list. 

In  our  opinion  there  is  no  doubt  that  J.  S.  Miller  proposed  the 
name  Crinoidea  to  designate  exclusively  the  brachiate  Crinoids, 
for  he  stated  in  his  description  (A  Nat.  Hist.  Crin.,  p.  7),  that 
"  there  proceed  from  the  upper  rim  of  the  cup-like  body  five  artic- 
ulated arms,  divided  into  tentaculated  fingers,"  and  among  the 
species  which  he  refers  to  them  there  is  neither  a  Blastoid  nor  a 
Cystid.  Unfortunately,  however,  later  writers  have  used  the  name 
in  a  twofold  sense,  designating  thereb}^  the  class  and  one  of  its 
subdivisions,  until  lately  Zittel,  in  his  Handb.  der  Palreontologie, 
to  remedy  this,  proposed  the  name  "  Eucrinoidea "  for  the 
"  Brachiata"  i.  e.,  Crinoidea,  sensu  .s£r.,and  "Crinoidea"  to  take  the 
name  of  the  class,  an  arrangement  which  has  since  been  accepted 
by  De  Loriol.  To  conform  to  Miller's  idea,  the  new  term  should 
have  been  given  to  the  class,  and  not  to  the  subdivision.  But  as 
Leuckart  had  alread}'  proposed  the  collective  name  "  Pelmatozoa," 
which  has  priority,  and  is  a  more  appropriate  term  than  Crinoidea, 
Zittel's  scheme  need  not  be  discussed. 

Carpenter  has  placed  the  Blastoidea  and  Cystidea  on  a  level 
with  the  Crinoidea,  making  all  three  distinct  classes,  a  rank  to 
which  we  think  they  are  not  entitled.  The  three  groups,  accord- 
ing to  our  views,  are  mere  modifications  of  the  same  plan  which, 
so  far  as  known,  originated  in  the  Cystidea,  and  of  which  the 
Blastoidea  and  Crinoidea  are  mere  offshoots.  The  latter  group, 
but  especially  the  Blastoidea,  are  linked  together  with  the  Cys- 
tidea by  such  eas}'  transitions,  that  among  the  earlier  types  it  is 
difficult  to  draw  any  clear  line  of  demarkation.  We  are  unable 
to  point  out  a  single  character  that  is  not  found  exceptionally  in 


298  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

one  of  the  other  groups.  We  do  not  except  the  calicine  pores  or 
the  pectinated  rhombs,  -which  are  regarded  as  characteristic  of 
the  Cystids,  nor  the  lamellar  tubes  beneath  the  ambulacra,  which 
were  thought  to  be  restricted  to  the  Blastoids.  Even  jointed  arms 
occur  in  many  Cystids,  and  in  some  of  them  they  are  connected 
with  the  radials  in  a  similar  manner  as  in  the  Crinoidea. 

We  <lo  not  wish  to  enter  upon  a  discussion  of  the  structural 
peculiarities  of  the  Cj'stidea  and  Blastoidea,  and,  if  we  allude  to 
them  here,  it  is  onty  to  illustrate  their  close  affinities  with  one 
another,  and  with  the  Palaeocrinoidea.  Asteroblastus,  judging 
from  thecatyx,  is  a  Cystid,  but  it  has  Blastoid  ambulacra, 
Blastoid  pinnules,  associated  with  ambulacral  and  calicine  pores. 
The  same  structure  occurs  in  (?)  Agelacrinus  Pusirewskii  Hof- 
mann.  On  the  other  hand,  the  Blastoid  genus  Godaster  has 
neither  spiracles  nor  ambulacral  pores  ;  its  hydrospires  open  out 
like  those  of  certain  Cystidca,  and  they  do  not  underlie  the 
ambulacra,  but  are  placed  alongside  of  them.  Godaster  was 
referred  b}r  Billings  and  Zittel  to  the  Cystidea,  but  is  now 
generally  recognized  as  a  Blastoid.  Stephanocrinus  has  been 
variously  described  as  a  Crinoid,  Blastoid  and  Cystid.  As 
admitted  b}r  Carpenter,  it  has  probably  no  hydrospires,  and  so 
far  as  known  no  calicine  pores  nor  pectinated  rhombs,  but  it 
possesses  long  Crinoid-like  brachial  appendages.  Caryocrinus, 
which  has  been  very  generally  regarded  as  a  Cystid,  has  seg- 
mented pinnule-bearing  arms  like  a  Crinoid,  and  these  are  at- 
tached to  the  radials,  but  it  has  calicine  pores,  and  numerous 
hydrospires  along  the  inner  floor  of  the  calyx.  Porocrinus  has  a 
calyx  and  arms  like  a  Cyathocrinoid,  but  calicine  pores  like  a 
Cystid.  J/i/Ijocystites  was  described  by  Wetkerby  as  a  Cystid  ; 
by  Carpenter  as  a  transition  form  between  Crinoids  and  Blastoids, 
but  nearer  the  latter  ;  while  we  consider  it  a  Crinoid.  Its  arm 
structure  is  that  of  a  Cystid,  hut  it  has  apparently  neither  calicine 
pores,  rhombs,  nor  lamellar  tubes.  The  Crotalocrinidre  and  Euca- 
Lyptocrinidse  probably  have  hydrospires  within  the  calyx,  Cupres- 
socriim.<  and  Symbathocrinus  probably  li3Tdrospires  underneath  the 
ambulacra,  and  both  have  segmented  arms. 

These  few  examples,  to  which  others  might  be  added,  will 
sufficiently  show  that  neither  the  Blastoidea  and  Cystidea,  nor 
the  Crinoidea  propel",  form  primary  divisions  like  the  Urchins, 
Starfishes  or  Ophiurans,  but  constitute  subordinate  groups  of  the 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  299 

Pelmatozoa.  Carpenter  admits  on  p.  191  the  close  affinities 
between  the  Cystids  and  Blastoids,  but  the  Crinoidea  he  takes  to 
be  a  well-defined  group  "  b}^  having  segmented  arms  attached  to 
the  radials,  contrary  to  the  Cystids  and  Blastoids  in  which  there 
are  either  no  arms  at  all,  or  structures  of  an  entirely  different 
nature  from  those  of  the  true  Crinoids."  We  have  already 
directed  attention  to  Caryocrinus  and  Porocrinus  as  having  well- 
developed  arms,  similar  to  those  of  Hybocrinns,  and  also  calicine 
pores.  If  we  were  to  make  the  division  between  Crinoids  and 
Cystids  upon  the  arm  structure,  and  did  not  make  the  calicine 
pores  the  principal  distinction  between  those  groups,  Ave  would 
also  have  to  place  among  the  Crinoidea  Comarocystites,  which 
has  not  only  segmented  arms  but  even  pinnule-like  appendages. 
Neither  could  we  leave  out  Glyptocystites  and  Pleurocyxtites,  in 
which  the  arms  are  long  and  lined  with  well-defined  covering 
plates.1 

Burmeister  (Zoonomische  Briefe,  Leipzig,  1856,  vol.  i,  p.  243) 
divided  the  "  Crinoidea  "  into  Anthodiata,  among  which  he  in- 
cluded the  Cystidea  and  Blastoidea,  and  "  Brachiata "  with 
Tessellata,  Articulata,  Costata  and  the  genus  Holopus.  This 
arrangement,  leaving  out  the  Costata,  which  probably  are  not 
Pelmatozoa  at  all,  seems  to  us  a  very  good  one,  and  we  find  it 
convenient  to  adopt  his  divisions  as  "  subclasses,"  substituting, 
however,  for  Burmeister's  name  Brachiata,  Miller's  older  name 
Crinoidea.  This  enables  us  to  discriminate  between  Palaeocri- 
noidea  and  Neocrinoidea  on  the  one  side,  and  Cystidea  and 
Blastoidea  on  the  other,  which,  as  we  have  stated,  are  more 
distinct  from  one  another  than  the  groups  which  we  place  under 
them.  To  make  the  Anthodiata  and  Crinoidea  separate  classes, 
on  a  level  with  the  Urchins,  would  give  to  them  too  much  im- 
portance. We  doubt  if  Carpenter  will  claim  them  to  be  anj'thing 
like  as  distinct  groups  as  the  Ophiurids  and  Starfishes,  which 
by  some  systematists  were  regarded  as  mere  subgroups  of  the 

1  The  Cystidea  have  never  been  properly  defined.  They  form  in  our 
opinion  an  assemblage  of  several  groups  of  equal  rank  -with  the  Blastoidea. 
S.  A.  Miller  pointed  out  in  the  Cincinnati  Journal  of  Xat.  Hist.,  Dec.  1882, 
the  Licbinocrinoidea  and  Ajjelacrinoidea  as  orders  of  tbe  Crinoidea  ;  the 
latter  name,  however,  must  be  changed  to  '•Edriasterida,''  as  this  has 
priority.  It  was  proposed  by  Prof.  Huxley  in  his  classification  of  animals, 
London,  1869,  p.  130  (Carpenter). 


300  PROCEEDINGS    OP   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Stellerites.  These,  however,  differ  essentially  in  their  mode  of 
development,  which  can  hardl}'  be  claimed  for  the  Anthodiata 
and  Crinoidea.  We  can  only  say  of  them  that,  as  a  rule,  in  the 
former  the  organs  generally  were  contained  within  the  catyx, 
whereas  in  the  Crinoidea  the  generative  and  respiratory  apparatus 
is  almost  entirely  confined  to  the  arms,  and  probably  neither 
Blastoids  nor  Cystids  had  appendages  united  by  paired  muscular 
bundles.  The  Pakeocrinoidea  form  parallel  groups  with  the 
Blastoidea,  both  being  descendants  of  the  Cystidea  ;  while  the 
relations  of  Palseocrinoidea  and  Neocrinoidea  are  similar  to  those 
of  Palseocrinoidea  and  C}'stidea,  and  Cystidea  and  Blastoidea; 
but  the  Neocrinoidea,  although  they  are  of  later  descent,  are 
equally  well  defined.  In  making  these  four  groups  orders  of  the 
Anthodiata  and  Crinoidea  respectively,  we  place  at  the  head  of 
the  list  the  Cystidea,  as  being  the  typical  form,  the  Blastoidea 
next,  and  at  the  opposite  end  the  Palseocrinoidea  and  Neocrinoidea. 

In  correspondence  with  Dr.  Carpenter  he  has  admitted  that 
his  classification  tends  to  give  an  expression  of  well-marked 
differences  between  Crinoids,  Cystids  and  Blastoids,  which,  as 
he  stated  on  p.  191  of  his  Report,  do  not  exist  between  the  two 
latter,  and  we  are  authorized  to  state  that  he  concurs  with  us  in 
re-establishing  Burmeister's  Anthodiata  and  Brachiata,  as  we 
have  practically  done,  the  former  to  include  as  "  orders  "  the 
C}rstidea  and  Blastoidea,  the  latter  the  Palasocrinoidea  and  Neo- 
crinoidea. We  believe,  therefore,  that  there  is  very  little  differ- 
ence between  us  on  this  point. 

Various  other  classifications  have  been  proposed  by  different 
writers,  for  which  we  refer  to  the  Challenger  Report,  pp.  186-196. 
The  following  classification  will  be  adopted  by  us,  viz. : — 

Phylum,  ECIIINODERMATA. 

Class,  Pelmatozoa. 

Subclass  I,  Anthodiata.  Subclass  II,  Crinoidea  {Brachiata). 

Order  1,  Cystidea,  etc  Order  3,  Palseocrinoidea. 

Order  2,  Blastoidea.  Order  4,  Neocrinoidea. 

Class,  Pelmatozoa. 

Definition} — Echinoderms  which  are  fixed  either  permanent^ 


1  This  and  tin  bucci  ediDg  definition  is  taken  from  Carpenter  (Chall.  Rep., 
pp.  186),  with  a  Blight  alteration  in  the  first  one  which  is  indicated  by 
italics. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  301 

or  temporarily  by  the  middle  of  the  aboral  surface.  A  jointed 
stem  containing  a  neurovascular  axis  is  usually  present,  but  may 
be  lost  when  maturity  is  reached  ;  or  in  the  case  of  a  few  sessile 
forms,  remain  altogether  undeveloped.  The  apical  system  con- 
sists of  a  dorsocentral  plate,  basals  and  radials,  with  the  frequent 
addition  of  underbasals  and  interradials.  These  plates  form  a 
cup,  which  either  simply  supports  or  more  or  less  completely 
encloses  the  visceral  mass,  and  often  bears  jointed  appendages, 
the  arms  and  pinnules. 

An  oral  system,  to  some  extent  a  repetition  of  the  plates  in  the 
apical  system,  consisting  of  basals,  radials  and  interradials, 
covers  the  peristome,  but  may  be  altogether  resorbed,  or  be  re- 
stricted to  basals  only.  The  anus  either  is  located  within  the 
calyx,  and  surrounded  by  abactinal  plates,  or  forms  a  part  of 
the  oral  surface.1 

The  water  vascular  ring  does  not  communicate  directly  with 
the  exterior,  and  the  lateral  branches  of  the  radial  vessels  (when 
present)  are  respiratory,  but  not  locomotor  in  function. 

Subclass,  Crinoidea. 
Definition. — Pelmatozoa,  in  which  the  radial  plates  of  the 
calyx  bear  more  or  less  branching  arms.  These  consist  of 
segments  which  are  articulated  by  means  of  muscles  and  liga- 
ments, and  in  most  cases  bear  similar  jointed  appendages,  the 
pinnules.  The  nervous  sj^stem  consists  (1)  of  a  central  organ 
situated  in  the  calyx,  and  fibres  extending  from  it  through  the 
skeleton  of  the  stem,  arms  and  pinnules ;  (2)  of  a  circumoral 
ring  and  radial  extensions  which  are  in  close  relation  with  the 
ciliated  epithelium  of  the  ambulacral  grooves.  These  are  more  or 
less  extensively  distributed  on  the  ventral  surface  of  the  disk, 
arms  and  pinnules  ;  and  are  bordered  by  groups  of  tentacles 
which  alternate  on  opposite  sides.  When  they  are  absent,  the 
radial  water  vessels  give  off  no  tentacular  branches.  The  water 
vascular  ring  opens  by  five  or  more  water  tubes  into  the  body 
cavity,  which  itself  communicates  with  the  exterior  by  a  corres- 

1  Carpenter's  version:  "An  oral  system,  consisting  of  a  central  plate 
(orocentral)  and  five  orals,  is  developed  above  the  peristome  of  the  larva 
to  a  very  variable  extent,  and  may  be  either  altogether  resorbed,  or  reacb 
a  high  degree  of  importance  by  the  appearance  of  additional  plates  so  as  to 
form  a  vault  or  tegmen  calycis.  The  anus  is  situated  on  the  oral  surface, 
which  may  be  bare,  or  more  or  less  covered  by  calcareous  plates. ' ' 


302  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

ponding  number  of  water  pores.  The  mouth  is  central,  except 
in  a  few  genera,  and  the  anus  subcentral  or  excentric.  The 
genital  glands  are  lodged  in  the  lower  parts  of  the  arms,  but  are 
usually  fertile  only  in  the  pinnules. 

The  Subdivisions  of  the  Palseocrinoidea. 

Among  the  Palaeocrinoidea  we  recognize  three  great  divisions, 
which  on  the  whole  correspond  to  our  former  groups,  Sphoeroido- 
crinidae,  Echthyocrinidse  and  Cyathocrinidae.  These  groups, 
which  arc  divisible  into  definite  subgroups,  will  be  ranked  by  us 
as  suborders  of  the  Palseocrinoidea,  and  the  subgroups  as  fami- 
lies. The  three  suborders,  for  which  we  have  proposed  the  names 
Camarata,  Articulata  and  Inadunata,  are  distinguished  from  one 
another  principally  by  the  mode  of  union  among  the  calyx  plates, 
and  the  condition  of  the  arms  as  to  whether  their  lower  plates 
constitute  a  part  of  the  calyx,  and  as  such  enclose  the  visceral 
cavity,  or  form  parts  of  the  free  arms.  These  groups  are  not 
only  well  defined  in  nature,  as  shown  by  the  fact  that  they  are  so 
readily  recognized,  but  they  are  also  most  convenient  for  all  de- 
scriptive and  comparative  work. 

When  we  first  defined  the  three  groups  (Rev.,  i  and  ii),  we  laid 
the  greatest  stress  upon  the  construction  of  the  ventral  surface, 
which,  as  we  stated,  offered  most  excellent  characters  for  their 
separation  ;  but  as  the  modifications  which  take  place  among 
them,  to  a  large  extent,  result  from  the  conditions  of  calj-x  and 
arms,  we  regard  the  structure  of  their  ventral  side  as  of  subordi- 
nate rank.  This  necessitates  a  re-description  of  those  groups, 
especially  as  our  present  views  upon  the  ventral  plates  generally 
differ  essentially  from  those  previously  held  by  us. 

We  have  stated  that  the  so-called  "orals,"  upon  which  the 
"Cyathocrinidae" — the  Inadunata  of  our  new  classification — were 
at  that  time  principally  founded,  are  interradials,  which  attained 
their  ventral  position  by  being  in  lateral  contact,  in  place  of 
resting  laterally  against  the  lower  arm  plates.  The  construction 
of  the  ventral  surface  in  the  earlier  Inadunata  thereby  became 
fundamentally  identical  with  that  of  the  "  Sphaeroidocrinidae," 
except  that  the  latter  attained  subsequently  a  larger  number  of 
interradials.  In  the  later  Inadunata  the  ventral  structure  is  very 
different;  indeed,  so  much  so  that  the  two  sections  according  to 
our  former  views  should  have  been  distinctly  separated.     This  we 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  303 

had  contemplated,  but  we  encountered  great  difficulties,  as  the 
two  forms  run  very  closely  from  one  into  the  other.  Even  the 
ventral  sac,  the  best  distinguishing  character,  undergoes  all 
possible  modifications.  It  dwindles  down  to  almost  nothing  in 
some  of  them,  and  its  porous  nature  is  sometimes  very  indistinctly 
developed  or  even  unrepresented.  We  regard  these  modifications, 
as  they,  occur  in  palseontological  times,  as  representing  various 
stages  of  development  in  the  historj'  of  this  group,  and  as  good 
generic  characters,  but  do  not  attach  to  them  the  importance  we 
did  before.  We  have,  however,  placed  the  genera  in  which  a 
ventral  sac  is  developed  as  a  group  by  themselves,  to  separate 
them  from  those  in  which  it  is  absent.  The  latter  group,  which 
represents  the  larval  form,  w*ill  be  designated  by  us  as  "  Larvi- 
f omnia  "  the  former  as  "  Fidulata." 

Instead  of  the  name  Splncroidocriniclae,  which  is  objectionable 
for  several  reasons,  we  propose  to  use  Camarata,  under  which  we 
have  placed  several  additional  groups.  To  the  Articulala  (nobis, 
not  Miiller  or  Miller),  which  we  restrict  to  the  articulated  Palseo- 
crinoidea,  we  refer  the  Ichthyocrinidre  and  Crotalocrinidae.  If 
there  is  any  objection  to  re-establishing  Midler's  name,  which 
has  been  generally  discarded,  we  might  change  Articulata  into 
"Articulosa."  We  think,  however,  we  are  fully  entitled  to  adopt 
the  former,  as  the  Crinoids  which  we  refer  to  them  are  true 
Articulata  in  Midler's  sense.  We  place  the  Camarata,  which  we 
regard  as  the  typical  form  of  the  Palaeocrinoidas,  at  the  head  of 
the  list,  the  Articulata  next,  and  the  Inadunata,  which  in  some 
respects  approach  the  Neocrinoidea,  at  the  opposite  end. 

The  Camarata  embrace  all  Palseocrinoidea  in  which  the  plates 
of  the  test  are  solidly  united  by  suture,  and  in  which  the  lower 
arm  plates  are  incorporated  by  means  of  interradial  plates  so  as 
to  form  a  part  of  the  calyx.  The  underbasals  are  frequently 
undeveloped.  The  basals  of  monocyclic  genera  are  variable  in 
number,  five  being  the  exception.  The  primary  radials  consist 
generally  of  three  plates  to  each  ray,  rarely  of  two  or  four. 
There  is  always  at  least  one  secondary  radial,  which  ma}*  give 
off  the  free  arms  or  support  others,  and  frequentl}*  radials  of 
higher  orders.  Interradials  numerous,  or  not  less  than  two;  the 
first  one  resting  upon  the  sloping  upper  sides  of  the  first  radials, 
or  alternating  with  them.  The  interradials,  together  with  the 
interaxillaries  and  anal  plates,  separate  the  rays  and  their  sub- 


304  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

divisions,  and  cover  the  greater  part  of  the  ventral  surface  up  to 
the  summit  plates,  or  the  whole  of  it  including  the  latter.  The 
free  anus  are  simple  or  branching,  and  with  a  few  exceptions 
biserial.  uniserial  only  in  their  immature  state,  permanently  only 
in  a  few  Silurian  genera.  The  articulation  of  the  arms  is  primitive, 
and  dorsal  canals  have  never  been  observed.  All  have  pinnules, 
which  as  a  rule  are  closely  folded  together.  The  anus  is  sur- 
rounded by  solid  plates,  suturally  connected;  its  position  is 
excentric,  except  in  the  Eucalyptocrinidse. 

The  summit  plates  are  largely  developed,  and  consist  in  all 
Carboniferous,  and  in  most  of  the  Devonian  genera,  of  an  undi- 
vided oral  plate,  proximals,  and  frequently  one  or  more  radials  ; 
in  most  of  the  Silurian  forms,  however,  of  orals  only,  and  even 
these  may  be  covered  b}^  interradials.  The  disk  is  subtegminal, 
but  sometimes  the  covering  pieces  enter  the  outer  surface,  when 
they  lake  the  condition  of  surrounding  plates.  The  Camarata 
have  small  openings  along  the  brachial  zone,  by  means  of  which 
the  water  for  respiration  entered  the  body. 

To  the  Articulata  we  refer  all  Paloeocrinoidea  in  which  the 
test  is  pliable.  The  calyx  extends  to  the  lower  arm  joints,  and 
the  plates  are  united  by  articulation,  and  not  by  suture.  Under- 
basals  are  always  represented  ;  they  are  small,  being  frequently 
covered  by  the  column,  and  consist  of  either  three  or  five  plates. 
The  number  of  primary  radials  varies  from  two  to  seven  or  more, 
and  also  the  number  of  the  higher  orders  is  very  variable.  The 
radials  of  different  rays  are  either  in  contact  laterally  or  connected 
by  the  help  of  interradials.  In  the  former  case,  frequently,  a 
smaller  number  of  radials  alternates  with  a  larger  one,  and  the 
plates  of  one  ray  rest  with  their  upper  sloping  sides  against 
the  lower  sloping  sides  of  their  fellows  of  adjoining  rays,  or  vice 
versa.  When  the  radials  are  separated  by  interradials,  these 
either  extend  to  the  basals,  or  rest  against  the  upper  sloping  sides 
of  the  fust  radials.  In  some  cases,  however,  the  interradials  are 
restricted  to  tin?  ventral  surface.  The  form  of  the  calyx  varies 
from  almost  strictly  pentamerous  to  bilateral  S3'mmetry,  but  it 
sometimes  becomes  irregular,  owing  to  the  interposition  of  an 
azygous  plate.  Some  species  have  no  anal  plate  dorsally.  The 
radial  ami  arm  plates  are  united  horizontally  by  muscles  and 
ligament,  or  perhaps  in  some  case  ^  li\  ligament  only.  The  Lateral 
face  of  the  radials  and  those  of  the  interradials  are  provided  with 
deep  ligamental  fossa?.     The  arms  are  closely  folded  together, 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  305 

and  sometimes  connected  laterally  by  a  membranous  substance. 
The  ventral  surface,  so  far  as  known,  is  composed  of  interradial 
plates  ;  it  forms  a  pliable  vault,  which  extends  to  the  free  rays, 
and  probably  covers  not  only  the  disk,  but  also  the  summit 
plates.  The  Crotalocrinidre  have  no  anambulacral  pieces,  but 
possess  hydrospires  within  the  calyx. 

The  Inadunata  are  subdivided  into  Larviformia  and  Fistulata. 
They  include  all  Palaeocrinoidea  in  which  the  arms  are  free  from 
the  first  radials.  Their  calyx  is  comparatively  small ;  composed 
exclusively  of  basals,  frequently  underbasals,  five  radials,  five 
interradials,  and  one  or  two  azygous  plates.  The  proximal  ring 
of  plates,  whether  basal  or  underbasal,  is  composed  of  five,  or 
less  frequentby,  three  plates.  The  radials  are  laterally  connected 
except  at  the  posterior  side,  where  they  are  separated  by  an 
azygous  and  anal  plate,  if  these  have  not  been  resorbed.  The 
presence  of  the  azygous  plate  gives  to  the  calyx  a  ver}7  irregular 
outline.  The  interradials  are  located  ventrally;  they  rest  against 
the  upper  ends  of  two  adjoining  radials,  and  join  along  their 
lateral  margins. 

The  ventral  covering  of  the  Larviformia  consists  of  com- 
paratively few  pieces,  among  which  generally  the  combined  muscle 
plates  form  a  conspicuous  part.  The  central  space  is  covered 
either  exclusively  by  interradials,  or  these  enclose  an  oral  plate, 
which  in  some  of  the  higher  forms  is  surrounded  by  proximals. 
The  disk  is  subtegminal  in  place  of  being  extended  into  a  lateral 
sac.  The  anal  opening  either  penetrates  the  interradials,  or  is 
placed  intermediate  between  two  radials  or  their  appendages. 
Respiration  took  place  b}r  pores  along  the  arm  furrows,  which 
probably  communicated  with  hydrospires. 

In  the  higher  organized  Fistulata  the  perisome  is  partly  or 
wholly  exposed,  the  interradial  plates  either  cover  the  perisome, 
or  this  parti}'  covers  them.  In  the  latter  case  the  summit  plates 
may  be  resorbed,  in  the  former  they  are  largely  represented  ;  but 
in  either  case  portions  of  the  disk  penetrate  the  catyx  posteriorly 
b}T  passing  out  through  the  anal  opening.  These  portions  form 
either  a  balloon-shaped  or  a  tubular  sac,  composed  of  well-defined 
plates,  closed  at  the  end,  but  perforated  over  the  surface  by  pores 
along  the  suture  lines  ;  the  pores  penetrating  the  lateral  edges  of 
the  plates.  Respiration  took  place  by  means  of  the  pores  alono- 
the  perisome. 
21 


306  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

Phylum,  ECHINODERMATA. 

Class,  PELMATOZOA. 

Subclass,  Crinoidea. 

Order,  PAL^OCRIXOIDEA. 

Suborder,  CAMARATA. 

The  Cam  ar  at  a  embrace  the  Platycrinidte,  Actinocrinidae  and 
Rhodocrinida?.  which  in  Part  II  we  grouped  together  under  the 
name  Sphaeroidocrinidse,  and  also  the  Acrocrinidae  and  Calypto- 
crinida?,  wliich  are  here  described. 

In  a  paper  on  Glyptoerinus  and  Reteocrinus,  Amer.  Journ.  Sci., 
vol.  xxv,  April,  1883,  we  intimated  on  p.  267,  that  we  might  find 
it  advisable  to  place  Glyptoerinus,  Reteocrinus  and  allied  genera 
in  a  family  by  themselves.  This  had  been  done  by  Zittel,  and 
has  since  been  adopted  by  S.  A.  Miller,  under  the  name  of  Glyp- 
tocrinidflft.  Zittel  included  in  this  family  Glyjdocrinus,  Glyptas- 
ter,  Thylacocrinus,  Cupulocrinus,  Lampterocrinus,  Eucrinus  and 
Sagenocrinus,  genera  all  having  well  developed  nnderbasals,  with 
the  exception  of  Glyptoerinus,  in  which  the}-  were  said  to  be  ru- 
dimentary. Miller's  (jlyptocrinidae  contain  Archaeoerinus,  Cu- 
pulocrinus, Glyptaster,  Lampterocrinus,  Reteocrinus  and  his  pro- 
posed genus  Gaurocrinus,  all  having  underbasals,  and  Glyptoeri- 
nus, Xenocrinus  and  his  Compsocrinus  and  Pycnocrinus,  which 
he  described  as  having  but  one  ring  of  plates  below  the  radials. 

The  presence  of  underbasals  has  been  very  generally  considered 
a  good  family  distinction,  and  it  has  always  been  a  question  of- 
doubt  with  us  whether  we  were  justified  in  departing  from  this 
rule  by  placing  Glyptoerinus  and  Xenocrinus,  in  which  under- 
basals were  said  to  be  absent  or  indistinctly  developed,  in  the 
same  group  with  Reteocrinus  and  Archaeoerinus,  in  which  those 
plates  form  a  more  or  less  important  part.  The  genera  which 
Miller  has  grouped  together,  and  a  few  more,  asiree  remarkably 
in  general  aspect,  but  they  differ  not  only  in  the  matter  of  under- 
basals, in  the  number  of  basals.  but  also  very  materially  in  the 
disposition  and  form  of  their  interradial  plates. 

Glyptoerinus  was  originally  described  as  possessing  no  under- 
basals. Hall  afterwards  discovered  minute  pieces  enclosed  by 
the  ring  of  plates  which  he  had  previously  designated  as  basals, 
and  which  he  now  called  subradials,  taking  the  small  inner  pieces 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  307 

for  the  true  representatives  of  the  basals.  The  presence  of  these 
small  pieces  was  also  acknowledged  by  Meek  and  ourselves,  but 
Meek  hesitating  to  call  them  basals,  applied  the  name  "  sub- 
basals;"  while  we  took  them  to  be  rudimentary  underbasals,  and 
as  such  the3r  have  been  described  in  Part  II  of  the  Revision,  and 
in  our  April  paper. 

We  have  stated  elsewhere,  that  in  all  Crinoids  having  basals 
only,  the  column,  when  pentagonal,  has  its  angles  directed  radi- 
ally, the  radii  of  the  pentapetaloid  or  five  rayed  columnar  canal 
interradially,  and  that  the  opposite  is  the  case  in  all  species, 
throughout  all  Palffiocrinoidea  in  which  underbasals  are  present. 
Applying  this  rule  to  Glyptocrinus  and  allied  genera,  we  find  that 
every  species  referred  by  us  to  Glyptocrinus,  is  without  under- 
basals, and  that  all  those,  with  one  or  two  exceptions,  which  we 
placed  under  Beteocrinus,h&ve  underbasals.  The  exceptional  spe- 
cies are  Glyptocrinus  Richardsoni  Wetherby,  of  which  we  speak 
later  on,  and  Meek's  Glyptocrinus  Baeri,  which  we  found  to  be  a 
Xenocrinus,  having  four  basals  and  a  subquadrangular  column ; 
but,  like  Xenocrinus  and  Mariacrinus,  a  pentangular  axial  canal, 
its  angles  directed  strictly  interradially.  By  carefully  grinding  off 
the  base  in  Gl.  decadactylus,  and  in  several  other  species,  we  have 
become  satisfied  that  the  pieces  which  have  been  designated  by 
Hall,  Meek  and  ourselves  heretofore,  respectively,  as  basals,  sub- 
basals,  and  rudimentary  underbasals,  form  no  part  of  the  calyx, 
but  constitute  the  uppermost  portion  of  the  column,  which  in  this 
genus  rests  within  a  remarkably  deep,  funnel-shaped  concavity. 

Among  the  species  arranged  by  Miller  under  Glyptocrinus,  and 
which  were  said  to  have  no  underbasals,  are  Glyptocrinus  Rich- 
ardsoni Wetherby,  and  Gl.  Pattersoni  Miller.  In  Rev.,  Part  II, 
and  subsequently  in  our  paper  in  the  Amer.  Journal,  these  species 
were  placed  under  Reteocrinus  Billings.  In  neither  one  of  them 
have  underbasals  been  observed,  although  these  plates  may  be 
present,  hidden  beneath  the  column,  as  in  the  case  of  many  Rho- 
docrinidae  and  Poteriocrinidse.  The  species  differ,  however,  very 
materially  from  Gl.  decadactylus  and  allied  species  without  under- 
basals in  the  distribution  and  position  of  their  interradial  plates, 
which  are  irregularly  arranged,  and  rest  upon  the  five  basals,  ex- 
actly as  they  do  in  Reteocrinus  stellaris  and  in  R.  CfNealli,  which, 
contrary  to  the  other  species,  have  well  developed  underbasals. 
The  case  is  similar  in  Xenocrinus  penicillus  Miller,  only  that  in 


PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

this  species  underbasals  are  known  to  be  absent,  and  the}'  have 
four  in  place  of  five  basals.  Any  difference  in  the  number  of 
basals  has  been  generally  considered  a  good  generic  distinction, 
and  this  make-  Xenocrinus,  undoubtedly,  a  good  genus.  But  in 
which  group  shall  we  place  it?  Together  with  Ileteocrinus  or 
Glyptocrinus?  Together  with  species  in  which  the  interradials 
rest  upon  the  basals, and  which  have  well  developed  underbasals, 
or  with  species  destitute  of  underbasals,  and  with  their  interra- 
dials. as  in  Glyptocrinus,  resting  upon  the  first  radials? 

In  Part  II  we  maintained  that,  as  a  rule,  the  presence  or  ab- 
sence of  underbasals  should  be  considered  of  more  than  generic 
importance,  and  this  we  made  the  principal  distinction  between 
Actinocrinidae  and  Rhodocrinidae.  We  pointed  out,  however, 
that  in  these  families  there  are  several  genera,  among  the  earlier 
types,  which  are  closely  connected  by  transition  forms, and  shade 
almost  imperceptibly  from  one  into  another.  We  even  thought 
it  possible  that  species  of  the  same  genus  might  possess  under- 
basals  in  a  rudimentary  way,  while  those  plates  might  be  totally 
absent  in  others.  This  is  not  confirmed  by  our  later  investiga- 
tions, but  it  is  nevertheless  by  no  mean-  an  easy  task  to  separate 
some  of  the  earlier  genera  upon  this  character,  as  there  are  fre- 
quently other  important  features  by  which  they  are  much  more 
closeby  connected  with  other  groups.  In  proof  of  this  we  need 
only  refer  to  Glyptocrinus  Richardsoni,  provided  this  really 
possesses  no  underbasals,  a-  Miller  asserts,  and  to  Ileteocrinus 
O'Nealli,  in  which  1  hey  are  very  conspicuous.  As  the  two  species 
are  almost  identical  in  every  other  respect,  it  would  seem  doubt- 
ful policy  to  refer  them  to  distinct  families  upon  this  character 
alone.  S.  A.  Miller  evidently  experienced  the  same  difficulty,  for 
his  Glyptocrinidae  include  genera  of  both  forms.  Zittel,  De  Lo- 
rial,  and  all  preceding  writer-,  make  the  presence  of  underbasals 
a  full  family  distinction,  and  all  their  Glyptocrinidae  and  Rhodo- 
crinidae  are  -aid  to  have  underbasals. 

Diversities  in  the  distribution  of  the  interradial  plates  of  the 
calyx  have  been  generally  taken  to  be  of  minor  morphological 
importance;  hut  at  the  same  time  they  have  been  considered  good 
characters  for  distinguishing  genera.  S.  A.  Miller  alone  has 
placed  in  the  same  genus  species,  which  in  this  respect  show  the 
greatest  possible  contrast.  It  is,  however,  rather  singular  that 
he  applies  this  rule  only  to  the  -  Glyptocrinidae,"  while  in  other 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  309 

groups  he  considers  such  difference  to  be  at  least  of  generic  im- 
portance, and  what  is  more  singlar,  he  even  constructed  thereon 
a  whole  family.  His  Melocrinidae  differ  from  his  Actinocrinidae 
mainly  in  having  all  five  inter  radial  spaces  arranged  almost  uni- 
formly, and  they  generally  have  Pour  basals.  That  Miller  did  not 
make  the  number  of  basals  the  distinctive  character,  is  very  evi- 
dent, or  he  would  have  arranged  his  Xenocrinus  penicillus  and 
"  Compsocrinus"  Harrisi  among  the  Melocrinidae.  On  the  con- 
trary, he  placed  these  species  under  distinct  genera;  while  he  re- 
ferred Glyptocrinus  decadactylus  and  Reteocrinus  Richardsoni  to 
the  same  genus,  although  these  two  differ  in  exactly  the  same 
way  as  the  two  former  species. 

One  is  curious  to  know  upon  what  ground  Miller  based  his 
Glyptocrinidae.  Not  upon  the  underbasals,  nor  upon  the  relative 
number  of  basals  ;  neither  upon  the  riclges  along  the  radials,  for 
these  are  absent  in  Cupulocrinus  and  Lampterocrinus,  and  cer- 
tainly not  upon  the  ornamentation,  which  he  asserts  does  not 
hold  good  even  among  those  genera.  They  are  united  by  no 
single  character,  and  since  it  has  been  clearly  proved  that  Glyp- 
tocrinus has  no  underbasals,  this  genus  no  longer  falls  within  the 
Rhodocrinidae,  which  were  fundamentally  based  upon  the  pres- 
ence of  those  plates,  and  must  be  referred  to  the  Actinocrinidae. 
That  Glyptocrinus  was  in  many  respects  closely  allied  to  the  Ac- 
tinocrinidae, subdivision  Melocrinites,  has  been  shown  already 
in  Part  II,  and  several  species  were  at  first  described  under  Glyp- 
tocrinus, which  we  have  since  referred  to  Mariacrinus.  Among 
these  is  Gl.  Harrisi,  for  which  Miller  lately  proposed  the  genus 
Compsocrinus.  The  generic  definition  of  Gompsocrinus  is  partly 
based  upon  inaccurate  observation,  for  the  interradials  of  all  five 
sides  rest  upon  the  edges  of  the  first  radials,  and  not  one  of  them 
upon  a  basal,  as  figured  by  Miller  in  his  diagram  pi.  11,  fig.  4,  a. 

It  has  been  stated  in  Part  II,  p.  185,  that  the  interradials  of  all 
known  Actinocrinidae,  except  sometimes  those  of  the  azygous 
side,  rest  upon  the  first  radials.  and  this  is  the  case  in  Glyptocri- 
nus and  "Compsocrinus."  We  find  an  apparent  exception  to  this 
rule,  if  we  make  the  absence  of  underbasals  the  controlling  family 
character,  in  t  lie  genus  Xenocrinus,  and  perhaps  in  Glyptocrinus 
Richardsoni  and  Gl.  Patter  son  i,  in  which  underbasals  have  not 
been  observed.  The  two  latter  species  agree  in  all  essential  par- 
ticulars with  Xenocrinus,  in  which  we  include  not  only  Miller's 


310  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

type,  but  also  Ghjptocrinits  Baeri  Meek.  These  two  species,  how- 
ever, have  four  basals,  while  the  two  former  ones  have  five. 
Equally  close  arc  the  affinities  with  Reteocrinus,  which  has  well 
defined  underbasals.  Xenocrinus,  Reteocrinus,  and  Gli/ptocrinus 
Richardsoni,  which  we  make  the  type  of  our  new  genus  Canistro- 
crinus,  agree  in  the  following  features  :  The  plates  of  the  live 
main  rays  and  their  branches  are  formed  into  tube-like  ridges 
along  the  middle,  with  lateral  extensions  to  meet  the  interradials. 
The  interradial  areas  are  deepty  depressed;  composed  of  numer- 
ous minute,  irregularly  arranged  plates.  The}r  abut  against  the 
basals  and  isolate  the  first  radials  to  their  full  length.  The 
azygous  interradius  is  divided  by  a  conspicuous,  rounded  ridge, 
composed  of  strong,  comparatively  large  plates,  longitudinally 
arranged,  which  slightly  decreasing  in  size,  extend  out  to  the 
subcentral  anal  opening. 

Reteocrinus,  Xenocrinus  and  Canistrocrinus  constitute  a  natu- 
ral, well  defined  group,  and  it  seems  to  us  impracticable  to  separate 
them  upon  the  ground  that  some  of  the  species  possess  under- 
basals. The  lateral  separation  of  the  first  radial  plates  distin- 
guishes them  from  all  Actinocrinidae,  and  this,  according  to  P. 
Herb.  Carpenter,1  "  is  a  fact  of  considerable  importance  in  Crin- 
oid  morphology ;  but  in  this  very  character  they  approach  some- 
what the  Rhodocrinites,  in  which,  as  a  rule,  the  first  interradials 
all  around  meet  the  basals.  Among  the  Rhodocrinites,  however, 
the  lower  interradials  are  perfectly  regular  plates,  their  position  is 
fixed,  and  they  are  succeeded  by  equally  regular  pieces.  Whether 
such  widely  different  plates,  as  here  represented,  can  be  compared 
with  each  other,  is  very  doubtful,  and  this  seems  to  have  been  the 
opinion  of  Carpenter,  who  intimates  that  the  irregular  small  pieces 
of  Reteocrinus  can  hardly  be  regarded  as  the  complete  morpho- 
logical equivalents  of  the  larger  and  more  regular  single  inter- 
radials which  occur  in  the  Rhodocrinidae."  That  these  irregular 
interradial  plates  occur  in  none  of  the  later  groups  of  the  Palaeo- 
crinoidea,  but  only  in  the  very  earliest  Silurian  types,  and  under 
decidedly  similar  conditions,  in  species  with  and  without  under- 
basals, points  clearly  to  the  conclusion,  that  those  genera  consti- 
tute a  little  group  by  themselves,  and  we  think  this  justifies  us  in 

1  On  a  New  Crinoid  from  the  Southern  Sea  by  P.  Herb.  Carpenter,  M.  A., 
Philos.  Tians.  of  the  Roy.  Soc,  Part  III,  1883. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  311 

recognizing  them  as  a  distinct  family,  -which  we  propose  to  call 
Reteocrinidae. 

Now,  having  referred  the  genus  Glyptocrinus  in  its  typical 
form,  and  "  Glyptocrinus"  (Compsocrinus)  Harrisi  Miller,—  Ma- 
riacrinus  Harrisi,  to  the  Actinocrinidse  or  their  allies,  Reteocri- 
wws,  Xenocrinus,  and  our  new  genus  Canistocrinus  to  the  Rtteo- 
crinidse,  there  remain  for  consideration  among  species  with  under- 
basals,  or  Rhodocrinidae,as  they  were  previously  called,  two  other 
groups : 

(a.)  Species,  in  which  all  five  primary  interradials  meet  the 
basals,  forming  a  ring  of  ten  plates  with  the  first  radials. 

(6.)  Species,  in  which  the  first  anal  plate  only  rests  upon  the 
basals,  the  interradials  upon  the  edges  of  the  first  radials.  The 
first  group  comprises  the  genera  :  Archseocrinus,  our  new  genus 
Rhaphanocrinus,  Lyriocrinus,  Rhipidocrinus,  Tlnjlacoerinus,  An- 
themocrirms,  Rhodocrinus,  and  Ollacrinus;  the  second  Glyptaster, 
DimerocrinuSj  Ptychocrinus  and  Lavipterocrinus.  The  former 
group  agrees  with  our  subdivision  Rhodocrinites,  except  Archse- 
ocrinus, which  we  had  previously  arranged  under  Glyptocrinites  ; 
the  latter  corresponds  with  our  former  Glyptasterites. 

It  might  be  as  well,  perhaps,  to  let  these  groups  remain  as  sub- 
divisions of  the  Rhodocrinidae  ;  but,  as  it  is  desirable  that  the 
families  proposed  by  various  authors  in  the  different  classifica- 
tions should  be  made  to  correspond  as  far  as  possible,  we  follow 
Zittel,  and  rank  them  as  full  families.  The  first,  as  embracing 
the  t3'pical  genus,  will  be  Rhodocrinidse.  Zittel's  name,  Glypto- 
crinidae,  however,  cannot  be  used  for  the  other  group,  since  it  is 
known  that  Glyptocrinus  has  no  underbasals.  We  propose  in  its 
place  the  name  Glyptasteridae,  Glyptaster  being  one  of  its  most 
characteristic  types. 

These  divisions  are  substantially  in  conformitj'  with  the  views 
of  Carpenter,  expressed  in  his  paper  on  Thaumatocrinus,  p.  929. 
He  approves  ZitteFs  division  into  Glyptocrinidae  and  Rhodocrini- 
dse, but  acknowledges  at  the  same  time  ''that  Glyptocrinus  has  de- 
cided affinities  with  the  Actinocrinidae."  His  views  upon  the  irregu- 
lar plates  of  Reteocrinus  have  alreadj'  been  quoted.  The  rounded 
ridges  along  the  radials,  as  they  appear  in  Reteocrinus  and  Xeno- 
crinus, are  more  than  mere  ornamentations.  They  seem  to  have 
contained  tubular  passages  which,  perhaps,  may  represent  the  axial 
canals,  while  the  more  angular  ridges  of  Glyptocrinus,  Glyptaster 7 


312  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

etc.,  must  be  considered  simply  as  an  ornamentation  of  the  calyx. 
They  represent,  as  stated  by  Carpenter,  "  a  character  of  alto- 
gether  minor  importance  as  compared  with  the  morphological 
difference  between  the  lateral  union  and  the  isolation  of  the 
radiate." 

In  Part  II  we  have  placed  under  Actinocrinidae  all  Crinoids 
without  underbasals,  in  which  the  interradial  plates  are  connect- 
ed by  suture,  and  the  basals  support  the  radials,  and  frequently 
a  large  anal  plate,  but  none  of  the  regular  interradials.  This  ex- 
cluded the  allied  genus  Acrocrinus,  in  which  basals  and  radials 
are  separated  by  a  large  number  of  accessory  pieces.  We  ex- 
cepted also  the  Galyptocrinidae  with  Eucalyptocrinus  and  Calli- 
crinus,  which  differ  essentialby  in  their  vault  structure,  and  the 
Barrandeocrinidse  for  other  reasons  to  be  explained  hereafter. 

The  Actinocrinidse,  as  they  were  defined  b}^  us,  comprise  a  well- 
defined  natural  group  ;  and  we  find  it  difficult  to  subdivide  them, 
unless  it  be  upon  the  presence  or  absence  of  an  anal  plate  in  line 
with  the  first  radials,  i.  e.,  the  bilateral  symmetry  of  the  one  group 
as  contrasted  with  the  more  or  less  pentamerous  symmetry  in  the 
other.  In  making  this  division,  we  place  the  Stelidiocrinites  and 
Melocrinites  with  their  almost  regular  sj-mmetry  in  the  one 
group,  and  the  Agaricocrinites,  Periechocrinites,  Actinocrinites 
and  Batocrinites  in  the  other,  the  former  as  Melocrinidas,  the  lat- 
ter as  Actinocrinidae. 

Etoemer,  Lethaea  Geogn.,  1855  (Ausg.  3),  p.  228,  distinguished 
Melocrinidae  from  Actinocrinidse,  the  latter  on  account  of  their 
larger  azygous  interradius,  and  having  three  in  place  of  four 
basals.  Zittel  partly  recognized  these  groups,  but  added  to  the 
Melocrinidse  Scyphocrinus  Zenker  (not  Hall),  Corymbocrinus  and 
Abacocrinus,  the  hitter  with  an  anal  plate  upon  the  basals,  thus 
proving  that  he  made  the  number  of  basals  the  distinctive  char- 
acter. He  divided  our  Actinocrinidae  into  the  families  Briaro- 
crinidee,  Carpocrinidae,  Dinner oci'inidse,  Actinoc?'inidee  and  Poly- 
peltidae. 

Our  Platynicridae  were  subdivided  into  Plat3rcrinites  and  Hex- 
acrinites,  the  one  with  strictly  pentamerous  symmetry  in  the 
calyx,  the  other  bilateral.  The  two  groups  are  easily  recognized, 
and  will  be  continued.,  but  ranked  as  families. 

The  Platycrinidse  have  been  described  by  us  and  other  writers 
as  having  a   single  interradial   plate  in  contact  with  the  radials. 


1885.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  313 

This  was  based  upon  an  incorrect  understanding  of  the  plates. 
That  it  is  not  the  case  in  Platycrinus  is  readily  seen  by  our  fig- 
ures on  pi.  7.  Even  the  most  simple  form  has  three  interradials, 
horizontally  arranged,  all  supported  by  the  first  radial  plates,  and 
we  are  convinced  that  three,  or  a  greater  number  of  plates,  are 
found  in  all  other  Platycrinidae,  and  all  Hexacrinidae.  Wherever 
we  have  observed  them,  the  middle  plate  is  larger,  and  rests  upon 
the  juncture  of  two  first  radials,  the  outer  ones  upon  their  upper 
face,  meeting  laterally  the  higher  radials.  The  larger  number 
occurs  in  forms  with  flattened  disc  and  wide,  spreading  rays. 

The  presence  of  three  or  more  pieces  in  the  first  row,  which 
evidently  represent  the  first,  second,  and  perhaps  third  ranges 
of  interradials  in  other  groups,  is  morphologically  of  consider- 
able  importance,  as  it  seems  to  have  produced,  to  a  large  extent, 
the  structural  peculiarities  of  the  two  families.  It  is  evident  that, 
owing  to  the  great  width  of  the  interradial  areas,  the  succeeding 
radials  could  make  no  connection  with  the  higher  interradials, 
and  the  rays  thereby  became  isolated,  and  remained  permanently 
in  a  more  or  less  embryonic  state.  Three  interradials  seem  to 
have  been  represented  also  in  Coccocrinus,  as  shown  in  Roemer's 
figure  5C  of  G.  bacca,  although  they  are  not  figured  in  his  Cocco- 
crinus  rosaceus. 

We  also  refer  to  the  Camarata  the  genus  Barrandeocrinus.  It 
was  made  by  Angelin,  Zittel  and  De  Loriol  the  type  of  a  distinct 
family,  and  this  seems  to  be  warranted  b}r  its  exceedingly  strange 
form,  produced  principally  b}r  the  construction  of  the  arms  and 
the  arrangement  of  the  plates  at  the  ventral  side,  although  the 
plates  along  the  dorsal  side  are  arranged  similarly  to  those  of 
the  Actinocrinidae. 

The  Camarata,  according  to  our  classification,  fall  into  ten 
families  : 

A.  Keteocrinid^e.  Base  monocj^clic  or  dieyclie.  Basals  4 
or  5.  Radials  folded  into  strong  tubular  longitudinal  ridges 
along  the  median  line  of  the  plates.  Interradial  and  interaxil- 
lary  areas  deeply  depressed  ;  resting  upon  the  basals.  They  are 
composed  of  a  large  number  of  ill-formed  immovable  pieces, 
which  continue  to  the  ventral  side,  almost  completely  covering 
the  interpalmar  areas,  leaving  but  a  small  oral  plate  at  the  centre. 
Azygous  side  wider;  divided  by  a  vertical  row  of  rather  large 


314  PROCEEDINGS   OP   TIIE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

anal  plates,  which  extend  to  the  anal  aperture.  Arms  single- 
jointed  ;  pinnules  strong.  Anus  subcentral.  Column  circular 
or  angular. 

B.  RuoDocRiNiDiE.  Base  dicyclic.  First  radials  separated 
from  one  another  by  the  first  interraclials,  with  which  they  form 
a  ring  of  ten  plates  around  the  basals.  Interradial  areas  com- 
posed of  well-formed  plates,  definitely  arranged;  azygous  side 
scarcely  distinct.  The  interradials  in  all  earlier  forms  along  the 
ventral  side  are  arranged  like  those  of  the  Reteocrinidre,  and  the 
proximals  are  probably  unrepresented  ;  but  in  the  later  ones  prox- 
imals  are  well  developed.  Anus  subcentral.  Column  circular 
or  obtusely  pentangular. 

G.  G-i-YPTASTELiiDiE.  Base  dicyclic.  First  anal  plate  resting 
on  the  basals,  but  the  first  interradials  not  touching  them.  Suc- 
ceeding interradials  arranged  as  in  the  Rhodocrinidae.  Those 
upon  the  ventral  surface  are  sometimes  composed  of  larger  plates 
than  in  the  preceding  groups.  Anus  subcentral.  Oral  piece  and 
proximals  well  represented.     Column  circular  or  pentangular. 

D.  Melocrinid^e.  B.ise  monocyclic.  Basals  3  to  5.  Neither 
anal  nor  interradial  plates  touching  the  basals;  the  latter  in  con- 
tact with  radials  only.  Interradial  areas  composed  of  numerous 
plates;  those  upon  the  dorsal  side  large,  regularly  arranged, 
those  along  the  ventral  surface  frequently  small  and  irregular. 
Oral  plate  generally  surrounded  by  proximals.  Anus  subcentral. 
Column  circular,  rarely  angular. 

E.  AcTiNocRiNiDiE.  Base  monocyclic.  Basals  3,  rarely  4. 
First  anal  plate  resting  on  basals,  the  first  -interradials  upon  the 
sloping  sides  of  the  first  radials.  The  interradials  together  with 
the  interax diaries,  anal  plates  and  proximals,  form  a  solid  vault 
over  the  disk,  rarely  exposing  any  of  the  covering  plates.  Anus 
subcentral.     Column  circular. 

jF.  Plat Yi  rim im;.  Base  monoc3rclic.  Basals  unequal.  Neither 
anal  nor  interradial  plates  touching  the  basals.  First  radials 
extremely  large,  forming  with  the  basals  almost  the  whole  dorsal 
aspect  of  the  calyx.  Second  radial  small  and  short,  and  likewise 
the  higher  orders  of  radials,  which  in  place  of  being  connected 
by  interradials,  are  formed  into  lateral  branches  or  free  append- 
ages. Interraclials  three  at  least,  generally  more;  all  located 
more  or  less  ventrally.    The  lower  range  contains  no  special  anal 


1885.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHTLADELrilTA.  315 

plate.  It  consists  of  from  three  to  five  pieces,  transversely 
arranged  ;  the  middle  one  larger,  resting  upon  the  sloping  upper 
ends  of  two  first  radials ;  the  outer  ones  abutting  against  the 
large  primar}r  and  smaller  succeeding  radials.  Oral  piece  large, 
generally  surrounded  by  proxiraals,  which  are  very  prominent. 
Covering  plates  frequently  exposed  upon  the  surface.  Anus 
subcentral.     Column  circular  or  oval. 

G.  Hexacrinidje.  Base  monocyclic.  Basals  2  or  3.  First 
anal  plate  resting  on  basals,  and  similar  in  form  to  first  radials  ; 
other  plates  arranged  as  in  Platycrinidae.  Cabvx  with  similar 
armdike  extensions.     Column  circular. 

H.  AcROCRiNiD^E.  Base  monocyclic.  Basals  2,  separated  from 
the  radials  by  a  wide  belt  of  small  plates,  which  are  arranged  in 
rings  around  the  basals,  and  occupy  the  greater  part  of  the  dorsal 
side.  Radials  3X5,  increasing  in  size  upwards,  all  isolated  later- 
ally. Interradials  in  two  rows  ;  two  plates  in  the  lower  series, 
one  only  in  the  upper,  but  the  latter  larger  than  the  two  others. 
Azygous  interradius  comparatively  much  wider,  and  composed 
of  twice  the  number  of  pieces,  in  addition  to  the  anal  plates 
which  form  a  vertical  line.     Column  circular. 

/.  Barrandeocrinid^.  Base  monocyclic.  Basals  3.  First 
anal  plate  resting  on  basals  ;  the  interradials  upon  the  sloping 
upper  sides  of  the  first  radials.  Arms  recumbent ;  united  laterally 
by  their  pinnules,  and  together  with  these  forming  a  solid  integu- 
ment around  the  calyx.     Column  circular,  large. 

J.  EucALYPTOCRiNiD-a;.  Base  monocyclic.  The  dorsal  side 
uniformly  composed  of  4  basals,  3X5  primary  radials,  2X10  sec- 
ondary radials,  3X5  interradials,  and  1X5  inteiaxillaries,  there 
being  no  anal  plates.  The  ventral  side  consists  of  5  large  inter- 
radials, 5  similar  interaxillaries,  and  1 0  small  trigonal  interbrachial 
pieces,  which  form  a  ring  around  the  dorsal  cup,  and  are  suc- 
ceeded by  the  summit  plates.  The  summit  plates  iorm  a  neck-like 
prolongation.  They  consist  of  4  large  proximals  which  con- 
stitute a  ring  by  themselves,  of  two  small  proximals,  and  the 
oral  plate.  The  latter  is  bisected  and  pushed  to  opposite  sides 
by  the  anal  opening,  which  is  strictly  central.  The  plates  of  the 
ventral  side  are  formed  into  10  compartments  for  the  reception 
of  ten  pairs  of  arms.     Column  circular. 


316  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Family  I.— RETEOCRINIDJE  W.  &  Sp. 
RETEOCRINUS  Bill 

1881.  W.  &  Sp.,  Rev.  II.,  p.  191. 

L883.   W.  &  Sp..  Amer.  Journ.  Sci.,  vol.  xxv    April),  p.  356-268. 
L884.   I'.  Herb.  Carpenter,  Phil.  Trans.  Royal  Boa,  Pt.  Ill,  lsS3,  pp.  919- 
933. 
Sy/i.  Glyptocrinua  (in  part),  Miller;  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist. , 

vol.  v,  April,  1882. 
Syn.  Gaurocrinus  Miller  (in  part).     Ibid.  vol.  vi,  December,  1883. 

Reteocrinus  is  readily  distinguished  from  the  other  Reteocrin- 
idae  by  its  well  developed  underbasals,  which  extend  beyond  the 
limits  of  the  column.  From  our  former  list  we  withdraw  Reteo- 
crinus Baeri,  which  is  a  Xenocrinus,  and  Reteocrinus  Richard- 
soni  Wetherby,  which  we  make  the  t3Tpe  of  our  new  genus  Can- 
istrocrin  us. 

One  more  species  must  be  added  : 

*188:S.  Reteocrinus  magnificus  (S.  A.  Miller),  Gaurocrinus  magnificus,  Journ. 
Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  vi.  p.  230,  PI.  9,  fig.  2. — Hudson  River  gr. — 
Lebanon,  0. 

CANISTROCRINUS,  nov.  gen. 
{jcaviargov,  a  willow  basket ;  xpivov,  a  lily.) 

Syn.    Glyptocrinus  (in  part)  S.  A.  Miller,  1883,  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat. 

Hist.,  vol.  vi.,  p.  220. 
Syn.    Udun'riiiUK    in  part;  \Y.  A:  Sp.,  Amur.  Journ.  Sci.,  vol.  xxv,  p.  266. 

Generic  Diagnosis.. —  In  general  aspect  closely  resembling 
Reteocrinus.  The  radial  ridges  strong,  tube-like;  the  interradial 
spaces  deeply  depressed.     Symmetry  decidedly  bilateral. 

Underbasals  perhaps  indistinctly  developed,  more  probably 
altogether  absent.  Basals  five,  truncated  above  for  the  reception 
of  the  lower  series  of  interradials.  Primary  radials  3X5,  of 
nearly  equal  size;  the  lirst  and  third  similar  in  form.  The  ridges 
of  the  former  branching  downward  toward  the  basals ;  those  of 
the  latter  upward  toward  the  secondary  radials,  which  they 
follow  until  these  turn  into  free  ann-plates.  Arms  branching  or 
simple;  composed  of  single  joints,  which  give  off  rather  strong 
pinnules. 

Interradial  spaces  composed  of  numerous  small  pieces  without 
definite  arrangement.     The  plates  rest  upon  the  basals,  separat- 


1885.]  NATURAL   SdENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  31? 

ing  all  five  rays  from  the  base  up.  With  the  increase  of  inter- 
radials  and  Lnteraxillaries  by  age,  which  seems  to  have  been  going 
on  continually  in  the  specimen,  more  arm-plates,  i.  e.  radials, 
were  gradually  incorporated  into  the  calyx,  involving  the  prox- 
imal pinnules,  the  plates  of  which  arc  easily  recognized  from 
surrounding  interradial  and  interaxillary  pieces  by  being  more 
prominent.  Azygous  interradius  wider  than  the  four  others.  It 
has  an  elevated  ridge,  composed  of  rather  large  anal  pieces,  which 
are  longitudinally  arranged  and  have  somewhat  the  appearance 
of  radials.  The  interaxillary  areas  are  depressed,  even  deeper 
than  the  interradial  ones,  and  they  consist  of  similar  plates.  The 
ventral  side  has  not  been  observed, but  was  evidently  constructed 
as  in  Xenocrinus  and  Meteocrinus. 
We  place  here  the  following  species  : 

*1882.  Canistrocrinus  Pattersoni  (S.  A.  Miller).  Glyptocrinus  Pattersoni,  Journ. 

Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Bist.,  vol.  v    July  .  PI.  ."..  figs.  2,  2  a.      Ibid.,  vol.  vi,  Decbr. 

]  S83,  p.  226. — Reteocrinus  Pattersoni,  Waebs.  and  Sp.,  ISS:;,  Arner.  Journ. 

Sci.,  vol.  xxv,  April.  1883,  p.  266.     Ctica  Slate,  Cincinnati,  0. 
*1880.  Canistrocrinus  Richardsoni  [Wetherby).    Type  of  the  genus. —  Glyptocrinus 

Richardsoni,  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc,  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  ii,  PI.  16,  figs.  I.  la.     W. 

&  Sp.,  ism.— Reteocrinus  Richardsoni,  Rev.  ii, p.  193  ;  also  Amer.  Journ. 

Sci.  vol.  xxv.  p.  266.— Miller,  Glyptocr.  Richardsoni,  1883,  Journ.  Cincin. 

Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  \i.  p.  226.     Hudson  River  gr.,  Clinton  Co.,  0. 

XENOCRINUS  S.  A.  Miller. 

(PI.  6,  fig.  2.) 

1881.  S.  A.  Miller.     Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  iv. 

1881.  W.  and  Sp.     Revision  ii,  p.  184. 

1883.  W.  and  Sp.     Amer.  Journ.  Sci.,  vol.  xxv,  p.  2G6. 

Xenocrinus  is  closely  allied  to  Canistrocrinus,  from  which  it  dif- 
fers in  having  four  in  place  of  five  basals,  and  a  quadrangular 
column. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Base  monocyclic.  Basals  four,  forming 
combined  a  shallow  decagonal  cup,  which  upon  five  of  its  sides 
supports  the  five  radials.  and  alternately  upon  each  of  the  five 
other  sides  a  series  of  small  interradial  pieces.  This  arrange- 
ment gives  to  the  basals,  owing  to  their  abnormal  number,  a  very 
irregular  form,  no  two  of  them  being  alike.  The  axial  canal  in 
this  genus,  notwithstanding  it  has  hut  four  basals  and  a  quad- 
ranglar  stem,  is  pentangular,  its  angles  directed  interradially.  In 
all  other  respects,  including  the  ventral  covering,  Xenocrinus 


318  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

agrees  with  Reteocrinus  and  Canistrocrinus,  to  which  we  refer 
for  further  particulars.  We  place  in  this  genus  also  "  Glyptocri- 
nus"  Baeri  Meek,  which  we  have  heretofore  referred  to  Reteocri- 
nus, not  knowing  the  construction  of  its  basal  portions.  It  has 
not  only  four  basals,  but  fundamentally  a  quadrangular  column, 
the  more  or  less  cylindrical  outline  being  caused  by  knife-like  lat- 
eral extensions  along  the  joints  ;  its  cross-section  shows  the  nu- 
cleus to  be  strictly  quadrangular. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Hudson  River  group  of  the  Ohio 
valley. 

*1S72.  Xenocrinus  Baeri  (Meek).  Glyptocrinus  Baeri,  Amer.  Journ.  Sci.  iii  (Ser.  3), 
p.  260;  also  IS;:;.  Geo!.  Rep.  Ohio,  Paleont.  I,  p.  37,  PI.  2,  fig.  1  a,  b.— S. 
A.  Miller,  1880,  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  iii,  PI.  7.  fig.  4.— Reteo- 
crinus Baeri  W.  &  Sp.,  1881,  Revision  ii,  p.  193;  also  Arner.  Journ.  Sci.,  vol. 
x.w,  p.  I't'iO.— Glyptocr.  Baeri  S.  A.  Miller,  1883,  Journ.  Ciueiu.  Soc.  Nat. 
llist.,  vol.  vi,  p.  226.— Hudson  River  gr.,  Ohio  valley. 

1881.  Xenocrinus  penicillus  S.  A.  Miller.  Type  of  the  genus.  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc. 
Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  iv  (April),  PI.  I,  fig.  3,  and  ibid.  July),  PI.  4,  fig.  6.— Hudson 
River  gr.  Wayuesville,  0. 

Family  IT.—  RHODOCRINIDJE  Roemer. 

(Emend.,  Zittel ;  emend.,  W.  and  Sp.) 

ARCHJEOCRINUS  W.  and  Sp. 

1881.  W.  and  Sp.     Revision,  ii,  p.  189. 

1883.  S.  A.  Miller.     Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  vi,  p.  217. 

Syn.  Lyriocrinus  (S.  A.  Miller  not  Hall),  1882,  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc. 
Nat.  Hist,  vol.  v. 

Mr.  Walter  R.  Billings  informs  us  that  all  the  species  which 
we  referred  to  Archseocrinus,  possess  a  special  anal  piece  placed 
between  the  interradials  of  the  second  series.  In  Part  II,  p.  190, 
we  erroneously  stated  that  the  anal  interradius  could  not  be  dis- 
tinguished from  the  four  others,  and  we  are  obliged  to  Mr.  Bil- 
lings for  making  this  correction.  We  find  it  confirmed  by  some 
interesting  specimens  which  we  recentlj-  collected  from  the  Tren- 
ton limestone  near  Knoxville,  Tenn.  Most  of  these  specimens 
represent  Miller's  " Lyriocrinus "  sculptus,  which  was  supposed 
to  come  from  the  Niagara  group,  but  which  evidently  came  from 
a  lower  horizon.  Our  specimens  were  found  associated  with  By- 
bocrinus  and  other  characteristic  Lower  Silurian  fossils.  Lyrio- 
crinus sculptus  Miller,  or,  as  we  call  it,  Archeeocrinus  sculptus,  is 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  319 

smaller  than  any  of  the  Canadian  species.  It  has  but  one  sec- 
ondary radial,  and  fewer  and  larger  interradials  both  dorsally 
and  ventrally,  but  otherwise  agrees  well  with  those  types.  It 
probably  represents  paleontologically  a  younger  stage  of  that 
genus,  for  the  arms  are  free  from  the  first  secondary  radial.  In 
Lyriocrinus  the  arms  proceed  upward  in  a  straight  line  with  the 
walls  of  the  calyx,  the  arm  openings  are  located  ventrally  and 
are  arranged  at  nearly  equal  distances  from  each  other;  while 
in  Archeeocrinus  sculptus  the  arms  extend  out  laterally  in  the 
form  of  free  appendages.  In  the  former  the  interradials  of  the 
ventral  side  rest  against  the  inner  edges  of  the  dorsal  cup,  the 
so-called  "vault "  being  perfectly  flat;  in  the  latter  the.vault  is 
elevated  and  the  interradials  along  the  ventral  side  are  so  closely 
intermingled  with  the  dorsal  ones,  that  no  dividing  line  can  be 
distinguished. 

In  Archeeocrinus  dexideratus,  which  is  a  good  t}-pical  form  of 
the  genus,  there  are  twenty  or  more  interradials  beneath  the  hori- 
zon of  the  arms,  and  these  are  succeeded  by  a  much  larger  num- 
ber of  minute  pieces  at  the  ventral  side,  all  of  which,  from  the 
basals  up,  decrease  in  size  to  the  oral  pole.  There  are  no  large 
plates  to  represent  the  proximal  dome  plates,  and  hence  no  orals 
if  these  were  represented  by  the  proximals  as  contended  by  Car- 
penter. The  interradial  and  interaxillary  spaces  in  the  dome  are 
depressed,  thereby  producing  along  the  surface  somewhat  irregu- 
lar ridges,  which  follow  the  direction  of  the  subtegminal  ambu- 
lacral  tubes. 

The  depressed  globular  form  and  the  wide  interradial  spaces 
of  the  calyx  are  characteristic  features  of  A rch aeocrinus,  which 
distinguish  it  readily  from  all  other  Silurian  Rhodocrinidae. 

Some  of  our  specimens  of  Archeeocrinus  sculptus  have  beneath 
the  first  interradial  plate,  resting  upon  the  basals,  two  small 
additional  plates.  As  these  are  present  only  in  the  larger  speci- 
mens, and  totally  absent  in  the  smaller  ones,  in  some  of  them 
developed  in  a  most  rudimentary  way,  sometimes  only  in  one  or 
two  of  their  rays,  it  is  evident  that  the}'  are  the  result  of  extrav- 
agant growth,  and  not  true  interradial  plates.  They  seem  to  us 
equivalents  of  the  small  accessory  pieces  between  basals  and 
radials  in  Acrocrinus,  in  which  they  attain  a  much  more  profuse 
development,  occupying  the  greater  part  of  the  calyx. 

We  note  here  the  following  additional  species  : 


320  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

1884.  Archaeocrinus  desideratus  Walter  B.  Billings  MS.     (The  description  will  ap- 
pear  in  the  Trausactiona  of  the  Field  Naturalist's  Cluh  of  Ottawa.) 

Archseocr.  globularis  Nichols,  and  Ether.,  Silur.  Fossils  Girran  Distr.,  p. 
329,  PI.  22,  figs.  9  11.     Craighead  limestone. 

I     :'.  Archaeocrinus  sculptus  (S.  A.  Miller),  Lyriocrinus  sculptus,  Cincin.  Journ. 
Nat,   Bist.,  toI.  r,  p.  217,  PL  3,  figs.  6  a,  b. — Trenton  limest.     Kuoxville, 
Tenn. 
Si/ii.  Lyriocrinus  sculptilis  S.  A.  Miller.     Name  preoccupied. 

RHAPHANOCKINUS  nov.  gen. 

"■"i'»„  ;i  radish;  xplvov,  a  lily.) 

Syii.  Glyptocriinix  Waleott  (in  part),  not  Hall,  1883,  New  Spec,  of 
Foss.  from  Trenton  gr.  of  N.  York,  p.  0.  (Abstract  from  the  35th 
Rep.  N.  York  State  Museum  Nat  Hist.,  N.  York.) 

The  species  upon  which  the  genus  Iiliaphanocrinus  is  pro- 
posed, was  referred  by  Waleott,  with  some  doubt,  to  Glyptocri- 
nus.  Like  that  genus,  it  has  regular^7  arranged  interradial  plates, 
but  these  rest  upon  the  truncate  upper  side  of  the  basals,  not 
upon  the  sloping  sides  of  the  first  radials  as  in  that  genus  ; 
besides  it  possesses  underbasals.  The  latter  plates  were  not 
observed  by  Waleott;  they  ai'e  evidently  small,  and  covered  by 
the  large  column  or  hidden  within  the  basal  concavity.  That 
underbasals  were  present,  is  clearly  seen  by  the  angular  form  of 
the  first  radials,  and  b}r  the  form,  size  and  position  of  the  basals. 

Rhaphanocrinus  is  closely  allied  to  Archaeocrinus,  from  which 
it  differs  in  having  the  arms  constructed  of  a  single  series  of 
quadrangular  plates,  and  in  having  simple,  in  place  of  branching, 
arms.  It  also  resembles  Dimerocrinus  in  its  general  aspect,  but 
is  readily  distinguished  by  the  position  of  the  interradial  plates, 
and  by  having  the  arms  constructed  of  a  single  series  of  plates. 
It  differs  from  Anthemocrinus,  with  which  it  has  probably  the 
closest  affinities,  in  the  entirely  distinct  arm  structure. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Calyx  short,  truncate  below  ;  interradial 
spaces  slightly  depressed. 

Underbasals  small,  not  visible  in  a  lateral  view,  and  more  or 
less  hidden  by  the  column.  Basals  large,  hexagonal,  the  upper 
side  truncate  for  the  reception  of  the  first  inlerradials. 

Primary  radials  :i  5,  Large  ;  the  first  and  third  marly  alike  in 
form.  Secondarj  radials  two  or  more,  quadrangular ;  gradually 
decreasing  in  height  and  passing  into  arm  plates. 

Interradials  numerous;  those  of  the  ventral  side  smaller.  Inter- 
axillary  plates   few.     Summit  plates,  and  form  of  anus  unknown. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  321 

Arms  stout,  long,  simple  ;  composed  of  a  single  series  of  quad- 
rangular plates,  which  give  off  alternately  strong  pinnules.  Col- 
umn large  ;  cylindrical. 

The  type  of  the  genus,  and  only  known  species  is : 

*1883.  Ehaphanocrinus  subnodosus  (Walcott),  Glyptocrinus  (?)  subnodosus,  35th 
Rep.  N.  York  State  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  PI.  17,  fig.  3. — Trenton  limest.  Tren- 
ton Pall,  N.  Y. 

LYRIOCRINUS  Hall. 

(W.  and  Sp.,  Revision  II,  p.  203.) 

Not  Lyrioerinus  S.  A.  Miller,  1882,  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist., 
vol.  v,  p.  217. 

(?)  SAGENOCRINUS  Angelin,  Rev.  II,  p.  201. 
RHIPIDOCRINUS  Beyrich,  Rev.  II,  p.  205. 

THYLACOCRINUS  Oehlert,  Rev.  II,  p.  207. 

1879.  Thylacocr.  Vanniosti  Oehlert,  Extr.  du  Bull.  Soc.  Geol.  de  France 
(Ser.  3),  vii,  PI.  i,  fig.  1 ;  also  1882,  ibid.  vol.  x,  p.  359,  fig.  1.— De- 
vonian.    St.  Germain,  France. 

ANTHEMOCRINUS  W.  and  Sp.  Rev.  ii,  p.  208. 

RHODOCRINUS  Miller,  Rev.  ii,  p.  209. 

1882.  Rhodocr.  coxanus  Worthen,  Bull,  i,  Illinois  St.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  p. 
80  ;  also  Geol.  Rep.  Illinois,  vii,  p.  305. — Keokuk  limest.  Keokuk, 
Iowa. 

OLLACRINTJS  Cumberland,  Rev.  ii,  p.  213. 

Family  III.— GLYPTASTERID^  W.  and  Sp. 

PTYCHOCRINUS  nov.  gen. 
(jrruj  a  fold;  Kpivov  a  lily). 

Mr.  S.  A.  Miller  has  arrayed  a  number  of  species  under  a  pro- 
posed genus  Gaurocrinus,  which,  like  his  Glyptocrinus,  embraces 
a  heterogeneous  assemblage  of  forms.  It  contains  species  of  JReteo- 
crinus,  Glyptocrinus,  and  a  new  form  with  good  generic  characters, 
in  our  opinion,  for  which  we  should  be  very  glad  to  retain  Miller's 
name,  if  he  had  not  expressly  taken  as  its  type  Hall's  Glyptocri- 
nus O'Nealli,  which  is  a  typical  Reteocrinus.  We  are,  therefore, 
obliged  to  adopt  a  new  name,  and  propose  Ptychocrinus,  for  the 
reception  of  his  Gaurocrinus  splendens,  and  G.  angularis,  together 

22 


322  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

with  Hall's  Glyptocrinus  parvus,  which,  evidently,  according  to 
Hall's  figure  (but  not  Meek's),  has  the  same  characters. 

We  cannot  agree  with  Miller  that  Wetherby's  Reteocrinus 
gracilis,  in  which  ill-formed  interradials  separate  the  radials  down 
to  the  base,  and  in  which  the  basals  are  squarely  truncated  above 
and  form  the  base  of  the  interradial  spaces,  is  a  synonym  of 
Glyptoa-inus  angularis,  in  which  the  "  interradial  spaces  have  a 
hexagonal  plate  resting  between  the  upper  sloping  side  of  the 
first  radials." 

The  three  species  differ  from  all  established  genera  of  this 
family  in  having  their  arms  constructed  of  single  joints.  It 
might,  perhaps,  be  doubted  whether  this  is  a  good  generic 
character,  as  all  Crinoids  with  double-jointed  arms  are  single- 
jointed  in  their  younger  stages ;  but  finding  three  species  with 
the  same  kind  of  arms,  and  these  comprising  the  only  known 
Lower  Silurian  species  of  this  family,  we  are  evidently  justified 
in  making  it  a  generic  distinction. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — In  general  form  closely  resembling  Ghjp- 
tocrinus.  Radials  with  a  fold-like,  strong,  tubular  ridge  along 
their  median  line ;  interradial  spaces  depressed. 

Underbasals  five,  well  shown  in  a  side  view.  Basals  five,  large  ; 
all  of  them  hexagonal.  Primary  radials  3X5;  the  first  ones 
heptagonal,  but  the  upper  sloping  sides  facing  the  azygous  side 
longer,  forming  a  deep  notch  for  the  reception  of  a  very  large 
anal  plate.  Secondary  radials  three  or  more,  which  have  the 
appearance  of  arm-plates,  and  gradually  pass  into  free  joints. 
They  have  strong  arm-like  pinnules,  given  off  from  alternate 
sides. 

Interradials  consisting  of  one  plate  in  the  first  row,  two  in  the 
second,  and  three  in  the  third  row.  The  azygous  side  wider ;  the 
first  plate  extending  far  down  between  the  first  radials,  sometimes 
touching  the  basals,  and  there  are  three  in  place  of  two  plates  in 
the  second  series.  Structure  of  the  ventral  side  unknown. 
Column  small ;  cylindrical. 

*1879.  Ptychocrinus   angularis  (Miller  and  Dyer),  Glyptoor.  angularis,  Journ. 

Cinoin.  Soc.  Nat  Hist.,  p.  5,  PI.  1,  fig.  10. — 1883,  Gaurocr.  angularis  S.  A. 

Miller,  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.   Hist.,  vol.  vi,  p.  229. — Hudson  River  gr. 

Cincinnati,  Ohio. 
*1872.  Pt.  parvus  (Hall),  Glyptocr.  parvus,  Desc.  New  Crin.,  etc.,  PI.  1,  fig.  17 

I  without  description),  24th  Rep.  N.  Y.  State  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  207,  PI.  v, 

fig.  17;   (?)  Meek,   1873,  Geol.  Rep.  Ohio,  Pal.  i,  p.  36,  PI.  2,  figs.  4ab;  (?) 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  323 

S.  A.  Miller,  1883,  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  vi,  p.  224.— Hudson 
gr.  Cincinnati,  Ohio. 
Meek's  description  of  this  species,  upon  which  the  Cincinnati  paleontologists 
have  tried  to  identify  it,  is  based  upon  specimens  which  did  not  show  its 
characters,  and  therefore  cannot  be  relied  upon.  Hall's  figure  exhibit?  :i 
well-marked  form,  it  shows  plainly  that  it  must  have  underbasals,  and  that 
a  small  anal  plate  extends  down  to  the  basals. 
*1883.  Pt.  splendens  (S.  A.  Miller),  Gaurocr.  splendens,  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat. 
Hist.,  vol.  vi,  p.  230. — Trenton  gr.     Cape  Girardeau,  Mo. 

GLYPTASTER  Hall,  Rev.  ii,  p.  193. 

Additional  species  : — 

1881.  01.  Ecjani  S.  A.  Miller.     Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  iv  (Oc- 

tober), PI.  6,  figs.  4  a  b. — Niagara  gr.     Chicago,  111. 

1882.  01.  occidentalis  var.  crebescens  Hall.     Eleventh  Geol.  Pep.  Indiana, 

by  Collett,  p.  263.— Niagara  gr.     Waldron,  Ind. 

EUCRINUS  Angelin,  Rev.  ii,  p.  196. 
DIMEROCRINUS  Phillips,  Rev.  ii,  p.  197. 

Additional  species  : — 

*1882.  D.  waldronensis  (Miller  and  Dyer),  Cyathocrinus  waldronensis,  Journ. 
Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  July  (Abstr.,  p.  6),  PI.  4,  fig.  9.— Niagara  gr.  (We 
have  seen  in  the  collection  of  Mr.  Wm.  Gurley,  of  Danville,  a  specimen 
which  shows  plainly  the  presence  of  dorsal  interradials ;  and  this  feature, 
together  with  the  double-jointed  arm  structure,  proves,  beyond  doubt,  that 
it  is  not  a  Cyathocrinoid). 

LAMPTEROCRINUS  Roemer,  Rev.  ii,  p.  199. 

Additional  species  : — 

1879.  (?)  L.  parvus  Hall,  Trans.  Alb.  Inst.,  vol.  x  (Abstr.,  p.  9).— Niagara  gr.  Wal- 
dron, Ind.  (This  may  be  a  young  specimen  of  L.  tennesseensis.  It  appar- 
ently differs  only  in  the  much  smaller  size,  and  in  having  but  four  anal 
plates). 

Family  IV.— MELOCRINID.2E  Roemer. 
(Emend.  W.  and  Sp.). 

a.  Stelidiocrinites. 

(?)  BRIAROCRINTJS  Angl.,  Rev.  ii,  p.  96. 

This  is  one  of  the  genera  in  which  we  cannot  trace  satisfactorily 
the  family  relations,  being  in  some  of  the  characters  allied  to  the 
Ichthyocrinidae. 


324  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

STELIDIOCRINUS  Angl.,  Rev.  ii,  p.  98. 

Additional  species : — 

•1883.  (?)  Stelidiocrinus  argutus  (Walcott),  Glyptocrinus  argutus,  35th  Rep.  N. 
York  State  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.  (Adv.  Sheet,  p.  1),  PI.  17,  fig.  9.— Trenton 
limest.  Trenton  Falls,  N.  Y.  This  is  certainly  not  a  Glyptocrinus.  To 
judge  from  the  figure,  it  is  closely  allied  to  Stelidiocrinus,  but  may  be  the 
type  of  a  new  genus. 

PATELLIOCRINUS  Angl.,  Rev.  ii,  p.  100. 

MACROSTYLOCRINUS  Hall,  Rev.  ii,  p.  102. 

Additional  species : — 

1882.  Macrostylocr.  fusibrachiatus  Ringeberg,  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol. 

v,  ]>.  I  !'.•,  PI.  5,  fig.  4. — Niagara  gr.     Lockport,  N.  Y. 
1880.  M.  striatus,  var.  granulosus  Hall,  28th  Rep.  N.  Y.  State  Cab.,  p.  129;  also 
11th  Geol.  Rep.  Ind.,  p.  258. — Niagara  gr.     AValdron,  Ind. 

CENTROCRINTJS  W.  and  Sp.,  Rev.  ii,  p.  104. 
b.  Melocrinites. 

GLYPTOCRINUS  Hall,  Rev.  ii,  p.  185. 

1883.  S.  A.  Miller.     Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  vi  (December). 
1883.  W.  and  Sp.     Amer.  Journ.  Sci.  (April),  p.  255. 

1883.  S.  A.  Miller.     Ibid.  (August),  p.  105. 

Not  Etheridge  and  Nicholson,  1880,  Silur.  Foss.  of  Girvan  Distr., 

p.  328. 
Syn.  Pycnocrimis  S.  A.  Miller.  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  iv. 

Since  the  absence  of  underbasals  is  clearly  proved,  Glyptocrinus 
differs  from  Mariacrinus  only  in  the  number-of  basals,  which  is 
five  in  place  of  four.  Miller  has  founded  the  genus  Pycnocrinus 
upon  a  species  which  he  had  previously  referred  to  Glyptocrinus. 
Through  the  liberality  of  Mr.  Miller,  for  which  we  are  under 
lasting  obligations  to  him,  we  have  been  given  the  freest  access 
to  his  beautiful  type  specimens,  with  liberty  to  use  them  for  our 
descriptions.  We  are  reluctantly  compelled  to  say  that  in  our 
opinion  Pycnocrinus  is  simply  a  young  Glyptocrinus.  The  genus 
was  founded  principally  upon  the  absence  of  "  secondary  radials," 
and  the  arms  were  said  "  to  arise  free  from  the  primary  radials." 
This  statement  does  not  agree  with  our  observations,  as  we  find 
in  two  of  the  specimens  a  minute  interaxillary  piece,  and  at  least 
one  secondary  radial.  In  the  two  others,  which  are  even  more 
immature,  the  third  primary  radials,  in  part,  take  the  functions  of 


1885.1  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  325 

the  secondary  radials,  as  seen  by  the  surface  ridges,  which  bifur- 
cate along  the  middle  portions  of  the  plates.  The  plates  succeed- 
ing them  are  still  in  a  free  state,  and  appear  as  arm-plates,  but 
actually  form  extensions  of  the  calyx,  being  not  as  yet  connected 
by  interradials  and  interaxillaries,  as  in  the  more  adult  specimens. 
A  diversity  in  the  number  of  secondary  radials  cannot  be  con- 
sidered of  generic  value,  at  least  not  in  a  form  like  Glyptocrinus, 
in  which,  as  Miller  himself  has  shown  us  (Journ.  Cincin.  Soc,  vol. 
vi,  PI.  11,  fig.  1),  the  rays  remain  in  an  immature  condition,  more 
or  less,  even  in  the  adult.  The  specimens  referred  to  Pycnocrinus 
are  so  embryonic  in  their  condition,  that  it  would  be  speculation 
for  us  to  assert  to  what  species  they  belong,  and  we  have  con- 
cluded to  leave  them  as  doubtful  species  under  Glyptocrinus. 

The  species  now  referred  by  us  to  Glyptocrinus  have  round 
columns,  with  the  exception  of  Glyptocrinus  Fomshelli,  which 
Miller  thinks  may  prove  to  be  a  distinct  generic  form  ;  while  those 
referred  to  JReteocrinus,  with  probably  one  exception,  have  pen- 
tagonal columns. 

The  species  which  were  referred  in  Europe  to  Glyptocrinus, 
probably  with  the  exception  of  Glyptocrinus  basalis  (?),  belong 
to  different  genera.  That  species  was  figured  without  discrip- 
tion  in  Murchison's  Siluria,  p.  206,  from  a  specimen  with  arms, 
and  came  from  the  Caradoc  limestone.  In  this  specimen,  the 
plates  of  the  calyx  cannot  be  recognized,  but  the  arms  are  those 
of  Glyptocrinus.  In  the  type  specimen  of  McCoy,  in  which  only 
the  calyx  is  preserved,  the  interradials  apparently  touch  the 
basals,  which,  if  true,  would  exclude  it  from  Glyptocrinus. 

The  specimens  described  by  Nicholson  and  Etheridge,  jun., 
under  the  name  of  Glyptocr.  globularis,  from  the  Craighead  lime- 
stone and  from  Traive  Glen.  (Monogr.  Silur.  Foss.  Girvan  Distr. 
in  Ayshire,  1880,  pp.  328-30,  PI.  22,  figs  9-11),  probably  belong 
to  Archseocrinus.  They  evidently  had  underbasals,  for  the  inter- 
radials rest  upon  the  basals,  and  alternate  with  the  first  radial 
plates.  Neither  can  the  arms,  fig.  12,  on  the  same  plate,  which 
are  composed  of  a  double  series  of  joints,  be  referred  to  Glyp- 
tocrinus. 

We  add  the  following  species  to  our  former  list : 

(?)  1854.  Glyptocrinus  basalis  McCoy,  Synops.  Palaeoz.  Foss.,  p.  57,  plate  I  D,  fig. 
4,  1859,  Murchison's  Silur.,  p.  206. — Caradoc  limest.  Montgomeryshire, 
Great  Britain. 


326'  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

1882.  G.  miamiensis  S.  A.  Miller,  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  5,  PI.  1,  fig.  1. 
Ibid.,  1883,  vol.  vi,  p.  224. — Hudson  River  gr.     Waynesville,  0. 

1882.  G.  sculptus  S.  A.  Miller,  Journ.,  Cincin.  Soc,  vol.  v,  p.  13,  PI.  1,  fig.  2;   also 

Ibid.,  1883,  vol.  vi,  p.  224,  PI.  1,  fig.  2.— Hudson  River  gr.     Waynes- 
ville, 0. 

MARIACRINUS  Hall,  Rev.  ii,  p.  114. 

Syn.   Compsocrinus  S.  A.  Miller,  1883,  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist., 
vol.  vi,  p.  234. 

Compsocrinus  was  described  by  Miller  from  a  species  which 
was  said  to  possess  a  quadripartite  base,  supporting  five  radials 
and  an  anal  plate ;  column  quadrangular.  Good  specimens  of 
"  Compsocrinus11  Harrisi,  Miller's  type,  from  the  collection  of 
Mr.  Harris,  who  has  the  type  specimens,  show  the  number  of 
basals  to  be  four,  as  described  by  Miller;  but  the  interradials  at 
all  sides  rest  upon  the  first  radials,  the  posterior  one  not  abutting 
against  the  basals  as  was  asserted,  and  this  makes  Compsocrinus 
identical  in  structure  with  Mariacrinus  as  emended  by  us.  If 
Miller's  diagnosis  had  been  correct,  Compsocrinus  would  have 
been  undoubtedly  a  good  genus.  Whether  the  column  in  other 
species  of  Mariacrinus  is  quadrangular,  is  not  known. 

*1881.  Mariacrinus  Harrisi  (S.  A.  Miller),  Glyptocrinus  Harrisi,  Journ.  Cincin. 
Soc,  vol.  iv,  PI.  1,  fig.  4. — Compsocrinus  Harrisi  Miller,  Ibid.,  vol.  vi,  p. 
234,  PI.  11,  fig.  4.— Hudson  River  gr.     Waynesville,  0. 

TECHNOCRINUS  Hall,  Rev.  ii,  v.  I  Hi. 

MELOCRINUS  Gcddf.,  Rev.  ii.  p.  118. 

1883.  M.  Benedeni  (Dewalque    MS.)   Fraipont,    Recb.   sur  les  Crin.  du 

Famenien  de  Belgique,  Ann.  de  la  Soc.  geol.  de  Belg.,  Tome  x,  p. 
60,  PI.  4,  fig.  9. — Devon,  superieur.     Senzeille,  Belgium. 
1883.  M.   Chapuisi   (Dewalque    MS.)   Fraipont,   Ibid.,  p.  65,  PI.  5,  figs. 
5-7. — Devon,  superieur.     Senzeille,  Belgium. 

1882.  M.  CZrtr&et'Williams,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  31.— Genessee 

slate.     Ontario  Co.,  N.  Y. 
M.  gerolsteinensis  Steininger,  1853,  Geogn.  Beschreib.  d.  Eifel,  p.  35, 
is  not  sufficiently  defined  for  identification. 

1883.  M.  (jlobosus  (Dewalque  MS.)  Fraipont,  Recli.  sur  les  Crin.  du  Fa- 

menien de  Belg.  Ann.  Soc.  geol.  de  Belg.,  Tome  x,  p.  61,  PI.  5, 
figs.  1-i. — Devon,  superieur.     Senzeille,  Belgium. 

1884.  M.  inornatus  (Dewalque  MS.)  Fraipont,  Ibid.,  Tome  xi,  p.  105,  PI. 

1,.  fig.  1. — Devon,  superieur.     Frasne,  Belgium. 
1883.  M.  Konincki  (Dewalque  MS.)  Fraipont,  Ibid.,  p.  58,  PI.  4,  figs.  6-8. 
Devon,  superieur.     Senzeille,  Belgium. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  327 

1883.  M.  mespiliformes  (Dewalque  MS.)  Fraipont,  Ibid.  p.  63,  PI.  5,  figs. 
8-10. — Devon,  superieur.     Senzeille,  Belgium. 

1882.  M.  occidentalis  Oehlert,  Bull.  Soc.  geol.  de  France  (ser.  3),  Tome  x, 

p.  357,  PI.  8,  fig  4.— Devon,  inferieur.    Near  Sabre  and  La  Fleche, 
France. 

1883.  M.  OeldertiW.  and  Sp.     Melocrinus  Verneuili  Oeblert  (notW.  and 

Sp.,  1881).     Described  Soc.  geol.  de  France  (Ser.  3),  Tome  x,  p. 
358,  PI.  8,  fig.  5. — Devon,  inferieur. — Sabre,  France. 

1884.  M.  obscurus  (Dewalque  MS.)  Fraipont,  Ibid.,  vol.  xi,  p.  107,  PI.  1, 

fig.  2. — Devon,  superieur.     Cbaud  fontaine,  Belg. 

SCYPHOCRINUS  Zenker,  Rev.  ii,  p.  123. 
(?)  HADROCRINUS  Lyon,  Rev.  ii,  p.  222. 

DOLATOCRINUS  Lyon,  Rev.  ii,  p.  124. 

1884.  D.  triadactylus  Barris,  Proceed.  Davenport.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  vol.  iv, 

PI.  2,  figs  5-7. — Hamilton  gr.     Alpena,  Mich. 
1871.  D.  ornatus  Meek,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  57. — Corniferous. 

Columbus,  O. 

STEREOCRINUS  Barris,  Rev.  ii,  p.  126. 

Family  V.— ACTINOCRINID-3S  Roemer. 
a.  Agaricocrikites. 

CARPOCRINUS  Miiller,  Rev,  ii,  p.  105. 

Note. — In  Rev.  ii,  p.  107,  in  place  of  Carpocrinus  elongatulus  read  G. 
elegantulus. 

(?)  LEPTOCRINUS  Angl.,  Icon.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  3. 

This  genus  was  placed  by  Angelin  under  Platycrinidae,  but,  if 
we  understand  the  figure  correctly,  it  is  not  only  an  Actinocrinoid, 
but  even  synonymous  with  Carpocrinus. 

Additional  species  : — 

1879.  Leptocrinus  raridigitatus  Angl.,  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  ."»,  PI.  20,  figs.  18, 19, 
and  PL  28,  figs.  4,  4  a. — Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

DESMIDOCRINUS  Angl.,  Rev.  ii,  p.  108. 

AGARICOCRINUS  Troost,  Rev.  ii,  p.  109. 

Additional  species  : — 

1881.  A.  crassus  Wetherby,  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  v,  p.  178,  PI.  5,  fig. 
1  ab. — Keokuk  gr.     Kentucky. 


328  PROCEEDINGS    OF   THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

1881.  A.  elegans  Wetberby,  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.   Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  v,  p.  179,  PI.  5, 
fig.  4  a  b. — Keokuk  gr.     Kentucky. 

ALLOPROSALLOCRINUS  Lyon  and  Cass.,  Rev.  ii,  p.  113. 

b.  Periechocrinites. 

PERIECHOCRINUS  Austin,  Rev.  ii.  p.  127. 

S.  A.  Miller's  late  additions  to  this  genus  were  made  from 
natural  casts,  and  there  is  the  usual  uncertainty  as  to  their  iden- 
tification. We  must  consider  them  as  doubtful  species,  until  the 
external  surface  is  known  from  casts  or  otherwise.  Miller  con- 
siders Megistocrinus  infelix  Winch,  and  Marcy,  Saccocrinus 
infelix  Miller,  specifically  distinct  from  Saccocrinus  Ghristyi 
Hall,  which  Hall  had  doubted.  He  gives  two  more  figures  of  the 
species,  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  iv,  PI.  6,  figs.  2  a  b. 

Additional  species  : — 

*1881.  Periechocr.  Egani?  (S.  A.  Miller).     Saccocrinus  Egani,  Journ.  Cincin.  Soo. 

Nat.  Hist.,  PI.  4,  figs.  4,  4  a. — Niagara  gr.     Chicago,  III. 
*1865.  Periechocr.  necis?  (Winchel  and  Marcy).     Megistocrinus  necis,   Memoirs 

Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  i,  p.  Ill,  PI.  2,  fig.  15.     S.  A.  Miller,  Saccocrinus 

necis,  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,   1881,  PI.  4,  figs.  .'1,  Ha. — Niagara  gr. 

Chicago,  111. 
♦1882.  Periechocr.  pyriformis  ?   (S.  A.  Miller).     Saccocrinus  pyriformis,  Journ. 

Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  (July),  PI.  3,  figs.  3,  .'!  a.— Niagara  gr.    Chicago,  111. 
*1882.  Periechocr.  urniformis?  (S.  A.  Miller).      Saccocrinus  urniformis,  Journ. 

Cincin.  Soc.  Xat.  Hist.  (July!.  PI.  4,  figs.  2,  2a.— Niagara  gr.    Chicago,  111. 

ABACOCRINUS  Angelin,  Rev.  ii,  p.  133. 

CORYMBOCRINUS  Angelin. 

1878.  Angelin,  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  18. 

1879.  Zittel,  Handb.  d .  Palseontologie  i,  p.  373. 

Syn.  Eucalyptocrinus  McCoy,  1855  (not  Goldfuss). 
Syn.   Clonocrinus  Quenstedt,  1876  (not  Oehlert,  1879). 

The  genus  Corymbocrinus  was  in  Pt.  ii  erroneously  referred 
by  us  to  the  Calyptocrinidse.  It  resembles  Eucalyptocrinus  so 
remarkably  in  the  construction  of  the  calyx  plates,  its  deep  basal 
concavity,  and  the  perfect  symmetry  that  prevails  throughout 
the  interradii,  that  we  took  it  to  be  a  connecting  link  between 
Actionocrinidae  and  Calvptocrinidte,  but  neai'er  the  latter  through 
Gallicrinus,  which  we  thought  to  be  intermediate  between  Corym- 
bocrinus and  E ucalyptocrinus.  To  this  view  even  the  branching 
arms  formed  no  serious  objection,  as  Angelin  has  figured  in  the 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  329 

Iconographia,  PI.  9,  fig.  13,  a  malformed  specimen  of  Eucalypto- 
crinus,  in  which  some  of  the  arms  divide  half-way  up  to  the  top, 
and  in  a  similar  manner,  as  in  Corymbocrinus.  Prof.  Lindstrom, 
of  Stockholm,  however,  informs  us  that  the  plates  along  the  ven- 
tral side  differ  essentially  in  the  two  forms,  and  that  the  genus,  in 
his  opinion,  could  not  be  arranged  with  the  Calyptocrinidse.  The 
total  absence  of  special  anal  plates,  unites  it  with  the  Melocrinidae, 
and  in  this  we  agree  with  Zittel,  but  not  with  Angelin.  who  sepa- 
rated Corymbocrinus  and  Abacocrinus  from  31elocrinus,  and 
placed  them  in  separate  families.  The  two  genera  have  a  similar 
arm-structure,  but  differ  essentially  in  the  construction  of  the 
calyx,  the  one  having  a  strictly  pentamerous,  the  other  a  decidedly 
bilateral  sj^mmetry.  More  close  are  the  affinities  with  Polypeltes, 
provided  we  understand  that  genus  correctly.  We  are  somewhat 
in  doubt  whether  Quenstedt's  name  Clonocrinus,  should  not  be 
adopted  in  place  of  Corymbocrinus,  as  it  probably  has  priority, 
but  Quenstedt  gives  no  generic  description,  only  mentioning  the 
name  in  connection  with  a  certain  species. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Calyx  basin,  or  low  cup-shaped  ;  basal 
portions  broadly  and  deeply  excavated  ;  plates  of  very  uniform 
size,  rather  heavy,  somewhat  convex,  rarely  ornamented  ;  sym- 
metry regularly  equilateral,  except  in  the  basals. 

Basals  four,  unequal,  forming  a  hollow  cone,  which  is  filled  by 
the  upper  portions  of  the  column. 

Primary  radials  3X5,  all  wider  than  high.  The  first  plate 
larger  than  the  rest,  its  lower  (here  inner)  side  forming  a  part  of 
the  basal  concavity,  its  opposite  side  at  right  angles  with  the 
column,  only  a  small  portion  curved  upward.  The  second  radials 
quadrangular  or  nearly  so,  much  wider  than  high,  frequently  with 
convex  lower  edges,  narrower  than  the  first  radials.  The  third 
radials  are  pentagonal.  Secondary  radials  2X2X5,  compara- 
tively large.  Their  upper  series  support  two  rows  of  transversely 
linear  tertiary  radials,  arranged  alternately  like  a  double  series  of 
arm  plates,  but  connected  b}r  interradial  and  interaxillary  pieces, 
and  hence  forming  parts  of  the  body. 

Arms  long,  bifurcating,  gradually  tapering  to  the  distal  ends  ; 
from  their  base  up  composed  of  a  double  series  of  very  short 
but  wide  interlocking  pieces.     Pinnules  long. 

Interradials  arranged  longitudinall}'  in  rows  of  a  single  plate 
each.     The  first  plate  the  largest  in  the  cal}Tx  ;  ninesided  ;  it  ex- 


330  PROCEEDINGS    OP   THE   ACADEMY    OP  [1885. 

tends  from  the  upper  sloping  sides  of  the  first  primary  radials  to 
the  first  plate  of  the  secondary  radials.  The  second  plate  is 
much  smaller,  though  yet  comparatively  large  ;  it  is  hexagonal, 
and  placed  upon  the  first  interradial  and  between  the  two  second- 
ary radials.  There  are  two  more  interradial  pieces  above,  which, 
like  the  two  former,  are  longitudinally  arranged.  This  arrange- 
ment is  uniform  in  all  five  areas. 

Interaxillary  plates,  one  or  two ;  the  upper  one  cuneate,  and 
inserted  like  the  upper  interradials  between  the  tertiary  radials. 
Construction  of  the  plates  of  the  ventral  side  unknown.  The 
column  is  large,  round,  composed  of  low  segments ;  articular 
faces  provided  with  radiating  striae,  except  upon  a  small  zone 
next  to  the  periphery ;  central  canal  pentalobate. 

Geological  position,  etc. —  Gorymbocrinus  is  only  known  from 
the  Upper  Silurian  of  England  and  Gothland. 

Angelin  refers  to  it  the  following  species  : 

I  Mo.  Corymbocr.  corolliferus  Hisinger  (Cyathocr.  (?)  corolliferus).  Lethaja.  Suec. 
Suppl.  sec,  p.  6,  PI.  39,  fig.  3,  a-c.  Angelin,  1878.— Corymbocr.  corollife- 
rus, Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  18,  PI.  23,  fig.  19. — Upper  Silurian.  Gothland, 
Sweden. 

1  878.  Corymbocr.  grandis  Angelin.  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  IS,  PI.  9,  figs.  2,  3. — Up- 
per Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

187S.  Corymbocr.  grandistellatus  Angelin.  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  18,  PI.  9,  fig. 
4,  and  PI.  23,  figs.  18-21.— Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

1878.  Corymbocr.  laevis  Angelin.  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  18,  PI.  23,  fig.  20. — Upper 
Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

L878.  Corymbocr.  Panderi  Angelin.  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  18,  PI.  9,  fig.  5,  and 
PI.  '!?>,  figs.  17,  17  a,  b. —  Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

1855.  Corymbocr.  polydactylus  McCoy  (Eucalyptocr  polydactylus).    Apud.  Sedge 
wick,  Bynops.  Pal.  Foss.,  p.  58,  PI.  1  D,  fig.  2;  also  Sailer,   187.'!;  Catal.,  p. 

120;   Angelin,  1878. — Corymbocr.  polydactylus,  le >gr.  Crin.  Suec.  p.  L8, 

PL  9,  figs.   I,  6-12,  and   PL  21,  fig.  17.— .Upper  Silurian.      Gothland,  Sweden. 

Note. — It  is  possible  that  Mariacrinua  macropetalus  Hall,  Paleont.,  N. 
York,  vol.  iii,  p.  Ill,  PI.  3  A,  fig.  1,  is  a  Corymbocrinus,  but  it  may  be  a 
Callicrinux  in  place  of  Mariacrinue,  as  which  it  was  described. 

CiPOLYPELTES  Angelin. 

1878.  Angelin,  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  27. 

1879.  Zittel,  Handb.  d.  Paleont.  i,  p.  373. 

The  genus  Polypeltes  was  described  as  being  composed  of  "  8 
or  more  basals,  16  parabasals,  10  (?)  X  1  radials  (all  axillary), 
numerous  interradial    and    interaxillary   pieces,  and  as   having 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  331 

10  X  12  primary  arms."  This  formula  was  considered  by  Angelin 
and  Zittel  so  distinct  from  that  of  any  other  known  form,  that 
both  placed  the  genus  in  an  independent  famity.  We  should  fol- 
low their  example,  if  we  were  satisfied  as  to  the  correctness  of 
that  description. 

From  the  fact  that  Angelin  gave  the  number  of  most  of  the 
above  plates  with  doubt — he  stated  positively  only  the  number  of 
"  parabasalia  " — we  infer  that  his  specimens  in  the  basal  regions 
were  not  in  a  condition  for  critical  examination.  It  is,  moreover, 
apparent  that  an  arrangement  of  plates,  such  as  he  described,  is 
theoretically,  as  well  as  practically,  impossible. 

From  the  description  it  is  difficult  to  ascertain  which  of  the 
plates  were  intended  as  "  basals"  and  which  as  "  parabasals."  In 
fig.  2,  PL  9,  of  the  Iconographia,  there  are  represented  close  to 
the  column  two  rings  of  plates  ;  an  upper  or  outer  one,  which  is 
composed  of  25  or  26  pieces,  and  close  to  the  column  an  inner  one, 
which,  if  an}-  reliance  can  be  placed  in  the  figure  (?),  contains 
very  nearly  the  same  number,  for  the  plates  are  represented  as 
alternating  with  those  of  the  upper  ring.  The  former  should 
contain  the  "parabasals,"  the  latter  the  basals;  but  unfortunately 
the  plates  of  both  rings  differ  in  number  most  conspicuously  from 
the  number  attributed  to  "  basals  "  and  "  parabasals  "  in  the  de- 
scription. 

Of  all  the  plates  to  which  the  description  alludes,  the  "  ten  (?) 
bifurcating  radials"  are  most  readily  recognized,  and  we  believe 
there  are  actually  ten  of  these  plates  in  the  specimen.  In  the 
figure  they  occupy  a  position  within  the  second  ring,  but  along 
with  other  plates  which  are  interposed  between  them.  At  the 
one  side  there  is  a  small  single  piece,  which  we  take  to  be  an  inter- 
axillar}'  plate;  at  the  other  are  found  two  larger  plates,  evidently 
interradials,  with  possibly  an  additional  anal  piece  at  the  poste- 
rior side.  It  is  very  probable  that  these  15  or  16  plates,  which 
in  groups  of  one,  two,  and  three  (?)  are  inserted  laterally  between 
the  axillary  radials,  were  taken  in  the  description  for  "  parabasa- 
lia," as  otherwise  those  plates  would  be  undescribed.  If  this  is 
the  case,  the  term  has  been  incorrectly  applied,  as  the  name 
"parabasalia  "  has  been  given  only  to  the  ring  of  plates  which  lies 
beneath  the  radials,  and  between  these  and  the  underbasals.  All 
plates  which  are  laterally  inserted  between  the  radials,  as  in  this 
case,  are  called  interradials.    It  would  be,  however,  equally  incon- 


332  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE    ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

sistent  in  principle  to  search  for  "  parabasalia  "  among  the  plates 
of  the  first  ring,  for  basals  and  "  parabasals  "  are  not  placed  beside 
each  other,  but  the  latter  rest  upon  the  ring  of  the  former.  We 
doubt  if  Polypeltes  possessed  any  such  plates  as  "  parabasalia," 
at  least  not  among  the  plates  of  these  two  rings.  It  is  probable 
that  the  plates  of  the  inner  ring,  like  those  of  the  outer,  were 
parti}'  radials  and  partly  interradials,  while  the  basals  were  hid- 
den from  view  by  the  column.  In  support  of  this  view  it  is  well 
to  compare  the  plates  here  exposed  with  those  represented  in 
allied  genera. 

According  to  description,  the  ten  bifurcating  radials  are  suc- 
ceeded by  two  rows  of  from  four  to  five  plates,  consisting  of 
higher  orders  of  radials ;  the  upper  series  bifurcating,  giving  off 
another  order  of  radials,  and  these  the  primary  arms,  which 
branch  after  becoming  free.  Comparing  the  different  portions  of 
the  rays  with  the  same  parts  in  Abacocrinus  and  Corymbocrinus, 
we  find  the  form  of  the  radials,  their  proportionate  size,  and  even 
the  construction  of  the  arms  and  their  mode  of  branching,  almost 
identical  with  those  two  forms,  provided  we  compare  the  ten 
lower  radials  in  Polypeltes  with  the  ten  rows  of  secondary  radials 
in  Abacocrinus  and  Corymbocrinus.  The  main  difference  is  that 
the  latter  genus  has  but  one  bifurcation  in  the  cah'x  above  these 
plates,  while  the  former  has  two,  and  consequently  twice  the  num- 
ber of  primary  arms,  a  difference  only  of  specific  value.  From 
the  fact  that  Polypeltes  has  an  extra  bifurcation,  and  twice  as 
man}-  primary  arms  as  the  other  two  genera,  it  might  be  asserted 
that  it  has  exceptionally  ten  primary  ra\'S'instead  of  five,  and  ten 
interradial  spaces,  but  that  is  not  the  case.  It  has  been  stated 
that  the  ten  radials  are  laterally  disconnected,  and  separated  on 
the  one  side  by  a  single  plate,  and  on  the  other  by  two  larger 
pieces.  The  two  larger  ones  are  followed  by  numerous  other 
plates,  which,  arranged  in  two  rows,  extend  to  the  lower  portions 
of  the  arms,  and  enclose  these  within  the  calyx,  while  the  smaller 
plate  at  the  other  side  stands  perfectly  isolated,  surrounded  on 
all  sides  bj  radials.  That  the  former  represent  the  plates  of 
five  interradial  series,  and  the  single  piece  an  axillary  plate,  has 
been  already  stated,  and  this  proves  very  clearly  that  Polypeltes, 
like  other  Crinohls.  has  but  live  main  rays,  that  the  ten  axillary 
pieces  in  Angelin's  figure  represent  1X5X2  secondary  radials, 
and  that  the  specimen  must  have  somewhere  primary  radials. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  ,        333 

Beneath  the  interaxillary  plate,  the  figure  indicates  the  presence 
of  two  plates,  separated  laterally,  which,  combined,  have  the  form 
and  position  of  a  bifurcating  plate.  That  there  is  a  mistake  in 
the  figure  with  regard  to  these  plates,  seems  to  us  beyond  ques- 
tion. There  is  evidently  but  one  plate  in  the  specimen,  and  this 
represents  a  primary  radial,  while  the  two  plates  at  each  side  of 
it,  as  in  the  succeeding  ring,  are  interradials.  The  figures  do  not 
extend  beyond  this  ring,  all  lower  plates  being  evidently  hidden 
from  view  by  the  large  column,  and  hence  the  exact  number  of 
primary  radials  and  basals  is  not  known,  but  this  was  undoubtedly 
similar  to  that  of  allied  genera,  and  not  so  abnormal  as  given  by 
Angelin. 

If  it  has  three  primary  radials  and  four  basals,  which  seems  to 
us  most  probable,  and  at  the  same  time  a  distinct  anal  interra- 
dius,  we  should  not  hesitate  to  place  Polypeltes  as  a  synonym 
under  Abacocrinus,  while  under  the  same  conditions,  but  with 
only  three  basals,  it  agrees  with  Megistocrinus.  However,  should 
it  be  proved  that  the  posterior  interradius  has  no  additional 
plates,  but  is  constructed  like  that  of  the  four  other  sides,  Poly- 
peltes should  be  placed  under  Corymbocrinus.  Only  a  variation 
in  the  number  of  primary  radials,  if  our  interpretation  is  correct, 
will  warrant  a  generic  separation,  but  in  this  case  the  name  should 
be  changed,  as  it  becomes  meaningless. 

We  suggest  that  in  Polypeltes  (?)  the  basals  and  the  greater 
part  of  the  primary  radials  form  a  deep  concavity,  which,  to  a 
large  extent,  is  filled  by  the  column,  as  in  the  case  of  Corymbo- 
crinus, Megistocrinus  and  Eucalyptocrinus.  We  found  a  very 
similar  case  in  Megistocrinus  concavus  Wachsmuth,  from  Alpena, 
Michigan,  in  which  the  basals  and  first  radials  form  the  lateral 
walls  of  a  deep  concavity,  and  are  entirely  hidden  from  view. 
The  second  radials  are  partly  exposed,  and  form,  with  adjoining 
pieces,  a  ring  of  twelve  very  even,  strongly  nodose  plates,  which 
consist  of  five  radials,  four  regular  interradials,  and  three  anal 
plates.  Nobody  would  suspect  one  of  these  specimens  to  be  a 
Megistocrinus,  unless  he  obtained  access  to  the  deep  funnel  which 
contains  the  missing  plates. 

We  deem  it  unnecessary  to  give  a  special  diagnosis  of  Poly- 
peltes, as  we  think  it  will  eventually  be  placed  under  Abacocrinus 
or  Corymbocrinus.  It  has  the  same  long,  branching  arms,  com- 
posed of  two  series  of  narrow  interlocking  pieces,  and,  as  in  that 


334  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

genus,  the  lower  portions  of  the  arms  are  connected  laterally  for 
some  distance  by  one  or  two  rows  of  interbrachial  pieces. 
Angelin  described  under  Polypeltes  a  single  species  : — 

1878.  ?    Polypeltes  granulatus  Angclin.     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  27,  PI.  24,  figs. 

2,  3. —  Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

MEGISTOCRINUS  Owen  and  Shum.,  Rev.  ii,  p.  135. 

We  compared  Megistocr.  Ontario  Hall,  and  M.  depressas  Hall, 
with  good  specimens  in  our  own  cabinet  and  in  the  Canada  Sur- 
vey Museum,  and  find  the  former  to  be  a  young  example  of  if. 
abnormis  Lyon,  the  latter  of  M.  rugosus  Lyon  and  Cass. 

Additional  species : — 

1879.  M.  pileatus  S.  A.  Miller.     Journ.  Cinein.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  (December),  PI.  10, 

figs.  1  a  1). — Corniferous  limest.      Columbus,  0. — This  must  be  closely  com- 
pared with  M.  rugosus  Lyon  and  Cass.,  with  which  it  may  be  identical. 
1885.  M.  concavus  WaidiMiiuth.     Proceed.   Davenport  Acad.  Sci.,  vol.  iv,  p.  96,  PI. 

1,  figs.  5-7. —  Alpena,  Mich. 
*1836.  M.  globosus  (Phill.)  Actinocr.  globosus,  Geol.  Yorkshire,  p.  206,  PI.  4,  figs. 
26-29,  also  BffoCoy,  1844,  Synops.  Carb.  Foss.  Ireland,  p.  182;  W.  and  Spr. 
Rhodocr.  globosus,  Rev.  ii,  p.  212. — Mount.  limest.     England. 
1885.  M.  nodosus,  var.  multidecoratus  Barris.    Proceed.  Davenport  Acad.  Nat.  Sci., 
vol.  iv,  p.  100. — Hamilton  gr.     Alpena,  Mich. 

C.   ACTINOCRINITES. 

ACTINOCRINUS  Miller,  Rev.  ii,  p.  138. 

Phillipsocrinus  caryocrinoides  McCoy,  Synops.  Carb.  Foss. 
Ireland,  p.  183,  PI.  26,  fig.  5,  is  evidently  an  abnormal  specimen 
of  Actinocrinus  pusillus  or  some  other  closely  allied  species. 

Actinocr.  dalyanus  S.  A.  Miller,  1881,  is  a  synonym  of  Actinocr. 
proboscidialis  Hall,  and  it  is  from  the  Lower  Burlington  lime- 
stone, not  from  the  Keokuk  limestone,  as  supposed  by  Miller. 

A.  tholus  Hall.  It  is  possible  that  the  form  which  Hall  de- 
scribed under  this  name,  and  which  we  took  to  be  a  synonym  of 
.1.  qlans,  is  more  than  a  mere  variety.  We  found  lately  in  one 
and  the  same  locality  numerous  specimens  agreeing  well  with 
Hall's  description,  every  one  having  convex  or  even  slightly  nodose 
plates ;  while  those  of  A.  glans  are  generally  smooth  or  merely 
convex,  and  the  form  of  the  body  is  somewhat  more  elongate. 

Additional  species : — 

I8ft0.  A.  spinotentaculus  Hall,  Suppl.  (ieol.  Rep.  Iowa,  I,  p.  86. — Lower  Burlington 
limest. — Burlington,  Iowa. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  335 

TELEIOCRINUS  W.  X  Sp.,  Rev.  ii,  p.  146. 

In  the  second  part  of  the  Catalogue  of  Amer.  Pal.  Foss.,  p. 
268,  Miller  calls  Teleiocrinus  "  a  subgenus  of  doubtful  utility." 
The  fact  is  we  proposed  it  as  a  full  genus  of  the  Actinocrinites 
and  not  a  subgenus  of  Strotoerinus.  We  stated  expressly,  Tel- 
eiocrinus holds  the  same  relation  to  Actinocrinus  as  Strotoerinus 
to  Physetocrinus,  which,  curiously  enough,  are  both  accepted  by 
Miller.  Probably  all  these  genera  are  descendants  of  Actinocrinus, 
and  it  is  difficult  to  see  how  Miller  can  reject  Teleiocrinus  when 
he  accepts  Strotoerinus. 

STEGANOCKINUS  M.  &  W..,  Rev.  ii,  p.  149. 
AMPHORACRINUS  Austin,  Rev.  ii,  p.  151. 
PHYSETOCRINUS  M.  &.  W.,  Rev.  ii,  p.  155. 

Additional  species : — 

*1881.  P.  Copei  (S.  A.  Miller)  Actinocrinus  Copei,  Jour.  Cincin.  Soe.  Nat.  Hist. 
(Decbr.),  PI.  7,  figs.  2.  2  a.— This  species,  like  all  others  which  Miller 
described  from  New  Mexico,  came  from  the  Lower  Burlington  limestone, 
and  not  from  the  Keokuk  group. — Lake  Valley,  New  Mexico. 

STROTOCRINUS  M.  &  W.,  Rev.  ii,  p.  158. 

GENNJEOCRINUS  W.  &  Sp.,  Rev.  ii,  p.  160. 

d.   Batocrinites. 

BATOCRINUS  Casseday,  Rev.  ii,  p.  162. 

Additional  species  : — 

*1859.  B.  grandis  (Lyon),  Actinocrinus  grandis,  Amer.  Journ.  Sci.,  vol  xxviii 
(September),  p.  240. — Keokuk  limest.  Kentucky  and  Tennessee. — In  the 
original  description  of  this  species,  by  mistake  of  the  printer,  the  specific 
name  was  omitted.  Lyon  evidently  intended  to  name  the  species  Act. 
grandis,  as  that  name  is  mentioned  at  the  end  of  the  description  in  dis- 
cussing the  geological  position.  We  adopt  this  specific  name,  but  place  the 
species  under  Batocrinus.  It  has  two  arms  extended  from  each  arm  base, 
a  character  only  found  among  the  Batocrinites. 

ERETMOCRINUS  Lyon  &  Cass.,  Rev.  ii,  p.  170. 
Additional  species : — 

E.  varsoviensis  Worthen,  1882,  Bull,  i,  Illinois  State  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  30,  and 
Geol.  Rep.  Ills.,  vol.  vii,  p.  306,  PI.  28,  fig.  14.  This  species  is  synonymous  with 
E.  originarius  W.  &  Sp. 


336  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

DORYCRINUS  Roemer,  Rev.  ii,  p.  176. 
Additional  species  : — 

D.  lineatus  S.  A.  Miller,  L881,  Journ.  Cinein.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  (December),  PI.  7,  figs. 
.".,  3  a,  from  New  Mexico,  is  specifically  identical  with  D.  unicornis  (0.  &  Shum.). 


Family  VI.— PLATYCRINIDiE  Roemer. 

(Emend.  W.  &  Sp.). 

CULICOCRINUS  Job.  Miiller,  Rev.  ii,  p.  61. 

This  genus  is  known  only  from  casts,  and  reasonable  doubts 
may  be  entertained  as  to  the  correctness  of  Mailer's  figures.  That 
the  whole  ventral  side  had  been  covered  by  only  five  plates,  as 
described  by  Miiller,  seemed  to  us  not  very  probable,  and  we  sug- 
gested in  our  description  that  perhaps  it  had  been  composed  of 
eight  pieces :  a  central  plate,  6  proximals  and  an  anal  piece,  of 
which  the  sutures  had  been  obliterated.  Of  late,  however,  we  are 
inclined  to  abandon  this  view,  as  the  plates  in  question  are  too 
large  to  be  proximals,  neither  can  they  be  orals,  for  the  larger 
plate  is  pierced  by  the  anal  opening.  It  seems  to  us  Culicocrinus 
represents  morphologically  a  still  lower  form  than  even  Cocco- 
crinus,  that  its  ambulacra  were  subtegminal,  and  probably  also 
the  oral  piece,  unless  this  is  represented  by  the  tubercle  in  the 
larger  plate. 

COCCOCRINUS  Job.  Miiller.     Rev.  ii,  p.  58. 

(Revised). 

In  our  generic  description  it  was  incorrectly  stated  that  Cocco- 
crinus  had  but  a  simple  interradial  to  each  side.  This  was  partly 
due  to  a  misunderstanding  of  the  plates.  The  first  range  consists 
of  three  pieces,  as  clearly  shown  in  Coccocrinus  bacca  Roemer 
(Silur.  Fauna  West  Tenn.,  PI.  4,  fig.  5  c).  The  middle  plate,  the 
one  we  described,  rests  within  the  notch  of  two  first  radials,  the 
other  two  against  the  upper  face  of  one  of  them,  and  against  the 
second  and  third  radials.  A  fourth  plate,  which  we  previously 
described  as  an  oral  plate,  but  which  we  regard  now  a  secondary 
interradial,  abuts  against  the  upper  faces  of  the  three  former. 
The  plates  of  adjoining  interradii  do  not  touch  laterally,  but  are 
separated  by  a  very  regular  linear  cleft,  which  extends  all  the  way 
from  the  central  gap  to  the  arm  furrows.     There  are  nowhere 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  337 

traces  of  ambulacra,  which  were  probably  hidden  within  the  clefts, 
and  parti}'  covered  by  the  interradials,  instead  of  being  placed,  as 
we  had  supposed,  on  a  level  with  them.  A  similar  position  was 
probably  occupied  by  the  central  plate,  which,  in  our  opinion, 
formed  the  bottom  part  of  the  central  space. 

We  have  but  little  doubt  that  the  conditions  of  Coccocrinus 
rosaceus  were  essential!}'  the  same  as  those  of  G.  bacca;  in  the 
former,  however,  the  outer  interradials  were  not  preserved,  having 
been  probably  extended  out  to  the  free  rays,  as,  more  or  less,  in 
the  case  of  all  discoid  species  of  Platycrinus.  That  the}'  were 
present  is  indicated  by  the  irregular  width  of  the  lateral  clefts, 
which,  as  seen  in  the  specimens,  suddenly  widen  on  approaching 
the  arm  bases,  while  they  should  rather  grow  narrower  if  repre- 
senting the  clefts  between  the  orals  in  Holopus,  as  which  they 
were  regarded  by  Carpenter. 

CORDYLOCRINUS  Angelin,  Rev.  ii,  p.  60. 

MARSUPIOCRINUS  Phillips,  Rev.  ii,  p.  62. 
Additional  species : — 

*1S75.  M.  praematurus  (Hall),  Platycrinus  praematurus,  Geol.  Rep.  Ohio,  Palseont. 
ii,  p.  124,  PI.  6,  figs.  3-6.— Niagara  gr.     Green  Co.,  0. 

PLATYCRINUS  Miller,  Rev.  ii,  p.  65. 

PI.  discoideus  Hall,  1858,  not  Owen  and  Shumard,  1850.     =  Eucladocrinus 
pleuroviminus  White. 

Additional  species  not  noted  before : — 

1882.  P.  monroensis  Worthen,  Rull.  i,  111.  State  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  30;  also  Geol. 
Rep.  Ills,  vii,  p.  306,  PI.  30,  fig.  9. —St.  Louis  limest.  Monroe  Co.,  III.— We 
have  but  little  doubt  that  Prof.  Worthen  described  here  a  young  specimen  of 
P.  bonoensis  White. 
1838.  PI.  coronatus  Goldfuss,  Nova  Acta,  Leop.  xix,  i,  p.  344,  PI.  31,  fig.  8.— Car- 
boniferous.    Bristol,  Engl. 

PL  bloomfieldensis  S.  A.  Miller,  syn.  of  Platycrinus  planus  O.  and  Shum. 

PL  poculum  S.  A.  Miller.     Too  imperfect  for  identification. 

PL  vesiculus  McCoy,  Rev.  ii,  p.  76,  read  PL  vesiculosus. 

PL  praematurus  Hall  &  Whitf.    =  Marsupiocrinus  praematurus. 

EUCLADOCRINUS  Meek,  Rev.  ii,  p.  76. 

COTYLEDONOCRINUS  Cass  and  Lyon,  Rev.  ii,  p.  77. 
23 


338  PROCEEDINGS    OF    THE    ACADEMY    OP  [1885. 

Family  VLL— HEXACRINIDJE  W.  and  Sp. 
HEXACRINUS  Austin.  Rev.  ii,  p.  78. 

Additional  species  : — 

1884.  H.  minor  (Dewalque  MS.),  Fraipont,  Extrait  des  Ann.  de  la  Soc.  g6ol.  de  Belg., 
Tome  xi,  p.  110,  PI.  1,  figs.  4  a  and  4  b. — Devon,  superieur.  Senzeille,  Bel- 
gium. 

1884.  H.  verucosus  (Dewalque  MS.),  Fraipont,  Ibid.,  p.  108,  PI.  1,  fig.  3. — Devon, 
auperieur.     Senzeille,  Belgium. 

1S82.  H.  Wachsmuthi  Oehlert,  Bull.  g6ol.  de  France  (Ser.  3),  Tome  x.  p.  355,  PI.  8, 
fig.  3. — Devon,  inferieur.     Sabre  and  La  Fleche,  France. 

ARTHROACANTHA  Williams. 

18S3.  Williams,  Proc.  Am.  Phil.  Soc.  (April),  p.  84. 

Syn.  Hystricrinus  Hinde,  1885,  Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (March), 
p.  158. 

Prof.  Williams  proposed  the  name  Arthroacantha  in  1883,  for 
a  Crinoid  of  the  Hexacrinus  type  -with  movable  spines,  of  which 
he  described  and  figured  one  species,  A.  Ithacensis,  from  the 
Chemung  of  New  York.  He  also  defined  the  characters  of 
another  species,  from  the  Hamilton  group,  which  had  been  named 
by  Hall  as  Platycrinus  punctobrachiatus,  but  not  defined  by  him, 
except  through  the  medium  of  a  photograph  privately  distributed. 
To  the  latter  species  Williams  gave  the  name  Arthroacantha 
punctobrachiata. 

In  1885,  Dr.  Hinde  (Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  158),  proposed 
the  name  Hystricrinus  for  the  genus  defined  by  Williams,  and 
described  and  figured  a  species,  H.  Carpenteri,  from  specimens 
derived  from  the  Hamilton  group  of  Ontario,  Canada.  He  states 
that  eminent  authorities  decided  Williams'  name  to  be  invalid,  by 
reason  of  its  similarity  to  Arthr acanthus,  previously  emplo}'ed  by 
Schmarda  for  a  genus  of  Rotatoria.  Examination  of  the  question 
in  the  light  of  the  Rules  of  the  British  Association,  adopted  in 
1865,  has  led  us  to  the  conclusion  that  Arthroacantha,  however 
injudiciously  chosen  to  designate  a  genus  of  Crinoid,  will  have  to 
stand.  The  tenth  Rule  (Am.  Jour.  Sci.,  July,  1869,  p.  101)  says  : 
"A  name  should  be  changed  which  has  before  been  proposed  for 
some  other  genus  in  zoology  or  botany."  It  is  evident  from  this 
that  a  proposed  name  may  be  ignored  on  account  of  identity  with 
a  prior  name,  but  not  by  reason  of  mere  similarity  or  resemblance 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  339 

in  form,  however  close.  It  is  the  word  itself  which  determines 
its  standing,  and  not  its  signification  or  derivation.  The  question 
is  one  of  authority,  and  not  of  propriety  or  expediency,  and  it 
will  be  seen  that  the  committee  who  reported  the  above- 
mentioned  rule  to  the  British  Associaton,  took  the  same  view  as 
to  its  effect  that  we  do  (Am.  Journ.,  July,  1869,  p.  107).  Arthroa- 
canlha  is  a  different  word  from  Arthracanthus,  although  of  the 
same  et3'mology,  and  of  similar  construction,  and  there  are  other 
names  of  recognized  standing  in  natural  history,  which  bear  a 
closer  resemblance  to  prior  names  than  this. 

Another  bibliographic  question  arises  as  to  the  species  of  this 
genus.  Hall  made  a  good  figure  of  the  type,  which  he  called  PL 
punctobrachiatus,  but  his  plates  were  not  published.  Williams, 
however,  when  establishing  the  genus  gave  a  brief  but  very  clear 
definition  of  the  characters  of  Hall's  type  specimen  (Proc.  Am. 
Phil.  Soc,  1883,  p.  83),  and  proposed  for  it  the  name  Arthroa- 
cantha  punctobrachiata.  On  p.  86  he  again  defined  its  principal 
characters  by  comparison  with  A.  ithacensis.  The  "  definition  " 
necessary  to  impart  authority  to  a  published  zoological  term  im- 
plies a  "  distinct  exposition  of  essential  characters."  (See  Com- 
mittee's Report  on  Rule  12,  Am.  Journ.,  1869,  p.  102.)  This  was 
given  by  Williams  far  better  than  has  been  done  in  a  great  many 
specific  descriptions  of  well  known  Crinoids.  It  is  our  opinion, 
therefore,  that  A.  punctobrachiata  is  a  good  species,  and  that  it 
must  be  credited  to  Williams.  Whether  Hinde's  species  is  iden- 
tical with  A.  punctobrachiata  we  cannot  undertake  to  determine 
without  more  direct  comparison  of  specimens.  We  have  exam- 
ined specimens  from  the  Hamilton  group  of  Ontario,  Canada, 
which  undoubtedly  belong  to  A.  punctobrachiata,  and  it  is  not 
improbable  that  A.  Carpenter i  may  prove  to  be  the  same  thing. 

Arthroacantha  is  closely  allied  to  Hexacrinus,  from  which  it 
differs  in  having  three  primary  radials  instead  of  two,  and  mova- 
ble spines  along  the  surface  of  the  plates.  That  the  spines,  which 
are  frequentty  found  in  close  proximity  to  the  plates,  are  not 
mere  broken  parts  of  the  plates,  but  constitute  independent  struc- 
tures, is  clearly  seen  from  Prof.  Williams'  specimens,  which  he  was 
good  enough  to  send  us  for  examination.  The  nature  of  the 
spines  was  disclosed  to  us  more  satisfactorily  in  specimens  of  A. 
punctobrachiata  from  the  Hamilton  of  Canada,  in  which  not  only 
the  calyx,  but  also  portions  of  the  arms  were  preserved,  and  in 


340  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

which  numerous  detached  spines  lie  upon  the  surface  of  the  plates 
close  to  the  tubercles  from  which  they  had  been  detached.  That 
these  spines,  to  some  extent,  were  movable,  is  more  than  proba- 
ble. They  were  evidently  connected  with  the  plates  by  elastic 
ligament,  so  as  to  3-ield  when  accidentally  brought  in  contact  with 
other  objects,  like  the  joints  in  a  column,  but  we  doubt  if  beyond 
this  the}'  represent,  either  functionally  or  structurally,  the  spines 
of  the  Echini. 

These  views  differ  somewhat  from  those  held  by  Williams,  who 
thinks  it  "  not  improbable  that  the  original  plates  of  Lepidocen- 
trus  eifelianus,  described  and  figured  by  Johannes  Miiller,  which 
were  detached  plates,  associated  with  spines  similar  in  nature  to 
those  just  described  and  borne  upon  similar  tubercles,  were  plates 
from  the  vault  of  a  true  Crinoid  like  Arthroacantha."  And  he 
remarks  further,  "  we  have  here  a  possible  clue  to  a  relationship 
between  true  Crinoids  and  Perischcechinidie. 

There  is  in  our  opinion  not  the  slightest  doubt  but  that  Mid- 
ler's figures  represent  Echinoid  plates,  and  that  the  spines  which 
were  found  associated  with  them  had  the  same  functions  as  those 
of  the  true  Urchins  of  later  epochs  ;  but  we  think  that  the  spines 
of  Arthroacantha  form  component  parts  of  the  plates  taken  sepa- 
rately, and  as  such  we  regard  them  as  representing  in  a  modified 
way  the  ordinary  undivided  spiniferous  plates  of  other  Crinoids. 
For  this  reason  we  cannot  regard  the  movable  spines  of  Arthroa- 
cantha of  much  more  than  of  specific  importance,  but  as  the  spe- 
cies also  possess  an  additional  primary  radial,  it  ma}r  be  well  to 
separate  them  generically  from  species  of  Hexacrinus  which  do 
not  have  them.  We  allude  to  this  more  particularly,  as  Williams 
and  also  Hinde,  was  inclined  to  regard  Arthroacantha  as  the  type 
of  a  distinct  family,  a  distinction,  which,  in  our  opinion,  gives  to 
the  movability  of  the  spines  a  degree  of  importance  which  it  does 
from  a  morphological  standpoint  not  deserve. 

Wo  also  doubt  if  (?)  Arthroacantha  Carpenteri  had  whorls  of 
cirrhi  throughout  the  column,  as  supposed  by  Hinde.  The  col- 
li in uar  fragments  which  he  figured  on  PI.  4 — if  they  belong  to 
this  species  at  all — evidently  formed  the  lower  [tortious  of  the 
stem,  as  shown  l»3r  the  size  and  the  irregular  arrangement  of  their 
branches,  and  as  such  are  regarded  b}7  us  merely  as  radicular 
cirrhi. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — In  form  and  arrangement  of  plates  closely 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  341 

allied  to  Hexacrinus.  All  plates  of  the  dorsal  cup,  the  arro  plates, 
and  all  interradial  and  summit  plates,  covered  with  numerous, 
irregularly  arranged  tubercles,  provided  centrally  with  a  small 
pit  for  the  reception  of  a  long  acicular  spine. 

Basals  three,  large,  pentagonal.  Primary  radials  3X5;  the 
lower  one  very  large  ;  the  two  upper  ones  small. 

The  anal  plate  has  nearly  form  and  size  of  the  first  radials,  and 
occupies  a  similar  position.  The  interradials  are  numerous  and 
either  cover  the  ambulacra  completely,  or  open  out  to  expose  the 
covering  plates.  All  plates  of  the  ca^-x,  dorsally  and  ventrally, 
except  the  basals,  are  provided  with  one  or  more  movable  spines, 
also  the  oral  plate  and  proximals,  but  not  the  covering  pieces, 
which,  however,  as  stated,  are  not  always  exposed.  Anus  sub- 
central. 

Arms  two  from  each  ray,  simple  or  branching,  and  giving  ofl 
slender  pinnules  from  each  joint.  The  proximal  arm  plates  are 
composed  of  single  cuneiform  pieces,  but  these  gradual!}'  interlock 
and  turn  into  two  series  of  alternate  plates.     Column  round. 

Geological  position,  etc. — Arthroacanlha  has  been  found  in  the 
upper  part  of  the  Devonian,  and  of  America  onljr. 

1883.  Arthroacantha  ithacensis  Williams,  Type  of  the  genus.     Amcr.  Philos.  Soc, 

April,  p.  83,  with  figures. — HarailtoD  gr.     Near  Ithaca,  N.  Y. 
1882.  A.  punctobrachiata  Williams,  Trans.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc.  (April),  pp.  83  and  86 
(figured  by  Hall  as  Platycrinus  punctobrachiatus). — Hamilton  gr.   Ontario, 
Can. 
*1885.  A.  Carpenteri  (?)  Hinde  (Hystricrinus  Carpenteri),  Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat. 
Hist.  (March),  p.  162,  PI.  4. — Hamilton  gr.     Ancona,  Ontario,  Can.     (Prob- 
ably a  Syn.  of  Arthroacantha  punctobrachiata  Williams. 

DICHOCRINUS  Minister,  Rev.  ii,  p.  81. 

Additional  species : — 

I860.  D.  lachrymosus  Hall,  Suppl.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa  by  Hall,  p.  84. — Upper  Burling- 
ton limest.  Burlington,  Iowa. — This  species  was  erroneous!}*  referred  by  us 
to  Platycrinus,  and  was  said  to  be  synonymous  with  PI.  subspinulosus, 
with  which  it  agrees  in  the  ornamentation  of  the  plates.  Fine  specimens 
which  we  obtained  lately,  have  convinced  us  that  it  is  a  Dichocrinus,  and 
was  correctly  separated  by  Hall.  It  has  a  comparativel}-  large  number  of 
interradial  plates,  a  very  conspicuous  oral,  and  six  large  proximal  plates. 
The  anal  aperture  is  lateral,  somewhat  protruding,  placed  at  the  upper  edge 
of  one  of  the  first  interradials,  which  is  somewhat  excavated.  The  radial 
dome  plates  are  composed  of  small  alternate  pieces  which  we  followed  up  to 
the  second  bifurcation  of  the  raj-.  Arms  given  off  from  the  third  secondary 
radials,  whence  they  branch  once  or  twice  again,  always  from  the  third  plate. 


842  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

D.  coxanus  Worthen,  1882,  Bull,  i,  Illinois  State  Mus.,  p.  35,  and  Geol.  Rep.  111., 
vol.  vii,  p.  313,  PL  27,  fig.  7.  we  take  to  be  a  mere  synonym  of  Dichocrinus  ficus. 
1882.  D.  hamiltonensis  Worthen,  Bull,  i,  111.  State  .Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  35;  also  Geol. 
Rep.  III.,  vol.  v ii.  p.  313,  PI.  27,  fig.  10.— Keokuk  liuiest.     Hamilton,  111. 

TALAROCRINUS  W.  &  Sp.,  Rev.  ii,  p.  85. 
Additional  species : — 

1882.  T.  ovatus  Worthen,  Bull,  i,  Illinois  State  Mus.   Nat.   Hist.,  p.  36;    also  Geol. 
Rep.  111.,  vii,  p.  314,  PI.  19,  fig.  11.— Kaskaskia,  gr.     Monroe  Co.,  III. 

PTEROTOCRINUS  Lyon  &  Cass.,  Rev.  ii,  p.  87. 


Family  VIII.—  ACROCRINID^  W.  and  Sp. 

The  Acrocrinidae,  so  far  as  known,  are  represented  by  a  single 
genus,  and  of  this  only  three  species  have  been  described,  two 
from  the  Chester  (Kaskaskia)  limestone,  and  one  from  the  coal 
measures  of  America. 

No  attempt  has  ever  been  made  to  assign  the  genus  Acrocrinus 
to  its  proper  systematic  position.  Zittel  and  He  Loriol  in  their 
classifications  omit  it  entirely,  and  the  descriptions  by  Yandell 
and  llall,  which  were  from  imperfect  specimens,  are  indistinct  and 
partly  incorrect.  Thanks  to  the  kindness  of  Prof.  Worthen,  we 
have  been  able  to  examine  a  very  perfect  specimen  of  an  unde- 
scribed  species,  which  one  of  us  described  for  volume  vii  of  the 
Illinois  Geological  Report,  and  of  which  preliminary  descriptions 
were  published  in  Bulletin  I,  of  the  Illinois  State  Museum  of  Nat. 
Hist.,  p.  41.  The  specimen  shows  plainly  that  the  base  is  bipar- 
tite, as  Hall  suspected,  and  not  undivided,  as  stated  by  Yandell. 
Fortunately  the  other  plates  of  the  calyx  were  also  in  place,  and 
in  a  condition  to  be  critically  examined. 

Acrocrinus  departs  from  most  Palaeocrinoidea  in  two  important 
particulars,  and  upon  these,  mainly,  the  present  family  is  founded. 
First :  The  plates  of  the  calyx,  which  in  all  other  species  with 
large  numbers  of  plates  decrease  in  size  from  the  basals  to  the 
arm  bases,  in  Acrocrinus  exhibit  a  decided  increase  in  the  same 
direction.  Second  :  The  radials  are  not  connected  with  the  basals, 
but  separated  from  them  by  several  rings  of  plates,  which  in  po- 
sition are  partly  radial,  partly  interradial,  and  which  apparently 
are  not  represented  in  other  genera  of  the  Palaeocrinoidea. 
This  peculiar  structure  renders  it  exceedingly  difficult  in  this 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  343 

form  to  identify  even  those  elements  which  are  so  readily  recog- 
nized in  other  genera. 

In  Acrocrinus  Wortheni  Wachsmuth,  the  comparatively  large 
basals  are  succeeded  by  a  ring  of  twelve  triangular  plates,  so 
minute,  however,  that  it  requires  a  magnifier  to  discover  them. 
Another  series  of  twelve  larger  plates  constitutes  the  second 
ring.  These  plates  are  joined  by  their  lateral  edges,  their  lower 
angles  resting  between  the  preceding  plates.  Five  of  them  have 
a  radial  direction,  seven  are  placed  interradially,  one  opposite 
each  of  the  four  regular  interradial  sides,  three  facing  the  anal 
side.  Ten  of  the  plates  are  hexagonal ;  only  the  middle  one  on 
the  az3'gous  side,  and  the  plate  which  is  directed  to  the  anterior 
ra3T,  are  heptagonal.  The  two  latter  plates  have  truncate  upper 
sides,  which  support,  respectively,  a  vertical  row  of  four  very 
similar  hexagonal  pieces ;  one  of  them  is  interradial,  and  succeeded 
by  anal  plates,  the  other  strictly  radial. 

The  third  ring  consists  of  fourteen  plates,  larger  than  those  of 
the  preceding  one.  They  are  not  so  regularly  arranged,  and  more 
variable  in  their  size  and  form.  Twelve  of  them  alternate  with 
the  plates  of  the  second  ring,  while  the  other  two  rest  upon  the 
truncate  upper  side  of  the  heptagonal  pieces  just  described.  By 
this  arrangement  (see  diagram,  PI.  9,  fig.  1),  the  plate  toward  the 
anterior  ray  is  the  only  plate  in  this  ring  which  has  a  radial  posi- 
tion, all  others  being  located  interradially,  two  to  each  of  the  four 
regular  interradial  sides,  four  to  the  azygous  side. 

The  plates  of  the  fourth  ring  differ  considerably  in  form  and 
size,  and  their  whole  arrangement  is  irregular  throughout.  They 
are  sixteen  in  number,  five  radial  in  position,  five  directed  to  the 
anal  side,  one  to  each  side  adjoining  the  anterior  ray,  and  two  to 
each  of  the  other  two  interradial  sides. 

Above  the  fourth  ring,  the  plates  are  readily  recognized  as 
radials  and  interradials.  In  the  specimen  there  are  2X5  radials, 
and  the  interradials  consist  of  three  to  each  of  the  four  regular 
sides,  and  eight  on  the  az}Tgous  side.  The  two  radials  connect 
with  the  radial  plates  of  the  fourth  ring  only  in  the  anterior  ray, 
in  the  four  other  rays  they  are  separated  from  that  ring  by  two 
interradial  pieces,  which  join  underneath. 

In  the  original  description  of  Acrocrinus  Wortheni,  the  plates 
of  the  fourth  ring  were  included  with  the  radials  and  interradials, 
and  the  number  of  the  former  was  given  at  three  in  the  four 


344  PROCEEDINGS  OP   TEE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

lateral  rays,  and  four  in  the  anterior  ray,  the  number  of  inter- 
radials  at  six  to  seven,  with  eighteen  anal  pieces. 

In  this  formula,  the  so-called  first  radials  in  four  of  the  rays  are 
laterall}-  separated  from  the  rest  by  intervening  interradial  pieces, 
a  very  uncommon  but  not  altogether  unprecedented  occurrence 
among  Palreocrinoids.  In  Periechocrinus  the  radials  are  not 
unfrequently  found  connected  by  their  angles  only,  and  some- 
times, but  exceptionally,  one  of  them  is  altogether  separated  from 
the  rest  by  intervening  interradial  plates.  Such  a  feature,  thus 
widely  departing  from  the  usual  mode  of  occurrence,  may  in 
certain  cases  become  a  fixed  and  constant  character,  but  it  must 
not  be  overlooked,  that  by  admitting  the  plates  of  this  upper 
ring  as  radials,  it  becomes  imperative  to  extend  the  term  radials 
to  every  radial  plate  below,  as  each  one  of  them  is  separated 
from  the  preceding  plate  in  a  like  manner.  This  would  increase 
the  number  of  radials  in  Acrocrinus  Wortheni  to  five  (there  was 
evidently  a  small  bifurcating  piece  filling  the  concavity  of  the 
upper  plate)  in  the  lateral  rays,  and  six  in  the  anterior  ra}',  a 
comparatively  small  number  to  what  we  must  expect  to  find  in 
Acrocrinus  Shumardi,  if  we  adopt  the  above  interpretation  for 
these  plates. 

Through  the  kindness  of  Prof.  Whitfield,  we  recently  had  an 
opportunit}'  to  examine  three  specimens  of  the  latter  species  from 
the  Museum  of  Natural  History  of  New  York,  which  have  afforded 
us  additional  information  upon  this  interesting  genus. 

Acrocrinus  Shumardi  is  much  larger  than  Acrocr.  Wortheni, 
and  the  calyx  is  composed  of  six  to  seven  hundred  pieces,  while 
in  the  latter  it  has  less  than  one  hundred.  There  are  two  large 
basals  ;  two  contiguous  radials,  the  lower  one  small,  pentagonal, 
the  other  hexagonal  with  excavated  upper  side  ;  three  interradial 
pieces  arranged  as  in  the  preceding  species,  the  larger  one  resting 
between  both  radials  of  adjoining  rays,  the  two  lower  ones  abut- 
ting against  the  lower  sloping  sides  of  the  second  radials.  The 
above  radials  and  interradials  are  distinctly  separated  from  the 
basals  by  a  belt  of  small  hexagonal  pieces,  which  in  position  are 
partly  radial,  partly  interradial.  They  are  arranged  alternately 
in  rows,  thoee  of  each  successive  series  comparatively  larger ;  but, 
while  in  A.  Wortheni  there  are  only  four  rings  of  from  12  to  14 
pieces,  Yandell's  species  has  14  to  20  rings,  more  or  less,  and  25 
to  30  or  more  plates  in  each  ring.     Counting  as  before  all  plates 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   tHILADELTIIIA.  345 

which  are  radial  in  position  as  radials,and  all  intermediate  plates 
as  interradials,  the  species  possesses  12  and  more  radials  to  the  1  ay, 
and  100  and  more  plates  in  each  interradial  space — an  enormous 
increase  over  the  plates  in  Acrocr.  Wortheni.  Such  a  wide  differ- 
ence in  the  number  of  interradial  plates  among  species  of  the 
same  genus  is  certainly  very  remarkable,  but  might  be  accounted 
for,  as  this  class  of  plates  is  subject  to  great  variation  ;  but  a 
numerical  difference  in  the  primary  radials,  if  such  w:is  the  case, 
would  be  exceptional.  The  primary  radials  are  elements  which, 
once  developed,  do  not  multiply,  but  their  number  is  constant 
throughout  the  genus,  and  we  doubt  if  Acrocrinus  forms  such  a 
remarkable  exception  to  the  rule.  It  seems  to  us  more  probable 
that  only  the  two  large,  contiguous  upper  plates,  and  the  small 
triangular  bifurcating  piece  succeeding  them,  are  radials,  that 
only  the  three  intervening  pieces  in  a  lateral  direction  are  true 
interradials,  and  that  all  lower  plates,  from  the  basals  up,  are 
merely  accessory  pieces,  which  obtained  their  position,  whether 
radial  or  interradial,  accidentally  through  their  alternate  arrange- 
ment, and  the  regularity  with  which  they  are  distributed.  By 
this  interpretation  the  two  species,  which  appeared  to  be  so  widely 
distinct,  are  brought  within  the  limits  of  the  same  rule — both 
having  the  same  number  of  radials,  interradials  and  anal  plates. 
It  is  true  that  accessory  pieces  like  these  are  not  found  dorsally  in 
any  other  genus  of  the  Palseocrinoidea,  but  they  are  not  uncom- 
mon among  Cystideans,and  similar  plates  occur  ventrall}7  in  some 
of  the  larger  Actinocrinidae  and  Rhodocrinidae,  which,  like  those 
of  the  calyx,  increase  numerically  by  age,  being  represented  some- 
times by  a  single  ring,  and  again,  in  the  same  species,  hy  a  wide 
belt  of  pieces.  The  accessory  pieces  in  Acrocrinus  increased  in 
number  by  adding  constantly  new  rings  above  the  basals.  This 
is  well  shown  by  the  small  specimen  of  Acrocrinus  Wortheni,  in 
which  the  plates  of  the  latest  ring  are  yet  triangular,  only  the 
upper  portion  being  developed  ;  and  it  is  further  indicated  by 
the  increase  in  the  size  of  the  plates,  which  is  in  an  upward 
direction. 

In  two  of  the  New  York  specimens,  the  arms  are  partly  pre- 
served, and  in  the  third  one  also  portions  of  the  vault.  Acrocri- 
nus had  a  third  primary  radial,  which  had  not  been  observed  in 
Acrocrinus  Wortheni.  It  is  triangular  and  resembles  the  small 
second  radials  of  Platycrinus,  resting  like  those  within  the  con- 


346  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

cavity  of  the  larger  plate.     There  are  also  secondary  radials,  but 
those  extend  into  free  rays. 

ACROCRINUS  Yandcll. 

Is":,.  Yandell,  Ann  r.  Journ.  Sci.  and  Arts,  vol.  xx  (new  ser.),  p,  135. 

1858    Hall,  Ge  >1.  Rep.  Iowa  i,  PI.  ii,  p.  689. 

1882.   Wacnsmuth,  Bull,  i,  Illinois  St.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  41. 

Revised  Generic  Diagnosis. — Calyx  goblet-cup  or  urn-shaped; 
composed  of  a  large  number  of  plates,  which  increase  in  size 
gradually  from  the  basals  up;  plates  thin  and  without  ornamen- 
tation. 

Basals  two,  comparatively  large,  either  formed  into  a  cup,  or 
thickened  at  the  lower  side  and  extended  into  a  rim;  sometimes 
depressed  and  in  form  of  a  disk.  The  two  plates  are  about  equal, 
their  suture  running  from  the  anterior  to  the  posterior  side;  the 
upper  side  not  excavated. 

Primary  radials  3X5,  separated  from  the  basals  by  a  belt  of 
numerous,  small  hexagonal  pieces,  arranged  alternately  in  rows, 
those  of  each  succeeding  series  comparatively  larger.  The  first 
plate  pentagonal,  resting  with  the  lower  angles  between  the  inter- 
radial  plates  of  adjoining  fields,  the  upper  side  supporting  a 
second  radial.  Second  radials  hexagonal,  more  than  twice  as 
large  as  the  first,  especially  much  wider.  They  abut  by  their 
lower  sloping  sides  against  the  upper  interradials,  and  their 
lateral  faces  rest  against  corresponding  plates  of  adjoining  rays, 
except  toward  the  posterior  side,  where  an  anal  plate  intervenes. 
Their  upper  sides  are  truncate  and  somewhat  excavated.  The 
third  radials  are  axillary,  very  small,  triangular,  sometimes  but 
partly  occupying  the  concavity  of  the  preceding  plate.  The 
higher  orders  of  radials,  so  far  as  known,  are  extended  into  free 
rays  as  in  Platycrinus.  There  are  2X2X5  secondary  radials, 
which  rest  obliquely  against  the  sloping  sides  of  the  triangular 
piece.  They  are  short  but  wide ;  their  inner  sides  connected  by 
a  suture,  the  outer  side  partPy  placed  against  a  second  primary 
radial,  filling  part  of  its  concavit}',  and  partly  extended  beyond 
it.  In  Acrocr.  Shumardi,  the  outer  pair  of  secondary  radials 
gives  oft'  an  arm  ;  the  inner  division  bifurcates  again  at  the  second 
plate,  and  supports  2X2  tertiary  radials  with  an  arm  each,  thus 
giving  three  arms  to  each  main  division,  and  six  to  the  entire  ray. 
The  arm  formula,  however,  may  vary  in  other  species. 


1885.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  347 

Arms  long,  of  nearly  equal  thickness  throughout  their  length. 
They  are  composed  of  two  series  of  very  short  pieces,  alternately 
arranged.  Ventral  furrow  wide  and  deep.  Pinnules  long,  closely 
packed  together,  composed  of  six  to  seven  joints,  three  times 
longer  than  wide. 

Interradials  three,  in  two  series ;  the  first  series  composed  of 
two  plates,  which  rest  upon  the  belt  of  the  supplementary  inter- 
vening pieces  already  described,  and  between  the  sloping  sides  of 
the  second  radials.  The  second  series  consists  of  a  single  piece, 
placed  between  the  upper  sloping  sides  of  the  first  radials,  and 
the  lower  sloping  sides  of  the  second  radials.  The  azj-gous  side 
is  known  onby  in  A.  Wortheni.  In  that  species  it  is  composed  of 
two  hexagonal  anal  plates,  resting  upon  a  row  of  similar  pieces, 
which,  like  those,  are  longitudinally  arranged.  The  upper  anal 
plate  is  placed  in  line  with  the  second  primary  radials,  and  is  higher, 
but  not  quite  so  wide  ;  the  second  plate  is  somewhat  smaller.  At 
each  side  of  the  anal  plates  there  are  three  interradials,  which  are 
formed  and  arranged  like  those  of  the  four  other  sides. 

The  ventral  covering  is  but  imperfectly  known ;  we  only  observed 
numerous  thin,  very  minute,  irregular  pieces,  with  an  elevation 
toward  each  ray.     Position  and  form  of  the  anus  unknown. 

Column  round,  somewhat  tapering  downward,  composed  of 
thin  joints  ;  central  canal  small. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Acrocrinus  is  the  last  and  only  sur- 
viving genus  of  the  Camarata  at  the  close  of  the  subcarbonil'erous. 
It  has  been  found  only  in  the  Mississippi  valley,  where  it  is 
exceedingly  rare. 

1855.  A.  Shumardi  Yandell.  Type  of  the  genus,  Amer.  Journ.  Sci.  and  Arts,  vol.  xx 
(new  ser.),  p.  135  with  figure.  (It  was  previously  figured  without  descrip- 
tion or  name  by  Yandell  and  Shumard,  1817,  in  their  Contrib.  Geol.  Ken- 
tucky, PI.  1,  fig.  3). — Chester  or  Kaskaskia  liinest.     Grayson  Co.,  Ky. 

1858.  A.  urnaeformis  Hall.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  PI.  ii,  p.  690,  PL  25,  fig.  11  a,  b.— 
Chester  or  Kaskaskia  limest.     Pope  Co.,  111. 

1882.  A.  Wortheni  Wachsmuth.  Bull,  i,  111.  .St.  AIus.  Xat.  Hist.,  p.  41;  also  Geol. 
Rep.  111.,  vii,  p.  343,  PI.  30,  fig.  13.— Coal  measures.     Peoria  Co.,  III. 

Family  IX.— BARRANDEOCRINID.E  Angl. 

BARRANDEOCRINTJS  Angl. 

This  is  one  of  the  most  remarkable  forms  of  the  Paloeocrinoidea. 
Looking  at  a  perfect  specimen  with  all  its  arms  intact,  it  super- 


348  PROCEEDINGS  OP   TIIE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

ficially  resembles  a  Blastoid.  However,  with  the  arms  removed, 
it  is  found  to  possess  all  the  essential  characters  of  the  Actino- 
crinidse,  and  doubts  might  be  entertained  whether  it  should  not 
be  grouped  with  that  family.  Angelin  and  Zittel  have  made  it 
the  type  of  a  distinct  family,  and  we  think  the  peculiar  construc- 
tion of  the  arms  and  ventral  side  fully  justifies  this  separation. 
The  arms  of  Barrandeocrinusi  if  we  correctly  understand  the  fig- 
ures,were  permanently  in  a  recumbent  state  or  moved  with  great 
difficulty  ;  they  were  laterally  connected  at  the  tips  of  their  pin- 
nules, at  least  those  of  the  same  ray,  and  could  not  be  closed  in 
the  usual  way. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — In  its  general  outline,  with  the  arms  at- 
tached, resembling  a  Blastoid  ;  form  globose;  calyx,  without  arms, 
cup-shaped.  Arms  arranged  in  pairs;  recumbent;  their  dorsal 
side  directed  toward  the  calyx,  the  ventral  side  exposed  to  view. 
They  are  united  laterally  by  the  tips  of  their  pinnules  so  as  to 
completely  cover  the  calyx,  and  extend  beyond  it  to  the  upper 
part  of  the  column,  which  is  somewhat  indented  for  their  reception. 

Basals  three,  equal.  Primary  radials  (?)  3  X  5,1  the  first  con- 
siderably larger.  The  axillary  radials  support  at  each  upper  side 
a  single  rather  large  secondary  radial,  and  these  support  an  arm 
each.  Interradials  arranged  as  in  the  Actinocrinidae ;  the  four 
regular  sides,  up  to  the  aims,  consisting  of  oi\\y  one  plate,  which 
rests  upon  the  first  radials.  The  axygous  side  has  two  large 
anal  plates ;  the  lower  one  meeting  the  basals,  the  other  placed 
between  the  interradial  which  is  bisected  for  its  reception.  These 
are  succeeded  by  three  much  smaller  and  elongate  interradial 
plates,  and  a  similar  number  of  interaxillary  pieces  of  exactly  the 
same  form  and  arrangement  as  the  three  interradial  ones.  Ven- 
tral surface  deeply  depressed  along  interradial  and  interaxillary 
spaces,  the  depressions  which  grow  deeper  toward  the  equatorial 
zone  alternating  with  ten  flattened  ridges  which  led  to  the  ten  arms. 

Arms  heavy  ;  composed  of  a  single  row  of  closely  set,  quad- 

1  Angelin  slates  that  the  number  of  radials  is  2X5,  while  Zittel  gives  it 
as  3  X  5.  In  Angelin's  figure.  Icon.  Suec.,  PI.  v,  figs.  G,  6  a,  there  appear 
to  be  but  two  primary  radials,  the  second  plate  being  axillary.  But  in  the 
specimens  represented  on  PI.  iv.,  fig.  5  a,  and  PI.  xxii,  fig.  3,  three  of  them 
ar^'  visible,  arranged  as  those  of  Actinocrinus.  It  is  probable  that  the  true 
number  is  three,  and  that  in  the  first  mentioned  specimen  1  he  sutures  be- 
tween the  sccoud  and  third  radials  became  obliterated  by  anchylosis. 


1885.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  349 

rangular  plates,  with  strong,  apparently  immovable  pinnules,  lat- 
erally connected.  The  arms  are  so  closely  folded  together  that 
they  appear  as  if  they  were  suturally  connected,  and  formed 
around  the  calyx  a  solid  body  with  ten  ambulacra  upon  the  surface. 

Column  stout,  circular,  with  pentangular  axial  canal. 

The  only  known  species  is  : 

1S78.  Barrandeocrinus  sceptrum  Angl.     Icono.  Crin.  Suec.  p.  S,  PI.  4,  fig-,  j,  5  a, 
and  PI.  5,  figs.  6,  6a,  and  PI.  22,  figs.  2-4. — Upper  Silur.    Gothland,  Sweden. 


Family  X.— CALYPTOCRINIDJE  Roemer. 

Roemer,  in  proposing  this  family,  used  the  name  Eucalyptocri- 
nidas  (Leth.  Geogn.,  Aug.  3,  1855,  p.  229),  which  was  afterwards 
changed  b}'  Angelin  to  Calyptocrinidae  (Icon.  Crin.  Suec,  1879, 
p.  14).  The  latter  name  was  accepted  by  Zittel,  who  referred  to 
it  also  Lyriocrinus  Hall,  which  we  have  placed  under  the  Rho- 
docrinidre. 

ETJCALYPTOCRINUS  Goldfuss. 

(HYPANTHOCRINUS  Phillips.) 

1826.  Goldfuss.     Petref.  Germ.,  i,  p.  212. 

1835.  Agnssiz.     Mem.  Soc.  des  Sci.  natur.  de  Neucbatel,  i,  p.  197. 

18o8.  Goldfuss.     Nova  Acta.  Leopold.,  xix,  i,  p.  335. 

1841.  Midler.     Eerl.  Acad.  d.  Wissensch.,  p.  210. 

1841.  Hall.     Paleont.  -N.  York,  ii,  p.  207. 

1843.  Roemer.     Rbein.  Nebergangsgeb.,  p.  04. 

1850.  D'Oibgny.     Piodr.  de  Paleont.,  i,  p.  45. 

1852.  Quenstedt.     Handb.  der.  Petrefacteuk.,  p.  624. 

1854.  McCoy  (in  part).     Synops.  Brit.  Palasoz.  Fossils,  p.  57. 

1855.  F.  Roemer.     Letbaea  Geogn.  (Ausg.  3  ,  p.  257. 
1857.  Pxtet.     Traite  de  Paleont.,  iv,  p.  3U7. 

1860.  Bionn.     Klassen  des  Thierreicbs  (Actinozoa),  PI.  27. 

1862.  Hall.     Notice. of  New  Foss.  from  YVald.on,  p.  3. 

1862.  Dujardin  and  Dui  e.     Hist,  natur.  des  Zoopb.  Ecbin.,  p.  115. 

1865.  Hall.     15th  Rep.  N.  Y.  State  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.  p.  32. 

1866.  Scbultze.     Monogr.  Ecbin.  Eifl.  Kalk.,  p.  90. 

1878.  Angelin.     Iconogr.  Crinoid.  Suec,  p.  16. 

1879.  Hall.     28tb  Rep.  N.  Y.  State  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.  (edit,  ii),  Pis.  16-19. 
1879.  Wetberby.     Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  (April),  No.  5. 

1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  der  Paleont.,  i,  p.  379. 

1882.  S.  A.  Miller.     Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  (July). 

(?)  Syn.  Hypanthocrinus  Pbill.,  1839;  Murcbi.-on's  Silur.  System, 
p.  672,  PI.  17,  fig.  3 ;  Zittel,  1879  ;  Angelin,  1878  ;  S.  A.  Miller,  1880. 


350  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

There  is  some  doubt  whether  Hypanthocrinus  Phillips  is  a 
synonym  of  Eucalyptocrinus  or  a  good  genus.  Hypanthocrinus 
was  separated  by  Phillips  simply  upon  the  presence  of  a  column, 
which  Goklfnss  thought  to  be  absent  in  Exicalyptocrinus,  but  as 
E.  rosaceus,  his  type  is  known  to  be  pedunculated,  this  distinc- 
tion fails.  Angelin  and  Zittel,  who  both  uphold  Hypanthocrinus, 
describe  the  base  as  being  less  deeply  funnel-shaped,  the  anal 
tube  as  extending  beyond  the  arms,  and  the  partition  walls  sur- 
rounding the  arms  as  being  constructed  principally  of  a  single 
piece.  A  critical  comparison  has  convinced  us  that  these  charac- 
ters are  not  constant  throughout  the  species.  The'onby  character 
upon  which  a  separation  might  possibly  be  effected,  is  the  pro- 
boscis-like anal  tube,  but  this  part,  unfortunately,  is  rarely  pre- 
served. Some  of  the  American  species  with  a  long  tube  have  a 
deep,  funnel-shaped  base,  while  in  others  with  a  simple  opening, 
the  base  is  comparatively  shallow.  In  all  of  them  the  partition 
walls  between  the  arms  consist  of  two  pieces,  but  in  some  species 
the  lower  one  is  comparatively  longer  than  in  others.  We  shall 
ignore  Hypanthocrinus  until  better  distinctions  are  given. 

Eucalyptocrinus  is  closely  allied  to  Callicrinus,  from  which  it 
differs  in  having  rudimentary  partitions  between  the  arms,  ex- 
tending out  only  a  short  distance,  leaving  the  greater  part  of  the 
arms  free  and  unprotected. 

A  mong  the  species  that  have  been  referred  to  Eucalyptocrinus, 
are  several  which  were  described  from  natural  casts.  We  do  not 
deny  that  their  generic  relations  were  correctly  identified,  nor 
that  differences  of  specific  value  probably  exist  among  them,  but 
we  doubt  if  it  is  possible  for  any  one  to  decide  from  internal 
casts  whether  such  specimens  are  specificall}r  distinct  from  others 
in  which  the  test  is  preserved,  and  hence  consider  them  for  the 
present  as  doubtful  species. 

Troost's  Eucalyptocrinus  conicus,  E.  extensus,  E.  gibbosus,  E. 
Goldfussi,  E.  Itevis,  E.  Nashvillse,  E.  Phillipsii  and  E.  Tennes- 
see, all  from  the  Niagara  of  Western  Tennessee,  are  mere  cata- 
logue names,  no  descriptions  having  been  published. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — When  the  arms  are  attached  more  or  less 
ovoid  ;  without  arms  resembling  a  wine  bottle  with  concave  bot- 
tom and  long  slender  neck.  The  neck  is  surrounded  by  ten  par- 
titions, arranged  vertically  so  as  to  form  ten  niches  or  compart- 
ments for  the  reception  of  the  arms.     The  calyx  is  composed  of 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  351 

heavy  plates,  is  either  cup-  or  saucer-shaped,  with  basal  regions 
deeph'  concave,  somewhat  funnel-shaped.  In  the  dorsal  cup  the 
pentamerous  sj'mmetry  is  interrupted  by  the  basals  only ;  at  the 
ventral  side,  however,  it  is  greatly  disturbed.  Anus  central,  lo- 
cated at  the  top  of  the  neck-like  prolongation,  or  at  the  end  of 
a  tube. 

Basals  four,  small,  unequal  in  size,  one  of  them  larger  than  the 
rest;  axial  canal  five-rayed;  its  radii  directed  interradially,  there 
being  two  of  them  in  the  larger  plate.  As  a  rule  the  basals  are 
not  seen  externally,  being  placed  at  the  upper  end  of  the  concav- 
ity, which  also  involves  the  greater  part  of  the  first  radials,  and 
frequently  other  plates. 

Radials  in  three  orders,  the  tertiary  radials,  however,  imper- 
fectly developed,  and  taking  rather  the  form  of  brachials.  Pri- 
mary radials  3X5;  the  first  one  large,  wider  than  the  other  two ; 
the  second  quadrangular,  wider  than  high;  the  third  hexagonal, 
its  upper  side  truncate  for  the  reception  of  an  interaxillary  plate. 
Secondaiy  radials  2  X  2  X  5,  all  pentangular,  the  lower  series  larger 
than  the  upper,  those  of  the  same  division  connected  by  horizon- 
tal suture.  The  upper  secondary  radial  is  axillaiy,  and  supports 
the  tertiary  radials,  which  are  composed  of  two  short  transverse 
pieces  supporting  the  arms. 

Dorsal  interradials  three  to  each  interradius,  throughout  the 
genus,  in  young  as  well  as  in  adult  specimens.  The  lower  one  is 
the  largest  plate  in  the  calyx,  and  always  decagonal.  The  two 
upper  plates  are  connected  by  a  vertical  suture  to  their  full 
length,  and  both  combined  are  smaller  than  the  lower  one.  Their 
upper  ends  form  a  narrow  quadrangular  projection,  which  extends 
to  the  top  of  the  tertiary  radials,  and  supports  upon  its  truncate 
upper  side  the  interradial  partition  walls.  The  interaxillary  plates 
of  the  dorsal  side  consist  of  a  single  piece  in  each  ray,  placed 
between  the  secondary  radials.  In  form  and  dimensions  it  resem- 
bles most  remarkably  the  two  upper  interradial  plates,  its  upper 
end  projecting  in  a  similar  manner  to  the  top  of  the  tertiary 
radials,  and  also  supporting  a  partition.  The  peculiar  projections 
between  the  arm  sockets  give  to  the  specimen  a  very  marked 
appearance,  and  when  the  ventral  side  is  not  preserved,  form  a 
reliable  guide  for  generic  identification. 

The  ventral  side  consists  of  four  rings  of  plates.  The  lower 
ring  is  composed  of  five  elongate  interradials,  which  rest  upon 


352  PROCEEDINGS   OF   TIIE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

the  projecting  faces  of  the  interradials  at  the  dorsal  side.  There 
are  five  interaxillary  plates  of  a  similar  form,  supported  by  the 
dorsal  interaxillaries,  and  ten  small  triangular  interbrachial  pieces, 
interposed  in  such  a  manner  between  the  foregoing  plates  that 
always  an  interradial  and  an  interaxillary  meet  laterally  above 
an  interbrachial.  The  second  and  third  rings  consist  of  four 
plates  each;  the  fourth  of  ten.  The  two  former  ones  together 
form  the  neck-like  prolongation  of  the  body,  and  the  plates  of  the 
fourth  ring,  combined  with  those  of  the  first  ring,  the  partition 
walls  encasing  the  arms. 

The  interradials  and  interaxillaries  of  the  first  ring  are  uniform 
in  size  and  shape  ;  they  are  knife-like,  their  blunt  sides  exposed 
to  view,  their  sharp  edges  turned  inward.  Toward  the  lower  end 
where  the  plates  decrease  in  depth,  lateral  flanges  project  out 
from  their  inner  edges,  which  unite  suturally,  and  enclose  the 
visceral  cavity,  while  the  knife-like  outer  portions,  as  we  under- 
stand it,  are  merely  extraordinary  protuberances,  like  the  nodes 
or  spines  in  some  Actinocrinidae,  but  forming  by  means  of  their 
connected  wing-like  extensions  a  cover  or  protection  for  the 
arms. 

The  plates  of  the  second  ring  fit  into  the  ten  angles  formed  by 
the  preceding  plates,  but  do  not  alternate  with  them.  Two  of 
them  are  a  little  wider,  and  these  are  alternately  arranged  with 
the  smaller  ones.  The  two  narrower  plates  are  generally  longer, 
angular  above,  while  the  two  others  are  truncate,  and  their  lateral 
faces  slightly  sloping  upward.  When  united,  they  form  a  funnel 
with  the  narrow  opening  upward.  Transversely  they  form  a  ring 
with  ten  protuberances,  which  on  their  outer  surface  represent 
longitudinal  ridges.  The  ridges  correspond  in  position  with  the 
interradial  and  interaxillary  partition  walls  which  overlap  them, 
while  the  alternate  grooves  form  the  inner  angle  of  the  niches. 

The  third  ring,  like  the  second,  consists  of  four  plates,  but 
these,  as  a  rule,  are  not  so  large,  and  have  a  more  irregular 
arrangement  ;  two  of  them  are  generally  shorter,  and  do  not 
touch  those  of  the  preceding  ring.  They  are  provided  at  their 
outer  faces  with  ten  longitudinal  ridges,  which,  to  their  full 
length,  are  overlapped  by  the  partition  walls,  which  extend  down- 
ward from  the  fourth  ring  of  plates. 

The  plates  of  the  fourth  ring  are  constructed  upon  a  similar 
plan  as  those  of  the  first  ring.     Like  those,  they  consist  of  ten 


1885.]  NATUKAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  353 

pieces,  but  they  undergo  more  variations  among  species,  and  show- 
more  irregularities  than  any  of  the  other  plates.  In  some  species 
they  are  confined  almost  exclusively  to  the  upper  face,  being  mere 
top  pieces  ;  in  others  they  represent  an  important  part  in  the  par- 
tition walls,  while  in  still  others  they  extend  deeply  down  into 
the  tubular  neck,  forming  the  upper  part  of  its  walls.  In  all 
cases,  however,  their  obtuse  edges  are  turned  outward,  and  form 
the  upper  part  of  the  partition,  being  suturally  connected  with 
the  lower  part  of  them. 

The  plates  covering  the  tubular  neck,  i.  e.,  anal  plates,  consist 
of  small  pieces,  with  a  somewhat  subcentral  opening,  or,  as  in 
Eucalyptocrinus  rigens  Angelin,  of  valvular  plates.  Sometimes 
they  are  extended  into  a  free  tube,  composed  of  hexagonal  pieces. 
The  arrangement  of  the  plates  surrounding  the  anal  opening  is 
more  regular  than  it  appears  from  some  specimens.  The  apparent 
irregularities  are  caused  largeby  by  the  plates  of  the  third  ring, 
which,  in  some  species,  have  their  upper  ends  partly  exposed. 

The  arms  are  arranged  in  pairs,  each  pair  filling  one  of  the  ten 
compartments,  with  an  interradial  partition  wall  on  one  side,  and 
an  interaxillary  one  on  the  other.  The  arms  evidently  moved 
with  difficulty,  being  heavy,  and  in  the  adult  composed  of  two 
rows  of  short  transverse  pieces,  with  horizontal  sutures,  but  there 
was  a  single  row  of  wedge-shaped  pieces  in  3roung  specimens. 
They  have  a  deep  ventral  furrow,  and  long  pinnules  composed  of 
numerous  joints,  which  gradually  decrease  in  width.  The  arms 
and  pinnules  are  so  closely  fitted  into  the  partition  walls,  that 
when  the  arms  are  perfectly  closed,  it  appears  as  if  they  were 
suturally  connected  and  constituted  a  part  of  the  body. 

The  visceral  cavity  actually  is  formed  only  by  the  plates  of  the 
dorsal  cup  and  by  the  two  lower  rings  of  plates  in  the  vault,  the 
plates  of  the  two  upper  ones  forming  the  neck-like  prolongation. 
The  food  grooves  enter  the  calyx  at  the  base  of  the  arms,  and 
proceed  within  shallow  grooves  at  the  inner  floor  to  near  the  top 
of  the  second  ring.  The  hydrospires  evidently  extended  to  the 
lower  portion  of  the  neck,  and  perhaps  (?)  communicated  with 
the  exterior  through  the  anal  aperture,  as  apparently  no  other 
opening  except  the  ambulacral  passages  enter  the  body. 

The  column  is  moderately  large,  cylindrical,  composed  of  rather 
long  joints,  with  pentapetalous  central  canal.  It  evidently  had  no 
lateral  cirrhi,  except  at  the  root,  where  it  gives  off  hundreds  of 

24 


354  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY  OF  [1885. 

little    rootlets,  which   gradually   taper,  spreading   out   horizon- 
tally. 

Eucalyptocrinus  is  one  of  the  most  perplexing  genera,  especi- 
ally by  reason  of  its  peculiar  ventral  structure.  The  only  ventral 
plates  aboul  which  there  seems  to  he  no  doubt  are  those  of  the 
firsl  ring,  which  have  been  designated  by  all  writers  as  large  inter- 
radials  and  interaxillaries,  i.  e.,  interdistichalia.  More  dubious 
arc  those  of  the  second  ring,  which  partly  cover  the  peristome. 
They  fit  with  their  projecting  angles  into  the  ten  re-entering  angles 
formed  by  the  sloping  sides  of  the  preceding  plates.  The  plates 
of  the  one  ring  practically  alternate  with  those  of  the  other,  for 
by  bisecting  the  two  smaller  plates,  and  dividing  the  larger  ones 
into  three  pieces,  we  obtain  ten  nearly  equal  plates,  alternately 
arranged,  thus  proving  that  the  plates  are  not  in  part  interaxil- 
laries; but  what  are  they?  We  doubt  if  they  are  calyx  inter- 
radials;  the  fact  that  there  are  four  plates  is  certainly  a  very 
serious  objection.  By  dividing  the  plates  among  the  five  inter- 
radii,  some  of  the  pieces  would  be  distributed  among  different 
areas.  Another  interpretation  seems  to  us  more  probable,  and 
offers  at  t  he  same  time  an  explanation  of  the  plates  in  the  third  ring. 

The  proximals  and  the  oral  plate,  in  all  Palaeocrinoids  with 
nearly  central  anal  tube,  are  pushed  to  the  anterior  side,  and  the 
oral  plat  i-  and  the  two  smaller  proximals  constitute  actually  a  part 
of  the  tube  of  which  the  four  larger  proximals  form  the  base.  We 
think  the  ease  is  very  similar  in  Eucalyptocrinus, but  here,  owing 
to  the  strictly  central  position  of  the  anal  tube,  not  only  one  of 
the  proximals,  but  also  the  oral  plate  is  penetrated  by  the  anal 
passage,  and  divided  into  two  parts.  This,  if  correct,  suggests 
thai  in  Eucalyptocrinus  the  four  plates  of  the  second  ring  repre- 
sent the  four  large  proximals,  a  view  which  seems  to  be  confirmed 
by  the  peculiar  arrangement  of  the  plates  in  the  third  ring,  in 
which  we  consider  that  the  two  smaller  ones  represent  the  two 
smaller  proximals,  while  the  two  larger  pieces,  which  rest  upon 
all  plates  of  the  second  ring,  are  equivalent  to  the  oral  plate. 
This  would  further  suggest,  that  the  ten  plates  in  the  fourth  ring 
:irr  extravagantly  developed  anal  plates. 

Geological  position,  etc. —  Eucalyptocrinus  is  one  of  the  leading 
genera  of  the  Upper  Silurian,  and  it  occurs  in  America  and 
Europe.     A  single  species  is  known  from  the  Devonian. 

The  following  species  have  been  described: — 


1885.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  355 

(?)  1865.  Eucalyptocr.  chicagoensis  Winch.  &  Marcy.  Mem.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist., 
vol.  i,  No.  1,  ]).  90. — Niagara  gr.,  Chicago,  111.  (Described  from  casts. 
1-4.:.  E.  coelatus  Hall  (Hypanthocrinus  coelatus  .  Geol.  4th  Distr.  X.  V.,  p.  113, 
tig.  1.— F.  Roemer,  L855,  Leth.  Geogn.  (Aug.  3),  p.  260.  E.  coelatus 
1852.  Hall.  Palaeont.,  N.  Y.,  p.  210,  PI.  47.  tigs.  4«-c;  F.  Roemer,  1868, 
Silur.  Fauna  West.  Tenn.,  p.  48,  PL  4,  &g.  3;  Hall,  1865,  Trans.  Alb. 
Inst.  (Abstr.,  p.  32);  also  20th  Rep.  N.  Y.  State  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  pp. 
321-329  (Revised  Edit.,  pp.  363-366);  28th  Rep.  N.  Y.  State  Cab.  Nat. 
Hist.,  p.  142,  PI.  16,  figs.  1-10,  and  PI.  19,  figs.  L-3;  also  11th  Ann. 
•  icil.   Rep.  Indiana,  p.  274,  with  plates, — Niagara  gr.     Loekport,  X.  Y. 

(?)  1S64.  E.  cornutus  Hall.  New  or  little  known  Foss.  Niagara  gr.,  p.  18;  also  1865, 
18th  Rep.  N.Y.  State  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  .".22,  PI.  11,  figs.  8-10.— Niagara 
gr.  Waukesha  and  Racine,  Wise.  (Described  from  casts,  i 
Var.  excavatus  Hall.  1864.  New  or  little  known  Foss.  Niagr.  gr.,  p.  18; 
also  18th  Rep.  N.  Y.  State  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  322,  PI.  11,  figs.  8-10.— 
Niagara  gr.  Racine,  Wise. 
1879.  E.  constrictus  Hall.     Trans.  Alb.  Inst.,  vol.  x  (Abstr.,  p.  10);  also  11th  Ann. 

Geol.  Rep.  Indiana,  p.  273,  PI.  15,  fig.  1. — -Niagara  gr.  Waldron,  Ind. 
1S63.  E.  crassus  Hall.  Trans.  Alb.  Inst.,  vol.  iv,  p.  197  ;  18th  Rep.  N.  Y.  State  Cab. 
Nat.  Hist.,  p.  323,  PL  11,  figs.  2,  3  (Revised  Edit.,  p.  365):  also  28th 
Rep.  N.  Y.  State  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  141,  and  PI.  17.  figs.  1-11,  and  PI. 
18,  figs.  1-9;  also  PI.  19,  figs.  2,  4,  5  ;  Eleventh  Ann.  Rep.  Indiana,  1851, 
p.  27,  PI.  17,  figs.  1-11,  and  PI.  18,  figs.  1-9;  Geol.  Surv.  Ohio,  Paleont., 
ii,  p.  129,  PI.  6,  fig.  11  (Green  Co.,  O.). — Niagara  gr.     Waldron,  Ind. 

1839.  E.  decorus  Phill.  (Hypanthocr.  decorus)  Murch.  Silur.  Syst.  p.  672,  PI.  17, 
fig.  3 ;  also  Hall,  1843,  Geol.  4th  Dist.  N.  Y.,  p.  113,  figs.  2-3.  Eucalyp- 
tocr. decorus  Hall,  1852,  Paleont,  N.  Y.,  vol.  ii,  p.  207,  PI.  47,  figs.  1-3  ; 
and  PI.  85,  fig.  7  ;  also  McCoy,  Synops.  Brit.  Palaeoz.  Foss,  p.  58 ;  also  F. 
Roemer  Leth.  Geogn.,  1855  (Aug.  3,  p.  259);  Dujardin  and  Hupe,  1862, 
Hist,  natur.  des  Zooph.  Echinod.,  p.  116. — Rochester  and  Loekport,  N.  Y., 
and  Dudley,  Engl.  (?) 
1878.  E,  decoratus  Angelin.  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  17,  PI.  5,  figs.  4,  4  a. — Upper 
Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

(?)  1880.  E.  depressus  S.  A.  Miller.  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  (October),  PI.  7, 
figs.  1,  1  a. — Niagara  gr.     Chicago,  111.     (Described  from  a  cast.) 

(?)  1880.  E.  Egani  S.  A.  Miller.     Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  iii,  PI.  4,  fig.  1. 
— Niagara  gr.     Chicago,  III.     (Described  from  easts.) 
1878.  E.  excellentissimus  Angelin.     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec.,  p.  16,  PI.  24,  fig.  15. — 

Upper  Silurian.  Gothland,  Sweden. 
1847.  E.  granulatus  (Lewis i  Morris  (Hypanthocr.  granulatus).  London  Geol. 
Journ.,  Part  3,  p.  99,  PI.  21,  figs.  I  5  ;  also  Angelin,  Icouogr.  Crin.  Suec, 
1878,  p.  18,  PI.  6,  figs.  3,  4;  also  PI.  24,  figs.  10-12;  and  PI.  29,  figs.  69, 
70-74. — Upper  Silurian.  Walsall,  Engl.,  and  Gothland,  Sweden. 
1875.  E.  magnus  Worthen.  Geol.  Rep.  Illinois,  vol.  vi,  p.  501,  PI.  25,  fig.  3.— Ni- 
agara gr.     Wayne  Co.,  Tenn. 

*1878.  E.  minor  Angelin  (Hypanthocr.  minor).  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  17,  PI.  6, 
fig.  1:  also  pi.  21,  tigs.  9-13. — Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

(?)  1864.  E.  obconicus  Hall.  New  or  little  known  Foss.  Niagr.  gr.,  p.  19 ;  also  ]sG5, 
18th  Rep.  N.  Y.  State  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  323,  PI.  11,  fig.  1.— Niagara  gr. 
Racine,  Wise.     (Described  from  internal  casts.) 


35H  PBOOEEDING8   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

L861.  E.  ornatus   Sail.     Rep.  of  Progress  of  Geol.  Surv.  Wise.,  |>.  20. — Niagara 
gr.     Raoine,  w  is<         Described  from  internal  casts.) 

is. ,n.  E.  ovalis  Troost.     Proo.  A.  A.  A.  Sci.,  p.  60;  Hall,  1876. 

(E.  ovatus  Ball.  Not  Angelin,  was  printed  in  place  of  E.  ovalis.)  Doc. 
Edit.,  IMS.  p.  1  ■(:;.  PI.  17,  tigs.  12,  13;  also  11th  Ann.  Geol.  Rep.  Indiana, 
with  plates. — Niagara  gr.     Waldron,  Ind. 

1878.  E.  ovatus  Ingelin.  Iconogr.  Crin.  Snec.,  p.  17,  PI.  5,  tigs.  1,  2. — Upper  Si- 
lurian.    Gothland,  Sweden. 

1852,  E.  papulosus  Hall.  Paleont.  Rep.  N.  Fork,  vol.  ii,  p.  211,  PL  47,  tigs.  5  a,  b; 
also  P.  Roemer,  Leth.  Geogn.,  1855  (Aug.  3,  p.  260). — Niagara  gr.  Mon- 
roe Co.,  N.  Y. 

I  "7s.  E.  plebejus  Angelin.     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  17,  PI.  5,  tig.  7. —  Upper  Silu- 
rian.    ( inthland,  Sweden. 
1882.  E.  proboscidalis  S.  A.  Miller.    Cincin.  Jour.  Nat.  Hist.  (December),  p.  224. 
—  Niagara  gr.     Pontiac,  0.     (Described  from  internal  casts.) 

I860.  E.  ramifer  Roemer.  Silur.  Fauna  West.  Tenn.,  p.  51.,  PI.  4,  fig.  I. — Niagara 
gr.     Decatur  Co.,  Tenn. 

ls:!7.  E.  regularis  (Hisinger),  Actinocr.  regularis.  Lethaea  Snec.  (Suppl.  2),  p. 
6,  PI.  39,  tig.  0.— Hypanthocr.  regularis  Angelin,  1878,  [conogr.  Crin. 
Suec,  p.  17,  PI.  6,  fig.  2;  and  PI.  24,  figs.  Ll-20;  and  PI.  29,  tigs.  :!5-64. 
Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

1878.  E.  rigens  Angelin.  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  17,  PI.  9,  tig.  J.'.;  and  PI.  24,  figs. 
16-19-21  :  and  PI.  29,  tig.-.  30,  :J.l.— Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

1826.  E.  rosaceus  Goldf.  (Type  of  the  genus).  Petref.  German,  i,  p. 214,  PI.  64,  fig. 
7:  also  Nov.  Acta  Leop.  xix.  p.  335,  PI.  :!0,  tig.  6.  Agassi/.,  L835,  Mem. 
des  Sci.  natur.  de  Neuchat.  i,  p.  197  ;  also  F.  Roemer,  Rhein.  Nehor- 
gangsgeb.,  p.  64.  De  Koninck  and  Lehon,  Crinoid.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  7:;: 
also  Roemer,  Leth.  Geogn.,  1855  (Aug.  3),  p.  259,  PI.  4,  ligs.  20  a-c,  and 
PI.  4,  figs.  11  a-c  Dujardin  and  Dup6,  1862,  Hist,  natur.  des.  Zooph. 
Echinod.,  p.  116;  Bronn,  Klassen  d.  Thierreichs  (Actinozoa),  PI.  27,  fig. 
2  :  Picte"t,  1857,  Traitg  de  Palgont.  iv,  PI.  c,  fig.  1;  Schultze,  1866,  Mon- 
<>gr.  Ecbin.  Eifler  Kalk.,  p.  90,  PI.  11,  figs.  1-  14.— Lower  Devonian.  Eifel, 
Germany. 

'    1882.  E.  rotundus  S.  A.  Miller.     Cincin.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  v  (July),  PI.  :i, 
tig.  4. — Niagara  gr.      Chicago,  111.     (Deseribed  from  easts.) 

ls;s.  E.  speciosus  Angelin,  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  16,  PI.  5,  tig.  ::.  and  PI.  29,  figs. 
27-29  and  32-34.— Upper  Silur.     Gothland.  Sweden. 

Is;;.  E.  splendidus  (Troosl )  Hall.  Geol.  Surv.  Ohio,  Paleont.  ii.  p.  12s,  1'l.ti.  fig.  12. 
Niagara  gr.     Springfield,  0. 

'    L878.  E.  tuberculatus  Miller  and  Dyer,  Journ.  Cincin.  Soo.  Nat.  Hist.  (April),  PL 
2,  tigs.  9,  9a.  —  Niagara  gr.     Waldron,  Ind. —  Evidently  a  mere  variety  of 
E.  coelatus  Hall. 
i?)  1882.  E.  turbinatus  S.    \.  Miller,  Cincin.  Journ.   Nat.   Hist.,  vol.  v  (.Inly),  PI. 
\  5.  —  Niagara  gr.     Chicago,  III. —  Described  from  internal  oasts. 

Note. — Eucalyptocrinus  polydactylus  McCoy,  is  a  Corymborrin>/8,  and 
E.  armo8us  McChesney  is  too  imperfectly  known  for  identification. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  357 

CALLICRINUS  D'Orbigny. 

1850.  D'Orbigny  {Calliocrinus),  Prodr.  i,  p.  45. 

1878.  Angelin  (OaUicrmvs),  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  14. 

1879.  Zittel  (Callicrinus),  Handb.  d.  Paleont.  i,  p.  378. 

Syn.  Eugeniacrinites  Hisinger  (not  Miller),  1857,  Leth.  Suec,  p.  86. 

Callicrinus  {Calliocrinus  d'Orbigny)  may  be  considered  as  a 
transition  form  between  C or ymbocrinus  of  the  Actinocrinidse  and 
Eucalyptocrinus.  It  possesses  the  structural  peculiarities  of  the 
latter,  but  these  are  not  so  distinctly  expressed,  and  it  appears 
as  if  the  genus  represented  an  earlier  phase  in  the  development 
of  this  family.  In  both  genera,  the  dorsal  and  ventral  side  is 
composed  of  plates  of  a  similar  kind  and  like  number,  and  both 
have  partitions  ventrally  ;  but,  while  those  of  Eucalyptocrinus 
surround  the  arms  on  all  sides,  the  partitions  of  Callicrinus  are 
rudimentary,  the  greater  part  of  the  arms  being  uninclosed. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Calyx  as  in  Eucalyptocrinus,  extending  to 
the  tips  of  arms,  resembling  a  wine  bottle  with  long,  slender  neck, 
and  deep  concavity  at  the  bottom,  but  the  partition  walls,  in  place 
of  forming  deep  niches,  consist  only  of  braces  between  the  arm 
bases,  projecting  out  between  the  lower  portions  of  the  arms  ;  not 
extending  in  height  beyond  the  limits  of  the  first  ring  of  plates. 
Anus  central.  The  plates  are  frequentby  ornamented,  sometimes 
nodose,  and  certain  plates  spiniferous. 

Form  of  calyx,  number  and  arrangement  of  plates  as  in  Euca- 
lyptocrinus. Dorsal  cup  composed  of  four  basals  ;  3  ><  5  primary, 
2X2X5  secondary,  and  1X2X10  tertiary  radials  ;  always  3X5 
interradials  and  one  interaxillary.  Ventral  side  composed  of  four 
rings  of  plates ;  the  first  ring  containing  five  interradials,  five 
interaxillaries,  and  ten  interbrachial  pieces.  The  interbrachials, 
as  a  rule,  are  somewhat  larger  than  those  of  Eucalyptocrinus,  and 
they  are  provided,  like  the  interradials  and  interaxillaries,  with  a 
projecting  brace,  but  less  prominent  than  those  of  the  other 
plates.  The  latter  are  always  stronger,  and  sometimes  extended 
into  a  long  spine.  The  twenty  braces  or  partition  walls  are 
arranged  parallel  to  each  other,  and  vertically  along  the  median 
part  of  the  plates.  The  second  ring,  if  our  interpretation  is  cor- 
rect, consists  of  the  four  large  proximals  (compare  our  remarks 
in  Eucalyptocrinus) ;  the  third  ring  of  the  divided  oral  or  central 
plate  and  the  two  smaller  proximals,  which  agree  in  their  form 
and  arrangement  with  those  in  Eucalyptocrinus.     The  plates  of 


3f>8  I'KoCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

the  fourth  ring,  which  form  the  upper  part  of  the  neck,  are 
generally  composed  of  four  plates,  forming  a  tubular  cavity, which 

is  covered  by  small  pieces  surrounding  the  anal  opening.  There 
are  no  Lateral  extensions  along  these  plates,  but  the  upper  end  is 
frequently  provided  with  a  thickened  rim,  sometimes,  however, 
extended  into  long  spines,  which  are  spread  out  horizontally. 

Arms  twenty,  not  extending  beyond  the  top  of  the  tubular 
neck;  they  are  composed  of  two  series  of  interlocking  pieces, 
and  are  provided  with  long  pinnules,  composed  of  six  or  more 
elongate  joints.  The  arms  rest  within  the  niches  formed  by  the 
braces,  the  greater  portion  of  them  remaining  free. 

Column  round,  composed  of  rather  long  joints  with  a  medium- 
sized,  apparently  circular  canal. 

Geological  Position,  etc. —  Gallicrinus  has  been  recognized  only 
from  the  Upper  Silurian  of  Sweden ;  it  is  possible,  however,  that 
some  of  the  casts  described  from  the  Niagara  group  of  Wisconsin 
represent  this  genus. 

1878.  Callicrinus  beyrichianus  Angelin,  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  15,  PI.  2,  fig.  6. — 
Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

L837.  C.  costatus  (Hisinger),  Eugeniacrinites  i  ?)  rostatus,  Lethaea  Suec.,  p.  90,  PI.  30, 
fig.  1 4  a  I) ;  D'Orbigny,  1850,  Calliocrinus  costatus  (  Type  of  the  genus),  Pro- 
drome i,  p.  45;  Angelin,  1878,  Callicrinus  costatus,  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec, 
p.  15,  PI.  1,  fig.  6,  and  PI.  2,  figs.  1-4:  PI.  21,  figs.  4,  5;  also  PI.  24,  figs.  23- 
26  ;  PI.  28,  figs.  19-22  and  24,  25;  also  PI.  29,  figs.  1-26  and  65-68.— Upper 
Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

1878.  C.  diadema  Angelin,  [conogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  16,  PI.  28,  figs.  27,  27  a.— Upper 
Silurian,      (iuthland,  Sweden. 

1878.  C.  koninckianus  Angelin,  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  15,  PI.  1,  figs.  4,  4  a,  and  PI. 
28,  figs.  18-26.— Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

1878.  C.  minor  Angelin,  [conogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  16,  PI.  25,  tig.  15. — Upper  Silurian. 
i  lothland,  Sweden. 

1878.  C.  murchisouiauus  Angelin,  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  15,  PI.  1,  fig.  :;,  and  PI, 
2S,  lij^s.  11-17. — Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

L878.  C.  rcbmerianus  Angelin,  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  15,  PI.  1.  figs.  1,2,  and  PI. 
28,  fig.  23.—  Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

1878.  C.  sedgwickianus  Angelin,  [conogr.  Crin.  Suec.,  \>.  15,  PI.  1,  fig.  5. — Upper 
nrian.      ( rOthland,  Sweden. 


1885.J  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  359 


CORRECTIONS. 

On  p.  252  ( Ex.  Ed.,  p.  30),  2d  line  from  bottom,  read  :  "wholly  or  partly" 
before  the  word  "ventrally." 

On  p.  268  (Ex.  Ed.,  p.  40),  10th  line  from  top,  we  stated  that  Prof.  Zittel 
had  been  the  next  writer  after  Prof.  Allman,  who  acknowledged  the  presence 
of  orals  in  Ilaplocrinus,  Coccocrinus,  and  the  Cyathocrinidse  ;  we  discovered 
however  since  that  Dr.  Carpenter  already  alludes  to  them  in  his  paper  of 
April,  1879,  while  Prof.  ZitteFs  Handbuch  der  Palaeontologie  appeared  in 
January,  1880. 

On  p.  275  (Ex.  Ed.,  p.  53),  9th  line  from  top,  read :  " peristomeal  area" 
in  place  of  "tentacular  vestibule." 

On  p.  280  (Ex.  Ed.,  p.  58),  2d  line  from  bottom,  after  the  woid  Allagecrinus 
insert  the  following:  "in  which  the  whole  ventral  side  were  constructed  of 
actinal  plates."1 

On  p.  281  (Ex.  Ed.,  p.  59),  13th  line  from  bottom,  read:  "the  latter  are 
rarely  perforated"  in  place  of  "not  perforated." 

On  p.  284  (Ex.  Ed.,  p.  62),  16th  line  from  bottom,  in  place  of  "and  that 
these  C'rinoids  possessed  an  orocentral  nervous  system  like  all  other 
Echinoderms,  except  the  JSTeocrinoidea,  in  which  the  nervous  system,  as 
now  generally  admitted,  is  connected  with  the  chambered  organ  within  the 
basal  cavity,"  insert  the  following:  ''and  that  perhaps  in  these  C'rinoids, 
contrary  to  others,  and  to  the  Ncocrinoidea  generally,  the  entire  nervous  system 
was  located  at  the  oral  side,  in  conformity  with  other  Echinoderms." 

On  p.  293  (Ex.  Ed.,  p.  71 ),  4th  line  from  bottom,  in  place  of  "were  covered" 
read :  "were  succeeded." 

On  p.  294  (Ex.  Ed.,  p.  72),  at  the  top  of  page,  we  expressed  our  surprise 
that  Dr.  P.  H.  Carpenter  admitted  calyx  interradials  in  Apioerinus  roissyanus 
and  not  in  A.  Meriani,  A.  Rathieri  and  A.  murchisonianus.  On  pp.  149-151, 
and  also  on  p.  183  in  the  Challenger  Report,  and  wherever  Dr.  Carpenter 
speaks  of  calyx  interradials  in  Neocrinoidea,  he  refers  to  the  genera 
Quettardicrinus,  Uintarvinus  and  to  Apioerinus  roissyanus,  without  men- 
tioning the  three  other  well-known  species,  in  which  plates  are  distributed 
interradially  likewise,  and  in  a  similar  manner.  All  this  led  us  to  the 
conclusion  that  he  regarded  the  plate.-,  of  the  latter  species  as  wholly 
perisomic.  Dr.  Carpenter  informed  us  since  that  he  never  I  eld  such  view, 
and  that  he  regards  the  plates  in  question  in  all  four  species  as  representing 
substantially  the  same  thing.  It  must  be,  further  stated  that  Dr.  Carpenter 
admits  in  A.  roissyanus  as  calyx  interradials  the  whole  series  of  plates  up 
to  the  top  of  the  second  radials,  and  not  only  the  first  plate,  as  we  thought 
to  infer  from  his  figure  on  p.  1">0.  and  from  his  descriptions.  "We  are 
pleased  to  make  this  correction,  at  the  same  time  we  are  at  a  loss  to  know 
where  the  small  plates  commence  to  which  the  letter  i  alludes,  and  which, 
as  stated  by  Carpenter  himself  (Challenger  Rep.,  p.  150\  "pass  gradually 
upwards  into  those  of  the  ventral  side." 


3K0  PROCREPINGS^OP   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

EXPLANATION   OF  THE    PLATES. 

I'h,  following  letU  ra  art  employed  throughout  all  the  plates. 

a       azygous  plates. 
b      basals. 

br  =  brachials. 

e  =  column,  and  sections  of  the  column. 
<■'/       centrodorsal. 
cr  =  compound  radial. 

d  =  interaxillaries. 

e  =  covering  plates  (Saumpliittchen). 

h  =  nou-arm-bearing  radials. 

i  —  interradials  (dorsally  and  ventrally). 

o  =  oral  plate  or  plates. 

p       proxiinals. 

r  =  radials  in  the  calyx  and  summit. 

r1  =  first  radial. 

r2  =  second  radial. 

t  =  plate  of  the  ventral  tube. 

u  =  underbasals. 
wp  =  water-pore. 

I        anal  plates. 
.10  =  anal  opening. 

rr   -  posterior  radials  enclosed  in  the  ring  of  proximals. 

J=  interradially. 
ZZ       azygous  interradius. 

The  diagrams  on  Plate  6  are  designed  to  show  the  position  of  basals 
and  underbasals  to  the  different  parts  of  the  column  ;  those  of  Plates  7 
and  8.  to  show  the  relation  of  the  summit-plates  with  each  other  and  with 
adjoining  plates. 

EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE  IV. 

Fig.  1.  Cupressocrinus  abbreviatus  Goldfuss,  showing  the  consolidated 
muscle-plates,  the  axial  canals,  arm  openings,  and  the  position  of  the 
anal  aperture. 

Fig.  2.  Ventral  aspect  of  Cyathocrinus  Gilesi.  The  interradials  crowned 
by  mliercles,  and  resting  against  the  incurved  ends  of  the  radials. 

FlO.  3.  similar  view  of  another  specimen,  showing  the  interradials  in  the 
same  position,  but  partly  covered  by  perisomic  plates,  which  connect 
with  the  outer  edges  of  the  incurved  ends  of  the  radials. 

Fig.  4.  Impression  "t  the  ventral  side  of  a  specimen  of  Teleiocrinus.  The 
radiating  ridges  represent  paired  canals  along  the  inner  floor  of  the 
test.     The  original  is  in  the  collection  of  Mr.  R.  R.  Rowley. 

Fig.  5.  Ventral  side  of  D»rycrinue  Missouriensis.  The  ambulacral  tubes 
are  exposed  only  close  to  the  arm-bases,  disappearing  toward  the  centre 
beneath  the  infiltrating  material. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  361 

Fig.  6.  Cyathocrinuxmultibrachiatus.  Ventral  surface  showing  the  perisomic 
plates,  portions  of  the  interradials,  and  the  summit  plates,  the  latter  in 
process  of  resorption. 

Fig.  7  a.  A  portion  of  an  arm  of  the  same  species.  Side  plates  and  cover- 
ing pieces  in  position  (enlarged). 

Fig.  7  6.  A  portion  of  the  same  specimen  still  more  enlarged. 

Fig.  8.  Portion  of  an  arm  of  Symbathocrinus  dentatus,  showing  the  ventral 
furrow  and  its  covering. 

Fig.  9.  Ventral  aspect  of  Symbathocrinus  Wortheni  after  removing  the 
upper  half  of  the  first  brachials. 

Fig.  10.  Showing  the  inner  floor  of  the  summit  plates  in  Symbathocrinus 
Wortheni.  Seen  from  below,  in  a  transverse  section  through  the  first 
brachials. 

Fig.  11.  Cross  section  of  arms  and  ventral  tube  at  a  point  midway  between 
the  base  and  tips  of  the  arms,  from  the  same  specimen. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE  V. 

Fig.  1.  Raplocrinus  mespiliformis  Goldfuss.    Ventral  aspect,  showing  the 

interradials  and  anal  opening. 
Fig.  2.  Posterior  view  of  the  same  specimen. 
Fig.  3.  Distal  face  of  the  bifurcating  primary  radial  of  Forbesiocrinu* 

nobilis,  showing  its  two  axial  canals. 
Fig.  4.  Proximal  face  of  the  same. 

Fig.  5.  Lateral  face  of  an  interradial  of  the  same  species. 
Fig.  6.  Ventral  aspect  of  an  internal  cast  of  Batocrinus  Christyi.     The 

dark  places  represent  the  pillars  suspending  the  perisome,  and  the 

radial  ridges  the  subtegminal  ambulacral  tubes. 
Fig.  7.  Ventral  aspect  of  Cyathocrinus  iovensis.    All  summit  plates  bisected 

or  partly  resorbed. 
Fig.  8.  Internal  view  of  the  central  part  of  the  vault,  showing  a  portion  ol 

the  perisome,  and  the  peristomeal  area  beneath  the  centre  of  the  oral 

plate,  whose  sutures  are  visible  in  the  deeply  shaded  portion.     The 

figure  does  not  show  the  specimen  as  far  as  the  arm  bases. 
F  \g.  9.  Ventral  aspect  of  an  internal  cast  of  Platycrinus.     The  interradials 

forming  a  continuous  ring  around  the  proximals,    surmounting  the 

covering  plates,  which  emerge  from  beneath  the  vault  close  to  the  arm 

bases. 
Fig.  10.  Bclemnocrinvs  typus  "White.     Side  view  of  a  perfect  specimen, 

showing  the  porous  ventral  tube  and  the  arrangement  of  arms  and 

pinnules. 
Fig.  11.  Belemnocrinus  floriftr  W.  &  Sp.     Side  view  of  type  specimen, 

showing  the  arrangement  of  arms  and  pinnules  ;  the  ventral  tube,  and 

the  position  of  the  cirrhi. 
Fig.  12.  Symbathocrinus  Wachsmuthi  M.  &  W.     Ventral  aspect,  showing 

the  arrangement  of  the  summit  pieces  and  the  anal  plate. 


362  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY    OP  [1885. 

Pig.  18.  Bide  view  of  the  same  specimen,  showing  the  proximals  and 
the  radial-dome-plates  which  alternate  with  small  interradials  and 
gether  \\  itli  the  former  plates  rest  against  the  muscle-plates. 

i'ii..  1  I.  Side  view  of  another  specimen,  showing  the  summit  plates,  inter- 
radials, portions  of  the  arms  and  id'  the  anal  tube. 

Fig.  15.  Catillocrinus  WachtmutM  M.  &  W.  A  nearly  perfect  specimen 
with  arms,  showing  the  small  anterior  and  one  of  the  large  antero- 
lateral radials. 

Fig.  15ff.  View  of  the  broken  upper  end  of  the  same  specimen,  gving  a 
transverse  section  of  arms  and  ventral  tube. 

Fig.  16.  Side  view  of  another  specimen,  showing  the  dorsal  side  of  the 
large  plates  composing  the  anal  tube. 

Fig.  17.  Underbasal  disk  of  Agassizocrinus.  Ventral  view,  showing  the 
ramifying  furrows  toward  the  basals,  and  the  six  pits  within  the  inner 
cavity. 

EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE  VL 

A  series  of  diagrams,  showing  the  position  of  the  lateral  cirrhi,  that  of 
the  axial  canals  and  outer  angles  of  the  stem,  in  monocyclic  and  dicyelic 
Crinoids.  For  better  comparison,  the  upper  side  is  in  all  these  figures 
interradial,  and  represents  in  most  cases  the  azygous  side. 

1.  Abactinal  aspect  of  Xenocrinus. 

Base  of  Reteocrinus. 

Calyx  plates  of  Talarocrinus. 

Calyx  plates  of  Atelestocrinus  robustus. 

Calyx  plates  of  Tribrachiocrinus. 

Base  of  Rhodocrinus. 

Calyx  plates  of  Carabocrinus. 

Abactinal  aspect  of  Millerocrinus  Milleri.-   After  De  Loriol. 

\  bactinal  aspect  of  Zeacrinus  nodosus. 
Fig.  10.  Inner  view  of  the  calyx  o£  Millerocrinus  Milleri,  showing  the  posi- 
tion of  the  axial  canals.     After  De  Loriol. 
In..  11.   Abactinal  aspeel  of  the  laiva  of  Antedon  rosacea,  shortly  before 

the  detachmenl  from  the  stem.     After  Dr.  W.  B.  Carpenter. 
Fig.  12.   Base  of  Heterocrinus  and  Stenocrinus,  the  column  removed. 
Km;.  18.  Basals  of  Stenocrinus,  with  a  joint  of  the quinque-partite  column. 
PlG.  11.   Basals  ,,r  //,  terocrinus,  \\  it li  a  joint  of  the  tri-partite  column. 
FlG.  1"».    1  la  sals  o(  Barycrinus,  with  the  joint  of  thequ'nque-partite  column. 
Fio.  if,.   [Jnderbasals  and  lirst  stem-joint  of  Poteriocrinus. 
Fig.  IT.   Basals  and  firs!  stem-joinl  of  Glyptocrinus. 
Fig.  18.   Basals  and  the  i  ri-  partite  upper  part  of  the  stem  in  Forbesiocrinus, 

Onychocrinus  and  Taxocrinus.     (The  underbasals  are  covered.) 
l'io.  19.   Basals  and  column  of  Actinocrinus,  Batocrinus,  etc. 
Fig.  20.   Basals  and  colums  of  Mnjistocrinus  Evansii. 
PlG.  21.  Basals  and  column  of  Dolatocrinus. 
Fig.  22.  Basals  of  Eucalyptocrinus  and  Melocrinus. 


Fig. 

1 

Fig. 

2 

Fig. 

3 

Fig. 

4 

Fig. 

5 

Fig. 

6 

Fig. 

7 

Fig. 

8 

Fig. 

li 

1885.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  363 

Fig.  23.  Inner  aspect  of  the  calyx  of  Ichthyocrinus  burlingtonensis,  show- 
ing the  position  of  the  small  nnderbasal. 

Fig.  24.  Basals  of  Pentremites,  Bhowing  the  position  of  the  smaller  plate. 

Fig.  25.  Basals  of  Platycrinus,  showing  the  same  thing. 

Fig.  26.  Basals  of  Symbathocrinus,  showing  the  same. 

Fig.  27.  Column  of  Poteriocrinus  and  Cyathocrinus  Rarrisi,  with  radial 
cirrhi. 

Fig.  28.  Column  of  Belemnocrinus  florifer  with  interradial  cirrhi. 

Fig.  29.  Column  of  Cupressocrinus,  showing  the  position  of  the  peripheral 
canals 

Fig.  30.  Column  of  Ptntacrinus  with  radial  cirrhi. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE  VII. 

These  diagrams  are  designed  to  show  the  relation  of  the  summit  plates 
with  each  other,  and  with  adjoining  plates  : — 

Fig.  1.  Diagram  of  the  pLites  in  the  early  larva  of  Antedon  rosacea.  After 

Dr.  P.  H.  Carpenter. 
Fig.  2.  Summit  plates  of  Dorycrinus  mississippiensis. 
Fig.  3.  Ventral  aspect  of  Eretmocrinus  coronatus. 
Fig.  4.  Summit  plates  of  Amphoracrinus  spinobrachiatus. 
Fig.  5.  Vential  aspect  of  Platycrinus  glyptus. 
Fig.  6.  The  same  of  Platycrinus  subspinosus. 
Fig.  7.  The  same  of  Platycrinus  Halli. 
Fig.  8.  The  same  of  Platycrinus  tuberosus. 
Fig.  9.  The  same  of  Agaricocrinus  Wortheni. 
Fig.  10.  The  same  of  a  large  specimen  of  Agaricocrinus  americanus.     The 

dorsal  interradials  are  attached  ou  three  sides. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE  VIII. 

Fig.  1.  Internal  cast  of  Strotoerinus  regalis,  showing  the  impression  of  the 
radiating  canals  along  the  inner  floor  of  the  vault,  and  the  presence  of 
three  summit  radials  between  each  proximal. 

Fig.  2.  Internal  cast  of  Actinocrinus  rhultiradiatvs,  showing  the  same  as 
fig.  1,  however,  with  two  summit  radials  anteriorly  and  three  poste- 
riorly. (The  pentapartite  protuberance  along  the  oral  plate  is  too 
prominent  in  the  figure). 

Fig.  3.  Internal  cast  of  a  specimen  of  Teleiocrinus,  showing  the  same  as 
fig.  1. 

Fig.  4.  Ventral  aspect  of  Steganocrinus  concinnus. 

Fig.  5.  Ventral  aspect  of  Meghtocrinus  Evansii. 

Fig.  6.  Ventral  aspect  of  Platycrinus  burlingtonensis. 

Fig.  7.  Ventral  aspect  of  Marsupiocrinus  Tennessee. 

Fig.  8.  Ventral  aspect  of  Batocrinus  subwqualis. 


364  PROCEEDINGS   OP   THE    ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE  IX. 

Pig.  1.  Diagram  of  the  calyx  plates  of  Acrocrinus  Wortheni. 

Fig.  2.  Interior  view  of  Glyptocrinux  ramulosus.  The  specimen  is  broken 
in  halves,  exposing  the  inner  surface  of  the  test,  and  it  shows  the  con- 
tinuity of  the  interradials  from  the  dorsal  to  the  ventral  side,  the  pres- 
ence of  galleries  lodging  the  ambulacra,  and  the  absence  of  covering 
pieces  in  the  test ;  also  the  apparent  existence  of  a  calcareous  perisome, 
supported  by  pillars  as  in  the  Actinoerinidae. — From  a  specimen  in  the 
Canada  Survey  Museum. 

Fig.  3.  Side  view  of  Zeacrinus  nodosus. 

Fig.  4.  Sde  view  of  Atelestocrinus  robustus. 

Fig.  5.  Doi  sal  aspect  of  Cleiocrinus  regius.  After  a  drawing  by  Mr.  Walter 
R.  Billings  from  type  specimen.  Basals  and  underbasals  indicated  by 
di  itted  lines. 

Fig.  6.  Side  view  of  Platycrinus  burlingtonensis. 

Fig.  7.  Side  view  of  Stemmatocrinus  Traulscholdi. 

FlG.  8.  Internal  view  of  the  same.  S.  Face  for  the  attachment  of  the  in- 
terradials. 


1885.]  natural  sciences  of  philadelphia.  365 

August  4. 
Mr.  Charles  Morris  in  the,  chair. 
Nineteen  persons  present. 

Note  on  Quercus  prinoides  Willd. — Mr.  Meehan  exhibited  a 
series  of  fruiting  specimens  of  branches  of  Quercus  prinoides.  In 
some,  the  leaves  were  almost  orbicular  and  obtuse  ;  in  others  nar- 
rowly lanceolate  or  saliciform  and  acute  ;  others  had  lobed  and 
wavy  edges,  while  others  were  quite  entire.  The  plants  were  all 
growing  within  a  few  feet  of  .each  other,  and  the  parent  plants 
were  also  all  under  the  same  conditions  of  environment,  and  were 
at  no  distant  date  from  one  parentage. 

They  were  exhibited  for  two  purposes — first,  to  show  that 
environment,  as  commonly  understood,  was  not  a  main  factor 
in  the  origination  of  variation  ;  and  secondly,  to  show  that  vari- 
ation was  independent  of  mere  conditions  of  growth  or  sexual 
peculiarities  to  which  variation  was  sometimes  referred.  It 
was,  indeed,  true,  that  young  plants  often  had  leaves  varying 
from  those  on  the  older  plants,  and  plants  or  branches  bearing 
flowers  of  one  sex  would  have  characters  varying  from  those  of 
another  sex  ;  but  these  specimens  were  all  fertile,  and  with  young 
acorns.  There  was  no  possible  ground  for  any  suggestion  as  to 
different  conditions  in  any  sense,  and  the  variations  could  be  only 
attributed  to  an  innate  and  wholly  unknown  power  to  vary,  which 
science  had  so  far  been  unable  to  reach. 


August  11. 
Mr.  Thos.  Meehan,  Vice-President,  in  the  chair. 
Eighteen  persons  present. 

On  the  Fruit  of  Opuntia. — Mr.  Thomas  Meehan  exhibited  a 
series  of  specimens  of  an  unknown  species  of  Opuntia  closely 
allied  to  0.  Brasiliensis,  showing  a  gradual  change  from  the 
joint  or  frond  to  the  fruit.  In  one  case  there  was  the  thin  orbic- 
ular frond;  then  a  frond  with  a  slight  rounding  and  tapering 
at  the  base;  then  one  somewhat  resembling  a  fruit,  but  v«t\ 
much  compressed,  and  with  an  abortive  flower-bud  leaving  a  scar 
at  the  apex  ;  then  another,  but  very  much  elongated  and  rtuted, 
and  with  a  perfect  flower,  though  small ;  and,  lastly,  the  frond 
reduced  to  an  inch  in  length,  pyriform,  and  with  the  perfect, 
large  yellow  flower.  He  remarked  that  it  could  not  be  called 
a  novel  point  to  make  that  the  fruit  of  a  cactus  was  simply  a 


366  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

metamorphosed  frond,  <>r  joint  as  the  section  is  commonly 
called,  and  that  the  petals  were  the  usually  (in  the  frond)  very 
much  suppressed  leaves;  but  it  might  serve  a  good  purpose  to 

place  on  rerun!  this  excellent  illustration  of  the  fact. 


August  18. 
Mr.  Charles  Roberts  in  the  chair. 
Fifteen  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  UA  Review  of  the  Species  of  the  Genus 
Esox,"  by  Seth  E.  Meek  and  Robei't  Newland,  was  presented  for 
publication. 

The  following  deaths  were  announced  : — 

Moro  Phillips,  a  member,  August  9,  1885. 

Mud.  Wm.  D unker,  a  correspondent,  March  13,  1885. 


September  1. 
Mr.  Thos.  A.  Robinson  in  the  chair. 
Twenty  persons  present. 
The  following  was  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  36t 


A  REVIEW  OF  THE  SPECIES  OF  THE  GENUS  ESOX. 
BY  SETH  E.  MEEK  AND  ROBERT  NEWLAND. 

In  the  present  paper  is  given  the  synonymy  of  the  species  of 
the  genns  Esox,  with  an  analytical  key  b}-  which  the  species  can 
be  determined.  The  specimens  which  we  have  studied  belong  to 
the  Indiana  University. 

We  acknowledge  our  indebtedness  to  Professor  Jordan,  for  the 
use  of  his  library  and  for  other  aids. 

Genus  ESOX. 
Esox  Artedi,  Genera  14,  1  738  (includes  the  modern  genera  Esox,  Belone  and 

Lepidoshus). 
Esox,  Linnaeus,  Systenia  Natiuae,  1758,  314  {lucius,  etc.). 
Lucius,1  Rafinesque  Idice  d'lttiol.  Sicil,  1810  {lucius). 
Picorellus,  Rafinesque,  Ichthiol.  Ohioensis,  1820,   70  (vittatus)  salmoneus 

(subgenus). 
Mascalongus,  Jordan,  Klippart's  Second  Rept.  Ohio  Fish  Comin.,  1878,  92 

(nobilior-masquinongy)  (subgenus) . 

Analysis  of  Species  of  Esox. 
a.  Cheeks  and  opercles  entirely  scaly. 

b.  Bi-anchiostegals  normally  12  (11  to  13) ;  scales  in  the  lateral 

line  105  to  108;  D.  11  or  12  ;  A.  11  or  12  ;  middle  of  eye 

nearer  tip  of  lower  jaw  than  posterior  margin  of  opercle. 

c.  Head  short,  3|  in  length  of  body  ;  snout  2|  in  length  of 

head  ;  e}'e   2f  in  length  of  snout.     Color  dark  green  ; 

sides  with  about  twenty  distinct  blackish  curved  bars; 

fins  plain.  Americanus.     1. 

cc.  Head  longer,  3^  in  length  of  bod}' ;  snout  2^  in  length 

of  head  ;  eye  2^  in  length  of  snout.     Color  greenish, 

sides   with    many   narrow   curved    darker    streaks, 

usually  distinct  and  more  or  less  reticulated  ;  fins 

mostl}'  plain.  Vermiculatus.     2. 

1  The  name  Esox  is  in  this  paper  restricted  to  Esox  belone  L.,  the  type  of 
the  genus  Belone  Cuvier,  while  the  name  Lucius  is  reserved  I'or  the  pikes. 
The  name  Esox  lias  been  universally  associated  with  the  Pikes  rather  than 
with  the  Gar-fishes,  1  ml  perhaps  in  strict  technicality,  the  name  Lucius 
should  be  used  for  the  former  and  that  of  Esox  lor  the  latter.  It  is  perhaps 
not  unfair,  however,  to  assume  that  Linnaeus  would  have  considered  the 
Pike,  rather  than  the  Gar-fish,  as  typical  of  his  genus  Esox. 


368  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

66.  Branchiostegals  14  to  16;  D.  14;  A.  13;  scales  in  lateral 
line  about  125  ;  middle  of  eye  midwa}^  between  tip  of 
lower  jaw  and  posterior  margin  of  opercle  ;  head  about  3^ 
in  length  of  body ;  snout  2^  in  head  ;  eye  3^  in  snout. 
Color  greenish,  marked  with  numerous  narrow  dark  lines 
and  streaks  which  are  mostly  horizontal,  and  are  more  or 
less  reticulated  ;  fins  plain.  Reticulatus.     3. 

aa.  Cheeks  scaly  ;  lower  half  of  opercle  bare  ;  branchiostegals  14 
to  16  ;  D.  16  or  17  ;  A.  13  or  14  ;  scales  in  lateral  line  123  ; 
head  3.'{-  in  length  of  body ;  snout  2|  in  length  of  head  ;  eye 
3  in  length  of  snout :  middle  of  eye  midwaj'  between  tip  of 
lower  jaw  and  posterior  margin  of  opercle.  Color  grayish 
with  many  whitish  spots,  the  young  barred;  dorsal,  anal, 
and  caudal  fins  spotted  with  black ;  a  white  horizontal  bar 
bounding  the  naked  portion  of  opercle.  Lucius.     4. 

nna.  Cheeks  as  well  as  opercles  bare  on  lower  half;  branchioste- 
gals 17  to  19  ;  D.  17  ;  A.  15  ;  scales  in  the  lateral  line  about 
150  ;  middle  of  eye  midway  between  tip  of  lower  jaw  and 
posterior  margin  of  opercle  ;  head  3|  in  length  of  body  ; 
snout  2*  in  head;  eye  more  than  four  times  in  length  of 
snout.  Color  dark  gray,  sides  with  round  blackish  spots ; 
fins  spotted  with  black.  Masquinongy.     5. 

I .  Esox  americanus. 

Esox  americanus  Schoepf,  ' '  Naturforscher,  torn,  xx,  1784,  26"  (Long 
Island). 

Esox  lucvisil  americanus  Gmelin,  Systema  Naturae,  1788,  1390  (based 
on  Schoepf). 

Esox  americanus  Lacepede,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  v,  1803,  299;  Cuvier 
and  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  xviii,  184(1,  329  (Saratoga  Lake), 
Jordan,  Annals  N.  T.  Acad.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  i,  No.  4,  1877,  104 
(Delaware  River  ;  bong  Island);  Jordan,  Bull.  U.  S.  Geol.  Sur.  Ter., 
iv,  1878,  132  ;  Bean,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1879,  285  (McBean  creek, 
Georgia) ;  Goode  and  Bean,  Bull.  Essex  Inst.,  vol.  ix,  1879,  22  (•New- 
ham  Lake,  Mass.);  Bean,  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  1880,  104  (Pier- 
mont,  N.  V.:  Trenton,  N.  J.;  Long  Island);  .Jordan,  Man.  Vert.  Ed. 
iii,  1880,  26'J  ;  Goode,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus..  21,  1880,  32;  Jordan 
and  Gilbeit,  Syn.  Fish,  N.  A..  L882,  352;  Jordan,  Cat.  Fish.  N.  A. 
50,  1885. 

Picbrellus  americanus  Jordan  and  Copeland,  Bull.  Buffalo  Sue-.  Nat. 
Bci.,  1876,  1 13  (<hcck  List). 

Kxnx  niij i  r  Le  Sueur,  Jour.  Acad.  Nat.  Sei.  Phila.,  1817,  415  (South 
Carolina ). 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  369 

Esox  scomberius  Mitchill,  Arner.  Monthly  Mag.,  1818,  322  (Murderer's 
Creek,  N.  Y.);  De  Kay,  X.  Y.  Fauna,  Fish,  1842,  225  (copied). 

Esox  fasciatus  De  Kay,  X.  Y.  Fauna,  Fish,  1842,  224,  pi.  34,  fig.  110 
(Long  Island). 

Esox  ornatus  Girard,  "Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Xat.  Hist.,  1854,  41  "  (Massa- 
chusetts); Storer,  Hist.  Fish,  Mass.,  1867,  313  (Boston  market). 

Esox  ravenelii  Holbrook,  Ichthyol.  S.  C,  1855,  201  (South  Carolina); 
Cope,  Proc.  Acad,  Xat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1865,  79  (Catawba River);  Cope, 
Proc.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc,  1870,  457  (Catawba  River);  Giruther,  Cat. 
Fish,  Brit.  Mus.,  vi,  1866,  230  (copied);  Jordan,  Annals  X.  Y. 
Lyceum  Xat.  Hist.,  vol.  x;,  1877,  3C8  (Coosa  R.,  Georgia);  Jordan 
&  Brayton.  Bull.  U.  S.  Xat.  Mus.,  xii,  1878,  16  (Catawba  River); 
Goode,  Proc.  U.  S.  Xat.  Mus.,  1879,  117. 

Picorellus  ravenelii  Jordan  &  Copeland,  Bull.  Buffalo  Soc.  Xat.  Sci., 

1875,  143  (Check  list). 

Habitat. — Coastwise  streams  from  the  Charles  River,  Mass.,  to 
the  Savannah  River,  Georgia. 

The  specimen  examined  by  us  is  from  the  market. 

The  synonymy  of  the  species  offers  little  room  for  question, 
although  some  of  the  earlier  descriptions  are  very  scanty. 

2.  Esox  vermiculatus. 

Esox  vermiculatus  (Le  Sueur  MSS.)  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Xat. 

Poiss.,  xviii,  1846,  233  (Wabash  Valley);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc. 

U.  S.  Xat.  Mus.,  1884,  110 ;  Forbes,  111.  State  Fish  Comm.,  1884,  71 

(Illinois);  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Xat.  Mus.,  1884,  £09  (East  Fo:k  of 

White  River,  Indiana);   Gilbert,  Pioc.  U.  S.  Xat.  Mus.,  1884,  208 

(Switz  City  Swamp,  Greene  Co.,  Indiana)  ;  Jordan,  Cat.  Fish.  X.  A., 

50,  1835. 
Esox  lineatus   (Le  Sueur  MSS.)  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,   Hist.  Xat. 

Poiss.,  1846,  335  (Wabash  Valley,  young). 
Esox  umbrosus  Kiitland,   "  Cleveland  Annals  of  Sciences,  1854,  79" 

(near Cleveland,  Ohio);  Cope,  Proc.  Acad.  Xat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1835,  79; 

Cope,  Trans.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc,  1866,  409  (Grosse  Isle,  Michigan); 

Hay,  Bull.  U.   S.  Xat.    Mus.,    1882,   67,   74  (Memphis;   Jackson; 

Vaughans ;  Granada). 
?  Esox  crassus  Agassiz.  Amer.  Jour.  Sci.  &  Arts,  1854,  308  (Tennessee 

River,  at  Huntsville,  Alabama);  Cope,  Proc.  Acad.  Xat.  Sci.  Phila.. 

1865,  79  (copied);  Jordan  &  Copeland,  Bull.  Buffalo  Soc  Xat.  Sci., 

1876,  143  (Check  list). 

Esox  cypho  Cope,  Proc  Acad.  Xat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1865,  78  (Waterford, 
Oakland  Co.,  Michigan);  Giinther,  Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  vi,  1866, 
230  (copied);  Jordan  Annals  X.  Y.  Acad.  Sci.,  vol.  i,  Xo.  4,  1877, 
368  (Fox  River,  Illinois);  Xelson,  Bull.  111.  Mus.  Xat.  Hist.,  i,  1877, 
43  (Fox  River  at  Geneva);  Jordan,  Bull.  U.  S.  Geol.  Sur.  Terr.,  iv, 
1878,  432;  Jordan*  Man.  Vert.  Ed.,  iii,  1880,  267. 
25 


370  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Picorellu*  cyplio  Jordan  &  Copeland,  Bull.  Buffalo  Soc  Nat.  Sci.,  1875, 
143  (Check  List). 

?  Esox  nujer  Giiuther,  Cat,  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  vi,  1866.  229  (New  Or- 
leans), not  of  Le  Sueur. 

Esox  porosus  Cope,  Trans.  Anier.  Phil.  Soc,  1866,  408  (Lake 
Michigan). 

Esox  salmoneus  Jordan,  Bull.  Buffalo,  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  1876,  96. 

Esox  salmoneus  Jordan,  Annals  N.  Y.  Acad.  Sci.,  vol.  i,  No.  4,  1877, 
104  (White  River  ;  Ohio  River  ;  Illinois  River  ;  Wabash  River ;  Mau- 
mee  River;  Lake  Erie);  Jordan,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1877,  42; 
Jordan  Annals  N.  Y.  Lyceum,  vol.  xi,  1877,  376  ( White  River,  In- 
diana); Jordan,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1877,  44  (Lakes  of 
Laporte  County,  Indiana;  St.  Joseph's  River,  Indiana;  Maumee 
River,  Indiana  ;  Tippecanoe  River,  Indiana);  Nelson,  Bull.  111.  Mus. 
Nat.  Hist.,  i,  1877,  43  (Illinois);  Jordan,  Bull  111.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist., 
ii,  1878,53  ;  (Illinois River  at  Pekin  ;  Fox  River,  Union  County,  111.); 
Jordan  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1882,  352 ;  Jordan  Zoology  of  Ohio,  vol.  iv, 
1882,  914  (not  of  Mitchill ;  probably  not  of  Rafmtsque). 

Picorellus  salmoneus  Jordan,  Man.  Vert.  Ed.,  i,  1876;  Jordan  &  Cope- 
land,  Bull.  Buffalo  Soc.  Nat.  Sci.,  1876,  143  (Check  List). 

Esox  racenelii  Jordan,  Bull.  111.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  1876,  53  (Union 
County,  Illinois)  not  of  Holbrook). 

Habitat. — Mississippi  Valley  and  Great  Lake  region,  most 
abundant  in  the  central  States.  Not  found  east  of  the  Allegheny 
Mountains,  nor  in  the  Texan  region.  Frequenting  sluggish 
waters  and  bayous. 

The  specimens  examined  by  us  are  from  Falls  of  Ohio  ;  Ohio 
River,  Southern  Indiana  ;  Bean  Blossom  Creek,  Monroe  Co.,  In- 
diana :  Pipe  Creek,  Madison  County,  Indiana;  Mecca,  Parke 
County,  Indiana;  Kankakee  River  at  Riverside,  Indiana,  and 
Hieksville,  Defiance  County,  Ohio. 

This  species  lias  the  general  coloration  of  E.  reticulatus,  with 
its  other  characters,  very  close  to  those  of  E.  americanus.  From 
the  latter  species  it  differs  but  slightly,  but  the  greater  length  of 
the  snout,  small  as  it  is,  seems  to  be  very  constant. 

The  name  Esox  salmoneus,  frequently  applied  to  this  species, 
cannot  be  retained,  as  it  was  earlier  given  by  Mitchill  to  Synodus 
fifpteus.  It  is  also  probable  that  Rafinesque's  original  salmoneus 
ie  a  mythical  species,  not  identifiable  with  anything.  In  his  copy 
of  the  original  drawing  (in  his  MSS.  note  books  i  the  insertion  of 
the  dorsal  is  said  to  be  represented  as  midway  between  the  tip 
of  the  snout  and  the  base  of  the  caudal. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  371 

•"..  Esox  reticulatus. 

Esox  Indus  Mitchffl,  Trans.  Hist.  &  Phil.  Soc.  N.  Y.,  1815,  440  (Long 
Island). 

Esox  reticulatus  Le  Sueur,  Jour.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1818,  414,  No. 
2  (Philadelphia';  Storer,  Rept.  Fish.  Mass.,  1839;  97  (Maine  ;  Mas- 
sachusetts); DeKay,  N.  T.  Fauna  Fish.,  1842,  223  (New  York); 
Ayres,  Bost.  Jour.  Nat.  Hist.,  iv,  1842,  269  (Brookhaven,  Long 
Island;  Hockanum  River,  Conn.). 

Esox  reticulatus  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  xviii,  1846, 
327  (Philadelphia;  Charleston,  S.  C);  St  irer,  8yn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1846, 
437  ;  Thompson,  "Hist,  of  Vermont,  1846,  138"  (Vermont);  Griffiths 
Cuvier.  Regne  Animal,  1854,  390  ;  Cope,  Pmc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila., 
1865,  79  ;  Cope,  Trans.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc.  Phila.,  1866,  410  ;  Gunther, 
Cat.  Fishes  Brit.  Mus.,  vi,  1866,  229  (Boston;  New  York);  Storer, 
Hist.  Fish.  Mass.,  1867  (Maine  ;  Massachusetts);  Jordan,  Ohio  State 
Fish  Comm.,  1876,  186. 

Esox  reticulatus  Jordan,  Annals  N.  Y.  Acad.  Sci.,  vol.  i,  No.  4,  1877, 
104  (Westfield  River  ;  Delaware  River ;  Ocmulgee  River ;  Etowah 
River;  Potomac  River);  Jordan,  Bull.  U.  S.  Geol.  Sur.  Terr.,  iv, 
1878,  432  ;  Jordan  &  Brayton,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  xii,  1878,  40 
(Etowah  River);  Jordan  &  Brayton,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  xii,  1878, 
16  ;  Goode,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1879,  117  ;  Goode  &  Bean,  Bull. 
Essex  Institute,  vol.  ix,  1879,  22  (Massachusetts;;  Goode,  Bull.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  xxi,  1880,  32  (East  Wareham,  Massachusetts):  Bean, 
Proc.U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1880,  104  (Norfolk,  Va.;  South  Hadley  Falls, 
Mass.);  Jordan,  Man.Veit.,  Ed.  3,  1880,  267;  Hay,  Bull.  U.S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  1882,  67,  74  (Big  Black  River,  Mississippi ;  Pearl  River,  Mis- 
sissippi); Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1882,  353  ;  Jordan, 
Cat.  Fish.  N.  A.,  50,  1885. 

Pieorellus  reticulatus  Jordan  &  Copeland,  Bull.  Buil'alo  Soc.  Nat.  Hist., 
1876,  143  (Check  list). 

?  Esox  phaleratus  (Say)  Le  Sueur,  Jour.  Sci.  Phila.,  1818,  416  (near 
St.  Augustine,  Fla.);  DeKay,  N.  Y.  Fauna  Fish,  1842,  226  (copied); 
Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  xviii,  1846,  333  (copied). 

?  Esox  phaleratus  Goode,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1879,  117. 

Esox  tridecem-Uneatus  Mitchill,  ?  "Minor,  1825,  361"  (Oneida  Lake). 

Esox  tridecem-radi'atus  DeKay,  N.  Y.  Fauna.  Fish.,  1842,  225  (copied). 

Esox  affinis  Holbrook,  "Ichth.  South  Car.,  1855,  198"  (South  Caro- 
lina); Cope,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1865,  79  (Neuse  River); 
Cope,  Proc.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc,  Phila.,  1870,  457. 

Pieorellus  affinis  Jordan  &  Copeland,  Bull.  Buffalo.  Soc.  Nat.  Sci., 
1876,  143  (Check  List);  Jordan,  Man.  Veit.,  1876,  Ed.  i,  255. 

Esox  reticulatus  var.  affinis  Jordon  Annals,  N.  Y.  Lyceum  Nat.  Hist., 
vol.  xi,  1877,  369  (Etowah  River,  Georgia). 

Habitat. — Maine  to  Mississippi,  chiefly  or  only  in  streams  and 
lakes  east  of  the  mountains. 


372  PROCEEDINGS  OP   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885 

The  specimens  examined  by  us  are  from  the  Potomac  and  Dela- 
ware Rivers. 

t.  Esox  lucius. 

Esox  lucius*  Linnaeus,  Systema  Natures,  Ed.  x,  1758,  314  (European 
specimens). 

American  References. 

?  Esox  lucius  Richardson.  "Fauna  Bor.  Amer.  Fishes,  iii,  1836,  124" 
(Northern  regions);  De  Kay,  N.  Y.  Fauna.  Fish.,  1842,  226 
(copied). 

Esox  lucius  Cope,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  18C5,  79  ;  Cope,  Trans. 
Amer.  Phil.  Soc.  Phila.,  1866,  408  (Great  Lakes ;  Lake  Whittlesey, 
Minnesota);  Giinther,  Cat.  Fish.  Brit,  Mus.,  vi,  1866,  227  (Albany 
River ;  Lake  ^Vhittlessey,  Minnesota  ;  Arctic,  N.  A.);  Jordan  &  Cope- 
land,  Bull.  Buffalo  Soc.  Nat.  Sci.,  1876,  143  (Check  List);  Jordan, 
( >hio  Stan-  Fish.  Comm.,  1876,  186,  fig.  16,  pi.  11  ;  Jordan,  Bull.  U. 
S.,  Geol.  Sur.  Terr.,  iv,  1876,  797  (Turtle  Mountain  ;  St.  Mary's 
River,  Rocky  Mountains);  Jordan,  Pioc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila., 
1877,  44  (St.  Joseph's  River,  Indiana);  Jordan  Annals,  N.  Y.  Acad. 
Sci.,  vol.  i,  No.  4,  1877,  104,  (Lake  Ontario  ;  Lake  Erie;  Lake  Michi- 
gan ;  Fox  River.  Illinois  ;  Mississippi  River);  Jordan,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus..  x,  1877,  5.5  ;  Jordan,  Bull.  U.  S.  Geol.  Sur.  Terr.,  1878,  432. 

Esox  lucius  Jordan,  Bull.  111.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  ii,  1878,  53  (Rock  River, 
111.);  Jordan,  Man.  Vert.  Ed.  3,  1880,  266;  Bean,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  1880,  104  (Sandusky,  Ohio ;  South  Hadley  Falls,  Massachu- 
setts); Goode,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat,  Mus.,  21,  1880,  32  (Sandusky,  Ohio); 
Bean,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1881,  255,  268,  271  (Alaska  ;  Youkon 
River);  Jordan,  Zoology  of  Ohio,  iv,  1882,  915  ;  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Syn. 
Fish.  N.  A.,  1882,  353;  Forbes,  111.  State  Fish  Coram.,  1884,  71 
Illinois)  ;  Jordan.  Cat.  Fish.  N.  A.,  51,  1885. 

'.'  Knox  tittatus  Rafinesque,  American  Monthly  Mag.,  vol.  iii,  1818,  447; 
Kafinesque,  Ichth.  Oh.,  1820,  70  (Mythical). 

Esox  Estor  Le  Sueur,  Jour.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1818,  413  (Lake 
Eric);  DeKay,  N.  Y.  Fauna  Fish.  1842,  222;  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes, 
Hist,  Nat.  Poiss.,  xviii,  1S46,  324,  pi.  542  (Lake  Erie) ;  Giinther,  Cat. 
I'ish.  Brit.  Mus.,  1866,  228  (copied). 

Esox  hirius  var.  istor  Jordan,  Man.  Vert.,  1876,  255  ;  (Nelson,  Bull.  111. 
Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  i,  1876,  43  (Northern  Illinois);  Jordan  A  Copeland, 
Hull.  Buffalo  Soc.  Nat.  Sci.,  1876,  43  , Cluck  List). 

Esox  reticulaUis  Kirtland,  "Zoology  of  Ohio,  1820,  194;"  Kirtland, 
"Bost.  Jour.  Nat.  Hist.,  1843,  33,  pi.  10,  fig.  2''  (Lake  Erie);  (not  of 
Le  Sueur). 

ft  Esox  salmoneus  Rafines<|iir.  Irhthiol.  Ohiensis,  1820,  70  (Mythical). 


*  The  European  synonymy  of  this  species  is  very  extensive,  and  we  have 
not  attempted  to  collect  it. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  373 

Esox  deprandus  (Le  Sueur  MSS.)  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat. 
Poiss.,  xviii,  1846,  330  (Wabash  River  at  New  Harmony,  Indiana); 
Cope,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  I860,  79;  Cope,  Trans.  Amer. 
Phil.  Soc.  Phila.,  1860,  408  I  copied);  Gtinther,  Cat.  Fi«h.  Brit.  Mus., 
1866,  229  (copied);  Jordan,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1879,  225  (Identi- 
fication of  Le  Sueur's  type). 

?  Esox  lugubrosus  (Le  Sueur  MSS.)  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat. 
Poiss.,  xviii,  1840,  338  (Crab  Orchard,  Ky.;  no  description). 

Esox  lucioides  "  Agassiz  &  Girard, "  Herbert  Frank  Forester's  Fish 
and  Fishing,  1849  (Lake  Superior). 

Esox  boreus  Agassiz,  "  Lake  Superior,  1850,  317"  (Lake  Superior ;  same 
as  E.  lucioides);  Cope,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1865,  79  ;  Nelson, 
Bull.  111.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist,  i,  1877,  43  (Northern  Illinois). 

Habitat. — Streams  and  lakes  of  Europe  ;  Northern  Asia,  Alaska, 
and  Northeastern  parts  of  North  America ;  South  to  New  York 
and  Ohio  River,  and  west  to  the  Rocky  Mountains. 

The  specimens  examined  by  us  are  from  Venice,  Lake  Erie, 
and  Lake  Michigan. 

We  can  see  no  difference  whatever  between  American  and 
European  examples  of  this  species,  when  specimens  of  similar 
size  and  condition  are  compared.  The  names  Esox  estor,  depran- 
dus, lucioides  and  boreus  are  therefore  strictly  synonymous  with 
E.  lucius. 

5.  Esox  masquinongy. 

Esox  masquinongy  Mitchill,  "Mirror,  1824,  297"  (but  the  description 
is  said  not  to  be  there);  Kirtland,  Zoology  of  Ohio,  1838,  194  (Lake 
Erie). 

Esox  estor  Richardson,  "Fauna  Bor.  Amer.,  iii,  1836,  127"  (Lake 
Huron);  Kirtland,  Bost.  Jour.  Nat.  Sci.,  1842,  339  ;  Agassiz,  "Amer. 
Jour.  Sci.  &  Aits,  xvi,  1853,  308"  (not  Esox  estor,  Le  Sueur). 

Esox  nobilior  Thompson,  "Proc  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  iii,  1850,  163, 
173,  305"  (Lake  Champlain);  Cope,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila., 
1865,  79  ;  Cope,  Trans.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc.  Phila.,  I860,  410  (Cone- 
aught  Lake,  Pa.;  Alleghany  Riven;  Jordan  &  Copeland,  Bull.  Buf- 
falo Soc.  Nat.'  Sci.,  1876,  143  (Check  list);  Jordan,  Annals  N.  Y. 
Acad.  Sci.,  vol.  i,  No.  4,  1877,  104  (Lake  Michigan;  Lake  Huron; 
Lake  Erie);  Jordan,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1877,  54  (Ecorse,  Michi- 
gan;  Lake  Huron);  Nelson,  Bull.  111.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  i,  1877,  43 
(Lake  Michigan);  Jordan,  Man.  Vert.,  Ed.  ii,  1878,  266;  Jordan, 
Bull.  111.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  1878,  53  (Lake  Michigan);  Goode,  Bull. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  xiv,  1879,  55  ;  Goode,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  xxi, 
1880,  32  (Sandusky,  Ohio  ;  Jordan,  Man.  Vert.,  Ed.  iii,  1883,  266; 
Bean,  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Coram.,  1880,  104  (Sandusky,  Ohio);  Bean, 
Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  1880,  104  (Sandusky,  Ohio). 


374 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1885. 


Esox  nobilior  Jordan,  Zoology  of  Ohio,  vol.  iv,  1882,  917  ;  Jordan  & 
Gilbert,  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1882,  353  ;  Forbes,  111.  State  Fish  Comm., 
1884,  71  (Lake  Michigan) ;  Jordan,  Cat.  Fi.sh.  N.  A.,  51,  1885. 

.'  Esox  ohiensis  Kirtland,  "Cleveland  Annals  of  Science,  1854." 

Habitat. — Great  Lakes,  occasionally  in  the  Ohio  and  Upper 
Mississippi  Rivers. 

One  specimen  examined  by  us  is  from  the  Ohio  River  at  New 
Albany,  Indiana. 

We  here  adopt  the  name  Esox  masquinongy  of  Mitchill  for  this 
species  instead  of  the  more  familiar  and  preferable  Esox  nobilior 
of  apparently  later  date. 

Professor  Jordan  has  been  unable  to  find  the  description  of 
Mitchill  in  the  files  of  the  Mirror,  where  it  is  said  by  De  Kay  to 
occur.  A  portion  of  the  description  of  Mitchill  is  quoted  by 
De  Kay,  and  this  part  applies  to  the  Muskalunge  much  better 
than  to  the  Pikes.  Moreover,  reference  to  Mitchill's  name  is 
made  by  Kirtland  at  a  date  prior  to  the  publication  of  the  work 
of  De  Kaj\ 

It  is  therefore  highly  probable  that  a  description  of  Esox  mas- 
quinongy has  been  somewhere  printed  by  Mitchill,  and  if  so,  that 
this  is  the  earliest  account  of  the  Muskalunge. 

The  descriptions  of  Esox  ohioensis  is  said  to  refer  to  this 
species,  but  we  have  not  been  able  to  examine  the  original  paper 
of  Dr.  Kirtland. 

List  of  Nominal  Species  with  Identifications. 

The  following  is  a  list  of  nominal  species  referred  to  in  the 
foregoing  paper,  arranged  in  chronological  order  with  our  iden- 
tification of  each.     Tenable  specific  names  are  printed  in  italics. 


Nominal  Species. 

Bate. 

Identification. 

Esox  lucius  Linnaeus, 

1758, 

Esox  lucius. 

Esox  americanus  Gmelin, 

1788, 

Esox  americanus. 

Esox  reticulatus  Le  Sueur, 

1817, 

Esox  reticulatus. 

tiiger  Le  Sueur, 

1817, 

Esox  americanus. 

Esox  estor  Le  Sueur, 

1818, 

Esox  lucius. 

Esox  vittatus  Rafinesque. 

1818, 

(mythical). 

Ksdx  phaleratus  Say, 

1818, 

Esox  reticulatus  ? 

Esox  scomberius  Mitchill, 

1818, 

Esox  americanus. 

Esoa  -almoneus  Rafinesqut . 

1820, 

(mythical). 

Esox  masquinongy  Mitchill, 

1824, 

Esox  masquinongy. 

Esox  tredcccm-lineatus  Mitchill, 

1825, 

Esox  reticulatus. 

1885.] 


NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA. 


375 


Nominal  Species.  Date. 

Esox  fasciatus  De  Kay,  1842, 

Esox  tredecem-radiatus  De  Kay.  1842, 

Esox  vermiculatus  Le  Sueur.  1846, 

Esox  lineatus  Le  Sueur,  1846, 

Esox  deprandus  Le  Sueur,  1846, 

Esox  lugubrosus  Le  Sueur,  1846, 

Esox  lucioides  Agassiz  &  Girard,  1849, 

Esox  boreus  Agassiz,  1850, 

Esox  nobilior  Thompson,  1850, 

Esox  crassus,  Agassiz,  1854, 

Esox  umbrosus,  Kirtlaud,  1854, 

Esox  ohioensis,  Khtland,  1854, 

Esox  ornatus,  Girard,  1854, 

Esox  affinis  Holbrook,  1855, 

Esox  ravenelii  Holbrook,  1855, 

Esox  cypho  Cope,  1865. 

Esox  porosus  Cope,  1866, 


Identification. 
Esox  americanus. 
Esox  reticularis. 
Esox  vermiculatus. 
Esox  vermiculatus. 
Esox  lucius. 
Esox  lucius  ? 
Esox  lucius. 
Esox  lucius. 
Esox  masquinongy. 
Esox  vermiculatus? 
Esox  vermiculatus. 
Esox  masquinongy  ? 
Esox  americanus. 
Esox  reticulatus. 
Esox  americanus. 
Esox  vermiculatus. 
Esox  vermiculatus. 


376  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 


September  8. 
Dr.  A.  E.  Foote  in  the  chair. 
Twelve  persons  present. 

Inflorescence  of  the  Composite. — At  the  meeting  of  the  Botan- 
ical section,  on  the  seventh  inst.,  Mr.  Thomas  Meehan  remarked 
that  it  seemed  obvious,  by  the  rule  in  Asteraceous  plants,  or  the 
order  Composite,  that  the  order  of  anthesis  was  inversely  to  the 
growth.  But  by  a  note  of  Prof.  Asa  Gray  in  his  new  synoptical 
Flora  of  North  America,  referring  to  Liatris,  it  did  not  appear 
to  have  received  the  marked  attention  of  botanists.  Among  the 
generic  characters  of  Liatris,  Dr.  Gray  gives  flowering  from  the 
top  downwards,  as  in  an  inverted  spike  or  raceme.  He  exhibited 
specimens  of  Mulgedium,  Lactuca,  Erecthites,  Gnaphalium,  Aster, 
Solidogo,  Vernonia,  Erigeron,  Bidens,  and  Xanthium,  all  gathered 
casually  and  hastily  within  a  few  yards  of  each  other,  to  show 
that  the  upper  or  terminal  flower  was  the  first  to  open,  then  the 
upper  flower  on  the  next  branch  of  the  raceme  or  panicle,  and 
then  the  lower  ones  in  succession.  If  in  these  plants  the  side 
branches  were  arrested  in  their  growth,  and  the  terminal  flowers 
of  the  branchlets  brought  down  in  proximity  to  the  main  stem, 
we  had  precisely  the  same  kind  of  anthesis  as  in  Liatris.  If 
Liatris  had  a  branched  panicle  instead  of  a  spicate  inflorescence, 
we  should  not  notice  an}'  difference  between  it  and  other  plants. 
There  were  some  other  families  of  plants  that  presented  a  similar 
order  of  anthesis,  but  it  is  so  marked  a  character  in  Composite  as 
to  make  it  well  worthy  of  consideration  in  connection  with  the 
peculiar  construction  of  the  flower  heads. 

A  remarkable  reflection  is  that  this  completion  of  growth,  and 
their  flowering  down  the  stems  backwards,  ceases  with  the  forma- 
tion of  the  flower  heads.  Then  the  anthesis  of  the  florets  is  with 
and  not  reversely  to  the  growth.  In  a  sunflower,  for  instance, 
any  one  may  remember  that  the  florets  near  the  ray  open  first,  and 
continue  to  open  spirally  until  the  centre  is  reached. 

There  were,  however,  exceptions  in  composite  to  the  order  of 
anthesis  in  the  flower  heads.  In  Ambrosia  the  lower  flowers  on 
the  spike  opened  first,  and  they  continued  to  open  upwards  as  in 
the  raceme  of  any  other  order  of  plants.  In  the  female  plants  of 
Ambrosia  artemisieefolia.  being  abundant  this  season  (1885)  the 
truly  racemose  order  of  opening  was  the  same  as  in  the  ordinary 
monoecious  plants.  

September  15. 

Mr.  Charles  Morris  in  the  chair. 

Twenty-three  persons  present. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  377 

On  the  Pectoral  Filaments  in  the  Sea  Robin  (Primotus  palmipes). 
— Dr.  Harrison  Allen  said,  in  speaking  of  the  pectoral  flu  of 
the  family  of  teliostean  fishes,  the  Triglidce,  that  the  first  three 
rays  are  known  as  the  pectoral  filaments.  They  are  disposed 
ventrally,  separated  from  the  bod}'  of  the  fin,  and  placed  well  in 
front  of  its  base.  The  filaments  are  curved  somewhat  upon  them- 
selves, and  are  moved  by  powerful  muscles.  The  nerves  supply- 
ing them  are  derived  from  the  ganglionic  masses  (so  character- 
istic of  the  Triglidae)  at  the  beginning  of  the  spinal  cord.  The 
filaments  are  used  not  only  for  touch  but  for  locomotion.  In 
directing  the  body  toward  the  right,  the  left  filaments  are  in 
constant  motion  (like  the  limbs  of  a  salamander)  while  the  right 
filaments  are  at  rest.  In  directing  the  body  toward  the  left,  the 
motion  thus  described  is  reversed.  The  filaments  are  also  used 
in  stirring  up  the  soft  silt  which  composes  the  bottoms  on  which 
the  fish  rests.  The  organs  are  thus  put  to  comparative  rough 
usage,  so  that  one  learns  with  a  sense  of  surprise  that  the  tops 
and  sides  near  the  tips  possess  a  high  degree  of  differentiation  of 
the  tegument.  The  organ,  while  appearing  to  be  tactile  in  nature, 
recalls  in  character  the  general  features  of  a  retinal  surface.  Both 
in  longitudinal  and  in  transverse  section  the  organ  is  seen  to  be 
composed  of  four  layers  of  cells.  The  first  basal  laj-er  is  made  up 
of  small  nearly  round  cells.  The  second  la}-er  is  composed  of  large 
fusiform  cells,  each  of  which  contains  granular  contents  surround- 
ing a  distinct  circular  nucleus.  The  third  layer  is  composed  of 
columnar  cells  resembling  finger-like  processes  which  arc  arranged 
like  a  layer  of  retinal  rods.  A  connective  tissue  membrane  which 
might  be  compared  to  the  external  limiting  membrane  of  the  retina 
intervenes  between  the  third  and  second  layer  of  cells.  The 
fourth  and  peripheral  layer  is  composed  of  diaphanous  tube-like 
prolongations  of  the  side  of  the  cells  which  compose  the  third 
layer.  It  varies  greatly  in  thickness.  In  some  portions  of  each 
filament  the  fourth  layer  is  very  thin,  and  barely  covers  the  tips  of 
the  processes  of  the  third  layer,  or  it  is  of  a  thickness  nearly 
equal  to  one-half  the  thickness  of  the  entire  organ.  The  layer 
appears  to  be  tightly  held  to  the  third,  and  is  often  detached  in 
the  sections.  The  general  membrane  is  smooth  and  uniform  at 
the  tips  of  the  filaments,  but  is  arranged  in  broad  capitate 
papillae  elsewhere. 

The  recorder  thought  the  pectoral  filaments  to  be  beautiful 
objects  for  study.  They  can  be  readily  obtained  since  the  sea- 
robin  is  a  common  summer  fish  along  the  Atlantic  coast. 


September  22. 
The  President,  Dr.  Leidy,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-five  persons  present. 


378  proceedings  of  the  academy  of  [1885. 

September  29. 
Mr.  J.  H.  Redfield  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-five  persons  present. 


October  5. 

Mr.  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.,  in  the  chair. 

Twenty-four  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "Attack  and  Defence  as  Agents  in  Animal 
Evolution,"  by  Charles  Morris,  was  presented  for  publication. 


October  13. 
The  President,  Dr.  Leidy,  in  the  chair. 
Thirty-four  persons  present. 

Notes  on  Gactaceee. — Elastic  Fruit  in  Mamillaria. — At  the 
meeting  of  the  Botanical  Section  of  the  Academy,  held  on  the 
12th  inst.,  Mr.  Meehan  referred  to  his  former  observations  on 
the  sudden  growth  of  the  fruit  of  some  species  of  cactacese,  indi- 
cating that  it  was  not  a  growth  before  maturity,  but  an  elastic 
projection  of  a  fruit  already  mature.  Since  that  time  he  had  been 
able  to  note  in  Mamillaria  gladiata,  M.  recurva,  and  some  other 
Mexican  species,  in  which  there  was  only  the  apex  of  the  red 
fruit  visible  between  the  mamma  over  night,  a  full  elongation  to 
the  length  of  an  inch  by  9  A.  M.  the  next  day.  They  were  clear 
cases  of  the  elongation  of  the  fruit  after  maturity  and  not  a 
growth. 

The  (lowers  of  Opuntia  Rafinesqui  had  very  irritable  stamens 
when  the  Mowers  were  fully  expanded  under  a  bright  sun.  Some 
echinocacti  had  stamens  irritable  in  a  less  degree,  but  in  Echino- 
cactus  efinaceus  the  stamens  were  quite  as  irritable  as  in  the 
opuntia  noted. 

On  the  Flora  of  Martha's  Vineyard  and  Nantucket.^-At  the 
~.niie  meeting  of  the  Botanical  Section  Mr.  Redfield  spoke  of 
the  topographical  features  of  Martha's  Vineyard  and  Nantucket, 
in  connection  with  the  flora  of  those  islands.  The  northern  por- 
tion of  the  island  of  Martha's  Vineyard  rises  into  rounded 
hills  of  considerable  elevation,  composed  of  gravelly  drift, 
strewn  occasionally  with  large    boulders.      The}'  are  evidently 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  379 

of  glacial  origin.  The  more  central  portion  consists  of  level 
plains  of  gravel,  covered  with  oaks,  mostly  Quercus  oblusi- 
loba.  The  general  character  of  the  flora  is  much  like  that  found 
on  the  summit  of  the  divides  in  southern  New  Jersey,  though 
much  move  limited  as  to  species.  Farther  south,  extensive  ponds, 
both  of  fresh  and  salt  water,  introduce  their  characteristic  vege- 
tation. In  Nantucket  he  had*  found  the  gravelly  hills  of  much 
less  height,  the  greater  portion  of  the  island  consisting  in  fact  of 
treeless  plains — one  extensive  grove  of  Pinus  rigida  exists  in  the 
central  portion  of  the  island,  and  is  known  to  have  been  planted. 
The  plains  alluded  to  were  many  years  ago  occupied  as  sheep 
pastures.  But  of  late  years  this  has  been  prohibited,  and  it  is 
said  that  since  then  there  has  been  a  great  change  in  the  character 
of  the  vegetation.  The  most  characteristic  plant  of  these  plains 
seemed  to  be  Arctostaphylos  uva-ursi, which  grows  there  in  greater 
profusion  than  he  had  ever  seen  it.  The  two  species  of  Hudsonia 
abound,  the  H.  ericoides  being  seen  everywhere,  and  less  frequently 
the  more  bluish-green  tufts  of  H.  tomentosa.  Polygala  jjolygama, 
Myrica  cerifera  and  various  Vaccinese  abound.  He  saw  many 
large  patches  of  Gorema  Conradii,  the  existence  of  which  in 
Nantucket  had  first  been  made  known  by  Mrs.  Owen  of  Spring- 
field, Mass.  But  the  most  interesting  feature  is  the  existence 
here  of  three  species  of  heath,  possibly  indigenous.  Mrs.  Owen, 
who  published  a  preliminary  catalogue  of  the  Nantucket  flora  a 
few  years  ago, records  Galluna  vulgaris  and  Erica  cinerea  as  found 
upon  the  island.  The  first  of  these  had  long  been  known  to  occur 
at  Tewksbury,  Mass.,  and  there  had  been  some  question  as  to 
whether  its  presence  there  was  due  to  human  agenc}r.  Its  subse- 
quent discovery  in  Nova  Scotia  and  Newfoundland  had  seemed 
to  strengthen  the  idea  of  its  indigenous  character.  Mr.  R.  did 
not  see  the  locality  of  Galluna  vulgaris,  but  had  the  privilege  of 
seeing  that  of  the  Erica  cinerea.  This  plant  had  been  known 
and  watched  for  10  or  12  3'ears,  and  is  evidently  an  old  one.  It 
grows  in  the  open  common — far  away  from  the  town — and  there 
is  nothing  about  its  surroundings  to  indicate  human  introduction. 
It  covers  only  a  space  of  eight  inches  by  ten. 

Since  Mr.  Redfield's  visit  the  third  species  Erica  tetralix  had 
been  discovered  in  a  locality  very  distant  from  that  of  E.  cinerea, 
but  under  circumstances  which  favor  the  idea  of  its  accidental 
introduction  in  connection  with  the  importation  of  foreign  trees. 
But  there  are  said  to  be  seven  or  eight  of  the  plants  all  thriving, 
large,  and  bushy. 


October  20. 
The  President,  Dr.  Leidy,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-eight  persons  present. 


380  proceedings  of  the  academy  of  [1885. 

October  27. 
The  President,  Dr.  Leidy,  in  the  chair. 

Fortj*-two  persons  present. 

The  following  papers  were  presented  for  publication  : — 

"A  Review  of  the  American  Gasterostidas,"  by  Carl  H.  Eigeu- 
man. 

"A  Catalogue  of  the  Fishes  of  Bean  Blossom  Creek,  Monroe 
Co.,  Ind.,"  by  Carl  H.  Eigenman  and  Morton  W.  Fordice. 

"  List  of  Fishes  collected  in  Harvey  and  Cowley  Counties, 
Kansas,"  by  B.  W.  Everman  and  Morton  W.  Fordice. 

"A  Revision  of  the  American  species  of  the  Genus  Gerres,"  by 
B.  W.  Everman  and  Seth  E.  Meek. 

"A  Revision  of  the  American  species  of  the  Genus  Scorpaena," 
bj'  Seth  E.  Meek  and  Robert  Newland. 

The  Committee  appointed  to  settle  the  estate  of  the  late  Henry 
N.  Johnson,  under  whose  will  dated  March  5, 1878,  the  Academy 
is  made  residuary  legatee  after  the  death  of  his  wife,  reported 
that  Mrs.  Elizabeth  Johnson  had  died  February  21,  1885,  that 
the  estimated  value  of  the  entire  estate  amounts  to  $51,761.40, 
and  that  the  present  income  from  the  productive  portion,  less 
taxes  and  water  rent,  is  $1434.82. 

The  following  resolution  was  unanimously  adopted  : — 

Resolved,  That  the  thanks  of  the  Academy  are  herebjr  tendered 
to  Mr.  Jacob  Binder  and  to  Uselma  C.  Smith,  Esq.,  the  Solicitor 
of  the  Academy,  for  their  careful  and  laborious  services  in  the 
matter  of  the  Johnson  estate. 

The  following  was  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  381 


BIOGRAPHICAL  NOTICE  OF  HENRY  N.  JOHNSON. 
BY   THOMAS   MEEHAN. 

In  the  central  part  of  Germantown,  on  what  is  known  as  "  The 
battle-ground,"  is  "  Upsal,"  the  estate  of  John  Johnson,  the  de- 
scendant of  Dirk  Jansen,  an  early  settler  in  that  borough.  The 
residence  is  some  five  hundred  feet  west  of  the  celebrated  Chew 
Mansion,  in  which  a  number  of  British  troops  fortified  themselves 
in  the  war  of  the  Revolution  to  resist  the  advance  of  General 
Washington's  army  towards  Philadelphia.  In  front  of  John 
Johnson's  house  the  cannon  were  placed  that  were  used  by  the 
American  army  in  the  attack  on  the  Chew  House.  The  estate 
was  known  as  "  Upsal,"  a  name  associated  with  the  great  Swed- 
ish botanist  Linnaeus  ;  but  in  this  case  given  from  its  being  the 
birthplace  of  Mrs.  John  Johnson. 

A  love  of*  botany,  or  at  least  of  rare  trees  and  plants,  must  have 
been  a  trait  in  the  character  of  John  Johnson,  for  when  the  writer 
first  knew  it,  about  1856,  it  was,  in  many  regards,  a  botanic 
garden,  in  respect  to  the  number  of  rare  herbaceous  plants  growing 
there,  while  some  of  the  finest  specimens  of  rare  trees  to  be  found 
about  the  city,  adorned  the  grounds.  At  that  time  it  contained 
a  specimen  of  the  European  silver  fir,  which  the  writer  measured 
and  found  over  ninety  feet  high ;  a  very  large  deciduous  cypress,  by 
examining  which  the  late  Dr.  Engelmann  made  his  first  discovery 
of  the  fact  that  at  least  one  coniferous  plant  imitated  amentaceous 
plants  in  advancing  considerably  male  flower  buds  in  the  fall ; 
magnolias,  and  especially  a  specimen  of  the  American  yew,  which 
remains  to  this  day  probably  the  finest  specimen  of  this  plant  in 
the  world.  These  trees,  according  to  the  statement  of  Henry  >»., 
the  son  and  subject  of  this  sketch,  were  planted  by  John  Johnson 
about  the  year  1800. 

Henry  N.  was  born  on  the  20th  of  May,  1820.  He  completed 
his  education  in  the  old  Germantown  Academy  in  1839.  He  was 
noted  among  his  schoolmates  for  a  studious  disposition,  and  in 
the  classics,  literature,  and  mathematics,  particularly,  kept  at  the 
head  of  his  class.  Entering  manhood  he  started,  in  connection 
with  a  friend,  the  business  of  a  bookseller,  on  Chestnut  Street, 
near  Seventh,  in  Philadelphia,  which  was  ultimately  abandoned. 
A  physical  infirmity  which  afflicted  him  from  birth,  rendered 


382  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

him  averse  to  city  life,  and  after  declining  business,  he  took  on 
himself  the  care  of  the  estate — the  garden,  especially,  receiving 
his  special  attention.  Physically  strong,  he  loved  to  apply  him- 
self to  garden  work,  and  a  large  number  of  rare  trees  and  plants 
were  added  from  time  to  time,  and  set  out  with  his  own  hands. 
Some  of  the  finest  specimens  of  the  Japan  cedar — Cryptomeria 
Japonica — are  here,  and  the  only  known  plant  of  the  mammoth 
Sequoia  in  existence  around  Philadelphia.  The  tree,  although  not 
seeming  to  like  our  hot  summers,  is  growing  here  in  fair  health — all 
from  his  planting  and  care.  He  would  have  disclaimed  the  title  of 
botanist,  but  his  love  for  trees  and  plants,  and  the  great  amount 
of  knowledge  he  possessed  regarding  them,  was  very  unusual  in 
a  mere  lover  of  gardening.  He  always  took  great  interest  in  the 
progress  of  natural  history,  and,  in  conversation  with  the  writer, 
subjects  connected  with  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences,  show- 
ing an  interest  in  its  welfare,  were  frequent  topics. 

He  continued  his  interest  in  the  oversight  of  the  family  estate 
till  about  1865,  when  it  was  divided,  and  he  took  his  separate 
share.  About  this  time  he  married  a  lady  of  Philadelphia  with 
whom  he  had  been  long  acquainted,  and  went  to  housekeeping  on 
Guard  Avenue,  near  Fairmount  Park,  in  which  beautiful  spot, 
among  the  trees  and  flowers,  he  would  spend  most  of  his  time. 
He  died  on  the  30th  of  August,  1879,  leaving  the  use  of  all  he  was 
possessed  of  to  his  wife  during  her  lifetime,  and  to  revert  to  the 
Academy  on  her  decease. 


1885.]  natural  sciences  of  philadelphia.  383 

November  3. 
Mr.  Thos.  Meehan,  Vice-President,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-five  persons  present. 

Virulence  of  the  Common  Parsnip. — Mr.  Meehan  referred  to 
the  deaths  of  some  children,  at  Danville,  Pa.,  in  the  spring  of 
1884,  reputed  to  be  caused  by  eating  the  roots  of  the  wild  pars- 
nip. This  was  usually  understood  to  mean  the  roots  of  Cicuta 
maculata,  or  perhaps  Conium  maculatum.  Roots  had  been  sent 
to  him  by  the  attendant  physician,  among  which  was  the  fragment 
of  a  portion  that  one  of  the  dead  children  had  partially  eaten,  with 
teeth  marks  on  the  remains.  There  seemed  no  chance  for  error 
in  this  case.  The  root,  which  was  evidently  neither  of  the  two 
reputed  to  be  virulent,  was  planted.  It  proved  to  be  the  true  garden 
parsnip.  Pdstinaca  sativa,  which  has  become  an  escape  from 
gardens  in  many  parts  of  the  United  States.  Although  the  evi- 
dence that  the  deaths  were  from  the  wild  roots  of  the  common 
garden  parsnip  appeared  so  conclusive,  in  view  of  the  fact  that 
there  seems  to  be  no  record  of  such  a  virulent  character  in  con- 
nection with  this  plant,  it  was  thought  possible  there  might  still 
be  some  mistake, and  corroborative  evidence  was  sought  for.  It  was 
found  that  in  the  cultivated  form  some  growers  are  careful  about 
weeding  or  working  among  the  leaves  while  the  dew  is  on  them, 
as  severe  cases  of  poisoning  have  been  known  to  result,  and  on 
large  seed  farms,  the  workmen  engaged  in  cutting  the  stalks  at 
the  seed  harvest,  have  to  protect  their  hands  and  arms  against 
contact  with  the  juices,  or  they  are  liable  to  be  severely  poisoned 
in  a  manner  similar  to  that  from  the  poison  vine  Rhus  toxicoden- 
dron. With  these  facts  it  seems  worth  placing  on  record  what 
seems  to  be  indisputable  that  the  deaths  of  the  Danville  children 
were  really  caused  by  the  wild  garden  parsnip,  Pastinaca  sativa. 


November  10. 
The  President,  Dr.  Leidy,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-four  persons  present. 

The  Shape  of  the  Hind  Limb  in  the  Mammalia  as  Modified  bxj 
the  Weight  of  the  Trunk. — Dr.  Harrison  Allen  directed  attention 
to  the  osseous  characters  of  the  posterior  extremities  in  mammals, 
as  determined  by  the  weight  borne.  The  shape  of  the  hind  limb 
in  the  majority  of  the  forms  is  that  best  adapted  for  sustaining 
the  weight  of  the  hinder  part  of  the  trunk. 

The  head  of  the  femur  lies  upon  a  neck  which  is  relatively  long ; 


384  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

the  shaft  is  cylindroid,  and  the  condylar  end  is  expanded  in  all 
its  diameters,  but  notably  in  its  posterior  diameter.  Were  a  sec- 
tion of  the  condyles  made  by  extending  downward  the  plane  of 
the  posterior  surface  of  the  femur,  the  condyles  would  be  removed 
in  such  manner  as  to  retain  in  the  removed  segment  the  base 
of  the  inter-condyloid  notch.  If,  however,  the  parts  named  be 
examined  in  the  sloth,  in  the  genus  Gylosthurus  (the  two-toed 
arboreal  ant-eater),  in  the  bat  and  in  the  seal,  the  head  of  the  femur 
is  seen  to  be  without  a  neck,  or  to  possess  a  very  small  one.  The 
shaft  of  the  femur  is  flattened,  and  the  condylar  end  is  scarcely  at 
nil  expanded.  If  a  section  be  made  as  above  described,  the  base 
of  the  condyloid  notch  is  not  removed  with  the  section.  The 
bone  in  its  general  features  resembles  the  femur  of  the  embryo. 

The  fibula  in  the  genera  bearing  the  weight  of  the  body,  exhibits 
two  forms,  one  in  which  the  bone  is  parallel  to  the  tibia,  and  nearly 
equal  to  it  in  length,  and  a  second  in  which  the  distal  end  is  either 
anchylosed  to  the  shaft  of  the  tibia  or  is  obliterated.  In  the  genera 
which  are  suspended  by  the  feet,  or  are  otherwise  free  from  the 
sustenance  of  weight,  the  fibula,  when  it  departs  from  the  type  in 
which  it  is  separate  from,  but  co-equal  with  the  tibia,  is  always 
reduced  at  the  proximal  end.  In  the  seal  the  proximal  end  is 
anchylosed  to  the  shaft  of  the  tibia;  in  the  bat  the  proximal  end 
is  entirely  absent ;  in  the  sloth  the  proximal  end,  while  free,  is 
small,  while  the  distal  end  is  broad  and  highly  specialized  in 
function. 

The  astragalus  is  flattened  and  irregular  in  the  t}rpes  whose 
posterior  extremities  sustain  weight,  but  in  those  free  from  such 
weight  it  is  elongated.  The  tendency  is  seen  in  Galago  and 
Tarsuis,  for  both  calcaneum  and  astragalus  are  seen  to  be  elon- 
gated, but  the  tendency  is  carried  to  an  extreme  degree  in  the 
sloth,  the  bat,  and  in  l'hoca  vitulina. 

The  manner  of  articulation  in  the  gorilla  of  the  fibula,  with 
both  the  calcaneum  and  the  astragalus,  was  dwelt  upon,  as  well 
as  the  fact  that  the  astragalus  in  that  genus  possesses  a  broad 
deflected  fibular  facet.  This  peculiar  projection  is  rudimental  in 
the  astragalus  of  the  skeleton  of  civilized  man,  but  was  found 
highly  developed  in  an  astragalus  from  an  Indian  grave  found  at 
Cooper's  Point,  New  Jersey. 

The  following  was  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


1885.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  385 


ATTACK  AND  DEFENSE  AS  AGENTS  IN  ANIMAL  EVOLUTION. 
BY    CHARLES    MORRI8. 

In  considering  the  development  of  the  dermal  skeleton  of 
animals,  with  its  various  modifications,  we  are  led  almost  to  the 
conception  that  nature  has  been  controlled  at  successive  periods 
by  special  ideas,  each  dominant  during  a  long  period,  and  then 
abandoned  in  favor  of  a  new  one.  I  have,  in  a  previous  commu- 
nication to  the  Academy,  advanced  the  hypothesis  that  in  the 
primitive  life  era  animals  were  destitute  of  hard  parts,  either 
external  or  internal,  and  that  to  this  we  must  ascribe  the  lack  of 
primitive  fossils. 

The  development  of  an  external  skeleton,  which  seems  to  have 
long  preceded  that  of  an  internal  one,  came  like  a  new  idea  to 
nature,  which  was  adopted  almost  simultaneously  as  it  seems, 
though  probably  at  considerable  intervals,  by  the  various  t}*pes 
of  life.  We  are  quite  sure  that  the  first  appearance  of  fossils  in 
the  rocks  does  not  indicate  the  first  appearance  of  life  upon  the 
earth.  Early  fossilization  is  due  to  the  preservation  of  the 
dermal  skeletons  of  animals  of  considerably  advanced  organiza- 
tion, and  these  were  very  probably  preceded,  during  a  long  era, 
by  soft-bodied  forms  of  low  organization.  These  could  leave  no 
trace  of  their  existence,  except  in  the  case  of  the  burrowing 
worms,  or  of  impressions  made  by  animal  forms  on  beds  of  mud 
or  other  plastic  material.  Yet  after  the  advent  of  armored  ani- 
mals, it  is  probable  that  the  seas  were  still  tenanted  by  numerous 
soft-bodied  forms,  mainly  swimmers,  the  progenitors  of  the  many 
naked  ocean  swimmers  which  still  exist. 

The  earliest  armored  forms  were  principally  surface  dwellers, 
or  sluggish  swimmers.  Swift-swimming  armored  animals  came 
in  with  the  fishes,  and  these  increased  in  thickness  and  weight  of 
armor  to  the  end  of  the  Devonian  era.  During  this  period  all  the 
higher  forms  of  life  seem  to  have  acquired  more  or  less  dense 
dermal  armor.  Their  agility  must  have  been  much  reduced  by 
the  weight  and  rigidity  of  this  armor.  None  but  the  fishes  were 
active  swimmers,  and  most  of  the  armored  animals  were  surface- 
dwellers. 

If  now  we  come  down  to  a  later  era  of  life,  we  find  in  operation 
what  seems  a  third  idea  of  nature.  The  prevailing  tendency  in 
26 


386  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

animal  life  is  no  longer  to  assume  armor,  but  to  throw  off  armor, 
and  return  towards  the  unprotected  condition.  This  tendencj' 
was  quite  as  marked  in  its  operation  as  the  others,  as  a  hasty 
review  will  show. 

In  the  antique  t}-pe  of  vertebrate  life,  the  fish,  the  thick  armor 
of  the  primeval  era  has  been  in  great  part  replaced  b}r  the  thin 
scales  of  the  Teleosteans.  The  Ganoids  have  nearly  vanished. 
Man}'  Elasmobranchs  yet  exist,  but  their  armor  never  gained  the 
dense  and  rigid  character  of  the  Ganoid  scales.  But  the  loss  of 
the  old  condition  is  more  particularly  shown  in  the  new  forms  of 
life.  The  Labyrinthodont  amphibians  were  clothed  in  armor, 
their  heads  in  particular  being  protected  by  hard  bony  plates. 
Modern  amphibians  are  naked-skinned  animals.  The  reptiles  are 
usually  scaled,  but,  with  the  exception  of  the  crocodiles  and 
turtles,  and  some  few  fossil  types,  do  not  seem  to  have  ever  been 
clothed  in  bony  armor.  In  the  later  vertebrate  classes,  the  birds 
and  mammals,  all  defensive  armor  is  lost,  the  covering  of  hairs 
and  feathers  being  protective  only  against  cold.  Finally,  in  the 
human  species,  even  the  covering  of  hairs  is  nearly  lost,  and  in 
external  condition  the  highest  form  of  animal  life  approaches  the 
lowest. 

A  like  tendency  to  pass  from  the  armored  to  the  unarmored 
condition  appears  in  invertebrate  life.  In  most  of  the  inverte- 
brates the  dermal  covering  serves  as  a  basis  of  muscular  attach- 
ment, and  cannot  be  dispensed  with.  The  soft-bodied  invertebrates 
of  low  orders,  such  as  the  worms,  the  medusae,  etc.,  are  probably 
survivals  of  the  primitive  life  condition,  and  may  indicate  the 
general  character  of  pre-Cambrian  life.  But  in  the  higher  mol- 
lusks  a  very  interesting  variation  appears.  The  Palaeozoic 
cephalopods  were  all  covered  with  a  dense  protective  armor.  In 
the  Mezozoic  period  this  class  began  to  give  way  to  an  unarmored 
class,  with  a  change  in  the  character  of  its  muscular  attachment. 
To  the  tetrabranchiates,  with  muscles  attached  to  the  external 
shell,  were  added  the  dibranchiates,  with  naked  surface,  and  an 
internal  basis  of  muscular  attachment.  Since  that  period  the 
evolutionary  process  has  been  highly  interesting.  The  armored 
cephalopods  have  gradually  disappeared,  until  only  the  Nautilus 
remains.  The  unarmored  forms  have  rapidly  increased,  until  they 
abundantly  people  the  modern  seas. 

The  process  of  modification  I  have  here  briefly  indicated  has 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OP   PHILADELPHIA.  387 

another  interesting  feature,  which  may  be  pointed  out.  This  is 
that  the  modification  has  not  taken  place  by  a  simple  change  in 
the  dermal  structure  of  existing  types,  but  that  this  change  has 
been  accompanied  by  a  radical  change  in  organic  structure.  The 
representatives  of  the  old  forms  have  retained  much  of  their  old 
surface  structure.  The  radical  variation  in  surface  condition  has 
been  confined  to  new  types  of  life. 

In  the  case  of  the  primitive  soft-bodied  animals,  for  instance, 
they  have  probably  had  representative  forms  throughout  the 
whole  era  of  life,  and  may  be  closely  simulated  by  the  soft-bodied 
ocean  animals  }ret  existing.  The  assumption  of  armor  by  certain 
forms  was  probably  accompanied  by  a  marked  change  in  structure, 
the  dermal  variation  being  co-related  with  other  important 
changes.  Of  this,  of  course,  we  cannot  be  sure,  but  in  the  parallel 
case  of  the  discarding  of  armor  this  idea  holds  good.  The 
Ganoids  continue  armored  fishes  to  the  present  day.  The  pre- 
vailing thin-scaled  fishes  are  of  a  new  structural  type.  In  the 
cephalopotls  we  do  not  find  a  simple  discarding  of  shells  by  the 
armored  type,  but  the  gradual  disappearance  of  this  type,  and  its 
replacement  by  a  type  of  markedly  different  structure.  In  the 
vertebrata  generally  the  antique  types  have  preserved  the  scaled 
condition  to  a  greater  or  less  extent.  It  is  in  the  new  structural 
types,  the  birds  and  mammals,  that  this  antique  condition  has  been 
most  fully  discarded,  and  replaced  by  a  radically  distinct  dermal 
covering.  It  would  almost  seem  as  if  it  had  been  impossible  for 
any  type  of  animal  to  completely  dispense  with  a  primitive  struc- 
tural feature  except  under  the  influence  of  a  general  organic 
change.  In  the  assumption  of  armor  the  whole  organic  structure 
may  have  suffered  a  correlated  change.  In  the  discarding  of 
armor  a  like  radical  change  in  structure  has  taken  place,  while 
the  representatives  of  the  ancient  types  have  preserved  their 
ancient  dermal  conditions. 

I  present  these  simply  as  a  series  of  well-known  facts.  It  is 
with  the  cause  of  these  facts  that  I  am  mainly  concerned.  Why 
did  animal  life  exist  for  a  long  period  without  protective  covering ; 
then  adopt  armor  of  defense,  and  develop  it  to  an  extraordinary 
degree  ;  and  finally  slowly  discard  this  armor,  and  return  towards 
the  unprotected  condition  ?  We  have  here  a  remarkable  series  of 
evolutionary  changes.  They  undoubtedly  had  sufficient  and 
powerful  causes.     What  were  those  causes  ? 


388  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

These  we  need  not  go  far  to  seek.  They  are  plainly  evident. 
The  variations  described  have  taken  place  under  the  influence  of 
one  of  the  most  active  and  efficient  agents  in  evolution,  that  of 
the  reciprocal  influence  of  attack  and  defense  on  animal  structure. 
To  this  agent  in  animal  change  there  has  not  been  given  so  much 
attention  as  it  demands.  It  is,  indeed,  but  one  out  of  numerous 
agents  which  act  to  modify  animal  form  and  structure.  But 
among  these  agents  it  has  been  one  of  the  most  active,  efficient 
and  unceasing. 

The  effort  of  food  animals  to  escape  from  carnivorous  foes,  has 
given  rise  to  a  great  variety  of  defensive  tissues,  functions,  and 
habits.  It  has  aided  in  the  natural  selection  of  armor  of  various 
kinds,  of  defensive  weapons,  of  speed  and  flexibility  of  motion, 
of  size  and  strength  of  body,  of  cunning  and  alertness,  and  of 
many  other  characteristics,  each  of  evolutionary  importance. 
And  the  study  of  animal  development  goes  to  show  that  these 
varied  conditions  have  been  assumed  successive!}7.  Nature  has 
apparently  fully  worked  out  the  capabilities  of  one  mode  of 
defense  before  proceeding  to  another. 

The  effort  to  capture  and  destroy  food  animals  has  been  equally 
important  as  an  agent  in  evolution.  It  has  caused  the  natural 
selection  of  weapons  of  offense,  such  as  claws  and  teeth,  of 
strength,  swiftness,  agility,  alertness,  cunning,  and  the  like  attri- 
butes of  mind  and  body,  together  with  many  special  habits,  all  of 
which  form  steps  in  evolution.  The  main  cause  of  this  advance 
has  been  the  reciprocal  action  of  these  agencies.  If  a  food  animal 
gained  some  structural  feature  which  gave  it  an  advantage  over 
its  carnivorous  foes,  the  latter  would  be  at  a  disadvantage  until 
they  had  gained  equivalent  features.  So  if  a  carnivorous  animal 
gained  some  habit,  motion  or  weapon  which  gave  it  an  advantage 
in  destroying,  this  must  have  acted  as  an  incitement  to  a  corre- 
sponding development  in  food  animals.  Natural  selection  has,  in 
both  cases,  preserved  the  forms  best  adapted  to  the  new  condi- 
tions of  attack  or  defense,  and  the  carnivora  and  herbivora  have, 
in  a  metaphorical  sense,  pursued  each  other  up  the  ladder  of 
evolution. 

In  this  process  now  one  class,  now  the  other,  may  have  taken 
the  lead.  If  at  any  time  the  two  classes  were  evenly  balanced  in 
powers  of  attack  and  defense,  any  new  power  of  defense  or  escape 
in  the  food  animals  would  undoubtedly  be  preserved  by  natural 


1885.]  NATURAL   8CIENCE8  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  389 

selection.  It  would  give  them  an  advantage  in  the  struggle  for 
existence,  which  could  not  be  overcome  until  the  carnivora  ha<l 
gained  a  correlated  development.  On  the  other  hand  any  new 
offensive  weapon  or  method  would  give  the  carnivora  an  advan- 
tage, which  would  render  necessary  some  new  defensive  adaptation 
in  food  animals. 

In  this  process  of  evolution  we  find  several  instances  in  which 
defensive  appliances  seem  to  have  gained  a  special  development, 
which  were  only  slowly  met  by  new  methods  of  attack.  Such  I 
conceive  to  have  been  the  case  when  the  power  of  secretion  of 
dermal  armor  was  once  attained,  and  to  the  high  value  of  this 
defensive  expedient  I  ascribe  its  rapid  development.  According 
to  m}r  theory  of  the  case  the  preceding  animals  had  been  naked 
skinned,  and  the  destructive  weapons  of  the  carnivora  such  as 
were  adapted  to  the  capture  of  soft-bodied  pre}'.  There  is  not  a 
shred  of  evidence  that  any  toothed  forms  existed  preceding  or 
during  the  Cambrian  era,  nor  until  well  on  in  the  Silurian.  Yet 
toothless  animals  could  not  easily  overcome  animals  with  a  strong 
covering  of  bone  or  other  hard  material.  It  is  to  this  fact  that  I 
ascribe  the  rapid  increase  in  number  and  variety  of  armored 
forms.  Their  armor  gave  them  a  special  advantage  in  defense, 
and  under  this  idea  there  is  no  difficulty  in  understanding  the 
very  rapid  and  general  evolution  of  this  structural  feature  of 
animal  life. 

In  fact,  as  a  result  of  the  development  of  defensive  armor,  a 
discrepancy  arose  between  the  agencies  of  attack  and  defense. 
Defense  had  the  best  of  it.  A  structural  feature  had  been  rapidly 
acquired,  which  could  only  be  met  by  some  corresponding  new 
means  of  attack,  and  this  new  carnivorous  weapon  took  a  long 
time  to  develop. 

The  new  weapon,  through  whose  aid  the  aggressive  again 
slowly  matched  thedefensive  appliances,  made  its  appearance  in 
the  form  of  the  tooth.  It  but  slowly  grew  effective.  The  first 
evidence  we  find  of  teeth  are  the  minute  conodonts,  which  may 
or  may  not  have  had  this  function.  Fish  teeth  at  first  appear  in 
small  and  weak  forms,  but  they  gradually  grow  large  and  powerful , 
and  well  adapted  for  cutting  and  crushing.  A  race  between 
aggressive  and  defensive  powers  apparently  took  place.  Armor 
grew  thicker  and  denser  as  teeth  became  more  efficient.  As  one 
result  of  the  race  we  have  the  great  Devonian  fishes,  with  their 


390  PROCEEDINGS    OP   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

powerful  armor  and  teeth.  The  toothless  invertebrates  probably 
still  fed  on  small,  unarmored  prey. 

In  all  cases,  however,  the  most  powerful  animals  would  have 
little  or  no  need  of  defensive  armor.  The  armed  Ganoids  prob- 
ably needed  defense  against  each  other.  But  it  is  likely  that 
they  were  mainly  defended  against  the  great  Elasmobranchs, 
which  were  the  ruling  tyrants  of  the  seas,  and  which  needed  no 
defense  beyond  their  osseous  tubercles  and  spines,  this  type  of 
armor  permitting  the  utmost  flexibility  of  motion.  As  Packard 
says  of  them :  "Sharks  and  skates  are  engines  of  destruction, 
having  been,  since  their  early  appearance  in  the  upper  Silurian 
age,  the  terror  of  the  seas.  Their  entire  structure  is  such  as  to 
enable  them  to  seize,  crush,  tear  and  rapidly  digest  large  inverte- 
brates, and  the  larger  marine  members  of  their  own  class.  Hence 
their  own  forms  are  gigantic,  soft,  not  protected  by  scales  or 
armor,  as  they  have  in  the  adult  form  few  enemies."  Such  seems 
to  have  been  the  outcome  of  the  agencies  of  attack  and  defense  in 
the  pakeozoic  era,  a  minor  series  of  soft-bodied  animals,  an  inter- 
mediate series  of  strongly  armored  animals,  and  a  superior  series 
of  animals,  adapted  to  break  through  the  strongest  defensive 
armor. 

As  a  result  of  this  evolutionary  process  the  powers  of  assault 
and  defense  again  became  equalized,  and  armor  lost  its  special 
value  as  a  defensive  agent.  From  that  time  forward  defense 
seems  to  have  adopted  a  new  expedient,  and  a  fresh  series  of  modi- 
fications arose.  W  armor  had  become  of  li.ttle  value  in  defense, 
flight  remained  useful.  But  armor  impeded  flight,  both  from  its 
weight  and  the  rigidity  of  body  it  produced.  Thus  for  the 
development  of  speed,  agility  and  flexibility  of  motion,  it  was 
necessary  to  get  rid  of  armor  ;  and  during  the  whole  of  the  later 
geological  periods  this  has  been  the  character  of  the  evolutionary 
process,  at  least  in  the  free-moving  animals.  Food  animals  have 
thrown  off  their  armor,  and  trusted  to  speed  and  flexibility  of 
motion  for  safety.  Carnivorous  animals  have  followed  in  the 
-Mine  direction,  and  got  rid  of  their  disabling  armor. 

If  we  puisne  this  subject  further  we  can  perceive  the  succes- 
sive adoption  of  several  other  expedients.  It  is  impossible  to 
say  whether  flight  or  pursuit  first  aided  in  the  development  of 
winged  animals.  Bui  it  is  evident  that  Hying  food  animals  would 
lie  nearly  safe  from  the  attacks  of  surface  carnivora,  and  would 


1885.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  391 

gain  a  security  which  only  the  development  of  flying  carnivora 
could  overcome.  The  same  may  be  said  of  tree-living  and  bur- 
rowing animals.  It  seems  highly  probable  that  all  these  expedi- 
ents were  first  adopted  in  the  effort  to  escape  destruction,  and 
that  similar  expedients  were  afterwards  adopted  by  carnivora  in 
their  pursuit  of  prey.  It  would  not  be  safe  to  declare  that  the 
various  expedients  mentioned  were  in  every  case  first  adopted 
by  food  animals,  and  afterwards  by  the  pursuing  carnivora,  but 
the  probability  is  that  this  was  the  case  as  a  general  rule. 

I  may  briefty  l'efer  to  one  other  and  a  highly  important  result 
of  this  evolutionary  process.  When  powers  of  flight  had  become 
balanced  by  powers  of  pursuit,  it  is  evident  that  this  expedient, 
like  that  of  armor,  had  lost  its  special  utility.  As  a  result  another 
and  final  expedient  began  a  special  development.  Cunning  and 
shrewdness  came  into  play  as  aids  in  escape.  The  mental  powers 
of  animals  began  to  strongly  unfold.  This  was  the  case  in  both 
classes  of  animals,  and  it  is  impossible  to  say  which  took  the 
lead.  In  both  classes  cunning,  concealment,  reasoning  powers, 
came  into  play,  and  blind  flight  and  pursuit,  or  defense  through 
sheer  bulk  and  strength,  became  succeeded,  in  many  cases,  by  the 
higher  and  more  efficient  agency  of  the  mind.  Instinct  became 
less  dominant  in  animal  life ;  reason  more  dominant.  In  other 
words,  the  mind  grew  more  active  and  varied  in  its  operations. 

The  growth  of  this  most  recent  animal  modification  is  manifest 
in  the  character  of  the  later  geological  life.  The  development  of 
the  brain  becomes  marked  as  we  enter  the  tertiary  era,  and  the 
capacit}^  of  the  brain  cavity  steadily  increases  throughout  this 
era.  What  is  called  cephalization  is  the  most  important  charac- 
teristic of  animal  development  throughout  the  tertiary  age.  In 
the  recent  era  this  has  reached  its  culmination,  and  mental 
expedients  have  replaced  physical  conditions  in  the  highest  life 
types  as  the  most  efficient  agencies  of  attack  and  defense. 

Thus  we  seem  to  perceive  four  successive  ideas  emerging  into 
prominence  in  the  development  of  the  animal  kingdom.  In  the 
primeval  epoch  it  is  probable  that  only  soft-bodied  animals 
existed,  and  the  weapons  of  assault  were  the  tentacle,  the  thread 
cell,  the  sucking  disk,  and  the  like  unindurated  weapons.  At  a 
later  period  armor  became  generally  adopted  for  defense,  and  the 
tooth  became  the  most  efficient  weapon  of  attack.  Still  later 
armor   was   discarded,  and   flight   or   concealment   became   the 


'6V1  PttOCJiliDINUS   Ui'    TliE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

main  methods  of  escape,  and  swift  pursuit  the  principle  of 
attack,  while  claws  were  added  to  teeth  as  assailing  weapons. 
Finally  mentality  came  into  play,  intelligence  became  the  most 
efficient  agent  both  in  attack  and  defense,  and  a  special  develop- 
ment of  the  mind  began.  As  a  culmination  of  the  whole,  we 
have  man,  in  whom  mentality  has  replaced  all  other  agents 
in  the  struggle  for  existence.  But  side  by  side  with  man  all  the 
other  types  exist,  the  soft-bodied,  the  armored,  the  swift-moving, 
and  those  in  which  cunning  precedes  the  higher  mentality.  In 
the  existing  conditions  of  life  upon  the  earth  we  have  an  epitome 
of  the  whole  long  course  of  evolution. 


1885.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  393 


November  17. 

Mr.  Thos.  Meehan,  Vice-President,  in  the  chair. 

Thirty-two  persons  present. 

The  deaths  of  Win,  G.  Piatt,  a  member,  and  of  Wm.  B.  Carpen- 
ter, a  correspondent,  were  announced. 


November  24. 

The  President,  Dr.  Leidy,  in  the  chair. 

Twent3'-two  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  Notes  on  the  Lafayette  Serpentine  Belt,"  by 
Theo.  D.  Rand,  was  presented  for  publication  through  the  Min- 
eralogical  Section. 

The  following  were  elected  members : 

John  H.  Campbell,W.  G.  A.Bonwill,M.D.,  Chas.S.  Dolley,M.  D., 
Chas.  N.  Davis  and  Wm.  D.  Averell. 

The  following  was  ordered  to  be  printed : 


394  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 


A   REVIEW   OF    THE   AMERICAN   SPECIES   OF   THE   GENUS    SCORPJENA. 
BY    SET  II    E.    MEEK   AND   ROBERT    NEWLAND. 

In  the  presenl  paper  is  given  the  synonymy  of  the  American 
speciea  of  the  genus  Scorpaena,  with  an  analj'tical  key,  by  which 
the  species  may  be  recognized.  For  purposes  of  comparison, 
the  two  European  species  are  included  iu  the  key  and  their 
synonymy  is  given  in  part.  Scorpaena  dactyloptera  is  not  included 
in  this  analysis,  as  with  Dr.  Gill,  we  refer  it  to  a  distinct  genus 
Sebastophi*. 

The  specimens  examined  b}T  us  all  belong  to  the  museum  of 
the  Indiana  University,  most  of  them  having  been  collected  by 
Professor  Jordan.  To  Professor  Jordan  we  are  under  many 
obligations  in  connection  with  our  study  of  this  and  other  groups 
of  fishes. 

Genua  SCORPiENA,   Linnaeus. 

Scorpcena,  Artedi,  Genera  Piscium,  1738,  4T. 
Scorpcena,  Linnaeus,  Systema  Naturae,  1766,  4.">2  (parvus). 
Pontinus,  Poey,  Memorias  Cuba,  ii,  1860,  173  (castor). 
Sebastapistes,  (Gill)  Streets,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  vii,  1877,  63  (guttata; 
strongia;  cyu  no  stigma). 

Analysis  of  Species  of  Scorpaena. 

a.  Occiput  with  a  distinct  quadrate  pit,  about  as  large  as  eye. 
I).   Breast  not  scaly;  second  anal  spine  decidedly  stronger  than 
the  third  ;  coronal  spines  present. 

c.  Scales  rather  large,  thin,  most  of  them  with  dermal  flaps  ; 
about  40  scales  in  lateral  line  ;  a  small  distinct  pit  between 
the  lower  anterior  margin  of  orbit  and  suborbital  stay; 
dorsal  I'm  high,  its  longest  spine  If  to  2  in  head  ;  longest 
anal  spine  3£  in  head  ;  eye  small,  4f  to  5  in  length  of 
head  ;  supraocular  tentacles  less  than  the  diameter  of  eye  ; 
pit  at  occiput  rather  shallow,  nearly  square.  Head  2.', ; 
depth  3;  D.  XII  L0;  A.  III-5.  Axil  dusky  with  do 
distincl  spots.  Fins  all  whitish,  marbled  with  darker; 
irregular  dark  markings  on  sides.  Scrofa.     1. 

CC.  Scales  small,  firm,  a  few  below  the  lateral  line  with  dermal 
flaps.  About  65  scales  in  the  lateral  line;  no  distinct 
pit    1  ict ween   the   lower  anterior  margin  of  the  orbit  and 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  395 

suborbital  stay  ;  dorsal  fin  lower,  its  longest  spine  2]   in 
head  ;    anal   spine  2£  in    head.     Eye   larger,  4}   in  head. 
Supraocular  tentacles  about  as  long  as  diameter  of  eye. 
Head  2£ ;  depth  2f ;  D.  XII-10  ;  A.  III-5.     Axil  dusky, 
with  one  or  more  dark  spots.     Body  brownish  red,  mar- 
bled with  darker,  and  dotted  with  deep  black,  which  some- 
times forms  edges  around  the  darker  spots.       Porous.     2. 
bb.  Breast  scaly. 
d.  Coronal  spines  present ;  supraocular  tentacles  about  equal 
to  diameter  of  eye. 
e.  Third  anal  spine  evidently  longer  and  stronger  than  the 
second ;  suborbital  stay  armed  with   three   spines ;   no 
distinct  pit  between  lower  anterior  margin  of  orbit  and 
suborbital  stay ;  length  of  second  anal  spine  2i  (young) 
to  3  (adult)  in  head ;  longest  dorsal  spine  2^  in  head. 
Head  2^  ;  depth  2§ ;  scales  in  lateral  line  about  48 ;  some 
of  the  scales  with  dermal  flaps.     D.  XII-10;  A.  Ill— 5. 
Supraocular  tentacles  less  than  diameter  of  eye  ;  axil 
dusk}',  with  small  round  brownish  spots.  Color  brownish, 
clouded  with  darker  ;  a  few  darker  dots  behind  pectorals. 

Brasiliensis.     3. 
ee.  Third  anal  spine  shorter  and  weaker  than  second. 
/.  Suborbital   stay  not   armed  with   spines ;    occipital    pit 
evidently  broader  than  long. 
g.  Cheeks  scaly  ;  fins  low  ;  longest  dorsal  spine  1\  to  3  in 
head  ;  no  distinct  pit  between  lower  anterior  margin 
of  orbit  and  suborbital  stay. 
/?.  Scales  large,  some  of  them  with  dermal  flaps  ;  about  30 
in  the  lateral  line ;  supraorbital  tentacles  well  devel- 
oped.    Head  2TV ;  depth  3£ ;  D.  XII-10  ;  A.  III-5  ; 
longest  dorsal  spine  3  in  head;  longest  anal  spine  3 
in  head  ;  eye  4^  in  head.     Color  gray  or  red,  with 
broad,  darker  shades,  irregular  and  variable;    fins 
similarly  colored;  pectorals  barred  (Giinther.) 

Histrio.     4. 

hh.  l  [Scales   smaller,   without   dermal   flaps ;    about    46 

scales  in  the  lateral  line.     Head  2f ;  depth  3§  ;  eye 

3J  in  head  ;  longest  dorsal  spine  2i  in  head  ;  longest 

1  These  characters  are  taken  from  Valenciennes  figure,  and  are  all  more  or 
less  doubtful. 


896  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

anal  spine  2^  in  head.  D.  XII-10  ;  A.  III-5.  Head 
chiefl}-  red  ;  red  markings  on  dorsal  fin  and  on 
back  ;  pectoral  fins  barred.]  Fucata.     5. 

gg.  Cheeks  not  evidently  scaly  ;  fins  higher;  longest  dorsal 
spine  2  in  bead  ;  a  distinct  pit  between  lower  ante- 
rior margin  of  orbit  and    suborbital  stay ;    scales 
smaller  ;  about  50  in  the  lateral  line  ;  no  dermal  flaps 
except  along  the  lateral  line,  where  they  are  small ; 
supraorbital  tentacles  small;    about  ^  diameter  of 
eye.     Head   2^;  depth   3^;  ej'e   4^   in   head;    axil 
dusky,  with  round  brownish  spots  on  its  upper  part ; 
body  with  many  round  brownish-black  spots,  some 
of  which  are  nearlj'  as  large  as  eye.         Guttata.     6. 
ff.  Suborbital  stay  armed  with  three  or  four  spines;  occip- 
ital pit  about  as  long  as  broad. 
i.  No  distinct  pit  between  lower  anterior  margin  of  orbit 
and  suborbital  stay.     Head  entirely  naked  ;  supra- 
orbital tentacles  little  developed,  less  than  diameter 
of  eye  ;  a  few  scales  with  dermal  flaps,  lateral  line 
with  42  scales. 

Head  2£;  depth  2§;  D.  XII-10;  A.  III-5. 
Longest  dorsal  spine  2^  in  head  ;  longest  anal  spine 
2£  in  head  ;  eye  5  in  head. 

Reddish,  marbled  with  darker,  all  of  the  fins 
light  colored,  6cantily  spotted  (Gunther). 

Thompsoni.  7. 
ii.  A  distinct  pit  between  lower  anterior  margin  of  orbit 
and  suborbital  stay ;  upper  parts  of  opercle  scaly ; 
supraorbital  tentacles  well  developed,  longer  than 
eye;  most  of  the  scales  provided  with  dermal  flaps; 
lateral  line  with  30  scales.  Head  2| ;  depth  3 ; 
D.  XII-10;  A.  III-5.  Longest  dorsal  spine  2§  in 
head  ;  axil  of  pectoral  black  with  few  white  spots ; 
olive-brown,  excessively  marbled  with  silvery  and 
reddish  ;  fins  profusely  variegated ;  caudal  barred 
with  brown  and  silvery  ;  a  dark  blotch  on  spinous 
dorsal  between  the  sixth  and  seventh  spines. 

Flumieri.     8. 

dd.  Coronal  spines  absent.     Supraocular  tentacles  high,  more 

than  twice  the  diameter  of  the  eye;  occipital  pit  rather 


1885.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  397 

deep  ;  longest  dorsal  spine  2\  in  length  of  head  ;  head 
2i  ;  depth  2f.  About  38  scales  in  the  lateral  line  ;  eye 
4  in  head;  dermal  tlaps  on  lateral  line  longer  than 
eye,  a  few  of  the  scales  on  upper  and  posterior  parts 
of  the  body  with  dermal  flaps.  Suborbital  stay  with 
a  small  spine  near  its  centre,  one  on  its  posterior 
end  ;  axil  dusky,  with  small  white  dots  on  its  upper 
portion;  color  reddish,  marbled  with  brown.  Head  and 
body  minutely  dotted  with  white  ;  caudal  and  anal  fins 
with  broad  white  bands.  Grandicornis.     9. 

aa.  Occiput  without  evident  pit ;  no  pit  between  lower  anterior 
margin  of  orbit  and  suborbital  stay ;  cheeks  scaly. 

j.  Pectoral  rays  all  simple ;  opercle  and  subopercle 
well  scaled  ;  occipital  pit  obsolete  ;  dermal  flaps  on 
scales  of  the  lateral  line  and  belly.  Supraorbital 
tentacles  not  branched,  £  the  length  of  the  body. 
Second  anal  spine  moderate  ;  spinous  dorsal  low, 
D.  XII-10  ;  A.  Ill— 5.  Color  uniform  carmine-red, 
the  fins  somewhat  clouded  with  orange.  Supra- 
orbital tentacle  and  lower  pectoral  with  brown 
bands.     Head  2?  total  length  ;  eye  5  in  head. 

Castor.  10. 
jj.  Pectorals  with  some  of  their  upper  rays  branched. 
k.  Scales  large,  about  28  in  the  lateral  line  ;  occipital 
cavity  almost  obsolete ;  longest  dorsal  spine  2§ 
in  head ;  longest  anal  spine  3  in  head  ;  second 
and  third  anal  spines  subequal ;  few  of  the  scales 
with  dermal  flaps.  Eye  about  3£  in  head.  Sub- 
orbital stay  armed  with  two  small  spines  ;  supra- 
ocular flaps  minute,  a  few  small  flaps  on  the 
head;  depth  of  body  3  in  length.  Color  dusky 
grayish,  marbled  with  blackish  ;  a  black  suborbital 
bar ;  a  black  bar  at  base  of  caudal ;  axil  of  pec- 
toral whitish  with  dusky  specks,  a  black  spot 
on  its  upper  edge  ;  ventrals  mostly  black  ( Goode 
and  Bean).  Occipitalis.     11. 

kk.  Scales  small,  about  47  in  the  lateral  line  ;  longest 
dorsal  spine  2£  in  head  ;  longest  anal  spine  If  in 
head ;  second  anal  spine  evidently  longer  and 
stronger  than  the  third.     Head  2|;  depth  3  ;  eye 


398  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

4  in  head.  Sides  of  body  brownish,  with  darker 
brown  marmorations  ;  a  black  spot  on  upper  part 
of  spinous  dorsal  between  the  seventh  and  tenth 
spines.  Supraorbital  tentacles  very  small  (Stein- 
dachner).  Fernandeziana.     12. 

1.  Scorpaena  scrofa. 

Scorpcena  scrofa  Linnaeus,  Systema  Natura,  12th  ed.,  1766,  455  (Medi- 
terranean Sea);  Gmelin,  Systema  Natura,  1788,  1215  (Mediterra- 
nean i;Turton's  Linnaeus,  Systema  Natura,  1800,  756  (Mediterranean); 
Lacepede,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  iii,  1800,  259,  280;  Bloch  &  Schneider, 
Systema  Ichthyol.,  1801,  192  (Atlantic ;  Mediterranean) ;  Risso. 
Ichth.  Nice,  1810,  188  (Nice);  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat. 
Poiss.,  iv,  1829,  288  (Mediterranean);  Giinther,  Cat.  Fish.  Brit. 
Mus.,  ii,  I860,  108  (Mediterranean  ;  Malta  ;  Dalmatia  ;  North  Africa  ; 
Lisbon  ;  River  Niger  ;  Azores  ;  Madeira);  Steindachner,  Iclith.  Notiz. 
&  Berichte,  iv,  1867,  75;  (Barcelona;  Tarragona;  Valencia;  Cadiz; 
Gibraltar  ;  La  Corufia  ;  Vigo  ;  Lisbon  ;  Teneriffe  ;  Sentubal)  ;  Bean, 
Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1879,  23  (Gibraltar;  and  of  authors  generally). 

Scorpcena  barbata  Lacepede,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  iii,  18C0,  274. 

Scorpcena  lutea  Risso,  Ichth.  Nice,  1810,  190  (Nice). 

?  Scorpcena  ustulata  Lowe,  Proc.  Zool.  Soc,  1)S49,  36  (Madeira); 
Gunther,  Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  1860,  110  (copied.) 

Habitat. — Mediterranean  Sea  and  the  adjacent  Atlantic. 
The  numerous  specimens  of  Scorpsena  scrofa  examined  by  us 
were  collected  at  Venice  by  Dr.  Jordan. 

2.  Scorpaena  porcus. 

Scorpcena  porcus  Linnaeus,  Systema  Natura,  ed.  x,  1758,  266  (Medi- 
terranean) ;  Linnaeus,  Systema  Natura,  ed.  xii,  1766,  452  (Madeira); 
Turton's  Linnaeus,  Systema  Natura,  1800,  755  (Mediterranean) ; 
Bloch  &  Schneider,  Systema  Ichthyol.,  1801,  192  (Mediterranean  and 
Atlantic);  Risso,  Ichthyol.  Nice,  1810,  187  (Nice);  Cuvier  &  Valen- 
ciennes, Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  iv,  1829,  300  (Mediterranean,  Teneriffe, 
Caen;  New  York??);  DeKay,  N.  Y.  Fauna  Fish.,  1S42,  58  (copied); 
Giinther,  Cat,  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  ii,  1860,  107  (Mediterranean;  Dal- 
matia :  Adriatic;  Bay  of  Naples;  Lisbon  ;  Lanzarote);  Steindachner, 
Ichth.  Notizen  und  Berichte,  1867,  74  (Barcelona;  Tarragona; 
Valencia ;  Alicante ;  Malaga ;  Cartagena ;  Gibraltar ;  Cadiz  ;  Setubal ; 
Lisbon  ;  La  Coruiia  ;  Vigo  :  Algorta  ;  Santa  Cruz  ;  Teneriffe);  Bean, 
I 'roe.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  187!).  23  (Constantinople;  Marseilles);  Jordan 
&  Gilbert,  Byn.  Fish.  X.  A.,  1883,  68  (Southern  Em  ope). 

Cottus  rnassilensis  Forskal,  Desc.  Animal,  1775,  24  (Marseilles). 

Scorjm/iii  ma88%len8is  Lacepede,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  iii,  1*2!),  269  (Mar- 
seilles); Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  iv,  1829,  303. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  399 

Habitat. — Mediterranean  Sea  and  adjacent  Atlantic.  The 
locality  "New  York,"  given  by  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes,  is 
doubtless  an  error. 

The  numerous  specimens  examined  Irv  us  are  from  the  market 
of  Venice. 

3.  Scorpaena  brasiliensis. 

Scorpama  brasiliensis  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  iv, 
1829,  305  (Brazil);  Giinther,  Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  ii,  1860,  112 
(South  America  ;  Rio  Janeiro  ;  Bahia);  Kner,  Xovara  Fische.,  1865, 
114  (Rio  Janeiro);  Jordan,  Cat,  Fish.  N.  A.,  1885,  109. 

Scorpana  stearnsi  Goode  &  Bean,  Proc.  TJ.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  236 
(Gulf  of  Mexico);  Goode  &  Bean,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  421 
(Pensacola);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  TJ.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  614 
(Charleston)  ;  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  TJ.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  620 
(Charleston);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1883,  951 ;  Jordan, 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila.,  1884,  45  (Egmont  Key). 

Habitat Atlantic  coast  of  America  from  Charleston  to  Rio 

Janeiro. 

The  specimens  of  this  species  examined  by  us  are  from  Key 
West  and  Pensacola,  Florida. 

There  seems  to  be  no  serious  reason  to  doubt  that  Scorpa  na 
brasiliensis  is.  identical  with  the  species  known  on  our  coast  as 
Scorpsena  stearnsi. 

4.  Scorpaena  histrio. 

Scorpcena  histrio  Jenyns,  Zool.  Voy.  Beagle,  Fishes,  1812,  35,  pi.  8 
(Chatham  Island :  Galapagos  Archipelago) ;  Giinther,  Cat.  Fish. 
Brit.  Mus.,  ii,  1860,  115  (copied);  Steindachner,  Ichthyol.  Beitriige, 
ii,  1875,  8  (Juan  Fernandez  i;  Jordan,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila., 
1884,  292  (Chinchas  Islands). 

?  Scorpcena  fucala  Valenciennes,  "Voy.  Venus,  v,  Zool.,  1855,  313, 
PI.  3,  rig.  2"  (Galapagos  Archipelago). 

Habitat. — Chatham  Island  ;  Galapagos  Archipelago. 

The  figure  of  Scorpsena  fucata  differs  in  only  a  few  minor 
characters  from  S.  histrio,  and  was  probably  intended  for  that 
species.  The  differences  may  be  due  to  the  mistakes  on  the  part 
of  the  artist  employed  by  Valenciennes. 

5.  Scorpaena  guttata. 

Scorpwna  guttata  Girard,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1854,  145 
(Monterey);  Girard,  TJ.  S.  Pac.  R.  R.  Surv.,  1859,  77,  PI.  17  (Mon- 
terey): Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  TJ.  S.  Nat,  Mus..  1880,  455  Santa 
Barbara ;  San  Pedro  ;  San  Diego) ;  Jordan  &  Jouy,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 


400  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

Mns.,  1881,  C  ("Wilmington,  California  ;  Santa  Catalina  ;  San  Pedro; 
Santa  Barbara);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1881,  278 
(Ascension  Islands;  West  Coast  of  Lower  California);  Jordan  & 
Gilbert,  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1883,  679  ;  Jordan,  Cat.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1885, 
109. 
Sebastipistes  guttata  (Gill)  Streets,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  vii,  1877,  62 
(generic  diagnosis). 

Habitat. — Coast  of  California,  from  Point  Conception  south- 
ward to  Cerros  Island. 

We  have  examined  two  specimens  of  this  species,  both  from 
Southern  California. 

6.  Scorpsna  Thompsoni. 

Scorpcena  thou'psoni  Giinther,  Voyage  of  the  Challenger,  Fishes,  1880, 
24,  pi.  xii  (Juan  Fernandez). 

Habitat. — Juan  Fernandez. 

This  species  is  known  only  from  Gunthcr's  description  and 
figure. 

7.  Scorpaena  plumieri. 

Rascrtcio  Parra,   Dif.  Piezas  Je'  Hist.  Nat.,   1787,   34,  pi.   18,  fig.  9 

(Havana^. 
Scorpcena  plumieri  Blocb,  Kon.  Vet.  Acad.  Nya.  Hand'gr.  Stockholm, 

x,    1789,   234   (Martinique;  on  a  drawing  by  Plnmier);   Blocb  & 

Schneider,  Systema  Icbthyol.,   1801,  194  (Antilles  ;  Giinther,  Cat. 

Fisb.  Brit.  Mus..  ii,  1860,  113  (Jamaica ;  West  Indies  ;  South  Ameiica); 

Kn  r,  Novara  Fische,  1866,  114  (Rio  Janeiro  ;  Jordan  &  Gillert, 

Bull.  U.S.  Fish.  Comm.,  1882,  108  (Mazatlan  ;  Jordan  &  Gilbert, 

Bull.  U.  S.  Fisb.  Comm.,  1882,  111  (Panama);  Goode  &  Eean,  Proc. 

U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  188?,  233  (Gulf  of  Mexico);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Proc. 

U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  377  (Panama1;  Jordan  &  Gilbert.  Proc.  U.  S. 

Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  627  (Panama);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A. 

1883,  6S0  (Mazatlan);  Jordan,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1884,  137  (Key 

W  est  ;  Jordan,  Cat.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1885,  109. 
Scorpnna  bnfo  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  iv,  1829,  306 

(Martinique  ;  Brazil  ;  Richardson,  "Fauna  Bor.  Amer.  Fishes,  18^9, 

800"  ;  Newfoundland,  by  error  for  Flnrida. 
Scorpcp.na  bufo  De  Kay,  N.  Y.  Fauna  Fishes,  1842,  59,  pi.  70,  fig.  227 

(copied). 
Scorpcena  rascacio  Poey,  Memorias  Cuba,  ii,  1860,  169  (Havana>;Poey, 

Syn.  Pise.  Cub.,  18  8,  303  (Havana);  Poey,  Enum.  Pise.  Cub.,  1875, 

40  (Havana);  Cas(elnau,  "Anim.  nouv.  ou  rares.  Amer.  Sud.  Poiss., 

1861,  7." 
.'  Scorpcena  scrofina  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,   1833, 

465  (Brazil). 
Apistes  exul.  Gosse,  "Natur.  Soj.  Jamaica,  1856,  207"  (Jamaica). 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  401 

Habitat. — West  Indies;  Atlantic  and  Pacific  Coasts  of  Tropical 
America,  north  to  Florida. 

This  species  was  studied  from  specimens  varying  in  length 
from  three  to  eight  inches,  collected  at  Havana  and  Key  West, 
by  Dr.  Jordan. 

The  species  may  be  known  at  once  by  the  coloration  of  the 
pectoral  axil,  which  is  jet  black,  with  large  white  spots. 

Below  is  given  a  table  of  measurements  of  three  specimens  from 
Key  West.  The  proportions  are  given  in  hundredths  of  length 
from  tip  of  snout  to  the  end  of  last  vertebra  : 

Extreme  length  of  fish  in  inches, 8        7i  4? 

Length  of  fish  from  end  of  snout  to  last  caudal  vertebra, 

in  inches, 6        r>3  :;i 

Greatest  depth  of  fish  (hundredths  of  the  above),       .         .  34  :!4  35£ 

Greatest  width  of  body, 28  32£  26 

Length  of  head, .        .        .  45  48£  46£ 

Length  of  maxillary, 22  23^  22£ 

Distance  from  snout  to  orbit,        .         .         .         .                  .  13  13  13 

Diameter  of  orbit, 9  10  11 

I  bight  of  highest  dorsal  spine, 16  18  19^ 

Height  of  highest  dorsal  ray, 18  16 

Length  of  pectoral, 36  37^  34 

Width  of  pectoral  hase, 19  17  18 

Length  of  ventrals, 31  31  30 

Height  of  second  anal  spine, 20|  21^  2<>a 

Height  of  third  anal  spine, 18^  19  21 

S.  Scorpaena  grandicornis. 

Scorpama  grandicornis  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  iv, 

1829,  309  (Martinique  ;PoitoRico  ;  Havana  :  San  Domingo);  Giinther, 

Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  ii,  1860,  114  (Jamaica);  Poey,  Syn.  Pise.  Cub., 

1868,  303  (Havana);   Poey,  Enum.  Pise.  Cub.,  1875,  40  (Havana); 

Jordan,  Proc.  TJ.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1884,  138  (Key  West);  Jordan,  <  at. 

Fish.  N.  A.,  1885,  109. 
Scorpcena  plumicri  Lacepede,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  ii,  1800,  282,  pi.  19,  f. 

3  (not  of  Bloch  and  Schneider,  based  on  a  drawing  by  Plunder: 

Martinique). 

Habitat. — West  Indies,  Florida  Ke}Ts  to  Brazil. 

Our  study  of  this  species  was  made  from  numerous  small 
specimens,  none  exceeding  five  inches  in  length,  collected  at  Key 
West  b}-  Dr.  Jordan,  and  from  a  large  example  taken  at  Havana. 

The  species  may  be  readily  distinguished  by  the    absence  of 
coronal  spines,  by  the  great  size  of  the  supraocular  tentacles, 
and  by  the  small  white  spots  in  the  pectoral  axil. 
27 


402 


PROCEEDINGS  OP  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1885. 


Below  is  given  a  table  of  measurements  of  three  specimens  of 
Scorpeena  grandicornis  from  Key  West.  The  proportions  are 
given  in  hundredths  of  the  length  from  tip  of  snout  to  end  of 
lasl  vertebra. 


Extreme  length  of  fish,  in  inches, 
Length  of  fish  from  end  of  snout  to 

in  inches,         .... 
Greatest  depth  of  body  (hundredths 
Greatest  width  of  body, 
Length  of  head, 
Length  of  maxillary,    . 
Distance  of  snout  from  orbit, 
Diameter  of  orbit, 
Height  of  highest  dor.sal  spine, 
Height  of  longest  dorsal  ray, 
Height  of  second  anal  spine, 
Height  of  third  anal  spine, 
Length  of  pectoral  fin, 
Width  of  base  of  pectoral,  . 
Length  of  ventrals, 


last 


of  the 


caudal  vertebra, 
above), 


4i   4£   2 

3£   3£   1£ 

40£  48  40 

21  22  22 

42£  42^  43 

20  19|  20 
9£   9$  10 

10|  11  12 

21  19£  22 
19£  20  17 
23  21  24 
20  20  20£ 
35£  34  35 
20  15$  15 
28  29  88£ 


9.  Scorpaena  castor. 

Pontinus  castor  Poey,  Memorias  Cuba,  ii,  1860,  173  (Havana);  Poey, 

Syn.  Pise.  Cub.,  1868,  303  (Havana);  Poey,  Enumeratio  Pise,  Cub., 

1875,  4  (Havana). 
?  Pontinus  polluxTovy ,  Memorias  Cuba,  ii,  1860,  174  (Havana);  Poey, 

Syn.  Pise.  Cub.,  1868,  300  (Havana);  Poey,  Enumeratio  Pise.  Cub., 

1875,  4  (Havana  . 

Habitat. — Havana. 

We  know  this  species  only  from  the  descriptions  of  Professor 
Poey. 

The  genus  Pontinus  seems  to  be  synonymous  with  Scorpeena. 
From  Poey's  description  of  Pontinus  pollux,  we  are  unable  to 
find  any  positive  characters  by  which  to  distinguish  it  as  a  species 
from  Scorpeena  castor. 

10.  Scorpeena  fernandeziana. 

Scorprma  fernandeziana  Steindachner,  Ichthyol.  Beitriige,  ii,  1875,  9 
Juan  Fernandiv  . 

Habitat. — Juan  Fernandez. 

This  species  is  known  only  from  Steindachner's  description. 

11.  Scorpaena  occipitalis. 

?  Scorpeena  iaermis  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.,  iv,  1829, 
311  (Martinique). 


1885.] 


NATURAL    SCIENCES    OF   PHILADELPHIA. 


403 


Scorpc&na  occipitalis  Poey,   Memorias  Cuba,   ii,   1860,  171  (Havana); 

Poey,  Syn.  Pise.  Cub.,  1868,  303  (Havana);  Poey,  Enumeratio,  Pise. 

Cub.,  1875,  41  (Havana i ;  Jordan,  Cat.  Fish.  N.  A.,  1885,  109. 
Scorpcena  calcarata  Goode  &  Bean,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1882,  422 

(Clear  Water  Harbor,  Florida);  Jordan  &  Gilbert,  Syn.  Fish.  N.  A.. 

1883,  952  (West  Coast  of  Florida). 

Habitat. — Havana  ;  West  Coast  of  Florida. 

On  comparison  of  Poey's  description  of  S.  occipitalis,  with  the 
description  S.  calcarata  by  Goode  and  Bean,  we  can  find  nothing 
by  which  to  distinguish  them  as  distinct  species. 

Scorpeena  inermis,  very  briefly  described  by  Cuvier  and  Valen- 
ciennes, resembles  this  species  more  than  any  other. 

The  following  is  a  list  of  the  nominal  species  referred  to  in  the 
foregoing  paper,  arranged  in  chronological  order,  with  our  iden- 
tification of  each.    Tenable  specific  names  are  printed  in  italics  : — 


Nominal  Species.  Year. 

Scorj  aena  porcus  Linnaeus,  1758. 

Scorpaena  scrofa  Linnaeus,  1766, 

Cottus  mass  lensis  Forskal,  1775, 

Scorj  aena  plumieri  Bloch,  1789, 

Scorpaena  barbata  Lacepede,  1800, 

Scorpaena  plumieri  Lacepede,  1800, 

Scorpaena  lutea  Riss<>,  1810, 

Scorpaena  brasiliensis  Cuv.  &  Val..  1829, 

Scorpaena  bufo.  Cuv.  &  Val.,  1829, 

Scorpaena  grandicornis  Cuv.  &  Val.  1829, 

Scorpaena  inermis  Cuv.  and  Val.,  1829, 

Scorpaena  scrofina  Cuv.  &  Val.,  1833, 

Scoipaena  ustulata  Lowe,  1840, 

Scorpaena  histrio  Jenyns.  1842, 

Scorpaena  guttata  Girard,  1854, 

Scorpaena  fucata  Valenciennes,  1855, 

Apistes  exul  Gosse,  1856, 

Scorpaena  raseacio  Poey,  1860, 

Scorpaena  occipitalis  Poey,  1860, 
Scorpaena  fernandeziana  Steindachner,      1875, 

Pontinus  castor  Poey,  1875, 

Pontinus  pollux  Poey,  1875, 

Scorpaena  tkompsoni  Gunther,  1880, 

Scorpaena  stearnsi  Goode  &  Bean,  1882, 

Scorpaena  calcarata  Goode  &  Bean,  1882, 


Identification. 
Scorpaena  porcus. 
Scorpaena  scrofa. 
Scorpaena  porcus. 
Scorpaena  plumieri. 
Scorpaena  scrofa. 
Scorpaena  grandirornis. 
Scorpaena  scrofa. 
Scorpaena  brasiliensis. 
Scorpaena  plumieri. 
Scorpaena  grandieornis. 
?  Scorpaena  occipitalis. 
Scorpaena  plumieri. 
?  Scorpaena  scrofa. 
Scorpaena  histrio. 
Scorpaena  guttata. 
?  Scorpaena  histrio. 
Scorpaena  plumieri. 
Scorpaena  plumieri. 
Scorpaena  occipitalis. 
Scorpaena  fernandeziana. 
Scorpaena  castor. 
?  Scorpaena  castor. 
Scorpaena  thompsoni. 
Scorpaena  brasiliensis. 
Scorpaena  occipitalis. 


404  proceedings  of  the  academy  of  [1885. 

December  1. 
The  President,  Dr.  Leidy,  in  the  chair. 
Thirty-eight  persons  present. 

On  a  xohite-seeded  variety  of  the  Honey  Locust. — Mr.  Thomas 
Meehan  exhibited  seeds  of  a  tree  of  the  Honey  Locust,  Gledit- 
schia  triacanthos,  growing  near  Germantown,  which  were  white 
instead  of  dark  olive-brown  as  in  the  normal  condition.  The  tree 
was  of  considerable  age,  and  had  evidently  been  hearing  fruit  for 
many  years.  He  had  had,  he  said,  many  opportunities  of  exam- 
ining Honey  Locust  seeds,  but  had  never  seen  or  heard  of  a  white 
seeded  one  before.  The  seeds  instead  of  being  narrowly  ovate 
twice  the  length  of  the  breadth  as  usual,  were  nearly  orbicular, 
illustrating  a  point  not  new  but  worth  emphasizing,  that  when  a 
plant  varied  from  its  parent  in  any  one  respect,  it  was  liable  to 
have  variations  in  others.  A  whole  system  of  variations  followed 
a  single  departure.  But  the  best  use  of  this  departure  was  to 
illustrate  a  point  not  }7et  perceived  in  its  full  force,  as  he 
believed,  that  variation  is  not  nearly  as  much  dependent  on 
environment  as  many  eminent  men  believe.  "When  variations 
occur  it  is  difficult  for  some  to  believe  that  cross-fertilization,  a 
return  to  some  characteristic  of  an  ancient  parent,  or  some 
accident  of  climate  or  soil  had  not  an  agency  in  the  change.  In 
cases  such  as  this,  where  there  was  no  other  shade  of  color  to 
cross  with,  no  known  progenitor  with  any  variation  in  the  color  of 
the  seeds,  no  accident  of  climate  or  soil  to  influence  this  one  tree 
more  than  others  growing  near,  it  was  difficult  to  understand 
how  anything  as  yet  suggested  could  be  a  factor  in  the  change. 
We  have  to  use  yet  the  indefinite  and  meaningless  expression 
that  the  change  was  caused  b}r  the  plant's  own  innate  power  to 
change,  an  expression,  which,  obscure  as  it  might  be,  is  yet  of 
service  by  excluding  much  frojn  the  examination  that  might  add 
to  the  complexity  of  the  investigation. 

Another  interesting  suggestion  from  these  seeds  was  the 
hereditary  power  which  a  new  variation  possessed.  There  had 
been  no  time  to  ascertain  whether  these  seeds  would  again  repro- 
duce trees  with  white  seeds;  but  by  analogy  drawn  from  similar 
departures  in  other  plants,  (here  is  no  doubt  the  reproduction 
of  the  variety  would  lie  as  continuous  as  in  the  best  recognized 
species. 

It  could  hardly  be  supposed  thai  since  the  first  appearance  of 
the  Honey  Locusl  on  the  earth,  this  was  the  first  time  the  tree 
had  evei-  produced  white  seeds,  though  he  had  never  seen  one  or 
knew  of  any  recorded  instance.  In  view  of  the  hereditary  char- 
acter of  these  variations,  it  might   be  asked  why  has  not   some 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  405 

early  white  departure  perpetuated  and  propagated  itself  so  that 
such  trees  should  be  quite  common  in  this  era  ?  The  different 
abilities  of  various  classes  of  plants  to  propagate  themselves 
were  pointed  out.  Of  small  seeds  produced  by  such  a  plant  as 
chickweed,  hundreds  get  the  chance  to  grow.  Perennial  plants, 
such  as  Aster,  Golden  Rods,  also,  in  a  general  way,  had  great  fa- 
cilities for  seed  germination,  hence  any  departure  from  a  parental 
form  had  a  good  chance  to  perpetuate  itself,  the  only  great  enemy 
being  the  struggle  of  the  young  living  plants  to  get  a  portion  of 
the  nutrition  necessary  for  life.  Hence  we  had  many  variations 
among  such  genera  very  puzzling  to  naturalists,  running  the  spe- 
cies together  so  that  it  was  only  with  great  difficulty  the  species 
of  some  genera  could  be  classified.  Among  trees  with  larger  seeds 
it  was  difficult  to  perpetuate  the  race,  and  it  was  providential  in 
many  cases  that  longevity  was  great,  or  the  race  would  soon  have 
become  extinct.  Of  the  hundreds  of  thousands  of  Acorns,  Chest- 
nuts, Beechnuts,  and  other  similar  seed  produced  in  a  forest  in 
any  one  season,  only  a  few  score  would  get  a  chance  to  grow  up 
to  produce  seeds  again.  Birds,  quadrupeds,  and  insects  ate  the 
seeds  by  thousands,  large  numbers  could  not  sprout  for  want  of 
a  proper  covering  of  earth.  Of  those  which  sprouted,  numerous 
were  the\T  that  failed  to  get  beyond  the  first  year ;  and  of  these, 
shade,  or  the  innumerable  struggles  they  were  subjected  to,  per- 
mitted them  not  to  reach  mature  age.  He  had  known  Honey 
Locust  trees,  single  specimens,  bearing  fruit  annually  for  over  a 
quarter  of  a  century  in  some  instances,  and  yet  to  be  but  solitary 
specimens  of  their  kind  in  their  immediate  location.  As  a  rule, 
the  chance  of  a  new  departure  perpetuating  itself  was  small,  but 
sometimes  circumstances  seemed  to  favor  the  production  of  seed- 
lings. Once  in  a  while,  under  the  trees  in  a  Pine,  Oak,  Maple,  or 
other  forest,  or  under  large  trees,  numerous  seedlings  might  be 
noticed.  It  was  only  when  a  new  departure  found  itself  under 
these  exceptional  cases,  that  enough  trees  would  be  produced  to 
extend  and  perpetuate  the  race,  and  then  it  was  that  we  had  to 
recognize  the  distinct  variety,  or  even  species,  as  we  often  had  to 
call  the  departure  by  reason  of  its  great  distinctness  from  its 
parental  form. . 

Mr.  Meehan  referred  to  some  recent  discussions  on  variation 
in  Indian  Corn.  Cross-fertilization  often  made  great  changes  in 
the  immediate  coloring  of  the  seeds.  There  were  some  who 
argued  that  change  comes  also  from  innate  power  to  vary.  Such 
instances  as  this  of  the  Honey  Locust  confirmed  this  view. 


4UU  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 


December  8. 

The  President,  Dr.  Leidy,  in  the  chair. 

Thirty-one  persons  present. 

A   paper  entitled,  "  On  some  new  species  of  Psocidae,"  by  S. 
Prank  Aaron,  was  presented  for  publication. 


December  15. 

Mr.  John  H.  Redfield  in  the  chair. 

Twenty-five  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "Methods  of  Defence  in  Organisms,"  by  Chas. 
Morris,  was  presented  for  publication. 

The  following  was  ordered  to  be  printed : — 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  407 


NOTES  ON  THE  LAFAYETTE  SERPENTINE  BELT. 
BY    THEO.    D.    RAND. 

It  is  well  known  that  two  nearly  parallel  belts  of  Serpentine  and 
Steatite  cross  the  Schuylkill  above  and  below  Lafayette  Station, 
and  pass  southwestwardly  towards  the  Pennsylvania  Railroad. 
The  southeasternrnost,  or  steatite  belt,  cannot  be  observed  beyond 
a  bend  in  the  Black  Rock  road,  about  one-half  mile  north  of  the 
railroad,  the  other  was  conspicuous  at  Rosemont  Station,  but  no 
outcrop  was  known  southwestward  until  within  three-fourths  of  a 
mile  of  Darby  Creek,  on  Meadow  Brook,  whence  southwestwardly 
it  was  continuous,  or  nearly  so,  to  Palmer's  mills  on  Crum  Creek. 

This  line  is  not  easily  identified  with  either  of  the  former,  but 
I  have  recently  found  a  distinct  outcrop  on  the  Roberts  road,  on 
the  property  of  Col.  Jos.  F.  Tobias,  or  of  Dr.  Edward  H.  Wil- 
liams, with  fragments  in  the  soil  of  the  fields  of  the  former  to  the 
northeast.  The  belt  is  very  narrow,  and  the  valley  of  a  small 
creek  seems  to  occupyr  nearly  the  same  line.*  This  outcrop  is 
about  half  way  between  the  Rosemont  and  Meadow  Brook  out- 
crops, and  seems  to  prove  beyond  question  that  the  belt  crossing 
Darby  Creek  is  the  Lafayette  belt.  On  the  Roberts  road,  north- 
east of  the  Serpentine  and  measured  at  right-angles  to  the  strike, 
perhaps  100  to  200  feet  distant,  is  a  rock  bearing  great  resemblance 
to  the  Eurite  of  Barren  Hill,  Wayne,  etc.,  occupying  here  almost 
exactly  the  position  relative  to  the  Serpentine  and  the  Laurent  inn 
axis  that  the  Eurite  does  on  the  northwestwardly  side  of  the 
Laurentian,  near  Radnor  Station.  Its  strike  is  N.  30°  E.,  dip 
50°  to  S.  E.     Adjacent  mica  schist  N.  40°  E.,  dip  65°  to  S.  E. 

The  position  of  this  outcrop  of  Serpentine  somewhat  south  of 
the  line  of  the  Lafayette  belt,  indicates  either  a  change  in  the 
strike,  or  the  echelon  structure  elsewhere  observable  in  the  Ser- 
pentine of  the  adjacent  region. 


4<l8  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 


December  22. 

The  President,  Dr.  Leidy,  in  the  chair. 

Twenty-nine  persons  present. 

A  paper,  entitled  "  Inclusions  in  the  Granite  of  Craftsbury, 
Vermont,"  by  Calvin  McCormick,  was  presented  for  publication. 

Worms  in  Ice Prof.  Leidy  referred  to  a  former  communica- 
tion on  the  occurrence  of  organisms  in  ice  (see  Proc.  1884,  260), 
and  stated  that  Dr.  S.  C.  Thornton,  of  Moorestown,  N.  J.,  a  couple 
of  weeks  since,  had  submitted  to  him  for  examination  a  bottle  of 
water  from  melted  ice,  such  as  was  habitually  used  in  his  family, 
and  in  which  he  said  he  had  observed  living  worms.  A  number 
of  these  proved  to  be  present  in  the  specimen,  but  were  all  dead. 
Having  expressed  a  desire  to  confirm  the  statement  that  the 
worms  were  observed  alive  in  the  fresh  ice-water,  Dr.  Thornton 
last  week  had  obligingly  sent  him  a  basket  of  the  ice.  This  was 
part  of  the  provision  made  nearly  a  year  ago  from  the  vicinity  of 
Moorestown.  The  ice  was  full  of  air  bubbles  and  water  drops. 
On  being  melted^  number  of  the  worms  were  liberated  and  proved 
to  be  in  a  living  and  quite  active  condition.  It  is  probable  that 
while  imprisoned  in  the  ice  they  may  not  have  been  frozen,  but 
perhaps  remained  alive  in  a  torpid  condition  in  water  drops.  It 
is  a  remarkable  fact  that  these  animals  should  remain  so  long 
alive  in  the  ice,  and  yet  die  so  readily  in  the  melted  water  subse- 
quently. The  worms  are  of  the  same  species  noticed  in  the  ice- 
water  of  the  first  communication,  and  which  was  derived  from 
similar  ice  procured  from  a  mill-pond  in  Delaware  Co.,  Pa.  These 
facts  would  indicate  that  it  is  desirable  to  avoid  the  spongy  ice 
from  stagnant  waters,  as  being  liable  to  retain  organisms  which 
would  be  detrimental  to  us.  In  the  clear  ice,  such  as  is  served  in 
Philadelphia,  no  living  organisms  are  detected.  The  little  worms 
of  the  ice  appear  to  be  an  undescribed  species,  and  may  there- 
fore be  eharacterized  as  follows  : — 

Lumbricus  QLACIALIS.  Worm  from  four  to  six  lines  long, trans- 
lucent white,  cylindrical,  anteriorly  acute,  tapering  most  behind 
and  obtuse,  of  from  35  to  50  segments ;  oral  segment  with  a  blunt 
conical  upper  lip,  unarmed  and  eyeless  ;  succeeding  segments  with 
four  rows  of  podal-spines,  in  fascicles  of  .three ;  spines  pointed 
at  the  free  end  and  hooked  at  the  attached  end,  nearly  straight 
or  slightly  sigmoid  ;  generative  organs  occupying  the  interval  of 
the  third  and  seventh  spine  bearing  segments. 

Thickness  of  worm  0'15  to  0*25  mm.;  podal  spines  0*3  to  0*375 
mm.  long:. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  409 

The  length  given  in  the  former  notice  should  be  in  lines  instead 
of  millimetres. 


December  29. 
Mr.  Thomas  Meehan,  Vice-President,  in  the  chair. 
Thirty-three  persons  present. 
The  following  were  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


410  PROCEEDINGS    OF   THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 


A   CATALOGUE   OF   THE    FISHES   OF   BEAN    BLOSSOM    CREEK,    MONROE 
COUNTY,  INDIANA. 

BY    CARL    H.    EIGENMANN    AND    MORTON   W.    FORDICE. 

BeaD  Blossom  is  a  small  creek  crossing  Monroe  County  about 
six  miles  north  of  Bloomington.  It  is  a  tributary  of  White 
River  and  empties  into  it  near  Gosport.  Indiana.  It  is  a  rather 
sluggish  stream  with  gravelly  bottom,  and  considerable  grass 
and  water-weeds.  The  specimens  were  collected  by  parties  of 
students  of  the  Indiana  University,  visiting  the  creek  at  different 
times.  Thirty-two  of  the  species  were  also  obtained  by  us  on 
the  12th  of  September,  1885. 

1.  Ammocmtes  branchialis  L.     Abundant  in  spring. 

'J.  Xoturus  gyrinus  Mitchill. 

'■'<.  Xoturus  miurus  Jordan.     Very  abundant. 

4.  Xoturus  flavus  Rafinesque.     Very  common.     The  last  two  species  are 

very  abundant  in  the  weeds  of  shallow  water  ;  only  two  specimens 
of  gyrinus  were  obtained. 

5.  Noturus  exili*  Ntfson.     One  specimen. 

6.  Leptops  olivaris  Rafinesque. 

7.  Amiurus  melas  Rafinesque. 

8.  Amiurus  natalis  Le  Sueur. 

9.  Catostomus  teres  Mitchill.     Very  abundant. 

10.  Catostomus  nigricans  Le  Sueur.     Abundant. 

11.  Minytrema  melanops  Rafinesque.     Abundant. 

12.  Moxostoma  macrokpidotum  Le  Sueur. 

13.  Campostoma  anomalum  Rafinesque. 

14.  Chrosomus  erythrogaster  Rafinesque. 

15.  Hybognathus  nuchalis  Agassiz. 
1G.  Notropis  whipplei  Girard. 

1 7.  Notropis  megalops  Rafinesque. 

18.  Notropis  ardens  lythrurus  Jordan. 

19.  RMnichthys  atronasus  Mitchill. 

20.  Hybopsis  biguttatus  Kirtland. 

21.  Hybopsis  amblops  Rafinesque 

22.  Semotilus  atromaculatus  Mitchill. 
2:3.  Exox  vermiculatus  Le  Sueur. 

24.  Labidexthex  sicculus  Cope.     One  specimen. 

25.  Aphredodc  rus  say  an  ax  Gilliams.     One  specimen. 

26.  Pomoxys  annularis  Rafinesque.     Very  abundant. 

27.  Pomoxys  sparoides  Lactpede. 

28.  Ambloplites  rupestris  Rafinesque. 

29.  Lepomis  cyanellus  Rafinesque. 


1885.]  NATURAL   8CIENCES   OF  PHILADELPHIA.  411 

30.  Lepomis  megalotis  Rafinesque.     Abundant. 

31.  Micropterus  dolomiei  Lacepede.     Abundant. 

32.  Boleosoma  olmstedi  maculalum  Agassiz.     Abundant. 

33.  Diplcsion  blennioides  Rafinesque.     Abundant . 

34.  Percina  caprodes  Rafinesque.     Abundant. 

35.  Hadropterus  phoxocephalus  Nelson. 

36.  Hadropterus  scierus  Swain.    Abundant.    Several  specimens  were  taken 

five  inches  in  length.     In  these  large  specimens  the  serration  of  the 
preopercle  is  obsolete. 

37.  Hadropterus  aspro  Cope  and  Jordan. 

38.  Etheostoma  flabellare  Rafinesque.     Abundant. 

39.  Etheostoma  cmruleum  Storer. 

40.  Uranidea  richardsoni  Agassiz. 


412  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 


LIST  OF  FISHES  COLLECTED  IN  HARVEY  AND  COWLEY  COUNTIES,  KANSAS. 
BY   BARTON    W.    KVKKMANN    AND    MORTON    W.    FORDICE. 

About  the  last  of  May,  1884,  Mr.  Evermann  made  a  small  col- 
lection of  fishes  at  Newton  and  Winfield,  Kansas.  The  speci- 
mens from  Newton  are  from  a  small  stream  called  Sand  Creek, 
which  Hows  into  the  Little  Arkansas,  a  tributary  of  the  Arkansas. 
Those  from  Winfield  were  obtained  from  Timber  Creek,  a  tribu- 
tary of  Walnut  River,  which  flows  into  the  Arkansas. 

Sand  Creek  was  seined  just  below  a  small  dam  near  the  town 
of  Newton,  where  the  water  is  clear  and  the  bottom  sandy. 
Farther  down  the  creek  was  made  up  of  numerous  pools  of 
various  sizes,  and  with  bottoms  and  shores  more  or  less  muddy. 

Timber  Creek  is  a  sluggish  stream,  with  usually  muddy  bottom 
and  water  not  clear. 

We  here  give  a  list  of  the  species  represented  in  the  collection 
as  identified  by  us.  All  are  now  in  the  museum  of  the  Indiana 
University  : — 

1.  Amiurus  melas  (Raf.).     Found  to  be  very  abundant  in  Timber  Creek, 

but  no  specimens  were  obtained  at  Newton. 

2.  Moxostoma  macrolepidotum  (LeS.).     Sand  Creek.    Only  one  specimen. 

3.  Campostoma  anomalum  (Raf. ).     Common  in  botb  streams  examined. 

I.  Pii/ir/>hale8  promelns  (Raf.).  Eight  very  fine  specimens  (all  males)  were 
gotten  from  a  small  stream  which  flows  into  Timber  Creek  near 
Winfield. 

5.  Pimephales  notatus  (Raf.).     A  tew  specimens  were  obtained  at  Newton. 

G.  Notroiris  lulrensis  ( Baird  and  Girard).   Very  abundant  in  both  streams. 

7.  Nolropis    topeka   Gilbert.      Sand   Creek.      Only   two   specimens   were 

obtained. 

8.  Notemigonus  chrysoleueus  (Mitchill).    Found  only  in  Sand  Creek.    One 

specimen, 

9.  Thcnd/ulus  zcbrinus  Jordan  and  Gilbert.     This  species  was  found  to  be 

common  both  at  Newton  and  Winfield. 
10    Zygonectes  notatus  (Raf.).     A  few  specimens  only  were  received — all 
from  Timber  Creek. 

11.  Labidesthes  siccalus  Cope.     From  Timber  Creek  only.     Not  common. 

12.  Lepomis  eyanellus  Raf..     Abundant  in  Timber  Creek. 

1  3.  Lepomis  megnlolis  (Raf.).   But  two  specimens  were  obtained — one  from 
Nrv,  ton,  the  other  from  Winfield. 

14.  Lepomis  humilis  (Girard).     Abundant  in  both  streams. 

15.  JStheostoma  cwruleum  Storer.     Very  abundant  in  Timber  Creek.     None 

were  obtained  at  Newton. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  413 


The  following  annual    reports  were  read  and  referred  to  the 
Publication  Committee  : — 


REPORT  OF  THE  RECORDING  SECRETARY. 

The  Recording  Secretary  respectfully  reports  that  during  the 
year  ending  November  30,  1885,  fourteen  members  and  one  cor- 
respondent have  been  elected. 

Resignations  of  membership  have  been  received  and  accepted 

on  the  usual  conditions,  from  J.  H.  Brinton,  M.  I).,  W.  S.  Baker, 

Jos.  C.  Wright,  R.  B.  Haines,  Jr.,  and  Jos.  G.  Richardson,  M.  D. 

The  deaths  of  ten  members  and  six  correspondents  have  been 

announced,  and  duly  recorded  in  the  printed  Proceedings. 

Thirty-four  papers  have  been  presented  for  publication,  as 
follows:  Willis  S.  Blatchley,  3;  Angelo  Heilprin,  2;  Herman 
Strecker,  2  ;  Alan  F.  Gentry,  2  ;  S.  H.  Scudder,  2  ;  Charles 
Morris,  2  ;  Carl  H.  Eigenmann  and  Morton  W.  Fordice,  2 ;  S.  E. 
Meek  and  Robt.  Newland,  2  ;  Walter  R.  Furness,  1 ;  F.  Lamson 
Scribner,  1  ;  F.  Warrington  Eastlake,  1  ;  Dr.  Benj.  Sharp,  1  ; 
Leonard  Stejneger,  1  ;  II .  C.  Lewis,  1  ;  W.  D.  Hartman.  1  ;  W.  B. 
Scott,  1  ;  W.  N.  Lockington,  1  ;  Theo.  D.  Rand,  1  ;  Morton  W. 
Fordice,  1 ;  B.  W.  Evermann  and  M.  W.  Fordice,  1  ;  B.  AY. 
Evermann  and  S.  E.  Meek,  1 ;  Seth  E.  Meek  and  Edw.  A.  Hall,  1 ; 
Edw.  A.  Hall  and  J.  Z.  A.  McCaughan,  1;  Charles  Wachsmuth 
ami  F.  Springer,  1 ;  Ernst  P.  Bicknell  and  Fletcher  B.  Dressier,  1. 
Twenty-nine  of  these  have  been  printed  in  the  Proceedings  of 
the  Academy,  two  have  been  withdrawn  by  the  authors,  and  the 
remaining  three  have  been  reported  on  favorably  and  will  form 
part  of  the  next  volume  of  the  Proceedings. 

Sixty  -three  pages  of  the  volume  for  1884,  and  three  hundred 
and  eighty -four  pages  of  that  for  the  current  year,  have  been 
printed.  The  former  are  illustrated  b}'  two  lithographic  plates, 
and  the  latter  by  three. 

Forty  foreign  societies  have  been  added  to  the  list  of  exchanges 
during  the  year,  increasing  the  number  of  copies  of  the  Proceed- 
ings sent  abroad  in  exchange  to  375. 

The  average  attendance  at  the  meetings  during  the  past  twelve 
months  has  been  25.  Verbal  communications  have  been  made 
by  thirty-four  members.     The  greater  number  of  these  have  been 


414  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

reported  by  the  authors  and  printed  in  the  Proceedings,  consti- 
tuting  an  important  portion  of  the  annual  volume. 

At  the  meeting  of  the  Council  held  Nov.  23,  Mr.  Jacob  Binder 
was  reappointed  Curator  of  the  Wm.  S.  Vaux  Collections. 

All  of  which  is  respectfully  submitted. 

Edw.  J.  Nolan, 

Recording  Secretary. 


REPORT  OF  THE  CORRESPONDING  SECRETARY. 

The  correspondence  of  the  past  year  shows  a  gratifying  increase 
in  the  number  of  societies  and  institutions  with  which  we  are 
now  exchanging  our  publications.  The  increase  has  arisen  in 
many  instances  at  the  request  of  the  Academy,  and  in  a  certain 
number  at  the  solicitation  of  the  societies. 

The  opening  of  correspondence  with  societies  not  previousl}'  on 
our  list  of  exchanges  brings  with  it  in  time  a  request  from  them 
for  our  earlier  publications,  more  particularly  the  Proceedings. 
The  earlier  volumes  are  in  A-er}-  limited  stock,  and  the  Corres- 
ponding Secretary  suggests  the  desirabilit}7  of  re-publication  at 
as  early  a  date  as  the  ability  of  the  Academy  will  admit. 

During  the  year  there  has  been  but  one  correspondent  elected, 
who  has  been  promptly  notified  of  his  election.  Responses  have 
been  received  from  nine  correspondents,  of  which  number  eight 
were  elected  in  the  preceding  year.  Three  have  acknowledged 
the  reception  of  the  diploma.  In  a  few  instances  official  notice 
of  the  death  of  Correspondents  has  been  received.  Usually  such 
information  is  obtained  from  the  journals,  and  becomes  part  of 
the  minutes  of  the  Academ}'. 

Letters  and  cards  to  the  number  of  one  hundred  and  twenty- 
two  have  been  received  acknowledging  our  publications,  the  large 
number  being  partty  due  to  the  increase  before  mentioned,  and 
partly  to  t  lie  early  distribution  of  our  Proceedings  in  parts  through 
the  mnils. 

Letters  of  transmission  numbering  forty-seven  have  been 
received,  the  sniallness  of  the  number  arising  from  the  decreas- 
ing number  of  correspondents,  who  from  preference  or  necessity 
transmit  their  publications  through  the  Smithsonian  Institution. 


1885.] 


NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA. 


415 


Miscellaneous  letters,  numbering  thirteen,  have  been  received, 
and,  when  necessary,  have  been  answered. 

The  additions  to  the  Museum  will  appear  in  the  Curator's 
report.  The  donors  have  received  pr&mpt  acknowledgment 
through  the  Curator-in-charge,  who  has  kindly  acted  for  me. 

Respectfully  submitted, 

George  H.  Horn,  M.  D., 

Corresponding  Secretary. 


REPORT  OF  THE  LIBRARIAN. 

During  the  year  ending  November  30,  1885,  4100  additions 
have  been  made  to  the  library  of  the  Academy.  This  is  an 
increase  of  678. over  the  growth  of  last  year,  and  of  1097  over 
that  of  1883.  The  accessions  have  consisted  of  986  volumes, 
3047  pamphlets  and  parts  of  periodicals,  and  67  maps. 

They  have  been  derived  from  the  following  sources  : — 


2158 

3 

Editois, 

793 

John  H.  Redfield,      .... 

8 

I.  V.  "Williamson  Fund,  .     .     . 

574 

Norwegian  Government,     .     . 

3 

266 

2 

Department  of  the  Interior,     . 

35 

Geological    Survey    of     New 

Geological  Survey  of  Michigan, 

33 

■2 

U.  S.  Civil  Service  Commission, 

2 

Treasury  Department,    .     .     . 

21 

W.  P.  Collins, 

Geological  Survey  of  Russia,   . 

19 

Mrs.  J.  Lawrence  Smith,     .     . 

Geological  Survey  of  India, 

16 

Joseph  Jeanes, 

15 

Mrs.  Emma  Rogers,  .... 

Geological  Survey  of  Pennsyl- 

14 

Bureau  of  Ethnology,    .     .     . 

Geological  Survey  of  Sweden, 

14 

Royal  College  of  Surgeons.     . 

Geological  Survey  of  Canada, 

14 

Mining  Registrars,  Victoria,   . 

Univers'ty  of  the  State  of  New 

Navy  Department,     .... 

11 

East  Indian  Government,    .     . 

Smithsonian  Institution,     .     . 

7 

War  Department,       .... 

7 

U.  S.  Fish  Commission, 

Department  of  Agriculture, 

t 

Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr 

< 

Raffles  Museum,  Singapore,    . 

Geological  Survey  of  New  Jer- 

Geological Survey  of  Indiana, 

sey,  

6 

Department  of  Mines,    Nova 

California  State    Mining   Bu- 

5 

Indian  Museum, 

ll.  B.  M.  Government,   .     .     . 

5 

Public  Library,  Cincinnati,     . 

Minister  of  Public  Works  in 

Minister  of  Works,  Mexico,     . 

4 

Geological  Survey  of  Minnesota, 

Geological  Survey  of  Minnesota 

,      4 

Forestry    Commission,    New 

4 

York, 

1 

416 


PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF 


[1885. 


These  additions  have  been  distributed  to  the  several  depart- 
ments of  the  library  as  follows: — 


Journals ,     .  3225 

Geology, 355 

General  Natural  History,    .     .  110 

Botany 1<>0 

Conchology, 71 

Entomology, 37 

Physical  Science, 23 

Anatomy  and  Physiology,  .     .  22 

Anthropology 20 

Voyages  and  Travels,     ...  19 

Ornithology 16 

llililiography, 16 


.Mineralogy, 13 

Education, 11 

Ichthyology, 8 

Agriculture, 7 

Mammalogy, 5 

Helminthology, 4 

Herpetology, 3 

Chemistry, 3 

Encyclopedias, 3 

General  Literature,    ...     -  2 

Medicine, 2 

Miscellaneous 25 


The  year's  improvement  on  the  usual  rate  of  increase  has  been 
mainly  due  to  the  generous  response  made  by  corresponding 
societies  to  our  applications  for  exchanges  and  deficiencies.  Our 
efforts  to  increase  and  perfect  as  far  as  possible  the  Academy's 
sets  of  scientific  periodicals  have  been  unremitting,  with  the  grati- 
fying result  above  noted.  In  compliance  with  our  proposition 
made  more  than  a  year  ago,  many  corresponding  societies  continue 
to  send  their  publications  promptly  by  mail  when  issued,  instead 
of  as  formerly  once  or  twice  a  year  through  the  Bureau  of  Ex- 
change. The  publications  of  the  Academy  are,  of  course,  sent 
in  return  by  mail,  and,  although  the  cost  of  postage,  amounting 
during  the  past  year  to  $117.59,  is  a  matter  of  considerable 
importance  in  the  present  cramped  financial  condition  of  the 
society,  the  outlay  is  believed  to  be  a  most  judicious  one. 

Among  the  more  important  additions  to  the  special  departments 
of  the  library  acquired  during  the  year  have  been  complete  sets, 
as  far  as  published,  of  Barrande's  Systeme.Silurien  de  la  Boheme, 
Eteichenbach's  Icones  Flora-  Germanicse,and  God  man  and  Salvin's 
Biologia  Centrali-Americana.  For  these,  as  for  nearly  all  the  other 
important  additions  a  pa  rt  from  our  exchanges,  we  are  indebted  to 
the  liberality  of  Mr.  Isaiah  Y.Williamson. 

The  rapid  increase  of  the  library  lias  rendered  inadequate  the 
hand  catalogues  of  the  special  departments  in  use  for  many  years. 
\o  matter  how  much  space  may  be  left  for  additions,  it  has  been 
found  impossible  to  preserve  the  unbroken  alphabetical  arrange- 
ment upon  which  their  usefulness  depends,  while  the  transcripts 
from   the   cards   involve  an  unnecessary  expenditure  of  time   ami 

labor.     A  copy  of  the  present  card  catalogue  has  therefore  been 
commenced  with  the  efficient  assistance  of  Sig.  Emanuele  Fronani, 


1885.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES    OF    PHILADELPHIA.  417 

whose  services  I  have  been  again  enabled  to  avail  mvself  of  during 
the  summer  months.  The  entries  have  been  made  on  cards  of 
the  best  quality  manufactured  for  the  purpose  by  the  American 
Library  Bureau.  They  are  perforated  near  the  middle  of  the 
lower,  margin  and  will  be  held  in  their  places  in  drawers  or  trays 
by  rods,  thus  avoiding  the  possibility  of  accidental  disarrange- 
ment. The  chance  of  such  an  accident  has  made  it  inadvisable 
to  open  for  general  use  the  present  catalogue,  which  is  complete 
to  date,  as  the  cards  are  arranged  in  drawers  without  guards,  and 
any  confusion  of  the  alphabetical  arrangement  would  make  it 
worse  than  useless. 

A  shelf  catalogue  has  also  been  commenced.  This  consists  of 
the  briefest  author  and  title  entries  of  the  books  as  the}*  are  at 
present  numbered  and  placed  in  the  cases.  This  will  be  a  neces- 
sity-  of  library  administration  when  the  card  catalogue  is  alone  in 
use  for  reference,  as  without  it  a  great  expenditure  of  time  would 
be  necessary  to  determine  what  books  may  be  lost  or  misplaced. 

I  regret  to  say  that  for  the  same  reason  as  that  noted  last 
year — lack  of  means — no  books  have  been  bound  since  my  last 
report.  The  necessity  for  binding  some  of  our  accumulations 
has,  however,  become  so  great  that  during  the  coming  year  a 
portion  of  the  income  of  the  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund  will  lie  ap- 
propriated for  the  binding  of  books  credited  to  said  fund. 

A  detailed  list  of  accessions  is  herewith  submitted. 

Edw.  J.  Nolan, 

Librarian. 


REPORT  OF  THE  CURATORS. 

The  Curators  present  the  following  statement  from  the 
Curator-in-charge,  Prof.  Angelo  Heilprin,  as  their  report  for  the 
year  ending  November  30  : 

During  the  past  )rear,  as  in  preceding  }-ears,  much  of  the  work 
accomplished'  in  the  Museum  has  been  voluntary — this  more 
especially  in  the  departments  of  Conchology  and  Botan}',  to  the 
special  conservators  of  which  the  Academy  feels  itself  under 
lasting  obligation.  A  similar  obligation  attaches  to  the  labors 
of  the  conservator  of  the  Mineralogical  department  covered  by 
the  Win.  S.  Vaux  trust,  a  special  report  pertaining  to  which  has 

28 


418  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

been  submitted  to  the  Council.  In  the  department  of  Entomology 
the  partial  services  of  a  paid  assistant,  employed  in  joint  asso- 
ciation with  the  American  Entomological  Society,  have  been 
secured. 

In  departments  other  than  those  here  specified  the  work 
accomplished  has  been  under  the  immediate  direction  of  the 
Curator-in-charge  and  his  assistants  who  have  received  material 
aid  in  various  ways  from  the  several  Jessup  Fund  beneficiaries. 
"While  it  is  believed  much  has  been  done  toward  bringing  the 
collections  into  a  relational  sequence,  and  in  the  identification 
and  labeling  of  specimens,  years  of  labor  still  remain  before, 
at  the  present  rate  of  progress,  the  entire  Museum  can  be  brought 
into  systematic  order.  Nor,  it  appears,  will  the  attainment  of 
this  much-desired  object  be  practicable  until  further  and  greatly- 
increased  accommodation  for  the  proper  exposition  of  the  steadily 
increasing  collections  be  furnished.  Reflectively,  again,  the 
want  of  space  acts  as  a  material  check  to  the  proper  development 
of  the  collections,  which,  in  the  estimation  of  donors,  can  now 
no  longer  be  exhibited  to  advantage.  The  following  extract 
from  the  Report  of  the  Professor  of  Ethnology  and  Archaeology 
illustrates  this  condition:  u  The  collections  of  the  Academy  in 
this  department  are  substantially  the  same  as  noted  in  the  last 
report.  It  would  be  easy  to  increase  them  were  there  ample 
accommodations  for  their  favorable  display  as  objects."  The 
extensive  series  of  rocks  and  fossils  collected  by  the  Second 
Geological  Survey  of  the  State  of  Pennsylvania,  and  contained 
in  upwards  of  200  cases,  still  remain  boxed,  awaiting  the  oppor- 
tunity when  an  increase  of  space  will  permit  of  their  classifica- 
tion and  display. 

It  i>  earnestly  hoped  that  the  contemplated  extension,  either 
in  part  or  in  whole,  of  the  present  building,  which  is  impera- 
tively demanded  by  the  needs  of  the  institution,  may  be  shortly 
realized,  but  toward  the  attainment  of  this  end  assistance,  other 
than  that  which  can  be  furnished  by  the  Academy  alone,  is 
necessary.  The  present  resources  of  the  Academy  are  in  them- 
selves scarcely  sufficient  to  maintain  the  institution  as  it  is  now 
situated,  and  much  too  limited  to  enable  it  to  fully  meet  the 
requirements  of  scientific  investigators  and  investigation.  A 
Curator's  fund  for  the  liberal  purchase  of  specimens  ma\  lie 
indicated  as  a  growing  absolute  necessity,  and  scarcely  less  so  a 


1885.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES    OF    PHILADELPHIA.  419 

fund  to  be  used  for  the  prosecution  of  zoo-geographical  explora- 
tions. The  interest  derived  from  a  principal  fund  of  some 
$50,000  to  $60,000  would  fairly  equip  annual  expeditions  to 
regions  that  have  been  thus  far  little,  or  not  at  all,  investigated 
— Florida,  the  West  Indies.  Mexico,  Central  America,  or  Lab- 
rador, for  example — and  permit  of  a  large  amount  of  material 
to  be  collected  for  the  use  of  naturalists  generally. 

The  special  curatorial  work  during  the  past  year  has  been 
mainly  in  connection  with  the  departments  of  Vertebrate  and 
Invertebrate  Palaeontology  and  Osteology.  The  entire  collections 
of  fossil  fishes,  reptiles  and  mammals  have  been  brought  together, 
properly  arranged  and  classified,  and  constituted  into  distinct 
sections  or  departments.  The  specimens  of  osteology  have  been 
largely  identified  and  classified,  and  are  now  in  a  condition  to  be 
advantageously  used  by  the  student  and  specialist.  A  special 
collection,  intended  to  illustrate  the  t^-pe  forms  of  animal  life, 
from  the  highest  to  very  nearly  the  lowest,  designed  to  facilitate 
the  work  of  the  zoological  student,  is  rapidly  approaching  com- 
pletion, although  still  requiring  a  s3Tstem  of  improved  explana- 
tory labeling. 

The  routine  work  connected  with  the  curatorial  office  has  been 
accomplished  as  heretofore,  and  requires  no  special  enumeration 
of  details.  The  institution  has  benefitted  during  the  year 
through  the  services  of  five  Jessup  Fund  beneficiaries,  covering 
as  many  distinct  departments. 

Very  respectfully, 

Angelo  Heilprin, 

Curator-in-charge. 
Jos.  Leidy, 

Chairman  Curators. 


REPORT  OF  THE  CURATOR  OF  THE  WILLIAM  S. 
VAUX  COLLECTIONS. 

The  Curator  of  the  William  S.  Vaux  collections  respectfully 
reports : — 

The  collections  are  in  good  condition,  no  change  having  been 
made  in  the  arrangement  except  that  which  was  rendered  neces- 
sary by  the  addition  of  one  hundred  and  four  mineral  specimens, 


420  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

which  have  been  purchased  for  the  collection  out  of  the  funds 
provided  for  that  purpose.  The  additions  have  been  arranged 
according  to  the  system  of  classification  adopted. 

According  to  the  report  of  1884,  the  mineral  specimens 

numbered,  ........        6,412 

Additions  purchased  during  the  current  year,  ending 

Nov.  30,  1885, 104 


Total, 6,516 

Archaeological  specimens  (same  as  noted  in  report  of 

1884), 2,940 

The  Mineralogical  collection  has  a  wide  reputation,  and  has 
been  visited  by  a  large  number  of  persons  during  the  year,  many 
of  them  prominent  mineralogists.  Those  who  had  examined  the 
collection  previous  to  the  decease  of  William  S.  Vaux,  have 
noticed  the  absence  of  a  number  of  the  most  remarkable  speci- 
mens which  it  formerly  contained  and  which  added  so  much  to 
its  fame.  It  is  to  be  regretted  that  those  specimens  should  have 
been  separated  from  the  others,  thereby  decreasing  its  importance 
as  a  mineral  collection,  and  as  a  memorial  of  the  decedent. 

The  following  specimens,  numbering  104,  have  been  purchased 
during  the  year  and  placed  in  the  collection  at  the  aggregate 
cost  of  $542.95  :— 

1884,  December  1. — Four  specimens  of  tourmaline,  two  gold 
crystals,  one  fowlerite,  cat's-eye  (Ceylon),  chalcopyrite,  pisolite, 
zircon  (white),  jasper  (from  the  Nile),  crocidolite,  ruby  (cut 
spec),  N.  J.,  sapphire  (purple),  sapphire  (white),  turquoise, 
turquoise  (Persian),  citron  (Orange  Co.),  citron  (pale  yellow), 
amethyst. 

1885,  March  30. — One  specimen  of  crocidolite,  bastnasite,  two 
wulfenites  (  New),  one  barite,  wulfenite  (red),  vanadanite,  anatase. 

April  20. — One  specimen  of  hematite,  chiastolite. 

April  30. — Tray  of  concretions. 

.May  4. — One  specimen  of  chalcedony,  chalcedony  with  bubble, 
hornblende. 

May  5. — One  specimen  of  corundum,  moss  agate,  maconite, 
analcine  on  copper,  jade,  beryl,  diaspore  on  corundum,  cassiterite, 
two  tourmalines  (green),  one  lepidolite,  pectolite,  tourmaline  on 
cookeite. 

March  5. — Three  specimens  of  rutile,  one  chiastolite. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  421 

March  24. — Nine  specimens  of  small  diamonds. 

March  25. — One  specimen  of  lepodolite,  hornblende,  staurobte. 

May  27. — Two  specimens  of  descloisite, one  vanadanite, diamond 
on  matrix,  quartz  (mod.  crystal),  calamine,  smithsonite,  sraith- 
sonite  (geode). 

September  10. — One  specimen  of  quartz  on  hematite,  azurite, 
colemanite,  leidyite. 

September  27. — Two  specimens  of  obsidian  or  pearl  spar,  one 
fluorite  (polished),  opal. 

October  13. — One  specimen  of  apophyllite,  polydelphite,  dys- 
luite. 

October  13. — Two  specimens  of  calamine,  one  franklinite,  zin- 
cite,  willemite,  zincite,  two  rhodenites. 

November  9. — Two  specimens  of  topaz,  one  beryl  (green  cut), 
beryl  (yellow  cut),  essonite. 

Brush's  Blowpipe  A nalysis  and  Dana's  Text-book  of  Mineralogy 
were  purchased  for  the  use  of  the  Curator. 

Respectfully  submitted, 

Jacob  Binder, 

Curator. 

REPORT  OF  THE  BIOLOGICAL  AND  MICROSCOPICAL 

SECTION. 

The  number  of  meetings  held  during  the  year  ending  Decem- 
ber 1,  1885,  was  sixteen. 

The  average  attendance  was  ten. 

The  following  members  were  elected  :  Dr.  Horace  F.  Jayne, 
Dr.  J.  Bernard  Brinton. 

The  following  members  resigned  :  Dr.  Persifor  Frazer,  W.  T. 
Seal,  Dr.  J.  D.  Thomas,  Dr.  J.  G.  Richardson. 

The  following  were  some  of  the  more  important  communica- 
tions brought  before  the  Section  : — 

December  15,  1884.  By  Dr.  Benjamin  Sharp,  upon  "  Homolo- 
gies of  the  Vertebrate  Lens.'" 

January  5,  1885.  Dr.  Benjamin  Sharp,  upon  "  The  Formation 
of  Teeth  in  Ancyllus." 

January  5.  By  Miss  Fielde,  upon  '*  The  Process  of  Regenera- 
tion of  Parts  of  the  Earth  Worm ; "  by  Dr.  Horace  F.  Jayne,  upon 
"A  Process  of  Staining." 


422  PROCEEDINGS   OP    THE    ACADEMY    OP  [1885. 

January  li).  Lecture  by  Ur.  G.  A.  Kex,  "  Illustrations  of  the 
Genus  Stilbum." 

February  16.  Lecture  by  Dr.  W.  X.  Sudduth,  upon  ''The 
Comma  Bacillus;"  exhibition  by  Messrs.  Queen  &  Co.  of  Bac- 
teria. 

March  16.  By  Mr.  Harold  Wingate,  upon  "  The  Lens  of  the 
Triton." 

April  6.     By  J.  Bernard  Brinton,  upon  "  Opaque  Mounting." 

April  20.  By  Dr.  J.  Brewer  Hall,  upon  "A  Species  of 
Ochlea." 

Ma\  4.  15 y  Dr.  Benjamin  Sharp,  upon  "The  Eyes  of  the 
Pecten." 

A  microscopical  exhibition  was  given  to  the  public  upon  the 
evening  of  Thursday,  December  3.  It  was  attended  by  a  large 
and  appreciative  company. 

Very  respectfully, 

Robt.  J.  Hess,  M.  D., 

Recorder. 


REPORT  OF  THE  CONCHOLOGICAL  SECTION. 

The  Recorder  of  the  Conchological  Section  respectfully  reports 
that  during  the  past  year  the  Academy  has. continued  to  publish 
for  the  Section  such  papers  on  Conchology  as  have  been  pre- 
sented. No  new  members  or  correspondents  have  been  elected, 
neither  has  there  been  any  change  in  the  by-laws.  Mr.  Tryon, 
Conservator,  reports  as  follows  : — 

"  During  the  year  there  has  been  a  marked  increase  over  any 
recent  one  in  the  additions  to  our  Museum.  Sixty  donations 
and  purchases  have  been  received  from  forty-four  persons.  The 
number  of  trays  and  labels  added  to  the  collection  is  1484,  of 
specimens  7237- 

'The  Conchological  Museum  now  contains  43,932  trays  and 
written  tablets,  and  158,352  specimens. 

"  A  detailed  list  of  the  accessions  for  1885  is  hereunto  subjoined. 
(See  Additions  to  Museum.) 

"A  circular  was  issued  early  in  the  year  soliciting  collections 
of  shells  from  Localities  not  represented  in  our  Museum.     Numer- 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  423 

ous  offers  were  received  in  response,  and  from  them  a  number  of 
selections  have  been  made  which  have  greatly  enriched  our 
geographical  and  varietal  suites.  The  Singapore  series  (referred 
to  in  the  last  annual  report)  has  been  completed  by  Mr.  Archer; 
Messrs.  Bailey,  Bed  wall,  Dupuy  and  Marie  have  added  suites 
from  Australia  and  New  Caledonia  ;  interesting  collections  from 
England,  France  and  Sicily  have  been  received  from  a  number  of 
collectors  ;  our  Florida  series  has  been  greatly  enlarged  by  an 
important  invoice  from  Mr.  Henry  Hemphill,  who  has  spent  two 
winters  in  dredging  on  the  west  coast  of  that  State,  and  from 
other  sources ;  many  other  American  suites  and  specimens  have 
been  obtained,  including  particularly,  a  very  fine  suite  of  the 
shells  of  Philadelphia,  presented  by  Mr.  John  Ford,  and  exhibited 
in  our  collection  illustrative  of  Pennsylvania  and  New  Jersey 
natural  history. 

"  The  additions  for  the  year  have  all  been  labelled  and  mounted, 
mainly  by  Mr.  Frank  Stout,  who  has  very  satisfactorily  per- 
formed this  duty. 

"  The  work  of  redetermining  and  arranging  the  collection, 
which  goes  on  in  connection  with  the  publication  of  monographs 
of  the  genera  in  the  '  Manual  of  Conchology,'  progresses.  The 
Cassididae,  Doliidae,  Ovulidae,  Strombidae,  Naticidae,  Vitrinidae, 
Limacidae,  and  a  portion  of  the  Zonitidae,  have  thus  been  care- 
fully studied  by  your  conservator,  and  the  Cypraeidae  by  Mr. 
S.  R  Roberts. 

"  In  the  last  report  attention  was  called  to  the  overcrowding  of 
the  shell  cases,  as  seriously  interfering  with  the  exhibition  of  all 
the  species  to  the  public.  Having  recently  secured  the  assistance 
of  Mr.  Wm.  B.  Marshall,  an  enthusiastic  student  of  conchology, 
your  conservator  has  been  able  to  commence  the  realization  of 
plans,  long  since  matured,  b}r  which  this  overcrowding  will  be 
remedied.  All  duplicates  will  be  removed  from  the  cases  to  the 
drawers  under  them,  where  they  will  be  rearranged  to  constitute 
what  may  be  called  the  Geographical  Collection,  illustrative  of 
the  distribution  and  variation  of  the  several  species.  Part  of  the 
space  thus  gained  in  the  cases  will  be  occupied  by  colored 
figures  (from  the  l  Manual  of  Conchology  ')  of  all  the  species  of 
which  we  have  no  specimens.  These  figures,  mounted  and 
labeled  like  the  specimens,  will,  together  with  the  latter,  repre- 
sent all  the  species  and  varieties  of  shells  and  mollusks  known  to 


4_'  »  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

Bcience,  so  far  as  they  have  been  figured.  In  addition  to  these, 
a  third,  to  be  known  as  the  Synoptical  Collection,  and  introduc- 
tory to  thr  others,  is  intended  to  contain  representatives  of  all 
tin'  recent,  and  the  most  important  of  the  fossil  genera  and  sub- 
genera, with  printed  labels,  including  the  name,  description, 
distribution,  synonymy,  etc.  Figures  of  the  animals,  lingual 
dentition  and  other  details  are  being  added  to  make  this  series 
more  complete. 

••  Enough  lias  been  accomplished  to  give  a  fair  idea  of  the 
practical  working  of  these  plans;  to  complete  them  will  require 
the  Labor  of  perhaps  ten  or  twelve  years. 

"To  enumerate  them  in  order,  the  Conchological  Cabinet  of 
the  Academy  will  consist  of  five  distinct  series  or  collections,  so 
arranged  as  to  facilitate  comparison  from  one  to  another,  yet 
each  fully  equipped  for  separate  study,  as  follows  :  1,  Synoptical 
Collection,  contained  in  table  cases;  2,  Alcoholic  Collection,  in 
wall  cases  (recently  rearranged  by  Mr.  Marshall);  3,  Systematic 
Collection,  in  table  cases;  and  in  the  drawers  under  these,  4, 
Geographical  Collection,  and  5,  the  Swift  Collection,  given  to 
the  Academy  upon  condition  that  it  be  kept  intact." 

The  officers  of  the  section  are  : — 

Director,     .  .  .  W.  S.  W.  Ruschenberger,  M.  D. 

Vice-Director ,  .  .  John  Ford. 

Recorder,  S.  Raymond  Roberts. 

Secretary,  .  .  .  John  H.  Redfield. 

Treasurer ,  .  .  Win.  L.  Mactier. 

Conservator,  .  .  George  W.  Try  on,  Jr. 

Librarian, .  .  .  Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.  D. 

Respectfully  submitted,  by 


S.  Raymond  Roberts, 

Recorder, 


REPORT  OF  THE   ENTOMOLOGICAL  SECTION. 

The    Recorder    of    the    Entomological    Section    respectfully 

reports  thai  nine  meetings  of  the  Section  have  been  held  during 

the  |>:ist   year.     An   increased   interest  in  the  proceedings  of  the 

tion  has  been  shown  by  a  larger  average  attendance  at  the 

meetii 


188f).]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  42r> 

One  member  has  been  elected. 

A  synopsis  of  the  Section  meetings  is  published  by  the 
American  Entomological  Society,  in  connection  with  its 
Transactions.  That  society  still  continues  the  publication  of  the 
entomological  articles  presented  to  it,  and  has  printed  thirteen 
of  the  same  during  the  past  jrear,  amounting  to  300  pages,  with  9 
plates. 

The  papers  published  and  their  authors  are  as  follows  : — 

Short  studies  of  North  American  Coleoptera,  by  John  L. 
LeConte,  M.D.  (posthumous). 

A  study  of  some  genera  of  Elateridae,  by  George  H.  Horn, 
M.D. 

On  the  North  American  Asilidae,  Part  II,  by  S.  W.  Williston, 
M.D. 

On  the  systematic  position  of  some  North  American  Lepidop- 
tera,  by  John  B.  Smith. 

A  study  of  the  species  of  Cryptobium  of  North  America,  by 
George  H.  Horn,  M.  D. 

Studies  among  the  Meloidae,  by  the  same. 

Descriptions  of  new  North  American  Scarabaeidae,  by  the  same. 

Contributions  to  the  Coleopterology  of  the  United  States,  by 
the  same. 

On  the  species  of  Canthon  and  Phanseus  of  the  United  States, 
with  notes  on  other  genera,  by  Frederick  Blanchard. 

Descriptions  of  some  new  Cerambycidaa,  with  notes,  by  George 
H.  Horn,  M.D. 

Synopsis  of  the  Throscidae  of  the  United  States,  by  George  H. 
Horn,  M.  D. 

A  monograph  of  North  American  Chrysididae,  by  S.  Frank 
Aaron. 

On  the  earlier  stages  of  the  Odonata,  b}*  H.  A.  Hagen,  M.  D. 

In  addition,  shorter  papers  on  Cynipidse,  by  W.  H.  Ashmead, 
have  appeared  in  the  Proceedings. 

The  collections  in  the  cabinets  have  received  more  attention 
during  the  past  year  than  for  some  time  previous.  A  great  part 
has  been  thoroughly  arranged  and  labeled  where  needed.  Also 
a  thorough  process  of  disinfection  has  gone  on,  and  the  cases 
cleared  of  all  troublesome  matter.  That  this  work  might  be 
better  done,  the  American  Entomological  Society  employed  a 


426 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP 


[1885. 


custodian  during  nine  months  of  the  year,  at  a  small  compensa- 
tion, to  attend  to  the  same. 

A  number  of  accessions  to  the  cabinets  have  been  received 
this  year,  from  Messrs.  R.  H.  Stretch,  E.  M.  Aaron,  S.  F.  Aaron, 
W.  H.  Ashmead,  J.  S.  Johnson,  and  James  Behrens.  Many  of 
these  additions  are  rare,  or  new  to  the  collections. 

The  officers  elected  for  the  ensuing  year  are  as  follows  : — 

Director,  ....  George  H.  Horn,  M.  D. 

Vice-Director,  .         .         .  Rev.  Henry  C.  McCook,  D.  D. 

Recorder,  .         .         .  J.  H.  Ridings. 

Treasurer,        .        .         .  E.  T.  Cresson. 

Conservator,      .         .         .  Henry  Skinner,  M.  D. 

Respectfully  submitted, 

J.  H.  Ridings, 

Recorder. 


REPORT  OF  THE  BOTANICAL  SECTION. 

The  Vice-IMrector  of  the  Botanical  Section  of  the  Academy 
respectfully  reports  that  the  section  continues  its  steady  progress 
as  in  former  years.  1687  species  of  phanerogamic  plants  and 
vascular  cryptogams  were  added  to  the  Herbarium  last  3'ear,  of 
which  395  were  new  to  our  collection;  395  species  of  lichens  and 
fungi  were  also  received.  A  complete  count  of  the  species  in  the 
Herbarium  has  been  made  and  found  to  foot  up  25,413,  of  which 
all  but  about  3075  are  named  and  in  place.  These  are  exclusive 
of  Fungi  and  Lichens.  The  details  of  the  donations  will  be 
found  in  the  Conservator's  report  attached. 

The  section  is  wholly  free  from  debt,  and  has  a  balance  of  one 
hundred  and  seventy-six  dollars  in  its  treasury.  We  have  lost 
the  services  of  our  late  Recorder,  Mr.  F.  L.  Scribner,  who  has 
removed  t"  Washington,  to  a  wider  sphere  of  usefulness. 

Meetings  ha  \  e  been  held  at  every  stated  period  during  the  year, 
and  valuable  contributions  t<»  botanical  knowledge  have  been 
made  by  Messrs.  Meehan,  Redfield,  Elothrock,  Scribner,  Brinton, 
Burk,  Canby,  Hoopes,  and  A.  H.  Smith — some  of  which,  fully,  or 
in  brief,  have  been  published  in  the  Proceedings  of  the  Academy. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  427 

The  officers  elected  for  the  coming  year  are  : — 

Director,        .  .  .  W.  S.  W.  Ruschenberger,  M.  D. 

Vice-Director ,  .  .  Thomas  Meehan. 

Recorder,       .  .  .  Charles  Schaeffer,  M.  D. 

Treasurer,     .  .  .  Isaac  C.  Martindale. 

Cor.  Secretary,  .  .  Isaac  C.  Martindale. 

Conservator,  .  .  John  H.  Redfield. 

Submitted, 

Thomas  Meehan, 

Vice-Director. 

Conservator' 's  Report  for  1885 Since  the  last  annual  report, 

the  Conservator  has  completed  the  provisional  lists  of  species 
contained  in  the  Herbarium,  so  far  as  refer  to  the  phanerogamic 
orders  and  the  vascular  cryptogams.  These  lists  are  strictly 
provisional  and  temporary,  intended  to  facilitate  ready  access  to 
the  contents  of  the  Herbarium,  and  in  no  way  to  take  the  place 
of  such  careful  revision  as  is  greatly  needed,  but  which  must 
necessarily  require  much  time,  and  more  careful  studjr  than  can 
now  be  bestowed.  It  is  greatly  to  be  desired  that  the  same  work 
should  be  continued  in  the  lower  cryptogamic  orders,  and  it  may 
not  be  amiss  here  to  suggest  to  those  of  our  associates  in  the 
Microscopical  Section  who  are  directing  their  attention  to  the 
structure  of  these  lower  forms  of  vegetable  life,  that  here  is  an 
excellent  opportunity  to  utilize  in  systematic  work  the  technical 
training  they  have  received. 

So  far  as  the  lichens  are  concerned,  this  work  has  been  accom- 
plished by  our  fellow  member,  Dr.  J.  H.  Eckfeldt,  who  has  not 
only  catalogued  the  species  of  that  order  contained  in  the  Her- 
barium, but  has  also  contributed  largely  to  supplying  deficiencies. 

The  enumeration  of  the  phanerogamic  species  contained  in  the 
Academy's  Herbarium,  which  was  referred  to  in  the  last  report, 
has  been  completed,  and  the  result  is,  .  .  24,268  species. 
To  this  add  Ferns,  Lycopods,  Equisetacete,  Mar- 

silise  and  Isoetese,     ......       1,145 


Total  phanerogams  and  vascular  cryptogams,      25,413 
Approximating  very  closely  to  the  estimate  in  the  last  report. 

The  attention  to  the  proper  mounting  of  the  specimens  in  the 
Herbarium  has  been   continued,  with  the   efficient   aid    of   Mr. 


428  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

Burk.  A  large  part  of  the  new  accessions  have  been  mounted, 
and  the  same  work  lias  been  prosecuted  in  the  North  American 
Herbarium,  of  which  now  about  one-half  has  received  this  care, 
so  necessary  to  the  permanenl  preservation  of  the  specimens. 

The  donations  received  during  the  year  amount  to  1687  species 
of  phanerogams  and  ferns,  and  383  species  of  lichens  and  fungi, 
in  all  2070  species.  Of  the  former,  395  species  are  new  to  our 
Herbarium,  while  probably  a  large  part  of  the  fungi  and  lichens 
arc  also  new  to  us.  The  total  number  of  species  presented  is  less 
than  in  sonic  former  years,  but  it  will  be  seen  that  the  proportion 
»f  rim-  accessions  is  not  materially  diminished.  Of  the  2070 
species  received  1360  are  North  American,  37  South  American, 
and  667  are  from  the  old  world. 

Among  the  donations  we  may  specify  the  valuable  contribution 
of  exotic  plant-  received  from  Dr.  Asa  Gray  of  the  Cambridge 
Herbarium;  a  series  of  365  species  collected  by  Mr.  Meehan  in 
Western  North  America  in  1883;  and  a  valuable  collection  of  388 
species  of  S.  African,  Australian  and  European  plants  from  Mr. 
Win.  M.  Canby. 

A  complete  list  of  the  donations  accompanies  this  report,  and 
will  appear  in  its  proper  place  in  the  list  of  Additions  to  the 
Museum. 

John  H.  Redfield, 

Conservator. 


REPORT  OF  THE  MINERALOGICAL  AND  GEO- 
LOGICAL SECTION. 

The  Director  of  the  Mineralogical  and  Geological  Section  of 
the  Academy  of  Natural  Science  would  respectfully  report  that 
meetings  of  the  Section  have  been  regularly  held,  but  that  owing 
to  the  absence  of  active  members,  and  other  causes,  the  attend- 
ance has  not  been  as  large  as  in  former  years.  Considerable 
accessions  to  the  cabin  el  have  been  made — a  number  of  desirable 
specimens  having  been  purchased  with  the  funds  of  the  Section. 

Respectfully  submitted, 

Theo.  D.  Rand, 

Director. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP  PHILADELPHIA.  420 

REPORT  OF  THE  PROFESSOR  OF  INVERTEBRATK 
PALEONTOLOGY. 

The  Professor  of  Invertebrate  Paleontology  respectfully 
reports,  that  during  the  year  he  has  delivered  a  course  of  twenty- 
seven  lectures  (with  practical  demonstration)  on  paleontology, 
which,  as  heretofore,  has  been  attended  largely  by  teachers  of  the 
various  city  schools.  A  special  course  on  geology,  arranged  at 
the  request  of  the  Teachers'  Institute  of  Philadelphia,  was  also 
delivered  in  the  Hall  of  the  Academy,  as  a  continuation  of  a  similar 
course  given  before  the  same  body  in  the  spring  and  autumn  of. 
1884.  The  attendants  at  these  lectures  numbered  between  100 
and  150.  Both  courses  of  instruction  in  the  class-room  were 
supplemented  by  a  number  of  field  excursions  in  the  region  about 
Philadelphia,  ranging  to  Orange,  N.  J.,  and  the  Atlantic  coast, 
and  by  a  twelve  days'  trip  to  the  Valley  of  the  Upper  Delaware. 

The  collections  of  the  Academy  in  the  department  of  Inverte- 
brate Paleontology  have  received  no  very  material  accessions 
during  the  3rear;  special  mention  may  be  made  of  a  beautiful 
slab  of  crinoids,  from  the  Carboniferous  Limestone  of  Iowa,  gen- 
erously given  to  the  Society  b}T  Mr.  Charles  Wachsmuth,  whose 
important  papers  on  the  Paleocrinoidea,  prepared  in  conjunction 
with  Mr.  Springer,  are  being  published  in  the  Proceedings  of  the 
Academy. 

Through  a  re-arrangement  of  the  collections  contained  in  the 
Museum  opportunity  has  been  afforded  for  the  proper  arrange- 
ment and  display  of  the  collections  illustrating  European  paleon- 
tology, which  have  up  till  now  been  largely  inaccessible  and 
placed  in  drawers.  The  proper  identification  and  labeling  of 
species  will,  however,  be  a  matter  of  time. 

Very  respectfully, 

Angelo  Heilprin, 
Prof,  of  Invertebrate  Paleontology. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PROFESSOR  OF*  INVERTEBRATE 

ZOOLOGY. 

The  Professor   of  Invertebrate   Zoology  respectfully   reports 
that  during  the  past  year  he  has  delivered  a  course  on  some  of 


430  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY  OF  [1885. 

the  Principles  of  Zoology,  consisting  of  about  twenty  (20) 
lectures. 

He  further  reports  that  the  collections  under  his  charge  have 
somewhat  increased,  the  increase  not  being  as  great  as  that  of 
the  previous  year. 

The  principal  donation  was  a  collection  of  Echinoderms,  pre- 
vented by  Mr.  John  Ford. 

A  few  crustaceans  were  presented  by  Mr.  C.  McCormick. 

A  course  of  ten  lectures  will  be  given  in  the  spring  of  the 

coming    year   (April   and    May),    the    subject    being,   "  Special 

Senses." 

Very  respectfully, 

Benjamin  Sharp, 
Professor  of  Invertebrate  Zoology. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PROFESSOR  OF  ETHNOLOGY  AND 
ARCHAEOLOGY. 

I  have  the  honor  to  report  that  during  the  year  1885  a  course 
often  lectures  was  delivered  in  the  hall  of  the  Academy,  on  the 
ethnology  and  archaeology  of  America.  They  were  illustrated 
with  maps,  drawings,  and  by  means  of  specimens  obtained  from 
the  various  collections  within  the  rooms  of  the  Academy.  The 
lecture  hall  was  usually  well  filled,  and  quite  as  much  interest 
was  manifested  X>y  the  audience  as  could  be  expected  from  the 
nature  of  the  topics  discussed. 

The  collections  of  the  Academy  in  this  department  are  sub- 
stantially the  same  as  noted  in  the  last  report.  It  would  be  easy 
to  increase  them,  were  there  ample  accommodations  for  the 
favorable  display  of  objects. 

Respectfully, 

D.  G.  Brinton,  M.  D., 
Professor  of  Ethnology  and  Archaeology. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  431 

SUMMARY   OF   THE    REPORT   OF    WM.  C.    HENSZBY, 

TREASURER, 
For  the  Year  ending  Nov.  30,  1885. 

Dr. 

To  Initiation  Fees S  100  00 

"  Contributions  |  semi-annual  contributions  i 1635  76 

"  Life  Memberships 400  00 

''  Admissions  to  Museum 264  59 

"  Sale  of  Guide  to  Museum 8  00 

' '  Publication  Committee 525  55 

"  Fees,  Lectures  on  ''alseontology 68  00 

"      "            "         "Mineralogy 83  00 

"      "             "          "Ethnology   48  50 

"      "             "          "Zoology 6  00 

"  Duplicate  Books ' 2  00 

"  Biological  Section  I  for  gas) 50  00 

"  Miscellaneous 97  24 

"  Correction  of  Proof  (B.  Sharp 3  60 

"  Interest  from  Mortgage  investment,.! oshua  T.  Jeanes' 

Legacy 1000  00 

"  Wilson  Fund.     Toward  Salary  of  Librarian 300  00 

"  Publication  Fund.     Interest  on  Investments 355  00 

"  Barton  Fund.                     "         "             "           240  00 

"  Life  Membership  Fund.  "         "             "           165  00 

"  Maintenance  Fund.         "         •'             "           155  00 

"  Eckfeldt  Fund.                 "         "            "           125  00 

"  Stott  Legacy  Fund.         "         "             "           100  00 

"  Maintenance  Fd.     Transf.  by  resolution  of  Academy  1013  14 

"  Life  Membership  Fd.   "       "        "             "         "  1500  00 

"  Book  Fund.                    "       "        "             "         "  3  13 

"  Instruc.  and  Lee.  Fd.  "       "        "            "        "  86  65 

"  Interest 16  25 

$8351  41 

Cb. 

By  Balance  overdrawn  per  last  account ...  S1238  44 

"  Salaries,  Janitors,  etc 3236  62 

"  Freight 43  50 

"  Repairs 85  67 

"  Insurance 55  00 

"  Printing  and  Binding  Proceedings,  etc 1055  36 

"  Plates  and  Engravings 71  75 

"  Printing  and  Stationery 92  40 

"  Trays  and  Cards 71  47 

"  Postage 195  26 

"  Mounting  Swan . . : 5  00 

"  Coal 55  00 

"Gas 88  77 

"  Glass  Jars  and  Vials 77  97 

"  Subscription  to  U.  S.  Publication 2  00 

"  Water  Rents,  1885 33  35 

"  Miscellaneous 452  20 

"  Dr.  D.  G.  Brinton.     Fees  from  Lectures 48  50 

"  Prof.  H.  C.  Lewis.         "         "            "      83  00 

"  Prof.  A.  Heilprin.         •'         "             "       68  00 

"  Life  Memberships  transferred  to  Life  Membership 

Fund 400  00 

$7459  26 

Balance,  General  Account , 892  15 


432  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1885. 

THOMAS  B.  WILSON  LIBRARY  FUND. 

By  Balance  per  last  statement $  277  28 

For  Books 220  05 

Transferred  to  General  Account,  toward  Salary  of  Librarian 300  00 

$797  33 
Income  from  Investments 525  00 

Halance  overdrawn 1272  33 

LIFE  MEMBERSHIP  FUND.     (For  Maintenance.) 

By  Investment,  Bond  and  Mortgage $1500  00 

Transferred  to  General  Account 165  00 

$1665  00 

To  Balance  per  last  statement S1000  00 

Interest  on  Investments 165  00 

Life  Memberships  transferred  to  this  account 400  00 

1565  00 

Balance  overdrawn ^100  00 

BARTON   FUND.     (For  Printing  and  Illustrating  Proceedings.) 

Interest  on  Investments 240  00 

Transferred  to  General  Account 240  00 

JESSUP  FUND.     (For  Assistance  of  Students.) 

Balance  per  last  statement 620  01 

Interest  on  Investments 560  00 

1180  01 
Disbursed 946  00 

Balance S234  01 

MAINTENANCE  FUND. 

Balance  per  last  statement 1013  14 

Interest  on  Investments 155  00 

$1168  14 

By  Investment,  Lehigh  Valley  Coal  Co.'s  Bonds K1013  14 

Transferred  to  General  Account 155  00 

1168  14 

PUBLICATION  FUND. 

[ncome  from  Investments $  355  00 

Life  Subscriptions  to  Proceedings  and  Journal ....       225  00 

$580  00 
Transferred  to  General  Account 355  00 

Balance  for  Investment $225  00 

ECKFELDT  FUND. 

Income  from  Investments $   125  Oil 

Trail-In t.  ,1  to  I  General  Account 125  00 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  433 

I.  V.  WILLIAMSON  LIBRARY  FUND. 

Balance  per  last  Statement $2094  65 

Rents  Collected 994  90 

Ground-rents  Collected 872  02 

Cash  received.    Principal  of  yearly  ground-rent  for  52/^ 
Dollars.      E.  S.  Mount  Holly  Street,  30  feet  north  of 

Dickinson  St $875  00 

Seventy  days'  Interest  at  5  per.  cent 9  63 

Notary's  Acknowledgment 1  00      885  63 

$4847  20 

For  Books $2105  56 

Taxes  and  Water-rents 195  43 

Repairs  to  Properties 378  92 

Collecting 93  34 

Miscellaneous 57  45 

2830  70 

Balance $2016  50 

$1750.00  of  the  above  balance  to  be  re-invested. 

INSTRUCTION  AND  LECTURE  FUND. 

Balance  per  last  Statement $  142  70 

Miscellaneous $56  05 

Transferred  to  General  Account 86  65 

142  70 

MUSEUM  FUND. 

Balance  per  last  Statement $      5  00 

Income  from  Investments 50  00 

$55  00 
VAUX  FUND. 

Balance  per  last  Statement $  477  30 

Income  from  Investments 600  00 

$1077  30 

Minerals $550  63 

Miscellaneous 14  59 

565  22 

Balance  on  hand $512  08 

Mrs.  STOTT  FUND. 

Income  from  Investment $  100  00 

Transferred  to  General  Account 100  00 


BOOK  ACCOUNT.     (Jos.  Jeanes'  Donation.) 

Balance  per  last  Statement $    37  13 

Books $34  00 

Transferred  to  General  Account  3  13 

37  13 

29 


434  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY  OF  [1885. 

HENRY  N.  JOHNSON  FUND. 

By  Cash  paid  Collateral  Inheritance  Tax $1089  70 

"       "     Refunded  Penna.  Co.  for  Ins.  on  Lives,  etc.,  overpaid 

in  settlement  35  50 

"       "    Expenses  Attending    the    Settlement  of   Est.    H.    N. 

Johnson,  dec'd 12  03 

"       "     trading  side-walk  in  Upsal  St 167  37 

"       "    Repairs  to  Properties 518  25 

"      «    Collecting 37  69 

$1860  54 
To  Cash  received  Penna.  Co.  for  Ins.  on  Lives,  etc.,  in 

Settlement  of  Est.  II.  N.  Johnson,  dec'd $859  93 

"  Rents  Collected 618  80 

"  < ;  round-rents  Collected 94  50 

"  Mortgage  Interest  and  Tax  collected 40  50 

"  Six  months'  Int.  on  $1000  Lehigh  Valley's  Bonds. ...       25  00 

1638  73 

Balance  due  by  Academy $221  81 


The  election  of  Officers,  Councillors,  and  Members  of  the 
Finance  Committee,  to  serve  during  1886,  was  held,  with  the 
following  result : — 


President, 
Vice-Presidents, 

Recording  Secretary, 

Corresponding  Secretary, 

Treasurer, 

Librarian, 

Curators, 


Councillors  to  serve  three 
years,   .... 

Finance  Committee, 


Joseph  Leidy,  M.  D., 

Thomas  Meehan, 

Rev.  Henry  C.  McCook,  D.  D. 

Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.  D. 

George  H.  Horn,  M.  D. 

Wm.  C.  He'nszey. 

Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.  D. 

Joseph  Leidy,  M.  D., 

Jacob  Binder, 

W.  S.  W.  Ruschenberger,M.  D., 

Angelo  Heilprin. 

Thos.  A.  Robinson, 

Edw.  Potts, 

Isaac  C.  Martindale, 

Theo.  D.  Rand. 

Isaac  C  Martindale, 

Aubrey  H.  Smith, 

S.  Fisher  Corlies, 

George  Y.  Shoemaker, 

Wm.  W.  Jefferis. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  435 

ELECTIONS  DURING  1885. 

MEMBERS. 

January  27. — Mrs.  Cornelius  Stevenson,  J.  Addison  Campbell, 
Burnett  Landreth. 

February  2Jf. — Charles  Ilarrod  Vinton,  M.  D.,  Hen^  Leffman, 
M.  D.,  S.  Frank  Aaron,  Edward  Longstreth. 

April  ^.—Philip  Laurent,  Rev.  J.  R.  Danforth,  D.  D. 

November  24- — Charles  S.  Dolley,  M.  D.,  Chas.  N.  Davis,  John 
H.  Campbell,  W.  D.  Averell,  W.  G.  A.  Bonwill,  M.  D. 

CORRESPONDENT. 

May  26. — Antonio  de  Gregorio  of  Palermo. 


436  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 


ADDITIONS  TO  MUSEUM. 

Ethnology    and   Archeology. — A.   L.   Siler.      Netting    from  Pueblo 

ruins,  Utah. 
M.  Huffnagle.     Mummy  (and  accessories)  of  the  XIX  dynasty,  collected 

by  Dr.  Charles  Huffnagle  (on  deposit). 
Mrs.  Thomas  Say.     Leather  stockings  worn  by  Wm.  Maclure. 

M  v  m  M  \  i.i  \  ( lucent  and  Fossil). — H.  C.  Chapman.     Skeleton  of  elephant. 
S.  F.  Aaron.     Lei>us  callotis  (skull  and  skin),  Texas  ;    Spermopliilus  gram- 

murus?  (skin),  Texas. 
G.  Raphael.     Blarina?  Beverly,  N.  J. 
\\  .  \Y.  Jefferis.     Tooth  of  fossil  horse,  Orange  Co.,  Fla. 
Florida  Land  and  Improvement  Co.  (J.  J.  Dunne).     Fragments  of  manatee 

bones,  Manatee  River,  Fla. 

Birds. — S.  F.  Aaron.     16  trays  of  eggs  of  North  American  birds. 

T.  G.  Gentry.     181  nests  of  North  American  birds. 

Zoological  Society  of  Philada.     Cyanoeorax  chrysops,  Brazil ;  Micrathene 

Whitneyi. 
T.  L.  Harrison.     A  collection  of  North  American  birds  (no  stated  localities). 
M.  J.  Middleton.      Hooded  merganser  and  whistling  swan,   Chesapeake 

Bay. 
J.  H.  Carr.     Impeyan  pheasant,  India. 
W.  H.  Jones.     Aulacorhamphus  albovitta,  A.  fmmatopygius,  Sturnella  sp.  ? 

Cotinga  maynana 'and  Tanugra  lunulata,  from  Colombia,  S.  A. 

Reptiles  (Recent  and  Fossil). — H.  C.  Chapman.  Ceratophrys  comuta, 
Surinam  ;  Ungalia  muculata,  Diadophis  rufescens,  Hyla  septentrional  is, 
Hylodes  planirostris ;  Anolis  Sagrcei  and  A.  principalis,  Nassau,  New 
Providence. 

W.  W.  Jefferis.     Carapace  of  Ohelydra  serpentina,  Lenni  Dam,  Pa. 

Fishes  (Recent  and  Fossil). — R.  D.  Casterline.  Two  specimens  from  the 
Green  River  Shales  (Eocene),  Wyoming. 

W.  Dougherty.     Fistularia  tabaccaria. 

Purchased.  45  species  of  fishes  from  the  southern  and  western  waters  of 
the  United  States,  collected  by  D.  S.  Jordan  and  S.  E.  Meek.  75  bottles 
of  fishes  from  the  waters  of  the  southern  and  western  United  States,  col- 
li H.-d  by  I).  S.  Jordan  and  S.  E.  Meek. 

Mm  ;  i  bca. — Rafael  Arango.     7  species  marine  shells  from  Cuba,  etc. 

S.  Archer.     1">s  species  marine  shells,  Singapore. 

J.  F.  Bailey.     19  trays  marine  shells  from  Australia. 

W.  T.  Bednall.     11  species  marine  shells  from  Australia. 

W.  G.  Binney.  Helix  germana,  Santa  Cruz,  Cal.  ;  Helix  Levcttei,  Santa 
Fe  Canyon,  New  .Mexico. 

Rev.  W.  M.  Beauchamp.  10  species  fresh-water  shells  from  the  State  of 
New  York. 

.1.  .1.  Brown.    2  species  fresh-water  shells  from  the  Bermudas  and  Bahamas. 

II.  F.  Carpenter.     Amnicola  grana,  near  Providence,  R.  I. 

11.  C.  Chapman.    8  species  marine  shells  from  the  Bahamas. 

Conchological  Section  (by  purchase).  97  species  shells  new  to  the  collec- 
tion, many  types  ;  4S  species  of  marine,  land  and  fresh-water  shells  from 
Sicily;  72  species  marine  and  fresh-water  shells  from  Australia,  Cape  of 
Good  Bope,  [ndia,  etc.  ;  100  trays  land,  marine  and  fresh-water  shells 
from  France,  collected  by  M.  Bidard  ;  16  trays  land  and  l'resh-\\  ater 
shells   from    Missouri,   collected    l>\    <  >.    A.   Crandall  ;     175  species  land, 

marine  and  fresh-water  shells  from  England,  collected  by  H.  Crowther; 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  437 

78  species  of  land  and  fresh-water  shells,  principally  from  New  Caledonia, 
collected  by  G.  Dupuy  ;  10:3  species  of  land,  marine  and  fresh-water 
shells  from  France,  collected  by  A.  Granger  ;  217  species  of  land,  marine 
and  fresh-water  shells  from  Florida,  collected  by  H.  Hemphill  ;  38  species 
of  land  shells  from  France,  collected  by  M.  Locard  ;  39  trays  land  and 
fresh-water  shells  from  Asia,  Africa,  Tasmania  and  New  Caledonia,  col- 
lected by  E.  Marie ;  42  species  marine  shells  from  Florida,  collected  by 
M.  A.  Mitchell ;  137  trays  land  and  fresh-water  shells  from  France,  col- 
lected by  Lieutenant  Wattebled. 

John  Ford.  8  trays  of  marine  shells  from  Rhode  Island  and  Massachu- 
setts ;  suite  of  land  and  fresh-water  shells  from  Philadelphia  county,  Pa.  ; 
Helix  Stimpsoni  ;  Teredo  naralis,  in  ebony  wood  from  Macassar,  Java  ; 
Pholas  truncata  and  P.  crispata  from  Sea  Isle  City,  New  Jersey  ;  5  species 
marine  and  fresh-water  shells  from  Narragansett  Bay,  etc.  ;  Melo  Indica; 
Hippopus  maculatxs  and  Trochus  pica  ;  Littorina  irrorata  Say  (young) 
and  Modiola  plicatula  Lam.  from  Atlantic  City,  New  Jersey. 

Dr.  F.  M.  Hamlin.    2  species  marine  shells  from  Bermuda. 

Dr.  Hartmann.     5  photographs  of  type  species  of  Pai-tul*. 

Benton  Holcomb.  11  species  of  land  and  fresh-water  shells  from 
Connecticut. 

F.  W.  Hutton.     11  species  marine  shells,  New  Zealand. 

W.  W.  Jefferis.     Helix  pomatia  and  Helix  hortensis  from  Heidelberg. 

C.   W.   Johnson.      Columbella  avara,   G.  lunata  and  Odostomia  impressa 

from  Florida. 
C.  R.  Keys.     Sphcerium  sphmricum  Anth.  from  Kennedy's  Lake,  Iowa. 

G.  W.  Lichtenthaler.  23  species  marine  shells  from  the  Sandwich  Islands, 
Alaska,  etc.  ;  Sphmrium  sulcatum  Lam.  from  Salem,  Oregon. 

C.  R.  Orcutt.     Lymnea  humilis  Say  from  Todas  Santos  Bay,  California. 

H.  L.  Osborn.     31  species  marine  shells  from  Beaufort,  N.  C. 

G.  Howard  Parker.  Sphcerium  striatum  Lam.,  Ridley  Creek,  Delaware 
Co.,  Pa. 

H.  A.  Pilsbry.     Ghindlachia  Meekiana,  Rock  Island,  111. 

J.  B.  Quintard.     3  species  of  fresh-water  shells  from  Silver  Lake,  Kansas. 

J.  H.  Redfield.  Pecten  Magellanicus,  Mt.  Desert,  Maine  ;  Littorina  Uttorea, 
Martha's  Vineyard,  Mass. 

U.  C.  Smith.     Pholas  truncata,  Anglesea,  N.  J. 

Hon.  F.  E.  Spinner.  TJnio  Buckleyi  Lea,  Lake  Monroe,  Fla.;  Planorbis 
glaoratus  Say,  St.  John's  River,  Fla. 

R.  E.  C.  Stearns.  4  species  of  marine  and  fresh-water  shells,  from  Cali- 
fornia, Tehuantepec  and  Peru . 

L.  H.  Streng.  Purpura  hcemastoma,  Panama  ;  Nerita  fulgurans,  Nicaragua; 
TJnio  nasutus  and  Physa  intcgra,  Michigan  ;  2  fresh-water  species  from 
Vancouver  Island. 

G.  Test.     Egg  capsules  of  Fulgur  canaliculars,  from  Sea  Isle  City,  N.  J. 

J.  H.  Thomson.  7  species  of  land  and  fresh-water  shells,  from  Merida, 
Yucatan,  and  New  Mexico  ;  Helix  alauda  Fer.,  Cuba. 

Henry  A.  Ward.  Glove  woven  from  the  byssus  of  Pinna  pernula,  Medi- 
terranean Sea. 

Wm.  Wheeler.  Cyproza  angvstata  and  C.  edentula,  from  Algoa  Bay,  South 
Africa. 

J.  Willcox.  Egg  cases  of  Fulgur  />erversus,  Tampa  Bay,  Fla.,  and  of 
Fasciolaria,  Charlotte  Harbor,  Fla.;  Vivipara  lineata  Val.,  and  Unio 
fuscatus  Lea,  Orange  County,  Fla. 

Invektebrata  (recent,  exclusive  of  mollusks). — J.  Ford.  Echinanthus 
rosaceus  and  Heoma  ventricosa,  Elbow  Key,  Fla.;  Meoma  ventricosa, 
Nassau,  New  Providence;  Asterias  ochracea,  Santa  Cruz,  Cal.;  Stron- 
gylocentrotus  purpuratus  ?  California ;  Oreaster,  Nassau ;  Meyenia 
Lcidyi,  Philadelphia. 


438  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1885. 

H.  C.  McCook.     A  collection  of  Cicada  architecture. 

G.  Giinther.    A  collection  of  insects,  Buenos  Ayres. 

C.  Test.     Balanus  eburneus,  Sea  Isle  City,  N.  J. 

J.  B.  English.     Serpula  dianthus,  Barnegat  Bay,  N.  J. 

G.  J.  Corson.     Serpuloid  worm  burrows,  Morris  Cove,  N.  J. 

C.  MiCormick.  Xanthodes  nitidula  and  Apus  longicaudatus,  Texas ;   Gelasi- 

mus  pugilator,  Atlantic  City,  N.  J.;  Ixodes,  sp.'?  Texas. 
E.  Potts.     Pectinatella. 

In  \  imibrata  (Fossil). — J.Ford.  Orthis  testudinaria,  from  New  York 
and  Ohio. 

W.  W".  Jefferis.  Casts  of  Venus,  Miocene  of  James  River,  Va. :  a  collection 
of  Silurian  and  Carboniferous  fossils  from  the  west. 

J.  Wilcox.  A  collection  of  fossils,  partly  chalcedonized,  from  Tampa  Bay, 
Fla.  (Oligocene?) 

C.  McCormick.  Acidaspis  tuberculatus,  Bushkill,  Pa.;  Phaeops  Logani, 
Dingman's  Ferry,  Pa.  « 

Chas.  Wachsmuth.  Slab  containing  Crinoids.  Carboniferous  of  Marshall- 
town,  Iowa. 

Florida  Land  and  Improvement  Co.  (J.  J.  Dunne).  Conorbis,  n.  sp.  (prin- 
ceps),  Oligocene,  of  Manatee  River,  Fla. 

Plants  (Recent). — Prof.  Thomas  C.  Porter,  Lafayette  College,  Easton, 
Pa.     Uolosteum  umbellatum  L.,  from  Harrisburg,  Pa. 

Mrs.  Maria  L.  Owen,  Springfield,  Mass.  7  species  rare  plants,  from  Nan- 
tucket, Mass.,  and  an  abnormal  form  of  Kalmia  latifolia  L.,  from  Deer- 
field,  Mass.  ^ 

Dr.  J.  W.  Eckfeldt^hila.  160  species  Lichens  from  Scandinavia,  Austria, 
Hawaian  Islands  and  N.  America,  all  named  and  mounted,  of  which 
91  are  new  to  the  collection. 

Wm.  M.  Canby,  Wilmington,  Del.  Isoetes  melanospora  Engelm.,  Stone 
Mt.,  Ga.,  new  to  the  collection;  388  species  fiom  Europe,  8.  Africa  and 
Australia,  of  which  77  are  new  to  the  collection. 

Dr.  Asa  Gray,  Cambridge,  Mass.  217  species  from  China,  Formosa,  Siam, 
S.  Africa,  Australia,  S.  America  and  United  States,  of  which  76  are  new 
to  us. 

Prof.  N.  L.  Britton,  Columbia  College,  N.  Y.  17  species  Cyperacese,  from 
Texas,  of  which  4  are  new  to  us ;  Also  Montia  Howellii,  Washington 
Territory. 

J.  B.  Ellis,  Newfield,  N.  J.  14th  and  15th  centuries  of  N.  American 
Fungi. 

Thos.  Meehan,-  Phila.  365  species  collected  by  him  in  1883,  in  Western 
Colorado,  Utah,  California  and  Nevada,  of  which  13  are  new  to  the  col- 
lection ;  21  species,  mostly  cultivated  exotics,  of  which  17  are  new  to  us. 

Mrs  Fanny  E.  Briggs,  La  Center,  Washington  Terr.,  through  Thomas 
Meehan.     51  species,  collected  by  her  in  Washington  Terr. 

California  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences,  by  Rev.  E.  L.  Greene  and  Mrs. 
Mary  K.  Curran,  Curators.  24  species  of  rare  California  plants,  of  which 
18  are  new  to  the  collection. 

Isaac  C.  Martindale,  Camden,  N.  J.  5  species  plants  from  western  North 
America,  of  w  hich  3  are  new  to  us. 

Isaac  Burk,  Philadelphia,  Helianthus  gig aniens  L.  Helianthus  (doubtful 
sp.).  Senecio  tomentosus,  from  Cape  May,  N.  J.,  and  19  species  from 
ballast  deposits  at  Kaighn's  Point,  mostly  of  South  American  origin, 
of  which  6  are  new  to  the  collection. 

Mis.  Flora  E.  Haines,  Bangor,  Me.  Petasites  palmata  Gr.,  from  near 
Bangor,  Me. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES    OF   PHILADELPHIA.  439 

Aubrey  H.  Smith,  Phila.     Silphiurn  perfoliatum  L.,  and  Gordonia  pubescent 

L'Her.,  with  its  fruit,  from  Bartram's  Garden,  Phila. 
Dr.  Emil  Bessels,  Washington,  D.  C.     13  species  arctic  plants,  collected 
on  Voyage  of  Polaris  in  July,  1872,  Lat.  81°-82°  K,  and  Long.  61°  W. 
J.  Donnell  Smith.  Baltimore,  Md.     26  species  from  southern  United  States, 

of  which  3  are  new  to  us. 
John  H.  Redfield.     67  species  from  western  X.  America,  of  which  56  are 
new  to  us. 
299  species,  collected  by  C.  G.  Pringle,  in  Arizona  and  Iowa,  in  1884, 
of  which  114  are  new  to  the  collection. 
16  species  N.  American  grasses,  mostly  from  Florida,  of  which  6  are 
new  to  us. 
143  species,  collected  by  him  on  N.  England  coast,  mostly  from  Maine. 
Friesia  refracta  Klatt,  Cult.,  new  to  us. 

Plants  (Fossil). — J.  Ford.     5  trays  coal  plants,  Schuylkill  Co.,  Pa. 
L.  H.  Lighthipe.     A  collection  of  fossil  plants  and  plant  impressions,  from 
the  Cretaceous  clay  of  Woodbridge,  N.  J. 

Rocks  and  Minerals. — W.  W.  Jefferis.  Dog-tooth  spar,  Mineral  Point, 
Wis.  ;  magnetic  sand,  Lake  Champlain  ;  iron  pyrites,  changing  into 
limonite,  Berks  Co.,  Pa.  ;  corundum,  Chester  Co.,  Pa.  ;  fossiliferous 
limestone,  Cincinnati  ;  iron  pyrites,  E.  Whiteland,  Pa.  ;  Silurian  lime- 
stone, Ohio  ;  blende  and  galena,  Cumberland,  England ;  quartz,  from 
dolomite  of  Poorhouse  Quarry,  Chester  Co.,  Pa.  ;  quartz,  from  Lewis 
Co.,  N.  Y. ;  gneiss  and  limestone,  from  Van  Arsdalen's  quarry,  Pa.  ; 
leu  cite,  from  Vesuvius  ;  quartz.  Hot  Springs,  Ark  •  calamine,  pseudo- 
morph  after  calcite,  Mineral  Point,  Wis.;  granular  qmrtz,  Dixon's,  Del.  ; 
corundum,  Newlin,  Pa.  ;  pyroxene,  Burgess,  Can.  ;  garnet,  Lancaster, 
Mass.  ;  fiuor  spar,  Philadelphia  ;  massive  garnet,  Birmingham,  Pa.  ; 
granite,  Triassic  shale,  no  loc.  ;  Potsdam  sandstone,  Gouverneur,  N.  Y.  ; 
lignite,  Bonn,  Germany ;  amygdaloidal  melaphyre,  Oberstein,  Germany  ; 
melaphyre,  Hettstadt,  Germany ;  trachyte,  Siebengebirge,  Germany ; 
lithographic  slate,  Bavaria  ;  toadstone,  Newburyport,  Mass.  ;  buhrstone, 
Paris,  France ;  amygdaloid,  Round  Hill,  Mass.  ;  blue  quartz,  Chester 
Co.,  Pa.  ;  schist  with  magnetite  (loc.  ?)  ;  wavellite,  E.  Whiteland,  Pa.  ; 
blue  quartz,  East  Creek,  N.  Y.  ;  actinolite,  Delaware  Co.,  Pa.  ;  hema- 
tite, Bernisof;  mica  slate.  Warren,  N.  H.  ;  corundum  (altered),  New 
Lynn,  Pa.  ;  hornblende,  apatite  and  sphene.  Rossie,  N.  Y.  ;  limonite, 
Algeria :  muscovite,  Pennsburg,  Pa.  ;  museovite,  Chandler's  Hollow, 
Del.  ;  hornblende,  Russell,  N.  Y. ;  cadmiferous  blende,  Wilkenradt ; 
pyrite,  smithsonite  and  sphalerite,  Mineral  Point,  Wis.  ;. quartz,  Media, 
Pa.  :  polyadelphite,  Franklin,  1ST.  J.  :  red-spotted  porphyry,  Lynn,  Mass.  ; 
polyadelphite  and  rhodonite,  Franklin,  N.  J.  ;  corundum  in  Indianite, 
Delaware  Co.,  Pa.  :  danburite  iloc.  ?)  ;  talc,  East  Bradford,  Pa.  ;  phlo- 
gopite,  Rossie,  N.  Y.  ;  phlogopite,  Burgess,  Can.  ;  talc,  Rochester,  N. 
H.  ;  radiated  mica  and  damourite,  Chester  Co.,  Pa.  ;  cerussite,  Mineral 
Point,  Wis.;  calcite.  Bilbao,  Spain;  rutile  and  dolomite,  Chester  Co., 
Pa.  ;  scapolite,  Bolton,  Mass.  ;  almandine,  Dixon's,  Del.  ;  tourmaline, 
Tin  msand  Islands. 

D.  S.  Martin.  Carrara  marble  bored  by  sponge,  Long  Island  ;  marmolite, 
Hoboken,  N.  J.:  crust  from  Saratoga  "Geyser  Spring;"  crust  from 
"Champion  Spring,"  Saratoga;  Eozoon  rock,  Thurman,  N.  Y. 

S.  E.  Hudson.     Lignite,  from  Egg  Harbor,  N.  J. 

J.  Ford.     Fossiliferous  pebbles,  Fairmount  Park,  Pa. 

I.  Lea.  A  series  (51  trays  I  of  Triassic  rocks  and  organic  impressions  from 
Pennsylvania ;  a  series  (35  trays)  of  rock  fragments  and  plant  remains 
from  the  Permian,  Trias  and  Lias  of  Alsace-Lorraine  and  south- 
western Germany,  named  in  part  by  Prof.  Schimper. 


440  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Dr.  Rice.     Wollastonite,  Maitinsburgh,  N.  Y. 

J.  M.  Hartman.    Hematite,  Jaragua,  Chili  ;  hematite,  Jefferson  Co.,  Ala.  ; 

quartz,  iron,  and  copper  pyrites,  from  Concord,  N.  C.  ;  do,  from  Rima 

Mine,  N.  C.  ;  do,  from  Rowan  Co.,  N.  C. ;  gold,  Concord,  X.  C. 
S.  E.  Paschall.     Fossiliferous  Triassic  shale,  Phcenixville,  Pa.  ;   Triassic 

shale,  with  calamites,  Bucks  Co.,  Pa. 
J.  Eyerman.     Stibnite,  Mount  Kosang,  Japan. 
J.  C.  Sanderling.     Gold  gangue  (loc?) 
A.  W.  Dickson.     Coal  (with  "eyes"),  Kingston,  Pa. 
T.  D.  Rand.  Chromite,  Radnor,  Pa.,  quartz,  Chester  Co.,  Pa.;  trap  column, 

from  C'onshohocken  dike,  Wayne,  Pa. 

D.  B.  Bruncr.  Chabazite,  Fritz's  Island;  do.  from  Reading,  Pa.;  datho- 
lite  and  brucite,  Reading,  Pa.;  aragonite,  Berks  Co.,  Pa.;  apophyllite, 
thomsonite,  calcite,  and  mesolite,  Fritz's  Island,  near  Reading,  Pa. 

S.  Tyson.     Chabazite,  Fritz's  Island,  Pa.;  apophyllite,  Reading. 
A.  O.  Deshong.     Zoisite,  Leiperville,  Pa. 

E.  W.  Pine.     Quartz  geode,  Keokuk,  Iowa. 

H.  C.  Lewis.  Cuprite,  Frankford,  Pa.;  calcite,  Wheatley  Mine,  Pa.; 
genthite,  Lafayette,  Pa.;  hypersthene  gabbro,  Mt.  Hope,  Md. 

L.  Woolman.  Erythrite,  Wheatley  Mine,  Phcenixville,  Pa.;  Triassic 
shale,  with  plant  impressions,  Phcenixville,  Pa.;  milky  quartz,  Over- 
brook,  Pa. 

C.  U.  Shepard.  Lazulite,  Georgia;  asbestiform  bronzite,  Pelham,  Mass.; 
keatingine,  Ft.  Sparta ;  elroquite,  Elroque,  W.  I.;  phosphorite,  Spain; 
indianite,  Pelham,  Mass.;  wilsonite,  templeton  and  uralite,  Conn.; 
antillite  (loc.?);  pelhamine,  Pelham,  Mass.;  keatingine,  Franklin,  N.  J.; 
monite,  Island  of  Mona ;  monetite,  Island  of  Moneta  ;  staurolite,  Morgan- 
town,  Ga. ;  staurojjfe,  S.  Car. 

L.  Garrison.     Clinton  ore.     S.  Pittsburgh,  Pa. 

C.  McCormick.  Granite,  with  nodular  mica,  Craftsbury,  Vt.;  Clinton 
shale,  with  glacial  striae,  and  Hudson  River  slate,  Delaware  Water  Gap, 
Pa.;  uranotil  (?)  and  autunite,  from  Avendale  quarries,  Pa. 

G.  H.  Parker.  Glaciated  pebbles,  clay,  etc.,  from  the  glaciated  region  near 
Boston,  Mass.;  autunite  and  torbernite  (?),  Avendale  quarries,  Pa. 

W.  H.  Schiveley.     Cryolite,  siderite,  and  galena,  Ivigtut,  Greenland. 

M.  A.  Walsh.     Concretions  formed  in  ferruginous  gravel,  of  Perry ville,  N.  J. 

E.  J.  Wheelock.     Slickensided  shale  (Triassie).  Newark,  N.  J. 

C.  Brock.     Eocene  rock,  Eutaw  Springs,  S.  Car. 

J.  W.  Pike.     Pebbles  from  fossiliferous  gravel  of  New  Jersey. 

H.  C.  Chapman.  Shale,  with  fossil  leaves,  Wyoming  ;  fragment  of  fossil- 
iferous boulder,  Mt.  Desert. 

.Mineralogical  and  Geological  Section,  A.  N.  S.  Hornblende,  Renfrew  Co., 
Can.;  pyroxene,  var.  Jeffersonite,  Sussex  Co.,  N.  J.;  obsidian,  near  Pinas, 
Mexico;  kyanite,  Norwich,  Conn.;  stilbite,  Nova  Scotia;  quartz  in 
limonite,  New  York;  apophyllite  and  stilbite,  Frankford,  Pa.;  wer- 
nerite.  Susses  Co.,  N.  J. 

Purchased.  Elaeolite  (var.  nephelite),  Magnet  Cove,  Ark.;  nephelite, 
Lobau,  Saxony. 

In  Exchange.  Kyanite,  Black  Horse,  Del.  Co.,  Pa.;  orthoclase,  albite 
with  beryl,  hyalite,  and  beryl,  Avondale,  Del.  Co.,  Pa. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  441 

ADDITIONS  TO  THE  LIBRARY. 

1885. 

Abbott,  C.     A  naturalist's  rambles  about  home.     New  York,  1885. 

The  Author. 

Ackermann,    Karl.     Bestimmung   der  erdmagnetischen   Inklination   von 

Kassel. 

Kaefer.     Hersfield,  1870.  The  Author. 

Agassiz.  Embryology  of  the  Ctenophorae.  Cambridge,  1874.    The  Author. 

Alabama,  Geological  Survey  of.     Report  of  progress  for  1876,  by  Eugene 

A.  Smith,  Ph.  D.  The  Author. 

Allgemeine  Naturkunde  H.  1,  1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Ancey,  M.  C.  F.     Contributions  a  la  Faune  Malacologique  Indo-Tibetaine. 

The  Author. 

Andre,  Ernest.     Les  Fourmis.     Paris.  The  Author. 

Alfonso  X,  Rey  de   Castilla.      Libros  del  Saber  de  Astronomia.     Tomi 

I-TV,  Y.  1,  Madrid.     Folio.  Royal  Academy  of  Madrid. 

Alumni  Association  of   the  Philadelphia  College  of   Pharmacy.      24th 

annual  report.     Philadelphia,  1885.  The  College. 

Archiac,  Yicomte  de,  and  Jules  Haime.     Description  des  Animaux  fossiles 

du  Groupe  Xummulitique  de  Tlnde,  I.     Paris,  1853. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Ashburner,  Charles  A.     The  geology  of  natural  gas  in  Pennsylvania  and 

New  York,  1885. 

The  product  and  exhaustion  of  the  oil  regions  in  Pennsylvania  and 

New  York,  1885.  The  Author. 

Astor  Library.     36th  annual  report  of  the  trustees  for  the  year  1884.    New 

York,  1885.  The  Trustees. 

Baillon,  H.    Dictionnaire  de  Botanique,  17me  and  18me  Fasc    Paris,  1885. 

Traite  de  Botanique  medicale  phanerogamique,  2d  Fasc.     Paris,  1884. 

I.  Y.  Williamson  Fund. 

Bail  stow,  S.  D.     Natural  History  Notes  from  South  Africa.     The  Author. 

Ball,  V.     Report  on  the  Museums  of  America  and  Canada.       The  Author. 

Barrande,  Joachim.    Systeme  Silurien  du  Centre  de  la  Boheme,  Vol.  I  and 

suppl.  2  vols,  text  and  2  vols,  plates  ;  vol.  II,  6  vols,  text  and  5  vols. 

plates ;  III,  1  vol.  text  and  plates ;  Y,  2  vols,  plates ;  VI.  4  vols. 

plates  ;  22  vols,  4to.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Bary,  A.  de.     Comparative  Anatomy  of  the  Vegetative  Organs  of  the 

Phanerogams  and  Ferns.     Translated  and  demonstrated  by  F.  O. 

Bower  and  D.  H.  Scott.     Oxford,  1884.         I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Bayley,  Wm.  H.     The  Opportunities  of  the  Medical  Profession. 

Trustees  of  the  University  of  New  York. 

Becker,  Geo.  F.     Geology  of  the  Comstock  lode  and  the  Washoe  district, 

with  atlas.     Washington,  1882.  Department  of  the  Interior. 

Belgium.     Musee  Royal  d'Histoire  Naturelle  de  Belgique,  Service  de  la 

carte  Geologique  du  Royaume.     Explication  des  feuilles  de  Modave, 

Virton,  Ruette,  Lamorteau,  Landen,  St.  Trond,  Heers.     Bruxelles, 

1884.  The  Museum. 

Bell,  H.  C.  P.     The  Maldive  Islands.     Colombo,  1883. 

Ceylon  Branch  of  Royal  Asiatic  Society. 

Bellardi,  Luigi.    I  Molluschi  dei  terreni  terziari  del  Piemonte  e  della  Liguria. 

Parte  IV.     Torino,  1884.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Berg,  C.     Quindecim    Coleoptera   Nova  Faunae   Republican   Argentina}. 

Buenos  Aires,  1885. 

Quindecim  Lepidoptera  Nova  Faunae  Republican  Argentina  et  Uru- 

guayensis.     Buenos  Aires. 
La  Metamorfosis.    Buenos  Aires,  1884 


442  PROCEEDINGS    OP   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Reptiles  y  Anfibies  del  Tandil  y  de  la  Tinta.     Buenos  Aires,  1884. 
Rhinocerophis    Nasus   (Garm.),    Bothrops    Ammodytoides    (Leyb.). 
Questioned  sinonimicas  sobre  una  vibora  de  la  fauna  Argentina. 
Buenos  Aires,  1885.  The  Author. 

Berlese,  Abbe.     Monograph  of  the  genus  Camellia.     Boston,  1838. 

In  exchange. 
Fungi    Moricolse   Itonografia  e  descrizione  dei  funghi  parassite   del 
Gelso.     Padova,  1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Bertolini,  Ant.     Flora  Italica,  Vols.  I-X.     Bononise,  1833-1854. 

Jos.  Jeanes. 

Bland,  Thos.     Obituary  notice  of.  John  H.  Redfield. 

Blish,  W.  G.     The  Gyroscope  and  the  top.  The  Author. 

Bolton,  H.  C.     A  Catalogue  of  scientific  and  technical  periodicals,  1665  to 

1882,  together  -with  chronological  tables  and  a  library  check-list. 

'2  vols.  Smithsonian  Institution. 

Bombici,  L.     Sulle  superficie  elicoidi  e  paraboloidi  nei  romboedri  detti  selli- 

formi  di  Dolomite  e  di  altri  Carbanati  suidri.     1885. 

Corso  di  Litologia.     Bologna,  1885.  The  Author. 

Borre,  A.  Preudhommc  de.     Note  sur  les  Julides  de  la  Belgique,  1884. 

Tentamen  Catalogi  Lysiopetalidarum.  The  Author. 

Bourguignat,  J.  R.     Helix  arionidees  des  regions  orientales  de  L'Afrique. 

Paris,  1885. 

Notice  prodromique  sur  les  mollusques  terrestres  et  fluviatiles  recueillis 

par  M.  Victor  Giraud  dans  la  region  meridionale  du  Lac  Tanganika. 

1885.  The  Author. 

Brauner,  John  C.     The  Poror6ca,  or  bore,  of  the  Amazon.     The  Author. 

Brinton,  Daniel  G.     The  Taensa  grammar  and  dictionary. 

The  lineal  measures  of  the  semi-civilized  nations  of  Mexico  and  Cen- 
tral America. 
The  chief  God  of  the  Algonkins,  in  his  character  as  a  cheat  and  liar. 

The  Author. 

lii  itish  Museum.     Catalogue  of  the  birds  in  the  British  Museum.    Vol.  X. 

London,  1885.  The  Trustees. 

Guide  to  the  collection  of  fossil  fishes  in  the  department  of  Geology 

and  Palaeontology.    British  Museum  (Nat.  Hist.).    London,  1885. 
Guide  to  the  galleries  of  Mammalia  (Mammalian,  Osteological  Ceta- 
cean) in  the  department  of  Zoology  of  the  British  Museum.     1885. 
Boulenger's  Catalogue  of  the  Lizards  in  the  British  Museum.     Second 

Ed.,  Vol.  I.     Geokonidse,  etc.     London,  1885. 
Flower's  List  of  the  specimens  of  Cetacea  in  the  Geological  depart- 
ment of  the  British  Museum.     London,  1885. 
Iiydekkar's  Catalogue  of  the  Fossil  Mammalia  in  the  British  Museum. 
Part  I.     London,  1885.  The  Trustees. 

Brocchi.     Traite  d'ostreiculture.     Paris.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Bronn,  II.  G.     Klassen  und  Ordnungen  des  Thierreichs.     5er  Bd.,  II  Abth., 
l:;,  14,  15  L.  ;  6er  Bd.,  I  Abth.,  4  Lief. ;  111  Abth.,  44-47  L. 

Wilson  Fund. 
Brooklyn  Library.     27th  annual  report.     March  26,  1885.     Bulletins  Nos. 

The  Trustees. 

Browne,  II.  J.     The  higher  branch  of  science,  or  materialism  refuted  by 

facts.     Melbourne.  The  Author. 

Briihl,  Carl  Bernhard.     Zootomie  aller  Thierklassen.     Atlas.     Lief.  31,  32 

and  33.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Brusina,  Spiridione.     Sastanak  Ornitologa  i  Izbozba  Ptica  u  Becu  Napisa. 

Zagieb,  1884. 

Die  Neritodonta  Dalmatiens  und  Slavoniens  nebst  allerlei  malakologi- 

M  Bemerkungen.     Frankforta.  M.  The  Author. 

Bucquoy,  I'..,  Ph.  Dautzenberg  and  (..  Dollfus.     Les  Mollusques  Marines 

du  Roussillon.     Fasc.  7-9.     Paris,  1885.         I.  Y.  Williamson  Fund. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  443 

Bureau  of  Education.     Circulars  of  information.     Nos.  1,  2,  6  and  7,  1885. 
Teachers'  Institutes.     Washington,  1885. 
Historical  sketch  of  the  universities  and  colleges  of  the  United  States. 

1883.  Department  of  the  Interior. 
Bureau  of  Ethnology.     2d  annual  report  to  the  secretary  of  the  Smith- 
sonian Institution,  1880-81.     Washington,  1883.  The  Bureau. 

Another  copy  of  same.  The  Smithsonian  Inst. 

Busch,  Katharine  J.  Additions  to  the  shallow-water  Mollusca  of  Cape 
Hatteras,  N.  C.     New  Haven,  1885.  The  Author. 

Buza,  Janos.     Kultivalt  Novenyeink  Betegsegei.     Budapest,  1879. 

Royal  Hungarian  Society  of  Science. 
California  State  Mining  Bureau.     3d  and  4th  annual  reports  of  the  State 
Mineralogist,  for  the  year  ending  June  1,  1883. 
First  annual  catalogue  of  the  State  Museum,  1882. 
Catalogue.     Vol.  2.     1885. 

Catalogue  of  books,  maps,  etc.     May  15,  1884.  Henry  G.  Hanks. 

Call,   R.  Ellsworth.     Contributions   to   a   knowledge   of  the   fresh-water 

Mollusca  of  Kansas.     Ill  and  IV.     Fresh-water  Bivalves. 

Description  of  a  new  species  of  Unio  from  Kansas — Contributions  to  a 

knowledge  of  the  fresh-water  Mollusca  of  Kansas.  The  Author. 

Cameron,   Peter.      A  monograph  of  the  British  Phytophagous  Hymen- 

optera.     Vol.  2.     (Ray  Society,  1884.)     London,  1885. 

Wilson  Fund. 

Canada.     Geological  and  Natural  History  Survey  and  Museum  of  Canada. 

Report  of  Progress,  1882-83-84.     Montreal,  1885.    Maps,  34  sheets 

in  roll.  The  Survey. 

Esquisse  geologique  sur  le  Canada.     Par  W.  E.  Logan  et  T.  Sterry 

Hunt.     1855. 
Descriptive   catalogue   of  a   collection   of    the  economic  minerals   of 

Canada  and  of  its  crystalline  rocks.     1862. 
Summary  reports  of  progress,  1st  May,  1869  ;  2d  May,  1878. 
Notes  on  the  gold  of  eastern  Canada.     1864. 
A  geographical,  agricultural  and  mineralogical  sketch.     1865. 
Laurentian  Limestones  of  North  America.     1871. 
Philadelphia  International  Exhibition,  1876.     Descriptive  catalogue  of 

a  collection  of  the  economic  minerals  of  Canada.     1876. 
Mesozoic  Fossils,  I,  2,  1879. 
Comparative  vocabularies  of  the  Indian  Tribes  of  British  Columbia. 

Montreal,  1884. 
Map  of  the  Dominion  of  Canada,  1842-1882.     In  two  sections. 

The  Survey. 
Canestrini,  Johann.     Acari  Myriopoda  et  Scorpiones  hucusque  in  Italia 
reperta.  Cheronetides  Italici,  fascic.  I  and  III.     Padova,  1885. 
Prospetto  del  l'Acarofauna  Italiana.     Padova,  1885.  The  Author. 

Carnana,  A.  A.     Recent  discoveries  at  Notabile.     Malta.  1881. 

Report  of  the  Phoenician  and  Roman  antiquities  in  the  group  of  the 

Islands  of  Malta.     Malta,  1882. 
Discovery  of  a  tomb-cave  at  Ghain  Sielem,  Gozo,  in  June,  1884. 

Geo.  W.  Tryon.  Jr. 
Carriere,  Dr.  Justus.  Die  Sehorgane  der  Thiere.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Cams,   Victor.      Prodomus  Fauna'   Mediterranean.      Pars   I.      Stuttgart, 

1884.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Casey,  Thos.  L.     Revision  of  the  Stenini  of  Amerii-a  north  of  Mexico, 

1884.  The  Author. 

Castel,  Don  Carlos.  Memoria  premiada  con  el  ac<:esit  por  la  Real  Aca- 
demia  de  Ciencias  sobre  el  tema  ' '  Determinar  el  valor  intrinseco  de 
las  materias  curtientes  6  astringentes  referido  al  del  tanino  pro- 
ducido."     Madrid.  1879.  Royal  Academy  of  Madrid. 


444  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Castiglioni  Luigi.     Viaggio  negli  Stati  Uniti  dell  'America  Settentrionale 
negli  aimi  1785,  "86  and  '87.     Milano,  1790.  J.  H.  Redfield. 

Catalogue  de  la  Collection  Geologique  du  Semur,  1884. 

The  Society  of  Natural  and  Historical  Science  of  Semur. 
Catalogue  of  the  scientific  books  in  the  library  <>f  the  Royal  Society.    Part 

I.  Transactions.  The  Society. 
Census  of  the  United  States,  1880,  Report ;  vols.  VIII  and  IX. 

Report  on  the  mortality  and  vital  statistics  of  the  United  States,  I. 

Washington,  1885.  The  Department  of  the  Interior. 

Certes,  A.     De  l'emploi  des  matieres  colorantes  dans  l'etude  physiologique 

tt  histologique  des  infusories  vivants.  Paris,  1885.  The  Author. 
Challenger  Expedition.     Report  on  the  scientific  results  of  the  voyage  of 

II.  M.  S.  Challenger  during  the  years  1873-76.     Botany,  I ;  Zoology, 
IX,  text  and  plates,  X,  XI ;  Narrative  of  the  cruise,  I,  1,  2. 

J  I.  B.  Majesty's  Government. 
Chief  of  the  Bureau  of  Statistics,  Treasury  Department.    Quarterly  reports 

Sept.  30,  Dec.  31,  1884,  and  Nos.  3  and  4.     Washington. 

Treasury  Department. 
Chief  of  Engineers,  U.  S.  A.     Annual  report  for  the  year  1884.     In  four 

paits.     AVashington,  1884.  War  Department. 

Chief  of  Ordnance.     Annual  report  to  the  Secretary  of  War  for  the  fiscal 

year  ending  June  30,  1884.  Washington,  1884.  War  Department. 
Choffat,  Paul.     Description  de  la  Faune  Jurassique  du  Portugal.     Mol- 

lusques,  Lamellibranches.     Lisbon,  1885. 
Recueil  de  Monographies  strati«raphiques  sur  le  Systeme  Cretacique 

du  Portugal.     Lisbon,  1885.     I.  The  Author. 

Claus,  C.     Elementary  text-book  of  zoology.     Translated  by  Adam  Sedg- 
wick, M.  D.    2  vols.,  1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Cohn,  F.     Kryptogamen  Flora  von  Schlesien.     Ill,  1. 

Beitriige  zur  Biologie  der  Pflanzen,  IV,  I.     Breslau,  1884. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Collet,   John.     Department  of   Geology  and  Natural  History,    Indiana. 

14th  annual  report.     John  Collet,  State  Geologist.  The  Survey. 

Collin,  Jonas.     Om   Limtjordens  tidligere   og  nuvserende  Marine  Fauna 

med  sajrligt  hensyn  til  Bloddyrl'aunsen J  The  Author. 

Colonial  Museum   and  Laboratory,  New   Zealand.     19th   annual   report, 

together  with  a  list  of  donations  and  deposits  during  1883-84  ;  and 

the  15th  annual  report  on  the  Colonial  Botanic  Garden,  1883-84. 

Reports  of  Geological  Explorations,  1883-84;  Meteorological  Report, 

1884.     New  Zealand.  The  Museum. 

Commissioner  of  Agriculture.     Report  for  the  year  1884.     Washington, 

1884.  The  Department. 

(  inn  missioners  on  Inland  Fisheries.    19th  annual  report  for  the  year  ending 

December  31,  1884.    Boston,  18S5.  The  Commissioners. 

Commissioners  of  the  State  Bureau  of  Labor  Statistics.     Report  on  the 

Industrial,  Social  and  Economic  Conditions  of  Pullman,  111.,  Sept., 

1JS84.  The  Commissioner. 

Commissioner  of  General  Land  Office.     Annual  reports  for  the  vears  1870, 

1872,  1873,  1874,  1875,  1878,  1880-1884.  Department  of  the  Interior. 
Commission   zur  wissenschaftlichen  Untersuchung  der  deutschen  Meere 

in  Kiel.     Vierter  Bericht  fur  die  Jahre  1877  bis  1881  ;  VII  bis  XI 

Jahrg.     HI  Abth.     Berlin,  1884.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Committee  on  Building  Stone  to  the  Board  of  Capitol  Managers  of  the 

State  of  Colorado.    Report.     July  3,  1884.  The  Committee. 

Connecticut.     C.  U.  Shepard's  report  on  the  geological  survey  of,  1837. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Comptroller  of  the  Currency.     Annual  report.     Dec.  1,  1884.  Washington. 

The  Treasury  Department. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  445 

Cooper,  J.  G.     On  fossil  and  subfossil  land  shells  of  the  United  States, 
with  notes  on  living  species.  The  Author. 

Cope,  E.  D.     Paleontological  Bulletin,  No.  40. 

On  the  evolution  of  the  vertebrata,  progressive  and  retrogressive. 

The  position  of  Pterichthys  in  the  system. 

The  Lemuroidea  and  the  Insectivora  of  the  Eocene  period  of  North 

America,  1885. 
The  Amblypoda,  1885. 

Twelfth  contribution  to  the  Herpetology  of  Tropical  America. 
On  a  collection  of  fishes  and   reptiles   from   Monterey,    Nuevo  Leon, 

Mexico. 
The  relations  between  the  theromorphous  reptiles  and  the  monotreme 

mammalia. 
The  Batrachia  of  the  Permian  beds  of  Bohemia  and  the  Labyrintho- 

dont  from  the  Bijori  group  (India). 
Geology  and  Paleontology.     The  White  River  beds  of  Swift  Current 

River,  Northwest  Territory. 
Marsupials  from  the  lower  Eocene  of  New  Mexico. 
The  Loup  Fork  Miocene  in  Mexico. 
The  Mammalian  Genus  Hemiganus. 
Marsh  on  the  Dinocerata. 

Geology  and  Paleontology  (Notes  from  the  Am.   Naturalist,  Jan., 
1885).  The  Author. 

Corthell,  Elmer  L.     The  Interoceanic  problem  and  its  scientific  solution. 

The  Author. 
Czerniavskyo,  V.      Materialia   ad   Zoographiam   Ponticam   Compaiatam. 
Fasc.  II.     Crustacea  Decapoda  Pontica  Littoralia.     1884. 

Scientific  Society  of  the  University  of  Kharkov. 
Daday,  Jeno  A.     Magyar  Allattani  Irodalom  Ismertetese,  1870  tol  1880-ig 
bezarolog  eredeti  forrasok  alapjan.     Budapest,  1882. 

Royal  Hungarian  Society  of  Sciences. 
Dall,  W.  H.     Notes  on  some  Floridian  land  and  fresh-water  shells,  with  a 
revision  of  the  Auriculacea  of  the  Eastern  United  States. 

The  Author. 
Dagincourt,    Dr.      Comptoir    geologique  de   Paris.      Catalogue  detaille. 
Paris,  1885. 
Annuaire  geologique  universel  et  guide  du  geologic  The  Author. 

Dalton,   J.    C.      Topographical   Anatomy  of  the  Brain.     3  vols.     Phila- 
delphia, 1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Dames,   W.  and  E.  Kayser.     Paleontologische  Abhandlungen.     2er  Bd., 
H.  4  und  5.     Berlin,  1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Dana,  James  D.     Papers  on  the  Quaternary  in  New  England,  including 
the  glacial  and.  fluvial  phenomena,  or  the  drift,  and  terraces.     8vo. 
New  Haven,  1884. 
Oriu in  of  Coral  Reefs  and  Islands.  The  Author. 
Danielli,  Jacopo  Dr;      Iperostosi   in  mandibole  Umane,    specialmente   di 
Ostiacchi  ed  anche  in  Mascellari  superiori.     Firenze,  1884. 

The  Author. 
Dawson,  George  M.     On  the  superficial   deposits   and   glaciation   of   the 
district  in  the  vicinity  of  the  Bow  and  Belly  Rivers.        The  Author. 
Department  of  Agriculture.     Reports  18T2,  1873  and  1874. 

Bureau  of  Statistics.     Report  Nos.  15-17.  The  Department. 

Delessert,  B.     Icones  selectse  plantarum.     5  vols.,  fol.     Paris,  1820-46. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Deloguc,    C.    H.     Flore   Cryptogamique   de   la  Belgique.     I,  Muscinees. 
2me  fasc.     Mousses.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Diaz,  Agustin.  A  brief  report,  on  the  organization,  objects  and  develop- 
ment of  the  works  of  the  Geographical  Exploring  Commission  in 
the  Republic  of  Mexico.     New  Orleans,  1885.  The  Author. 


146  PROCEEDINGS   OP   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Diez,  Manuel.     Estxidiar  los  alimentos  que  consume  la  clase  labradora  y 
los  braceros  en  algunas  de  las  Provincias  de  Espafia.     Madrid,  1879. 

Royal  Academy  of  Madrid. 
Doderlein,   P.     Manuale  Ittiologico  del  Mediterraneo.     Bibliografia  Ittio- 
logica,  partes  1,  2  and  3.     Palermo,  1881.       I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Dubois,  Alph.     Revue  critique  des  oiseaux  de  la  famille  des  Bucerotides. 
Revue  des  oiseaux  observes  en  Bel»ique.     1885. 

Remarques  sur  les  Alouettes  du  genre  Otocorys.  The  Author. 

Hunker,  K.  W.     Memorial,  mit  einem  Verzeiehniss  der  Arbeiten  desselben. 

A.  von  Koenen. 

Encyclopaedia  Britannica.    Oth  Ed.,  vols.  18  and  19.    I.  V.  "Williamson  Fund. 

I.mvclopaedie   der  Naturwissenschaften.     I   Abth.,    39-43  L.  ;   II  Abth., 

2fi-31  L.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Erichsou,  W.  F.     Naturgeschichte  der  Insekten  Deutschlands.    le  Abth., 

Coleoptera,  3er  Bd.  ;  2e  Abth.,  2e  Lief.  ;   6er  Bd.,  3e  Lief. 

Wilson  Fund. 

Ernst,  A.     El  Guachamaca.     Caracas,  1885.  The  Author. 

Ewald,   J.,   J.  Roth  and  W.  Dames.     Leopold  von  Buch's   gesammelte 

Schriften.     IV,  1,  2.     Berlin,  1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Fairmount  Park  Art  Association.     13th  annual  report,  1885.    The  Trustees. 

Farlow,  W.  G.     Notes  on  a  fungus  parasitic  on  species  of  Potamogeton. 

Notes  on  some  species  of  Gymnosporangium  and  Chrysoinyra  of  the 

United  States.  The  Author. 

Faxon,  Walter.     Descriptions  of  new  species  of  Cambarus,  to  which  is 

added  a  synonymical  list  of  the  known  species  of  Cambarus  and 

Astacus.     Dec,  1884.  The  Author. 

Fielde,  A.  M.      A  pronouncing   and  defining   dictionary  of  the  Swatow 

dialect,  arranged  according  to  syllables  and  tones.     4to.     Shanghai, 

1883.  The  Author. 

Fischer,  Dr.  Paul.     Manuel  de  Conchologie.     Fasc.  8  and  9.     Paris. 

The  Author. 

Forbes,  H.  O.     A  naturalist's  wanderings  in  the  Eastern  Archipelago. 

1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Forel,  August.     Vorlaufige  Mittheilung  iiber  den  Ursprung  des  Nervus 

,  acusticus. 

Etudes  niyrmecologiques  en  1884  eten  1885.  The  Author. 

Forel,  A.  &  B.  Onufrowicz.     Weitere  Mittheilung  iiber  den  Ursprung  des 
Nervus  acusticus,  etc.  The  Authors. 

Frazer,  Persifor.    Archaean  Palaeozoic  contact  near  Philadelphia,  Penna. 
Crystallization,  1885. 
Trap  dykes  in  the  Archaean  rocks  of  southeastern  Pennsylvania. 

The  Author. 
Fritsch,  Ant.     Fauna  der  Gaskohle  und  der  Kalksteine  der  Permformation 
Bohmens.     II,  1.     Prag.,  1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Garman,  S.     On  the  use  of  polynomials  as  names  in  zoology.     1884. 

The  Author. 
Garrison,  F.     The  microscopic  structure  of  iron  and  steel.     Philada. 

The  Author. 
Gaudry,  M.  A.     Sur  les  Hyenes  de  la  grotte  de  Gargas,  d^couvertes  par 
M.  Felix  Regnault. 
Nouvelle  note  sur  les  Reptiles  permiens.     1885.  The  Author. 

<Miit)i.  F.    A.andG.  vom  Hath.     Ubcr  Vanadate  und  Jodsilber  von  Lake 
Valley.  Donna  Anna  County,  New  Mexico. 
On  the  Vanadates  and   Iodyrites  from  Lake  Valley,  Sierra  County, 
New  Mexico.  The  Authors. 

Geyler,  Berm.  Theo.     Palaeontologie,  Geographie  (Bibliography). 

The  Author. 
Godman,    F.    Ducane,  anrl   Osberl   Balvin.     Biologia    Centrali  Americana 
Zoology,  Parts  1-XXXIX  ;  Botany,  Parts  I-XVIII. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  I  IT 

Goppert,    H.   R.     Der    Hausschwamm,    seine    Entwickelun?  unci    seine 

Bekiimpfung.     Breslau,  1885.  I.  jf.  Williamson  Fund. 

Goodale,    George  Lincoln.      Gray's  Botanical  Text^Book.      6fcb   edition. 

Vol.  H.     Physiological  Botany,  [.*■  I.  Y.  Williamson  Fund. 

Goonetilleke,  Wm.     Panini's  eight  books  of  grammatical  Sutras.     Edited 

with,  an  English  translation  and  commentary,  I,  1.     Bombay,  1882. 

Royal  Asiatic  Society,  Ceylon  Branch. 
Goss,  N.  S.     Catalogue  of  the  birds  of  Kansas.     1883. 

Kansas  Historical  Society. 
Gould,  John.     The  birds  of  New  Guinea,  XV-XIX. 

Supplement  to  the  Trochilidte,  or  Humming  Birds.     Part  IV. 

Wilson  Fund. 
Graff,  L.     Uber  einige  Deformitiiten  an  fossilen  Crinoiden.       Cassel,  1885. 

The  Author. 
Grandidier,  Alfred.     Histoire  physique,  naturelle  et  politique  de  Madagas- 
car.    Vol.  1.,  Atlas,   lie  Parti. ■.  8e  fasc.     Vol.  12,  T.   1,  Texte  and 
T.  2,  Atlas.     Ire  Partie.     Paris,  1879.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Grasset,  J.  P.  A.    Index  Testaceorum  viventium.    I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Gray,  Asa.     Memorial  of  George  Bentham. 

Botanical  contributions.  The  Author. 

Photograph  of  bronze  bas-relief  of.  Pi  of.  Sargent. 

Gregorio,    A.  de.     Fauna  di   S.  Giovanni  Ilarione.    Parisiano.     Fasc.  I. 

Palermo,  1880. 

Alle  gia  allieve  del  Corso  di  Scienze  fisiche,  chimiche  e  naturali  dell 

educatorio  Whitaker  durante  Tanno  1881. 
Sulla  fauna  delle  Argille  Scagliose  di  Sicilia.     Palermo,  1881. 
Coralli  Giuresi  di  Sicilia.  1882.     Parts  I,  II  and  IH. 
Coralli  Titoni,  ci  di  Sicilia.     1882. 
Fossili  dei  dintorni  di  Pachino.     Palermo,  1882. 
Una  gita  sulle  Madonie  e  sull'  Etna.    Torino,  1882. 
Su  talune  specie  e  forme  nuove  degli  Strati  terziari  di  Malta  e  del  Sud 

est  di  Sicilia  Conchiglie.     1882. 
Elenco  di  Fossili  dell'  Orizonte  a  Cardita  Jouanneti  Bast.     1883. 
Intorno  al  Pecten  pictus  Sow.  non  Goldf.     1883. 
Moderne  Nomenclature  des  Coquilles.    Palermo,  1883. 
Nuovi  Fossili  terziari.     1883. 

Nota  intorno  ad  alcune  nuove  conchiglie  mioceniche  di  Sicilia.     1883. 
Studi  su  talune  Ostriche  viventi  e  fossili.     I  and  II.     1883. 
Sulla  (  ostituzione  di  una  Societa  geologica  Internazionale.     1883. 
Sur  les  Pecten  excisus  Pusch  et  Bronn  et  Pyxidatus  Brocc.  et  Born, 

1883. 
Intorno  ad  alcuni  nomi  di  Conchiglie  Linneane,  1884. 
Intorno  al  Triton  Tritonis  L.  Sp.,  1884. 
Nuovi  decapodi  Titonici,  1884. 

Une  nouvelle  Pleurotoma  du  Miocene  de  l'ltalie,  1884. 
Una  nuova  Cyprgea  plocenica,  1884. 

Fossili  titonici  (Stromberg  Schichten)  del  Biancone  di  Rovere  di  velo. 

Nota  sul  rilevamento  della  Carta  Geologica  di  Sicilia.         The  Author. 

Griesebach,  A.     Die  Vegetation  der  Erde  nach  ihrer  klimatischen  Anord- 

nun«-,  2e  Aufl.  I  und  II  Bd.    Leipzig,  1884.    I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Grimes,  Stanley  J.     Geonomy  :  Creation  of  the  Continents  by  the  Ocean 

Currents.     Philadelphia.   188").  The  Author. 

Gruber,    Lajos.      Utmutatas    Foldmagnessegi    Helymegha     tarozasokra. 

Budapest,  1883.  Royal  Hungarian  Society  of  Sciences. 

Gruber,  Wenzel.    Beobachtungen  aus  der  menschlichen  und  ver^leichenden 

Anatomie.     V.      Berlin,  1884.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Gumbel,   Wilhelm  H.     Geologie   von   Bayern.     I.  Theil.  Grundziige   der 

Geologic     Kassel,  1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 


448  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

Gundlach,  Juan.     Contribution  a  la  Entomologia  Cubana.     Habana,  1881. 

The  Author. 
Guiberson,  S.  P.     Collection  of  North  American  Land  Shells. 

G.  W.  Tryon,  Jr. 
Guzman,  David  J.     Apuntamientos  sobre  la  Topografia  fisica  dc  la  Repub- 
lica  del  Salvador,  compreniendo  su  historia  natural,  sus  produce  iones, 
industria,  comercio  e  inmigracion,  climas,  estadistica,  etc. 

The  Autbor. 
Haeckel,  Ernest.     A  visit  to  Ceylon.     2d  Am.  Ed.,  1883. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Hanson,  H.  J.     Zoologia  Danica.     4e  H.,  1885.        I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Hartig,  Robert.     Der  achte  Hausschwamm.     (Merulius  lachrymans  Fr.) 

Berlin,  1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Hartman,  Wm.  D.     The  Seventeen-year  Locust  (Cicada  septemdecim). 

The  Author. 
Hauer,  Max.     Das  Eozoon  Canadense.     1885.     Text  and  Atlas. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Hebert,  M.     Sur  les  tremblements  de  terre  du  Midi  de  l'Espagne. 

The  Author. 
Hamlin,  Augustus  C.    Leisure  hours  among  the  gems.     Boston,  1884. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Haushofer,  R.     Franz  von  Kobel.  The  Royal  Bavarian  Academy. 

Hazslinszky,  Frigyes.      A  Magyar  Birodalom   Zuzmo — Floraja.     A  Kir. 

MagyarTeimeszettudomanyiTarsulat  Megbizasabol.  Budapest,  1884. 

Royal  Hungarian  Society  of  Sciences. 
Heilprin,  Angelo.  Town  Geology,  8vo.  Philadelphia.  1885.  The  Author. 
Henshaw,  S.     List  of  the  Coleoptera  of  America,  North  of  Mexico,  1885. 

Entomological  Section. 

Herrick,  C.  L.     Geol.  and  Nat.  Hist.  Surv.  of  Minnesota.  A  final  report  on 

the  Crustacea  of  Minnesota  included  in  the  orders  Cladocera  and 

Copepoda.     Minneapolis,  1884.  John  H.  Redfield. 

Hildebrandssou,  H.  H.,  and  Brito  Capello,  Rappart  au  Comite  meteorulo- 

gique  international.  The  Authors. 

Hilgard,  E.  W.     The  old  tertiary  of  the  Southwest,  1885.     See  Lousiana 

and  Mississippi.  The  Author. 

Hinde,  G.      Description  of  a  new  species  of  Crinoid,  with  articulating 

spines.  The  Author. 

Hirschwald,  Dr.  Julius.   Das  Mineralogische  Museum  der  Kng.  teohnischen 

Hochschule,  Berlin.     1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

His,  W.     Anatomic  menschlicher  Embryonen.    III.     Kmbryonen  bis  Ende 

des  2em  Monats.     Leipzig.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Hock,   F.      Die  nutzbaren  Pflanzen  und  Tiere  Americas  mid    der  alten 

Welt.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Hoernes,  R.  &  II.     Auinger.    Die  Gasteropoden  der  Meeres-Ablagerunuen 

der  ersten  und  zweiten  miocanen  Mediterran-Stufe  in  der  oestereieh- 

isch  ungarischen  Monarchic  Wien.     1885.      I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Hofmann,  J.     Flora  des  Isar-Gebietes  von  Woll i  atshausen  bis  Deggend* nf. 

1883.  I  Botanical  Society  of  Landshut. 
Hogard,  Henry.     Carte  croquis  et  coupes  pour  servir  a  l'explication  dc  la 

constitution  g^ologique  des  Vosges,  is4(i,  Planches.  Isaac  Lea. 

Holmbenr,  E.  L.     La  Sierra  da  C'ura-Malal  (Currumalan).     Buenos  Aires, 

1884.  The  Author. 
Hooker,  J.  D.     The  Flora  of  British  India.     Part  XII.  1885.     London, 

513-7*0.  The  Eas1  tnd.  Government. 

Hoyle,  Wm.  E.     On  Loligopsis  and  some  other  genera. 

Diagnoses  of  new  species  of  Cepholopoda  collected  during  the  cruise 

of  H.  M.  S.  Challenger.     Part  I.     The  Octopoda. 
Brief  notice  of  the  "Challenger"  Cephalopoda.  Tin    A.uthor, 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  449 

Howitt,  A.  W.     Supplementary  notes  on  the  Diabase  rocks  of  the  Buchan 

District.  Royal  Society  of  Victoria. 

Hutton,  F.  W.     Revision  of  the  marine  Taenioglossate  and  Ptenoglossate 

Mollusca  of  New  Zealand. 
Revision  of  the  recent  Lamellihranchiata  of  New  Zealand. 
The  origin  of  the  Fauna  and  Flora  of  New  Zealand.  The  Author. 

Hyrtl,  Dr.  Jos.     Das  arabische  und  hebriiische  in  der  Anatomic     Wien., 

1879.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Icones  Selectae  Hymenomycetum  nondum   delineatorum.     Vols.  II,  VII, 

VIII,  IX  and  X.  Schwedish  Academy  of  Sciences. 

India.     Memoirs  of  the  Geological  Survey  of  India.     Palaeontologia  Indica. 

Ser.  IV,  vol.  I,  pt.  4  ;     Ser.  X,  vol.  Ill,  pts.  5  and  6  ;  Ser.  XIII,  vol. 

I,  3,  4,  5  ;  Ser.  XPV,  vol.  I,  3.     Calcutta,  1884-5. 
Memoirs,  8vo,  XXI,  Nos.  1-4. 

Records.     Vol.  XVII,  part  4- Vol.  XVIII,  part  3.  The  Survey. 

Informe  que  la  Commission  para  el  estudio  de  los  medios  Mas  Adecuados 

para  la  destruccion  de  la  Langosta  Rinde  a  la  Secretaria  de  Fomento. 

Mexico,  1883.  Secretary  of  Works,  Mexico. 

Israels,    A.   H.   and  C.    E.    Daniels.      De    Verdiensten  der  Hollandsche 

geleerden  ten  opzichte  van  Harvey's  Leer  von  den  bloedsomloop,  etc. 

Utrecht,  1883. 
Jannettaz,  Ed.     Les  Roches,  description  et  analyse  au  microscope.     Paris, 

1884.  The  Author. 
Jardine,  Sir  William.  The  Ichnology  of  Annandale.  1851.  Isaac  Lea. 
Jeffreys,  J.  Gwyn.     On  the  concordance  of  the  Mollusca  inhabiting  both 

sides  of  the  North  Atlantic  and  the  intermediate  seas.  The  Author. 
Katter,  Fried.     Monographic  der  europaischen  Arten  der  Gattung  Meloe 

mit  besonderer  Beriicksichtigung  der  Biologie  dieser  Insecten.     I. 

Theil.  Beschreibung  der  Arten.  II.  Theil.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Keyserling,    E.   Graf.     Die    Spinnen  Amerikas.     Theridiidae.     1.  Halfte. 

2er.  Bd.     Numberg,  1884.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Kinkelin,  Dr.     Sande  und  Sandsteine  im  Mainzer  Tertiarbecken. 

The  Author. 
Kirchner,  O.  and  Dr.  F.  Blochmann.     Die  microscopische  Pflanzen-  und 

Thierwelt  des  Siisswassers,  bevorwortet  vom  Prof.  Dr.  O.  Biitschli. 

ler    Theil.      Die    microscopische    Pflanzenwelt    des    Siisswassers. 

Braunschweig,  1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Kjerulf,  Th.     Grundfjelds  profilet  ved  Mjosens  sydende.  The  Author. 

Kobelt,    W.      Iconographia  der    schalentragenden  europaischen  Meeres- 

conchylien.     Heft  3.     Cassel,  1883.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Kosutany,  Thos.      Chemisch-physiologische  Untersuchung  der  characte- 

ristischeren  Tabaksorten  Ungarns.     1882. 

Royal  Hungarian  Society  of  Science. 
Krantz,  Dr.  A.     Verzeichniss  der  vorriithigen  Silur-Petrefacten. 

The  Author. 
Krohn,  Aug.  Dr.     Beitrage  zur  Entwickelungsgeschichte  der  Pteropoden 

und  Heteropoden.     Leipzig,  1860.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Kunz,  Geo.  F.     Tiffany  and  Company's  Collection  of  rough   diamonds. 

1885.  The  Author. 
Kupffer,  Carl.     Gedachtnisse  auf  Theodor  L.  W.  von  Bischoff.     Miinchen, 

1884.  The  Royal  Bav.  Acad. 

Lacoe,  R.  D.  Catalogue  of  the  paleozoic  fossil  plants  of  North  America. 

1884.  The  Author. 
Lawrence,  G.  N.      Descriptions  of  supposed  new  species  of  birds  of  the 

families  Tyrannidse,  Cypselidse  and  Columbidse.  The  Author. 

Lea  Bros.  &  Co.    One  hundred  years  of  publishing,  1785-1885.     Philada., 

1885.  The  Publishers. 
Lehmann,  Alfred.     Forsog  pad  en  Forklaring  af  Synsvinklens  Indflydelse 

paa  Opfattelsen  af  Lys  og  Farve  ved  directe  Syn.     Kobenhavn,  1885. 
30  The  Author. 


450  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Lehman,  J.     TJntersuchungen  iiber  die  Entstehung  der  altkrystallinischen 

Schiefergesteine.  The  Author. 

Leighton,  Rev.  Win.  A.    The  Lichen-Flora  of  Great  Britain,  Ireland  and 

the  Channel  Islands.     3d  Ed.     Shrewsbury,  1879.        W.P.Collins. 
Leitgeb,  Hubert.     Reizbarkeit  und  Empfindung  im  Pflanzenreiche.    Graz, 

1884.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Lereboullet,  A.     Notice  sur  le  Musee  d'llistoire  natuielle  de  Strasbourg 

1838  et  1851.  Natural  History  Soc.  of  Strasburg. 

Leuckart,  Friedrich  Sigismund.     Zoologische  Bruchstiicke.     H.  1,  2,  3. 

HelmstJidt,  1820  and  Stuttgart,  1841.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Lewis,  H.  C.     Marginal  Karnes. 

Great  Trap  Dyke  across  Southeastern  Pennsylvania. 

Field  Lectures  in  Geology.     Newspaper  slips  from  Public  Ledger, 

April— June,  1884. 
Notes  on  the  Progress  of  Mineralogy  in  1884.  The  Author. 

Leydijr.     Zelle  und  Gewebe.     Bonn,  1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Lighthouse  Board.     Annual  report  to  the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury,  for 

the  fiscal  year  ended  June  30,  1884.  The  Board. 

Lindley,  J.    Digitalium  Monographia  sistens  Historiam  Botanicam  Generis 

tabulis  omnium  specierum.     Londini,  1821.  In  Exchange. 

Lindsley,  D.  P.     The  Manual  of  Takigrafy.  Plainfield,  N.  J.,  4th  Edit., 

1885. 
The  young  writer's  primer.  The  Author. 

Linnsea,   Naturhistorisches  Institut,    Frankfurt  a.   M.     Land-Conchylien 

aus  dem  palaearctischen  Faunengebiet.   No.  59.    1885.   The  Director. 
List  of  the  Fossils  of  the  Upper  Silurian  formation  of  Gotland. 
Locard,  A.     Contributions  a  la  Faune  Malacologique  Franchise.    Vni  et 

IX.    Lyon,  1884.  The  Author. 

Lorenz,  L.     Bestemmelse  af  Kviksolvsojlers  clektriske  Ledningsmodstande 

i  absolut  elektromagnetisk  Maal.  The  Author. 

Louisiana.    Preliminary  report  of  a  geological  reconnoissance  of,  1869.    By 

Prof.  Eugene  W.  Hilgard. 
Supplementary  and  final  report  of  a  geological  reconnoissance  of  the 

State  of  Louisiana,  May  and  June,  1869.     By  Eugene  W.  Hilgard. 
Summary  of  results  of  a  late  geological  reconnoissance  of  Louisiana. 

By  Eugene  W.  Hilgard.  The  Author. 

Lyman,   Benj.    Smith.     A  review  of  the  Atlas  of   the  Western  Middle 

Anthracite  Field,  Second  Geological  Survey  of  Pennsylvania,  Anthra- 
cite District.  The  Author. 
McAdie,  A.     The  Aurora  in  its  relations  to  Meteorology.     Washington 

City,  1885.  War  Dept. 

McCook,  Henry  C.     Tenants  of  an  old  farm.     New  York,  1885. 

Note  on  the  intelligence  of  a  cricket  parasitised  by  a  Gordius.     A  new 

parasitic  insect  upon  spider  eggs. 
Hibernation  and  winter  habits  of  spiders.  The  Author. 

Macgillivray,  P.  H.     Note  on  the  reproduction  of  the  Ornithorhyiuhus. 

1884. 
Description  of  new  or  little-known  Polyzoa.     Part  VIII.     1884. 

Royal  Society  of  Victoria. 
Macoun,  J.     Catalogue  of  Canadian  plants.     Part  II,  Gamopetale.     Mon- 

treal,  1884.  The  Geological  Survey. 

Marshal,  Wm.       Die   Entwickelungsgeschichte  der   Siisswasser-Polypen. 

1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Martini  und  Chemnitz.     Systematisches  Conchylien-Cabinet.     :W2e-334e 

Lief.     Number^,  1884.  \\  ilson  Fund. 

Marsh,  O.  C.     U.  S.  Geological  Surv.,  Vol.  X.     Dinocerata,  a  Monograph 

of  an  extinct  order  of  gigantic  Mammals.  The  Author. 

Lithographic  plate  of  Tinoceras  ingens  Marsh.  Prof.  0.  C.  Marsh. 


1885.]  NATURAL  8CIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  451 

Masters,  Maxwell  T.     Plant  life  on  the  farm.     New  York,  1885. 

Thos.  Meehan. 

Maxwell,  S.  B.     Biennial  report  of  the  State  Librarian  to  the  Governor  of 

the  State  of  Iowa,  July  1,  1885.     Des  Moines,  1885.        The  Author. 

Mercantile  Library  Association  of  the  City  of  New  York.     Sixty-fourth 

annual  report  of  the  board  of  directors  of  the.     1885.     The  Trustees. 

Mercantile  Library  Association,  San  Francisco.     32d  annual  report,  1884. 

The  Trustees. 
Meunier,  Stanislas.     Traite  de  Paleontologie  pratique.     Paris,  1884. 

The  Author. 
Mexico  viewed  through  the  course  of  ages.     By  a  Commission  of  distin- 
guished Mexican  authors  under  the  direction  of  Gen.  Don  Vincente 
Riva  Palacio,  translated  by  Gen.  F.  F.  Millen.    "Vol.  I.     New  York, 
1885.  The  Publishers. 

Meyer,  Otto.     Successional  relations  of   the  species  in  the  French  old 
Tertiary. 
The  genealogy  and  the  age  of  the  species  in  the  Southern  old  Tertiary. 
Parts  I  and  II.  The  Author. 

Miall,  L.  C.     Description  of  the  remains  of  Megalichthys  in  the  Leeds 
Museum.     Leeds,  1885.  The  Author. 

Michigan.     Geological  Survey  of.    Vols.  1-4.    1869-76.    Atlas  of  24  maps. 
The  State  of  Michigan;  embracing  sketches  of  its  history,  position, 

resources  and  industries.     By  S.  B.  McCracken.     1876. 
Michigan  :  Its  resources.     3d  Ed.,  1883. 

Annual  report  of  the  Commissioner  of  Mineral  Statistics  for  1880,  1881, 

1882  and  1884.  The  Geological  Survey. 

Mihalkovics,  Victor  von.      Entwickelungsgeschichte  des  Gehirns.     4to. 

Leipzig,  1877.  I.  V.  "Williamson  Fund. 

Minnesota.     Report  on  geology  and  plan   for  a  geological  survey  of  the 

State  of  Minnesota.     Chas.  L.  Anderson  and  Thos.  Clarke.     1861. 

A  report  of  explorations  in  the  mineral  regions  of  Minnesota  during 

the  years  1848,  1859  and  1864,  by  Col.  Charles  Whittlesey.     1866. 

Geology  of  Southern  Minnesota.    By  W.  D.  Hurlbut.    Rochester,  1870. 

Report  of  Prof.  N.  H.  Winchell  concerning  the  Salt  Spring  Lands. 

1874.  Historical  Society  of  Minnesota. 

Minnesota,  the  geology  of.     Vol.  I.  The  Survey. 

Winchell's  Geological  and  Natural   History  Survey  of   Minnesota. 

1st,  2d,  10th,  11th  and  12th  annual  reports.  The  Author. 

Mississippi.     Report  on  the  geological  and  agricultural  survey  of  the  State 

of  Mississippi.     1858.  The  Author. 

Moleschott.  Jac     Untersuchungen  zur  Naturlehre  des  Menschen  und  der 

Thiere.     XIII.     Giessen,  1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Monterosato,  Marchesi   di.     Nomenclature  generica  e  specifica  di  alcune 

Conchiglie  Mediterranee.  The  Author. 

Moore,  Thos.,  and  George  Jackman.     The  Clematis  as  a  garden  flower. 

London,  1872.  In  Exchange. 

Moris,  J.  H.     Flora  Sardoa.     Vols.  1  and  2,  and  Atlas.     Taurini,  1837- 

1846.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Morriel  Park.     Signal  Service  notes  Nos.  17  and  18.    A  first  report  upon 

the    observations    of   atmospheric    electricity    at    Baltimore,    Md. 

Washington,  1884.  War  Department. 

Mouglot.  Antoine.     Essai  d'une  flore  du  nouveau  gres  rouge  des  Vosges. 

Epinal,  1852.  Isaac  Lea. 

Mueller,    Ferd.   von.      Eucalyptographia.      A    descriptive    Atlas  of  the 

Eucalyptus  of  Australia  and  the  adjoining  islands.     10th  Decade. 

Melbourne,  1884. 

Systematic  census  of  Australian  plants.     2d  annual  supplement  (for 

1884). 


452  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

Index  perfectus  ad  Caroli  Linnaei  species  plantarum,  nempe  earuni 
primam  ed.  collatore  Ferdinando  de  Mueller.     Melbourne,  1880. 

The  Author. 

Museum  d'histoire  naturelle.      Nouvelle  Galerie  de  Paleontologie.     Paris, 

1885.  The  Museum. 

Niigeli,  C.  v.,  and  A.  Peter.     Die  Hieracien  Mittel-Europas.     Miinehen, 

1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Naumann,  E.    Ueber  den  Bau  uud  die  Entstehung  der  iapanischen  Inseln. 

Berlin,  1885.  I.  V".  Williamson  Fund. 

Nces  von  Esenbeck.     Genera  plantarum  florae  Germanicae.     2  vols.,  8vo. 

Bonne,  1835.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Nevil,  Geoffrey.     Hand  List  of  Mollusca  in  the  Indian  Museum,  Calcutta. 

Part  II,  Gastropoda.     Calcutta,  1884.  The  Trustees. 

Newberry,  Cosmo.    The  Examination  of  waters.    Royal  Society  i  >f  Victoria. 

Newberry,  J.  S.     The  Deposition  of  Ores,  1884. 

The  eroding  power  of  Ice.     1885. 

Descriptions  of  some  peculiar  screw-like  fossils  from  the  Chemung 

rocks.  The  Author. 

New  Jersey,  Geological  Survey  of.    Reports  for  1863, 1865  and  1884.    Atlas 

of  New  Jersey:    Sheets  2,    Southwestern  Highlands;    3,    Central 

Highlands  ;  4,  Northeastern  Highlands  ;  6,  Central  Red  Sandstone  ; 

7,  Northeastern  Red  Sandstone  ;  16,  Egg  Harbor. 

Report  of  the  New  Jersey  Commissioners  on  the  Centennial  Exhibition. 

1877.  Geo.  H.  Cook. 

New  York.    Report  of  the  Forestry  Commission,  January  23,  1885. 

The  Commission. 

Nordenskiold  A.      Studien  und    Forschungen    veranlaszt    durch    meine 

Reisen  im  hohen  Norden.     Leipzig,  1885. 

Vega-Expeditionens    Vetenskapliga    Iakttagclser.       Bandet    Andra. 

Stockholm,  1883.  T.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Norske  Nordhavs-Expedition,  1876-1878.     XI-XIII,  Zoologi.    Christiania, 

1884-85.  The  Norwegian  Government. 

Norwegische  Commission   der  europiiischen  Gradmessung.      Publication 

der  Geodatische  Arbeiten.     Heft  IV.     Netz  and  Christiana,  1885. 

Nova  Scotia.     Report  of  the  Department  of  Mines  for  the  year  1884. 

Halifax,  1885.  The  Department. 

Obst-  und  Geholzbaumschule  des   Ritterguts    Zoschen    bei    Mersehurg. 

Haupt-Catalog.     Engros-Catalog,  1885.       -  The  Publishers. 

Osborn,  Henry  L.     The  molluscan  body-cavity.  The  Author 

Osservazioni  meteorologische  fatte  al  R.  Osservatorio  del  Campidoglio  dal 

Luglio  al  Dicembre  1884,  Roma,  1885.  The  Observatory. 

Owen,  Sir  Richard.    A  history  of  British  fossil  reptiles.    Vols.  1-4,  text  and 

plates.     London,  1849-84.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Packard,  A.  S.     On  the  Embryology  of  Limulus  polvphemus,  III. 

The  Author. 
Paget,  James.     Descrtptive  Catalogue  of  the  pathological  specimens  con- 
tained in  the  Museum  of  the  Royal  College  of  Surgeons  of  England. 
2d  Ed.,  vol.  III.     London,  1884.  The  College. 

Palseontographica.    31.  Bd.,  3-6  Lief.     Supplement  II.,  5e  Abth.  Atlas  T. 
I-V.  Wilson  Fund. 

Pal6ontologie  Franchise.  Ire  S6r.  An.  Inv.  Terrain  Jurassique,  Livr.  71-77. 

Wilson  FuncL 
Palseontological  Society.     Publications,  Vol.  X\X\  III,  1884. 

Wilson  Fund. 
Palmer,   Julius  A.,  Jr.     Mushrooms   of  America,    edible   and  poisonous. 
1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Parker,  W.  Kitchen.     On  Mammalian  Descent.     London,  1885. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 


1885.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  453 

Peacock,  R.  A.     Second  Supplement  to  Mr.  R.  A.  Peacock's  publication, 
Saturated  Steam  the  Motive  Power  in  Volcanoes  and  Earthquakes. 

The  Author. 

Penna,  Jose.     Memoria  del  Circulo  Medico  Argentino,  correspondente  al 

periodo  de  1883  et  1885  presentada  par  su  Presidente  Samuel  Gache 

y  Discurso  del  Doctor  Jose  Penna.     Buenos  Aires,  1885. 

Pennsylvania.     Second  Geological  Survey.     Reports  of  Proceedings,  A2, 

F2,  H7,  K>,  P,  Ps,  R2,  T*,  X,  Z.     Grand  Atlas  I,  1 ;  II,  1.     1884. 

The  Survey. 
Report  of  Board  of  Commissioners,  January  1,  1885. 

Chas.  A.  Ashburner. 

Perrier,  Edmund.     Les  Colonies  animales  et  la  formation  des  Organismes. 

Paris,  1881.  I.  V.  "Williamson  Fund. 

Piaggia,  Carlo.     Dell  'arrivo  fra  i  Niam-Niam  e  del  Soggiorno  sul  Lago 

Tzana  in  Abissinia.     Lucca,  1877.  The  Lucca  Academy. 

Picatoste,  Felipe.     Centenaria  de  Calderon,  Programa,  Memoria. 

Royal  Academy  of  Madrid. 

Platania,  C.      Enumeratio  Molluscorum  extraniarinorum  in  Sicilia.     Aci- 

Regali,  1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Plaut,   H.     Beitrag  zur  systematischen  Stellung  des  Soorpilzes  in    der 

Botanik,  1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Pollinius,  Cyrus.     Flora  Veronensis  quani  in  prodromum  flora?  Italica  Sep- 

tentrionalis  exhibit.     3  vols.     Verona?,  1822-24. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Primetz.     Jours  de  Solitude,  Ed.  Posthume. 

Royal  Belgian  Academy  of  Sciences. 

Prime,   C.  L.     The  summary  of  a  meteorological  journal,  kept  by  the 

author  at  his  observatory,  Sussex.  The  Author. 

Public  Library  of  Cincinnati.     Finding  list  of  books.    Cincinnati,  1882-84. 

The  Trustees. 
Public  Museum  of  the  City  of  Milwaukee.     2d  annual  report.     October  1, 
1884.  The  Trustees. 

Putnam,  Chas.  A.     Elephant  pipes  in  the  Museum  of  Natural  Sciences  of 
Davenport,  Iowa.     Davenport,  1885.  The  Author. 

Putnam,  F.  W.     The  first  notice  of  the  Pine  Grove  or  Forest  River  Shell- 
heap. 
Remarks  upon  chipped-stone  implements.     Salem,  1885.    The  Author. 
Quenstedt,  Fr.  Aug.     Die  Ammoniten  des  schwabischen  Jura.     Text  and 
Atlas.     H.  4-7.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Raffels  Museum.     Catalogue  of  exhibits.     Singapore,  1884. 

Acting  Curator. 

Randolph,  N.  A.     Notes  from  Physiological  Laboratory  of  the  University 

of  Pennsylvania.     Philadelphia,  1885.  The  Author. 

Rath,  G.  vom.     Mineralogische  Mittheilungen.     F.  22  Quarze  aus  Burke 

County,  Nord  Carolina. 

Vorti  age  und  Mittheilungen,  1885. 

Mineralogische  Notizen.     Bonn,  1884.  The  Author. 

Reichenbach,  L.     Ieones  Florre  Germanicae  et  Helveticse.     I,  1850 — XXII, 
D.  22.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Renault,  M.  B.     Cours  de  Botanique  fossile.     4me  Annee. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund, 
Renevier,  M.  E.     Les  Facies  Geologiques,  1884.  The  Author. 

Reports  of  the  examiners  of  Section  VI.     Carbons  for  Arc-Lamps.     Sup- 
plement to  the  Journal  of  the  Franklin  Institute,  June  1885.     Phila- 
delphia, 1885.  The  Managers. 
Rice,  Franklin  P.     An  account  of  the  discovery  of  a  Mastodon's  remains  in 
Northborough,  Worcester  Coimty,  Mass.  The  Author. 
Richthofen,  Freiherr  von.  Atlas  von  China,  Orographische  und  geologische 


454  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Karten,  zu  des  Verfassers  Werk  China.  I.  Abtheilung,  das  nordliche 

China.     Berlin,  1885.     Schutz-Mappe.  I.  V.  "Williamson  Fund. 

Robinski,  Severin.     Zur  Kenntniss  der  Augcnlinse  und  deren  Untersuch- 

ungsmethoden.     Berlin,  1883.  The  Author. 

Rogers,  Wm.  Barton.     A  reprint  of  annual  reports  and  other  papers  on  the 

Geology  of  the  Virginias.     New  York,  1884.  The  Editor. 

Rohon,    J.  V.      Zur  Anatomie  der  Hirnwindungen    bei    den  Primaten. 

Mfmehen,  1884.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Romanes,  G.  J      Mental  evolution  in  animals.     New  York,  1884. 

Jelly-fish,  star-fish  and  sea  urchins,  1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Russ,  Dr.  Karl.     Die  fremdlandischen  Stubenvogel.     4er  Bd.,  5e  und  6e 

Lief.     Magdeburg,  1884.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Russia.     Bulletin  du  Comite  Geologique,  Nos.  6-8,  1884. 
Memoirs  du  Comit6  Geologique.    I.  3— II.  1,  1884. 
Allgemeine  geologische  Karte  von  Russland,  Blatt  71,  with  four  sheets 

of  maps.  Geological  Survey  of  Russia. 

Ryder,  John  A.     The  development  of  the  rays  of  osseous  fishes. 

Embryology  (Notes  from  Am.  Naturalist,  April  and  May,  1885.) 

On  the  development  of  viviparous  osseous  fishes  and  of  the  Atlantic 

salmon. 
Ryder,  J.  A.,  and  M.  Paysegua.     Papers  on  the  development  and  greening 

of  the  oyster.     "Washington,  1884.  The  Authors. 

Saccardo,  P.  A.     Svlloge  Fungorum  omnium  hucusque  cognitorum  diges- 

sit,  Vol.  Ill/  Patavii,  1884.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Sachs,  Julius.     Text-book  of  Botany,  morphological  and  physiological.    '2d 

Ed.     Oxford,  1882.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Saint-Leger,  Dr.     Recherches  historiques  sur  les  mots  plantes  males  et 

plantes  femelles,  1884.  The  Author. 

St.  Louis  Mercantile  Library  Association.     Annual  report,  1884. 

The  Trustees. 
Sampson,  F.  A.     The  Shells  of  Pettis  County,  Missouri.  The  Author. 

Saporta,  Marquis  de.     Les  Organismes  problematiques  des  anciennes  Mers. 

Paris,  1884.  The  Author. 

Sargent,  Chas.  S.     Tenth  census  of  the  United  States,  1880,  vol.  IX.     Re- 
port on  the  forests  of  North  America.     4to,  with  atlas  of  sixteen 

maps,  folio.     Washington,  1885.  Thos.  Meehan. 

American  museum  of  natural  history.     Jessup  collection.     The  woods 

of  the  U.  8.     New  York,  1885.  The  Author. 

Sars,  G.  O.     Den  Norske  Nordhaus  Expedition,  1876-1878.     XIV,  Zoologi. 

Crustacea.     I.  Norwegian  Government. 

Saussure,  H.  de.     Prodromus  Oedipodiorum  insectorum  exordine  Orthop- 

terorum.     Geneve,  1884.  The  Author. 

Schleich,    Dr.   G.     Der  Augengrund   des  Kaninchens  und  des  Troches. 

Tubingen,  1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Schmidt,  Adolf.     Atlas  der  Diatomaceen-Kunde.     Heft  21,  22. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Schneider,  Anton.     Zoologische  Beitrage.     I,  3,  1885. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Schomburgh,  R.     Report  on  the  progress  and  condition  of  the  Botanic 

Garden  and  Government  Plantations  during  the  vear  1884. .  Adelaide, 

1885.  The  Direction. 

Schotten,  Heinrich.     Deber  einige  bemerkungswerte  Gattungen  der  Hypo- 

cykloiden.     Inaug.  Dissert.     Marburg,  1883.  The  Author. 

Schube,    Theodor.     Beitrage    zur    Kenntniss    der    Anatomie    blattarmer 

Pflanzen  mit  besonderer  Berucksichtigung  der  Genisteen.     Breslau, 

1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Schulze,    F.     Uber  den   Bau  und  die  Entwickelung  von    Cordylophora 

lacustris  ( Allman) .     Leipzig,  1871.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF  PHILADELPHIA.  455 

Schultze,  Max.     Das  Protoplasma  der  Rhizopoden  und  der  Pflanzenzellen. 
Leipzig,  1863.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Scudder,  Samuel  H.     Dictyoneura  and  the  allied  insects  of  the  Carbonifer- 
ous epoch. 
Description  of  an  articulate  of  doubtful  relationship  from  the  Tertiary- 
beds  of  Florissant,  Colorado.  The  Author. 
Secretary  of   the  Navy.     Annual  report    for   the    year  1884.     Vol.   EI. 
Washington,  1884.                                                      Navy  Department. 
Seebohm,  Henry.     A  history  of  British  birds.     Part  V.     London,  1885. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Selwyn,  Alfred  R.  C,   and  G.  M.  Dawson.     Descriptive  sketch  of  the 

physical    geography   and    geology   of   the    Dominion   of    Canada. 

Montreal,  1884.  Geological  Survey. 

Semper,  C.     Reisen  im  Archipel  der  Philippinen.     2er  Theil.     Wissen- 

schaftliche  Resultate.     2er  Bd.,  XV  H.     Wiesbaden,  1884. 

Wilson  Fund. 
Animal  life  as  affected  by  the  natural  conditions  of  existence.     New 
York,  1881.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Sharp,  Benjamin.     Homologies  of  the  Vertebrate  Crystalline  Lens. 

The  Author. 
Shepherd,  Francis  J.     The  significance  of  human  anomalies. 

Clinical  lecture   on  the  antiseptic  treatment  of  wounds  by  dry  and 
infrequent  dressing.  The  Author. 

Shufeldt,  R.  W.     Description  of  Hesperomys  Truei.  The  Author. 

Siebold,  Fr.  de.     Flora  Japonka.     Lugduni  Batavorum,  1835. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Smellie,  Thomas  D.    Ocean  and  air  currents.   Glasgow,  1885.   The  Author. 
Smith,  J.  Lawrence.     Original  researches  in  Mineralogy  and  Chemistry. 
Edited  by  J.  B.  Marvin,  B.  S.     Louisville,  Ky.,  1884. 

Mrs.  J.  Lawrence  Smith. 

Smith,  Lloyd  B.     Symbolism  aud  Science.     1885.  The  Author. 

South  African  Museum.     Report  of  Trustees  of  the,  for  the  year  ending 

31  Dec,  1884.  The  Trustees. 

Smithsonian  Institution.     Annual  report  for  the  year  1883. 

Smithsonian  contributions  to  knowledge.     Vols.   XIV,   XV.     Wash- 
ington, 1885.  The  Trustees. 
Standard  Natural  History.     Parts  XXIX-LII.     Boston. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Statistiche  Mittheilungen  iiber  den  Civilstand  der  Stadt  Frankfurt  a.  M. 

18S5.  The  Statistical  Bureau. 

Steiner,  J.     Untersuchungen  iiber  die  Physiologie  des  Froschhirns.     1885. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Stevenson,  John  J.     Report  upon  the  geological  examinations  in  southern 

Colorado  and  northern  New  Mexico,  during  the  years  1878  and  1879. 

The  Author. 
Stirling,  Jas.     On  some  evidences  of  glaciation  in  the  Australian  Alps. 
Notes  on  the  meteorology  of  the  Australian  Alps.     1885. 

Royal  Society  of  Victoria. 

Strasburger,    Eduard.      Neue    Untersuchungen   iiber  den   Befruchtungs- 

vorgang  bei  den  Phanerogamen  als  Grundlage  fur  eine  Theorie  der 

Zeugung.     Jena,  1881.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Suess.    Das  Antlitz  der  Erde.  2e  Abth.  Prag,  1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Surgeon  General's  Office,   U.   S.   A.    Index  Catalogue  of  the  Library. 

Authors  and  subject,  vol.  4.  War  Department. 

Sweden.     Sveriges  Geologiska  Undersokning.     8vo  ser.,  A  a,  No.  88,  91 ; 

Ab.,  10.     B  a,  No.  4  ;  C,  No.  61,  62.     4to  ser.,  C,  63,  64  and  66. 

Six  Maps  in  rolled  sheets.  The  Survey. 

Taczanowki,    Ladislao.      Ornithologie  du  Perou.     Tome  2me.     Rennes, 

1884.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 


456  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1885. 

Testut,   L.      Les  anomalies  musculaires  chez    1'homme    expliquees    par 
l'anatomie  comparee.     Paris,  1884.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Thomson,  Joh.  H.     On  a  new  land-shell  from  the  New  Hebrides. 

The  Author. 
Thomson,  Jos.     Through  Masai  Land.     4th  ed.     1885. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Trembley,  J.   B.     Meteorology  of  Oakland,  California,   for  1882-83  and 
1883-84. 
The  Santa  Anna  Valley  of  Southern  California.     Santa  Anna,  1885. 

The  Author. 
Tryon,  Geo.  W.,  Jr.     Manual  of  Conchology;  Structural  and  Systematic. 
Parts  XXV-XXVIII.     Second  Series,  Pulmonata,  Parts.  I-IV. 

The  Author. 
Turkestan.     Materialien  zur  Geologie  von  Turkestan.     I  Lief. 

Geological  Survey  of  Russia. 
United  States  Civil  Service  Commission.     1st  annual  report,  2d  edition. 
2d  annual  report,  1884-85.  The  Commission. 

United  States  Commission  of  Fish  and   Fisheries.     Commissioners'  Re- 
port, 1882.     Washington,  1884.  Dept.  of  the  Interior. 
United  States  Coast  and  Geodetic  Survey.     Report  of  the  Superintendent, 
showing  the  progress  of  the  work  during  the  fiscal  year  ending  June, 
1883.     Washington,  1884.                                      Treasury  Department. 
United  States  Entomological  Commission.     3d  report,  1883.  • 

Department  of  Agriculture. 
United  States  Geographical  and  Geological  Survey  of  the  Rocky  Mountain 
Region.     Contributions  to  North  American  Ethnology,  V.     Wash- 
ington, 1882.  Department  of  the  Interior. 
United  States  Geological  Survey  of  the  Territories  (F.  V.  Hayden).     Re- 
port, vol.  8. — Lesquereaux's  Contributions  to  the  fossil  flora  of  the 
Western  Territories.     Part  III. — Vol.  3  :  Cope's  Vertebrata  of  the 
Tertiary  Formation.     Book  I. 
United  States  Geological  Survey.     Bulletin,  Nos.  2-6,  11. 
Monographs,  Iu-VIII. 

Annual  Reports,  3d  and  4th.  Department  of  the  Interior. 

University  of   Pennsylvania.      Catalogue   and    announcement,    1884-85. 
Department  of  Biology,  1884-85.  The  University. 

Vandeikindcre,    L.       L'Universite    de    Bruxelles.      Notice     Historique. 
Bruxelles,  1884.  The  University. 

Vasey,  G.     A  descriptive  Catalogue  of  the  Grasses  of  the  United  States, 
including  especially  the  grass  collection  at  the  New  Orleans  Expo- 
sition.    Washington,  1885.  The  Author. 
Vayssiere,  M.  A.     Sur  l'organisation  de  la  Truncatella.  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr. 
Verrill,  A.  E.      Second   and   Third   Catalogue   of    Mollusca,  with   plates 
XXVIII-XXXII,  and  XLII-XLIV.     New  Haven,  1884,  1885. 

The  Author. 

Victoria.     Gold  Fields  of  Victoria.     Reports  of  the  Mining  Registrars  for 

the  quarter  ended  30th  Sept.,  1884.     Melbourne.  Tl u  Author. 

Villa,  Rivista  Geologica  dei  Terieni  della  Brianza.  The  Author. 

Vogt,  Carl,  and  Emile  Yung.     TraitG  d'Anatomie  comparee  pratique.     Ge 

et  7e  Livr.     Paris.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Von  der  Plants,  Dr.  J.  D.     De  Plaatsbepalinj;  de  aroinatsche   Lichameu. 

Utrecht,  1883.       Provincial  Society  of  Arts  and  Sciences  of  Utrecht. 

Wahl.  W.  H.     Annual  'Summary  of  Engineering  and  Industrial  Progress. 

1884.  The  Author. 

Walsh,  Joseph  M.     A  cup  of  tea,  containing  a  history  of  the  Tea  Plant. 

1884.  The  Author. 

Ward,  Henry  A.  ( iatalogue  ofspecimen  of  mollusca  for  sale  by.  The  Author. 


1885.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  457 

Watson,  Rev.  R.  Boog.  On  the  Cerithiopsides  from  the  eastern  side  of  the 
North  Atlantic,  with  three  new  species  from  Madeira.  London. 
1885.  The  Author. 

Weismann,  Aug.  Ueber  den  Einfluss  der  Isolirung  auf  die  Artbildung. 
Leipzig,  1872.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Waite,  Chief-Justice,  and  Noah  Porter.  Addresses  at  the  unveiling  of  the 
Joseph  Henry  Statue  at  Washington,  D.  C,  April  19,  1883.  Wash- 
ington, 1884.  Smithsonian  Inst. 

Wells,  David  A.     A  primer  of  tariff  reform.     1885.  Cobden  Club. 

Westbrook,  R.  B.     In  Memoriam  William  Wagner.     March  7,  1885. 

The  Author. 

White,  Chas.  A.  A  review  of  the  fossil  Ostraeidae  of  North  America,  and 
a  comparison  of  the  fossil  with  the  living  forms,  by  Chas.  A.  White, 
with  appendices  by  Prof.  Angelo  Heilprin  and  Mr.  John  A.  Ryder. 
Washington,  1884.  The  Author. 

Wiedersheim,  Robert.  Grundriss  der  vergleichenden  Anatomie  der 
Wirbelthiere.     Jena,  1884.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Winchell,  N.  H.  The  economical  geology  of  the  region  of  Cheboygan  and 
Old  Mackinac,  in  the  Counties  of  Presque  Isle,  Cheboygan  and 
Emmet,  State  of  Michigan.  The  Author. 

Wigand,  A.     Botanische  Hefte.     les  H.,  1885.        I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Woodward,  B.  B.     The  young  collector's  handbook  of  Shells. 

•  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Women's  Medical  College  of  Pennsylvania.  36th  annual  announcement, 
May,  1885.  The  Trustees. 

Worth,  S.  G.  Third  biennial  report  of  the  Superintendent  of  Fish  and 
Fisheries  of  the  State  of  North  Carolina,  for  the  years  1883-84. 

The  Author. 

Wright,  Carroll  D.  History  of  wages  and  prices  in  Massachusetts,  1752- 
1833,  including  comparative  wages  and  prices  in  Massachusetts  and 
Great  Britain,  1860-1883.     Boston,  1885.  The  Author. 

Wroblewski,  M.  S.  de.     Comment  Fair  a  ete  liquefie.     Paris,  1885. 

The  Author. 

Yale  College.     Catalogue  of  the  officers  and  students  of,  1884-85.     New 
Haven,  1884. 
Yale  College  in  1885.     Some  statements  respecting  the  late  progress 

and  present  condition.     June,  1885. 
Obituary  record  of  graduates  of  Yale  College  during  the  Academical 
year  ending  1885.  The  Trustees. 

Yarrel,  Wm.  A  history  of  British  birds.  4th  Ed.  Parts  XXVI-XXIX. 
London.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Young  Men's  Library  at  Buffalo.  Finding-list  of  history,  politics,  biog- 
raphy, geography,  travel  and  anthropology.     1885.      The  Librarian. 

Zacharias,  Otto.  Ueber  geloste  und  ungeloste  Probleme  der  Naturfor- 
schung.     Leipzig,  1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Zimmermann,  O.  E.  R.  Atlas  der  Pfianzenkrankheiten  welche  durch 
Pilze  hervorgerufen  werden.     Heft  I.     Halle  a.  S.,  1885. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Zittel,  Karl  A.     Handbuch  der  Pakeontologie.     I  Bd.,  II  Abth.,  IV  Lief. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Zoologische  Station  zu  Neapel.     Fauna  et  Flora  des  Golfes  von  Neapel. 
X,  XI  and  XII  Monographic. 
Drittes  Preisverzeichhiss.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Zopf,  W.  D.  Zur  Morphologie  und  Biologie  der  niederen  Pilzthiere 
(Monadinen).     Leipzig,  1885.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 


458  proceedings  of  the  academy  of  [1885. 

Journals  and  Periodicals. 

Adelaide.     Royal  Society.     Transactions.  VI.  VII.  The  Society. 

Philosophical  Society.     Transactions,  Proceedings  and  Report,  1877- 
78.  The  Society. 

Albany.     New  York  State  Library.     65th  and  66th  reports  of  trustees. 

The  Trustees. 

New  York  State  Museum  of  Natural  History,   28th,    33d  and  37th 

annual  reports.  The  Trustees. 

Regents  of  the  University  of  the  State  of  New  York,  95th-97th  annual 

reports.  The  Regents. 

American  Social  Science  Association.     Journal  of  Social  Science,  Nos.  I — 

IX. 

Conference  of  Board  of  Public  Charities,  1874,  1875,  1877.  The  Society. 

Amiens.     Societe  Linneenne  du  Nord  de  la  France.     Bulletin  III — VI. 

The  Society. 
Amsterdam.     K.  zoologisch  Genootschap  Natura  Artis  Magistra.     Neder- 
landsch  Tijdschrift  voor  de  Dierkunde,  V,  1. 

Bijdragen  tot  de  Dierkunde,  X,  1  ;  XI,  2.  The  Society. 

K.    Akademie  van  Wetenschappen.      Verslagen    en   Mededeeliugen. 
Afd.  Letterk.  II  R.  1-12  D  ;  III  R,  1  D. 
Afd.  Natuurk.,  XIX,  1-3;  XX,  1-3. 

Jahrboek,  1883.  • 

Processen  Verbaal.     Aft.    Natuurk.,    Mei,    1883— Mar.,    1884: 
Naam-Register.  The  Society. 

K.  Nederlandsche  Institut  van  Wetenschappen.     Tijdschrift,  D  1-3. 

The  Society. 
Angeis.     Societe  National  d' Agriculture,  Sciences  et  Aits.     Memoires,  T. 
26.  The  Society. 

Anvers.     Societe  de  G£ographie.     Bulletin,  IX,  2— X,  2.  The  Society. 

Auch.     Societe  Francaise  de  Botanique.     Revue  de  Botanique,  III,  25-37, 
39,  40.  The  Society. 

Auxerre.     Societe"  des  Sciences  historiques  et  naturelles  de  l'Yonne.     Bul- 
letin, An.,  29-34,  36,  38,  39.  The  Society. 
Baltimore.     American  Chemical  Journal,  VI,  5 — VII,  3.  The  Editor. 
American  Journal  of  Mathematics,  VII,  2 — VIII,  1.            The  Editor. 
Johns  Hopkins  University.     Studies  from  the  Biological  Laboratoiy, 
III,  2,  3  and  4. 

University  Circulars,  Nos.  1-44. 

Register,  1884-5.  The  Trustees. 

Peabody  Institute.     18th  annual  report.  The  Trustees. 

Bamberg.     Naturforschende  Gesellschaft,  13er  Bericht.  The  Society. 

Basel.     Naturforschende  Gesellschaft.     Verhandlungen,  VII,  3. 

The  Society. 
Schweizerische  palaontologische  Gesellschaft.     Abhandlun-en,  XI. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Batavia.     Natuurkundig  Vereen  in   Nederlandsch  Indie.     Natuurkundig 
Tijdschrift  voor  Nederlandsch  Indie.     8e  Ser.  V,  3 — VI,  2. 

The  Society. 

Bath.     Postal  Microscopical  Society.     Journal  of  Microscopy  and  Natural 

Science,  IV,  13.  The  Society. 

Belfast.     Naturalists'  Field  Club.     Annual  report,  II,  4.  The  Society. 

Natural    History   and   Philosophical   Society.      Proceedings,    sessions 

187:2-74,  1876-81,  iss:{  s:,.  The  Society. 

Berlin.     Ai.hiv  fur Naturgeschichte,  XLVIII,  6;  XLIX,  6;  L,  2-5;  LI,  1. 

The  Editor. 
Botanischer  Jahreshericht  (Just).     IX,  2  Abth.  2 ;   X,  1  Abth.  1,  2; 
2  Abth.  1.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Deutsche!  Fischerei  Verein.     Haupt-Sachregister,  1870-82;  1N84,  Cir- 
cular 1-6.  The  Society. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  459 

Deutsche  geologische  Gesellschaft.     Zeitschrift  XXXVI,  1— XXXVII, 

2.  The  Society. 

EntomologischerVerein.  Deutsche  entomologische  Zeitschrift,  XXVIII, 

1— XXIX,  1.  The  Society. 

Entomologischer  Verein  in  Berlin.    Berliner  entomologische  Zeitschrift, 

XXVIII,  2— XXIX,  1.  The  Society. 

Garten-Zeitung,  Wittmack.     Ill,  1-52  and  Reg.  The  Editor. 

Gesellschaft  Naturforschender  Freunde.     Sitzungsberichte,   1884,  8- 

1885,  7.  The  Society. 

Jahrbucher  fiir  wissenschaftliche  Botanik.  Pringsheim.     XV,  3 — XVI, 

2.  I.  V.  "Williamson  Fund. 

Naturae  Novitates.     1884,  Nos.  22-1885,  21.  The  Publishers. 

K.  Preussische  Akademie  der  "Wissenschaften.     Monatsberichte,  1855, 

'56,  '57,  '73,  '77.    Bericht  1836. 

Sitzungsberichte,  1884,  XVIII— LIV.  The  Society. 

Der  Naturfoischer,  XVII. 

Bern.     Naturforschende  Gesellschaft.     Mittheilimgen,  Nos.  224-359,  1083- 

1991,  1119-1132.  The  Society. 

Besancon.   Academie  des  Sciences,  Belles-Lettres  et  Arts,  1846-1851 ;  1854, 

Jan.,  1855-1869 ;  1870,  Jan.,  1872,  1874-1877.  The  Society. 

Birmingham.     Philosophical  Society.     Proceedings.  IV,  1.       The  Society. 

Bistritz.     Gewerbeschule.     Jahresbericht,  XI.  The  Society. 

Bologna.     Accademia  delle  Scienze.     Memorie  S.  IV,  Vol.  5.  The  Society. 

Bonn.     Archiv  fiir  mikroskopische  Anatomie,  XXIV,  2 — XXV,  3.  Namen- 

und  Sachregister  zu  Bd.  I-XX.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Naturhistorischer  Verein.    Verhandlungen,  XL,  1-XLII,  1.    Autoren- 

und  Sachregister  zu  Bd.,  I-XL.  The  Society. 

Bordeaux.     Academie  nationale  des  Sciences,  Belles-Lettres  et  Arts.  Actes 

I,  \-A ;  III,  3,  4 ;  TV,  1  ;  V,  2,  3 ;  VI,  1-3  ;  VII,  1-4 ;  VIII,  1-4. 

Recueil  des  Actes,  X,  1,  4  ;  XI,  1-4 ;  XII,  1,  2  ;  XIV,  1-4  ;  XVI,  1,  4  ; 

XVII,  2.  The  Society. 

Societe  Linneenne.     Actes  XXIX,  XXX,  XXXV,  XXXVII. 

The  Society. 
Boston.     American  Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences.     Proceedings,  XX. 

Memoirs,  XI,  Pt.  2,  No.  1.  The  Society. 

The  Auk,  II,  1-4.  The  Editor. 

Society  of  Natural  History.     Proceedings,    XXII,   pp.   481   et  seq., 
XXIII,  p.  33-192,  XXII,  No.  4. 

Memoirs,  III,  11.  The  Society. 

Braunschweig.  Archiv  fiir  Anthropologic,  XV,  4.    I.  V.  "Williamson  Fund. 
Zeitschrift  fiir  wissenschaftliche  Mikroskopie,  I  and  II,  1,  2. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Bremen.     Naturwissenschaftlicher  Verein.    Abhandlungen,  VIII,  2 ;  IX,  2. 

The  Society. 
Brisbane.  Royal  Society  of  Queensland.  Proceedings,  I,  2-4.  The  Society. 
Bristol.     Naturalists'  Society.     Proceedings,  IV,  3.  The  Society. 

Brooklyn.     Entomologica  Americana,  I,  1-8.  The  Editor. 

Brookville.     Society  of  Natural  History.     Bulletin,  I.  The  Society. 

Brunn.  K.  K.  Mahrisch-Schlesische  Gesellschaft  zur  Beforderung  des 
Ackerbaues.  der  Natur-  und  Landeskunde.  Mittheilun<>en,  n.  F. 
1850,  1-4  ;  1851,  1-4 ;  1860-1879,  1881-1884.  The  Society. 

Naturforschender  Verein.     Verhandlungen,  XXII,  1,  2. 
Bericht  der  meteorologischen  Commission,  1882.  The  Society. 

Bruxelles.     Academie  Royale  des  Sciences,  des  Lettres  et  des  Beaux-Arts 
de  Belsjique.     Annales,  1885. 
Memoires,  T.  45. 
M6moires  couronnes,  8vo,  T.  36. 
Memoires  couronnes,  4to,  T.  45  and  46. 
Bulletin,  3e,  Ser.,  VI,  1,  2 ;  VIJI,  9-X,  8.  The  Society. 


460  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Musde  Royale  d'  Histoire  Naturelle  de  Belgique.     Bulletin,  I— III. 

The  Director. 
Societe"  Beige  de  Geographic  Bulletin,  1877-1885,  No.  3  The  Society. 
Society  Beige  de  Microscopic     Bulletin,  XI,  1-11. 

Annates,  IX — X.  The  Society. 

Societe  Entomologique  de  Belgique.     Compte-Rendu,  Ser.  Ill,   Xos. 
38-60.     Annales,  XXIX,  1.  The  Socict.s . 

Societe  Malacologique.     Annales,  XV,  XVIII,  XIX. 

Proces-Verbaux,  1884,  pp.  1-104;  1885,  Jan.  3-Juil  5. 

The  Society. 
Buda-Pest.     M.  Tudomanyos  Akademia.     Ungarische  Revue,  1881,    IV; 
1883,  IV-X  ;  1884,  I-X. 

Ertekezesek  a  mathematikai  Tudomanyok  Korebol,  IV  K,  4-8 

S  ;  VI,  3,  4,  10  ;  VIII,  1G  ;  X,  1-11. 

Ertekezesek  a  Termeszettudomanyok  Korebol,  XIII,  1-7,  9-11, 

13,  15  ;  XIV,  1. 

^    Ertesitoje,  X-XVII.  The  Society. 

Societe  Royale   Hongroise  des  Sciences  Naturelles,   la  Passe  et   le 

Present  de  la,  1885.  The  Society. 

Ungarischen  National-Museum.     Naturhistorische  Hefte,    VIII,  1 — 

IX,  2.  The  Director. 

Buenos  Aires.     Circulo  Medico-Argentino.     Anales  An.  8,  V,  VIII,  No.  3. 

The  Editor. 

Sociedad  Cientifico  Argentina.     Anales,  XVIII,  4— XIX,  li. 

Caen.     Academie  nationale  des  Sciences,  Arts  et  Belles-Lettres.  Menioires, 

Tables  chron.,  1884.  The  Society. 

Calcutta.     Asiatic  Society  of  Bengal.     Centenary  review  of,  from  1784  to 

1884. 

Journal,  XVII,  II;  XVIII,  Jan.,  Feb.,  June-Dec;  XIX, 
XX,  1-6;  XXI;  XXII,  1-3,  5-7;  XXIII,  3,  4,  6,  7; 
XXIV-XXVIII,  1-3;  XXX;  XXXIII,  2,  3,  and  Supl.; 
XXXV,  I,  1  ;  II,  1 ;  XLI,  II,  1-4  ;  XLII,  II,  1,  3,  4 ;  XLIV, 
II,  1-3  and  Supl.;  XLV,  II,  1-4;  LII,  2,  Title  and  index; 
LIII,  I,  Special  number,  2 ;  LIII,  II,  2  ;  LIV,  I,  2 ;  II,  3. 
Proceedings,  1885,  Nos.  1-5.  The  Society. 

Cambridge.     Appalachian  Mountain  Club.     Appalachia,  TV,  1,  2. 

The  Society. 
Harvard  University.     Library  Bulletin,  Nos.  30-32.  The  Trustees. 

93d  Annual  report  of  library  syndicate,  1884-85. 
Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology.    Reports,  1883-1885. 
Bulletin,  VII,  2-8,  11,  Title,  etc.;  XI,  11  ;  XII.  1. 
Memoirs,  X,  4  ;  XI,  1 ;  XIII,  XIV,  I,  1.  The  Director. 

Science,  Nos.  95-146.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Canada.     Royal  Society.     Proceeding  and  Transactions,  1882  and  1883 ; 
1884,11.  <  The  Society. 

Cardiff.     Naturalists'  Society.  Report  and  Transactions,  XVI.  The  Society. 
(asset.     Malakozoologische  Blatter,  VII,  5-12;  VIII,  l-:>. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Verein  fiir  Naturkunde.     Bericht,  V-VIII.  The  Society. 

Charleston.    Elliott  Society  of  Science  and  Arte.    Proceedings,  II.  pp.  1-40. 

The  Society. 

Cherbourg.    Societe  Nationale  des  Sciences  Naturelles.    Memoires,  XXlV. 

ilogue  de  la  Bibliotheque,  II,  2.  The  Society. 

Chicago.     American  Antiquarian,  VI,  6— VII.  5.  The  Editor. 

American  Chemical  Review,  IV,  10.  The  Editor. 

Mind  in  Nature,  I,  4.  The  Editor. 

Christiania.    Archiv  for  Mathematik  og  Naturvidenskab,  X,  1,  2. 

The  Editor. 
Videnskab-Selskab.     Forhandlinger,  1884.  The  Society. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  461 

Chur.     Naturforschende  Gesellschaft  Graubiindens.     Jahresbericht,  n.  F. 
I-XXVIII  The  Society. 

Cincinnati.     Society  of  Natural  History.     Journal,  VII,  4 — VIII,  ?>. 

The  Society. 
Colombo.     Royal  Asiatic  Society.    Journal,  1845-1848  ;  1853  ;  1855-1858  ; 
1873  ;  1874  ;  1879  ;  1881  ;  1882,  II,  2  and  extra  number. 

The  Society. 
Same.     Ceylon  Branch.     Proceedings.  1873-1880  ;  1882  ;  1883. 

The  Society. 

Columbia.    University  of  the  State  of  Missouri.     Bulletin  of  the  Museum, 

I,  1 .  The  Director. 

Congres   International    d' Anthropologic  et  d'Archeologie    prehistoriquc. 

Compte  Rendu  de  la  9me  Session,  1880.  The  Society. 

Copenhagen.     Botaniske  Forening.     Botanisk  Tidsskrift,  XIV,  1-4. 

M.-ddelelser,  1885,  No.  7.  The  Society. 

K.  D.  Videnskabernes  Selskab.     Oversigt,  1884,  No.  1—1885,  No.  1. 

Skrifter,  6te.     Raekke,  I,  9,  10 ;  II,  6 ;  I,  II,  III,  Bd.     The  Society. 
Naturhistoriske  Forening.     Videnskabelige  Meddelelser,  1883,  II. 

The  Society. 
Naturhistorisk  Tidsskrift.     Schiodte,  3e  R.  XIV,  3. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Sock'te  Royale  des  Antiquaires  du  Nord.     Memoires,  n.  s.,  1885. 
Tillaeg,  1882-1884.  The  Society. 

Cordoba.     Academia  Nacional  de  Ciencias  exactas.     Actas,  V.  1. 

Boletin,  VI,  \-A ;  VII,  1-3  ;  VIII,  1-4.  The  Society. 

Crawfordsville.     Botanical  Gazette,  IX,  12— X,  11.  The  Editor. 

Danzig.     Naturforschende  Gesellschaft.    Schriften,  XV,  2,  3,  4 ;  n.  F.,  II, 
1— VI,  2.  The  Society. 

Darmstadt.     Grossherzoglich  hessische  geologische  Landesanstalt.     Ab- 
handlungen,  I,  1.  The  Society. 

Mittelrheinischer  Geologischer  Verein.  Geologische  Specialkarte  des 
Grossherzogthums  Hessen  und  der  angrenzenden  Landesgebiete. 
Section  Friedberg,  Hieszen,  Biidingen,  Offenbach,  Schotten,  Die- 
burg,  Herbstein-Fulda,  Erbach,  Darmstadt,  Alzey,  Mainz,  Alsfeld, 
Lauterbach,  Allendorf.  Gladenbach,  Biedenkopf,  Worms ;  with 
maps,  1855-1872.  The  Society. 

Denver.     Colorado  Scientific  Society.    Proceedings,  I.  The  Society. 

Des  Moines.     Academy  of  Science.     Bulletin,  I,  1.  The  Society. 

State  Historical  Society,  15th  biennial  report.  The  Society. 

Dorpat.     Naturforscher  Gesellschaft.     Sitzungsberichte,  III,  3-6  ;  IV,  1  ; 
V,  1 ;  VII,  1. 
Arebiv  fur  die  Naturkunde  Liv-  Ehst-  und  Kurlands,  2e  Ser,  X.  1. 

Schriften,  I.  The  Society. 

Dresden.     K.   Leopoldina  Carolina  Akademie   Deutcher    Naturforscher. 
Nova  Acta,  vols.  45  and  46. 

Leopoldina.     H.  19.  '  The  Society. 

Natunvissenschaftliche  Gesellschaft  Isis.  Sitzungsberichte  and  Ab- 
handlungen,  Juli-Dec.  1884. 

Festschrift  zur  Feier  des  50es  jahrigen  Bestehens.  The  Society. 

Dublin.     Royal  Dublin  Society,  Proceedings,  IV,  1-6. 
Transactions,  Ser.  II,  Vol.  Ill,  1-6. 

Journal,  No.  45.  The  Society. 

Edinburgh.    Botanical  Society.    Transactions  and  Proceedings,  I,  1-3;  IV, 

V,  X,  XIII,  XIV,  XV,  I.  The  Society. 

Geological  Society,  V,  1,  3.  The  Society. 

Royal  Physical  Society.     Proceedings,  1883-85.  The  Society. 

Scottish  Naturalist,  n.  s.,  Nos.  7-10  The  Editor. 

Elberfeld.    Naturwissenschaftlieher  Verein.  Jahres-Bericht,  l!esand4esH. 

The  Society. 


462  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Emden.     Naturforchende  Gesellschaft.     Jahresberichte,  1840-1845,  1847, 
1848,  1850-53,  60er,  1874,  1883-84. 

Kleine  Schriften,  VII-IX,  XI-XIV,  XVI.  The  Society. 

Erfurt.      K.    Akademie    gemeiniitziger  Wissenschaften.     Jahrbuch,  n.  F., 

II.  !•.'  and  13.  The  Society. 

Erlangen.     Phvsikalisch-medicinische  Societlit.     Sitzungsberichte,  H.  16. 

The  Society. 
Florence.     Nuovo  Giomale  Botanico  Italiano,  Caruel ;  XVII,  1-4. 

The  Editor. 
Societa  Entomologica  Italiano.     Bolletino,  Anno  16o,  Trim.  I-IV. 

The  Society, 

Societa,  Italiana  di  Antropologia,    Etnologia  e  Psicologia   comparata. 

Archivio  XIV,  1,  2  ;  XIV,  1.  The  Society. 

France.   Association  Francaise  pour  1'  Advancement  des  Sciences.   Comntes 

Rendus,  1883.  The  Society. 

Frankfurt  a.  M.      Deutsche  malakologischc  Gesellschaft.      Jahrbucher, 

XII,  1,  2. 

Nachrichtsblatt,  1884,  Nos.  11,  12 ;  1885,  Nos.  1-8.        The  Society. 
Naturwissenschaftlicher  Verein.     Monatliche  Mittheilungen,  II,  7. 

The  Society. 
Physikalischer  Verein.  Jahresbericht,  1842-47;  1849-1884.  The  Society. 
Senckenbergische  Naturforschende  Gesellschaft.     Bericht,  1884. 

The  Society. 

Der  Zoologische  Garten,  XXVI,  1.  The  Editor. 

Freiburg,  i.  B.     Naturforschende  Gesellschaft.      Berichte  iiber  die  Ver- 

handlungen,  VIII,  2.  The  Society. 

Gand.     Archives  de  Biologic,  Van  Beneden  et  Bambeke,  V,  2-4. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Geneva.     Institut  National  Genevois.     Bulletin,  T.  26.  The  Society. 

Recueil  Zoologique  Suisse,  Fol.  I,  2 — II,  4.        I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Societe  de  Physique  et  d'Histoire Naturelle.     Memoires,  XXVIII,  2. 

TheSoci.  ty. 

Genoa.     Societa  di  Letture  e  Conversazioni  seientifiche.     Giornale,  VIII, 

12— IX,  6.  The  Society. 

Giessen.     Jahresbericht  iiber  die  Fortschritte  der  Chemie,  Fittica.  1883, 

Nos.  2    I.  The  Editor. 

Glasgow.     Geological  Society.     Transactions,  VII,  2.  The  Society. 

Natural  History  Society.     Proceedings,  I,  1,  2 ;  II,  1,  2;  III,  1 ;  IV, 

1;  V,  3;  n.  s.  I,  1.  The  Society. 

Philosophical  Society.     Proceedings,  XV,  XVI.  The  Society. 

Gorlitz.     Oberlausitzische  Gesellschaft  der  Wissenschaften.      Neues  lau- 

sitzisches  Magazin,  60er  Bd.,  1,  2  ;  61er  Bd.,  1.  The  Society. 

Naturforschende  Gesellschaft.  Abhandlungen,  XI -X\TII.  The  Society. 

Goteborg.     Goteborgs  K.  Vetenskaps  och  Vitterhets  Samhiilles.     Hand- 

Hngar,  n.  T.  le-19e  H.,  1850-1884.  The  Society. 

Gotha.     Dr.  A.  Petermann's  Mitteilungen  aus  Justus  Perthes  geographi- 

scher  Anstalt,  1884,  XI— 1885,  X. 

Erganzungsheft,  Nos.  75-79.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Graz.     Naturwissenschaftlicher   Verein   fiir   Stciermark.     ]\Iittheilungen, 

1884.  The  Society. 

Meirimarkisch  standisch  Joanneum.     Jahresberichte  I-LVI ;  LVIII ; 

LXI  LXXH.  The  Society. 

Verein  der  Aerzte  in  Steiermark.     Mittheilungen,  1*78,  1883. 

Jahresbericht,  3er  und  4er. 

sitzungsberichte,  VII-X.  The  Society. 

Halifax.      Nova    Scotia    Institute  of  Natural  Science.     Proceedings  and 

Transactions,  VI,  1.  The  Society. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  463 

Halle.     Naturforschende  Gesellschaft.    Abhandlungen,  XVI,  3. 
Bench*,  1848-49,  1884 
Verein  fiir  Erdkunde.     Mittheilungen,  1884.  The  Society. 

Zeitschrift  fiir  Naturwissenschaften,  4e  F.  Ill,  4 — IV,  3.     The  Editor. 
Hamburg.      Geographische    Gesellschaft.      Mittheilungen,     1882-83,  "II; 
1884  ;  1885,  I.  The  Society. 

Naturhistorisches  Museum.     Bericht,  1884.  The  Director. 

Naturwissenschaftlicher  Verein.    Abhandlungen,  IV,  1  ;  VI,  3  ;  VIII, 
1-3.  The  Society. 

Verein    fiir    naturwissenschaftliche   Unterhaltung.      Verhandlungen, 
V.  The  Society. 

Hamilton.     Hamilton  Association.     Journal  and  Proceedings,  I,  1. 

The  Society. 
Hanover.     Xaturhistorische  Gesellschaft.     Jahresbericht,  33er. 

The  Society. 
Harlem.    Musee  Teyler.    Archives  V,  2e  Ser.  4 ;  II,  2  ;  III,  3  ;  IV,  1. 

The  Director. 
Niederliindische  Arcliiv  fiir  Zoologie,  Selenka,  etc,  I-IV. 

Suppl.,  Bd.  I.  1.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Societe  Hollandaise  des  Sciences.     Archives  XIX,  1,  4,  5 ;  XX,  1,  2. 

The  Society. 

Heidelberg.     Xaturhistoriscb-medicinischer  Verein.     Verhandlungen,    n. 

F.,  Ill,  4.  The  Society. 

Helsingfoi  s.    Finska  Vetenskaps-Societeten.  Ofversigt,  XXV,  1-8;  XXVI. 

Bidrag,  H.  7-10,  39-42. 

Acta,  VII,  XIII,  XIV.  The  Society. 

Sallskapet  pro  Fauna  et  Flora  Fennica.     Medelanden,  No.  11. 

The  Society. 
Hermannstadt.     Siebenbiugischer  Verein  fiir  Xaturwissenschaften.     Ver- 
handlungen und  Mittheilungen,  VIII-XXIX. 

Jahresberichte,  1883-4.  The  Society. 

Verein  fiir  Siebenbiirgische  Landeskunde.     Archiv,  n.  F.,  XIX,  1-3. 

The  Society. 
Huddersfield.     The  Naturalist,  I,  1— IX,  108.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Jena.    Mtdicinisch-naturwissenschaftliche  Gesellschaft.    Zeitschrift,  n.  F., 
XI,  1-XII,  1.  The  Society. 

Iowa  City.     State  Historical  Society.    Iowa  Historical  Record,  1885,  Jan., 
Apr.  and  July.  The  Society. 

Kansas  City.     The  Kansas  City  Review  of  Science  and  Industry,  VIII,  8— 
IX,  4.  The  Editor. 

Khrakow.     Societe  des  Naturalistes  a  l'Universite  Imperiale  de  Khrakow. 
Travaux,  I-XVII.  The  Society. 

Kiel.  Naturwissenschaftlicher  Verein.  Schriften  I,  1,  3  ;  II-V.  The  Society. 
Universitat.     Schriften  I-XXVII.  The  University. 

Verein   nordlich    der  Elbe  zur   Verbreitung  naturwissenschaftlicher 
Kenntnisse.     Mittheilungen  1,  4-9  H.  The  Society. 

Klagenfurt.      Landesmuseum   von   Karnten.      Carinthia,  1884,    No.   10 — 
1885,  No.  8.  The  Director. 

Konigsberg.     Physikalisch-okonomische  Gesellschaft.     Schriften,  XXV,  1 
and  2.  The  Society. 

Lancaster.    Linnean  Society.   Linnean  Bulletin,  Nos.  5  and  6.   The  Society. 
Landshut.     Botanischer  Verein.     Bericht  IV-VIII.  The  Society. 

Lausanne.     Societe  Vaudoise  des  Sciences  Naturelles.     Bulletin,  Nos.  90 
and  91.  The  Society. 

Leeds.     Geological  and  Polytechnic  Society  of  the  West  Riding  oi  York- 
shire.    Proceedings,  II,  pp.  57-206  ;  1877-1884.  The  Society. 
Philosophical  and  Literary  Society.     Annual  Report,  1884-85.     Transac- 
tions, VHI.  The  Society. 


464  PROCEEDINGS  OP   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Leiden.     Nederlandsche  Dierkundige  Vereeniging.     Tydschrift,  Suppl.,  I, 

2  ;  VI,  2-4  :  2de  Ser.,  I,  1.  The  Society. 

Leipzig.     Archiv  fur  Anatomie  und  Phvsiologie,  Anat.    Abth.,  1885,  I-IV. 

Phys.  Abth.,  1884,  VI— 1885,  IV.  I.  \  .  Williamson  Fund. 

Botanische  Jahrbiicher,  Engler,  VI,  2-5.  I.  V.  "Williamson  Fund. 

Dnsekten-Borse.     Central  Organ,  II,  12.  TheEditqr. 

[nternational  Zeitschrift  fiir  allgemeine  Sprachwissenschaft,  I,  2. 

The  Editor. 
Jahresbericlite  fiber  die  Fortschritte  der  Anatomie  und  Physiologie. 
Hoffman  und  Schwalbe,  XII,  2.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Journal  fiir  Ornithologie,  XXXII,  2— XXXIII,  2. 

I.  V.  "Williamson  Fund. 
Morphologisches  Jahrbueh,  X,  2 — XI.  1.  I.  V.  "Williamson  Fund. 

K.  SachsischeGesellschatt  der  Wissenschaften.     Abhandlungen,  XIII, 
p.  573— XIV,  p.  184  -XIII,  1-4. 
Bericht  iiber  die  Verhandlungen,  1883,  1884,  I,  II ;  1885,  I,  II. 

The  Society. 
Verein  furErdkunde.  Mittheilungen,  1873-1883, 1  and  II.  The  Society. 
Zeitschrift  fiir  Krystallographie  und  Mineralogie,  Groth,  IX,  5 — X,  6. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Zeitschrift  fiir  wissenschaftliehe  Zoologie,  XLI,  I — XLII,  3. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Zoologischer  Anzeiger,  Nos.  181-207.  The  Editor. 

Zoologisehe  Station  zu  Neapel.     Mittheilungen,  V,  3  —VI,  2 

Zoologischer  Jahresbericht,  1883,  II  Abth.,  Nos.  1-4.     The  Director. 
Lieue.     Societe"  Royale  des  Sciences.     Memoires,  2me  Scrie,  XII. 

The  Society. 

Lisbon.    Academia  Real  das  Sciencias.   Annaes  ;  Sciencias  moraes,  politieas 

e  bellas  lettras,  I,  II,  May,  July-Nov.,  1858.  Sciencias  mathematicas, 

physicas,  historico-naturas,  e  medicas,  I,  Marz-Dec,  1857 ;  II,  Marz- 

Jul,  1858.  The  Society. 

\--ncia(;ao  dos  Engenheiros  Civis  Portuguezes.     Revista  de  Obras 

publieas  et  minas,  Nos.  177-190.  The  Society. 

Secc/io  dos  Trabalhos  geologicos  de  Portugal.     CommuicaQoes,  I,  1. 

The  Society. 

Liverpool.     Geological  Society.     Proceedings,  I — V,  1.  The  Society. 

Naturalists'  Field  Club.     Proceedings,  1884-85.  The  Society. 

London.     The  Angler's  Note-book  and  Naturalist's  Record,  1884,  Nos.  5 

and  7.  The  Editor. 

Auuals  and  Magazine  of  Natural  History,  5th  Ser.,  Nos.  84-95. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Anthropological  Institute.     Journal,  XIV,  3 — XV.  1.  The  Society. 

Astronomical  Register,  Nos.  264-275.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

British  Association   for   the  Advancement  of  Science.     Report,  54th 
meeting.  The  Society. 

Chemical  Society.     Abstracts  of  the  Proceedings,  Nos.  1-12.     Journal, 
Nos.  265-276,  and  Supplements  to  Vols,  45  and  It;.  The  Society. 

Curtis'  Botanical  Magazine,  Nos.  1173-1184.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
The  Electrician,  XIV,  1  -XVI,  1.  The  Editor. 

Entomological  Society.     Transactions,  1884,  Nos.  3-5  ;  1885,  Nos.  1-3  ; 
n .  s .,  1 1 .  1  s  ;  1 1 1 ,  ll8  ;  IV,  3rd  Ser.,  II,  1 ;  III,  4-7  ;  IV.  The  Society. 
Gardeners'  Chronicle,  n.  s.,  Nos.  568-620.  The  Editor. 

Geological  Magazine,  Nos.  246-257.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Gedogical  Record,  L877,  l*7s.  .  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Geological  Society.     Quarterly  Journal,  Nos.  160  -164.       The  Society. 
Geologists'  Association.     Proceedings,  I  (No.  7  wanting),  II    IX,  3. 

The  Society. 
Hardwicke's  Science  Gossip,  Nos.  240-251.        I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 


1885.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  465 

Ibis,  5th  Ser.,  II,  9-12.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Journal  of  Anatomy  and  Physiology,  XIX,  2 — XX,  1. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Journal  of  Botany,  Nos.  264-275.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Journal  of  Conchology,  IV,  7-10.  The  Editor. 

Journal  of  Physiology,  Foster,  V,  4— VI,  5.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Journal  of  Science,  3rd  Ser.,  Nos.  132-143.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Knowledge,  Nos.  158-174,  179-204.  The  Editor. 

Linnean  Society.     Journal,    Botany,    Nos.    134-137.     Zoology,    Nos. 
103-108. 

Transactions,  2nd  Ser.,  Zoology,  II,  11,  13,  14 ;  III,  1-3.     Botany 
II,  8 

List,  1884-85.  The  Society. 

London,  Edinburgh  and  Dublin  Philosophical  Magazine,  5er  Ser.,  Nos. 

114-126.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Mineralogical   Society  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland.     Mineralogical 

Magazine,  Nos.  28-30.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

The  Naturalist,  Nos.  113-124.  The  Editor. 

Nature,  Nos.  786-837.  The  Editur. 

The  Observatory,  No.  92.  The  Editor. 

Physical  Society.     Proceedings,  I- VII,  2.  The  Society. 

Quarterly  Journal  of  Microscopical  Science,  5th  Ser.,  Nos.  96,  97,  n.s. 

Supplem.,  1885,  99.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Royal  Asiatic  Society  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland.  Journal,  n.  s.,  XVI, 

4 -XVII,  3.  The  Society. 

Royal  Geographical  Society.    Proceedings,  VI,  10 — VII,  11. 

The  Society. 
Royal  Institution  of  Great  Britain.     Proceedings.  X,  3  ;  XI,  1. 

The  Society. 
Royal  Microscopical  Society.  Journal,  Ser.  2,  TV,  6 — V,  5.  The  Society. 
Royal  Society.     Proceedings,  Nos.  232-238. 

Philosophical  Transactions,  Vol.  174,  Nos.  1  and  2.         The  Society. 
Society  of  Arts.     Journal,  Vol.  32  and  Index  to  Vols.  21-30. 

The  Society. 
Triibner's  American  and  Oriental  Literary  Record,  Nos.  203-216. 

The  Publishers. 
Zoological  Record,  1883.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Zoological  Society.    Proceedings,  1884,  II — 1885,  III. 
Transactions,  XL,  10. 

List,  1884.  The  Society. 

Zoologist,  3rd  Ser.,  Nos.  96-107.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Loudon,  Ca.  The  Canadian  Entomologist,  XVI,  12 -XVII,  10.  The  Editor. 

Lucca.     Reale  Accademia  Lucchese  di   Scienze,  Lettere  ed  Arti.     Atti, 

XXI— XXIII. 

Memorie  e  Documenti,  XII ;  XIII,  1.  The  Society. 

Liibeck.  Naturhistorisches  Museum.  Jahresbericht,  1884.  The  Society. 
Liineburg.  Naturwissenchaftlicher  Verein.  Jahreshefte,  IX.  The  Society. 
Lund.     University.     Acta,  XIX. 

Accessions-Katalog,  1883.  The  University. 

Lyon.     Academie  des  Sciences,  Belles-Lettres  et  Arts.     Memoires.     Classe 
des  Sciences,  XXVII.    Classe  des  Lettres,  XXI ;  XXII.    The  Society. 
Madrid.     Observatorio.     Observationes  Meteorologicas,  1875-1883. 

The  Director. 
Real  Academia  de  Ciencias  exactas,  fisicas  y  naturaes.     Memorias, 
I- VII  *  IX  X  * 

Annua'rio,  1883,  1884.  The  Society. 

Real  Academia  de  la  Historia.     Boletin,  VI,  5.  The  Society. 

Revista  de  los  progres  de  las  ciencias  exactas,  fisicas  y  naturales, 

III,  X.  The  Editor. 

31 


466  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Sociedad  Geografica.     Boletin,  I-VII ;  VIII,  2,  3  ;  XII,  2  ;  XVII,  4,  5, 

6  ;  XVIII ;  XIX,  1,  2,  3.  The  Society. 

Manchester.    Geological  Society.    Transactions,  XVIII,  1-10.    The  Society. 

Scientific  Students'  Association.     Annual  report,  1884.       The  Society. 

Yorkshire  Naturalists'  Recorder,  Nos.  1-14.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Manhattan,  Kansas.     Journal  of  Mycology,  I,  1,  2.  The  Editor. 

Mannheim.     Mannheimer  Verein  fur  Naturkunde.   Jahresbericht,  1883-84. 

The  Society. 
Marseille.     Musee  d'llistoire  Naturelle.     Annales,  Zoologie,  I,  1-3. 

The  Director. 
Melbourne.     Philosophical  Institute  of  Victoria.     Transactions,  III. 

The  Society. 

Meriden,  Conn.    Scientific  Association.    Transactions,  1884,  I.  The  Society. 

Metz.     Academic     Memoirs,  1880-81.  The  Society. 

Verein  fiir  Erdkunde.     Jahresberichte,  6er  und  7er.  The  Society. 

Mexico.     Ministerio  de  Fomento.     Boletin,  1885.  The  Editor. 

Museo  Nacional.     Anales,  III,  7,  8.  The  Director. 

Sociedad  Mexicana  de  Historia  Natural.     La  Naturaleza,  VI,  17-24, 

VII,  5-10.  The  Society. 

Middletown.     Wesleyan  University  Museum.      13th  annual  report. 

The  Director. 
Milan.     Regio  Instituto  technico  superiore.     Programma,  1884-85. 

The  Institute. 
Regio  Instituto  Lombardo  di  Scienze  e  Lettere.    Rendiconti,  XVII,  17. 

The  Society. 

Milwaukee.     Natural  History  Society  of  Wisconsin.     Proceedings,  1885, 

pp.  3-42.  The  Society. 

Minneapolis.     Academy  of  Sciences.     Bulletin,  II,  5.  The  Society. 

Modena.     Societa  dei  Naturalisti.     Atti,  S.  3a,  II,  pp.  1-88,  105-140. 

Memorie,  S.  3a,  II,  III.  The  Society. 

Mons.     Societe  des  Sciences,  des  Arts  et  des  Lettres  du  Hainaut.  Memoires 

et  Publications,  4e  Ser.,  VIII.  The  Society. 

Montpellier.     Academie  des  Sciences  et  Lettres.     Memoires  de  la  Section 

des  Sciences,  I,  II,  III.     Section  de  Medicine,  I,  II,  III,  2 ;  V,  3. 

Extraits  des  Pioces  Verbaux,  1847-1854.  The  Society. 

Montreal.     Canadian  Record  of  Science,  I,  3,  4  ;  II,  1.  The  Editor. 

Natural  History  Society.     Proceedings,  I,  2.  The  Society. 

Numismatic  and  Antiquarian  Society.   Canadian  Antiquary,  XII,  1,  2. 

The  Society. 
Moscow.     Societe  Imperiale  des  Naturalistes.     Bulletin,  1840,  Nos.  2  and 
3  ;  1882,  No.  3  ;  1884,  Nos.  2  and  3. 

Nouveaux  Memoires,  IV  ;  V;  XIV,  4.  The  Society. 

Munich.     G<  sellschaft   fiir  Anthropologic,  Ethnologie  und  Urgcschichte. 
Beitriige  zur  Anthropologic  und  Urgcschichte  Bayerns,  VI,  1-4. 

The  Society. 
K.   B.   Akademie  der  Wissenschaften.     Sitzungsberichte  der  math.- 
phys.  Classe,  1866,  I,  1-4;    II,  1-4;    1867,  I,  2-4;   II,  1-4;    1868,  I, 
2-4;  II,  1-4;  1869,  I,  1-4;  II,  1-4;  1870,  1-4;  1884,  1-4. 
Almanach,  1884. 

Alihandlungen.     Math.-phys.  Classe,  XV,  1.  The  Society. 

K.  Sternwart.     Annalen,  X,  XIV.  The  Director. 

Minister.    Westfalischer  Provinzial  Verein  fiir  Wissenschaften  und  Kunst. 
Jahresbericht,  XI,  1,  3-5,  12.  The  Society. 

Nancy.     So,  n't,'  des  Sciences.     Bulletin,  Ser.  3,  III,  16,  17.      The  Society. 
Naples.     R.  Istituto  d'lncorragiamentd  alle  Scienze  naturali  economiche  e 
tcchnologiche.     Atti,  3e  Ser.,  1 1 1.  The  Society. 

Rivista  Italiana  di  Scienze  Naturali,  1,  1.  The  Editor. 

Neubrandenburg.     Verein  der  Freunde  der  Naturgeschichte  in  Mecklen- 
burg.    Anliiv,  XXXVITI.  The  Society. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  46*7 

Neuchatel.     Society  des  Sciences  Naturelles.     Bulletin,  XIV.  The  Society. 
New  Haven.     The  American  Journal  of  Science  and  Arts.    1884,  No.  168- 
1885,  No.  179.  The  Editor. 

Connecticut  Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences.     Transactions,  VI,  2. 

The  Society. 
New  York.     Academy  of  Sciences.     Annals,  III,  5-8. 

Transactions,  III.  The  Society. 

American  Bookseller,  XVII,  5,  11.  The  Editor. 

American  Geographical  Society.     Bulletin,  1884,  No.  3-1885,  No.  1. 

The  Society. 
American  Museum  of  Natural  History.     Annual  report,  1884-85. 

The  Director. 
The  Book  Buyer,  n.  s.,  I,  12,  II,  1.  The  Editor. 

Forest  and  Stream,  XXIII,  18— XXV,  17.  The  Editor. 

Index  Medicus,  VII,  1-8.  The  Editor. 

Library  Journal,  X,  1-10.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Literary  News,  V,  12— VI,  10.  The  Editor. 

Medico-Legal  Journal,  II,  8.  The  Editor. 

New  York  Medical  Journal,  XL,  22— XLII,  21.  The  Editor. 

New  York  Microscopical  Society.     Journal,  I,  1-7.  The  Society. 

Pharmaceutical  Association.     Proceedings,  7th  annual  meeting. 

The  Society. 

Popular  Science  Monthly,  Jan. — Dec,  1885.  The  Editor. 

Torrey  Botanical  Club.     Bulletin,  XI,  10— XII,  10.  The  Society. 

Nijmegen.     Nederlandsche  Botanishe  Vereeniging.      Nederlandsch  Kruid- 

kundig  Archief,  2e  S.  I-IV,  3.  The  Society. 

Offenbach  am  Main.     Verein  fur  Naturkunde.     Bericht  24er  unci  25er. 

The  Society. 
Orleans.   Societed' Agriculture,  Sciences,  Belles  Lettres  et  Arts.   Memoires, 
2e  Ser.  XXIV,  1-4.  The  Society. 

Osnabriick.     Naturwissenschaflicher  Verein.     Jahresbericht  VI. 

The  Society. 

Padova.     Societa  Veneto-Trentina  di  Scienze  Naturali.     Atti  VI- VIII,  1  ; 

IX  1.  The  Society. 

Bulletino,  I ;  II  ;  III,  3.  The  Society. 

Palermo.     II  Naturalista  Siciliano,  IV,  3 — V,  1.  The  Editor. 

Societa  di  Scienze  Naturali  et  economiche.     Giornale,  XVI. 

The  Society. 
Paris.     Academie  des  Sciences.     Comptes  Rendus.  Vols.  97  and  98. 

The  Society. 
Annales  des  Mines,  7me  S.  V,  1— VI,  3. 

Minister  of  Public  Works,  France. 

Annales  des  Sciences  Geologique,  XVI ;  XVII.  The  Editor. 

Annales  des  Sciences  Naturelles.     Zoolooie  et  Paleontologie  Ome  S. 

XVII,  1— XVIII,  6.     Botanique,  6rae  Ser.,  XIX,  1— 7me  Ser.,  II,  1. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Archives  de  Zooktgie  experimentale  et  general,  2me  S.  II,  3 — III,  4. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Institution  ethnographique.     Annuaire,  1879-1884. 
Journal  de  Conchyliologie,  3e  S.,  XX  III,  1  -XXV,  1.  The  Editor. 

Journal  de  Micrographie,  VIII,  11  -  IX,  9.  The  Editor. 

Museum  d'Histoire  Naturelle.     Nouvelles  Archives,  VI,  2 ;  VII;  1,  2. 

The  Director. 
Le  Naturaliste,  1884,  No.  70     1885,  No.  21.  The  Editor. 

Revue  d'Ethnogiaphie,  III,  4 — IV,  3.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Revue  Geographique  Internationale,  Nos.  108-114,  110,  117: 

The  Editor. 
Revue  Scientifique,  1885,  No.  1— 3eSer.,  SmeAn.,  No.  19.  The  Editor. 
Science  et  Nature,  Nos.  51-88.  The  Editor. 


468  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1885. 

SociSte'  d'Acclimatation.     Bulletin,  4e,  Ser.,  I,  8 — II,  8.     The  Society. 
Societe  de  Biologie.     Compte  Rendu  des  Seances,  7me  Ser.,  1884,  No. 
36—1885,  No.  37.  The  Society. 

Soci6t6  Entoniologique  de  France.     Annales,  6me  Ser.,  Ill ;  IV. 

The  Society. 

Societe  Geologique  de  France.     Bulletin,  3me  Ser.,  X,  7  ;  XI,  8  ;  XII, 

4   6,  7,  8  ;  XIII,  1-14.  The  Society. 

Memoires,  3e  Ser.,  III.  G.  W.  Tryon.  Jr. 

Societe  Malaoologique  de  France.    Bulletins,  III,  IV,  No.  1,  Juil.  1885. 

Revue  Bibliographique,  1885.  The  Society. 

Societe  Mineialogique  de  France.     Bulletin,  III,  4  ;  V,  4 ;  VII,  8,  9  ; 

VIII,  1-7.  The  Society. 

SociSte   Nationale  d' Agriculture  de    Fiance.      Bulletin,    1884.    Nos. 

8-10—1885,  Nos.  1-7.  The  Society. 

Societe  Zoologique.     Bulletin,  1884,  No.  1—1885,  No.  3.    The  Society. 

Philadelphia.     Academy  of  Natural  Sciences.      Proceedings,    1884,    II — 

1885,  II.  Publication  Committee. 

American  Entomological  Society.     Transactions,  XI,  3 — XII,  1. 

Entomological  Section  of  the  Academy. 
American  Journal  of  Medical  Sciences.  Jan.-Oct.,  1885.      The  Editor. 
American  Journal  of  Pharmacy,  4th  Ser.,  XIV,  12 — XV,  11. 
American  Naturalist,  XVIII,  12— XIX,  11.  The  Editor. 

American  Pharmaceutical  Association.     Proceedings,  32d  meeting. 

The  Society. 
American  Philosophical  Society.    Proceedings,  Nos.  116-120.    Register 
of  Papeis.  The  Society. 

Dental  Cosmos,  XXVI,  12 -XXVII,  11.  The  Editor. 

Engineer's  Club.     Proceedings,  IV,  4  -V,  2.         •  The  Society. 

Franklin  Institute.     Journal,  Nos.  708-719.  The  Society. 

Gardener's  Monthly,  December,  1884-Nov.,  1885.  The  Editor. 

Historical  Society  of  Pennsylvania.     Pennsylvania  Magazine  of  His- 
tory and  Biography,  VIII,  4— IX,  3.  The  Society. 
Library  Company  of  Philadelphia.  Bulletin,  Julv,  1885.  The  Librarian. 
Microscopic  Bulletin,  n,  2,  3,  5,  6.  The  Editor. 
The  Museum,  I,  1-4.  The  Editor. 
Naturalist's  Leisure  Hour,  Jan.-Oct.,  1885.                           The  Editor. 
Papilio,  IV,  5-10.  The  Editor. 
Society  for  Organizing  Charity,  6th  annual  report.              The  Society. 
Wharton  School.     Annals  of  Political  Science,  I.                  The  Editor. 
Zoological  Society,  13th  annual  report.                                    The  Society. 
Pisa.     Societa  Malacologica  Italiana.    Bulletina,  X,  5 — XI,  7.  The  Society. 
Societa  Toscana  di  Scienze  Naturali.      Atti,  Processi  Verbali,  IV,  pp. 
125-145,  167-262. 

Memorie,  IV,  3.  The  Society. 

Portici.     R.  Scuola  superiore  d'agricultura.     Annuario,  IV,  4,  et  seq. 

The  Director. 
Poughkeepsie.     Vassar  Brothers  Institute.  Transactions,  n.  The  Institute. 
Prag.     K.  B.    Gesellschaft  der  Wissenschaften.     Sitzungsberichte,  1882- 
1884. 

Jahresberichte,  1882-1884. 
Abhandlungen,  6e  F.,  IX,  12. 
Bericht  u.  d.  Math.  u.  Naturw.-Publicatione,  1  H. 
Geschichte  der  Gesellschaft,  1  H. 
Generalregister  zu  dem  Schriften  von  1784-1884. 
Verzeichniss  der  Mitglieder  von  1784-1884.  The  Society. 

Princeton.     E.  M.  Museum  of  Geology  and  Archaeology  of  the  College  of 
New  Jersey.     Annual  report,  1885.  The  Trustees. 

Providence.     Random  Notes  on  Natural  History,  I,  3,  4;  n,  9.  The  Editor. 


1885.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  469 

Regensburg.     K.  B.  Botanische  Gesellschaft.     Flora,  n.  R.,  XLII. 

The  Society. 
Zoologisch-mineralogischer  Verein.     Correspondenz-Blatt,  XXXVIII. 

The  Society. 
Riga.  Naturforscher- Verein.  Correspondenzblatt,  XXVII.  The  Society. 
Rio  de  Janeiro.     Escola  de  Minas  de  Ouro  Preto.     Annaes  No.  3. 

The  Director. 
Rome.     R.  Accademia  dei  Lincei.     Atti,  Ser.  Ill,  Vol.  VIII,  No.  16—  Ser. 
IV,  Vol.1,  No.  23. 
Societa  degli  Spettroscopisti  Italiani.     Memoire  XIII,  9 — XIV,  8. 

The  Society. 
Societa  Geografica  Italiana.    Bolletino,  Ser.  II,  T.  IX  10— X,  10. 

The  Society. 

Saco.     York  Institute.     Publications  I,  2.  The  Society. 

St.  Gallen.     St.   Gallische  Naturwissenschaftliche  Gesellschaft.     Bericht, 

1882-83.  The  Society. 

St.  John.     Natural  History  Society  of  New  Brunswick.     Bulletin  No.  4. 

The  Society. 
St.  Augustine.     The  Naturalist  in  Florida,  I,  2.  The  Editor. 

St.  Petersburg.     K.  Akademie  der  Wissenschaften.      Memoires  XXXII, 
1-13. 

Bulletin,  XXVIII,  3— XXX,  1.  The  Society. 

Same,  VI  Ser.  IV,  2e  P.  1.  Dr.  Asa  Gray. 

Comite  Geologique  Russe.     Bulletin  1884,  Nos.  9,  10  :  1885,  Nos.  1-7. 

3b'moires,  I,  4;  II,  2;  III,  1.  The  Survey. 

Hortus  Petropolitanus.     Acta,  III,  1,  2  and  Suppl.,   IV,   1;  VIII,  3; 

IX,  1.  •  The  Society. 

Physikalische  Central  Observatorium.     Annalen  1883,  I,  II. 

The  Director. 

Russian  Physico-chemical  Society  of  the  University  of  St.  Petersburg. 

Journal  XVII,  1-6.  The  Society. 

Societas  Entomologica.     Horse  XVIII.  The  Society. 

Imp.  Russkoye  Geografitcheskoye  Obshtchestvo.     Izviestiia,  XX,  5,  6: 

XXI,  1-4. 

Dwadtzatiletije,  1885. 

Zapiski,  Books  III-XIII;  1869,  1871,  1873,  1875-1884,  No.  4. 
Ottchet  and  2d  Ed.  Izvestija.  1875-1883. 

Vestnik,  1853-1857,  1859,  1860.  The  Society. 

Salem.     Essex  Institute.     Bulletin,  XVI,  4-XVII,  3.  The  Society. 

Peabody  Academy  of  Sciences.  Annual  reports,  1874^1884.  The  Society. 
Record  of  American  Entomology,  Packard,  1868,  1869,  1870,  1872. 

The  Editor. 
Salzburg.     Deutscher  und  Oesterreichischer  Alpenverein.     Mittheilungen, 
1880-1884. 

Zeitschrift,  1878-1883;  1884,  Nos.  1,  2.  The  Society. 

San  Diego.     West  American  Scientist,  I,  1.  The  Editor. 

Sedalia.     Natural  History  Society.     Bulletin,  1.  The  Society. 

Semur.     Societe  des  Sciences  historiques  et  naturelles.     Bulletin,  2e-13e 

An.  1865-76.  The  Society. 

Sondrio.     II  Naturalista  Valtellinese,  I,  4.  The  Editor. 

Staunton.     The  Virginias.  V,  11— VI,  10.  The  Editor. 

Stockholm.     Antropologiska  Sallskapet.  Tidskrift  1873-1877.  The  Society. 

Entomologisk  Tidskrift,  V,  3,  4.  The  Editor. 

Geologiska  Forenino.     Forhandlingar,  I  V.     Index;  VI,  1-12. 

The  Society. 
K.  Vetenskaps  Akademiens.     Ofversigt.  XXXVIII:  XXXIX.  1:  XLI 
4-10;  XLII.  1  4. 

Bihangtill  K.  S.  V.  A.  Handlingar,  VI,  1,  2;  IX,  1,  2. 
Lefnadsteeknin<;ar,  II.  2. 
Handlingar,  XVIII, ;  XIX,  1,  2.  The  Society. 


410  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1885. 

Svenska  Ballskapet  for  Anthropologi  och  Geografi.  Bkrifter  1878-1880. 
Tidskrift,  1881,  Il-IV;  1882,  I-VIII;  1883,  I-VIII;  1884,  I-VIII; 
1883,  I-IV.  The  Society. 

Strasbourg.     Association  Strasbourgeoise  des  Amis  de  l'histoire  naturelle. 
Compte-rendu,  1852-1855;  1860-1864;  1867;  1868;  1870. 
Societe*  des  sciences  naturelles.     Memoires  II,  2,  3;  III,  1,  2;  IV,  1-3; 
V,  1-3;  VI,  1,  2.  The  Society. 

Stuttgart.     Forschungen  zur  Deutschen  Landes-  und  Volkskunde,  Leh- 
man.    I,  1.  The  Editor. 
Humboldt,  IV,  1-3.                                               I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Kosnios,  1885,  I,  1-6;  II,  1-4.                                 I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Neues  Jahrbuch  fiir  Mineralogie,  Geologie  und  Palajontologie,  1884, 
II.  :J;  III,  Beil.  Bd.,  2  und  3;  1885,  1-3.  The  Editor. 
Verein  fiir  vaterlandische  Naturkunde  in  Wiirttemberg.     Jahreshefte, 
41er  Jahrg.                                                                              The  Society. 
Switzerland.     Naturforschende   Gesellschaft.     Verhandlungen,    15th-25th 
Ses.  1829-1840.                                                                       The  Society. 
Sydney.     Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales.     Transactions,  1873. 

Journal  and  Proceedings,  XVIII.  The  Society. 

Linnean  Society  of  New  South  Wales.    Proceedings,  IX,  3— X.  J. 
Tasmania.     Royal  Society  of  Tasmania.    Papers,  Proceedings  and  Reports, 
1883,  I,  1,  2 ;  1884. 

Monthly  Notices,  18C>5-1807,  1869,  1872.  The  Society. 

Throudhjem.    K.  N.  Videnskabers  Selskab.    Skrifter,  1873,  pp.  244,  et  seq., 

1882,  1883.  The  Society. 

Tokio.     Sei  i   I\  wai.     Society  for  the  Advancement  of  Medical  Science  in 

Japan.     Transactions,  Supplement,  Nos.  1-10.    *  The  Society, 

Seisinological  Society  of  Japan.    Transactions,  II,  V  ;  VII,  1,  2  ;  VIII. 

The  Society. 
Topeka.     Kansas  Academy  of  Sciences.     Transactions,  IX.     The  Society. 
Kansas  State  Board  of  Agriculture.     5th  Annual  report ;  Biennial  re- 
ports, lst-4th.  The  Board. 
Washburn  Laboratory'of  Natural  History.     Bulletin,  I,  1-4. 

The  Director. 
Torino.     Accademia  Reale  delle  Scienze.     Atti,  XIX,  5-7.        The  Society. 
Toronto.     Canadian  Institute.     Proceedings,  n.  s.,  Ill,  1,  2.     The  Society. 
Entomological  Society.     Annual  Report,  1885.  The  Society. 

Toulouse.      Academic   des   Sciences,   Inscriptions  et   Belles-Lettres.     Me- 
moires, Mme  Ser.  VI,  1,  2.  The  Society. 
Revue  Mycologique.  VII,  25-28.  The  Editor. 
Societe  d'Histoire  Naturelle.    Bulletin,  XI,  XIV,  XVII,  XVIII,  Jan.— 
XIX,  Mars. 

Compte-rendu,  1885,  18  Mars,  1  April.  15  Juil.  The  Society. 

Truro.     Royal  Institution  of  Cornwall.     Journal,  III,  3.  The  Society. 

Twin  Bluffs.     The  Ornithologist,  I,  4.  The  Society. 

United  States.     Agassiz  Association.     First  General  Convention,  1884. 

The  Society. 

American  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science.     Proceedings, 

XXXIII.  The  Society. 

American  Society  of  Microscopists.     Proceedings,  7th  annual  meeting. 

The  Society. 
Upsal.     Observatoire  de  TUniversite.     Bulletin  Meteorologique,  XVI. 

The  Director. 
Regia  Societas  Scientiarum.     Nova  Acta,  IX,  1,  2  ;  XII,  1,  2. 

The  Society. 
Urbana.     Illinois  Industrial  University,  12th  Report.  The  Trustees. 

Utrecht.    K.  Nederlandsch  Meteorologiseh  Instituut.   Jaarboek.  1883,  1884. 

The  Society. 


1885.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  471 

Provinciaal  Utrechtsch  Genootschap  van  Kunsten  en  Wetenschappen. 
Verslag,  1873-1877,  1882-1884. 

Aanteekeningen,  1873-1876,  1882,  1883.  The  Society. 

Venice.  L'Ateneo  Veneto,  Ser.  VIII,  Vol.  2,  Nos.  3-6;  Ser.  IX,  Vol.  1, 
Nos.  1.  2  ;  Vol.  2,  Nos.  1-5.  The  Editor. 

Vienna.  K.  Akademie  der  Wissenschaften.  Sitzungsberichte,  87  Bd.  3e 
A.  IV,  V,  88  B.  1  A.  I-V ;  2  A.  I-V  ;  3  A.  I-V,  89  Bd.  1  A.  I-V ;  2 
A.  I-V  ;  3  A.  I,  II. 

Denkschriften,  47er  Bd.  The  Society. 

Anthropologische  Gesellschaft.     Mittheilungen,  I,  14;  II- V ;  XIV,  1, 
2,  3  ;  XV,  1.  The  Society. 

Embryologisches  Institut  der  K.  K.  Universitat  in  Wien.     Mittheil- 
ungen, x.  f..  1  H.  The  Director. 
K.  K.  Geologische  Keichsanstalt.     Jahrbuch,  XXXIV.  4— XXXV,  3. 
Abhandlungen,  XI.  1. 

Verhandlungen,  1884,  No.  15-1885.  No.  12.  The  Society. 

Mineralogische  und  Petrographische  Mittheilungen,  Tschermak.  n.  F., 

VI,  4-VII,  2.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Verein  zur  Verbreitung  Naturwissenschaftlichen  Kenntnisse.  Schriften, 

XXIV.  The  Society. 

Wienner  Ulustrirte  Garten-Zeitung,  1884,  No.  10—1885,  No.  9. 

The  Editor. 

K.  K.  Zoologisch-botanische  Gesellschaft.     Verhandlungen,  XXXIV, 

Register  ;  XXXV,  1.  The  Society. 

Zoologisches  Institut.     Arbeiten,  V,  3 ;  VI,  1.    ,  The  Director. 

Washington.     American  Monthly  Microscopical  Journal,  V,  12 — VI,  11. 

The  Editor. 
National  Academy  of  Sciences.     Report,  1883. 
Constitution  and  Membership,  April  21,  1882. 
Memoirs,  I. 

Proceedings,  I.     Nov.  16,  1880  to  end  of  1881.  The  Society. 

United  States  National  Museum.     Proceedings,  VII,  31— VIII,  36. 
United  States  Fish  Commission.     Bulletin,  IV,  V.     The  Commission. 
United  States  Publications,  Monthly  Catalogue.  I,  1 — 8. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Wellington.  New  Zealand  Institute.  Transactions,  I ;  XVII.  The  Society. 
Wheaton.  Young  Mineralogist  and  Antiquarian,  I,  6,  8-11.  The  Editor. 
West  Chester.     Philosophical  Society.     Proceedings,  July,  1885. 

The  Society. 
Westeras.     Redogorelse  for  Hogre  Allmanna  Larovertset,  1880-81,  1885. 

The  Director. 
Wiesbaden.    Nassauischer  Verein  fur  Naturkunde.   Jahrbucher,  XXXVII. 

The  Society. 
Worcester.     American  Antiquarian  Society.     Proceedings,  x.  s.,  Ill,  3,  4. 

The  Society. 

Wiirzburg.  Botanisches  Institut.  Arbeiten,  III,  2.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Physikalisch-medicinische  Gesellschaft.    Verhandlungen,  n.  F.,  XVIII. 

Sitzungsberichte,  1884.  The  Society. 

Zoologisch-zootomisches  Institut.     Arbeiten,  VII,  1-3. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Yokohama.     Asiatic  Society  of  Japan.     Transactions,  XII,  4  ;  XIII,  1. 

The  Society. 
York.  Natural  History  Journal  (and  School  Reporter),  No.  71.  The  Editor. 
Zurich.     Naturforschende  Gesellschaft.     Vierteljahrschrift,  XXVI  XXIX. 

The  Society. 


INDEX  TO  GENERA,  ETC. 


1885. 


PAGB.  |  PAGB. 

Abacocrinus.  .294,  312,  328,  332,  333  I  Archaeocrinus- 306,  311,  318 

Aceratherium 33    Arcbaegosaurus 101 

Acherontia 88    Arctostaphylos 379 


Acontia 

Acrocrinidae 342 

Acrocrinus.229, 232,  278,  312,  342-347 

Actinocrinidae 327 

Actinocrinus.  .244-247,  249,  232, 

253,  265,  273,  280,  283,  293,  334 

Actinonometra 288 

Agama 140    Attacus 


Argynnis 84,     86 

Artbroacantha. 338-341 

Ascaris 10 

Aster 376 

Asternotremia 137 

Asteroblastus 298 

Atbyma 87 

82 


Agaricocrinus 270,  327 

Agassizocrinus 232,  276 

Agelacrinus 298 

Agrias 177 

Alces 182,  183-20-2 

Allagecrinus 253-256,  279-281 

Alloprosallocrinus 328 

Ambloplites 410 

Ambrosia 376 

Amia 129 

Amiurus 410,  412 

Ammocoetes 410 

Ampboracrinus 335 

Anabas  132 

Anisocrinus 266 

Anomalocrinus. 234 

Anota : 138,  148 

Antedon.248,  253,  261,  262,  268 
2  7-2 
Anthemocrinus 


Auris 206 

Baerocrinus 233,  262 

Bariaudeocrinidae 347 

Barrandeocrinus 313,  347-349 

Batbycrinus 272 

Batocrinus...235,  238,  275,  282,  335 

Batracbidae 52 

Batracbus 52,  56-62,  70,     79 

Batracboides 52,  59-62 

Beegerite 19 

Belemnocrinus 293 

Beteocrinus 307 

Bidens 376 

Blatta 105,  111,  115 

Blattidium Ill,  112 

Blattina Ill,  112,  114 

Boarmia 88 

276   Boleosoma 411 

235,  311,  320,  321  |  Bothriocephalus 122,  123 

Antrostomus 10    Briarocrinus 237,   323 

Aphelops 33    Bromelica 41 

Apbododerus 137    Bulimus 206-213,  216-219 

Aphredoderus 136,  410 

Aphredodirus 136,  137    Calceocrinus 234,  264 


Aphrodedirus 137 

Aphrododerus 137 

Apiocrinus...227,  230,  248,  285, 


Callicrinus 312,  357,  358 

Callionymus 54 

Calluna 379 

290,  292,  293,  294  i  Calpiocrinus 229,  266 

(4-73) 


474 


PROCEEDINGS  OP   THE   ACADEMY   OP 


[1885. 


FAOE. 

Calyptocrinida} 349 

Campostoma 410,  412 

Canistroi'rinus 310,  311,  316 

Caprocrinus 327 

Carpocrinus 248 

Caryocrinus 298,  299 

Catagramma 177 

Catillocrinus 234,  264,  265 

Catopsilia 87 

Catostomus 410 

( !ecr<  >pia 26 

Centrocrinus 324 

Ceratodus 130 

Ceriocrinus 263 

Cervalces 181,  183,  184,  185 

Cervus 181,  182-202 

Ceryle 10 

Chserocampa 88 

Cbeilonemus 14,     18 

Chrosomus 410 

Cicuta 383 

Clusius 74,    75 

Cocroi-rinus.  ..239,  255-259,  263, 

268-280,  294,  313,  336 

Codaster 298 

Codiacrinus 262 

Colias 24,     25 

Collurio 92-94 

Collyrio 92,     94 

Comarocystites . .   299 

Compsocrinus 306,  309 

Cordylocrinus 337 

Corema 379 

Cory mbocrinus.... 294,  312,  328, 

332,  333 

Cotyledonocrinus 337 

Cromyocrinus 232 

Crotalocrinus.240,  241,  266,  272, 

278,  279,  286,  287,  290 

Cryptomeria 382 

Culicocrinus.  .239,  259,  263,  279 

280,  336 

Culius 79 

Cupressocrinus 298 

Cuprite 120,  122 

Cupulocrinus 306,  3<  >9 

Cyanocorax 90 

Cyatbocrinus..233,  243,  248,  249, 
253,  255,  257,  262,  264,  269, 

270,  275,  280,  286-288 

Cynthia 84 

Cylosthurus 384 

Cyprinus 15,  17,     is 

Cypripedium 30,  116 

Dama 183 

Danais 87 


PAGE. 

Delias 86 

Dendrocrinus 233,  262 

Desmidocrinus 327 

Dibothrium 122 

Dichocrinus 232,  239,  341 

Diludia 88 

Dimerocrinus 311,  320,  323 

Diplesion 411 

Diplomorpha.  .    223 

Discophora 86 

Dolatocrirms  235,  294 ,  327 

Doliosaurus 147,  148 

Dormitator 67,  71,  79,  80 

Dorycrinus...247,  270,  271,  282,  336 

Drepanopteryx 108 

Edriocrinus , 232 

Elseacrinus 243 

Eleotridinse   66 

Eleotris 66,  67,  69,  70,  73-80 

Elisama 112,  113 

Enallocrinus.  .240,  266,  278,  287,  290 

Encrinus 263,  289,  293 

Eogene 25 

Epeira 103,  104 

Erecthites 376 

Ereotelis 77 

Eretmocrinus 282,  335 

Ergolis 87 

Erica 379 

Erigeron 376 

Erisocrinus 234,  263 

Erotelis 68,  77,  79,  80 

Erythrite 120 

Esox 367-375,  410 

Etheostoma 411,  412 

Etoblattina 35 

Eucalyptocrimus...294,  312,  349-359 

Eucladocrinus.  • 236,  337 

Eucrinus 235,  306,  323 

Eudesicrinus 292 

Eugeniacriuites 255 

Eumelica 40 

Eupacbycrinus 262,  264 

Euploea 87 

Eurema 86 

Eusemia 84 

Euthalia 87 

Extracrinus..230,  242,  250,  282, 

286,  289,  290 

Festuca 47 

Filaria 10 

Forbesiocrinus....232,  236,  266,  292 

Fulgur 119 

Fundulus 13,  412 


1885.] 


NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA. 


475 


PAGE. 

Gaelus 59 

Galago 384 

Gallinago 10 

Gaurocrinus 306 

Gauvina 67,  70,  73,  79,     80 

Gelsemium , 22 

Gennaeocrinus 335 

Gentbite 120,  121 

Gissocrinus 231,  287 

Glaucopis 84 

Gleditschia 404 

GlycerisB 40 

Glyptasteridse 321 

Glyptaster 279,  306,  311,  323 

Glyptocrinus.229,  236,  240,  250, 
251,  252,  274,  278,  279,  283, 
285,  290,  293,  306-311,  321,  324 

Glyptocystites 299 

Gnaphalium 376 

Gnorimocrinus 266 

Gobiomorus 66,  68,  69,  70,     79 

Gobius 75,     79 

Gonepteryx 26 

Granatocrinus 255 

Grapbiocrinus 233,  263 

Guettardicrinus...227,  248,  285, 

292,  293 
Gymneleotris 68,  78-80 

Hadrocrinus 327 

Hadropterus 411 

Haplocrinus..253,  254,  262-264, 

268,  272,  275,  278-281,  294 

Hebomoia 87 

Hecla 25 

Hela 25 

Heliconius 176 

Helix 206,  212 

Hesperia  87 

Heterocrinus.229   234,  235,  275,  293 

Heteromeyenia 28,  29 

Heteroscbisma 243 

Hexacrinidse 338 

Hexacrinus 239,  294,  338 

Hipparcbia 87 

Hipparion . .  33 

Hippotberium 32,  33 

Hirundo 10 

Holopus 256,  257,  259,  267, 

272,  279,  292,  294,  299 

Homaloerinus 266 

Homocrinus 262 

Hoploerinus 233,  235 

Hudsonia  379 

Hybocrinus 233,  262,  299,  318 

Hybocystites 275,  298 

Hybognathus 18,  410 


I'AGE. 

Hybopsis 410 

Hyborbynchus 63,  64,     65 

Hydrargyra 12,     13 

Hylotomus 11 

Hyocrinus 231,  267,  272,  292 

Hypanthocrinus 349 

Hypeneus 152 

Icbthyocrinus....232,  236,   206, 

287,  292 

Iocrinus 262 

Ixias 87 

Junco 9 

Junonia 86 

Labidestbes 410,  412 

Lacerta 145 

Lactuca 376 

Ladia 88 

Lampterocrinus...306,  309,  311,  323 

Lanius 91-96 

Lecanocrinus. 266 

Lecythiocrinus 231 

Lembus 68,  79 

Lepidosiren 129,  130,  131,  133 

Lepidosteus 129 

Lepomis 410,411,  412 

Leptocrinus 327 

Leptops 410 

Letbe 87 

Leuciscus 13,  15,  18 

Leucosomus 14,  15,  16,  18 

Liatris 376 

Limax 206 

Limenitis 84 

Litbocrinus 266 

Lopbius 59 

Lucius 367 

Lumbricus 20,  408 

Lycsena 86 

Lycium 23 

Lyriocrinus 311,  318,  321 

Macrochlamys 82 

Macrostylocrinus 324 

Mamillaria 117,  118,  378 

Mariacrinus 307,  309,  311,  326 

Marsupiocrinus 239,  247,  337 

Marsupites 282 

Mascalongus 367 

Mastodon 49 

Megaceros 184,  188-202 

Megalonyx 50 

Megistocrinus.  .270,     271,     272, 

278,  328,  333,  334 

Melanitis 86 


476 


PROCEEDINGS    OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP 


[1885. 


Melanura 12,     13 

Melica 40-48 

Melocrinidae 323 

Melocrinus..236,  240,  249,  251, 

270,  294,  326 

Menobranchus 129 

Mesoblattiiia 112-115 

Mespilocrinus 266 

Metacrinus 293 

Micropteras 411 

Miletus 87 

Millerocrinus 230 

Minytrema 410 

Monostomum 10 

Moxostoma 410,  412 

Mulgedium 376 

Mullhypeneus 152,  154 

Mulloides 152,  154 

Mullus 149-153 

Mycalesis 86 

Mylacris 34 

Mylodon 49,50,     51 

Myocrinus 294 

Myrica 379 

Naja 82 

Neortbroblattina 108 

Neptis 86 

Netbania 112 

Notemigonus 412 

Northia 88 

Notropis 410,  412 

Noturus 410 

Ollacrinus 311,  321 

Onychocrinus 236,  241,  242,  266 

Opbiusa 88 

Opuntia 118,  365,  378 

Oryctoblattina 34,  37 

Orycterotberium 51 

Otis 206 

Pampbila 87 

Pantana 88 

Papilio 84,  85,  174 

I  'aromvlacris 35 

Partula 203-223 

Partulus 206 

Parupeneus 152 

Pastinaca * 383 

Patelliocrinus 324 

Pelidne 25 

Pentacrinus 230,  272,  277 

Percina 41 1 

Periecbocrinus 240,  328,  344 

Petrablattina 38 

Phalsena 84 


PAGE. 

Pbilliposcrinus 334 

Pbilypnus 68,  69,  70,     79 

Phimocrinus 263 

Pbissama 88 

Pboca 384 

Pbolcus 103 

Pboraspis 110 

Phrynosoma 138,  140-148 

Pbysetocrinus 240,  252,  282, 

283,  290,  335 

Picorellus 367 

Picus 11 

Pieris 84,     85 

Pimephales 63,  64,  65,  412 

Pinus 379 

Pisocrinus 263 

Placostylus 223 

Platycepbalus 70,  79 

Platycrinidae 336 

Platycrinus..235,  239,242,  244, 
247,  249,  250,  253,  257-260, 
263,  280,  283-285,  294,  313,  337 

Plesioneura 87 

Pleurocystites 299 

Plicatocrinus 293 

Plusia 178 

Pceciloptera 108 

Polygala 379 

Polyuemus 126 

Polypeltes 330,  332,  333 

Polypterus 129 

Pomoxys 410 

Poricbthys 52,  56,     57 

Poroblattina 38,     39 

Porocrinus 298,  299 

Poteriocrimis 233,262,  291 

Precis 86 

Primotus 377 

Procbilus 71 

Promylacris 34 

Protopterus 130 

Pseudupeneus 152 

Pterinoblattina 105-108 

Pterotocrinus 232,  342 

Ptycbocrinus  311,   321 

Pycnocrinus 306 

Pycnosaccus 266 

Pytbon 82 

Quercus 118,  365,  379 

Reteocrinida? 316 

Reteocriims.   2:55,236,  240,  249- 
252,  265,   266,  278,    279,   285, 

'.".10.  :;oii  308,  311,  316,  318-321 

Rhaphanocrinus 311,  320 

Rhinichthys 410 


1885.] 


NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA. 


477 


PAGE. 

Rhinoceros 32,  33 

Rhipidocrinus 311,  321 

Rhodocrinidae 318 

Rhodocrinus 311,  321 

Rhizocrinus 260,  267,  272 

Rhus 383 

Ricania 108 

Kil>idocrinus 236 

Rithma 112-115 

Saccocrinus 328 

Sagenocrinus 306,  321 

Salmo 122 

Salvelinus 122 

Sambucus 23 

Samia 26 

Saturnia 84 

Schizocrinus 235 

Sciaena 71,     79 

Scolopsis 136 

Scomber 126 

Scorpsena 394-403 

Scutinoblattina 110 

Scyphocrinus 312,  327 

Sebastes 127 

Semotilus 14-18,  410 

Sequoia 382 

Sesia 84 

Sivatherium 187 

Solidago 376 

Spilarctia , 88 

Spiloblattina 35,  36,     37 

Spiroptera 11 

Spongilla 29 

Squalius 18 

Steganocrinus...,236,  243,  268,  335 

Stelidiocrinus 324 

Stemmatocrinus 231,  277 

Stephanocrinus 298 

Stereocrinus 235,  327 

Sternotremia 136,  137 

Stibnite - 224 

Stortingocrinus 263 

Strotocrinus..247,  271,  277,  278,  335 


PAGE. 

Stumella 10 

Stylocrinus 263 

Symbatkocrinus...259,  260,  263, 

264,  269,  280,  298 

Talarocrinus 232,  239,  342 

Tapaya 141 

Tarsuis 384 

Taxocrinus 232,  236,  266,  292 

Technocrinus 326 

Tecoma 23 

Teleiocrinus 270,  271,  278,  335 

Tereias 85 

Thauraantis 84 

Thaumatocrinus..227,  248,  250, 
265,  266,  267,  272,  286,  289, 

292,  293,  295,  311 

Thecla 84 

Theorema 176 

Theridion 102 

Thylacocrinus 306,  311,  321 

Thalassophryne 52-55 

Triacriuus 263 

Tribrachiocrinus 231,  232 

Trigla 150 

Tropaea 88 

Tropidogaster 145 

Unitacrinus 227,  286,  292,  293 

Umbra 12,     13 

Upeneus 149,  152-155 

Uranidea 411 

Vanessa 26,     86 

Vernonia 376 

Voluta 206 

Xanthium 376 

Xenocrinus...231,  249,  250,  265, 

279,  306,  307,  309,  311,  316,  317 

Ypthima 86 

Zeacrinus 229,  262 

Zygonectes 412 


478 


PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF 


[1885. 


GENERAL  INDEX. 


Aaron,  S.  Frank.  On  some  new 
species  of  Psocidae.  406. 

Additions  to  Library,  441. 

Additions  to  Museum,  436. 

Allen,  Plarrison,  M.  D.  On  the  pec- 
toral filaments  of  the  Sea  Robin 
(Primotus  palmipes),  377 ;  The 
shape  of  the  hind  limbs  in  the 
mammalia  as  modified  by  the 
weight  of  the  trunk,  383. 

Annual  election,  434. 

Barton,  Mrs.  S.  R.  Announcement 
of  death  of,  30. 

Bartram,  Win.  Presentation  of 
manuscript  diary  of,  120. 

Bicknell,  Ernest  P.,  and  Fletcher  B. 
Dresslar.  A  review  of  the  species 
of  the  Genus  Semotilus,  9,  14. 

Binder,  Jacob.  Resolution  of  thanks 
to,  380;  Report  on  the  Wm.  S. 
Vaux  Collections,  419. 

Biological  and  Microscopical  Section, 
report  of,  421. 

Blatchley,  Willis  S.  On  the  Ameri- 
can Species  of  the  Genus  Umbra, 
9,  12;  A  review  of  the  Genus  Pime- 
phales,  30,  63;  On  Genus  Aphredo- 
derus,  117,  136. 

Botanical  Section,  report  of,  426. 

Brinton,  D.  G.,  M.  D.  Report  of 
Professor  of  Ethnology  and  Arch- 
aeology, 430. 

Clyde,  Thomas.  Announcement  of 
death  of,  20. 

Conchological  Section,  report  of,  422. 

Corresponding  Secretary,  report  of, 
414. 

Curators,  report  of,  417. 

Dunker,  Rud.  Wm.  Announcement 
of  death  of,  866. 


Eastlake,  F.  Warrington.  Entomo- 
logia  Hongkongensis. — Report  on 
the  Lepidoptera  of  Hongkong,  49, 
81. 

Eigenman,  Carl  H.  A  review  of  the 
American  Gasterostidce,  380. 

Eigenman,  Carl  H.,  and  Morton  W. 
Fordice.  A  catalogue  of  the  fishes 
of  Bean  Blossom  Creek,  Monroe 
Co.,  Ind.,  380,  410 ;  A  review  of 
the  American  Eleotridinse,  :>2.  60; 
List  of  fishes  collected  in  Harvey 
and  Cowley  Counties,  Kansas,  380, 
412. 

Elections  during  1885,  435. 

Entomological  Section,  report  of,  424. 

Everman,  B.  W.  and  Seth  E.  Meek. 
A  revision  of  the  American  Species 
of  the  Genus  Gerres,  3S0. 

Fielde,  Adele  M.  Observations  on 
tenacity  of  life,  and  regeneration 
of  excised  parts  in  Lumbricus  ter- 
restris,  20. 

Foote,  A.  E.,  M.  D.  On  large  crys- 
tals of  Stibnite,  224. 

General  Index,  478. 

Gentry,  Alan  F.  Description  of  a 
supposed  new  Species  of  the  Genus 
Cyanocorax.  49,  90;  A  review  of 
the  Genus  Phrynosoma,  119,  138. 

Hall,  Edw.  A.  and  J.  Z.  A.  Mc 
Caughan.  A  review  of  the  Amer- 
ican Genera  and  Species  of  Mul- 
lidae,  120,  149. 

Hartman,  Wm.  D.,  M.  D.  Descrip- 
tions of  new  species  of  Partula  and 
a  svnonymical  catalogue  of  the 
genus,  180,  203. 


1885.] 


NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA. 


479 


Heilprin,  Angelo.  Report  of  Cura- 
tors, 417.  Report  of  Professor  of 
Invertebrate  Paleontology,  429. 

Henle,  Dr.  J.  Announcement  of 
death  of,  180. 

Henszey,  Wm.  C.  Report  of  Treas- 
urer, 431. 

Hess,  Robert  J.,  M.  D.  Report  of 
Biological  and  Microscopical  Sec- 
tion, 421. 

Horn,  Geo.  H.,  M.  D.  Report  of 
Corresponding  Secretary,  414. 

Hough,  Franklin  B.  Announcement 
of  death  of,  180. 

Index  of  Genera,  etc.,  473. 

Jeffries,  J.  Gwynn.  Announcement 
of  death  of,  30. 

Johnson,  Henry  N.  Bequest  of,  380. 
Biographical  notice  of,  381. 

Jones,  Jacob  P.  Announcement  of 
death  of,  156. 

Koenig,  Geo.  A.  A  new  locality  for 
Beegerite,  19. 

Leidy,  Jos.,  M.  D.  On  some  Para- 
sitic Worms  of  Birds,  9  ;  Rhinoce- 
ros and  Hippotherium  from  Flo- 
rida, 32  ;  Remarks  on  Mylodon, 
49 ;  Bothriocephalus  in  a  trout, 
122  ;  Worms  in  ice,  408. 

Lewis,  H.  C.  Erythrite,  Genthite 
and  Cuprite  from  near  Philadel- 
phia, 120 ;  Marginal  Karnes,  156, 
157. 

Librarian,  report  of,  -415. 

Library,  additions  to,  441. 

McCook,  Rev.  Henry  C.  Hiberna- 
tion and  Winter  habits  of  Spiders, 
102. 

McCormick,  Calvin.  Inclusions  in 
the  Granite  of  Craftsbury,  Vt.,  408. 

Meehan,  Thos.  Spicate  inflorescence 
in  Cypripedium  insigne,  30  ;  Per- 
sistence in  variations  suddenly  in- 
troduced, 116  ;  Influence  of  tem- 
perature on  the  separate  sexes  of 
flowers,  117  ;  Elasticity  of  the  fruit 
of  Cactacese,  117  ;.  Presentation  of 
manuscript  diary  of  Wm.  Bartram, 
120;  Note  on  Quercus  prinoides, 
365  ;  On  the  fruit  of  Opuntia,  365  ; 
Inflorescence  of  the  Composite, 
376  ;  Notes  on  Cactacese,  378  ;  Bi- 
ographical notice  of  Heniy  N. 
Johnson,  381 ;  Virulence  of  the 
common  parsnip,  383  ;  On  a  white- 
seeded  variety  of  the  Honey  Lo- 
cust, 404  ;  Report  of  Botanical  Sec- 
tion, 426. 


Meek,  Seth  E.,  and  Edw.  A.  Hall. 
A  review  of  the  American  genera 
and  species  of  Batrachidie,  29,  52. 

Meek,  Seth  E.,  and  Robert  Newland. 
A  review  of  the  species  of  the 
genus  Esox,  366,  367  ;  A  revision 
of  the  American  species  of  the 
genus  Scorpama,  380,  394. 

Mineralogical  and  Geological  Sec- 
tion, report  of,  428. 

Morris,  Charles.  The  primary  con- 
ditions of  fossilization,  97  ;  On  the 
air-bladder  of  fishes,  119,  124  ;  At- 
tack and  defense  as  agents  in  ani- 
mal evolution,  378,  385  ;  Methods 
of  defense  in  organisms,  406. 

Museum,  additions  to,  436. 

Nolan,  Edw.  J.,  M.  D.  Report  of 
Recording  Secretary,  413;  Report 
of  Librarian,  415. 

Officers,  Councillors  and  Members  of 
Finance  Committee,  434. 

Peale,  Titian  R.  Announcement  of 
death  of,  49. 

Phillips,  Moro.  Announcement  of 
death  of,  366. 

Piatt,  Wm.  G.  Announcement  of 
death  of,  393. 

Potts,  Edw.  A  new  fresh-water 
Sponge  from  Nova  Scotia,  28. 

Powell,  Samuel.  Announcement  of 
death  of,  32. 

Professor  of  Ethnology  and  Archae- 
ology, report  of,  430. 

Professor  of  Invertebrate  Paleon- 
tology, report  of,  429. 

Professor  of  Invertebrate  Zoology, 
report  of,  429 

Rand,  Theo.  D.  Notes  on  the  Lafay- 
ette Serpentine  Belt,  393,  407  ; 
Report  of  Mineralogical  Section, 
428. 

Recording  Secretary,  report  of,  413. 

Redfield,  J.  H.  On  the  flora  of 
Martha's  Vineyard  and  Nan- 
tucket, 378  ;  Report  of  Botanical 
Section,  428 

Report  of  Biological  and  Micro- 
scopical Section,  421. 

Report  of  Botanical  Section,  426. 

Report  of  Conchological  Section, 
422. 

Report  of  Corresponding  Secretary, 

414. 
Report  of  Curators,  417. 
Report   of   Entomological    Section, 
434. 

j  Report  of  Librarian,  415. 


480 


PROCEEEINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY. 


[1885. 


Report  of  Mineralogical  and  Geo- 
logical Section,  428. 

Report  of  Professor  of  Ethnology 
and  Archaeology,  430. 

Report  of  Professor  of  Invertebrate 
Zoology,  439. 

Report  of  Professor  of  Invertebrate 
Paleontology,  429. 

Report  of  Recording  Secretary,  4 1 :;. 

Report  of  Treasurer,  431. 

Ridings,  J.  II.  Report  of  Entomo- 
logical Section,  424. 

Roberts,  S.  Raymond.  Report  of 
Conchological  Section,  424. 

Rotbrock,  J.  T.,  M.  D.  The  inter- 
nal cambium  ring  in  Gelsemium 
sempervirens,  22. 

Scott,  W.  13.  Cervalces  Americanus, 
a  fossil  Moose,  or  Elk,  from  the 
Quaternary  of  New  Jersey,  180, 
181. 

Scribner,  F.  Lamson.  A  revision  of 
the  North  American  Melicae, 
32,  40. 

Scudder,  Samuel  H.  New  Genera 
and  species  of  fossil  Cockroaches 
from  the  older  American  rocks, 
32,  34 ;  Notes  on  Mesozoic  Cock- 
roaches, 101,  105. 


Sharp,  Benj.,  M.  D.  Report  of  Pro- 
fessor of  Invertebrate  Zoology,  429. 

Silliman,  Benj.,  Jr.,  announcement 
of  death  of,  32. 

Smith,  Uselma  C,  resolution  of 
thanks  to,  380. 

Stein,  F.  Ritter  v.,  announcement  of 
death  of,  20. 

Stejneger,  Leonhard.  Remarks  on 
Lanius  robustus  Baird,  based  on 
an  examination  of  the  type  speci- 
men, 89,  91. 

Strecker,  Hermann.  Description  of 
a  new  Colias  from  the  Rocky 
Mountains  and  of  an  example  of 
Polymelianism  in  Samia  cecropia, 
19,  24  ;  Description  of  new  species 
of  Lepidoptera,  156,  174. 

Treasurer,  report  of,  431. 

Wachsmuth,  Chas.,  and  Frank 
Springer.  Revision  of  the  Palseo- 
crinoidea,  Part  III,  224,  225. 

Wagner,  Wm.,  announcement  of 
death  of,  19;  Resolutions  of 
regret,  20. 

Whitney,  Geo.,  announcement  of 
death  of,  32. 

Wilcox,  Jos.  Spawning  of  Fulgur 
perversus,  119. 


Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  Phila.,  i 


PI.  IV. 


Orestes  St.  John,  del. 


WACHSMUTH  AND  SPRINGER  ON   CRINOIDEA. 


Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  Phila.,  i{ 


PI.  V. 


Orestes  St.  John,  del. 


WACHSMUTH  AND  SPRINGER  ON   CRINOIDEA. 


Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  Phila.,  1885 


PI.  VI. 


WACHSMUTH  AND  SPRINGER  ON  CRINOIDEA. 


Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  Phila.,  1885 


PI.  VII 


WACHSMUTH  AND  SPRINGER  ON  CRINOIDEA. 


Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  Phila.,  1885 


PI.  VI 


WACHSMUTH  AND  SPRINGER  ON  CRINOIDEA. 


Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  Phila.,  i{ 


PI.  IX. 


0 


WACHSMUTH  AND  SPRINGER  ON  CRINOIDEA. 


m 


PROCEEDINGS 


T 


PHILADELPHIA. 


PART  I.— JANUARY,  FEBRUARY,  MARCH,  1SS5. 


PUBLICATION  COMMITTEE. 

JosErn  Leidt,  M.  D.,  Geo.  II.  IIoux,  M.  D.f 

Edw.  J.  Nolan,  M.  D.,  Tuomas  Meeiian, 

J.  II.  Redfield. 

EDITOR:    Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.  D. 


0 


~\ 


wMlsl* 


PHILADELPHIA: 
ACADEMY    OF    NATURAL    SCIENCES, 

S.  W.  Cor.  of  19th  ami  K:icc  Streets. 
1SS5. 


PUBLICATIONS  OF  THE 
ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES 


OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


Kizht  volumes  of  the  New  Series  of  the  Journal  nnd  Part  I  of  Volume  IX  (Quarto) 
have  been  issue d  — 1S47  to  I8S4.  The  price  per  volume  of  four  |>arts  is  $10,  or  $3  per  part,  to 
subscribers ;  ami  to  others.  $12.50  tier  volume,  or  $(.75  per  part.  Vol.  VII  contains  "The 
Extinct  Mammalian  Fauna  of  Dakota  ami  Nebraska,  with  a  Synopsis  of  the  Mammalian 
Remains  ot  North  America."     Illustrated  with  thirty  plates.    By  Joseph  Leidy.M.D.,  LI..D. 

The  Fiust  Series  op  the  Journal.  1*17  to  1842,  in  eight  volumes,  octavo,  may  be 
obtained  at  $-10  to  members,  and  to  the  public.  $4S. 

The  FiitsT  Skiiiks  of  thf,  Proceedings  of  the  Society,  published  in  octavo,  18-11  to 
1S56,  of  which  eight  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1S5G,  may  be  obtained  at  $24  to 
members;   and  to  the  public,  $.'!0. 

The  Second  Series  of  THE  Proceedings,  commencing  January  1,  1857  (of  which 
fourteen  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31.  1S70),  may  bo  obtained  at  $42  to  members,  or  $3 
per  volume  separately;  and  to  the  public,  $:!.75  per  volume. 

The  Tiiihd  Skiiiks  of  tiik  Proceedings,  Illustrated,  commencing  January  1,  1S71, 
(of  which  fourteen  volumes  were  completed  D<  c.  '■'>],  1SS4),  is  published  at  $5  per  annum,  payable 
in  advance,  to  subscribers;   single  volumes,  $0.25. 

,23&~  A  life  subscription   to  either  the  Proceedings  or  Journal  has  been  placed  at 

$10.  or  $7.»   lor   both. 

American  Journal  of  Concfiolooy,  1865-71.  Seven  vols.,  8vo.  Containing  2500 
pages,  illustrated  by  one  hundred  and  fifty  plates,  many  of  them  colored,  besides  about  a 
thousand  wood  engravings.  Published  at  $70.  Price  reduced  to  $42  for  the  set.  Separate 
volume^,  $10  each. 

BOOKS     FOR.     SAIfE. 

The  Academy  has  the  following  works  for  sale  at  the  prices  affixed: 

Description  of  SnF.i.LS  of  Nortii  America,  with  68  colored  plates.      By  TnoMAS  Say. 

1830-34.     $10.50. 
Monograph  of  the  Terrestrial  Mom.itsca  of  the  United  States.     With  illustrations 

of  all  the  species.     By  (Jeo.  W.  Tryoji,  Jr.      Fine  edition,  plate  paper,  with  duplicate 

plates,  colored  and  tinted,  $20:    colored  edition,  $13.50;    plain  edition,  $8.50.      Only 

one  hundred  copies  printed,  which  have  been  mostly  sold. 
Monograph  of  thk  Fhksh  Water  Univalve  Moi.Li'SCA  of  the  United  States.    By  S.  S. 

Haldkman,  1840-41.     With  Continuation  to   1871.     By  (J'korce  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     2 

vols.,  with  many  colored    plates.       Fine    edition,  duplicate  plates,  $40;    with  colored 

plates,  $25;  with  plain  plates,  $18. 

Either  the  original  work  or  the  continuation  furnished  separately,  if  desired. 
Synonymy  of  the  Species  op  Strkpomatid*:  (Melanians)  of  the   United  States.     By 

Quo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth,  $2  ;  paper,  $1.75. 
List  of  American  Writkrs  on  Recent  Conchologv,  with  the  Titles  of  their  Memoirs 

nnd  Dates  of  Publication.     By  Geo.  W.   Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth,  $2;  paper,  £1.75. 
Monograph  of  the  Order  Pholadacea    and    other    Papers.       By  (jeo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr. 

Cloth,  $2;  paper,  $l.7.=>. 
Complf.tr  Writings  on  Recent  and  Fossil  C»NcnoLOGY  of  C.  S.  Rafinesqub.     Edited 

by  Wm.  (J.  ISinney  and  (J    W.  Tryon,  .In.     $2  50. 
Observations  on  the  Genus   Unio.     By  Isaac   Lea,  LB.  D.     4to,  Vols.  1  to  13.     With 

Index,  Nos.  1,  2  and  3,  complete.     Illustrated  with  several  hundred  fine  lithographio 

plates.     $60. 

Same,  Vols.  2  to  13  inclusive,  except  Vol*.  4  and  12.     Each   volume  separately,  $5. 
Synopsis  of  Genua  Unio.     By   Isaac  Lea,  LI..  D.     Fourth  edition.     $3. 
Contributions  to  Gp.ology.     By  Isaac  Lea.     $5. 
Fossil.  Foot-Marks.     By  Isaac  Lea.     Large  folio,  text  and  plate.     $2. 

Same,  plate  alone.     50  C(  nts. 

Notice  to  Booksellers. — All  Hie  publications  of  the  Society  -will  bo  sup- 
plied to  Booksellers  at  a  discount  of  20  percent  on  the  prices  charged  to  the  public. 

Application  to  \>c  made  to  Eowaud  J.  Nolan,  M.D.,  at  the  Hull  of  the 
Academy,  corner  of  Nineteenth  and  Kace  Streets. 

April,  L885. 


CONTENTS, 


TAOE. 

Leidy,  Jos.,  M.  D.     On  somo  Parasitic  Worms  of  Birds,             ...  9 

Blatciiley,  Wilms  S.     On  the  American  Species  of  the  Genus  Umbra,  .  12 

Bicknei.l,  Ernest  P.,  and  Fletcher  B.  Dresslar.    A  Review  of  the 

Species  of  tho  Genus  Semotilus, 14 

Koexig,  Geo.  A.     A  new  locality  for  Becgeritc, 19 

Fielde,  Adele  M.     Observations  on  Tenacity  of  Life  and  Regeneration 

of  excised  paits  in  Lumbiicusterrestris, 20 

Rothrock,  J.  T.,   M.  D.     The  internal   Cambium  Ring  in  Gelscmium 

sempervirens,            ........  22 

Strecker,    Hermann.      Description  of  a  new   Colias  from   the  Rocky 

Mountaius,  and  of  an  example  of  Polymelianism  in  Samia  Cecropia,  24 

Potts,  E.     A  new  fresh-water  Sponge  from  Nova  Scotia,    ....  28 

Meehan,  Tnos.     Spicato  Inflorescence  in  Cypripedium  insigne,          .         .  30 

Leidy,  Jos.,  M.  D.     Rhinoceros  and  llippotherium  from  Florida,      .        .  32 

Scddder,  S.  II.     New  Genera  and  Species  of  Fossil  Cockroaches  from  tho 

older  Amciican  Rocks, 34 

Scribner,  F.  Lamson.    A  Revision  of  the  North  Amci  ican  Melicje  (Plate  I)  40 

Leidy,  Jos.,  M.  D.    Remarks  on  MylodoD, 49 

Meek,  SETn  E.  and  Edw.  A.  Hall.     A  Review  of  the  American  Genera 

and  Species  of  Batrachidae, 50 

Bi.ATcni.EY,  Willis  S.     A  Review  of  the  Species  of  tho  Genus  Piraephales,  G3 

Eigenmaxn,    Cakl   H.,    and   Morton   W.   Fordice.     A   Review  of  the 

American  Eleotridinaj, qq 

Eaetj.ake,  F.   Warrington.     Entomologia  Ilongkongens  s.  -Report  on 

the  Lepidoptera  of  Hongkong 81 

Gentry,  Alan  F.     Description  of  a  new  Species  of  the  Genus  Cyanocorax,  90 

Stejnegkr,  LEoxnARD.      Remarks  on  Lanius  robustus  Baird,  based  on 

an  examination  of  the  type  specimen 91 


JS 


"tLOARI'S  MlNTlNO  HOUSE,  t!4  I  7»»  SANSOM  5T 


PROCEEDINGS 


lcit.lc.ng  of  fatotal  Jdtttas 


7 


PHILADELPHIA. 


PvlKT  II.-APBIL  to  JULY,    1885. 


PUBLICATION  COMMITTEE. 
,T  n  Geo.  H.  Hokn,  M.  D., 

JOSEPH  LKIPY,    M    D  oma9  MbehaNj 

Edw.  J.  Nolan,  M.  D., 

J.  H.  Redpield. 

EDITOR:    Edward  J.   Nolan,  NL  D. 


ACA 


PHILADELPHIA: 
DEMY    OF    NATURAL    SCIENCES, 

S.  W.  Cor.  of  19th  an*  Race  Streets. 
1 8-8  5. 


m 


S 


PUBLICATIONS  OF  THE 
ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES 


OF    PHILADELPHIA. 


Eight  volumes  of  t he  Now  Series  of  the  Journal  and  Part  I  of  Volume  IX  (Quarto) 
have  been  issued,— 1847  to  1SS4.  The  price  per  volume  of  four  parts  is  $10,  or  $3  per  part,  to 
subscribers;  and  to  others.  $12.50  per  volume,  orS<.75  per  part.  Vol.  VII  contains  "The 
Extinct  Mammalian  Fauna  of  Dakota  and  Nebraska,  with  a  Synopsis  of  the  Mammalian 
Remain-  ot  North  America."    Illustrated  with  thirty  plates.    By  Joseph  Leidy,  M.D.,  LL.D. 

The  Fikst  Series  of  tub  Journal.  1  SI 7  to  1842,  in  eight  volumes,  octavo,  may  he 
obtained  :it  $40  to  members,  and  to  the  public,  $48, 

The  Fiust  Series  of  thk  Proceedings  of  the  Society,  published  in  octavo,  1 S4 1  to 
1S50,  of  which  eight  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1856,  may  be  obtained  at  $24  to 
members;  and  to  the  public,  $30, 

The  Second  Series  of  the  Proceedings,  commencing  January  1,  1857  (of  which 
fourteen  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1870),  may  be  obtained  at  $42  to  members,  or  $3 
per  volume  separately;  and  to  the  public,  $H.75  per  volume. 

The  Tumi)  Series  of  the  Proceedings,  Illustrated,  commencing  January  1,  1S71, 
(of  which  fourteen  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1SS4),  is  published  at  $5  per  annum,  payable 
in  advance,  to  subscribers;  single  volumes,  $6.25. 

;JS9~  A  life  subscription  to  either  the  Proceedings  or  Journal  has  been  placed  at 
$40,  or  $75  lor  both. 

American  Journal  op  Conchologv,  1865-71.  Seven  vols.,  8vo.  Containing  2500 
pages,  illustrated  by  one  hundred  ami  fifty  plates,  many  of  them  colored,  besides  about  a 
thousand  wood  engravings.  Published  at  $70.  Price  reduced  to  $42  for  the  set.  Separate 
volumes,  $10  each. 

BOOKS     FOR    SAIiE. 

The  Academy  has  the  following  works  for  sale  at  the  prices  affixed: 

Description  of  Shells  of  North  America,  with  68  colored  plates.      By  Thomas  Say. 

1830-34.     $10.50. 
Monograph  of  the  Terrf.striai,   Mollusca  op  the  United  States.     With  illustrations 

of  all  the  species.     By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Fine  edition,  plate  paper,  with  duplicate 

plates,  colored  and  tinted,  $20;    colored  edition,  $13.50;    plain  edition,  $8.50.      Only 

one  hundred  copies  printed,  which  have  been  mostly  sold. 
Monograph  of  thk  Fresh  Water  Dnivalve  Mollusca  of" the  United  States.    By  S.  S. 

Haldeman,  1840-44.     With  Continuation  to  1871.     By  George  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     2 

vols.,  with  many  colored    plates.      Fine   edition,  duplicate  plates,  $40;    with  colored 

plates,  $25  ;   with  plain  plates,  SIS. 

Either  the  original  work  or  the  continuation  furnished  separately,  if  desired. 
Synonymy  of  thk  Species  op  StrepomatidjR  (Melanians)  of  the  United  States.     By 

Quo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth,  $2;  paper,  SI. 75. 
List  of  American  Writers  on  Recent  Conchology,  with  the  Titles  of  their  Memoirs 

and  Dales  of  Publication.     By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth,  $2  ;  paper,  $1.75. 
Monograph  op  the  Order  Pholadacea    and   other    Papers.      By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr. 

Cloth,  $2;    paper,  $1. 75. 
Complkte  Writin&s  on  Recent  and  Fossil  C»nchology  of  C.  S.  Rapinesque.     Edited 

by  Wh.  G.  Binney  and  G    W.  Tryon,  Jr.    S2.50. 
Observations  on  thk  Genus  Unio.    By  Isaac  Lea,  LL.  D.    4to,  Vols.  1  to  13.    With 

Index,  Nos.  1,  2  and  3,  complete.     Illustrated  with  several  hundred  fine  lithographio 

plates       $60. 

Same,  Vols.  2  to  13  inclusive,  except  Vols.  4  and  12.     Each  volume  separately,  $5. 
Synopsis  of  Genus  Unio.     By   Isaac  Lea,  LL.  D.     Fourth  edition.     $5. 
Contributions  to  Geology.     By  Isaac  Lea.    $•'.. 
Fossn.  Fuot-Marks.     By  Isaac  Lea.     Large  folio,  text  and  plate.     $2. 

Same,  plate  alone.      50   cents. 

Notick  to  Booksellers. — All  the  publications  of  the  Society  will  bo  sup- 
plied to  Booksellers  at  a  discount  of  20  percent  on  the  prices  charged  to  the  public. 

Application  to  be  made  to  Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.D.,  at  the  Hall  of  thr 
Academy,  comer  of  Nineteenth  and  Race  Streets. 

October,  1885. 


3* 


E 


CONTENTS. 


Morris,  Charles.     The  Primary  Conditions  of  Fossilization. 

McCook,  Rev.  H.  C.     Hibernation  and  Winter  Habits  of  Spiders, 

Scudder,  S.  H.     Notes  on  Mesozoic  Cockroaches, 

Meeiian.  Tiios.     Persistence  in  Variations  Suddenly  Introduced, 

Meehan,  Thos.     Influence  of  Temperature  on  the  Separate  Sexes 
of  Flowers,      ....... 

Meehan,  Thos.     Elasticity  in  the  Fruit  of  Cactaceae, 

Willcox,  Jos.     Spawning  of  Fulgur  perversus,   . 

Lewis,  H.  C.     Erythrite,  Genthite  and  Cuprite  from  near  Phila 
delphia,    ........ 

Leidy,  Jos.,  M.  D.     Bothriocephalic  in  a  Trout .  . 

Morris,  Chas.     On  the  Air-Bladder  of  Fishes,     . 

Blatchley,  Willis  S.     On  the  Genus  Aphredoderus, 

Gentry,  Alan  F.     A  Review  of  the  Genus  Phrynosoma,    . 

Hall,  Edw,  A.     A  Review  of  the  American  Genera  and  Species 
of  Mullidse,     .         .         .        .         .         .    ■     . 

Lewis,  II.  C.     Marginal  Blames  (Plate  III). 

Streckeb,  Herman.    Descriptions  of  New  Species  of  Lepidoptera 

Scott,  \\  .  B.     Cervalces  Americanus,  a   fossil   Moose,  or   Elk 
from  the  Quaternary  of  New  Jersey  (Plate  II),     . 

Hartman,  Wm.  !>.,  M.  D.     Descriptions  of  New  Species  of  Par- 
tula  and  a  Synonymic  Catalogue  of  the  Genus, 

Poote,  Dr.  A.  E.     On  large  Crystals  of  Stibnite, 


97 
102 
105 
116 

in 

117 

Hit 

120 

122 

124 
13(i' 
138 

149 
157 
174 

181 

203 

22  1 


,  In  1  lit  S« 


PROCEEDINGS 


^tdtm  4  $ atwl  $«*»<** 


PHILADELPHIA. 


PiBT  III.— AUG  VST  to  DECEMBER,  1885. 


PUBLICATION  COMMITTEE. 

Joseph  Leidy,  M.  Dm  Oko.  H.  Horn,  M.  D., 

Edw.  J.  Nolan,  M.  D.,  Thomas  Meehan, 

J.  H.  Redfield. 

EDITOR:    Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.  D. 


PHILADELPHIA: 
ACADEMY    OF    NATURAL    SCIENCES, 

LOGAN  SQl]  VIfE. 
1886. 


PUBLICATIONS  OF  THE 
ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES 


OF   PHILADELPHIA. 


Eight  volumes  of  the  New  Series  of  the  Journal  and  Part  I  of  Volume  IX  (Quarto) 
have  been  issued — 1847  to  1884.  The  price  per  volume  of  four  parts  is  $10,  or  $3  per  part,  to 
subscribers;  and  to  others,  $12.50  per  volume,  or  $3.75  per  part.  Vol.  VII  contains  "The 
Extinct  Mammalian  Fauna  of  Dakota  and  Nebraska,  with  a  Synopsis  of  the  Mammalian 
Remains  of  North  America."    Illustrated  with  thirty  plates.    By  Joseph  Leidy,  M.D.,  LL.D. 

The  First  Series  of  the  Journal,  1817  to  1842,  in  eight  volumes,  octavo,  may  be 
obtained  at  $40  to  members,  and  to  the  public,  $48. 

The  First  Series  of  the  Proceedings  of  the  Society,  published  in  octavo,  1841  to 
1856,  of  which  eight  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1856,  may  be  obtained  at  $24  to 
members;  and  to  the  public,  $30. 

The  Second  Series  of  the  Proceedings,  commencing  January  1,  1857  (of  which 
fourteen  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1870),  may  be  obtained  at  $42  to  members,  or  $3 
per  volume  separately;  and  to  the  public,  $3.75  per  volume. 

The  Third  Series  of  the  Proceedings,  Illustrated,  commencing  January  1,  1871, 
(of  which  fourteen  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31, 1884),  is  published  at  $5  per  annum,  payable 
in  advance,  to  subscribers;  single  volumes,  $6.25. 

$£&"  A  life  subscription  to  either  the  Proceedings  or  Journal  has  been  placed  at 
$40,  or  $75  for  both. 

American  Journal  of  Conchology,  1865-71.  Seven  vols.,  8vo.  Containing  2500 
pages,  illustrated  by  one  hundred  and  fifty  plates,  many  of  them  colored,  besides  about  a 
thousand  wood  engravings.  Published  at  $70.  Price  reduced  to  $42  for  the  set.  Separate 
volumes,  $10  each. 

BOOKS     FOR.    SATjE. 

The  Academy  has  the  following  works  for  sale  at  the  prices  affixed: 

Description  of  Shells  of  North  America,  with  68  colored  plates.     By  Thomas  Say. 

1830-34.     $10.50. 
Monograph  of  the  Terrestrial  Mollusca  of  the  United  States.     With  illustrations 

of  all  the  species.     By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Fine  edition,  plate  paper,  with  duplicate 

plates,  colored  and  tinted,  $20;   colored  edition,  $13.50;   plain  edition,  $8.50.      Only 

one  hundred  copies  printed,  which  have  been  mostly  sold. 
Monograph  of  the  Fresh  AVater  Univalve  Mollusca  of  the  United  States.    By  S.  S. 

Haldeman,  1840-44.     With  Continuation  to  1871.     By  George  W.  Tryon,  Jr.    2 

vols.,  with  many  colored   plates.      Fine   edition,  duplicate  plates,  $40;    with  colored 

plates,  $25  ;  with  plain  plates,  $18. 

Either  the  original  work  or  the  continuation  furnished  separately,  if  desired. 
Synonymy  of  the  Species  of  Strepomatid^b  (Melanians)  of  the  United  States.     By 

Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth,  $2  ;  paper,  $1.75. 
List  of  American  Writers  on  Recent  Conchology,  with  the  Titles  of  their  Memoirs 

and  Dates  of  Publication.     By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth,  $2  ;  paper,  $1.75. 
Monograph  of  the  Order  Pholadacea    and   other    Papers.      By  Geo.  W.  Trton,  Jr. 

Cloth,  $2  ;  paper,  $1.75. 
Complete  Writings  on  Recent  and  Fossil  C«nchology  of  C.  S.  Rafinesque.     Edited 

by  Wm.  G.  Binney  and  G.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     $2.50. 
Observations  on  the  Genus  Unio.     By  Isaac  Lea,  LL.  D.     4to,  Vols.  1  to  13.     With 

Index,  Nos.  1,  2  and  3,  complete.     Illustrated  with  several  hundred  fine  lithographio 

plates.     $60. 

Same,  Vols.  2  to  13  inclusive,  except  Vols.  4  and  12.     Each  volume  separately,  $5. 
Synopsis  of  Genus  Unio.     By  Isaac  Lea,  LL.  D.     Fourth  edition.     $5. 
Contributions  to  Geology.     By  Isaac  Lea.     $3. 
Fossil  Foot-Marks.     By  Isaac  Lea.     Large  folio,  text  and  plate.     $2. 

Same,  plate  alone.     50  cents. 

Notice  to  Booksellers. — All  the  publications  of  the  Society  will  be  sup- 
plied to  Booksellers  at  a  discount  of  20  per  cent,  on  the  prices  charged  to  the  public 

Application  to  be  made  to  Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.D.,  at  the  Hall  of  the 
Academy,  corner  of  Nineteenth  and  Race  Streets. 

February,   />S<:. 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE. 

\\  achbmuth,   Chas.,    and   Frank  Springer.     Revision  of   the  Palseo- 

crinoidea.     Part  III  (Plates  IV-IX),      ....  225 

Meehan,  Tnos.     Note  on  Quercus  prinoides, 365 

Mi. khan,  Thos.     On  the  Fruit  of  Opuntia, 365 

Meek,  Seth  E.,  and  Robert  Nkwland.     A  Review  of  the  Species  of  the 

Genus  Esox,      .         .         .  q«i? 

Meehan,  Thos.     Inflorescence  of  the  Composite, 376 

Allen,   Harrison,  M,  D.     On  the  Pectoral  Filaments  in  the  Sea  Robin 

(Primotus  palmipes),        .......  377 

Mi  khan,  Thos.     Notes  on  Cactaceae.     Elastic  Fruit  in  Mamillaria,  .        .  378 

Redpield,  John  H.     On  the  Flora  of  Martha's  Vineyard  and  Nantucket,  378 
Meehan,  Thos.     Biographical  Notice  of  Henry  N.  Johnson,      .        .        .381 
Meehan,  Thos.    Virulence  of  the  Common  Parsnip,           .        .         .         .383 

Allen,    Babbison,   M.  D.     The  Shape  of  the  Hind  Limbs  in  the  Mam- 
malia as  Modified  by  the  weight  of  the  Trunk, 383 

Morris,  Charles.     Attack  and  Defense  as  Agents  in  Animal  Evolution,  385 
Meek,  Seth  E.,  and  Robert   Newland.     A  Review  of  the  American 

Species  of  the  Genus  Scorpaena, 394 

Meehan,  Thos.     On  a  White-seeded  Variety  of  the  Honey  Locust,    .         .  404 
Rand,  Theo.  D.     Notes  on  the  Lafayette  Serpentine  Belt,         .        .        .407 

Leidy,  Jos.,  M.  D.     Worms  in  Ice, 408 

Eigenman,  Carl  II.,  and  Morton  AV.  Fordice.     A  Catalogue  of  the 

Fishes  of  Bean  Blossom  Creek,  Monroe  Co.,  Ind.,          ....  410 
Evebman,  Barton  W.,  and  Morton  W.  Fordice.    List  of  Fishes  collected 

in  Harvey  and  Cowley  Counties,  Kansas, 412 

Report  of  the  Recording  Secretary, 412 

Report  of  the  Corresponding  Secretary, 414 

Report  of  the  Librarian, 415 

Report  of  the  Curators, ,417 

Report  of  the  Curator  of  the  Wm.  S.  Vaux  Collections,       .         .         .        .419 

Report  of  the  Biological  and  Microscopical  Section, 421 

Report  of  the  Conchological  Section, 400 

Report  of  the  Entomological  Section, 404 

Report  of  the  Botanical  Section, 426 

Report  of  the  Mineralogical  and  Geological  Section, 428 

Report  of  the  Professor  of  Invertebrate  Paleontology,          ....  429 

Report  of  the  Professor  of  Invertebrate  Zoology, .(29 

Report  of  the  Professor  of  Ethnology  and  Archaeology,       ....  4o0 

Report  of  the  Treasurer, 431 

Officers,  Councillors  and  Members  of  Finance  Committee  for  1886,     .        .  434 

Elections  during  188f>, 4;!.-) 

Additions  to  Museum, 436 

Additions  to  Library, 441 

Index  to  Genera,     •••.........  473 

General  Index, ,  478 


STiNQ  HOUSE,  734  L  786  SAN90M  3T 


MBL  WHOI    LIBRARY 


UH    IflRJ    I